Crude Pump Installation Manual SULZER PDF

Document No: 48330 Lead 01
Revision: 0
Revision Date: 01 Oct 2007
Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual

Volume 1 of 3
Site Aramco - Khurais

Client Foster Wheeler & Hyundai
Engineering / Aramco
Item Crude Shipping Pump
Saudi Aramco PO No QDCI-M36-31-Q268-DA
Sulzer Ref. No 9901-48330
Pump Type CD 20x24x22G / 1 Stage
Tag Nos B36-G-0002A / B / C / D
Serial Nos TBA
Crude Oil Shipping Pumps
Equipment Hazardous Area Classification

Class 1 Group. IIA Division 2
Sulzer Pumps (UK) Ltd.

Manor Mill Lane
Leeds,
LS11 8BR
Tel: 0113 2701244
Facsimile: 0113 2724400 / 2724404
e-mail: pumpsales.leeds@sulzer.com
Manual No. 104.471.646
K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\48330 Lead 01-0.doc

Table of Contents Revision: 0
Table of Contents
Volume 1 of 3
1. Leading Particulars (48330 Lead 01-0)

1.1 List of Equipment Supplied
1.2 Sulzer Drawings and Documents
1.3 Pump Unit Data
1.4 Equipment Data Sheets
1.5 Performance Curves and Test data
2. Introduction and General Safety (IntroSafety 01-3)

2.1 Introduction
2.2 Environmental Considerations
2.3 Contact Information
2.4 General Safety
3. Pump Manual
3.1 Pump - Introduction (CD Intro 01-1)
3.2 Pump - Receiving (Receiving 01-0)
3.3 Pump - Installation (Installation 01-4)
3.4 Pump - Coupling Alignment (Alignment 01-3)
3.5 Pump - Commissioning and Operation (CommOp 01-3)
3.6 Pump - Maintenance (Maintenance 01-2)
3.7 Pump - Case / Rotating Element Assembly (CD Casing 11-1)
3.8 Pump - Drive Coupling (Drive Cplg 03-2)
3.9 Pump - Bearing Assemblies (Bearings 04-0)
3.10 Pump - Mechanical Seals (MSeal 01-3)
3.11 Pump - Lubrication (Lubric 03-1)
3.12 Pump - Torque Tightening of Fasteners (TorqVal 01-0)
3.13 Pump - Field Mounting the Driver (FieldMount 01-1)
3.14 Pump - Troubleshooting (CD Trouble 01-0)
3.15 Pump - Replacement Parts (RepParts 01-0)
3.16 Pump - Nitrogen Charged Storage Container - Charging and (Purge 02-0)
Purging Procedures
Manual No. 104.471.646 Contents Page 1


4. Mechanical Seal and Associated Equipment (MecSeal 01-0)

Burgmann - Operating Manual Mechanical Seal SHV8/165-E1
Burgmann - Mechanical Seal Drawing SHV8/165-E1
Burgmann - 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 Cyclone Separator - Operating Manual and Drawing
5. Drive Coupling (DriveCplg 01-0)

Bibby - Installation, Operating and Maintenance Instructions for Bibby Turboflex Couplings
Having Bolted Adaptors and Hubs
Bibby - 8HSU-30-305-56 Coupling Drawing 9109 Sht 1 (Motor to Gearbox)
Bibby - 8HS-22-230 (2LAH) Coupling Drawing 9110 Sht 1 (Gearbox to Pump)


Volume 2 of 3
6. Drive Motor (DriveMotor 01-0)

ABB - User's Manual - Motor AMC 900M4A BSNV
General ABB
Technical Specification
Drawings for the Motor
Circuit Diagrams
Machine Parts List
Installation and Maintenance Manual
Accessories and Instructions
Main Terminal Box


Volume 3 of 3
7. Instrumentation (Insts 01-0)

Minco - Explosionproof / Flameproof RTD Sensors - Product Information
Bently Nevada - 3300XL 8mm and 3300 5 mm Proximity Transducer System Manual
Bently Nevada - 31000, 32000 Proximity Probe Housings - Specifications and Ordering
Information
Bently Nevada - 330500 Velomitor Sensor 330525 Velomitor XA Sensor 330530
Radiation Resistant Velomitor Sensor Users Guide
Bently Nevada - 21128, CA21128, BA42608 Velocity Transducer Housings -
Specifications and Ordering Information
Rosemount (Emerson) - 3144P Temperature Transmitter - Quick Installation Guide
8. Lubricating Oil System
To Be Inserted When Available
9. Gearbox
BHS - High Speed Parallel Shaft Gear Unit Manual

I. Operating Instructions
II. Drawings and Alignment Diagram
IV. Spare Parts
BHS - Operating Instructions - Spare Parts Storage System
10. Hydraulic Assembly / Removal Equipment
Tentec - Safety Data Sheet - Castrol Hyspin AWS 32

Tentec - 2122 Hand Pump 2275 Bar - Operating Instructions, Parts list & Service Manual
Tentec - 2065 Hand Pump 1600 Bar - Operating Instructions, Parts List and Service
Manual
Tentec - Maintenance Guide
Tentec - Link Hose technical Specification


Section 1 Leading Particulars Revision: 0
1.1 List of Equipment Supplied

The following major items are supplied on Sulzer Order No. 9901-48330, Foster Wheeler &
Hyundai Engineering / Aramco Order No. QDCI-M36-31-Q268-DA:
4 Crude oil shipping pumpsets, each comprising:
1 x Sulzer CD 20x24x22G / 1 stage pump, complete with two Burgmann
SHV8/165-E1 cartridge mechanical seals with seal flushing to API Plans 31 / 61 /
65. Each seal has an associated Burgmann 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 cyclone
separator (API Plan 31).
1 x ABB AMC900M4A BSNV, 13000 hp (9694 kW), 1787 rev/min electric motor,
complete with:
Minco RTDs to monitor DE and NDE journal bearing temperature and u, v,
w windings temperatures (3 per phase).
Bently Nevada CA24701 series proximity probes and 330180 drivers to
monitor motor DE and NDE journal bearing x and y plane vibration, motor
keyphasor
1 x BHS FD48-3 speed increasing gearbox, complete with Rosemount / Minco
RTDs to monitor input and output shaft DE and NDE journal bearing temperatures
and input shaft i/b and o/b thrust bearing temperatures.
1 x Baric lube oil system supplying pressurised lube oil to the pump, gearbox and
drive motor.
1 x Bibby 8HSU-30-305-56 flexible spacer coupling (Motor to Gearbox).
1 x Bibby 8HS-22-230 (2LAH) flexible spacer coupling (Gearbox to Pump).
1 x Fabricated, multi-point mounting, heavy duty grouted base plate for pump,
gearbox and drive motor.
Pumpset Instrumentation:
Minco AS7014 series RTDs to monitor pump DE and NDE journal bearing
temperatures, pump i/b and o/b thrust bearing temperatures.
Rosemount 3144P series temperature transmitters to monitor pump DE and
NDE journal bearing temperatures, pump i/b and o/b thrust bearing
temperatures, motor DE and NDE journal bearing temperatures, gearbox input
and output shaft DE and NDE journal bearing temperatures and input shaft i/b
and o/b thrust bearing temperatures.
Bently Nevada 3300XL vibration probes in 32000 housings and 330180
drivers to monitor pump DE and NDE journal bearing x and y plane vibration,
pump axial position z plane, gearbox input and output shaft DE and NDE
journal bearing x and y plane vibration, gearbox output shaft keyphasor.
Bently Nevada 330500 series Velomitors in CA21128 velocity transducer
housings to monitor pump DE and NDE bearing housing vibration.
Special Tools and Equipment:
Coupling assembly / withdrawal equipment
Hydraulic assembly / removal equipment:
Manual No. 104.471.646 Section 1 Page 1


1 x 0-40,000 lbf/in2 hydraulic hand pump with integral gauge calibrated in

lbf/in2. Fitted with BSP female outlet suitable for SKF 227857 pressure
pipe.
1 x 0-25,000 lbf/in2 hydraulic hand pump with integral gauge calibrated in
lbf/in2. Fitted with QR female coupling.
1 x Hydraulic load cell, maximum load 64 tons at 20,000 lbf/in2 with 15 mm
stroke and 40 mm clear hole. Fitted with QR male coupling.
1 x High pressure flexible 2m hose with QR male and female couplings at
end.
1 x High pressure 2 m pipe G G SKF 227957.
1 x Air release plug G SKF 233950.
1 x Wooden tool box.
6 X Jacking blocks with 6 x hex head dog point M16 x 70 screws and 12 x hex
socket head M16 x x55 screws - bearing housing jacking.
Nitrogen purged pump rotor storage container


1.2 Sulzer Drawings and Documents
The Sulzer drawings and documents listed below are included next as inserts to the
manual.
Description Sulzer Document

Reference
General Arrangement 0-104.430.195
Equipment Arrangement 0-104.430.357
Longitudinal Section 1-104.421.869

P and I Diagram (3 Sheets) 1-104.430.193
Terminal Block Diagram (8 Sheets) 2-104.475.505
Instrument Schedule (12 Sheets) 4-104.475.504
Cause and Effect Diagram (4 Sheets) 4-104.476.099
Control System Description (9 Sheets) 4-104.476.133

Alignment Criteria and Tolerances Diagrams to be inserted when
available
Rotalign Pro Reports
Name / Duty Plate Drawing 3-204.231.624

Arrangement of Coupling Hub Assembly and 1-104.430.383
Withdrawal Drawing
Protection Packaging Procedure 40-930
Protection & Preservation Procedure 40-931 / 2
Operating Spare Parts List E13803

CD 20x24x22G Rotor Assembly Transportation / 5066-D-001
Preservation Unit General Arrangement
5066-PL-003
Bill of Materials
General Arrangement Lifting Frame - SWL 82.5 / 27t F1474-1

Contract on 13.11.2007 Contract on 13.11.2007



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Drawing No. E1-104.430.193

Contract on 15.11.2007
A A
SPEED INCREASING
GEARBOX
B36-GG-0002A TP3
1"
TP1
MAIN DRIVE MOTOR (COUPLING GUARD) 1" 1"
1"
B36-GM-0002A
(COUPLING)
B 13.2kV 3PH 60Hz B
3/4"
13,000HP 1787RPM
(COUPLING GUARD)
CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP

(COUPLING)
B36-G-0002A
1/2"
1/2"
2"
2"
1"
NOTES
1. ALL TAG NUMBERS ARE PRECEDED BY B36.
2. ALL TAG NUMBERS HAVE THE FIRST SUFFIX LETTER

CORRESPONDING TO THE RELEVANT PUMP SUFFIX PI PI
LETTER i.e. TIT-5600A CORRESPONDS TO PUMP G-0002A. 5501 5502
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
8"
2"
2"
3"
TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600B FOR PUMP G-0002B.
A A
TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600C FOR PUMP G-0002C. 0.165" DIA.
1"
1" 2"
1"
TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600D FOR PUMP G-0002D. FO
3. A SECOND SUFFIX LETTER IS USED TO UNIQUELY 1.457" DIA. 0.217" DIA. 5604 0.217" DIA.
IDENTIFY INSTRUMENTS OF THE SAME TYPE WITH TP4 A TP2
THE SAME SEQUENCE NUMBER i.e. TE-5600AA AND FO FO FO
3/4" 3/4"
TE-5600AB FOR PUMP G-0002A. 5600 5601 5602
TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600BA & TE-5600BB A A A
H : 158F H : 158F H : 158F H : 158F 0.394" DIA. H : 158F
1"
FOR PUMP G-0002B. H H H H H
TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600CA & TE-5600CB TI TI TI TI FO TI
C 3/4" 1" 1" 3/4" C
FOR PUMP G-0002C. 5600 5601 5602 5603 5603 5604
A A A A A A
TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600DA & TE-5600DB 3/4" 1" 1" 3/4"
FOR PUMP G-0002D.
4. TRANSMITTER KEY: FG FG FG FG RETURN TO FG
(LOCKED (LOCKED
H = 4-20mA/HART OPEN) PUMP SUCTION OPEN)
5600 5601 5602 5603 H H 5604
FF = FOUNDATION FIELDBUS
A A A A LIT ZC ZC LIT A
3/4"
3/4"
INSTRUMENT SYMBOL KEY 5600 5601
3/4"
FF FF FF FF A A FF
TE TIT TIT TE TIT TE TIT TE TE TIT
FIELD MOUNTED DISCRETE
1"
1"
1"
1"
5600 5600 5601 5601 5602 5602 5603 5603 5604 5604
INSTRUMENT (BY SULZER)
AA A A AA A AA A AA AA A
HH HH
TE TE TE TE 0.118" DIA. H H 0.118" DIA. TE
LI LI
RACK MOUNTED INSTRUMENT 5600 5601 5602 5603 5604
FO 5600 5601 FO
3/4"
3/4"
1"
2"
1"
3"
(OR BACK OF PANEL, BY OTHERS)
2"
1"
8"
2"
2"
1"
AB AB AB AB AB
5605 A A 5606
HH SET @ 9.2 in HH SET @ 9.2 in
A H SET @ 4.6 in H SET @ 4.6 in A
PRIMARY LOCATED SHARED
DISPLAY AND CONTROL (DCS) 2" 4" 4" 8" 8" 4" 4" 3" 3"
INSTRUMENT (BY OTHERS)
1"
1"
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SYSTEM
(ESD, BY OTHERS) 1" 2" 2" 3" 2" 2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2"
D D
VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM TP5A TP5B
(VMS, BY OTHERS)
LUBE OIL RETURN
TP8 PI-34481
ELECTRICAL SIGNAL LUBE OIL SYSTEM
CONNECTION TO PROCESS
LUBE OIL SUPPLY
SERIAL LINK TP7 PI-34481
SULZER LUBE OIL SYSTEM
LIMIT OF SUPPLY
OTHERS
TERMINATION POINT SCHEDULE

TP No. DESCRIPTION
TP 1 PUMP SUCTION
TP 2 PUMP DISCHARGE SEAL OIL & LUBE OIL SYSTEMS
TP 3 PUMP & SEAL SYSTEM VENT
TP 4 PUMP DRAIN
TP 5A PUMP DE SEAL LEAKAGE
TP 5B PUMP NDE SEAL LEAKAGE b C.Woolner 02.08.06 d C.Woolner 17.05.07 f C.Woolner 13.11.07
TP 6 BASEPLATE DRAIN (NOT SHOWN)
TP 7 LUBE OIL SUPPLY a C.Woolner 18.07.06 c C.Woolner 20.03.07 e C.Woolner 10.10.07
TP 8 LUBE OIL RETURN
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS SEP.PARTS LIST YES/NO DESIGN GROUP

E E
REPLACED BY SUBSTITUTE FOR ORIGINAL SCALE
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT : E0-104.430.195
: E4-104.475.504 13-06-06
INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE P & I DIAGRAM FOR DRAWN
TERMINAL BLOCK DIAGRAM : E2-104.475.505 CD 20x24x22G 1st C.Woolner
CAUSE & EFFECT DIAGRAM
LUBE SYSTEM P&I D. :
: E4-104.476.099
PI-34481
CRUDE OIL SHIPPING 13-06-06
CHECKED
ARAMCO - KHURAIS PUMPSETS B36-G-0002A/B/C/D C.Woolner
13-06-06
THIS DRAWING IS ENTRUSTED TO THE RECIPIENT c REFER TO REVISION NOTES. 9901-48330 APPROVED
PERSONALLY BUT THE COPYRIGHT REMAINS WITH f ALL 3 WINDING RTD's DETAILED AS CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO MCC (2 x USED, 1 x SPARE). T.Brennan
US. IT MUST NOT BE COPIED , REPRODUCED OR
IN ANY WAY COMMUNICATED OR MADE ACCESSIBLE PART - No.
b TAG NUMBERS CHANGED IN LINE WITH CLIENT COMMENTS, NOTES REVISED e REFER TO REVISION NOTES. CAD - DRAWING BAR - CODE
TO THIRD PARTIES WITHOUT OUR WRITTEN CONSENT .
SIMILAR DRG. . a REFER TO REVISION NOTES. Sheet 01

MACHINING REGULATIONS SEE DRAWING NORMS.
d REFER TO REVISION NOTES.
E of 03
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Drawing No. E1-104.430.193
B36-LCS-0505A
RUNNING STOPPED AVAILABLE LAMP TEST HAND/OFF/AUTO START STOP

NOTE: SET POINTS ARE
PROVISIONAL ONLY AND
TO BE CONFIRMED AFTER XL XL XL HS HS HS HS HH : 257F HH : 257F HH : 257F HH : 257F HH : 257F HH : 257F HH : 257F HH : 257F
H : 248F H : 248F H : 248F H : 248F H : 248F H : 248F H : 248F H : 248F
H : 230F TESTING. HH : 248F 5600 5601 5602 5601 5602 5603 5604 HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
H HH A A A H H H H H H H H
A A A A TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI
TAH TAHH
5608 5608 5609 5609 5610 5610 5611 5611
5606 5606
AA AB AA AB AA AB AA AB
A A CONTROL
STATION
A *MOUNTED A
OFF-SKID*
ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (MCC)
H H H H H H H H
TIT TIT TIT TIT TIT TIT TIT TIT
5608 5608 5609 5609 5610 5610 5611 5611
AA AB AA AB AA AB AA AB
(SPARE) (SPARE) (SPARE)
HS TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE HS TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE
5600 5606 5606 5606 5606 5606 5606 5606 5606 5606 5605 5608 5608 5608 5608 5609 5609 5609 5609 5610 5610 5610 5610 5611 5611 5611 5611
A AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ A AA AB AC AD AA AB AC AD AA AB AC AD AA AB AC AD
EMERGENCY EMERGENCY
STOP STOP
B36-ESB-0506A B36-ESB-0507A
CONTROL CONTROL
STATION STATION
*MOUNTED U V W *MOUNTED
OFF-SKID* OFF-SKID*
B MOTOR WINDINGS TP1 B
MAIN DRIVE MOTOR (COUPLING GUARD)

B36-GM-0002A
(COUPLING)
13.2kV 3PH 60Hz
13,000HP 1787RPM
NOTES
1. ALL TAG NUMBERS ARE PRECEDED BY B36. (COUPLING GUARD)
SPEED INCREASING
2. ALL TAG NUMBERS HAVE THE FIRST SUFFIX LETTER CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP
GEARBOX (COUPLING)
CORRESPONDING TO THE RELEVANT PUMP SUFFIX B36-G-0002A
LETTER i.e. TIT-5600A CORRESPONDS TO PUMP G-0002A. MOTOR HEATER MAIN TERMINAL BOX B36-GG-0002A
(120V 1PH 60Hz) HEATER (120V 1PH 60Hz)
TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600C FOR PUMP G-0002C.
TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600D FOR PUMP G-0002D.
3. A SECOND SUFFIX LETTER IS USED TO UNIQUELY
IDENTIFY INSTRUMENTS OF THE SAME TYPE WITH
THE SAME SEQUENCE NUMBER i.e. TE-5600AA AND
TE-5600AB FOR PUMP G-0002A.
TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600BA & TE-5600BB
FOR PUMP G-0002B.
C TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600CA & TE-5600CB C
TP2
FOR PUMP G-0002C.
TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE
TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600DA & TE-5600DB 5605 5605 5607 5607 5612 5612 5612 5612 5613 5613 5613 5613 5614 5614 5615 5615 5616 5616 5617 5617
FOR PUMP G-0002D. AA AB AA AB AA AB AC AD AA AB AC AD AA AB AA AB AA AB AA AB
4. TRANSMITTER KEY:
H = 4-20mA/HART
FF = FOUNDATION FIELDBUS
H H H H H H H H H H
INSTRUMENT SYMBOL KEY TIT TIT TIT TIT TIT TIT TIT TIT TIT TIT
5605 5607 5612 5612 5613 5613 5614 5615 5616 5617
A A AA AB AA AB A A A A
ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC ZC
RACK MOUNTED INSTRUMENT

DISPLAY AND CONTROL (DCS) HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH
H H H H H H H H H H
INSTRUMENT (BY OTHERS) TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI
5605 5607 5612 5612 5613 5613 5614 5615 5616 5617
HH : 257F
A A AA AB H : 248F AA AB A A A A
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SYSTEM HH : 212F HH : 212F HH : 257F HH : 257F HH : 257F HH : 212F HH : 212F HH : 248F HH : 248F
H : 194F H : 194F H : 248F H : 248F H : 248F H : 194F H : 194F H : 230F H : 230F
(ESD, BY OTHERS)
NOTE: SET POINTS ARE NOTE: SET POINTS ARE
PROVISIONAL ONLY AND PROVISIONAL ONLY AND
D TO BE CONFIRMED AFTER TO BE CONFIRMED AFTER D
VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM TESTING. TESTING.
(VMS, BY OTHERS)
ELECTRICAL SIGNAL
SERIAL LINK
SULZER
LIMIT OF SUPPLY
OTHERS

TP No. DESCRIPTION
TP 1 PUMP SUCTION
TP 2 PUMP DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE MONITORING
TP 4 PUMP DRAIN

E E
: E4-104.475.504 13-06-06
CAUSE & EFFECT DIAGRAM : E4-104.476.099 CRUDE OIL SHIPPING
LUBE SYSTEM P&I D. : PI-34481 13-06-06
CHECKED
13-06-06
THIS DRAWING IS ENTRUSTED TO THE RECIPIENT 9901-48330 APPROVED
PERSONALLY BUT THE COPYRIGHT REMAINS WITH c REFER TO REVISION NOTES. f ALL 3 WINDING RTD's DETAILED AS CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO MCC (2 x USED, 1 x SPARE). T.Brennan
SIMILAR DRG. . Sheet 02

a REFER TO REVISION NOTES. d REFER TO REVISION NOTES.
E of 03
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Drawing No. E1-104.430.193

A A
MOTOR HH : 12.2 mils HH : 6.45 mils HH : 6.45 mils HH : 17.71 mils HH : 4.92 mils HH : 4.92 mils HH : 15.7 mils
KEYPHASOR H : 8.4 mils HH : 12.2 mils H : 3.46 mils H : 3.46 mils H : 13.77 mils H : 3.94 mils H : 3.94 mils H : 11.8 mils
H : 8.4 mils
HH
VMS VMS H VMS HH H VMS HH
H VMS HH
H VMS HH
H VMS HH
H VMS HH
H VMS HH
H
KT VXT VYT VXT VYT VXT VYT VXT VYT VZT VZT VXT VYT VXT VYT VZT VZT
5600 5600 5600 5601 5601 5602 5602 5603 5603 5600 5601 5606 5606 5607 5607 5602 5603
A A A A A A A A A A A A
A A A A A
KE VXE VYE VXE VYE VXE VYE VXE VYE VZE VZE VXE VYE VXE VYE VZE VZE
5600 5600 5600 5601 5601 5602 5602 5603 5603 5600 5601 5606 5606 5607 5607 5602 5603
A A A A A A A A A A A A
A A A A A
B TP1 B
MAIN DRIVE MOTOR (COUPLING GUARD)

B36-GM-0002A
(COUPLING)
13.2kV 3PH 60Hz
13,000HP 1787RPM
NOTES
1. ALL TAG NUMBERS ARE PRECEDED BY B36. (COUPLING GUARD)
SPEED INCREASING
2. ALL TAG NUMBERS HAVE THE FIRST SUFFIX LETTER CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP
GEARBOX (COUPLING)
CORRESPONDING TO THE RELEVANT PUMP SUFFIX B36-G-0002A
LETTER i.e. TIT-5600A CORRESPONDS TO PUMP G-0002A. B36-GG-0002A
TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600C FOR PUMP G-0002C.
TIT-5600A BECOMES TIT-5600D FOR PUMP G-0002D.
3. A SECOND SUFFIX LETTER IS USED TO UNIQUELY
IDENTIFY INSTRUMENTS OF THE SAME TYPE WITH
THE SAME SEQUENCE NUMBER i.e. TE-5600AA AND
TE-5600AB FOR PUMP G-0002A.
TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600BA & TE-5600BB
FOR PUMP G-0002B.
C TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600CA & TE-5600CB C
TP2
FOR PUMP G-0002C.
KE VXE VYE VXE VYE VE VE VE
TE-5600AA & TE-5600AB BECOME TE-5600DA & TE-5600DB 5601 5604 5604 5605 5605 5600 5601 5602
FOR PUMP G-0002D. A A A A A A A A
4. TRANSMITTER KEY:
H = 4-20mA/HART VT VT VT
FF = FOUNDATION FIELDBUS 5600 5601 5602
A A A
INSTRUMENT SYMBOL KEY KT VXT VYT VXT VYT
5601 5604 5604 5605 5605
A A A A A
HH HH HH HH HH
H H H H H
VMS VMS VMS VMS VMS VMS
RACK MOUNTED INSTRUMENT
GEARBOX HH : 5.66 mils HH : 5.66 mils HH : 21 g HH : 0.43 in/s HH : 0.43 in/s
KEYPHASOR H : 3.03 mils H : 3.03 mils H : 13 g H : 0.28 in/s H : 0.28 in/s
(g PEAK) (in/s RMS) (in/s RMS)

DISPLAY AND CONTROL (DCS)
INSTRUMENT (BY OTHERS)
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SYSTEM

(ESD, BY OTHERS)
D D
VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM
(VMS, BY OTHERS)
ELECTRICAL SIGNAL
SERIAL LINK
SULZER
LIMIT OF SUPPLY
OTHERS

TP No. DESCRIPTION
TP 1 PUMP SUCTION
TP 2 PUMP DISCHARGE VIBRATION MONITORING
TP 4 PUMP DRAIN

E E
: E4-104.475.504 13-06-06
CAUSE & EFFECT DIAGRAM : E4-104.476.099 CRUDE OIL SHIPPING
LUBE SYSTEM P&I D. : PI-34481 13-06-06
CHECKED
13-06-06
THIS DRAWING IS ENTRUSTED TO THE RECIPIENT 9901-48330 APPROVED
PERSONALLY BUT THE COPYRIGHT REMAINS WITH c REFER TO REVISION NOTES. f ALL 3 WINDING RTD's DETAILED AS CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO MCC (2 x USED, 1 x SPARE). T.Brennan
SIMILAR DRG. . Sheet 03

a REFER TO REVISION NOTES. d REFER TO REVISION NOTES.
E of 03
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8








Aramco - Khurais
Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D Page : 1 of 12
Instrument Schedule Date : 13/11/2007
SO : 9901-48330 Rev : 'd'
Sulzer Doc No. : E4-104.475.504-Rev "d"
Note: All tag numbers are for Pumpste B36-G-0002A only,
Inst. Tag No.s
refer to P&ID E1-104.430.193 for tagging philosophy. Instrument Details
Service Description Device Location P&ID Signal IS/NIS I/O Process Process Conditions Instrument Calibration
Crude Oil Shipping
No. Type Type Media Normal Max/Min Design Range Units Set-Pnt.1 Set-Pnt.2
Pump B36-G-0002A
CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP INSTRUMENTATION
a B36 TE 5614AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <194F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5614AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <194F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5614A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <194F - - 0 to 400 F H : 194 HH : 212
a B36 TE 5615AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <194F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5615AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <194F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5615A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <194F - - 0 to 400 F H : 194 HH : 212
a B36 TE 5616AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <230F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5616AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <230F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5616A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <230F - - 0 to 400 F H : 230 HH : 248
a B36 TE 5617AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <230F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5617AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <230F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5617A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <230F - - 0 to 400 F H : 230 HH : 248
a B36 VXE 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <3.94mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VXT 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 10 mil H : 3.94 HH : 4.92
a B36 VYE 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <3.94mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VYT 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 10 mil H : 3.94 HH : 4.92
b B36 VE/VT 5601A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Housing Vibration Velomitor Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 mV/in/s NIS - Housing Vibration <0.28in/s - - 0 to 1 in/s H : 0.28 HH : 0.43
a B36 VXE 5607A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <3.94mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VXT 5607A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 10 mil H : 3.94 HH : 4.92
a B36 VYE 5607A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <3.94mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VYT 5607A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 10 mil H : 3.94 HH : 4.92
b B36 VE/VT 5602A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearing Housing Vibration Velomitor Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 mV/in/s NIS - Housing Vibration <0.28in/s - - 0 to 1 in/s H : 0.28 HH : 0.43
a B36 VZE 5602A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Position < 11.8mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VZT 5602A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 25 mil H : 11.8 HH : 15.7
a B36 VZE 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Pump Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Position < 11.8mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VZT 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 25 mil H : 11.8 HH : 15.7
GEARBOX INSTRUMENTATION
a B36 TE 5608AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5608AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5608AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <248F - - 0 to 400 F H : 248 HH : 257
a B36 TE 5608AC Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5608AD Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5608AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <248F - - 0 to 400 F H : 248 HH : 257
a B36 TE 5609AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5609AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -

Aramco - Khurais
SO : 9901-48330 Rev : 'd'
Note: All tag numbers are for Pumpste B36-G-0002A only, Vibration
Inst. Tag No.s ESD System DCS MV MCC
refer to P&ID E1-104.430.193 for tagging philosophy. Monitoring System
Service Description Device Indicate Alarm Shutdown Indicate Alarm Shutdown Indicate Alarm Indicate Alarm Shutdown Remarks
Crude Oil Shipping
No.
Pump B36-G-0002A
a B36 TE 5614AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5614AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5614A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TE 5615AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5615AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5615A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TE 5616AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5616AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5616A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TE 5617AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5617AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5617A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 VXE 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VXT 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
a B36 VYE 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VYT 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
b B36 VE/VT 5601A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Housing Vibration Velomitor VI VAH VAHH
a B36 VXE 5607A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VXT 5607A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
a B36 VYE 5607A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VYT 5607A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
b B36 VE/VT 5602A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearing Housing Vibration Velomitor VI VAH VAHH
a B36 VZE 5602A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VZT 5602A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
a B36 VZE 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VZT 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
Part of Duplex RTD

a B36 TE 5608AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD
Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5608AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD
TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TIT 5608AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter
Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5608AC Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD
Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5608AD Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD
TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TIT 5608AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter
Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5609AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD
Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5609AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD

Aramco - Khurais
SO : 9901-48330 Rev : 'd'
Inst. Tag No.s Instrument Manufacturer, Model & Specification
refer to P&ID E1-104.430.193 for tagging philosophy.
Service Description Device Manufacturer Model Number Sulzer Part/ Material Rating Haz. Area
Crude Oil Shipping
No. Article No. Wet'd Part Housing Certification
Pump B36-G-0002A
a B36 TE 5614AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco AS7014 Series 104.430.193.013 316SS Aluminium IP65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
a B36 TE 5614AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5614A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 TE 5615AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco AS7014 Series 104.430.193.013 316SS Aluminium IP65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
a B36 TE 5615AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5615A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 TE 5616AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco AS7014 Series 104.430.193.014 316SS Aluminium IP65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
a B36 TE 5616AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5616A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 TE 5617AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco AS7014 Series 104.430.193.014 316SS Aluminium IP65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
a B36 TE 5617AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5617A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VXE 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-08-110-00-02 104.430.193.020 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VXT 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.023 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VYE 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-08-110-00-02 104.430.193.020 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VYT 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.023 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
b B36 VE/VT 5601A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Housing Vibration Velomitor Bently Nevada CA21128-01-00-03-02 104.430.193.024 304SS 304SS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VXE 5607A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-08-110-00-02 104.430.193.020 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VXT 5607A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.023 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VYE 5607A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-08-110-00-02 104.430.193.020 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VYT 5607A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.023 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
b B36 VE/VT 5602A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearing Housing Vibration Velomitor Bently Nevada CA21128-01-00-03-02 104.430.193.024 304SS 304SS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VZE 5602A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-09-028-00-02 104.430.193.021 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VZT 5602A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.023 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VZE 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-09-028-00-02 104.430.193.021 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VZT 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.023 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
W-EYK / HSG 31536843
Rosemount / Minco By Gearbox Vendor 316SS Aluminium IP 65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
a B36 TE 5608AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD CH105 P2 T6
Rosemount / Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TE 5608AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD
Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 TIT 5608AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter
W-EYK / HSG 31536843
a B36 TE 5608AC Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD CH105 P2 T6
a B36 TE 5608AD Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD
Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 TIT 5608AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter
W-EYK / HSG 31536843
a B36 TE 5609AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD CH105 P2 T6
a B36 TE 5609AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD

Aramco - Khurais
SO : 9901-48330 Rev : 'd'
Inst. Tag No.s Instrument Details
Crude Oil Shipping Service Description Device Location P&ID Signal IS/NIS I/O Process Process Conditions Instrument Calibration
No. Pump B36-G-0002A Type Type Media Normal Max/Min Design Range Units Set-Pnt.1 Set-Pnt.2
a B36 TIT 5609AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <248F - - 0 to 400 F H : 248 HH : 257
a B36 TE 5609AC Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5609AD Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5609AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <248F - - 0 to 400 F H : 248 HH : 257
a B36 TE 5610AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5610AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5610AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <248F - - 0 to 400 F H : 248 HH : 257
a B36 TE 5610AC Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5610AD Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5610AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <248F - - 0 to 400 F H : 248 HH : 257
a B36 TE 5611AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5611AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5611AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <248F - - 0 to 400 F H : 248 HH : 257
a B36 TE 5611AC Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5611AD Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5611AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <248F - - 0 to 400 F H : 248 HH : 257
a B36 TE 5612AA Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5612AB Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5612AA Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <248F - - 0 to 400 F H : 248 HH : 257
a B36 TE 5612AC Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5612AD Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5612AB Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <248F - - 0 to 400 F H : 248 HH : 257
a B36 TE 5613AA Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5613AB Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5613AA Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <248F - - 0 to 400 F H : 248 HH : 257
a B36 TE 5613AC Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5613AD Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <248F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5613AB Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <248F - - 0 to 400 F H : 248 HH : 257
a B36 VXE 5602A Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <3.46mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VXT 5602A Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 10 mil H : 3.46 HH : 6.45
a B36 VYE 5602A Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <3.46mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VYT 5602A Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 10 mil H : 3.46 HH : 6.45
a B36 VXE 5603A Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <3.46mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VXT 5603A Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 10 mil H : 3.46 HH : 6.45
a B36 VYE 5603A Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <3.46mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VYT 5603A Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 10 mil H : 3.46 HH : 6.45

Aramco - Khurais
SO : 9901-48330 Rev : 'd'
Crude Oil Shipping Service Description Device Indicate Alarm Shutdown Indicate Alarm Shutdown Indicate Alarm Indicate Alarm Shutdown Remarks
No. Pump B36-G-0002A
a B36 TIT 5609AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TE 5609AC Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5609AD Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5609AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TE 5610AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5610AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5610AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TE 5610AC Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5610AD Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5610AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TE 5611AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5611AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5611AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TE 5611AC Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5611AD Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5611AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TE 5612AA Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5612AB Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5612AA Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TE 5612AC Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5612AD Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5612AB Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TE 5613AA Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5613AB Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5613AA Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 TE 5613AC Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5613AD Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5613AB Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
a B36 VXE 5602A Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VXT 5602A Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
a B36 VYE 5602A Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VYT 5602A Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
a B36 VXE 5603A Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VXT 5603A Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
a B36 VYE 5603A Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VYT 5603A Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal

Aramco - Khurais
SO : 9901-48330 Rev : 'd'
Crude Oil Shipping Service Description Device Manufacturer Model Number Sulzer Part/ Material Rating Haz. Area
No. Pump B36-G-0002A Article No. Wet'd Part Housing Certification
a B36 TIT 5609AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
W-EYK / HSG 31536843
a B36 TE 5609AC Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco By Gearbox Vendor 316SS Aluminium IP 65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
CH105 P2 T6
a B36 TE 5609AD Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5609AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
W-EYK(RZ) / HSG 31536780
a B36 TE 5610AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco By Gearbox Vendor 316SS Aluminium IP 65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
CH105 P2 T6
a B36 TE 5610AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5610AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
W-EYK(RZ) / HSG 31536780
a B36 TE 5610AC Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco By Gearbox Vendor 316SS Aluminium IP 65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
CH105 P2 T6
a B36 TE 5610AD Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5610AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'Inboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
W-EYK(RZ) / HSG 31536780
a B36 TE 5611AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco By Gearbox Vendor 316SS Aluminium IP 65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
CH105 P2 T6
a B36 TE 5611AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5611AA Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
W-EYK(RZ) / HSG 31536780
a B36 TE 5611AC Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco By Gearbox Vendor 316SS Aluminium IP 65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
CH105 P2 T6
a B36 TE 5611AD Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5611AB Gearbox Input Shaft 'Outboard' Thrust Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
W-EYK / HSG 31536508
a B36 TE 5612AA Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco By Gearbox Vendor 316SS Aluminium IP 65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
CH105 P2 T6
a B36 TE 5612AB Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5612AA Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
W-EYK / HSG 31536508
a B36 TE 5612AC Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco By Gearbox Vendor 316SS Aluminium IP 65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
CH105 P2 T6
a B36 TE 5612AD Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5612AB Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
W-EYK / HSG 31536508
a B36 TE 5613AA Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco By Gearbox Vendor 316SS Aluminium IP 65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
CH105 P2 T6
a B36 TE 5613AB Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5613AA Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
W-EYK / HSG 31536508
a B36 TE 5613AC Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco By Gearbox Vendor 316SS Aluminium IP 65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
CH105 P2 T6
a B36 TE 5613AD Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Rosemount / Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5613AB Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VXE 5602A Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-05-225-00-02 104.430.193.001 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VXT 5602A Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.008 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VYE 5602A Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-17-190-00-02 104.430.193.002 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VYT 5602A Gearbox Input Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.008 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VXE 5603A Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-05-225-00-02 104.430.193.001 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VXT 5603A Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.008 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VYE 5603A Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-17-190-00-02 104.430.193.002 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VYT 5603A Gearbox Input Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.008 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D

Aramco - Khurais
SO : 9901-48330 Rev : 'd'
c B36 VZE 5600A Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Position < 13.77mil - - - mil - -
c B36 VZT 5600A Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 25 mil H : 13.77 HH : 17.71
c B36 VZE 5601A Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Position < 13.77mil - - - mil - -
c B36 VZT 5601A Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 25 mil H : 13.77 HH : 17.71
a B36 KE 5801A Gearbox Output Shaft Keyphasor Proximity Probe Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Indentation - - - - rpm - -
a B36 KT 5801A Gearbox Output Shaft Keyphasor Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 4000 rpm - -
a B36 VXE 5604A Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <3.03mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VXT 5604A Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 10 mil H : 3.03 HH : 5.66
a B36 VYE 5604A Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <3.03mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VYT 5604A Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 10 mil H : 3.03 HH : 5.66
a B36 VXE 5605A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <3.03mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VXT 5605A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 10 mil H : 3.03 HH : 5.66
a B36 VYE 5605A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <3.03mil - - - mil - -
a B36 VYT 5605A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Skid Edge Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 10 mil H : 3.03 HH : 5.66
b B36 VE/VT 5600A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Bearing Housing Vibration Accelerometer Gearbox Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 mV/g NIS - Housing Vibration <13g - - 0 to 45 g H : 13 HH : 21
MAIN DRIVE MOTOR INSTRUMENTATION
b B36 TE 5605AA Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Motor Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <194F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5605AB Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Motor Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <194F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5605A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <194F - - 0 to 400 F H : 194 HH : 212
b B36 TE 5606AA Motor 'U' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Motor Stator 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Winding <230F - - 0 to 400 F H : 230 HH : 248
d B36 TE 5606AB Motor 'U' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Motor Stator 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Winding <230F - - 0 to 400 F H : 230 HH : 248
b B36 TE 5606AC Motor 'U' Winding Temperature (Spare) Temperature Probe - RTD Motor Stator 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Winding - - - 0 to 400 F - -
b B36 TE 5606AD Motor 'V' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Motor Stator 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Winding <230F - - 0 to 400 F H : 230 HH : 248
d B36 TE 5606AE Motor 'V' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Motor Stator 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Winding <230F - - 0 to 400 F H : 230 HH : 248
b B36 TE 5606AF Motor 'V' Winding Temperature (Spare) Temperature Probe - RTD Motor Stator 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Winding - - - 0 to 400 F - -
b B36 TE 5606AG Motor 'W' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Motor Stator 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Winding <230F - - 0 to 400 F H : 230 HH : 248
d B36 TE 5606AH Motor 'W' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Motor Stator 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Winding <230F - - 0 to 400 F H : 230 HH : 248
b B36 TE 5606AJ Motor 'W' Winding Temperature (Spare) Temperature Probe - RTD Motor Stator 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Winding - - - 0 to 400 F - -
b B36 TE 5607AA Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Motor Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <194F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5607AB Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Motor Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 2 PT100 NIS RTD Bearing Metal <194F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5607A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 2 4-20mA NIS AI - <194F - - 0 to 400 F H : 194 HH : 212
b B36 KE 5600A Motor Keyphasor Proximity Probe Motor Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Indentation - - - - rpm - -
b B36 KT 5600A Motor Keyphasor Proximity Probe Driver Motor Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 2000 rpm - -
b B36 VXE 5600A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Motor Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <8.4 mil - - - mil - -
b B36 VXT 5600A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Motor Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 15 mil H : 8.4 HH : 12.2
b B36 VYE 5600A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Motor Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <8.4 mil - - - mil - -
b B36 VYT 5600A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Motor Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 15 mil H : 8.4 HH : 12.2
b B36 VXE 5601A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Motor Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <8.4 mil - - - mil - -
b B36 VXT 5601A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Motor Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 15 mil H : 8.4 HH : 12.2

Aramco - Khurais
SO : 9901-48330 Rev : 'd'
c B36 VZE 5600A Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe
c B36 VZT 5600A Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
c B36 VZE 5601A Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe
c B36 VZT 5601A Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
a B36 KE 5801A Gearbox Output Shaft Keyphasor Proximity Probe
a B36 KT 5801A Gearbox Output Shaft Keyphasor Proximity Probe Driver KI DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
a B36 VXE 5604A Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VXT 5604A Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
a B36 VYE 5604A Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VYT 5604A Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
a B36 VXE 5605A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VXT 5605A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
a B36 VYE 5605A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe
a B36 VYT 5605A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
b B36 VE/VT 5600A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Bearing Housing Vibration Accelerometer VI VAH VAHH
b B36 TE 5605AA Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5605AB Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5605A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
b B36 TE 5606AA Motor 'U' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD TI TAH TAHH Simplex RTD
d B36 TE 5606AB Motor 'U' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD TI TAH TAHH Simplex RTD
b B36 TE 5606AC Motor 'U' Winding Temperature (Spare) Temperature Probe - RTD Simplex RTD
b B36 TE 5606AD Motor 'V' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD TI TAH TAHH Simplex RTD
d B36 TE 5606AE Motor 'V' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD TI TAH TAHH Simplex RTD
b B36 TE 5606AF Motor 'V' Winding Temperature (Spare) Temperature Probe - RTD Simplex RTD
b B36 TE 5606AG Motor 'W' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD TI TAH TAHH Simplex RTD
d B36 TE 5606AH Motor 'W' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD TI TAH TAHH Simplex RTD
b B36 TE 5606AJ Motor 'W' Winding Temperature (Spare) Temperature Probe - RTD Simplex RTD
b B36 TE 5607AA Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5607AB Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5607A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH TAHH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, 4-20mA/HART
b B36 KE 5600A Motor Keyphasor Proximity Probe

b B36 KT 5600A Motor Keyphasor Proximity Probe Driver KI DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
b B36 VXE 5600A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe
b B36 VXT 5600A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
b B36 VYE 5600A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe
b B36 VYT 5600A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
b B36 VXE 5601A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe
b B36 VXT 5601A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal

Aramco - Khurais
SO : 9901-48330 Rev : 'd'
c B36 VZE 5600A Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-19-085-00-02 104.430.193.005 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
c B36 VZT 5600A Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.008 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
c B36 VZE 5601A Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-00-085-00-02 104.430.193.006 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
c B36 VZT 5601A Gearbox Input Shaft Axial Position (z-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.008 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 KE 5801A Gearbox Output Shaft Keyphasor Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-00-210-00-02 104.430.193.003 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 KT 5801A Gearbox Output Shaft Keyphasor Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.008 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VXE 5604A Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-00-210-00-02 104.430.193.003 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VXT 5604A Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.008 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VYE 5604A Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-05-175-00-02 104.430.193.004 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VYT 5604A Gearbox Output Shaft 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.008 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VXE 5605A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-00-210-00-02 104.430.193.003 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VXT 5605A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.008 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VYE 5605A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada 32000-28-05-05-175-00-02 104.430.193.004 304SS GRP/PPS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 VYT 5605A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-91-05 104.430.193.008 n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
b B36 VE/VT 5600A Gearbox Output Shaft 'DE' Bearing Housing Vibration Accelerometer Bently Nevada 330400-01-05 104.430.193.009 304SS 304SS IP65 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
b B36 TE 5605AA Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco S100011-PD-143-Z-3 By Motor Vendor 316SS Aluminium NEMA 4X Class 1 Div. 2 Grps B,C,D
a B36 TE 5605AB Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5605A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
b B36 TE 5606AA Motor 'U' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 By Motor Vendor 316SS n/a n/a Part of Motor
d B36 TE 5606AB Motor 'U' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 By Motor Vendor 316SS n/a n/a Part of Motor
b B36 TE 5606AC Motor 'U' Winding Temperature (Spare) Temperature Probe - RTD Minco S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 By Motor Vendor 316SS n/a n/a Part of Motor
b B36 TE 5606AD Motor 'V' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 By Motor Vendor 316SS n/a n/a Part of Motor
d B36 TE 5606AE Motor 'V' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 By Motor Vendor 316SS n/a n/a Part of Motor
b B36 TE 5606AF Motor 'V' Winding Temperature (Spare) Temperature Probe - RTD Minco S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 By Motor Vendor 316SS n/a n/a Part of Motor
b B36 TE 5606AG Motor 'W' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 By Motor Vendor 316SS n/a n/a Part of Motor
d B36 TE 5606AH Motor 'W' Winding Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 By Motor Vendor 316SS n/a n/a Part of Motor
b B36 TE 5606AJ Motor 'W' Winding Temperature (Spare) Temperature Probe - RTD Minco S11016 PD 120 T 500 Z 256 By Motor Vendor 316SS n/a n/a Part of Motor
b B36 TE 5607AA Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco S100011-PD-143-Z-3 By Motor Vendor 316SS Aluminium NEMA 4X Class 1 Div. 2 Grps B,C,D
a B36 TE 5607AB Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5607A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS 104.430.193.018 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
b B36 KE 5600A Motor Keyphasor Proximity Probe Bently Nevada CA24701-28-05-00-030-04-02 By Motor Vendor 304SS 303SS NEMA 4 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps C,D
b B36 KT 5600A Motor Keyphasor Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-51-05 By Motor Vendor n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
b B36 VXE 5600A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada CA24701-28-05-00-030-04-02 By Motor Vendor 304SS 303SS NEMA 4 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps C,D
b B36 VXT 5600A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-51-05 By Motor Vendor n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
b B36 VYE 5600A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada CA24701-28-05-00-030-04-02 By Motor Vendor 304SS 303SS NEMA 4 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps C,D
b B36 VYT 5600A Motor 'NDE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-51-05 By Motor Vendor n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
b B36 VXE 5601A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada CA24701-28-05-00-030-04-02 By Motor Vendor 304SS 303SS NEMA 4 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps C,D
b B36 VXT 5601A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (x-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-51-05 By Motor Vendor n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D

Aramco - Khurais
SO : 9901-48330 Rev : 'd'
b B36 VYE 5601A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Motor Bearing 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - Shaft Vibration <8.4 mil - - - mil - -
b B36 VYT 5601A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Motor Junction Box 104.430.193 Sht 3 Special NIS - - - - - 0 to 15 mil H : 8.4 HH : 12.2
LUBE OIL SYSTEM INSTRUMENTATION
a B36 FG 5600A Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 - Lube Oil
a B36 FG 5601A Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 - Lube Oil
a B36 FG 5602A Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 - Lube Oil
a B36 FG 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 - Lube Oil
a B36 FG 5604A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 - Lube Oil
a B36 FO 5600A Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 - Lube Oil
a B36 FO 5601A Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Lube Oil Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 - Lube Oil
a B36 FO 5602A Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Lube Oil Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 - Lube Oil
a B36 FO 5602A Pump 'NDE' Thrust Bearings Lube Oil Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 - Lube Oil
a B36 TE 5600AA Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 PT100 NIS RTD Lube Oil <158F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5600AB Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 PT100 NIS RTD Lube Oil <158F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5600A Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 1 - NIS FF - <158F - - 0 to 400 F H : 158 -
a B36 TE 5601AA Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 PT100 NIS RTD Lube Oil <158F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5601AB Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 PT100 NIS RTD Lube Oil <158F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5601A Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 1 - NIS FF - <158F - - 0 to 400 F H : 158 -
a B36 TE 5602AA Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 PT100 NIS RTD Lube Oil <158F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5602AB Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 PT100 NIS RTD Lube Oil <158F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5602A Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 1 - NIS FF - <158F - - 0 to 400 F H : 158 -
a B36 TE 5603AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 PT100 NIS RTD Lube Oil <158F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5603AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 PT100 NIS RTD Lube Oil <158F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 1 - NIS FF - <158F - - 0 to 400 F H : 158 -
a B36 TE 5604AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 PT100 NIS RTD Lube Oil <158F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TE 5604AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Lube Oil Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 PT100 NIS RTD Lube Oil <158F - - 0 to 400 F - -
a B36 TIT 5604A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter Instrument Rack 104.430.193 Sht 1 - NIS FF - <158F - - 0 to 400 F H : 158 -
SEAL SYSTEM INSTRUMENTATION
a B36 FO 5604A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Seal Fluid Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice Seal Fluid Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 - Seal Fluid
a B36 FO 5605A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Seal Leakage Flow/Restriction Orifice Seal Fluid Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 - Seal Fluid
a B36 FO 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Seal Leakage Flow/Restriction Orifice Seal Fluid Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 - Seal Fluid
a B36 LIT 5600A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Seal Leakage Detection Level Transmitter Seal Fluid Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 4-20mA NIS AI Seal Fluid <4.6 in - - 0 to 11.5 inch H : 4.6 HH : 9.2
a B36 LIT 5601A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Seal Leakage Detection Level Transmitter Seal Fluid Pipework 104.430.193 Sht 1 4-20mA NIS AI Seal Fluid <4.6 in - - 0 to 11.5 inch H : 4.6 HH : 9.2

Aramco - Khurais
SO : 9901-48330 Rev : 'd'
b B36 VYE 5601A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe
b B36 VYT 5601A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver VI VAH VAHH DC voltage with superimposed AC signal
a B36 FG 5600A Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass
a B36 FG 5601A Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass
a B36 FG 5602A Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass
a B36 FG 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass
a B36 FG 5604A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass
a B36 FO 5600A Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice
a B36 FO 5601A Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Lube Oil Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice
a B36 FO 5602A Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Lube Oil Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice
a B36 FO 5602A Pump 'NDE' Thrust Bearings Lube Oil Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice
a B36 TE 5600AA Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5600AB Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5600A Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, Foundation Fieldbus
a B36 TE 5601AA Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5601AB Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5601A Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, Foundation Fieldbus
a B36 TE 5602AA Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5602AB Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5602A Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, Foundation Fieldbus
a B36 TE 5603AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5603AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, Foundation Fieldbus
a B36 TE 5604AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TE 5604AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Part of Duplex RTD
a B36 TIT 5604A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter TI TAH Dual I/P Tx with 'Hot' back-up, Foundation Fieldbus
a B36 FO 5604A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Seal Fluid Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice
a B36 FO 5605A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Seal Leakage Flow/Restriction Orifice
a B36 FO 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Seal Leakage Flow/Restriction Orifice
LI LAH LAHH 4-20mA/HART

a B36 LIT 5600A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Seal Leakage Detection Level Transmitter
LI LAH LAHH 4-20mA/HART

a B36 LIT 5601A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Seal Leakage Detection Level Transmitter

Aramco - Khurais
SO : 9901-48330 Rev : 'd'
b B36 VYE 5601A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Bently Nevada CA24701-28-05-00-030-04-02 By Motor Vendor 304SS 303SS NEMA 4 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps C,D
b B36 VYT 5601A Motor 'DE' Journal Bearing Vibration (y-plane) Proximity Probe Driver Bently Nevada 330180-51-05 By Motor Vendor n/a n/a n/a Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 FG 5600A Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass Sulzer Pumps (UK)
a B36 FG 5601A Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass Sulzer Pumps (UK)
a B36 FG 5602A Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass Sulzer Pumps (UK)
a B36 FG 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass Sulzer Pumps (UK)
a B36 FG 5604A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Flow/Sight Glass Sulzer Pumps (UK)
a B36 FO 5600A Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice
a B36 FO 5601A Pump 'DE' Journal Bearing Lube Oil Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice
a B36 FO 5602A Pump 'NDE' Journal Bearing Lube Oil Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice
a B36 FO 5602A Pump 'NDE' Thrust Bearings Lube Oil Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice
a B36 TE 5600AA Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco AS7014 Series 104.430.193.015 316SS Aluminium IP65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
a B36 TE 5600AB Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5600A Motor 'NDE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-F-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1 104.430.193.019 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 TE 5601AA Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco AS7014 Series 104.430.193.015 316SS Aluminium IP65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
a B36 TE 5601AB Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5601A Motor 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-F-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1 104.430.193.019 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 TE 5602AA Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco AS7014 Series 104.430.193.017 316SS Aluminium IP65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
a B36 TE 5602AB Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5602A Gearbox Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-F-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1 104.430.193.019 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 TE 5603AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco AS7014 Series 104.430.193.015 316SS Aluminium IP65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
a B36 TE 5603AB Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5603A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Bearing Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-F-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1 104.430.193.019 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 TE 5604AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco AS7014 Series 104.430.193.016 316SS Aluminium IP65 Class 1 Grps B,C,D
a B36 TE 5604AA Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Probe - RTD Minco Part of Above n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
a B36 TIT 5604A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Bearings Lube Oil Return Temperature Temperature Transmitter Rosemount 3144P-D1-F-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1 104.430.193.019 n/a Aluminium IP66 Class 1 Div. 2 Grps A,B,C,D
a B36 FO 5604A Crude Oil Shipping Pump Seal Fluid Supply Flow/Restriction Orifice
a B36 FO 5605A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Seal Leakage Flow/Restriction Orifice
a B36 FO 5606A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Seal Leakage Flow/Restriction Orifice
X705-510A-A11, X7MD-A45N-060,
Magnetrol 104.430.193.012 316SS Aluminium IP65 Class 1 Div. 1 Grps B,C,D
a B36 LIT 5600A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'DE' Seal Leakage Detection Level Transmitter XF2A-DC2K-030
X705-510A-A11, X7MD-A45N-060,
Magnetrol 104.430.193.012 316SS Aluminium IP65 Class 1 Div. 1 Grps B,C,D
a B36 LIT 5601A Crude Oil Shipping Pump 'NDE' Seal Leakage Detection Level Transmitter XF2A-DC2K-031

COLUMN 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SULZER PUMPS (UK) Ltd.
SULZER S.O. 9901-48330
CAUSE & EFFECT DIAGRAM -

SULZER DOC No : E4-104.476.099
TRIP COS PUMPSET (MCC)

TRIP COS PUMPSET (ESD)
OPERATOR ALARM (DCS)
CRUDE OIL SHIPPING (COS) PUMPSETS
B36-G-0002A/B/C/D
13.11.07 Rev."a"
SERVICE
B36-G-0002A
B36-G-0002A
TAG No.
TAG No. -
ROW
PRIMARY
DEVICE SERVICE
1
2 TEMPERATURE DEVICES
3
4 B36-TE-5600AA Motor NDE lube oil return temperature H
5 B36-TE-5600AB Motor NDE lube oil return temperature H
6 B36-TE-5601AA Motor DE lube oil return temperature H
7 B36-TE-5601AB Motor DE lube oil return temperature H
9 B36-TE-5602AA Gearbox lube oil return temperature H
10 B36-TE-5602AB Gearbox lube oil return temperature H
11
12 B36-TE-5603AA Pump DE lube oil return temperature H
13 B36-TE-5603AB Pump DE lube oil return temperature H
14 B36-TE-5604AA Pump NDE lube oil return temperature H
15 B36-TE-5604AB Pump NDE lube oil return temperature H
16
17 B36-TE-5605AA Motor NDE journal bearing temperature H HH
18 B36-TE-5605AB Motor NDE journal bearing temperature H HH
19 B36-TE-5606AA Motor U winding temperature H HH
20 B36-TE-5606AB Motor U winding temperature H HH
21 B36-TE-5606AC Motor U winding temperature (spare)
22 B36-TE-5606AD Motor V winding temperature H HH
23 B36-TE-5606AE Motor V winding temperature H HH
24 B36-TE-5606AF Motor V winding temperature (spare)
25 B36-TE-5606AG Motor W winding temperature H HH
26 B36-TE-5606AH Motor W winding temperature H HH
27 B36-TE-5606AJ Motor W winding temperature (spare)
28 B36-TE-5607AA Motor DE journal bearing temperature H HH
29 B36-TE-5607AB Motor DE journal bearing temperature H HH
30
31 B36-TE-5608AA Gearbox I/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature H HH
32 B36-TE-5608AB Gearbox I/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature H HH
33 B36-TE-5608AC Gearbox I/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature H HH
34 B36-TE-5608AD Gearbox I/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature H HH
35 B36-TE-5609AA Gearbox I/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature H HH
36 B36-TE-5609AB Gearbox I/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature H HH
37 B36-TE-5609AC Gearbox I/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature H HH
38 B36-TE-5609AD Gearbox I/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature H HH
39 B36-TE-5610AA Gearbox I/P shaft IB thrust bearing temperature H HH
40 B36-TE-5610AB Gearbox I/P shaft IB thrust bearing temperature H HH
41 B36-TE-5610AC Gearbox I/P shaft IB thrust bearing temperature H HH
42 B36-TE-5610AD Gearbox I/P shaft IB thrust bearing temperature H HH
43
Note: All tag numbers are for Pumpset B36-G-0002A only, refer to
P&ID E1-104.430.193 for tagging philosophy.
Sht 1 of 4
COLUMN 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SULZER S.O. 9901-48330


B36-G-0002A/B/C/D
13.11.07 Rev."a"
SERVICE
B36-G-0002A
B36-G-0002A
TAG No.
TAG No. -
ROW
PRIMARY
DEVICE SERVICE
1
2 TEMPERATURE DEVICES
3
4 B36-TE-5611AA Gearbox I/P shaft OB thrust bearing temperature H HH
5 B36-TE-5611AB Gearbox I/P shaft OB thrust bearing temperature H HH
6 B36-TE-5611AC Gearbox I/P shaft OB thrust bearing temperature H HH
7 B36-TE-5611AD Gearbox I/P shaft OB thrust bearing temperature H HH
8 B36-TE-5612AA Gearbox O/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature H HH
9 B36-TE-5612AB Gearbox O/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature H HH
10 B36-TE-5612AC Gearbox O/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature H HH
11 B36-TE-5612AD Gearbox O/P shaft NDE journal bearing temperature H HH
12 B36-TE-5613AA Gearbox O/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature H HH
13 B36-TE-5613AB Gearbox O/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature H HH
14 B36-TE-5613AC Gearbox O/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature H HH
15 B36-TE-5613AD Gearbox O/P shaft DE journal bearing temperature H HH
16
17 B36-TE-5614AA Pump DE journal bearing temperature H HH
18 B36-TE-5614AB Pump DE journal bearing temperature H HH
19 B36-TE-5615AA Pump NDE journal bearing temperature H HH
20 B36-TE-5615AB Pump NDE journal bearing temperature H HH
21 B36-TE-5616AA Pump IB thrust bearing temperature H HH
22 B36-TE-5616AB Pump IB thrust bearing temperature H HH
23 B36-TE-5617AA Pump OB thrust bearing temperature H HH
24 B36-TE-5617AB Pump OB thrust bearing temperature H HH
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sht 2 of 4
COLUMN 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SULZER S.O. 9901-48330

TRIP COS PUMPSET (VMS)

B36-G-0002A/B/C/D
13.11.07 Rev."a"
SERVICE
B36-G-0002A
TAG No.
TAG No. -
ROW
PRIMARY
DEVICE SERVICE
1
2 VIBRATION DEVICES
3
4 B36-VXE-5600A Motor NDE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) H HH
5 B36-VYE-5600A Motor NDE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) H HH
6 B36-VXE-5601A Motor DE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) H HH
7 B36-VYE-5601A Motor DE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) H HH
9 B36-VXE-5602A Gearbox I/P shaft DE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) H HH
10 B36-VYE-5602A Gearbox I/P shaft DE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) H HH
11 B36-VXE-5603A Gearbox I/P shaft NDE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) H HH
12 B36-VYE-5603A Gearbox I/P shaft NDE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) H HH
13 B36-VZE-5600A Gearbox I/P shaft axial position deviation (z-plane) H HH Note: 2oo2
voting for
14 B36-VZE-5601A Gearbox I/P shaft axial position deviation (z-plane) H HH HH trip.
15 B36-VXE-5604A Gearbox O/P shaft NDE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) H HH
16 B36-VYE-5604A Gearbox O/P shaft NDE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) H HH
17 B36-VXE-5605A Gearbox O/P shaft DE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) H HH
18 B36-VYE-5605A Gearbox O/P shaft DE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) H HH
19 B36-VE/VT-5600A Gearbox O/P shaft housing vibration H HH
20
21 B36-VXE-5606A Pump DE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) H HH
22 B36-VYE-5606A Pump DE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) H HH
23 B36-VE/VT-5601A Pump DE bearing housing vibration H HH
24 B36-VXE-5607A Pump NDE journal bearing vibration (x-plane) H HH
25 B36-VYE-5607A Pump NDE journal bearing vibration (y-plane) H HH
26 B36-VE/VT-5602A Pump NDE bearing housing vibration H HH
27 B36-VZE-5602A Pump axial position deviation (z-plane) H HH Note: 2oo2

voting for
28 B36-VZE-5603A Pump axial position deviation (z-plane) H HH HH trip.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sht 3 of 4
COLUMN 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SULZER S.O. 9901-48330


B36-G-0002A/B/C/D
13.11.07 Rev."a"
SERVICE
B36-G-0002A
B36-G-0002A
TAG No.
TAG No. -
ROW
PRIMARY
DEVICE SERVICE
1
2 LEVEL DEVICES
3
4 B36-LIT-5600A Pump DE seal leakage level H HH
5 B36-LIT-5601A Pump DE seal leakage level H HH
8 OTHER DEVICES
9
10 B36-HS-5600A Pumpset emergency stop pushbutton X
11 B36-HS-5605A Pumpset emergency stop pushbutton X
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Sht 4 of 4
Sulzer Pumps UK Ltd. Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D
Control System Description Saudi Aramco - Khurais
rd
SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007
CONTENTS
Section Page
1. INTRODUCTION 2
1.1. Purpose.
1.2. Scope of Supply.
1.3. Hazardous Area Installation.
1.4. Associated Drawings.
2. CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP LUBE OIL SYSTEM 3
3. CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP MECHANICAL SEAL. 5
4. SUMMARY OF PUMP MOUNTED INSTRUMENTATION SUPPLIED. 5
4.1. Process Instrumentation.
4.2. Lube Oil Instrumentation.
4.3. Machine Temperature Monitoring.
4.4. Machine Vibration Monitoring.
5. CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP CONTROL LOGIC. 8
5.1. Start Permissives.
5.2. Shutdown Protection.
5.3. Start Sequence.
5.4. Normal Operation/Running.
5.5. Normal Stop Sequence.
5.6. Pump Shutdown.
0 First Issue For Comment/Approval CW 23.11.07 SD 23.11.07

Rev. Description Compiled Date Approved Date
e:\drawings\sulzer\48330\out\word\4104476133.doc Page 1 of 9 Sulzer Doc. No. : E4-104.476.133, Rev. 0

rd
SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Purpose.
1.1.1. This Control System Description outlines the basic control & interlock logic for the
mechanical protection of the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets, Tag No's B36-G-
0002A/B/C/D for Saudi Aramco Khurais, Saudi Arabia. All Tag No's detailed in this
document are for pumpset B36-G-0002A only.
1.1.2. This description only covers the basic operating procedures associated with the
machinery protection, monitoring & control.
As such, this document does not cover the procedures for the initial commissioning /
start-up of the Crude Oil Shipping Pump or for the process normal operation or upset
conditions of the pump; the philosophy covers the protection & interlock logic for the
pump only.
1.1.3. Full details on the commissioning & operation of the Crude Oil Shipping Pump
package & specific items of equipment are contained in the Sulzer Installation
Operation & Maintenance Manual.
1.1.4. All alarm, control & trip settings are included in the respective Instrument Schedule,
the settings given herein are nominal values only.
1.2. Scope of Supply.
1.2.1. A summary of the equipment supplied by Sulzer & supplied by others is detailed
below:
1.2.2. Supplied by Sulzer:
1.2.2.1. Crude Oil Shipping Pump, Sulzer barrel type, CD, with mechanical seals &
sleeve type journal and tilting pad type thrust bearings.
1.2.2.2. Speed Increasing Gearbox BHS Getriebe
1.2.2.3. Main Drive Motor ABB Motors.
1.2.2.4. API 614, Off-Skid Pressurised Lube Oil System (LOS) Baric Systems.
1.2.2.5. Plan 31 / 65, Mechanical Seals Burgmann Industries.
(Plan 65 Seal Leakage Detection)
1.2.2.6. Local - package - mounted, temperature & vibration, sensors for main
equipment and temperature sensors for lube oil system, all cabled to skid
edge junction boxes.
1.2.2.7. Emergency Stop Pushbutton Stations (x2) and Local Control Station (x1),
supplied loose for mounting by client.
1.2.3. Supplied by Others:
1.2.3.1. Pump / System process control & shutdown logic - part of the DCS / ESD
systems, along with the associated local process instrumentation.
1.2.3.2. Vibration Monitoring System (VMS)
1.2.3.3. Motor Control Centre (MCC), for HV (high voltage) main drive motor.
1.2.3.4. Motor Control Centre (MCC), for LV (low voltage) auxiliary motors & heaters.
1.2.3.5. All interconnecting cabling between Crude Oil Shipping Pump packages, HV
& LV MCC's, DCS, ESD & VMS system(s) etc...
1.3. Hazardous Area Installation.
1.3.1. All Crude Oil Shipping Pump mounted instrumentation supplied by Sulzer shall be
suitably certified for installation in a Class 1, Zone 2 Group IIA hazardous area with
temperature class T3 (or better).

rd
SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007
1.4. Associated Drawings.
Title Description Sulzer Doc. No.
1.4.1. Pump General Arrangement E0-104.430.195
1.4.2. Pump P & I Diagram E1-104.430.193
1.4.3. Pump Instrument Schedule E4-104.475.504
1.4.4. Pump Terminal Block Diagram E2-104.475.505
1.4.5. Pump Cause & Effect Diagram E4-104.476.099
1.4.6. Pump Emergency Stop Pushbutton Station GHG4148101L0034
1.4.7. Pump Local Control Station GHG4483402L0154
1.4.8. LOS General Arrangement GA-34481
1.4.9. LOS P&I Diagram PI-34481
1.4.10. LOS Instrument Schedule IS-34481
1.4.11. LOS Wiring Diagram WD-34481
1.4.12. LOS Junction Box Diagram JB-34481
1.4.13. LOS Cable Schedule CA-34481
1.4.14. LOS Cooler Wiring Diagram CWI-34481
1.4.15. LOS Local Control Station Diagram LP-34481
1.4.16. Gearbox General Arrangement GST601634900
1.4.17. Motor General Arrangement 3BSY 200008-ETX
1.4.18. Motor Connection Diagram 3BSY 200007-ETX
2. CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP LUBE OIL SYSTEM (LOS).

2.1. The purpose of the LOS is to provide the necessary (pressurised) supply of lube oil to the
Crude Oil Shipping Pump, Speed Increasing Gearbox and Main Drive Motor bearings as
follows:
2.1.1. Prior to starting the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset, so that the pump, gearbox and
motor bearings are lubricated before starting the main drive motor.
2.1.2. Continuously whilst the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset is running.
2.1.3. After the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset has been stopped / shutdown, to ensure that
the pump, gearbox and motor bearings are lubricated during the time the pumpset
takes to run-down to a stationary - complete stop - condition.
2.2. Loss of the lube oil supply (detected by low-low lube oil pressure transmitter B36-PIT-
5604A) whilst the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset is running, will cause immediate shutdown of
the main drive motor to prevent serious damage to the pump, gearbox or motor bearing
2.3. The off-skid LOS basically comprises of:
2.3.1. Lube Oil Reservoir (B36-D-0052A), complete with reservoir level gauge (B36-LG-
5600A) for indication, level transmitter (B36-LIT-5602A) for indication, low level
alarm & interlocking with the lube oil reservoir heater, lube oil reservoir temperature
transmitter (B36-TIT-5618A) for indication & control of the lube oil reservoir heater
(B36-E-0051A) via the DCS / LV MCC.
2.3.2. Lube Oil Reservoir Heater (B36-E-0051A), complete with manually reset high-high
temperature cut-out thermostat, to maintain the minimum required oil temperature of
60F. The heater is controlled from the lube oil reservoir temperature transmitter
(B36-TIT-5618A) via the DCS / LV MCC.

rd
SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007
2.3.3. Two Lube Oil Pumps (B36-G-0052A & B36-G-0052B), 100% rated electric motor
(B36-GM-0052A & B36-GM-0052B) driven. The pumps are to be arranged for duty /
standby operation, prior to starting the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset the duty
selected lube oil pump must be started / running and the LOS pressurised. The
standby selected lube oil pump will be started automatically via the DCS / LV MCC
on detection of low lube oil pressure (B36-PIT-5605A). Lube oil pump pressure
gauges (B36-PI-5600A & B36-PI-5601A) and pressure transmitters (B36-PIT-5602A
& B36-PIT-5603A) are fitted for indication and to provide positive feedback that the
respective pump is running.
2.3.4. Separate Air Blast Lube Oil Cooler (B36-E-0002A), with three 50% rated electric
motor driven air blast fans. The fans are to be arranged for two duty / one standby
operation, where the two duty selected fans run continuously while the LOS is
operating, the one standby selected fan cutting in on failure of one of the two duty
fans. Part of the lube oil bypasses the air blast cooler via a remote sensing,
temperature transmitter (B36-TIT-5619A) via DCS, bypass valve (B36-TCV-5619A).
The remaining lube oil is then passed through the cooler once the oil temperature
reaches 140F. Lube oil cooler inlet & outlet temperature gauges (B36-TI-5600A &
B36-TI-5601A) are fitted for indication.
2.3.5. Duplex / Twin Lube Oil Filters (B36-D-0053A & B36-D-0053B), one in operation, one
as standby and fitted with a manual changeover valve. A differential pressure
transmitter (B36-PDIT-5600A) is fitted for indication & to alarm on detection of a high
differential pressure i.e. blocked filter.
2.3.6. Lube Oil Supply Pressure Control Valve (B36-PCV-5600A), which regulates the lube
oil supply pressure to the pump, gearbox and motor bearings to the required 25
PSIG.
2.3.7. Lube oil supply pressure transmitters, for low pressure alarm and to start standby
lube oil pump (B36-PIT-5605A) and low-low pressure shutdown (B36-PIT-5604A). A
pressure gauge for indication (B36-PI-5602A) is also provided.
2.3.8. Lube oil supply temperature transmitter (B36-TIT-5620A), is fitted for indication.
2.3.9. Separate Lube Oil Rundown Tank (B36-D-0054A), to ensure that the pump, gearbox
and motor bearings are lubricated in an electrical power black out. A level gauge
(B36-LG-5606A) and level transmitter (B36-LIT-5603A) are fitted for indication.
2.3.10. Lube oil return temperature transmitters (B36-TIT-5600A, B36-TIT-5601A, B36-TIT-
5602A, B36-TIT-5603A & B36-TIT-5604A), in each pump, gearbox and motor lube
oil return line (on pump skid) for indication & high temperature alarm are also
provided
2.4. Lube oil is provided at a nominal pressure of 25 PSIG - with breakdown orifices at the pump
and gearbox bearings - prior to start-up & whilst the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset is running.
2.5. Prior to starting the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset, the duty selected lube oil pump is started
to provide lube oil to the pump, gearbox and motor bearings before starting the main drive
motor.
2.6. Should the duty selected lube oil pump fail whilst the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset is running
a low pressure alarm will be detected (B36-PIT-5605A) and the standby lube oil pump will be
started automatically and will continue to run until a Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset stop or
shutdown sequence is completed, to ensure a continued lube oil supply to the pump,
gearbox and motor bearings thus enabling the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset to continue
running. If however the standby lube oil pump also fails whilst the Crude Oil Shipping
Pumpset is running a low-low pressure will be detected (B36-PIT-5604A) and a shutdown
will be initiated.
2.7. When a Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset stop or shutdown sequence is initiated, the operating
(duty or standby) lube oil pump should continue to run to provide lube oil to the pump,
gearbox and motor bearings during run down and should also continue to run for 5-10
minutes (via a timer in the DCS) after the stop or shutdown sequence has been completed.
In the event of an electrical power black out, oil will be provided from the lube oil rundown
tank.
rd
SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007
3. CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP MECHANICAL SEAL.
3.1 The purpose of the Pump Mechanical Seal is to prevent pumped product leaking from the
pump to atmosphere, or air leaking into the pumped product, especially under black
shutdown conditions.
3.1.1 The Crude Oil Shipping Pump is fitted with two mechanical seals, one at the pump DE
(drive end) & one at the pump NDE (non drive end), based on the Plan 31 system
(Cyclone Separators) shown in API 610. There is facility at both the DE & NDE for
pressure gauges (B36-PI-5501 & B36-PI-5502) to be fitted by others.
3.1.2 Seal leakage detection level transmitters are fitted (B36-LIT-5600A & B36-LIT-5601A),
for indication & high-high level shutdown on an increasing seal leakage flow from the
pump DE or NDE seal backing up in the seal leakage detection chamber against the
respective restriction / flow orifice (B36-FO-5605 & B36-FO-5606).
4. SUMMARY OF PUMP MOUNTED INSTRUMENTATION SUPPLIED.
4.1. Process Instrumentation.
No process instrumentation is supplied with the Crude Oil Shipping Pumpset packages. All
locally mounted process instruments, along with the associated process monitoring, control
& shutdown systems are supplied by the Purchaser.
4.2. Lube Oil System Instrumentation.
4.2.1. The Lube Oil System is supplied with the following:
4.2.1.1. Lube oil reservoir level gauge (B36-LG-5600A), for indication.
4.2.1.2. Lube oil reservoir level transmitter (B36-LIT-5602A), Foundation Fieldbus
output type, for indication, operator low level alarm & interlock with lube oil
heater.
4.2.1.3. Lube oil reservoir heater (B36-E-0051A), with manually reset high-high
temperature cut-out thermostat.
4.2.1.4. Lube oil reservoir temperature transmitter (B36-TIT-5618A) for indication &
control of the lube oil reservoir heater (B36-E-0051A).
4.2.1.5. Lube oil pumps delivery pressure gauges, one per oil pump, (B36-PI-5600A
& B36-PI-5601A), for indication.
4.2.1.6. Lube oil pumps delivery pressure transmitters, one per oil pump, (B36-PIT-
5602A & B36-PIT-5603A), for indication & positive feedback for pump
running.
4.2.1.7. Lube oil pumps pressure relief valves, one per oil pump, (B36-PZV-5600A &
B36-PZV-5601A).
4.2.1.8. Lube oil cooler inlet temperature gauge (B36-TI-5600A), for indication.
4.2.1.9. Lube oil temperature control valve (B36-TCV-5619A), air operated remote
sensing, to bypass air blast cooler.
4.2.1.10. Lube oil cooler outlet temperature transmitter (B36-TIT-5619A), for indication
& control (via DCS) of lube oil temperature control valve (B36-TCV-5619A).
4.2.1.11. Lube oil cooler outlet temperature gauge (B36-TI-5601A), for indication.
4.2.1.12. Lube oil filters differential pressure transmitter (B36-PDIT-5600A), for
indication & high differential pressure alarm (blocked filter).
4.2.1.13. Lube oil supply pressure control valve, self-operated remote sensing type,
(B36-PCV-5600A).
4.2.1.14. Lube oil supply pressure gauge (B36-PI-5602A), for indication.
4.2.1.15. Lube oil supply pressure transmitter (B36-PIT-5605A), Foundation Fieldbus
output type, for indication, operator low pressure alarm and to start standby
lube oil pump.
4.2.1.16. Lube oil supply pressure transmitter (B36-PIT-5604A), 4-20mA output type,
for indication & low-low pressure shutdown.

rd
SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007
4.2.1.17. Lube oil supply temperature transmitter (B36-TIT-5620A), Foundation
Fieldbus output type, for indication.
4.2.1.18. Lube oil rundown tank level gauge (B36-LG-5603A), for indication.
4.2.1.19. Lube oil rundown tank level transmitter (B36-LIT-5603A), Foundation
Fieldbus output type, for indication.
4.2.1.20. Lube oil return temperature transmitters (B36-TIT-5600A, B36-TIT-5601A,
B36-TIT-5602A, B36-TIT-5603A & B36-TIT-5604A), Foundation Fieldbus
output type, in each pump, gearbox and motor lube oil return line for
indication & high temperature alarm.
4.3. Machine Temperature Monitoring.
4.3.1. The following temperature sensors (RTDs) are fitted on the Crude Oil Shipping
Pumpset and cabled to main drive motor mounted and skid edge mounted junction
boxes respectively. The motor winding RTD signals are monitored at the HV MCC
where high temperature alarms & high-high temperature shutdowns are provided and
communicated to the DCS, the pump, gearbox and motor bearing RTD signals are
connected to skid mounted temperature transmitters and monitored at the ESD where
high temperature alarms & high-high temperature shutdowns are provided and
communicated to the DCS:
4.3.1.1. Main Drive Motor NDE journal bearing (B36-TE-5605AA/AB & B36-TIT-
5605A).
4.3.1.2. Main Drive Motor U winding (B36-TE-5606AA).
4.3.1.3. Main Drive Motor U winding (B36-TE-5606AB).
4.3.1.4. Main Drive Motor U winding (B36-TE-5606AC, spare).
4.3.1.5. Main Drive Motor V winding (B36-TE-5606AD).
4.3.1.6. Main Drive Motor V winding (B36-TE-5606AE).
4.3.1.7. Main Drive Motor V winding (B36-TE-5606AF, spare).
4.3.1.8. Main Drive Motor W winding (B36-TE-5606AG).
4.3.1.9. Main Drive Motor W winding (B36-TE-5606AH).
4.3.1.10. Main Drive Motor W winding (B36-TE-5606AJ, spare).
4.3.1.11. Main Drive Motor DE journal bearing (B36-TE-5607AA/AB & B36-TIT-
5607A).
4.3.1.12. Gearbox I/P Shaft DE journal bearing (B36-TE-5608AA/AB & B36-TIT-
5608AA).
4.3.1.13. Gearbox I/P Shaft DE journal bearing (B36-TE-5608AC/AD & B36-TIT-
5608AB).
4.3.1.14. Gearbox I/P Shaft NDE journal bearing (B36-TE-5609AA/AB & B36-TIT-
5609AA).
4.3.1.15. Gearbox I/P Shaft NDE journal bearing (B36-TE-5609AC/AD & B36-TIT-
5609AB).
4.3.1.16. Gearbox I/P Shaft Inboard thrust bearing (B36-TE-5610AA/AB & B36-TIT-
5610AA).
4.3.1.17. Gearbox I/P Shaft Inboard thrust bearing (B36-TE-5610AC/AD & B36-TIT-
5610AB).
4.3.1.18. Gearbox I/P Shaft Outboard thrust bearing (B36-TE-5611AA/AB & B36-TIT-
5611AA).
4.3.1.19. Gearbox I/P Shaft Outboard thrust bearing (B36-TE-5611AC/AD & B36-TIT-
5611AB).
4.3.1.20. Gearbox O/P Shaft NDE journal bearing (B36-TE-5612AA/AB & B36-TIT-
5612AA).

rd
SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007
4.3.1.21. Gearbox O/P Shaft NDE journal bearing (B36-TE-5612AC/AD & B36-TIT-
5612AB).
4.3.1.22. Gearbox O/P Shaft DE journal bearing (B36-TE-5613AA/AB & B36-TIT-
5613AA).
4.3.1.23. Gearbox O/P Shaft DE journal bearing (B36-TE-5613AC/AD & B36-TIT-
5613AB).
4.3.1.24. Crude Oil Shipping Pump DE journal bearing (B36-TE-5614AA/AB & B36-
TIT-5614A).
4.3.1.25. Crude Oil Shipping Pump NDE journal bearing (B36-TE-5615AA/AB & B36-
TIT-5615A).
4.3.1.26. Crude Oil Shipping Pump Inboard thrust bearing (B36-TE-5616AA/AB &
B36-TIT-5616A).
4.3.1.27. Crude Oil Shipping Pump Outboard thrust bearing (B36-TE-5617AA/AB &
B36-TIT-5617A).
4.4. Machine Vibration Monitoring.
4.4.1. Non-contacting eddy current type probes and seismic transducers are fitted on the
Crude Oil Pumpset and cabled to main drive motor mounted and skid edge junction
boxes. The signals are monitored at the Vibration Monitoring System (VMS, by
others), where high vibration alarms & high-high vibration shutdowns are provided:
4.4.1.1. Main Drive Motor NDE keyphasor (B36-KE-5600A & B36-KT-5600A), for
analysis (& speed indication if required) only. No alarms or trips are
associated with this signal.
4.4.1.2. Main Drive Motor NDE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5600A & B36-
VXT-5600A, B36-VYE-5600A & B36-VYT-5600A), x & y planes respectively.
4.4.1.3. Main Drive Motor DE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5601A & B36-
4.4.1.4. Gearbox I/P Shaft DE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5602A & B36-
4.4.1.5. Gearbox I/P Shaft NDE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5603A & B36-
4.4.1.6. Gearbox I/P Shaft axial thrust position, (B36-VZE-5600A & B36-VZT-5600A,
B36-VZE-5601A & B36-VZT-5801A), z plane.
4.4.1.7. Gearbox O/P Shaft NDE keyphasor (B36-KE-5601A & B36-KT-5601A), for
analysis (& speed indication if required) only. No alarms or trips are
associated with this signal.
4.4.1.8. Gearbox O/P Shaft NDE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5604A & B36-
4.4.1.9. Gearbox O/P Shaft DE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5605A & B36-
4.4.1.10. Gearbox O/P Shaft DE bearing housing vibration (B36-VE/VT-5600A).
4.4.1.11. Crude Oil Shipping Pump DE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5606A &
B36-VXT-5606A, B36-VYE-5606A & B36-VYT-5606A), x & y planes
respectively.
4.4.1.12. Crude Oil Shipping Pump DE bearing housing vibration (B36-VE/VT-5601A).
4.4.1.13. Crude Oil Shipping Pump NDE journal bearing vibrations, (B36-VXE-5607A
& B36-VXT-5607A, B36-VYE-5607A & B36-VYT-5607A), x & y planes
respectively.
4.4.1.14. Crude Oil Shipping Pump NDE bearing housing vibration (B36-VE/VT-
5602A).
4.4.1.15. Crude Oil Shipping Pump axial thrust position, (B36-VZE-5602A & B36-VZT-
5602A, B36-VZE-5603A & B36-VZT-5603A), z plane.

rd
SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007
5. CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP CONTROL LOGIC.
5.1. Start Permissives.
5.1.1. The following start permissives should to be satisfied before the Crude Oil Shipping
Pump can be started:
5.1.1.1. All pump shutdown conditions are healthy & reset (see Para 5.2).
5.1.1.2. All Stop commands are normal ie, not operated.
5.1.1.3. Crude Oil Shipping Pump suction pressure is OK / adequate (By others).
5.1.1.4. Crude Oil Shipping Pump discharge valve is closed (unless system pressure
in the discharge manifold is sufficient enough to start against, in which case
the discharge valve can be open, with manifold pressure being held against
the non-return valve. The Crude Oil Shipping Pump cannot be started
against an open valve / no system pressure).
5.1.1.5. Minimum Flow Valve is closed (if supplied).
5.1.1.6. Lube Oil System is charged.
5.1.1.7. All Process conditions are normal. Note: the Stop command should be
interlocked with process start permissives so that the Crude Oil Shipping
Pump cannot be started unless process conditions are normal (i.e. suction
manifold isolation valve open).
5.1.1.8. HV MCC - for main drive motor - is available (By others).
5.2. Shutdown Protection.
5.2.1. The following conditions are to be continually monitored by the Vibration Monitoring
Panel (VMS, by others) and or ESD and shall initiate an instantaneous shutdown of
the Crude Oil Shipping Pump Main Drive Motor via the HV MCC in the event of a fault
condition arising:
5.2.1.1. Main Drive Motor journal bearing vibrations high-high.
5.2.1.2. Main Drive Motor journal bearing temperatures high-high.
5.2.1.3. Main Drive Motor winding temperatures high-high.
5.2.1.4. Gearbox I/P Shaft journal bearing vibrations high-high.
5.2.1.5. Gearbox I/P Shaft axial position deviation high-high.
5.2.1.6. Gearbox I/P Shaft journal or thrust bearing temperatures high-high.
5.2.1.7. Gearbox O/P Shaft journal bearing vibrations high-high.
5.2.1.8. Gearbox O/P Shaft bearing housing vibrations high-high.
5.2.1.9. Gearbox O/P Shaft journal bearing temperatures high-high.
5.2.1.10. Crude Oil Shipping Pump journal bearing vibrations high-high.
5.2.1.11. Crude Oil Shipping Pump bearing housing vibrations high-high.
5.2.1.12. Crude Oil Shipping Pump axial position deviation high-high.
5.2.1.13. Crude Oil Shipping Pump journal or thrust bearing temperatures high-high.
5.2.1.14. Crude Oil Shipping Pump seal leakage detection level high-high.
5.2.1.15. Lube Oil System supply pressure low-low (see note 5.2.2 below).
5.2.2. Operation of the lube oil supply pressure low-low trip (& associated low-pressure
alarm) should be inhibited or masked (in ESD & DCS respectively) whilst the lube oil
pumps are not running.
5.2.3. All trips initiated should lockout on fault until the fault condition has returned to normal
and the system manually reset by the operator.

rd
SO. 9901-48330 Rev 0, 23 November 2007
5.3. Start Sequence (Automatic, from DCS).
5.3.1. The basic procedure for STARTING the Crude Oil Shipping Pump is as follows:
5.3.1.1. Check start permissive conditions (see Para 5.1).
5.3.1.2. Reset all pump shutdown conditions (see Para 5.2).
5.3.1.3. Start the duty selected lube oil pump.
5.3.2. Once the duty selected lube oil pump is running, the start sequence is now held
pending lube oil pressure being established at the motor, gearbox and pump bearings.
5.3.3. Once lube oil pressure is established, the main motor may be started and the lube oil
pressure low alarm and low-low trip overrides removed.
5.3.4. Command the Crude Oil Shipping Pump minimum flow control valve to open (if
supplied), simultaneous with starting the main drive motor.
5.3.5. Once the Crude Oil Shipping Pump is running (approx 10 seconds), command the
discharge valve to open (simultaneous with closing the minimum flow valve, if
supplied).
5.3.6. Overrides on any low-low flow process trips (by others) can be removed.
5.4. Normal Operation/Running
5.4.1. Once started, the Crude Oil Shipping Pump should run without manual intervention, as
alarm & shutdown conditions shall be continuously monitored at the VMS, ESD and
DCS etc..
5.5. Normal Stop Sequence (Automatic from DCS).
5.5.1. The basic procedure for STOPPING the Crude Oil Shipping Pump on receipt of a stop
command from the DCS is as follows:
5.5.1.1. Stop the Main Drive Motor.
5.5.1.2. Command the Crude Oil Shipping Pump discharge valve to close
(simultaneous with stopping the main drive motor). Ignore this command if
there is system pressure in the discharge manifold (see Para 5.1.1.4).
5.5.1.3. Once the main drive motor has stopped, start a 5-10 minute timer within the
control logic which, after the timer has operated, automatically stops the
operating (duty or standby) lube oil pump.
5.5.2. The Crude Oil Shipping Pump stop sequence is now complete.
5.5.3. With all start permissives healthy / satisfied and shutdown conditions healthy, the
Crude Oil Shipping Pump package can be restarted as noted in above.
5.6. Pump Shutdown.
5.6.1. The basic procedure for STOPPING the Crude Oil Shipping Pump on receipt of a
shutdown or emergency stop condition arising is as follows;
5.6.1.1. Stop the Main Drive Motor.
5.6.1.2. Command the Crude Oil Shipping Pump discharge valve to close
(simultaneous with stopping the main drive motor). Ignore this command if
there is system pressure in the discharge manifold (see Para 5.1.1.4).
5.6.1.3. Once the main drive motor has stopped, start a 5-10 minute timer within the
control logic which, after the timer has operated, automatically stops the
operating (duty or standby) lube oil pump.
5.6.2. The Crude Oil Shipping Pump shutdown sequence is now complete.
5.6.3. With all shutdown conditions reset & start permissives healthy / satisfied, the Crude
Oil Shipping Pump package can be restarted as noted in above.


Company Electronic File Name:
This document is CONFIDENTIAL and the sole property of the Hyundai Engineering and Construction Co.Ltd. It shall neither be shown to third parties nor
used for any other purposes than those for which it has been issued/sent. Any unauthorized attempt to reproduce it, in any form, is strictly prohibited
Attachment #2
OPERATING SPARE PARTS LIST
Saudi Aramco SA7970 (This form is required for each separate type /model /size of equipment)
DESCRIPTION OF PARENT EQUIPMENT ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER (OEM)
SAUDI ARAMCO
EQUIPMENT NAME: CRUDE OIL SHIPPER OEM NAME:SULZER UK PUMPS OEM REF :E13803
MODEL: CD TYPE:20X24X22G ADDRESS:MANOR MILL LANE BEESTON LEEDS LS11 8BR
PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 B.I. #:
DRAWING 0-104.421.869 TAG .B36-G-0002A/B/C/D CONTACT NAME:GARY MONKS
SAUDI ARAMCO / CONTRACTOR P.O. :003003/002140 E-MAIL:GARY.MONKS@SULZER.COM J.O. #:
validity March 31st 2008 TELEPHONE:0 {+44} 113 2724485
P.O. ITEM #: P.O. QTY:4 FACSIMILE:0 {+44} 113 2724404 G.B.P. to dollar 1=$2
DWG SPARE PART COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OEM PART NO. OCM NAME OCM PART NO. QTY USED UNIT STOCK? REPAIR?
ITEM# *(1) *(2) *(3) *(2) PER EQPT. PRICE GBP *(5) *(6)
211.01 SHAFT +KEYS 204230988001 SULZER 204230988001 1 45,631.78 Y N
412.02 O-RING 142.24X5.3 104490009821 SULZER 104490009821 1 8.96 Y N
412.01 O-RING 129.54X5.3 021703012802 SULZER 021703012802 1 8.96 Y N
500.01 RING 104206815031 SULZER 104206815031 2 188.00 Y N
500.02 RING 104188113054 SULZER 104188113054 1 289.60 Y N
485.01 THRUST RING 204231028001 SULZER 204231028001 1 2,000.00 Y N
921.01 SHAFT LOCKNUT 204220166004 SULZER 204220166004 1 493.92 Y N
234.01 DOUBLE SUCTION IMPELLER 204230260401 SULZER 204230260401 1 74,944.98 Y N
303.01 FOUR LOBED RADIAL BEARING 204231018001 SULZER 204231018001 1 6,920.48 Y N
430.01 INPRO SEAL 204221688027 SULZER 204221688027 2 1,968.48 Y N
412.04 O-RING 104490005232 SULZER 104490005232 1 8.96 Y N
*Notes: (1) Provide complete generic description and include material designation & size. If the item is a "Kit" , a "Set", or an "Assembly", CERTIFIED TRUE & CORRECT:
'list its contents and associated part numbers.
(2) This part number/identification number must be "unique" to facilitate interchangeability. (Submit OCM part no. supporting document or catalog).
(3) OCM = Original Component Manufacturer.
(4) Unit price shall be entered in US$ dollar value. G P Monks REV B
(5) Is it necessary for Saudi Aramco to stock this item?. If so, indicate the recommended quantity. Name & Signature / Affix company stamp
(6) Is this item repairable?. Indicate with "Y" for yes, or "N" for no.
Attachment #2
SAUDI ARAMCO
PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 B.I. #:
ITEM# *(1) *(2) *(3) *(2) PER EQPT. PRICE*(4) *(5) *(6)
302.01 FOUR LOBED RADIAL BEARING 204231018001 SULZER 204231018001 1 6,920.48 y NO
430.01 INPRO SEAL 204221688027 SULZER 204221688027 1 1,968.48 Y N
303.01 THRUST BEARING KINGSBURY JJ9 204231019001 SULZER 204231019001 1 10,283.52 Y N
384.01 THRUST BEARING PLATE 204231024001 SULZER 204231024001 1 3,566.40 Y N
592.01 SHIM PLATE 204231022001 SULZER 204231022001 1 1,855.00 Y N
556.01 ADJUSTING PIECE 204231023801 SULZER 204231023801 1 42.56 Y N
411.01 SEAL RING 204231020001 SULZER 204231020001 1 2,414.72 Y N
923.01 SHAFT NUT 204231025002 SULZER 204231025002 1 3,606.40 Y N
412.05 O-RING 021501003405 SULZER 021501003405 1 8.96 Y N
400.01 SPIRAL WOUND GASKET FAFL4627602 SULZER FAFL4627602 2 91.12 Y N
502.01 STATIONARY WEAR RING D.E 204231032001 SULZER 204231032001 1 8,645.00 Y N
Attachment #2
SAUDI ARAMCO
PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 B.I. #:
412.03 O-RING 104490006592 SULZER 104490006592 1 333.20 Y N
412.05 O-RING 021501003405 SULZER 021501003405 1 8.96 Y N
400.02 SPIRAL WOUND GASKET FAFL4627602 SULZER FAFL4627602 2 133.36 Y N
502.02 STATIONARY WEAR RING N.D.E. 204231032002 SULZER 204231032002 1 8,645.00 Y N
412.03 O RING 104490006592 SULZER 104490006592 1 333.20 Y N
Attachment #2
SAUDI ARAMCO
PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 B.I. #:
VOITH GEARBOX SPARES
1 RADIAL BEARING 9901483300003 VOITH 602189800 1 17,572.80 Y N
5 AXIAL TILTING PAD BEARING 9901483300003 VOITH 4571308 1 32.577.60 Y N
6 SEAL RING 9901483300003 VOITH 513937100 1 13,420.80 Y N
7 SEAL RING 9901483300003 VOITH 513936900 1 12,628.80 Y N
8 WHEEL SHAFT COMPLETE 9901483300003 VOITH 601677700 1 402,830.40 Y N
9 PINION SHAFT 9901483300003 VOITH 601676900 1 129,379.20 Y N
10 RESISTANCE THERMOMETER 9901483300003 VOITH 101007275 4 1,900.80 Y N
Attachment #2
SAUDI ARAMCO
PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 B.I. #:
VOITH GEARBOX SPARES
Attachment #2
SAUDI ARAMCO
PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 B.I. #:
DWG SPARE PART COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OEM PART NO. OCM NAME OCM PART NO. QTY USED UNIT STOCK? REPAIR
COMPLETE MECH SEAL SHV8/165-E1
Q32Q2VMG1(1.4571) 071 469 000
Burgmann 2 50,480.54 Y N
1 SEAL FACE SHV8/165-1M Burgmann 126 349 072 1 15,814.80 Y N
2 O-RING 177,17X5,33 Burgmann 103 565 350 1 368.02 Y N
3 SPRING WN34-5 Burgmann 127 161 262 12 50.78 Y N
4 BACK-UP RING WN164.10-176 Burgmann 833 495 372 1 1,066.04 Y N
5 SEAL FACE WN215-155 Burgmann 812 000 149 1 4,770.58 Y N
6 O-RING 190,09X3,53 Burgmann 101 741 350 1 3,047.32 Y N
7 PIN WN126-4H6X8 Burgmann 130 588 206 2 7.82 Y N
8 SLEEVE SH4/165-FTA1-5 Burgmann 833 488 246 1 3,937.30 Y N
10 SET SCREW DIN915-M6X16 Burgmann 133 853 205 2 16.36 Y N
11 SHAFT SLEEVE SHV8/165-E1-11 Burgmann 126 237 246 1 14,472.48 Y N
13 COVER SHV8/165-E1-13&M Burgmann 126 353 246 1 13,632.76 Y N
15 THROTTLE RING WN24-160 Burgmann 575 900 712 1 2,566.66 Y N
16 SPRING WN34.5-4 Burgmann 143 604 246 6 24.82 Y N
17 WASHER SHV8/165-E1-17&M Burgmann 126 355 246 1 3,005.32 Y N
18 HEXAGON BOLT DIN933-M6X16 Burgmann 247 571 205 8 10.52 Y N
19 ASSEMBLY FIXTURE WN72-5X45X6 Burgmann 500 023 246 4 126.24 Y N
20 HEXAGON BOLT DIN933-M6X16 Burgmann 247 571 205 4 10.52 Y N
21 HEAD SCREW PLUG WN8-3/4NPT Burgmann 806 770 204 4 184.52 Y N
Attachment #2
SAUDI ARAMCO
PART#: N/A SERIAL :9901-48330 B.I. #:
LUBE OIL SYSTEM FILTERS
1 FILTER ELEMENTS HBR-SP-EL--34481 BARIC HBR-SP-EL--34481 1SET 5,104.32 YES NO

1.3 Pump Unit Data
1.3.1 Clearances and Runout Tolerances
Feature New Clearance (mm) Applicable Sections

Impeller wear ring 0.63 - 0.72 3.7
clearances
Run-Out and Balance Requirements (mm)

Maximum Allowable Shaft Run-out TIR 0.03
Maximum Allowable Impeller Run-out - Measured on Wear 0.03
Ring Surface
Maximum Allowable Element Run-out - Measured on Wear 0.05
Ring Surface
1.3.2 Hazardous Area Operation

The pumpset equipment supplied by Sulzer under Sulzer Order Number 9901-48330
has been designed and manufactured for use in a Hazardous Area classified as a
Class 1 Group IIA Division 2

The supplied equipment is NOT to be installed and/or operated in a Hazardous Area
where the conditions may vary from the above classification limits.
Unauthorised modification of the supplied equipment, or operation of the supplied
equipment outside its design parameters, MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area
classification.
1.3.3 Hazardous Operating Conditions

Maximum Pumping Temperature 146F / 63.3C
Pumped Medium Stabilised crude oil


1.4 Equipment Data Sheets
The Equipment Data Sheets, listed below, are included next as inserts to the manual.
Pump Data Sheets - 48330-PDS
Pump Noise Data Sheets - BE-569367
Motor Data Sheets BE-106004
Gearbox Data Sheet 48330-GDS
Coupling Data Sheet - Motor to Gearbox 9109-DS
Coupling Data Sheet - Gearbox to Pump 9110-DS
Instrument Data Sheets - 4-104.476.138
Lube Oil System Data Sheet DS-34481
Lube Oil System Cooler Data Sheet CE-34481
Lube Oil System Cooler Motor Data Sheet CMD-34481
Lube Oil System Noise Data Sheet NDS-34481
Lube Oil System Relief Valve Data Sheet RV-34481

JOB NO. BI-10-03452 ITEM NO. B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D
APPD.
DHOH
AAN
AAN
SAUDI ARAMCO PURCHASE ORDER NO. 003003/002140
SPECIFICATION NO.
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP REVISION NO. 04 DATE 02.01.2007
CERT.
SAS
SAS
SDS-RE-31004 PAGE 3 OF 32 BY
SMART DATASHEET Plant No B36 Index G Drawing No BE-106004
1 APPLICABLE TO: PROPOSALS PURCHASE AS BUILT
CHKD.
PW
PW
2 FOR UNIT GAS PLANT

3 SITE KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING FACILITY SERVICE CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS
4 NO. REQ 4 (FOUR) PUMP SIZE 20x24x22G CD TYPE NO. STAGES ONE
5 MANUFACTURER SULZER MODEL CD SERIAL NO. 48330
6 NOTES: INFORMATION BELOW TO BE COMPLETED: BY PURCHASER BY MANUFACTURER

BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT (FW REV P2)
7 GENERAL (3.1.1)
8 PUMPS TO OPERATE IN (PARALLEL) 3 (THREE) NO. MOTOR DRIVEN FOUR NO. TURBINE DRIVEN
9 (SERIES) WITH PUMP ITEM NO. B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D PUMP ITEM NO.
10 GEAR ITEM NO. MOTOR ITEM NO. B36-GM-0002 A/B/C/D TURBINE ITEM NO.
DESCRIPTION
BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT

BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PURCHASE (FW REV P1)
11 GEAR PROVIDED BY MOTOR PROVIDED BY PUMP VENDOR TURBINE PROVIDED BY

12 GEAR MOUNTED BY MOTOR MOUNTED BY PUMP VENDOR TURBINE MOUNTED BY
13 GEAR DATA SHT. NO. MOTOR DATA SHT. NO. TURBINE DATA SHT. NO.
14 OPERATING CONDITIONS SITE AND UTILITY DATA (CONT'D)

15 CAPACITY, NORMAL 19,210 (USGPM) RATED 21,130 (USGPM) WATER SOURCE
16 OTHER CHLORIDE CONCENTRATION (PPM)
17 SUCTION PRESSURE MAX./RATED 285 / 82 (PSIG) INSTRUMENT AIR: MAX/MIN PRESS / (PSIG)
18 DISCHARGE PRESSURE 879.0 (PSIG) LIQUID

19 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE 797.0 (PSI) TYPE OR NAME OF LIQUID STABILISED CRUDE
20 DIFF. HEAD 2,226 (FT) NPSHA 265.0 (FT) PUMPING TEMPERATURE
21 PROCESS VARIATIONS NORMAL 145 (F) MAX. 146 (F) MIN. (F)
JO/EWO
22 STARTING CONDITIONS VAPOR PRESSURE 13 (PSIA) @ 145 (F)

23 SERVICE: CONT. INTERMITTENT (STARTS/DAY) RELATIVE DENSITY (SPECIFIC GRAVITY):
24 PARALLEL OPERATION REQ'D (2.1.11) NORMAL 0.829 MAX 0.843 MIN
25 SITE AND UTILITY DATA SPECIFIC HEAT, Cp (BTU/LB F)
BY
AV
AV
KP
26 LOCATION: (2.1.29) VISCOSITY 3.01 (cP) @ 145 (F)

27 INDOOR HEATED UNDER ROOF MAX. VISCOSITY (cP)
25.03.06
19.07.06
02.01.07
DATE
28 OUTDOOR UNHEATED PARTIAL SIDES CORROSIVE/EROSIVE AGENT Chlorides & H2S

29 GRADE MEZZANINE CHLORIDE CONCENTRATION 10 PTB (pounds per thousand barrels)
30 ELECTRIC AREA CLASSIFICATION (2.1.22 / 3.1.5) H2S CONCENTRATION (PPM) <60 (2.11.1.11)
REV NO.
31 CL I GR II A DIV 2 LIQUID HAZARDOUS FLAMMABLE

02
03
04
32 WINTERIZATION REQ'D TROPICALIZATION REQ'D. OTHER 0.2 VOL % BASE SEDIMENT & WATER
REVISIONS 33 SITE DATA (2.1.29) PERFORMANCE

DRAWN 34 ALTITUDE 1419 (FT) BAROMETER 13.91 (PSIA) PROPOSAL CURVE NO. 104.451.653 RPM 3895
BY 35 RANGE OF AMBIENT TEMPS: MIN/MAX. 32 / 122 (F) IMPELLER DIA. RATED 21.889 MAX. 22.75 MIN. 19.342 (IN.)
DATE 36 RELATIVE HUMIDITY: MIN / MAX / (%) RATED POWER 12200 (BHP) EFFICIENCY 87.5 (%)
CHKD BY 37 UNUSUAL CONDITIONS: (2.1.23) DUST FUMES POWER AT NORMAL CAPACITY 10870 (BHP) EFFICINCEY 87 (%)
OPRG. DEPT. 38 OTHER SAND STORMS MINIMUM CONTINUOUS FLOW:
BY 39 UTILITY CONDITIONS: THERMAL (USGPM) STABLE 10600 (USGPM)
DATE 40 STEAM: DRIVERS HEATING PREFERRED OPERATING REGION 14800 TO 24400 (USGPM)
ENG. DEPT. 41 MIN (PSIG) (F) (PSIG) (F) ALLOWABLE OPERATING REGION 10600 TO 24400 (USGPM)
BY 42 MAX (PSIG) (F) (PSIG) (F) MAX HEAD @ RATED IMPELLER 2532 (FT)
DATE 43 ELECTRICITY DRIVERS HEATING CONTROL SHUTDOWN MAX POWER @ RATED IMPELLER 12300 (BHP)
APPD. FOR 44 VOLTAGE 13200 120 NPSHR AT RATED CAPACITY 130 (FT) (2.1.8)
CONSTR. 45 HERTZ 60 60 SUCTION SPECIFIC SPEED <6710 (11,000 US UNITS) (2.1.9)
BY 46 PHASE 3 1 MAX. SOUND PRESS. LEVEL REQ'D < 85 (dBA) (2.1.14)
DATE 47 COOLING WATER: (2.1.17) EST MAX SOUND PRESS. LEVEL 91 (dBA) (2.1.14)
CERTIFIED 48 TEMP. INLET (F) MAX. RETURN (F)
NPSH AVAILABLE AT 120 % OF RATED CAPACITY = 263 ft
BY 49 PRESS. NORM (PSIG) DESIGN (PSIG) REMARKS:
POWER ABSORBED FIG ARE BASED ON SG=0.843
DATE 50 MIN RETURN (PSIG) MAX ALLOW P (PSI)
APPD.
DHOH
AAN
AAN
SAUDI ARAMCO REVISION NO. 00 DATE 02.01.2007
PAGE 4 OF 32 BY
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP Plant No B36 Index G Drawing No BE-106004
CERT.
SAS
SAS
SDS-RE-31004 SITE KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING FACILITY

0
SMART DATASHEET SERVICE CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS

1 CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION (CONT)
CHKD.
PW
PW
2 APPLICABLE STANDARD: SHAFT DIAMETER BETWEEN BEARINGS 5.75 (IN)

0
3 API 610 8TH EDITION SPAN BETWEEN BEARING CENTERS 54 (IN)

4 OTHER 31-SAMSS-004 (SEE REMARKS) SPAN BETWEEN BEARING & IMPELLER (IN)
5 PUMP TYPE: (1.1.2)
6 OH2 BB1 VS1 VS6 REMARKS
7 OH3 BB2 VS2 VS7
ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT (FW REV P2)
8 OH6 BB3 VS3 OTHER COUPLINGS: (3.2.2) DRIVER - PUMP

9 BB4 VS4 MAKE BIBBY TURBOFLEX
10 BB5 VS5 MODEL 8HS-22-230
DESCRIPTION
ISSUED FOR PURCHASE AMENDMENT
11 NOZZLE CONDITIONS: (2.3.2.1 & 2.3.2.3) RATING (HP/100 RPM) 750

ISSUED FOR PURCHASE (FW REV P1)
12 SIZE (IN) FLANGE FAC'G POSITION

13 RATING (LBS) LIMITED END FLOAT REQUIRED NO
14 SUCTION 24 600# RF SIDE SPACER LENGTH 18 (IN)
15 DISCHARGE 20 600# RF SIDE SERVICE FACTOR 1.5
16 BALANCE DRUM DRIVER HALF COUPLING MOUNTED BY:
17 PRESSURE CASING CONNECTIONS: (2.3.3.12) PUMP MFR. DRIVER MFR. PURCHASER
18 NO. SIZE (NPS) TYPE COUPLING PER API 671 (5.2.7)
19 DRAIN 1 0.75 600# BASEPLATES:
20 VENT 1 0.75 600# API BASEPLATE NUMBER N/A (APPENDIX M)
21 PRESSURE GAUGE NON-GROUT CONSTRUCTION: (3.3.13/5.3.7.3.5)
22 TEMP GAUGE
BI-10-03452
BI-10-03452
BI-10-03452
JO/EWO
23 WARM-UP REMARKS:
24 BALANCE / LEAK-OFF
25 CYLINDRICAL THREADS REQUIRED (2.3.3.3) MATERIAL

26 CASING MOUNTING: ( SEE SEPARATE SHEET FOR VERTICALS) APPENDIX H CLASS HKA4 (2.11.1.1)
BY
AV
AV
KP
27 CENTERLINE NEAR CENTERLINE MIN DESIGN METAL TEMP 32 (F)

28 FOOT SEPARATE MOUNTING PLATE BARREL/CASE A 216 WCB IMPELLER A 487 CA6NM
25.03.06
19.07.06
39084
DATE
29 IN-LINE CASE/IMPELLER WEAR RINGS A 747 CB7CU1 / A743 CA15

30 CASING SPLIT: SHAFT 4140
31 AXIAL RADIAL DIFFUSERS N/A
REV NO.
02
03
04
32 CASING TYPE: COUPLING SPACER/HUBS STEEL

33 SINGLE VOLUTE MULTIPLE VOLUTE DIFFUSER COUPLING DIAPHRAGMS (DISKS) STAINLESS STEEL
REVISIONS 34 OVERHUNG BETWEEN BEARINGS BARREL
DRAWN 35 CASE PRESSURE RATING: REMARKS:
BY 36 MAX ALLOWABLE WORKING PRESSURE 1350 (PSIG)
DATE 37 @ 146 (F) BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION

CHKD BY 38 HYDROTEST PRESSURE 2025 (PSIG) BEARING (TYPE/NUMBER):
OPRG. DEPT. 39 SUCT'N PRESS. REGIONS MUST BE DESIGNED FOR MAWP RADIAL 4 LOBED RADIAL / 5.75"
BY 40 ROTATION: (VIEWED FROM COUPLING END) THRUST TILTING PAD / KNISBURY JJ9
DATE 41 CW CCW REVIEW AND APPROVE THRUST BEARING SIZE
ENG. DEPT. 42 IMPELLERS INDIVIDUALLY SECURED LUBRICATION: (2.10.4)
BY 43 GREASE FLOOD RING OIL
REMARKS:
DATE 44 FLINGER PURGE OIL MIST PURE OIL MIST
APPD. FOR 45 BOLT OH3 PUMP TO PAD/FOUNDATION CONSTANT LEVEL OILER PREFERENCE (SEE REMARKS)
CONSTR. 46 SHAFT: X PRESSURE LUBE SYS (5.2.6.2) API-610 API-614
BY 47 SHAFT DIAMETER AT COUPLING 5.75 (IN) OIL VISC. ISO GRADE (5.2.6.2) VG 46
DATE 48
CERTIFIED 49
REMARKS:
BY 50
DATE 51
APPD.
DHOH
AAN
AAN
PAGE 5 OF 32 BY
CERT.
SAS
SAS

0

1 BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION (CONT) MECHANICAL SEAL OR PACKING (CONT)
CHKD.
PW
PW
2 OIL HEATER REQ'D ELECTRIC STEAM VAPOR PRESSURE 13 (PSIA) @ 145 (F)
0
3 OIL PRESS TO BE GREATER THAN COOLANT PRESS (5.2.6.2) HAZARDOUS FLAMMABLE OTHER
4 FLOW RATE MAX/MIN / (USGPM)
5 REMARKS REF. LO. SYSTEM D.S 'S PRESSURE REQUIRED MAX/MIN / (PSIG)
6 TEMPERATURE REQUIRED MAX/MIN / (F)
7 MECHANICAL SEAL OR PACKING QUENCH FLUID:

8 SEAL DATA: (2.7.2) SEE ADDITIONAL REMARKS NAME OF FLUID

9 SEE ATTACHED API-682 DATA SHEET (2.7.2) FLOW RATE (USGPM)
10 NON-API 682 SEAL (2.7.2) SEE REMARKS SEAL FLUSH PIPING: (2.7.3.19 AND APPENDIX D)
DESCRIPTION
11 APPENDIX H SEAL CODE BSTFP TYPE ES (2.11.1.1) SEAL FLUSH PIPING PLAN 31
12 SEAL MANUFACTURER BURGMANN TUBING CARBON STEEL

13 SIZE AND TYPE SHV / PUSHER PIPE STAINLESS STEEL
14 MANUFACTURER CODE Q3Q1 VMG AUXILIARY FLUSH PLAN 61
15 SEAL CHAMBER DATA: (2.1.6) TUBING CARBON STEEL
16 TEMPERATURE 145 (F) PIPE STAINLESS STEEL
17 PRESSURE 94.9 (PSIG) PIPING ASSEMBLY: (3.5.2.10.1)
18 FLOW (USGPM) THREADED UNIONS SOCKET WELDED
19 SEAL CHAMBER SIZE FLANGED TUBE TYPE FITTINGS
20 TOTAL LENGTH (IN) CLEAR LEN. (IN) PRESSURE SWITCH (PLAN 52/53) TYPE
21 SEAL CONSTRUCTION: PRESSURE GUAGE (PLAN 52/53)
22 SLEEVE MATERIAL AISI 316L LEVEL SWITCH (PLAN 52/53) TYPE SEE REMARKS
JO/EWO
23 GLAND MATERIAL AISI 316L LEVEL GUAGE (PLAN 52/53)

24 AUX SEAL DEVICE FLOATING THROTTLE BUSH TEMP INDICATOR (PLANS 21, 22, 23, 32, 41)
25 JACKET REQUIRED HEAT EXCHANGER (PLAN 52/53)
26 GLAND TAPS: (2.7.3.14)
BY
AV
AV
KP
EACH SEAL LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEM HAVE ONE NO.

27 FLUSH (F) DRAIN (D) BARRIER/BUFF. (B) REMARKS:
SEAL POT WITH ONE LEVEL TRANSMITTER.
28 QUENCH (Q) COOLING (C) LUBRICATION (G)
25.03.06
19.07.06
39084
DATE
29 HEATING (H) LEAKAGE PUMPED FLUID (P) PACKING DATA: (APPENDIX C)

30 BAL'NCE FLUID (E) EXTERNAL FLUID INJECTION (X) MANUFACTURER
31 SEAL FLUIDS REQUIREM'T AND AVAILABLE FLUSH LIQUID: TYPE
REV NO.
32 NOTE: IF FLUSH LIQUID IS PUMPAGE LIQUID (AS IN FLUSH PIPING

02
03
04
SIZE NO. OF RINGS

33 PLANS 11 TO 41), FOLLWING FLUSH LIQUID DATA IS NOT REQ'D. PACKING INJECTION REQUIRED
REVISIONS 34 SUPPLY TEMPERATURE MAX/MIN / (F) FLOW (USGPM) @ (F)
DRAWN 35 RELATIVE DENSITY (SPECIFIC GRAVITY) @ (F) LANTERN RING
BY 36 NAME OF FLUID STEAM AND COOLING WATER PIPING

DATE 37 SPECIFIC HEAT, Cp (BTU/LB F) COOLING WATER PIPING PLAN (3.5.4.1)
CHKD BY 38 VAPOR PRESSURE (PSIA) @ (F) COOLING WATER REQUIREMENTS
OPRG. DEPT. 39 HAZARDOUS FLAMMABLE OTHER SEAL JACKET/BRG HSG (USGPM) @ (PSIG)
BY 40 FLOW RATE MAX/MIN / (USGPM) SEAL HEAT EXCHANGER (USGPM) @ (PSIG)
DATE 41 PRESSURE REQUIRED MAX/MIN / (PSIG) QUENCH (USGPM) @ (PSIG)
ENG. DEPT. 42 TEMPERATURE REQUIRED MAX/MIN / (F) TOTAL COOLING WATER (USGPM)
BY 43 BARRIER/BUFFER FLUID: STEAM PIPING: TUBING PIPE

DATE 44 SUPPLY TEMPERATURE MAX/MIN / (F)
APPD. FOR 45 RELATIVE DENSITY (SPECIFIC GRAVITY) @ (F) REMARKS: NO COOLING WATER AVAILABLE.(AIR COOLERS ONL.Y)
CONSTR. 46 NAME OF FLUID
BY 47
DATE 48 A PLUGGED PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED TO PERMIT DIRECT MEASUREMENT OF SEAL
CHAMBER PRESSURE.
CERTIFIED 49 ADDITIONAL REMARKS: SEAL FACES SHALL BE BUKA 30 (CARBON WITH SILICON CARBIDE IMPREGNATION) Vs BUKA 20 (SILICON
BY 50 CARBIDE).
DATE 51
APPD.
DHOH
AAN
AAN

PAGE 6 OF 32 BY
CERT.
SAS
SAS

0

1 INSTRUMENTATION MOTOR DRIVE (CONT) (3.1.5)
CHKD.
PW
PW
2 VIBRATION:
0
3 NONCONTACTING (API 670) TRANSDUCER REMARKS:

4 PROVISION FOR MOUNTING ONLY
5 FLAT SURFACE REQ'D SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINT

6 SEE ATTACHED API 670 DATA SHEET MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD
7 MONITORS AND CABLES (3.4.3.3) BY LSTK CONTRACTOR. OTHER (SEE BELOW) REFER SAES-H-001 / 100 / 101 /1 01 V
8 PUMP:
9 REMARKS REFER 34-SAMSS-625 PUMP SURFACE PREPARATION BLAST CLEAN
10 PRIMER ZINC RICH EPOXY

DESCRIPTION
11 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE: FINISH COAT RAL 7040 (GREY)

12 RADIAL BRG METAL TEMP THRUST BRG METAL TEMP BASEPLATE(3.3.5 & 3.3.7 & 3.3.9 & 3.3.13 & 3.3.14 & 3.3.21 & 3.3.22)
13 PROVISION FOR INSTRUMENTS ONLY BASEPLATE SURFACE PREPARATION BLAST CLEAN
14 SEE ATTACHED API-670 DATA SHEET PRIMER ZINC RICH EPOXY
15 TEMP GAUGES (WITH THERMOWELLS) FINISH COAT RAL 9006 (ALUMINIUM)
16 OTHER Lube Oil Return temperature transmitters SHIPMENT: (4.4.1)
17 PRESSURE GAUGE TYPE DOMESTIC EXPORT EXPORT BOXING REQUIRED
18 LOCATION OUTDOOR STORAGE MORE THAN 6 MONTHS
19 SPARE ROTOR ASSEMBLY PACKAGED FOR:
20 REMARKS HORIZONTAL STORAGE VERTICAL STORAGE
21 TYPE OF SHIPPING PREPARATION
BI-10-03452
BI-10-03452
BI-10-03452
JO/EWO
22 SPARE PARTS (TABLE 6.1)

23 START-UP NORMAL MAINTENANCE REMARKS:
24 SPECIFY
CAPITAL / CRITICAL SPARE PARTS AS PER
25 MATERIAL REQUISITION BE-886101. WEIGHTS
BY
AV
AV
KP
26 MOTOR DRIVEN:
27 REFER MOTOR DS WEIGHT OF PUMP (LBS) 18,000

25.03.06
19.07.06
MOTOR DRIVE (3.1.5)

39084
DATE
28 MANUFACTURER ABB (INDUCTION) WEIGHT OF BASEPLATE (LBS) 35,300

29 13000 (HP) 1787 (RPM) WEIGHT OF MOTOR (LBS) 92,600
30 HORIZONTAL VERTICAL WEIGHT OF GEAR (LBS) 15,200
REV NO.
02
03
04
31 FRAME AMC 900 M4A BSNV TOTAL WEIGHT (LBS) 165,500 INC ANCILLARIES
32 SERVICE FACTOR 1.0 TURBINE DRIVEN:
REVISIONS 33 VOLTS/PHASE/HERTZ 13200 / 3 / 60 WEIGHT OF BASEPLATE (LBS)
DRAWN 34 TYPE INDUCTION WEIGHT OF TURBINE (LBS)
BY 35 ENCLOSURE TEAAC WEIGHT OF GEAR (LBS)
DATE 36 MINIMUM STARTING VOLTAGE 80% TOTAL WEIGHT (LBS)
CHKD BY 37 TEMPERATURE RISE CLASS B REMARKS
OPRG. DEPT. 38 FULL LOAD AMPS 475
BY 39 LOCKED ROTOR AMPS 2304 (485 %)
DATE 40 INSULATION CLASS F OTHER PURCHASE REQUIREMENTS

ENG. DEPT. 41 STARTING METHOD DOL COORDINATION MEETING REQUIRED
BY 42 LUBE FLOOD OIL LUBE SYSTEM REVIEW FOUNDATION DRAWINGS
DATE 43 VERTICAL THRUST CAPACITY REVIEW PIPING DRAWINGS
APPD. FOR 44 UP (LBS) DOWN (LBS) OBSERVE PIPING CHECKS
CONSTR. 45 BEARINGS (TYPE / NUMBER): OBSERVE INITIAL ALIGNMENT CHECK
BY 46 RADIAL SLEEVE / EMZVB-22-280 CHECK ALIGNMENT AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE
DATE 47 THRUST N/A / CONNECTION DESIGN APPROVAL
CERTIFIED 48
BY 49 REMARKS:
DATE 50
APPD.
DHOH
AAN
AAN
PAGE 7 OF 32 BY
CERT.
SAS
SAS

0

1 OTHER PURCHASER REQUIREMENTS (CONT) QA INSPECTION AND TEST (CONT'D)
CHKD.
PW
PW
2 RIGGING DEVICE REQ'D FOR TYPE OH3 PUMP ADDITIONAL INSPECTION REQUIRED FOR:
0
3 HYDRODYNAMIC THRUST BRG SIZE REVIEW REQ'D

4 X LATERAL ANALYSIS REQUIRED (5.2.4.1 & 5.2.4.1.1) MAG PARTICLE LIQUID PENETRANT
5 ROTOR DYNAMIC BALANCE RADIOGRAPHIC ULTRASONIC
6 MOUNT SEAL RESERVOIR OFF BASEPLATE ALTERNATE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA (SEE REMARKS) (4.2.2.1)
7 INSTALLATION LIST IN PROPOSAL HARDNESS TEST REQUIRED FOR:
8 SPARE ROTOR VERTICAL STORAGE (4.2.3.2)

9 TORSIONAL ANALYSIS/REPORT (2.8.2.6) WETTING AGENT HYDROTEST (4.3.2.5)
10 PROGRESS REPORTS REQUIRED VENDOR SUBMIT TEST PROCEDURES
11 RECORD FINAL ASSEMBLY RUNNING CLEARANCES
DESCRIPTION

12 REMARKS: INSPECTION CHECK-LIST (APPENDIX N)

13
14 QA INSPECTION AND TEST REMARKS
15 REVIEW VENDORS QA PROGRAM
16 PERFORMANCE CURVE APPROVAL GENERAL REMARKS

17 SHOP INSPECTION (4.1.4)
18 TEST WITH SUBSTITUTE SEAL (4.3.3.1.2) PUMP NOZZLES AND BASE PLATE SHALL BE
19 TEST NON-WIT WIT OBSERVE REMARK 1: DESIGNED TO ACCOMMODATE TWICE THE NOZZLE
LOADS SPCIFIED IN API 610
20 HYDROSTATIC (4.3.2.4)
21 PERFORMANCE (4.3.3.2.1)
22 NPSH (4.3.4.1.4)
JO/EWO
23 COMPLETE UNIT TEST (ONE)

PUMP MATERIALS SHALL BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH
24 SOUND LEVEL TEST REMARK 2:
ARAMCO SPEC. SAES-A-301
25 CLEANLINESS PRIOR TO
26 FINAL ASSEMBLY
BY
AV
AV
KP
27 NOZZLE LOAD TEST

28 BRG HSG RESONANCE
25.03.06
19.07.06
39084
DATE
SUPPLIER TO REF ARAMCO SPEC. 31-SAMSS-004 AND

29 TEST REMARK 3:
VARIOUS REFERRED SPECIFICATIONS.
30 REMOVE/INSPECT
31 HYDRODYNAMIC BEARINGS
REV NO.
32 AFTER TEST
02
03
04
33 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D OPERATE AS TWO DUTY AND TWO
REVISIONS 34 TEST REMARK 4:
STANDBY OR THREE DUTY AND ONE STANDBY.
DRAWN 35
BY 36
DATE 37 MATERIAL CERTIFICATION REQUIRED (2.11.1.7) PUMP SHUT OFF HEAD SHOULD NOT EXCEED 15 % OF
CHKD BY 38 CASING IMPELLER SHAFT RATED TOTAL DIFFERENTIAL HEAD WITH ZERO
POSITIVE TOLERANCE.
OPRG. DEPT. 39 OTHER REMARK 5:
ALSO AS PER CL.2.1.11 OF 31-SAMSS-004 THE HEAD
BY 40 CASTING REPAIR PROCEDURE APPROVAL REQ'D RISE SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 10 % OF THE HEAD AT
DATE 41 INSPECTION REQUIRED FOR CONNECTION WELDS (2.11.3.5.6) RATED CAPACITY.
ENG. DEPT. 42 MAG PARTICLE LIQUID PENETRANT

BY 43 RADIOGRAPHIC ULTRASONIC AGREED TEST TOLERANCE ON RATED HEAD OF 2182
DATE 44 INSPECTION REQUIRED FOR CASTINGS REMARK 6: FT = +2%/-2%. ON SHUT OFF HEAD OF 2500 FT = +2%/-
5%.
APPD. FOR 45 MAG PARTICLE LIQUID PENETRANT
CONSTR. 46 RADIOGRAPHIC ULTRASONIC
BY 47
DATE 48
FULL DETAILS OF INSPECTION AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS ARE PROVIDED IN 31-SAMSS-004 & MATERIAL
CERTIFIED 49 ADDITIONAL REMARKS: REQUISITION
BY 50
DATE 51
APPD.
DHOH
AAN
AAN

PAGE 8 OF 32 BY
VERTICAL PUMP (API 610-8TH) Plant No B36 Index G Drawing No BE-106004
CERT.
SAS
SAS

0

1 VERTICAL TYPE (FIG 1.1) VS1 VS2 VS3 VS4 VS5 VS6 VS7 OTHER
CHKD.
PW
PW
2
0
3
REMARKS:
4
5
6 VERTICAL PUMPS VERTICAL PUMPS (CONT'D)

7 PUMP THRUST: (+) UP (-) DOWN LINE SHAFT: OPEN ENCLOSED

8 AT MIN FLOW (LBS) (LBS) LINE SHAFT DIAMETER (IN) TUBE DIA. (IN)
9 AT RATED FLOW (LBS) (LBS) LINE SHAFT COUPLING:
10 AT MAX FLOW (LBS) (LBS) SLEEVE & KEY THREADED

DESCRIPTION
11 MAX THRUST (LBS) (LBS) SUCTION CAN THICKNESS (IN)

12 SOLEPLATE (IN) X (IN) LENGTH (FT)
13 SOLEPLATE THICKNESS (IN) DIAMETER (FT)
14 COLUMN PIPE: FLANGED THREADED SUCTION STRAINER TYPE
15 DIAMETER (IN) LENGTH (FT) FLOAT & ROD FLOAT SWITCH
16 GUIDE BUSHINGS: IMPELLER COLLETS ACCEPTABLE (2.5.2)
17 NUMBER HARDENED SLEEVES UNDER BEARINGS
18 LINE SHAFT BEARING SPACING (IN) RESONANCE TEST
19 GUIDE BUSHING LUBE: STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS (5.3.4.1)
20 WATER OIL DRAIN PIPED TO SURFACE (5.3.12.6)
21 GREASE PUMPAGE
BI-10-03452
BI-10-03452
BI-10-03452
22
JO/EWO
23
24
25 CENTERLINE OF DISCHARGE
26 SUMP ARRANGEMENT
BY
AV
AV
KP
27
28 GRADE GRADE
########
19.07.06
39084
DATE
29 DATA
30 LOW PUMP ELEVATION LOW
31 SUMP PUMP LIQUID LENGTH (1ST STG IMPELLER) LIQUID
REV NO.
DEPTH LENGTH
02
03
04
32
33 SUBMERGENCE REQ'D
REVISIONS 34
DRAWN 35
BY 36
DATE 37
CHKD BY 38
OPRG. DEPT. 39
BY 40 SUMP DIMENSION
DATE 41
ENG. DEPT. 42
BY 43
DATE 44 SUMP DEPTH (FT) PUMP LENGTH (FT)
APPD. FOR 45
CONSTR. 46 SUMP DIMENSION (FT) SUBMERGENCE REQ'D (FT)
BY 47
DATE 48 LOW LIQUID (FT) CENTERLINE DISCHARGE HEIGHT (FT)
CERTIFIED 49
BY 50 DATUM ELEVATION (FT)
DATE 51
Saudi Aramco 7305-ENG (08/2000)
ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS
SAUDI ARABIAN OIL COMPANY
THIS DRAWING AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTION IN FULL OR IN PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
EQUIPMENT NOISE DATA SHEET
GENERAL INFORMATION
DB HL
Project Designation: Khurais Gas - Shipping Pumps Inquiry/Purchase Order No.: 3003/2140
Location: Khurais Manufacturer: Sulzer
Equipment Type: Crude Shipping Pump unit (Motor + G'box + Pump) Model No.: CD 20x24x22G / 1s
Equipment Serial No.: 48330

DESCRI PTI ON
PURCHASER'S REQUIREMENTS
This form shall be completed for each piece of equipment (or integrated unit) that is likely to generate noise in excess of 85
ISSUED FOR PURCHASE
dBA at a distance of one meter. If the noise level is greater than 90 dBA, the cost of special design and/or acoustic
treatment should be supplied. Measurements are to be made in accordance with ANSI S1.13 and at full design load, unless
otherwise indicated. For rotating electric machinery, use points defined in IEEE Standard 85.
Also measure at: 50% load 120% load Other load

DATE JO/ EWO
03451
BI-10-
SUPPLIER, MANUFACTURER OR VENDOR INFORMATION
Sound Pressure Level, dBA
Standard Design: 90 dB(A) Special Design: With Acoustic Treatment:

REV.
01D
NO.
DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER
Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels, dBA (Ref. 0.02 mPA)
DATE:
(Supplier's Guaranteed Maximum Sound Pressure Level at One Meter)
PROJECT
ENGINEER
Octave Band Center Frequency Standard Special With Acoustic
(Hz) (Hz) Design Design Treatment
DATE:
20 - 75 63 92
CERTIFIED
75 - 150 125 88
150 - 300 250 86
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION 300 - 600 500 87
AGENCY
600 - 1200 1000 86
DATE:
1200 - 2400 2000 82.5
OPERATIONS 2400 - 4800 4000 80.5
4800 - 9600 8000 71
DATE:
Description of Special Design: Added Cost:

CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
Description of Acoustic Treatment: Added Cost:

DATE:
BY:
ALL
REQUIREMENTS,
CERTIFICATE
THIS INDICATES THAT REV. NO.__________
REV I SI ON CERT I FI CA T I ON
Supplier, Manufacturer or Vendor: Sulzer (ref. EQUIPMENT NOISE CALCULATION SHEET Rev.02 2007 Jun 19)
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
OF THIS DRAWING IS COVERED, FOR
Represented by: Peter Sandford Title: Technical Services Manager

Signature: Date: 2007 Jun 19
COMPLETION
APPROVAL/CERTIFICATION
EQUIPMENT NOISE DATA SHEET DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DRAWING
KHURAIS CRUDE SHIPPING PUMP UNIT DAT

327 G BE-569367 01D
1
BY
SAUDI ARABIA JO / EWO:
EDSD/7305-0800.XLS
EQUIPMENT NOISE CALCULATION SHEET Rev. 02 2007 Jun 19 P. Sandford
48330 Aramco Khurais Area calculations A-weighted Noise Level calculations
BASEPLATE Dimensions Sound propagation over

Surface vibration Sound Power
Fully grouted reflecting plane
Sulzer GA 0-104.430.195 Length Width Height Area 10 lg A V 10 lg V Lw
Reference surface 11.85 3.50 0.62 60.5 17.8 0.2 72 90
2
Units m m m m dB re 1 m2 mm/s dB re 50 nm/s dB re 1 pW
MOTOR Sound propagation over Sound Pressure

Dimensions Sound Power
ABB reflecting plane No load On load
Sulzer GA 0-104.430.195 Length Width Height Area 10 lg A Lp Lp Lw
Reference surface 5.97 2.38 4.51 89.5 19.5

Measurement surface 7.97 4.38 5.51 171.0 22.3 88 90 112.5
GEARBOX Sound propagation over

Dimensions Sound Pressure Sound Power
reflecting plane
Sulzer GA 0-104.430.195 Length Width Height Area 10 lg A Lp Lw

Measurement surface 3.84 3.63 2.57 52.3 17.2 90 107
PUMP Sound propagation over

Dimensions Sound Pressure Sound Power
reflecting plane

Measurement surface 4.08 3.80 3.09 64.2 18.1 93 111
COMPLETE PUMP UNIT Sound propagation over

Dimensions reflecting plane Sound Pressure Sound Power
Reference surface . 11.85 3.50 5.70 216.5 23.4

Measurement surface 13.85 5.50 6.70 335.5 25.3 90 115.5
Units m m m m2 dB re 1 m2 dB re 20 Pa dB re 20 Pa dB re 1 pW
i Reference Surface: - Imaginary box enclosing Noise Source

DEFINITIONS
ii Measuring Surface: - 1 m from Reference Surface
1 Calculation methods and procedures: ref. EEMUA 140 clause 3.2.2 (Large-source method)
2 Sound Pressure levels are mean values in 'free-field' conditions (i.e. no reverberation), with no extraneous
background noise.
3 These calculations assume the Motor noise increases by 2.5 dB "On load"
NOTES: 4 The noise levels of the Complete Pump Unit measured during a normal performance test may exceed these values
for the following reasons:
- reverberation in the test environment
- extraneous background noise from the flow control valve, inlet and outlet pipes
- noise radiated by the ungrouted baseplate
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
INDUCTION MOTOR ( 250 hp and Above)
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
APPLICABLE TO: INQUIRY PROPOSAL PURCHASE AS BUILT
Plant KCPF Plant No. B36 Driven Equipment CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS
ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
#REF!
#REF! B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D
Purchaser's Data to be Supplied With Inquiry

#REF!
#REF!
IM
THIS DRAWING AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED WITHIN HEREIN ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTION IN FULL OR PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THE DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
MOTOR DESIGN DATA
BASIC DATA:
Type of Motor: General Purpose Special Purpose (HEAVY DUTY CHEMICAL AREA USE)
Volts: 13200 V Phase: 3 Hertz: 60 Nameplate Rating: 9700 kW 13000 hp
Synchronous RPM: 1800 Min. % Overspeed: Per NEMA MG-1 Special %
Bearing Type: Hydrodynamic Antifriction
Maximum Drive Equipment Vertical Thrust (Vertical Motors): N/A
Differential Protection Required: Yes No
ANSI Class of Differential Current Transformer Required: C 20

DESCRIPTION
SITE DATA:
REISSUE DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
Area Classification: Non-Hazardous
Hazardous (Classified) Class: 1 Group: II A Zone: 2

ISSUED FOR PP (FW REV D1)
Temperature Class: T3
ISSUED FOR IFP (FW REV D2)
Elevation: > 50 Ft
Motor Location: Outdoors Indoors Offshore
Non-Massive Foundation Description:
UNUSUAL CONDITIONS:
Severe Corrosive Area External Forces and Moments
Seismic Loading: Other WIND BLOWN DUST AND RAIN (SALT LAIDEN AIR)
17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452
JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CONDITIONS:

2
Max. S.C. KVA at Motor Bus I t Let-Through Energy
07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
Min. S.C. KVA at Motor Bus X/R Ratio

DATE
Resistance Grounding System Ground Fault Amperes 400 1000 Other

REV
NO.
00
01
B
STARTING:
DISCIPLINE
Full Voltage Reduced Voltage % and Type REFER TECH. SPEC. BE-966101/ PARA 4.5.4
ENGINEER
Variable Frequency Drive Unit Type
DATE VFD Details Attached (if motor purchased separately from drive unit.)
PROJECT
Torques in excess of NEMA MG-1, if Required
ENGINEER
Loaded (100%) Partially Loaded % Other
DATE Load Speed vs Torque Curve and Load wK 2 YES Provided

CERTIFIED Voltage at Locked Rotor ( Min. % of Rated if Less Than 80%) %
Capability in Excess of Table s, if Required
DATE
CONSTRUCTION
MOUNTING:
AGENCY
Horizontal Vertical Shaft Up Vertical Shaft Down
DATE Foot Mounted Flange Mounted, NEMA Type

OPERATIONS Baseplate Furnished By PUMP SUPPLIER Soleplate Furnished By:
DATE ENCLOSURE:
TEFC TEPV Explosion Proof Other

EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
TEAAC TEAAC Tubes Copper Copper Alloy Aluminium
Aluminium Alloy Stainless Steel
AISI 300 Series Hardware (Always required for severe corrosive area)
DATE:
BY:
Type of Protection
THIS INDICATES THAT REV NO
REQUIREMENT, BY DRAWING
Aex nA
COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
REVISION CERTIFICATION
OF THIS DRAWING IS
Eex p
COVERED, FOR ALL
DATA SHEET FOR INDUCTION MOTOR ( 250 hp and Above) DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DAT
ITEM N0. B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D 9
SERVICE CRUDE SHIPPING PUMPS
B36 G BE-106004
of 04
KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING FACILITY SAUDI ARABIA JO/EWO- BI-10-03452 36
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
MOTOR DESIGN DATA (Continued)
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
ENG'G CERT.
DRIVE SYSTEM:
#REF!
#REF!
#REF! Direct Connected Gear Coupling Type: FLEXIBLE DIAPHRAGM Furnished By: PUMP SUPPLIER
Rotation Required By Driven Equipment When Facing Motor Opposite Drive End:
#REF!
#REF!
IM
Clockwise Counterclockwise
2
Driven Equipment Wk 5930 lb-Ft @ 1780 RPM
Other
Reciprocating Compressor Load:
Crank-Effort Diagram Curve No. NA
Miscellaneous:
Evaluation Factor (EF) $/kW Normal operating load; HP

DESCRIPTION
ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
BEARING TEMPERATURE DETECTORS:

Terminal Head Required Box Required
Bearing Housing Temperature Indicators Required 100 Ohm / Platinum, 3 wire double element
PARTIAL DISCHARGE SENSORS:
Required Type / Manufacturer: Bus cupler Capacitors / Iris Power Canada
Installation Location: Inside Main Terminal Box
Other
LUBRICATION SYSTEM:
Self Lube Pressure Lube Oil Mist

17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452
Bearing Oil Rings for Coastdown Required

JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
Bearing Constant-Level Sight Feed Oilers Required; Type
Special Seals Required for Gas Purge Non-Conductive Seals Required

07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
Lube System Common with Driven Equipment: Supplied By PUMP SUPPLIER

DATE
MAIN TERMINAL BOX:

REV
NO.
00
01
B
Specific Box Location Required:

DISCIPLINE
Box Required to Oversized for Installation of Purchaser Equipment
ENGINEER
Purchaser Equipment to be Installed NONE
DATE Main Supply Leads: Conductor Size Type Insulation

PROJECT
On Line Motor Monitoring Sensors Required to be Installed:
ENGINEER
Type / Manufacturer
DATE Phase Current Transformers for Local Ammeter Required:

CERTIFIED Accuracy Class Quantity Ratio
Mounted / Installed By:
DATE Voltage Transformers Required for Local Voltmeter:

CONSTRUCTION
Accuracy Class Quantity Ratio
AGENCY
Mounted / Installed By:
DATE Provision for Main Supply Lead Termination:

OPERATIONS Universal Bushing Stud Seperable Connector per ANSI / IEEE-386
Other, Specify
DATE Terminal Box Space Heaters Required
Provisions for Terminal Box Purging Required

EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
Silver-plated Bus Connections Required Ground Bus Required
Other Main Conduit Box Requirements:

SURGE CAPACITORS - SURGE ARRESTORS - BREATHERS/DRAIN HOLES - GROUND BUS
DATE:
BY:
SPACE HEATERS: (Mark all available voltages)
120V, 1ph (OPER.VOLT). 120 / 208V, 3ph. 240V, 1 ph. (RATED.VOLT) 277 / 480, 3 ph.
480V, 3 ph.
Temperature Class:
OF THIS DRAWING IS
COVERED, FOR ALL
DAT
ITEM N0. B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D 10
B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT (Continued)
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
ENG'G CERT.
COUPLING:
#REF!
#REF!
#REF! Taper Fit Cylindrical Fit Coupling Supplied by: PUMP SUPPLIER
Manufacturer Model Data Sheet No.

#REF!
#REF!
IM
Supplied By: Motor Manufacturer Driven Equipment Manufacturer Purchaser
Idling Adaptor / Mass Moment Simulator Supplied By PUMP OR MOTOR SUPPLIER
Coupling to be Used for Test: Contract Shop None
PAINTING:
Vendor's Standard Extra Coat at Shipment
Saudi Aramco Approved Protective Coating System APCS
MISCELLANEOUS:
DESCRIPTION
Epoxy Grout to be Used, Type
Nameplate Material Stainless Steel Monel

Quantity of Special Tools and / or Special lifting Equipment Required
Shaft Seal of Electrically Non-Conducting Material

Location of Auxilliary Junction Boxes

Switches with Contacts Rated for DC Yes No
Data Required on Current Variation and Efficiency for Variable Torque Load
Motor Manufacturer Review and Comment on Foundation Drawings Required
Assembly Photgraphs Required per 6.2.4.5
External Forces on Motor Housing That May Affect Site Performance
Special Shipping Bearings Required per 4.4.3.9

17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452
Other / Comments
JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
MOTORS SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL JACKSCREWS.

07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
SUPPLIER SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL (1/8 IN THICK) STAINLESS STEEL SHIM PACKS BETWEEN MOTOR FEET AND
DATE
MOUNTING PLATE
REV
NO.
00
01
B
NOTES:
DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER
DATE
PROJECT
ENGINEER
DATE
CERTIFIED
DATE
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
DATE:
BY:
OF THIS DRAWING IS
COVERED, FOR ALL
DAT
ITEM N0. B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D 11
B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
REQUIRED ANALYSIS, SHOP INSPECTION AND TESTS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
Required Witnessed Observed

ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
#REF!
#REF! Lateral Critical Speed Analysis by By Motor Vendor
Design Review Meeting

#REF!
#REF!
IM
Torsional Analysis by
Shop Inspection
Data Preservation
Radiographic Test; Parts:
Ultrasonic Test; Parts: FORGED COMPONENTS
Magnetic Particle Test; Parts: SHAFT WELDS
Liquid Penetrant Test; Parts:
Hardness Test; Parts:
Optional ASTM Tests to be Proposed By Vendor

DESCRIPTION
Check Balance with Half Coupling NA
Inspection for Cleanliness per API

Stator Inspection Prior to VPI
Residual Unbalance Test (on one motor)

Routine Test
Polarization Test Volts 1000V 2500V 5000V
Vibration Recording
Stator Core Test
Special Surge Test on Sample Coils
Sealed Winding Conformance Test
DC High-Potential Test
Complete Test
17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452
Rated Rotor Temperature Test if no Complete Test

JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
Bearing Inspection at Completion of Test

Unbalance Response Test (on one motor)
07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
Bearing Housing Natural Frequency Test

DATE
Certified Data Prior to Shipment
Other
REV
NO.
00
01
B
DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER
DATE
PROJECT
ENGINEER
DATE Note: Not all Purchaser data items are applicable for all orders. Items which are not applicable should be marked
CERTIFIED "N/A" by the purchaser. Purchaser should mark with an asterisk (*) items which are to be as specified by
the driven equipment manufacturer. Items marked with an asterisk (*) shall be filled in by the vendor and
DATE returned with the proposal.

CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
DATE
OPERATIONS PLEASE REFER TO MATERIAL REQUISITION BE-886101 APPENDIX 7 FOR QUANTITY/CLARIFICATIONS FOR MOTOR TESTING REQUIREMENTS.
DATE
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
DATE:
BY:
OF THIS DRAWING IS
COVERED, FOR ALL
DAT
ITEM N0. B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D 12
B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
VENDOR DATA TO BE SUPPLIED WITH PROPOSAL:
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
Vendor Purchased by Ultimate User

ENG'G CERT.
ABB SULZER SAUDI ARAMCO

#REF!
#REF!
#REF! Vendor Job Reference LDS 0.5.1530 Proposal No. Contract No.
#REF!
#REF!
IM
Kilowatts (Horsepower) 9700 (13000) Full Load Speed (RPM) 1787
Frame No. AMC 900 Enclosure Type TEAAC
LOCKED ROTOR:
Amps at Rated Voltage 2304 Amps at 80% Voltage 1810 Power Factor 0.14
Locked Rotor Withstand Time, Cold at:
70% Voltage sec 80% Voltage 15 sec
Locked Rotor Withstand Time, Hot at:

DESCRIPTION

2
Motor Rotor Wk 773.9
TORQUE:
Full Load Torque (FLT) 51.8 Ft-lb Locked Rotor Torque 46 %FLT
Pull Up Torque 46 %FLT Breakdown Torque 227 %FLT
Speed Torque Curve No. 3BSY200026-ETX Speed-Current Curve No. 3BSY200026-ETX
Estimated Starting Time at 80%+100 % Voltage Curve No. 3BSY200026-ETX
DESIGN DATA AT 1.0 SERVICE FACTOR AND RATED VOLTAGE:

Normal
17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452
No Load Current 66.6 Amps

JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
Load 25% 50% 75% Full Operating
Amperes 137 242 355 475

07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
Power Factor
DATE
0.84 0.92 0.93 0.92
Nominal Efficiency 91.6 95 95.8 96
Guaranteed Efficiency 88.9 93.4 94.9 95.1

REV
NO.
00
01
B
Bearing Type 4 LOBE SLEEVE

DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER
UTILITY REQUIREMENTS:
DATE Bearing Oil: Oil Type ISO VG 46 Quantity USGPM Pressure psig
PROJECT
Heat Load to be Removed 10 BTU/MIN kW per brg.
ENGINEER
Ventilation Air Requirements: Quantity 40 m3 USGPM Pressure psig
DATE (Pressurization)
CERTIFIED INFORMATION FOR RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR LOAD:
Crank-Effort Diagram Curve No. Max. Current Pulsations %Full Load
DATE Calculated Efficiency Based on Current-Pulsation Operating Conditions:

CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
WEIGHTS / DIMENSIONS
DATE Net Weight 79800 lb Rotor Weight 23710 lb Shipping Weight lb

OPERATIONS Max. Erection Weight lb Length Ft Width Ft Height Ft
Air Gap in
DATE
EDSD VERIFICATION
OTHER REQUIRED INFORMATION:

CONTROL NUMBER
Max. Sound PressureLevel at 3 Ft 85 dB(A) no load
When Rotor Dynamic Analysis is Specified, List Foundation Data Required from Purchaser:
DATE:
BY:
OF THIS DRAWING IS
COVERED, FOR ALL
DAT
ITEM N0. B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D 13
B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
VENDOR DATA TO BE SUPPLIED WITH PROPOSAL:
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
Comments:
ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
IM
DATA TO BE SUPPLIED BY VENDOR AFTER RECEIPT OF ORDER:
As Designed As Built
GENERAL INFORMATION
Vendor ABB Purchased by Sulzer Ultimate User SAUDI ARAMCO
Vendor Job Reference Proposal No. Contract No.
Site KHURAIS Service CRUDE SHIPPING PUMP Equipment No. B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D
Model Serial No.

DESCRIPTION
MOTOR DATA
DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
Rating Data at 1.0 Service Factor:
Nameplate Power 9700 (13000) kW (HP) Voltage 13200 Phase 3 Hertz 60

Full Load Speed 1787 RPM Enclosure Type Frame Size

Rotation When Facing Motor Opposite Drive End:
Clockwise Counterclockwise Bi-Directional
Thermal Capacity Curve Numbers 3BSY200026-ETX
INSULATION SYSTEM:
17.Nov.05 B1=10=03452 REISSUE
o o
Class F Temperature Rise 70 C Above 50 C ambient at 1.0 SF
INDUCTION MOTOR EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT DATA:

JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
Locked Rotor at Rated Voltage:
Stator R 0.00335 Stator X 0.0742 Magn X 7.01

07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
Rotor R 0.00131 Rotor X 0.0829 Magn R 340.9

DATE
Rated Load at Rated Voltage:
Stator R 0.00335 Stator X 0.1336 Magn X 7.01

REV
NO.
00
01
B
Rotor R 0.007114 Rotor X 0.1111 Magn R 340.9

DISCIPLINE Degree C.
Phase-to-Phase Resistance 0,0744 ohm @ 20
ENGINEER
Subtransient Reactance X" d 0,249
DATE Total Winding Capacitance to Ground 120 micro F

PROJECT
ENGINEER
RESIDUAL VOLTAGE OPEN-CIRCUIT TIME CONSTANT:
DATE Motor Only: 2.6 seconds Motor With Surge Capacitors: seconds
CERTIFIED Motor Rotor 1446 kgm2
DATE TORQUE:
CONSTRUCTION
Full Load Torque (FLT) 51.8 kNm Locked Rotor Torque 46 %FLT
AGENCY
Pull Up Torque 46 %FLT Breakdown Torque 227 %FLT
DATE
OPERATIONS MOTOR PERFORMANCE CURVES SUPPLIED:
Speed Torque Curve No. 3BSY200026-ETX Speed-Current Curve No. 3BSY200026-ETX
DATE Speed-Time Curve No. 3BSY200026-ETX Speed-Power Curve No. 3BSY200026-ETX

Estimated Starting Time at 100-80 % Voltage Curve No. 3BSY200026-ETX
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
Starting Performance Thermal Limit Curve No. 3BSY200026-ETX
Test Report Reference No.

DATE:
BY:
OF THIS DRAWING IS
COVERED, FOR ALL
DAT
ITEM N0. B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D 14
B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
MOTOR DATA (continued)
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
BEARING INFORMATION:
Coupling End Bearing: Manufacturer's Type Part No.

ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
#REF!
#REF! Outboard End Bearing: Manufacturer's Type Part No.
Bore Length in Bore Diameter in Min. Bore Diameter in Max.

#REF!
#REF!
IM
Design Clearance with Shaft in Min. in Max.
Bearing Loading psig
Thrust Bearing Top (Bottom): Manufacturer's Type Part No.
Bearing Lubrication: Self Pressure Flood Other
Pressure / Flood Lubrication: Oil USGPM @ psig BTU/MIN Losses
WEIGHTS / DIMENSIONS:
Net Weight 7960 lb Rotor Weight 23700 lb Shipping Weight lb
Max. Erection Weight lb Max. Maintenance Weight lb

DESCRIPTION
Area Classification: Class: Group: Division:
Maximum Sound Pressure Level at 3 Ft 86 dB(A)

REISSUED DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
ACCESSORIES
WINDING TEMPERATURE DETECTORS:
Number 2 PER PHASE Resistance Rating, Ohm / Material 100 OHM / PLATINUM RTD'S PER 17-SAMSS-502
o o
Recommended Alarm Setting C Recommended Trip Setting C
Thermal Temperature Switch Contacts:
o
Normally Open, Closing Setting C
o
Normally Closed, Opening Setting C
BEARING TEMPERATURE DETECTORS:

17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452
Resistance Rating, Ohm / Material 100 OHM / PLATINUM RTD'S PER 17-SAMSS-502
JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
o o
Recommended Alarm Setting 90 C Recommended Trip Setting 100 C
07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
DATE
VIBRATION DETECTOR: (REFER TO 17-SAMSS-502 FOR SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS)
Non-Contacting Probes: Provision Only Installed No. per Bearing TWO
Probe Type Model Bentley Nevada or Equal Oscillator / Demodulator Model

REV
NO.
00
01
B
DISCIPLINE
Bearing Housing Seismic Detectors: Provision Only Installed
ENGINEER
Sensor Type Model Bentley Nevada or Equal Output Transducer Model
DATE No. per Bearing Location ( Orientation; H,V,A)

PROJECT
Vibration Switch: Manual Reset Electrical Reset
ENGINEER
Switch Type Model
DATE
CERTIFIED SPACE HEATERS: (OPERATING CONDITIONS) (NOMINAL)
Motor Enclosure:
o
DATE Voltage 120 V 1 Phase 3 Phase Wattage kW Max. Surface Temp. C
CONSTRUCTION
Main Terminal Enclosure:
AGENCY
o
Voltage 120 V 1 Phase 3 Phase Wattage kW Max. Surface Temp. C
DATE
OPERATIONS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
Differential: Class Ratio Number Mounted
DATE Phase: Class Ratio Number Mounted

EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS:
Connection Class Ratio Number Mounted
Fuse Type Class Ratio Number Mounted

DATE:
BY:
OF THIS DRAWING IS
COVERED, FOR ALL
DAT
ITEM N0. B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D 15
B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
MOTOR DATA (continued)
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
SURGE PROTECTION
Surge Arrestor Type: Voltage V

ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
#REF!
#REF! Capacitor Type: Capacitance mF

#REF!
#REF!
IM
OTHER INFORMATION
Drawing References mm Accessories Outline
Wiring Diagram
WINDING / ROTOR REPAIR DATA:
All Dimension are:
COIL INFORMATION:
DESCRIPTION
Total Copper Weight lb Copper Strand Size
Strand Insulation Number of Strands per Coil Turn

REISSUED DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
Turn Insulation Number of Turns per Coil
Coil Ground Wall Insulation

Finished Coil Dimension in Slot Region WxHxL ( Also Give Tolerances)

Total Number of Stator Slots Winding Throw
Winding Connection
Special End-Turn Bracing
Slot Filler Description / Thickness: Top
Side Between Top/Bottom Coils
Special End-Turn Bracing
Other Information
17.Nov.05 B!-10-03452
JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
ROTOR / ROTOR BAR INFORMATION:

07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
Number of Rotor Bars Bar Alloy Length

DATE
Cross-section Dimension (Also Give Tolerances)
Short Circuit End-Ring Alloy

REV
NO.
00
01
B
Rough Forging or Cast Dimensions: OD ID Thickness

DISCIPLINE
Non-Magnetic Retaining Ring Alloy
ENGINEER
Shaft Material Grade of Castings
DATE
PROJECT
OTHER INFORMATION:
ENGINEER
MOTOR ACCESSORIES:
DATE
CERTIFIED
DATE
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
DATE:
BY:
OF THIS DRAWING IS
COVERED, FOR ALL
DAT
ITEM N0. B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D 16
B36 G BE-106004
of 04
Saudi Aramco 2616-ENG(03/99)
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
17-SAMSS-503, SEVERE DUTY TOTALLY ENCLOSED SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
APPLICABLE TO: Inquiry Proposal Purchase As Built
PMT
SAS
SAS
SAS
KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING
Plant: FACILITY Plant No. B36 Driven Equipment: Lube Oil Pumps
ENG'G CERT.
PW
PW
PW BUYERs Data to Be Supplied With Inquiry:

AV
AV
AV
BASIC DATA
Volts: 460 Phase: 3 Hertz: 60 Nameplate: kW hp
Full Load RPM: Speed Range for Variable Speed Drive:
Clockwise Counter-Clockwise Bi-Directional
Motor Thrust Loads: None Other
Type Load: Direct Coupled Belt Driven Other
NEMA Torque Design: B (normal) Other (specify)
DESCRIPTION
SITE DATA
14.Nov.05 BI-10-03452 RE ISSUED DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
Hazardous (Classified) Class: 1 Group: IIA Zone: 2

Ignition Temperature: T3 C
21.Sep.05 BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR COMMENTS / RFQ
07.Dec.05 BI-10-03452 ISSUED FOR PP ( FW REV D1 )
Elevation (Specify if Above 3000 ft.): 1419 ft
STARTING
Full Voltage Reduced Voltage % and Type
VFD Details Attached (If motor purchased separately from drive unit.)
MOUNTING
JO/EWO
Foot Mounted Flange Mounted, NEMA Type
ENCLOSURE
DATE
TEFC TENV Explosion Proof Other IP 56

Main Terminal Box Conduit Hub Size: in.
REV
NO.
00
A
DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER
Space Heaters
Space Heater Required; Operating Voltage: 120 V, 1 ph
DATE Other Voltage Max. Surface Temp. at Operating Volts C
PROJECT
ENGINEER Heater Leads: Main Terminal Box Separate Heater Terminal Box
DATE NOTE:
CERTIFIED SPACE HEATER IS REQUIRED FOR THE MOTORS RATED 75kW AND ABOVE
DATE
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
DATE:
BY:
ALL APPROVAL/CERTIFICATION
DATA SHEET FOR LOW VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTOR DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DAT
30
(DCC) NO.
ITEM N0. B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
PMT 17-SAMSS-503, SEVERE DUTY TOTALLY ENCLOSED SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
SAS
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
SUPPLIER Data:
PW
PW
PW
GENERAL INFORMATION
AV
AV
AV
Manufacturer Model Serial No.
MOTOR DATA
Nameplate Power kW (hp) Voltage 460 Phase 3 Hertz 60
Full Load Speed RPM Enclosure Type Frame Size
DESCRIPTION
Torque:
Speed-Torque Curve No. Speed-Current Curve No.
Design Data at 1.0 Service Factor and Rated Voltage

No Load Current Amps

Load 25% 50% 75% Full
Amperes
Power Factor
Nominal Efficiency
Guaranteed Efficiency
Locked Rotor Amps at Rated Voltage

JO/EWO
Insulation System
Class F Temperature Rise 70 C above 50 C ambient at 1.0 SF
DATE
Bearing Information
Coupling End Bearing: Manufacturers Type Part No.

REV
NO.
00
A
Outboard End Bearing: Manufacturers Type Part No.

DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER
Certification: Class Group Zone Agency
DATE
PROJECT
ENGINEER
Weights/Dimensions
Net Weight lb Rotor Weight lb
DATE
CERTIFIED Space Heaters: (Operating Conditions)
Voltage V Wattage kW hp Max. Surface Temp. C
DATE
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
SUPPLIER MUST COMPLETE THIS MOTOR DATA SHEET FOR ALL PROPOSED ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVERS.
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
DATE:
BY:
DAT
31
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
17-SAMSS-503, SEVERE DUTY TOTALLY ENCLOSED SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
APPLICABLE TO: Inquiry Proposal Purchase As Built
PMT
SAS
SAS
SAS
KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING
Plant: FACILITY Plant No. B36 Driven Equipment: Lube Oil Cooler Fan
ENG'G CERT.
PW
PW
PW BUYERs Data to Be Supplied With Inquiry:

AV
AV
AV
BASIC DATA
Volts: 460 Phase: 3 Hertz: 60 Nameplate: HOLD kW hp
Full Load RPM: Speed Range for Variable Speed Drive:
Motor Thrust Loads: None Other
Type Load: Direct Coupled Belt Driven Other
NEMA Torque Design: B (normal) Other (specify)
DESCRIPTION
SITE DATA
Hazardous (Classified) Class: 1 Group: IIA Zone: 2

Ignition Temperature: T3 C
Elevation (Specify if Above 3000 ft.): ft
STARTING
Full Voltage Reduced Voltage % and Type
VFD Details Attached (If motor purchased separately from drive unit.)
MOUNTING
JO/EWO
Foot Mounted Flange Mounted, NEMA Type
ENCLOSURE
DATE
TEFC TENV Explosion Proof Other IP 56

Main Terminal Box Conduit Hub Size: in.
REV
NO.
00
A
DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER
Space Heaters
Space Heater Required; Operating Voltage: 120 V, 1 ph
DATE Other Voltage Max. Surface Temp. at Operating Volts C
PROJECT
ENGINEER Heater Leads: Main Terminal Box Separate Heater Terminal Box
DATE NOTE:
CERTIFIED SPACE HEATER IS REQUIRED FOR THE MOTORS RATED 75kW AND ABOVE
DATE
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
DATE:
BY:
DAT
33
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
SAS
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
SUPPLIER Data:
PW
PW
PW
GENERAL INFORMATION
AV
AV
AV
Manufacturer Model Serial No.
MOTOR DATA
Nameplate Power kW (hp) Voltage 460 Phase 3 Hertz 60
Full Load Speed RPM Enclosure Type Frame Size
DESCRIPTION
Torque:


Load 25% 50% 75% Full
Amperes
Power Factor
Nominal Efficiency
Locked Rotor Amps at Rated Voltage

JO/EWO
Insulation System
DATE
Bearing Information
Coupling End Bearing: Manufacturers Type Part No.

REV
NO.
00
A
Outboard End Bearing: Manufacturers Type Part No.

DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER
Certification: Class Group Zone Agency
DATE
PROJECT
ENGINEER
Weights/Dimensions
Net Weight lb Rotor Weight lb
DATE
DATE
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
DATE:
BY:
DAT
34
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
COUPLING
Note INDICATES INFORMATION TO COMPLETED BY BUYER
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
PMT
INDICATES INFORMATION TO BE COMPLETED BY MANUFACTURER

ENG'G CERT.
Applicable to Proposals Purchase As built Item Nos.

#REF!
#REF!
#REF! Service CRUDE SHIPPING PUMP MOTOR TO GEARBOX Operating

Spare
#REF!
#REF!
IM
DRIVER TYPE ELECTRIC MOTOR MANUFACTURER ABB MODEL AMC 900 M4A
SERIAL TYPE. TAG NO.
COUPLING TYPE FLEX DISK

MANUFACTURER BIBBY TRANSMISSIONS MODEL 8HSU SIZE 8HSU-30-305-56
ASSEMBLY DRAWING NO. 9109 SHT1
OPERATING CONDITIONS
DESCRIPTION
POWER TRANSMITTED (hp): NORMAL 13000 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS 13000

SPEED (RPM): MINIMUM ALLOWABLE NORMAL 1787 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS TRIP
17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452 REISSUED DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
TORQUE (Ft-lb): MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS 38206 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS

FREQUENCY OF TRANSIENTS (EVENTS/TIME) (2.1.1)
ADDITIONAL ANF EXCITING FREQUENCY (2.3.4.C)

MINIMUM REQUIRED EXPERIENCE FACTOR, SF (2.1.1) ACTUAL SF 1.61

o
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( F) MAXIMUM MINIMUM
ENVIRONMENT (2.6.5) (2.1.8) DUST HYDROGEN SULFIDE SAND STORMS
COUPLING DATA
o
SHAFT SEPERATION AT OPERATING TEMP. (in B.S.F.) 18 THERMAL GROWTH (in.) FROM F.AMBIENT
MOTOR ROTOR FLOAT (in.) LIMITED END FLOT (in.) (2.2.3) ELECTRICALLY INSULATED (2.1.12)
MARINE TYPE REQUIRED (2.2.2) FLEX-HUB TYPE REQIURED (2.2.2)
JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
REQUIRED MISALIGNMENT (2.1.2)

STEADY STATE: ANGULAR (DEG.) 0.75 PARALLEL OFFSET (in) AXIAL (in)
07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
TRANSIENT: ANGULAR (DEG.) PARALLEL OFFSET (in) AXIAL (in)

DATE
DYNAMIC BALANCE (2.5.2.1) COMPONENT BALANCE & ASSEMBLY CHECK BALANCE (2.5.2.1)(2.5.2.3)
ASSEMBLY BALANCE (2.5.2.4) REPEATABILITY TEST AFTER ASSEMBLY BALANCE (2.5.2.5)
REV
NO.
00
01
B
RESIDUAL UNBALANCE CHECK OF COMPONENTS (2.5.2.2)

DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER DESIGN RATING (hp/100 RPM) (2.1.1) 1172 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS TORQUE (Ft-lb) (5.2.5.6c) 61586
BOLTING TORQUE (Ft-lb) (2.1.11.5) 175 LUBRICATED DRY
DATE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE MISALIGNMENT (5.2.5.6a)
PROJECT
ENGINEER STEADY STATE: ANGULAR (DEG.) 0.75 PARALLEL OFFSET (in) see curves AXIAL (in) see curves
TRANSIENT: ANGULAR (DEG.) see curves PARALLEL OFFSET (in) see curves AXIAL (in) see curves
DATE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE RESIDUAL UNBALANCE (lb-in) DRIVER END DRIVEN UNIT END
CERTIFIED MAXIMUM ACTUAL RESIDUAL UNBALANCE (lb-in) DRIVER END DRIVEN UNIT END
2
PERSONAL STIFFNESS (lb-in/RAD) (5.2.5.2b) 1.403 e+008 WR2 (lb-in ) (5.2.5.2b) 28362
DATE FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT COUPLING INITIAL DEFLECTION (in.) PRESTRETCH COMPRESSION
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT COUPLING CALCULATED AXIAL NATURAL FREQUENCY
TEST OF ANF (4.4.1) ACTUAL ANF
DATE
OPERATIONS
REQUIRED CURVES
DATE
GEAR COUPLING (5.2.4.1) FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT COUPLING (5.2.4.2)
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
AXIAL FORCE VS TORQUE AXIAL FORCE VS AXIAL DEFLECTION

DATE:
BENDING MOMENT VS ANGULAR MISALIGNMENT BENDING MOMENT VS AXIAL DEFLECTION

BY:
WINDAGE LOSS VS COUPLING SPEED

DATA SHEET FOR COUPLING DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DAT
17
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
COUPLING
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
PMT

ENG'G CERT.
#REF!
#REF!
#REF!
MATERIALS (2.6)
DRIVE END MATERIALS DRIVEN END MATERIALS

#REF!
#REF!
IM
HUB/FLANGE BS970B817M40T BS970B817M40T
SPACER BS970B817M40T BS970B817M40T
SLEEVE
FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT AISI 301 AISI 301
FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT GUARD BS970B817M40T BS970B817M40T
BOLTS S 99 S 99
NUTS GR 12 GR 12
FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT PROTECTIVE COATING (2.6.4) VENDOR STANDARD
MATERIAL AND WELD HARDNESS TESTS REQUIRED (4.3.1.3)
DESCRIPTION
INTERNAL TEETH HARDNESS (ROCKWELL C) (2.2.6) DRIVE END ACTUAL DRIVEN END ACTUAL
EXTERNAL TEETH HARDNESS (ROCKWELL C) (2.2.6) DRIVE END ACTUAL DRIVEN END ACTUAL
17.Nov.05 B1-10-03452 REISSUED DUE TO PROCESS CHANGES
COUPLING HUB MACHINING

DRIVE END DRIVEN END

TYPE (INTEGRAL, CYLINDRICAL TAPER (2.1.4) (2.1.8.1) CYLINDRICAL CYLINCRICAL
KEYED OR HYDRAULICALLY FITTED (2.1.8.1) KEYED KEYED
TAPER (1 DEG. IA. 1/2 in. PER Ft. 1/4 in. PER Ft)
2.1.9.1.1) (2.1.9.1.2) (2.1.9.1.3)
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS AND NUMBER 2.1.9.2) 1 2
NOMINAL BORE DIAMETER 260 mm 220 mm
INTERFERENCE FIT (in.) MAX/MIN (2.1.8.1)
JO/EWO
#REF!
#REF!
PULLER HOLES INCLUDED INCLUDED

BALANCING HOLES (2.5.3) INCLUDED INCLUDED
07.Nov.05
17.Jan.06
DATE
COUPLING GUARD (APPENDIX E)

COORDINATOR (E.2.1) PUMP SUPPLIER PURGE REQUIRED PURGE GAS
REV
NO.
00
01
B
FLANGED CYLINDRICAL (E.4.1) BASE MOUNT (E.3.2) PURGE CONNECTION SIZE & TYPE
DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER AIR TIGHT (E.4.7.1) OIL TIGHT (E.2.7) PURGE USGPM REQUIRED
SPARK RESISTANT (E.2.9) OIL MIST COOLING GAS COOLING
DATE TRANSPARENT WINDOW FOR EACH OIL SPRAY POINT CONTRACT GUARD TO BE USED DURING SHOP TEST (E.4.5)
PROJECT
ENGINEER (E.4.6.4) ADDITIONAL GUARD DETAILS (2.3.5)
VENT COLLECTION FLANGED (E.4.3) AS PER API.
DATE RATING & FACING
CERTIFIED
ACCESSORIES
DATE PRIME EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER TO FURNISH ONE SET OF HYDRAULIC INSTALLATION/REMOVAL TOOLING (TO INCLUDE
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY PLUG AND RING CAGES (APPENDIX D) DRILL HAND PUMP (S), PRESSURE GAUGES (S), FITTING AND HOSE (S)
TEMPLATE FOR INTEGRAL FLANGED HUBS BY (2.1.5) BY (3.1) PURCHASER COUPLING MANUFACTURER
DATE COUPLING MANUFACTURER PURCHASER PULLER BY COUPLING MANUFACTURER (3.4)
OPERATIONS TWO-PIECE STOP RINGS BY COUPLING MANUFACTURER (3.3) MOMENT SIMULATOR (2.1.7.1)
DATE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT

API-671, SPECIAL PURPOSE COUPLINGS OUTDOOR STORAGE FOR MORE THAN 3 MONTHS (4.5.2)
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
SAUDI ARAMCO INSPECTION FORM 175-130900, EXPECTED STORAGE TIME 6 months

COUPLINGS SHAFT SPECIAL PURPOSE SHIPPING DOMESTIC STORAGE INDOOR
(4.5.3) (4.5.3)
EXPORT OUTDOOR
DATE:
SEE COUPLING PURCHASE ORDER FOR PRESERVATION,

BY:
BOXING AND SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS.

REMARKS:
DAT
18
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
COUPLING
PMT
SAS
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
Applicable to Proposals Purchase As built Item Nos.

PW
PW
PW Service CRUDE SHIPPING PUMP GEARBOX TO PUMP Operating

Spare
AV
AV
AV
DRIVER TYPE GEARBOX MANUFACTURER BHS MODEL FD48-3
SERIAL TYPE. TAG NO.
GEARBOX MANUFACTURER BHS MODEL FD 48-3
COUPLING TYPE FLEX DISK
MANUFACTURER BIBBY MODEL 8 HS SIZE 8 HS 22-230
ASSEMBLY DRAWING NO. 9110 sht1
OPERATING CONDITIONS
DESCRIPTION
POWER TRANSMITTED (hp): NORMAL 13000 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS 13000

SPEED (RPM): MINIMUM ALLOWABLE NORMAL 3895 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS TRIP
TORQUE (Ft-lb): MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS 17524 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS

FREQUENCY OF TRANSIENTS (EVENTS/TIME) (2.1.1)
ADDITIONAL ANF EXCITING FREQUENCY (2.3.4.C)

MINIMUM REQUIRED EXPERIENCE FACTOR, SF (2.1.1) ACTUAL SF 2.25
o
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( F) MAXIMUM MINIMUM
ENVIRONMENT (2.6.5) (2.1.8) DUST HYDROGEN SULFIDE SAND STORMS
COUPLING DATA
o
SHAFT SEPERATION AT OPERATING TEMP. (in B.S.F.) 18 THERMAL GROWTH (in.) FROM F.AMBIENT
MOTOR ROTOR FLOAT (in.) LIMITED END FLOT (in.) (2.2.3) ELECTRICALLY INSULATED (2.1.12)
MARINE TYPE REQUIRED (2.2.2) FLEX-HUB TYPE REQIURED (2.2.2)
JO/EWO
REQUIRED MISALIGNMENT (2.1.2)

STEADY STATE: ANGULAR (DEG.) 0.75 PARALLEL OFFSET (in) AXIAL (in)
TRANSIENT: ANGULAR (DEG.) PARALLEL OFFSET (in) AXIAL (in)

DATE
DYNAMIC BALANCE (2.5.2.1) COMPONENT BALANCE & ASSEMBLY CHECK BALANCE (2.5.2.1)(2.5.2.3)
ASSEMBLY BALANCE (2.5.2.4) REPEATABILITY TEST AFTER ASSEMBLY BALANCE (2.5.2.5)
REV
NO.
00
A
RESIDUAL UNBALANCE CHECK OF COMPONENTS (2.5.2.2)

DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER DESIGN RATING (hp/100 RPM) (2.1.1) 417.76 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS TORQUE (Ft-lb) (5.2.5.6c) 39386
BOLTING TORQUE (Ft-lb) (2.1.11.5) 580 LUBRICATED DRY
DATE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE MISALIGNMENT (5.2.5.6a)
PROJECT
ENGINEER STEADY STATE: ANGULAR (DEG.) 0.75 PARALLEL OFFSET (in) see curves AXIAL (in) see curves
TRANSIENT: ANGULAR (DEG.) see curves PARALLEL OFFSET (in) see curves AXIAL (in) see curves
DATE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE RESIDUAL UNBALANCE (lb-in) DRIVER END DRIVEN UNIT END
CERTIFIED MAXIMUM ACTUAL RESIDUAL UNBALANCE (lb-in) DRIVER END DRIVEN UNIT END
2
PERSONAL STIFFNESS (lb-in/RAD) (5.2.5.2b) 3.8 e+007 WR2 (lb-in ) (5.2.5.2b) 7350.33
DATE FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT COUPLING INITIAL DEFLECTION (in.) PRESTRETCH COMPRESSION
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT COUPLING CALCULATED AXIAL NATURAL FREQUENCY
TEST OF ANF (4.4.1) ACTUAL ANF
DATE
OPERATIONS
REQUIRED CURVES
DATE
GEAR COUPLING (5.2.4.1) FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT COUPLING (5.2.4.2)
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
AXIAL FORCE VS TORQUE AXIAL FORCE VS AXIAL DEFLECTION

DATE:
BENDING MOMENT VS ANGULAR MISALIGNMENT BENDING MOMENT VS AXIAL DEFLECTION

BY:
WINDAGE LOSS VS COUPLING SPEED

DAT
22
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
COUPLING
PMT
SAS
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
MATERIALS (2.6)
PW
PW
PW
DRIVE END MATERIALS DRIVEN END MATERIALS

AV
AV
AV
HUB/FLANGE BS970 817 M 40 T BS970 817 M 40 T
SPACER BS970 817 M 40 T BS970 817 M 40 T
SLEEVE
FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT AISI 301 AISI 301
FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT GUARD BS970 817 M 40 T BS970 817 M 40 T
BOLTS S 99 S 99
NUTS GR 12 GR 12
FLEXIBLE-ELEMENT PROTECTIVE COATING (2.6.4) VENDOR STANDARD
MATERIAL AND WELD HARDNESS TESTS REQUIRED (4.3.1.3)
DESCRIPTION
INTERNAL TEETH HARDNESS (ROCKWELL C) (2.2.6) DRIVE END ACTUAL DRIVEN END ACTUAL
EXTERNAL TEETH HARDNESS (ROCKWELL C) (2.2.6) DRIVE END ACTUAL DRIVEN END ACTUAL
COUPLING HUB MACHINING

DRIVE END DRIVEN END

TYPE (INTEGRAL, CYLINDRICAL TAPER (2.1.4) (2.1.8.1) CYLINDRICAL TAPER
KEYED OR HYDRAULICALLY FITTED (2.1.8.1) KEYED HYDRAULIC
TAPER (1 DEG. IA. 1/2 in. PER Ft. 1/4 in. PER Ft)
2.1.9.1.1) (2.1.9.1.2) (2.1.9.1.3)
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS AND NUMBER 2.1.9.2) 2 0
NOMINAL BORE DIAMETER 180 mm
INTERFERENCE FIT (in.) MAX/MIN (2.1.8.1)
JO/EWO
PULLER HOLES INCLUDED N/A

BALANCING HOLES (2.5.3) INCLUDED INCLUDED
DATE
COUPLING GUARD (APPENDIX E)

COORDINATOR (E.2.1) PUMP SUPPLIER PURGE REQUIRED PURGE GAS
REV
NO.
00
00
A
FLANGED CYLINDRICAL (E.4.1) BASE MOUNT (E.3.2) PURGE CONNECTION SIZE & TYPE
DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER AIR TIGHT (E.4.7.1) OIL TIGHT (E.2.7) PURGE USGPM REQUIRED
GBU SPARK RESISTANT (E.2.9) OIL MIST COOLING GAS COOLING
DATE 30-May-02 TRANSPARENT WINDOW FOR EACH OIL SPRAY POINT CONTRACT GUARD TO BE USED DURING SHOP TEST (E.4.5)
PROJECT
ENGINEER (E.4.6.4) ADDITIONAL GUARD DETAILS (2.3.5)
VENT COLLECTION FLANGED (E.4.3) AS PER API.
DATE RATING & FACING
CERTIFIED
ACCESSORIES
DATE PRIME EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER TO FURNISH ONE SET OF HYDRAULIC INSTALLATION/REMOVAL TOOLING (TO INCLUDE
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY PLUG AND RING CAGES (APPENDIX D) DRILL HAND PUMP (S), PRESSURE GAUGES (S), FITTING AND HOSE (S)
TEMPLATE FOR INTEGRAL FLANGED HUBS BY (2.1.5) BY (3.1) PURCHASER COUPLING MANUFACTURER
DATE COUPLING MANUFACTURER PURCHASER PULLER BY COUPLING MANUFACTURER (3.4)
OPERATIONS TWO-PIECE STOP RINGS BY COUPLING MANUFACTURER (3.3) MOMENT SIMULATOR (2.1.7.1)
DATE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT

API-671, SPECIAL PURPOSE COUPLINGS OUTDOOR STORAGE FOR MORE THAN 3 MONTHS (4.5.2)
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
SAUDI ARAMCO INSPECTION FORM 175-130900, EXPECTED STORAGE TIME 6 months

COUPLINGS SHAFT SPECIAL PURPOSE SHIPPING DOMESTIC STORAGE INDOOR
(4.5.3) (4.5.3)
EXPORT OUTDOOR
DATE:
SEE COUPLING PURCHASE ORDER FOR PRESERVATION,

BY:
BOXING AND SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS.

REMARKS: ONE SET OF COUPLING PUMP HUB FITTING TOOLS TO BE SUPPLIED. BY SULZER
DAT
23
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
Aramco - Khurais Instrument Data Sheet
Crude Oil Shipping Pumpsets B36-G-0002A/B/C/D SO : 9901-48330
Saudi Aramco 8020-314-ENG (05/2002)

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET LEVEL INSTRUMENTS
THI S DRAWI NG AND THE I NFORMATI ON CONTAI NED HEREI N ARE THE SOLE PROPERTY OF SAUDI ARAMCO. NO REPRODUCTI ON I N FULL OR I N PART SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ITS OWNER.
1 INSTRUMENT TAG NUMBER B36-LIT-5600A & B36-LIT-5601A
XMTR SWITCH CONTROLLER Guided Wave Radar
2 TYPE OF INSTRUMENT
ENGG CERT
PNEUMATIC ELECTRONIC SMART Level Transmitter

SERVICE Seal leakage detection.
3
GENERAL DATA
4 P & ID NUMBER | SH NO. E1-104.430.193 / Sheet 1

5 MANUFACTURER Magnetrol
6 MODEL NUMBER TYPE / MODEL NO. Note 1)
7 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
8 SAMS STOCK NO.
9 ELECTRICAL AREA CLASSIFICATION Class 1 , Division1
DESCRI PTI ON
10 ENCLOSURE: NEMA OR IEC NO. Transmitter Housing IP66

11 NACE MR-01-75 OR OTHER SEVERE SERVICE NACE MR-01-75
SERVICE
12 PRES: OPER | MAX kPa(ga) (PSIG) Atmospheric Atmospheric

I SSUED FOR APPROVAL
13 TEMP: OPER | MAX. C (F) 63C (145F) 63C (145F)

14 UPPER FLUID
15 LOWER FLUID
16 REL. DENSITY @ OPER. TEMP UPPER | LOWER
17 DISTANCE BETWEEN CONNECTIONS mm (in) 617mm
18 TYPE: INTERNAL | EXTERNAL
BODY / CAGE
19 BODY | CAGE MATERIAL | RATING 316/316L SS

JO/ EWO
20 CONN. SIZE UPPER | LOWER 1" 1"

21 CONN. TYPE UPPER | LOWER 600lb RF 600lb RF
22 CONN. ORIENTATION UPPER | LOWER Horizontal Vertical
16- 11- 07
DATE
23 VENT SIZE | DRAIN SIZE in NPT /"

3 4 /"
3 4
24 ROTATABLE HEAD YES | NO
mm (in)
REV
NO.
25 CALIBRATED RANGE 0 to 11.5"

00
26 DISPLACER DIA. AND LENGTH mm (in) 600mm insertion length probe

PLACER
DISCIPLINE
DIS-
27 EXTENSION LENGTH mm (in)

ENGINEER
C.W. 28 DISPLACER MATERIAL | RATING 316/316L SS with ceramic spacers
16-11-07
DATE: 29 CONNECTION SIZE | RATING | LOCATION
PROJECT
30 TORQUE TUBE MATERIAL
ENGINEER
TORQUE
TUBE
B.V. 31 COOLING FINS REQ'D
16-11-07 32 OTHER WETTED PARTS MATERIAL

DATE:
CERTIFIED 33
34 OUTPUT RANGE | ON LEVEL INCR. OUTPUT WILL 4-20mA
MITTER
TRANS-
35 PWR. SUPPLY | OUTPUT LOAD 24VDC

DATE:
36 AIR SUPPLY | OUTPUT CONNECTION NPT
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY 37 CONDUIT CONN. SIZE in NPT 1/2"
38 SWITCH CONTACT TYPE | RATING n/a n/a
SW
DATE: 39 SET POINT n/a

OPERATIONS
40 SETPOINT LOCAL | REMOTE LOG REM
41 %
DATE: 42 PROP BAND RANGE

CONTROLLER
CONTROL NUMBER
43 RESET | RATE ACTION

V ERI FI CA T I ON
44 ANTI-RESET WIND-UP YES NO

EDSD
45 OUTPUT RANGE
46 ON LEVEL INCR. OUTPUT WILL INCR DECR
DATE:
BY:
47 PWR SUPPLY | OUTPUT LOAD

in NPT
48 AIR SUPPLY | OUTPUT CONN. INTG SEPT
APPROVAL/CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS,
THIS INDICATES THAT REV. NO.___________
49 AUTO - MANUAL PANEL

(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
OF THIS DRAWING IS COVERED, FOR ALL
BY DRAWING COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
NOTES:
1) Model no.: X705-510A-310 + X7MD-A45N-060 + XF2A-DC2K-030 (Safety Certified).
2) Set point 1 = 4.6" (Alarm), Set point 2 = 9.2" (Trip).
ISS FOR Seal Leakage Detection Level DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 1 of 4 00
KHURAIS SAUDI ARABIA JO / EWO:
EDSD/8020-314-0502.XLS
4104476138.xls Sht 1 of 70 Sulzer Doc. No.: E4-104.476.138-Rev."0"


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT TAG NUMBER B36-LIT-5600B & B36-LIT-5601B
ENGG CERT

3
GENERAL DATA

7 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
8 SAMS STOCK NO.
DESCRI PTI ON

SERVICE


14 UPPER FLUID
15 LOWER FLUID
BODY / CAGE

JO/ EWO

16- 11- 07
DATE

3 4 /"
3 4
mm (in)
REV
NO.

00

PLACER
DISCIPLINE
DIS-

ENGINEER
16-11-07
PROJECT
ENGINEER
TORQUE
TUBE

DATE:
CERTIFIED 33
MITTER
TRANS-

DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
SW

OPERATIONS
41 %

CONTROLLER
CONTROL NUMBER

V ERI FI CA T I ON

EDSD
45 OUTPUT RANGE
DATE:
BY:

in NPT

(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
NOTES:
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 2 of 4 00
EDSD/8020-314-0502.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT TAG NUMBER B36-LIT-5600C & B36-LIT-5601C
ENGG CERT

3
GENERAL DATA

7 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
8 SAMS STOCK NO.
DESCRI PTI ON

SERVICE


14 UPPER FLUID
15 LOWER FLUID
BODY / CAGE

JO/ EWO

16- 11- 07
DATE

3 4 /"
3 4
mm (in)
REV
NO.

00

PLACER
DISCIPLINE
DIS-

ENGINEER
16-11-07
PROJECT
ENGINEER
TORQUE
TUBE

DATE:
CERTIFIED 33
MITTER
TRANS-

DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
SW

OPERATIONS
41 %

CONTROLLER
CONTROL NUMBER

V ERI FI CA T I ON

EDSD
45 OUTPUT RANGE
DATE:
BY:

in NPT

(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
NOTES:
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 3 of 4 00
EDSD/8020-314-0502.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT TAG NUMBER B36-LIT-5600D & B36-LIT-5601D
ENGG CERT

3
GENERAL DATA

7 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
8 SAMS STOCK NO.
DESCRI PTI ON

SERVICE


14 UPPER FLUID
15 LOWER FLUID
BODY / CAGE

JO/ EWO

16- 11- 07
DATE

3 4 /"
3 4
mm (in)
REV
NO.

00

PLACER
DISCIPLINE
DIS-

ENGINEER
16-11-07
PROJECT
ENGINEER
TORQUE
TUBE

DATE:
CERTIFIED 33
MITTER
TRANS-

DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
SW

OPERATIONS
41 %

CONTROLLER
CONTROL NUMBER

V ERI FI CA T I ON

EDSD
45 OUTPUT RANGE
DATE:
BY:

in NPT

(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
NOTES:
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 4 of 4 00
EDSD/8020-314-0502.XLS

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET - RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR (RTD)
ASSEMBLY 1 THERMOWELL NONE INCLUDED (see Form 8020-418-M-ENG) OTHER (specify)
PROCESS 2 FLUID LIQUID GAS HYDROCARBONS
SOUR LIQUIDS WATER OTHER (Specify)
CORROSIVE COMPOUNDS (specify) n/a
3 PRESSURE OPERATING Note 1) kPa(ga) (PSIG) MAXIMUM Note 1) kPa(ga) (PSIG)

O O O
4 TEMPERATURE OPERATING <70 (158) C ( F) MAXIMUM 70 (158) C (OF)
ELEMENT 5 MAT'L SOURCE REQ. NO. ,SAMS STOCK NO.
6 MAKE MFR. Minco Products Inc. , MODEL NO. PDPD Platinum 385 100 O
DESCRI PTI ON
7 SHEATH O.D. 6.0 (0.236) mm (in.) MATERIAL Stainless Steel with Copper Alloy Tip
8 TYPE PLATINUM WITH R100 / RO = 1.3926 (SAMA RC. 21-4) OTHER (Specify) 1.385
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
O O
9 ICE POINT RES. 100 Ohm @ O C ( F) OTHER (Specify) Ohm @ OOC (OF)
O
10 TEMP. RANGE FROM -50 (-58) C (OF) TO 260 (500) O
C (OF)
11 ACCURACY + 0.5% OTHER (Specify) 0.1 %
12 LEADS MFG. STD. POTTED HERM. SEALED
13 CONNECTION 2-WIRE 3-WIRE 4-WIRE

JO/ EWO
LEAD WIRES RECEPTACLE BAYONET LOCK OTHER (specify)
14 MOUNTING THREAD 1/2" NPT Process Connection

DATE
CONNECTION HEAD 15 MAT'L SOURCE REQ. NO. , SAMS STOCK NO.

REV.
NO.
00
[ ] NONE 16 MAKE MFR. Minco Products Inc. , MODEL NO. CH104 Series
DISCIPLINE 17 TYPE SCREW CAP & CHAIN OTHER (specify)

ENGINEER
C.W. 18 CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL Aluminium ; CONDUIT CONNECTION SIZE 3/4 in. NPT
16-11-07
DATE: 19 ENCLOSURE WEATHERPROOF EXPLOSIONPROOF: NEMA TYPE 4 /IEC IP 65
PROJECT
ENGINEER Class 1, Division 1 & 2 Groups B, C & D
20 ELECTRICAL AREA CLASSIFICATION:
B.V.
16-11-07
21 EXTENSION UNION: NIPPLE SIZE in. NPT: LENGTH "N" mm (in.)
DATE:
CERTIFIED
22 TERM. BLOCK 6 wire (Duplex element)
SERVICE 23 ROT. EQUIPM. BEARING WINDING (17-SAMSS-502) SURFACE (specify) Lube Oil Return Line
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
24 COMPLY WITH NACE MR-75-01 YES NO
OPTIONS 25
DATE:
OPERATIONS 26
27
DATE:
28
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
"A": T'/C ELEMENT LENGTH

"Y": T/C ELEMENT DIAMETER
DATE:
"N": CONNECTION HEAD EXTENSION LENGTH

BY:
"T": THERMOWELL LAGGING EXTENSION LENGTH

CERTIFICATE
REQUIREMENTS,
"U": THERMOWELL INSERTION LENGTH

(DCC) NO. ______________________________
CONDUIT CONN.
"N" 2" "U"
COMPLETION
NOTES:
1) Refer to 8020-418-M-ENG for thermowell details.
ISS FOR Lube Oil Return Line RTD DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
B36 J E- 1 of 2 00
BY
EDSD/8020-416-1-0502.XLS

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT ELEMENT TYPE ELEMENT TEMP. RANGE SERVICE
REV. P&ID NO. / SHT. NO.
TAG NO. (ITEM 8) LENGTH "A" (ITEM 10) (ITEM 23)
B36-TE-5600AA/AB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Motor NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5601AA/AB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Motor DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5602AA/AB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Gearbox Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5603AA/AB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Pump DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5604AA/AB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Pump NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5600BA/BB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Motor NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
DESCRI PTI ON
B36-TE-5601BA/BB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Motor DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5602BA/BB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Gearbox Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5603BA/BB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Pump DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
B36-TE-5604BA/BB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Pump NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5600CA/CB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Motor NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5601CA/CB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Motor DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5602CA/CB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Gearbox Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
JO/ EWO
B36-TE-5603CA/CB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Pump DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5604CA/CB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Pump NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
DATE
B36-TE-5600DA/DB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Motor NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
REV.
NO.
00
B36-TE-5601DA/DB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Motor DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
DISCIPLINE B36-TE-5602DA/DB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Gearbox Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
ENGINEER
C.W. B36-TE-5603DA/DB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Pump DE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
16-11-07 B36-TE-5604DA/DB PT100 (0.00385) To suit thermowell -50 to 260C Pump NDE Lube Oil Return E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER
B.V.
16-11-07
DATE:
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
DATE:
OPERATION
DATE:
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:
CERTIFICATE
REQUIREMENTS,
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
NOTES:
Refer to 8020-418-M-ENG for thermowell details.
COMPLETION
DRAWING
ISS
B36 J E- 00
2 of 2
BY
EDSD/8020-416-2-0700.XLS


ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET - THERMOWELL
GENERAL 1 MAT'L SOURCE REQ. NO. , SAMS STOCK NO.
2 MAKE MFR. Minco Products Inc. , MODEL NO. TW1220 Series

OTHER
PROCESS 3 FLUID HYDROCARBONS SOUR LIQUIDS WATER Seawater
(Specify)
LIQUID GAS; CORROSIVE COMPOUNDS (Specify)
MAXIMUM
4 PRESSURE OPERATING Atmos. PSIG
(DESING)
Atmos. PSIG
O MAXIMUM O
5 TEMPERATURE OPERATING <158 F 158 F
(DESING)
BODY 6 MATERIAL 316 Stainless Steel

ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
7 COVER SCREW CAP & CHAIN OTHER (Specify)

DESCRI PTI ON
8 CONSTRUCTION TAPERED STRAIGHT DRILLED BUILT-UP CLOSED-END TUBE
9 CONNECTIONS PROCESS 1-1/2" in. INTERNAL THREAD 1/2" in. NPT: BORE 0.26" in
OPTIONS 10 CORROSION COMPLIANCE WITH NACE MR-75-01 YES NO
RF FLANGE (F) (PER ASME B16.5)
BORE 0.260"
JO/ EWO
0.875" 3/16"
RADIUS FULL PENETRATION DOUBLE
1/4" WELD
DATE
3/4"
1/2" NPT
REV.
NO.
00
DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER STAMP TW TAG NO. ON
C.W. THE OUTSIDE EDGE OF
16-11-07 "U" THE FLANGE
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER
B.V. "T"
16-11-07
DATE:
CERTIFIED
INSTRUMENT PROCESS CONN. INTERNAL THREAD BORE I.D. WELL DIMENSIONS PROC. FLUID
DATE: REV. P&ID NO. / SHT. NO.
TAG NO. (ITEM 9) (ITEM 9) (ITEM 9) "U" "T" (ITEM 3)
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY B36-TE-5600AA/AB 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1/2" NPT 0.26" 4.92" 2.25" Lube Oil E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5601AA/AB 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1/2" NPT 0.26" 4.92" 2.25" Lube Oil E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
DATE: B36-TE-5602AA/AB 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1/2" NPT 0.26" 10.24" 2.25" Lube Oil E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
OPERATIONS B36-TE-5603AA/AB 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1/2" NPT 0.26" 4.92" 2.25" Lube Oil E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5604AA/AB 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1/2" NPT 0.26" 5.31" 2.25" Lube Oil E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
DATE:
CONTROL NUMBER
B36-TE-5600BA/BB 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1/2" NPT 0.26" 4.92" 2.25" Lube Oil E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:
REQUIREMENTS,
CERTIFICATE
(DCC) NO. ______________________________

COMPLETION
DRAWING
Thermowell ISS
B36 J E- 1 of 2 00
BY
EDSD/8020-418-1-0101.XLS


ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET - THERMOWELL
GENERAL 1 MAT'L SOURCE REQ. NO. , SAMS STOCK NO.
2 MAKE MFR. Minco Products Inc. , MODEL NO. TW1220 Series

OTHER
PROCESS 3 FLUID HYDROCARBONS SOUR LIQUIDS WATER Seawater
(Specify)
LIQUID GAS; CORROSIVE COMPOUNDS (Specify)
MAXIMUM
4 PRESSURE OPERATING Atmos. PSIG
(DESING)
Atmos. PSIG
O MAXIMUM O
5 TEMPERATURE OPERATING <158 F 158 F
(DESING)
BODY 6 MATERIAL 316 Stainless Steel

ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
7 COVER SCREW CAP & CHAIN OTHER (Specify)

DESCRI PTI ON
8 CONSTRUCTION TAPERED STRAIGHT DRILLED BUILT-UP CLOSED-END TUBE
9 CONNECTIONS PROCESS 1-1/2" in. INTERNAL THREAD 1/2" in. NPT: BORE 0.26" in
OPTIONS 10 CORROSION COMPLIANCE WITH NACE MR-75-01 YES NO
RF FLANGE (F) (PER ASME B16.5)
BORE 0.260"
JO/ EWO
0.875" 3/16"
RADIUS FULL PENETRATION DOUBLE
1/4" WELD
DATE
3/4"
1/2" NPT
REV.
NO.
00
DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER STAMP TW TAG NO. ON
C.W. THE OUTSIDE EDGE OF
16-11-07 "U" THE FLANGE
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER
B.V. "T"
16-11-07
DATE:
CERTIFIED
INSTRUMENT PROCESS CONN. INTERNAL THREAD BORE I.D. WELL DIMENSIONS PROC. FLUID
DATE: REV. P&ID NO. / SHT. NO.
TAG NO. (ITEM 9) (ITEM 9) (ITEM 9) "U" "T" (ITEM 3)
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY B36-TE-5600CA/CB 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1/2" NPT 0.26" 4.92" 2.25" Lube Oil E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5601CA/CB 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1/2" NPT 0.26" 4.92" 2.25" Lube Oil E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
DATE: B36-TE-5602CA/CB 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1/2" NPT 0.26" 10.24" 2.25" Lube Oil E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
OPERATIONS B36-TE-5603CA/CB 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1/2" NPT 0.26" 4.92" 2.25" Lube Oil E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
B36-TE-5604CA/CB 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1/2" NPT 0.26" 5.31" 2.25" Lube Oil E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
DATE:
CONTROL NUMBER
B36-TE-5600DA/DB 1-1/2" 150lb RF 1/2" NPT 0.26" 4.92" 2.25" Lube Oil E1-104.430.193 Sheet 1
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:
REQUIREMENTS,
CERTIFICATE
(DCC) NO. ______________________________

COMPLETION
DRAWING
Thermowell ISS
B36 J E- 2 of 2 00
BY
EDSD/8020-418-1-0101.XLS


PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS - SMART
1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5600A B36-TIT-5601A B36-TIT-5602A B36-TIT-5603A
2 SERVICE Motor NDE Motor DE Gearbox Pump DE
ENGG CERT
Lube Oil Return Lube Oil Return Lube Oil Return Lube Oil Return
GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

4 MANUFACTURER Rosemount Rosemount Rosemount Rosemount
5 MODEL NUMBER See Notes See Notes See Notes See Notes
6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
9 ELEMENT TYPE (THERMOCOUPLE / RTD) RTD RTD RTD RTD
ELEMENT
10 ELEMENT SPECIFICATION PT100 a 0.00385 PT100 a 0.00385 PT100 a 0.00385 PT100 a 0.00385
DESCRI PTI ON
11 ASSOCIATED ELEMENT / THERMOWELL ISS NUMBER 8020-416-ENG 8020-416-ENG 8020-416-ENG 8020-416-ENG

12 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG
13 OUTPUT SIGNAL RANGE (4 - 20 mA / DIGITAL) DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL
14 COMMUNICAIONS PROTOCOL Fieldbus Fieldbus Fieldbus Fieldbus
COMM
15
16
17 INPUT RANGE LIMITS F -58 to 500 -58 to 500 -58 to 500 -58 to 500
18 CONFIGURED RANGE F 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400
CONFIG
19 FACTORY CONFIGURATION YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
22 TOTAL RMS ERROR 0.02% of span 0.02% of span 0.02% of span 0.02% of span
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE
24 MAXIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURE F 185 185 185 185

25
REV
NO.
00
26
DISCIPLINE 27 ELECTRICAL AREA CLASSIFICATION Class 1, Division 2 Class 1, Division 2 Class 1, Division 2 Class 1, Division 2
ENGINEER
28 ENCLOSURE TYPE NEMA 4X NEMA 4X NEMA 4X NEMA 4X
HOUSING
C.W.
16-11-07 29 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION SIZE NPT / 1/2" NPT / NPT /1/2" NPT /
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
30 MOUNTING 3/8-16 UN-2B 3/8-16 UN-2B 3/8-16 UN-2B 3/8-16 UN-2B
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
33 INDICATOR (NONE/REMOTE/INTEGRAL) Integral Integral Integral Integral
CERTIFIED
34 INDICATOR SCALE RANGE (ANALOG/DIG/ENGR UNITS) Digital 0 to 400F Digital 0 to 400F Digital 0 to 400F Digital 0 to 400F
35 INDIATOR MAXIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURE F 185 185 185 185
DATE:
36 SPECIAL TRANSMITTER FEATURES Hot Backup Hot Backup Hot Backup Hot Backup
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY 37 SPECIAL CALIBRATION
38 REDUNDANT / DUAL ELEMENT INPUTS Dual Input Dual Input Dual Input Dual Input
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
NOTES: 1. PRESS "INSTRUCTION" TAB OF THIS FILE TO SEE THE INSTRUCTIONS TO FILL THIS FORM.
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
2. Model no.: 3144P-D1-F-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1
ISS FOR Lube Oil Return Line Temperature DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 1 of 5 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5604A B36-TIT-5600B B36-TIT-5601B B36-TIT-5602B
2 SERVICE Pump NDE Motor NDE Motor DE Gearbox
ENGG CERT
GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 2 of 5 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5603B B36-TIT-5604B B36-TIT-5600C B36-TIT-5601C
2 SERVICE Pump DE Pump NDE Motor NDE Motor DE
ENGG CERT
GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 3 of 5 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5602C B36-TIT-5603C B36-TIT-5604C B36-TIT-5600D
2 SERVICE Gearbox Pump DE Pump NDE Motor NDE
ENGG CERT
GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 4 of 5 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5601D B36-TIT-5602D B36-TIT-5603D B36-TIT-5604D
2 SERVICE Motor DE Gearbox Pump DE Pump NDE
ENGG CERT
GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG 8020-418-ENG
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 5 of 5 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5605A B36-TIT-5607A B36-TIT-5605B B36-TIT-5607B
2 SERVICE Motor NDE Motor DE Motor NDE Motor DE
ENGG CERT
Journal Bearing Journal Bearing Journal Bearing Journal Bearing

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON
11 ASSOCIATED ELEMENT / THERMOWELL ISS NUMBER

12
13 OUTPUT SIGNAL RANGE (4 - 20 mA / DIGITAL) 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA 4-20mA
14 COMMUNICAIONS PROTOCOL HART HART HART HART
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
2. Model no.: 3144P-D1-B-2-K5-M5-G1-Q4-U1-QS (Safety Certified)
ISS FOR Motor Journal Bearing Temperature DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 1 of 2 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5605C B36-TIT-5607C B36-TIT-5605D B36-TIT-5607D
2 SERVICE Motor NDE Motor DE Motor NDE Motor DE
ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR Motor Journal Bearing Temperature DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 2 of 2 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5608AA B36-TIT-5608AB B36-TIT-5609AA B36-TIT-5609AB
2 SERVICE Gearbox I/P DE Gearbox I/P DE Gearbox I/P NDE Gearbox I/P NDE
ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR Gearbox Journal Bearing Temperature DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 1 of 12 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

2 SERVICE Gearbox I/P I/B Gearbox I/P I/B Gearbox I/P O/B Gearbox I/P O/B
ENGG CERT
Thrust Bearing Thrust Bearing Thrust Bearing Thrust Bearing

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR Gearbox Thrust Bearing Temperature DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 2 of 12 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

2 SERVICE Gearbox O/P NDE Gearbox O/P NDE Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P DE
ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 3 of 12 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5608BA B36-TIT-5608BB B36-TIT-5609BA B36-TIT-5609BB
ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 4 of 12 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 5 of 12 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 6 of 12 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5608CA B36-TIT-5608CB B36-TIT-5609CA B36-TIT-5609CB
ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 7 of 12 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 8 of 12 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 9 of 12 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5608DA B36-TIT-5608DB B36-TIT-5609DA B36-TIT-5609DB
ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 10 of
12
00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 11 of
12
00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
Transmitter ISS
B36 J E- 12 of
12
00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

3 PRESSURE OPERATING n/a kPa(ga) (PSIG) MAXIMUM n/a kPa(ga) (PSIG)

O O O
DESCRI PTI ON
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
O O
O
C (OF)

JO/ EWO

DATE

REV.
NO.
00

ENGINEER
16-11-07
PROJECT
B.V.
16-11-07
21 EXTENSION UNION: NIPPLE SIZE in. NPT: LENGTH "N" See options below mm (in.)
DATE:
CERTIFIED
SERVICE 23 ROT. EQUIPM. BEARING WINDING (17-SAMSS-502) SURFACE (specify)

DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
OPTIONS 25 115mm (4.53 in.) Stand-off Adaptor, 173mm (6.81 in.) Insertion.
DATE:
OPERATIONS 26
27
DATE:
28
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD

DATE:

BY:

CERTIFICATE
REQUIREMENTS,

(DCC) NO. ______________________________
CONDUIT CONN.
"N" 2" "U"
COMPLETION
NOTES:
ISS FOR Pump Journal Bearing RTD DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
B36 J E- 1 of 2 00
BY
EDSD/8020-416-1-0502.XLS

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

B36-TE-5614AA/AB PT100 (0.00385) 173mm (6.81") -50 to 260C Pump DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5615AA/AB PT100 (0.00385) 173mm (6.81") -50 to 260C Pump NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5614BA/BB PT100 (0.00385) 173mm (6.81") -50 to 260C Pump DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5615BA/BB PT100 (0.00385) 173mm (6.81") -50 to 260C Pump NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5614CA/CB PT100 (0.00385) 173mm (6.81") -50 to 260C Pump DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
DESCRI PTI ON
B36-TE-5615CA/CB PT100 (0.00385) 173mm (6.81") -50 to 260C Pump NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5614DA/DB PT100 (0.00385) 173mm (6.81") -50 to 260C Pump DE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
B36-TE-5615DA/DB PT100 (0.00385) 173mm (6.81") -50 to 260C Pump NDE Journal Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
REV.
NO. JO/ EWO
DATE
00
DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER
C.W.
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER
B.V.
16-11-07
DATE:
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
DATE:
OPERATION
DATE:
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:
CERTIFICATE
REQUIREMENTS,
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
NOTES:
Element length "A" detailed above is insertion length only, for extension lengths refer to item 21.
COMPLETION
ISS FOR Pump Journal Bearing RTD DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
B36 J E- 00
2 of 2
BY
EDSD/8020-416-2-0700.XLS

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

3 PRESSURE OPERATING n/a kPa(ga) (PSIG) MAXIMUM n/a kPa(ga) (PSIG)

O O O
DESCRI PTI ON
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
O O
O
C (OF)

JO/ EWO

DATE

REV.
NO.
00

ENGINEER
16-11-07
PROJECT
B.V.
16-11-07
21 EXTENSION UNION: NIPPLE SIZE in. NPT: LENGTH "N" See options below mm (in.)
DATE:
CERTIFIED
SERVICE 23 ROT. EQUIPM. BEARING WINDING (17-SAMSS-502) SURFACE (specify)

DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
OPTIONS 25 No Stand-off Adaptor, 30mm (1.18 in.) Insertion.

DATE:
OPERATIONS 26
27
DATE:
28
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD

DATE:

BY:

CERTIFICATE
REQUIREMENTS,

(DCC) NO. ______________________________
CONDUIT CONN.
"N" 2" "U"
COMPLETION
NOTES:
ISS FOR Pump Thrust Bearing RTD DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
B36 J E- 1 of 2 00
BY
EDSD/8020-416-1-0502.XLS

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS

B36-TE-5616AA/AB PT100 (0.00385) 68mm (2.68") -50 to 260C Pump Inboard Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5617AA/AB PT100 (0.00385) 68mm (2.68") -50 to 260C Pump Outboard Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5616BA/BB PT100 (0.00385) 68mm (2.68") -50 to 260C Pump Inboard Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5617BA/BB PT100 (0.00385) 68mm (2.68") -50 to 260C Pump Outboard Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5616CA/CB PT100 (0.00385) 68mm (2.68") -50 to 260C Pump Inboard Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
DESCRI PTI ON
B36-TE-5617CA/CB PT100 (0.00385) 68mm (2.68") -50 to 260C Pump Outboard Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
B36-TE-5616DA/DB PT100 (0.00385) 68mm (2.68") -50 to 260C Pump Inboard Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
B36-TE-5617DA/DB PT100 (0.00385) 68mm (2.68") -50 to 260C Pump Outboard Thrust Bearing E1-104.430.193 Sheet 2
REV.
NO. JO/ EWO
DATE
00
DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER
C.W.
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER
B.V.
16-11-07
DATE:
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
DATE:
OPERATION
DATE:
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:
CERTIFICATE
REQUIREMENTS,
(DCC) NO. ______________________________
NOTES:
Element length "A" detailed above is insertion length only, for extension length refer to item 21.
COMPLETION
ISS FOR Pump Thrust Bearing RTD DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DRAWING
ISS
B36 J E- 00
2 of 2
BY
EDSD/8020-416-2-0700.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5614A B36-TIT-5615A B36-TIT-5616A B36-TIT-5617A
2 SERVICE Pump DE Pump NDE Pump I/B Pump O/B
ENGG CERT
Journal Bearing Journal Bearing Thrust Bearing Thrust Bearing

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.
ISS FOR Pump Journal & Thrust Bearing DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
Temperature Transmitters ISS

B36 J E- 1 of 4 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5614B B36-TIT-5615B B36-TIT-5616B B36-TIT-5617B
ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.

B36 J E- 2 of 4 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5614C B36-TIT-5615C B36-TIT-5616C B36-TIT-5617C
ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.

B36 J E- 3 of 4 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS


PMT OPRNS

1 INSTRUMENT MARK NUMBER B36-TIT-5614D B36-TIT-5615D B36-TIT-5616D B36-TIT-5617D
ENGG CERT

GENERAL DATA
3 P & ID NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193

6 REQUISITION NO.
MATERIAL SOURCE
7 SAMS STOCK NO.
8
ELEMENT
DESCRI PTI ON

12
COMM
15
16
CONFIG

20
JO/ EWO
21
TRANSMITTER DATA
PERFORMANCE
23 STABILITY
16- 11- 07
0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 0.1%

DATE

25
REV
NO.
00
26
ENGINEER
HOUSING
C.W.
1/2" 1/2"
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER 31
B.V.
32
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
ACCESSORIES
CONSTRUCTION
DATE: 39
OPERATIONS
40
41
DATE: 42
CONTROL NUMBER
43
V ERI FI CA T I ON
44
EDSD
45
DATE:
46
BY:
47
(DCC) NO.: __________________________.

B36 J E- 4 of 4 00
EDSD/8020-400-0500.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET - VIBRATION SWITCHES
INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXE-5602A B36-VYE-5602A B36-VXE-5603A B36-VYE-5603A
SERVICE Gearbox I/P DE Gearbox I/P DE Gearbox I/P NDE Gearbox I/P NDE
ENGG CERT
Radial Vibration Radial Vibration Radial Vibration Radial Vibration

P & ID DRAWING NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193
MANUFACTURER Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada
TYPE NUMBER See 1) See 2) See 1) See 2)
SERIAL NUMBER - - - -
MATERIAL SOURCE - - - -
SWITCH SPECIFICATION
SENSITIVITY RANGE - - - -
VIBRATION RANGE 0-10 mil 0-10 mil 0-10 mil 0-10 mil
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
SET POINT See 3) See 3) See 3) See 3)
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE GRP Housing GRP Housing GRP Housing GRP Housing
CONDUIT CONNECTION 3/4" NPT 3/4" NPT 3/4" NPT 3/4" NPT
CONTACT ARRANGEMENT - - - -
CONTACT RATING VOLTS (AC / DC) AMP. - - - - - - - -
ACTION OF CIRCUIT NO.1 (SEE NOTE 1) - - - -
CIRCUIT NO.1 ACTUATES - - - -
POWER SUPPLY - - - -
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE
CONTROL UNIT SPECIFICATION

REV
NO.
STARTING TIME DELAY - - - -

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
MONITORING TIME DELAY SECOND - - - -
ENGINEER MANUAL RESET YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER TYPE OF ENCLOSURE - - - -
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
ALARM LIGHT OR ANNUNCIATOR SPECIFICATION

DATE:
OPERATIONS
EQUIPMENT TAG NO. - - - -
MANUFACTURER - - - -
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
DATE: MATERIAL SOURCE - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:
NOTES: 1. FILL IN UNDER "ACTION OF CIRCUIT" OPENS ON RISE, OR CLOSES ON RISE.

1) Bently Nevada Part No.: 32000-28-05-05-225-00-02.

3) Set point 1 = 3.46 mil (Alarm), set point 2 = 6.45 mil (Trip).
ISS FOR
Gearbox Vibration Probe DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
1 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXE-5602B B36-VYE-5602B B36-VXE-5603B B36-VYE-5603B
ENGG CERT

DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
2 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXE-5602C B36-VYE-5602C B36-VXE-5603C B36-VYE-5603C
ENGG CERT

DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
3 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXE-5602D B36-VYE-5602D B36-VXE-5603D B36-VYE-5603D
ENGG CERT

DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
4 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VZE-5600A B36-VZE-5601A B36-VZE-5600B B36-VZE-5601B
SERVICE Gearbox I/P Gearbox I/P Gearbox I/P Gearbox I/P
ENGG CERT
Axial Position Axial Position Axial Position Axial Position

VIBRATION RANGE 25 mil 25 mil 25 mil 25 mil
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
5 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VZE-5600C B36-VZE-5601C B36-VZE-5600D B36-VZE-5601D
ENGG CERT

DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
6 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXE-5604A B36-VYE-5604A B36-VXE-5605A B36-VYE-5605A B36-KE-5601A
SERVICE Gearbox O/P NDE Gearbox O/P NDE Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P NDE
ENGG CERT
Radial Vibration Radial Vibration Radial Vibration Radial Vibration Keyphasor

P & ID DRAWING NUMBER E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193 E1-104.430.193
MANUFACTURER Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada Bently Nevada
TYPE NUMBER See 1) See 2) See 1) See 2) See 1)
MATERIAL SOURCE - - - - -
-
SENSITIVITY RANGE - - - - -
VIBRATION RANGE 0-10 mil 0-10 mil 0-10 mil 0-10 mil 0-4000 RPM
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
SET POINT See 3) See 3) See 3) See 3) -
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE GRP Housing GRP Housing GRP Housing GRP Housing GRP Housing
CONDUIT CONNECTION 3/4" NPT 3/4" NPT 3/4" NPT 3/4" NPT 3/4" NPT
CONTACT ARRANGEMENT - - - - -
CONTACT RATING VOLTS (AC / DC) AMP. - - - - - - - - - -
ACTION OF CIRCUIT NO.1 (SEE NOTE 1) - - - - -
CIRCUIT NO.1 ACTUATES - - - - -
POWER SUPPLY - - - - -
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.
STARTING TIME DELAY - - - - -

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
MONITORING TIME DELAY SECOND - - - - -
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER TYPE OF ENCLOSURE - - - - -
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
EQUIPMENT TAG NO. - - - - -
OPERATIONS
MANUFACTURER - - - - -
TYPE NUMBER - - - - -
DATE: MATERIAL SOURCE - - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
7 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXE-5604B B36-VYE-5604B B36-VXE-5605B B36-VYE-5605B B36-KE-5601B
ENGG CERT

-
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
8 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXE-5604C B36-VYE-5604C B36-VXE-5605C B36-VYE-5605C B36-KE-5601C
ENGG CERT

-
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
9 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXE-5604D B36-VYE-5604D B36-VXE-5605D B36-VYE-5605D B36-KE-5601D
ENGG CERT

-
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E- 10 of
(DCC) NO.:
10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXT-5602A B36-VYT-5602A B36-VXT-5603A B36-VYT-5603A
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE See 2) See 2) See 2) See 2)
CONDUIT CONNECTION n/a n/a n/a n/a
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:

2) Mounted in skid edge 316SS junction box.

ISS FOR
Gearbox Vibration Probe Proximitor DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
1 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXT-5602B B36-VYT-5602B B36-VXT-5603B B36-VYT-5603B
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
2 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXT-5602C B36-VYT-5602C B36-VXT-5603C B36-VYT-5603C
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
3 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXT-5602D B36-VYT-5602D B36-VXT-5603D B36-VYT-5603D
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
4 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VZT-5600A B36-VZT-5601A B36-VZT-5600B B36-VZT-5601B
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
5 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VZT-5600C B36-VZT-5601C B36-VZT-5600D B36-VZT-5601D
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
6 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXT-5604A B36-VYT-5604A B36-VXT-5605A B36-VYT-5605A B36-KT-5601A
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
SERIAL NUMBER - - - - -
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE See 2) See 2) See 2) See 2) See 2)
CONDUIT CONNECTION n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
7 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXT-5604B B36-VYT-5604B B36-VXT-5605B B36-VYT-5605B B36-KT-5601B
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
8 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXT-5604C B36-VYT-5604C B36-VXT-5605C B36-VYT-5605C B36-KT-5601C
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
9 of 10 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXT-5604D B36-VYT-5604D B36-VXT-5605D B36-VYT-5605D B36-KT-5601D
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E- 10 of
(DCC) NO.:
10
00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VE/VT-5600A B36-VE/VT-5600B B36-VE/VT-5600C B36-VE/VT-5600D
SERVICE Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P DE Gearbox O/P DE
ENGG CERT
Brg. Housing Brg. Housing Brg. Housing Brg. Housing

TYPE NUMBER 330400-01-05 330400-01-05 330400-01-05 330400-01-05
VIBRATION RANGE 0-45 g 0-45 g 0-45 g 0-45 g
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
TYPE OF ENCLOSURE SS Housing SS Housing SS Housing SS Housing
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:

1) Set point 1 = 13 g (Alarm), set point 2 = 21 g (Trip).
ISS FOR
Gearbox Casing Accelerometer DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
1 of 1 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXE-5606A B36-VYE-5606A B36-VXE-5607A B36-VYE-5607A
SERVICE Pump DE Pump DE Pump NDE Pump NDE
ENGG CERT

DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:

ISS FOR
Pump Vibration Probe DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
1 of 6 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXE-5606B B36-VYE-5606B B36-VXE-5607B B36-VYE-5607B
ENGG CERT

DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:

ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
2 of 6 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXE-5606C B36-VYE-5606C B36-VXE-5607C B36-VYE-5607C
ENGG CERT

DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:

ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
3 of 6 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXE-5606D B36-VYE-5606D B36-VXE-5607D B36-VYE-5607D
ENGG CERT

DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:

ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
4 of 6 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VZE-5602A B36-VZE-5603A B36-VZE-5602B B36-VZE-5603B
SERVICE Pump Pump Pump Pump
ENGG CERT

DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:

ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
5 of 6 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VZE-5602C B36-VZE-5603C B36-VZE-5602D B36-VZE-5603D
ENGG CERT

DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:

ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
6 of 6 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXT-5606A B36-VYT-5606A B36-VXT-5607A B36-VYT-5607A
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
Pump Vibration Probe Proximitor DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
1 of 6 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXT-5606B B36-VYT-5606B B36-VXT-5607B B36-VYT-5607B
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
2 of 6 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXT-5606C B36-VYT-5606C B36-VXT-5607C B36-VYT-5607C
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
3 of 6 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VXT-5606D B36-VYT-5606D B36-VXT-5607D B36-VYT-5607D
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
4 of 6 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VZT-5602A B36-VZT-5603A B36-VZT-5602B B36-VZT-5603B
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
CONDUIT CONNECTION - - - -
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
5 of 6 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VZT-5602C B36-VZT-5603C B36-VZT-5602D B36-VZT-5603D
ENGG CERT

TYPE NUMBER 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05 330180-91-05
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
CONDUIT CONNECTION - - - -
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:


ISS FOR
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
6 of 6 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VE/VT-5601A B36-VE/VT-5602A B36-VE/VT-5601B B36-VE/VT-5602B
SERVICE Pump DE Pump NDE Pump DE Pump NDE
ENGG CERT

VIBRATION RANGE 0-1 in/s 0-1 in/s 0-1 in/s 0-1 in/s
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:

1) Full part no.: CA21128-01-00-03-02.
2) Set point 1 = 0.28 in/s (Alarm), set point 2 = 0.43 in/s (Trip).
ISS FOR
Pump Bearing Housing Velomitor DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
1 of 2 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

PMT OPRNS

INSTRUMENT TAG NO. B36-VE/VT-5601C B36-VE/VT-5602C B36-VE/VT-5601D B36-VE/VT-5602D
SERVICE Pump DE Pump NDE Pump DE Pump NDE
ENGG CERT

VIBRATION RANGE 0-1 in/s 0-1 in/s 0-1 in/s 0-1 in/s
DESCRI PTI ON
HZ
JO/ EWO
16- 11- 07
DATE

REV
NO.

00
SECOND
DISCIPLINE
C.W.
POWER SUPPLY
16-11-07
DATE:
PROJECT
B.V.
DATE: 16-11-07
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY

DATE:
OPERATIONS
TYPE NUMBER - - - -
CONTROL NUMBER
V ERI FI CA T I ON
EDSD
DATE:
BY:

1) Full part no.: CA21128-01-00-03-02.
2) Set point 1 = 0.28 in/s (Alarm), set point 2 = 0.43 in/s (Trip).
ISS FOR
Pump Bearing Housing Velomitor DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
ISS
B36 J E-
(DCC) NO.:
2 of 2 00
EDSD/3186-1000.XLS

OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
LUBRICATION, SHAFT SEALING AND CONTROL OIL SYSTEMS DATA SHEET
NOTE: INDICATES INFORMATION BE COMPLETED BY BUYER.
PMT
SAS
SAS
SAS
BY MANUFACTURER OF LUBRICATION, COMPRESSOR SHAFT SEALING AND CONTROL OIL SYSTEMS.
ENG'G CERT.
BY MANUFACTURER OF BUFFER FLUID SYSTEMS FOR MECHANICAL SEALS AND CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS.
PW
PW
PW
PURCHASERS REFERENCE
APPLICABLE TO: PROPOSALS PURCHASE AS BUILT

AV
AV
AV
LUBE, SEAL, CONTROL OIL SYSTEM MANUFACTURER BARIC SYSTEMS
BUFFER FLUID SYSTEM MANUFACTURER
MANUFACTURER REFERENCE NUMBER 34481
SYSTEM SUPPLIES LUBE OIL COMPR. SEAL OIL CONTROL OIL BUFFER FLUID TO:
DRIVER TAG NO. COMPR. TAG NO. GEAR TAG NO. PUMP TAG NO.
SEPARATE LUBE OIL SYSTEM
COMBINED LUBE & SEAL OIL SYSTEM
SEPARATE SEAL OIL SYSTEM
CONTROL OIL SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION
BUFFER FLUID SYSTEM FOR DOUBLE
MECHANICAL SEAL
BUFFER FLUID SYSTEM FOR TANDEM
MECHANICAL SEAL
MAIN EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET NO.(S) DRIVER 9 - 17 COMPRESSOR
GEAR 20 - 22 PUMP 3-8
PURCHASERS REFERENCES
LUBE, SEAL & CONTROL OIL SYSTEM(S) BUFFER FLUID SYSTEM
NORMAL AFTER TRIP BUFFER LIQUID

USGPM psig USGPM psig OIL ACCORDING 26-SAMSS-045
LUBE OIL PER
DRIVER 8.892 25
JO/EWO
DRIVER UNIT 17.259 25 REQUIRED FLOW PER SEAL

GEAR 51.514 25 AT psia
OTHER
DATE
TOTAL 77.755 25 TOTAL FLOW REQ'D BY SYSTEM USGPM

o
COMPRESSOR SYSTEM DESIGN PRESS. psia F
REV
NO.
00
00
A
SEAL OIL
DISCIPLINE
CONTROL OIL SYSTEM TO SERVE SEALS
ENGINEER
OIL CHARACTERISTICS
DATE PER 26-SAMSS-045 ISO VG 46 ISO VG 32 STUFFING BOX PRESSURE: psi

PROJECT
OTHER, VISCOSITY AT 40F cS/cP/SSU
ENGINEER
VISCOSITY AT 100F cS/cP/SSU PROCESS FLUID
DATE SAMSS NUMBER 31-SAMSS-004

o
CERTIFIED COMPRESSOR BLOCK-IN TIME MIN. MAX. FLOW TEMP. F
EQUIPMENT COAST-DOWN TIME MIN.
DATE EQUIPMENT COOL-OFF TIME MIN. VISC. AT FLOW TEMP. cS/cP/SSU

CONSTRUCTION o
MIN. START-UP OIL TEMP. 60 F
AGENCY
SETTLING OUT PRESSURE psig VAPOUR PR. AT MAX. FLOW TEMP. psig
DATE PROCESS RELEIF VALVE SETTINGS psig

OPERATIONS REL. DENSITY AT FLOW TEMP.
DATE PURCHASERS REFERENCES
FIG NO. OPTIONS NOS. COMMENTS

EDSD VERIFICATION
API 614 REFERENCES

CONTROL NUMBER
SEPARATE LUBE OIL SYSTEM
SEPARATE SEAL OIL SYSTEM
COMBINED LUBE & SEAL SYSTEM
LUBE OIL AT MAIN EQUIPMENT

DATE:
BY:
SEAL OIL AT MAIN EQUIPMENT
BUFFER FLUID SYSTEM FOR DOUBLE MECH.

SEAL ACCORDING STD. DWG. AB-036281 AB-036282 AB-036283 AB-036368 AE-036369

BUFFER FLUID SYSTEM FOR TANDEM

MECH. SEAL ACCORDING STD. DWG. AB-036370
LUBE OIL SYST. ACC. STD. DWG. AB-036858 AB-036859 AB-036859 SPECIAL DWG. NO. SK-200050
DATA SHEET FOR LUBRICATION, SHAFT SEALING AND CONTROL OIL SYSTEMS DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DAT
24
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
BY MANUFACTURER OF LUBRICATION, COMPRESSOR SHAFT SEALING AND CONTROL OIL
PMT
SYSTEMS.
SAS
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
SYSTEMS COMPONENTS LAYOUT UTILITY DATA

PW
PW
PW F. SYSTEM LAYOUT AVAILABLE UTILITIES REQUIRED
THE OIL SYSTEM SHALL COMPLY, WHEN SPECIFIED WITH TYPICAL ELECTRIC YES NO AMOUNT
AV
AV
AV
SCHEMATICS OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND COMPLETE SYSTEMS AC PHASES
V kW kVa
AS SHOWN IN APPENDIX "A" OF API 614. * Max. all motors running DC A
FIG OPTION MOTORS AC 460 3
OVERALL LAYOUT 2A-10 CONTROLS DC 24
OIL RESERVOIR 2A-21 2A-21a&c PROTECTION DC 24
PRIMARY PUMPS 2A-19 2A-19b INSTRUMENT AIR: YES NO
STAND-BY PUMPS PRESSURE AVAILABLE psig 115

3
BOOSTER PUMPS REQUIRED AMOUNT in .PM (STD)
AUTO-START TURBINE COOLING WATER WELL WATER TREATED WATER
DESCRIPTION
COOLER(S) SEAWATER
FILTER(S) LOW PRESS. 2A-17 ONCE THROUGH SYSTEM CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM
HIGH PRESS. DESIGN TEMP. INLET RETURNoF
ACCUMULATOR REQUIRED AMOUNT USGPM

OVERHEAD TANK AVAILABLE PRESSURE psig
INNER SEAL DRAINERS REQUIRED PRESSURE psig

o
REMARKS FOULING FACTOR SQ.Ft. F.hr/BTU
LOCATION, SITE AND INSTALLATION DATA
1. INDOOR HEATED UNDER ROOF INSTALLED ON:
OUTDOOR UNHEATED PARTIAL SIDES MAIN EQUIPM. SEPARATE FREE
AMBIENT CONDITIONS: BASE PLATE CONSOLE STANDING

o o o
2. DESIGN 130 F MAX. 122 F MIN. 32 F LUBE OIL SYST.
3. COMPR. SEAL OIL SYST.

JO/EWO
4. ELECTRICAL AREA CLASS 1 GR. IIA Div. 2 COMPR. SEAL OIL REC. SYST.
NON-CLASSIFIED AREA BUFFER FLUID SYST.
5. CORROSIVE ELEMENTS: H2S HEAT EXCHANGERS

DATE
SALT OR SEACOAST GAUGE BOARD PANEL
OTHERS MFR. SUPPLIES INTERCONNECTING PIPING YES NO

REV
NO.
00
A
EQUIPMENT DATA
DISCIPLINE
RESERVOIR SEPARATE LUBE COMB LUBE SEAL SEPARATE SEAL BUFFER FLUID
ENGINEER
SERVICE APPLICATION LUBE OIL
DATE CHARGE CAPACITY, L 3167

PROJECT
RUNDOWN CAPACITY, L 450 / / / /
ENGINEER
RETENTION CAPACITY, MINUTES & L 9.07 / 2717
DATE ELECT. IMMERSION HEATER, YES/NO YES 12 HP
CERTIFIED RESERVOIR TAG NUMBER HOLD -D- -D- -D- -D-
PUMPS LUBE COMB LUBE SEAL SEPARATE SEAL BUFFER FLUID
DATE MAIN PUMP TYPE, ROTARY CENTRIFUGAL ROTARY

CONSTRUCTION
STAND-BY PUMP TYPE, ROTARY CENTRIFUGAL ROTARY
AGENCY
EMERGENCY PUMP TYPE, ROTARY CENTRIFUGAL
DATE MAIN PUMP TAG NO. HOLD -G- -G- -G- -G-
OPERATIONS STAND BY PUMP TAG NO. HOLD -G- -G- -G- -G-
EMERGENCY PUMP TAG NO. -G- -G- -G- -G-
DATE MAIN PUMP DATA SHEET NO.
STAND-BY PUMP DATA SHEET NO.

EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
EMERGENCY PUMP DATA SHEET NO.
DRIVERS
DRIVER TYPE MAIN PUMPS, ST. TURB EL. MOTOR El. Motor
DRIVER POWER RATING SPEED, kW RPM 20 / 3550 / / /

DATE:
BY:
DRIVER TYPE STAND-BY PUMP, ST. TURB. EL. MOTOR El. Motor
DRIVER POWER RATING SPEED, kW RPM 20 / 3550 / / /

DRIVER TYPE/POWER RATING SPEED EMERG. PUMP. / / / / / / / /

MAIN PUMP DRIVER TAG NO.

STAND-BY PUMP DRIVER TAG NO.
EMERGENCY PUMP DRIVER TAG NO.
DAT
25
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 4
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
PMT
SYSTEMS.
SAS
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
EQUIPMENT DATA (CONT'D)

PW
PW
PW HEAT EXCHANGERS LUBE OIL LUBE & SEAL SEPARATE SEAL BUFFER FLUID
SERVICE APPLICATION Lube Oil Cooling

AV
AV
AV
ACCORDING 32-SAMSS-007, YES/NO No
ACCORDING 32-SAMSS-011, YES/NO Yes
ACCORDING 32-SAMSS-019, YES/NO No
VENDOR STANDARD Air cooled
HEATLOAD, BTU/MIN 8139.51
MANUFACTURER AIRFINS
HEAT EXCHANGER TAG NO. HOLD -E- -E- -E-
FILTERS
SEPARATE
SERVICE APPLICATION LUBE LUBE & SEAL CONT. OIL BUFFER FLUID
SEAL OIL
10 NOMINAL
DESCRIPTION
FILTRATION, MICROMETERS
MANUFACTURER INDUFIL
DESIGN PRESSURE/TEST, psig 145 / 188.5 / / / /
DIFF. PRESS. CLEAN/FAIL, psig 5.8 / 69.6 / / / /

FILTER TAG NO. HOLD KF KF
ACCUMULATORS
SERVICE APPLICATION LUBE OIL CONTROL OIL SEAL OIL BUFFER FLUID
NUMBER REQUIRED
NOMINAL/USABLE CAP. EACH, USG / / / /
DIRECT CONTACT/BLADDER TYPE
MANUFACTURER
RUNDOWN, MIN.
DESIGN PRESS./TEST psig

JO/EWO
INCLUDE: CHARGE PR. GAUGE

MANUAL CHARGE VALVE
GAS SUPPLY REGULATOR

DATE
ACCUMULATOR TAG NUMBER(S) -D- -D- -D- -D-
OVERHEAD TANKS (SUPPLIER TO CONFIRM IF REQ.)

REV
NO.
00
A
SERVICE APPLICATION RUNDOWN LUBE LOW PRESS SEAL MED. PRESS. SEAL HIGH PRESS. SEAL
DISCIPLINE
REQUIRED: YES/NO YES
ENGINEER
DIRECT CONTACT/BLADDER TYPE DIRECT CONTACT
DATE RUNDOWN, MINUTES 3 MINUTES

PROJECT
PURGE GAS: TYPE OF GAS N/A
ENGINEER
in3/S(STD) N/A
DATE INCL. CONTROL N/A
CERTIFIED TOTAL CAPACITY, USG 238
NOMINAL USABLE CAP. USG N/A / N/A / / /
DATE DESIGN PRESS./TEST psig ATMOS / FILL / / /

CONSTRUCTION
OVERH. TANK TAG NO. -D- -D- -D-
AGENCY
DRAINERS FOR INNER COMPR. SEAL OIL
LOW-PRESSURE SEAL MED.-PRESSURE SEAL HIGH. PRESSURE SEAL
DATE SERVICE APPLICATION
OIL OIL OIL
OPERATIONS FLOAT/TRANSMITTED CONTROLLED
POTS, FOR MANUAL DRAIN: YES/NO
DATE CAPACITY, EACH, USG
DESIGN PRESS./TEST,psig / / /
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
DRAINER TAG NO.(S) -D- -D- -D-
MIST ELIMINATORS
CAPACITY, USG
MIST EL. TAG NO.(S) -D- -D- -D-

DATE:
BY:
DEGASSING RESERVOIR
NORMAL/MAX. CAP., USG / / /

L/sec; NORMAL/MAX. / / /
o
OPERATING TEMP, F
PURGE GAS; TYPE / / /
DEGAS RES. TAG. NO. -D- -D- -D-
DAT
26
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
PMT
SYSTEMS.
SAS
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

PW
PW
PW H MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION MANUFACTURER
1. PIPING: UPSTR. FILTER ASTM 316 St. Steel GAUGE BOARD

AV
AV
AV
DOWNSTR. FILTER ASTM 316 St. Steel INDICATORS AND SWITCHES ONLY
2. RESERVOIR ASTM 316 St. Steel ALL INSTRUMENTATION
3. DEGASSING TANK ASTM CONTROL STATION
4. OVERHEAD TANK ASTM INTEGRAL WITH GAUGE BOARD
5. RUNDOWN TANK (IF REQ.) ASTM SS SEPARATE
6. SEAL DRAINERS ASTM SWITCH RACK
7. FILTERS ASTM 316L or 304L SS MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
8. ACCUMULATORS ASTM MOUNTED ON MAIN EQUIP. BASE PLATE FREE STANDING
9. L.O. AND/OR S.O. CONSOLE

DESCRIPTION
INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROLS

LOCALLY GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE REQUIREMENTS: ALARM & SHUTDOWN SWITCHES: ALARM TRIP
MOUNTED BOARD
MAIN LUBE OIL PUMP DISCHARGE LOW LUBE OIL RESERVOIR LEVEL
STAND-BY LUBE OIL PUMP DISCHARGE LOW SEAL OIL/BUFFER FL. RESERVOIR LEVEL
EMERGENCY LUBE OIL PUMP DISCHARGE HIGH SEAL OIL HEAD TANK LEVEL
SEAL OIL/BUFFER FLUID PUMP DISCHARGE HIGH-HIGH SEAL OIL HEAD TANK LEVEL
STAND-BY S.O./BUFFER FLUID PUMP DISCHARGE LOW SEAL OIL HEAD TANK LEVEL
EMERGENCY SEAL OIL PUMP DISCHARGE LOW-LOW SEAL OIL HEAD TANK LEVEL
LUBE OIL HEADER (EACH LEVEL) STAND-BY LUBE OIL PUMP START
SEAL OIL HEADER (EACH LEVEL) LOW EMERG. LUBE OIL RUNDOWN TK. LEVEL
CONTROL OIL HEADER STAND-BY LUBE OIL PUMP RUNNING
ACCUMULATOR PRE CHARGE GAS STAND-BY SEAL/OIL BUFFER FL. PUMP RUNNING
COMPRESOR SEAL REFERENCE GAS EMERGENCY LUBE OIL PUMP RUNNING

JO/EWO
PURGE GAS SUPPLY EMERGENCY BOOSTER PUMP RUNNING

EACH OIL PUMP SUCTION HIGH LUBE OIL FILTER P psi
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAGES: HIGH SEAL OIL/BUFFER FL. FILTER P psi

DATE
LUBE OIL FILTERS HIGH GOVERNOR OIL FILTER P psi
SEAL OIL/BUFFER FLUID FILTERS HIGH CONTROL OIL FILTER P psi

REV
NO.
00
A
BOOSTER OIL FILTERS HIGH SEAL OIL DRAINER LEVEL

DISCIPLINE
CONTROL OIL FILTERS LOW LUBE OIL HEADER PRESS (EACH)
ENGINEER
TEMPERATURE GAUGE REQUIREMENTS: LOW-LOW LUBE OIL HEADER PRESS. (EACH)
DATE FUNCTION LOW SEAL OIL/BUFFER FLUID HEADER

PROJECT
LUBE OIL COOLER INLET PRESSURE (EACH LEVEL)
ENGINEER
LUBE OIL COOLER OUTLET LOW CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE
DATE SEAL OIL/BUFFER FLUID COOLER INLET LOW SEAL OIL P psi (EACH LEVEL)
CERTIFIED SEAL OIL/BUFFER FLUID COOLER OUTLET LOW-LOW SEAL OIL P psi (EACH LEVEL)
LUBE AND/OR SEAL OIL RESERVOIR HIGH THRUST BRG. OIL TEMP. (EA. BRG.)
DATE DEGASSING TANK HIGH LUBE OIL COOLER OUTLET TEMP.

CONSTRUCTION
LEVEL INDICATORS/CONTROLLERS: LOW LUBE OIL COOLER OUTLET TEMP.
AGENCY
CONTAMINATED SEAL OIL DRAIN TRAPS HIGH SEAL OIL COOLER OUTLET TEMP.
DATE SEAL OIL DRAIN TRIP LEVEL CONTROLLERS LOW SEAL OIL COOLER OUTLET TEMP.
OPERATIONS DEGASSING TANK HIGH RUNDOWN TANK LEVEL
LUBE OIL RESERVOIR LOW RUNDOWN TANK LEVEL (IF TANK REQ.)
DATE SEAL OIL/BUFFER FLUID RESERVOIR HIGH ACCUMULATOR LEVEL
SEAL OIL HEAD TANKS LOW ACCUMULATOR LEVEL

EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
SEAL HEAD TANK LEVEL CONTROLLER
LUBE OIL RUN-DOWN TANK (IF TANK IS REQ.)
INSPECTION AND TESTS MISCELLANEOUS
L. INSPECTION AND TESTING REQ'D WITNESS MASSES (lb) (Approx)

DATE:
BY:
CLEANLINESS L.O. CONSOLE 17620 S.O. CONSOLE
FOUR-HOUR RUN TOTAL SHIPPING MASS (lb)

CHECK CONTROLS SPACE REQUIREMENTS (Ft): (Approx)

CHANGEOVERS (COOLERS/FILTERS) COMPLETE UNIT: Ft L 20.34 W 13.12 H 8.04

ONE-AND TWO-PUMP OPERATION L.O. CONSOLE: Ft L W H
HYDROSTATIC S.O. CONSOLE: Ft L W H
DAT
27
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMP DATA SHEET
PERFORMANCE DATA
PMT
DESIGN OPERATING DATA
SAS
SAS
SAS
A. SERVICE E. PUMP CHARACTERISTICS
CONTINUOUS INTERMITTENT STAND BY .1 MAX./MIN. CAPACITY USGPM 114.22 110.27

ENG'G CERT.
PW
PW
PW ATTENDED UNATTENDED .2 MAX. ALLOWABLE DISCHARGE PRESSURE psig 145
PUMP FUNCTION: Lube Oil Pump (1 x operating, 1 stand-by) .3 MAX. RELIEF VALVE SET PRESSURE psig 131.8
AV
AV
AV
.4 MAX. ALLOWABLE SPEED RPM 4000
B. LIQUID CHARACTERISTICS .5 NPSHR AT MAX. CAPACITY psi 12.91
1. LIQUID PUMPED: LUBE OIL ISO VG 46 .6 POWER ABSORBED AT MAX. CAPACITY BHP 15.08
o
2. RATED FLOW TEMPERATURE F 170.8 .7 MAX. ALLOWABLE POWER CONS. BHP 20
o
.1 MIN./MAX. FLOW TEMPERATURE F 60 170.8 .8 EFFICIENCY (HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL) % 63.99
3. RELATIVE DENSITY AT FLOW TEMP. 0.839
VISCOSITY AT FLOW TEMP. cS/cP/SSU 13.67
.1 MIN./MAX. VISCOSITY cS/cP/SSU 95.9 13.67
VAPOR PRESSURE AT FLOW TEMP. psia NEG. EQUIPMENT DATA
NEG. NEG.
DESCRIPTION
.1 V.P. AT MAX. FLOW TEMP. psia F. PUMP MODEL, MASS, LUBRICANTS
6. SOLIDS IN FLUID: NONE P.P.M. UNKNOWN 1. MANUFACTURER SPX PLENTY MIRRLEES

.1 CHARACTER OF SOLIDS: PULPY GRITTY HARD SOFT .1 TYPE/SIZE: KCA52-4NL
.2 .2 SERIAL NUMBER(S): TBA

7. GAS IN FLUID NONE VOL. % UNKNOWN 2. PUMP EQUIPPED WITH
.1 TYPE OF GAS REQD VENDOR SUPPLY
8. PRINCIPLE CORROSIVES .1 DRIVER(INCL. COUPLING
AND GUARD IF REQUIRED)
.1 pH OF PUMPED FLUID .2 BASE PLATE
.3 SUCTION STRAINER
C. RATED OPERATING CONDITIONS .4 RELIEF VALVE
1. CAPACITY MAX./MIN. USGPM 93.31 93.31 .5 SUCTION AND DISCHARGE PIPEWORK
2. NPSH AVAILABLE AT SUCTION PORT psi 14 FOR RELIEF VALVE

JO/EWO
3. SUCTION PRESSURE psig 0 .6 SHAFT PACKING: MAKE AND TYPE THROTTLE BUSH
4. TOTAL DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE psi 68.2 .7 MECH. SEAL
5. DISCHARGE PRESSURE psig 68.2 SINGLE DOUBLE TANDEM

DATE
6. RELIEF VALVE SETTING psig 101.5 MAKE N/A
7. LOCATION MANUF. SEAL MODEL N/A

REV
NO.
00
A
INDOOR OUTDOOR SERIAL NUMBERS N/A

DISCIPLINE
OFFSHORE ONSHORE Coastal Location API 610 SEAL FLUSH PLAN N/A
ENGINEER
o
8. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE MAX. / MIN. F 122/32 .8 COUPLING MAKE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD
DATE D. PUMP/DRIVER/TRANSMISSION TYPE .1 MODEL MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD

PROJECT
1. PUMP IN ACCORDANCE WITH API 676 YES .2 TYPE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD
ENGINEER
2. PUMP TYPE 3. MASS
DATE SPUR GEAR TWIN SCREW VANE .1 PUMP lb

CERTIFIED HELICAL GEAR THREE SCREW PROGRESSING .1 ROTATING ASSEMBLY lb
OTHER CAVITY .2 CASING lb
DATE .1 RATED SPEED RPM 3550 .2 BASEPLATE lb

CONSTRUCTION (LOOKING FROM
.2 DIRECTION OF ROTATION CW CCW .3 MOTOR lb
AGENCY DRIVER END)
3. DRIVER TYPE ELECTRIC MOTOR TOTAL MASS lb
DATE .1 RATED SPEED RPM 3550 4. LUBRICANTS

OPERATIONS .2 RATED POWER BHP 20 .1 BEARING LUBRICANT
.3 HORIZONTAL VERTICAL SAUDI ARAMCO EQUIV.
DATE .4 FLANGE MOUNTED FOOT MOUNTED .2 COUPLING LUBRICANT
.5 SHAFT EXTENSION: STANDARD SPECIAL SAUDI ARAMCO EQUIV.

EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
.6 FRAME SIZE: 256TDV UTILITY DATA
.7 AREA CLASSIFICATION G. UTILITY
CLASS 1 Zone: 2 , GROUP II A 1. ELECTRIC POWER AVAILABLE

AC PHASE
NON-CLASSIFIED DC VOLTS Hz
DATE:
BY:
4. INTERMEDIATE TRANSMISSION .1 MAIN ELECTRIC DRIVER AC 460 3 / 60
GEAR BOX, N/A RATIO : 2. COOLING WATER INLET PRESS. psig

o
MAKE AGMA FACTOR INLET TEMP. F
MODEL FLOW USGPM

3. OTHER Air at 115 psig
DATA SHEET FOR ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMP DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DAT
28
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMP DATA SHEET
PUMP CONSTRUCTION DATA PERFORMANCE DATA
PMT
SAS
SAS
SAS
H. MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION SUPPLIER to complete table K. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
ENG'G CERT.
API CLASS.
PW
PW
PW 1. SHOP INSPECTION AND TESTS

ASTM OR EQUIVALENT REQ'D WITNESSED CERTIFIED
AV
AV
AV
1. CASING BS1490 LM 25TF .1 HYDROSTATIC TEST
2. ROTOR BS970 080 A42 .2 RUNNING TEST (MIN. 4 HRS)
3. SHAFT BS1452 Gr 250 .3 PERFORMANCE TEST
4. GLAND N/A .4 NPSH TEST
5. GLAND PACKING N/A .5 DISMANTLE AND INSPECT AFTER TEST YES/NO NO
6. LANTERN RING N/A (Running test as part of main unit tests)
7. BASE PLATE N/A 2. DRAWINGS AND OTHER DATA REQUIRED

Certified dimensional outline drawing and list of
8. RELIEF VALVE N/A 1.
connections
9. PIPEWORK N/A 2. Foundation plan showing anchor bolt location
DESCRIPTION
10. GASKETS NON ASBESTOS 3. Cross-sectional drawing and bill of materials

11. BEARINGS N/A 4. Center of gravity, vertical and plan location
12. BEARING HOUSING BS970 080 M40 5. Lube oil schematic and bill of materials
13. HARD SURFACING OVERLAY N/A 6. Cooling or heating schematic and bill of materials
14. MECH. SEAL SPRINGS N/A 7. Driver outline
8. Driver performance characteristics
J. PUMP CONSTRUCTION 9. Completed driver data sheets

1. PUMP NOZZLE 10. Dimensional outlines for all major accessory equipment
ASME
.1 SUCTION SIZE FACING POSITION 11. Operating and maintenance manuals
RATING
THREADED in. 12. Parts list with sectional drawings
FLANGED in. 13. Spare parts recommendation
3. PUMP NAMEPLATE DIMENSIONAL DATA MUST BE IN ENGLISH UNITS

JO/EWO
ASME
.2 DISCHARGE SIZE FACING POSITION
RATING
THREADED in. 4. PURCHASER'S DECISIONS REQUIRED BY PARAGRAPH 1.1 OF API 676
FLANGED 3 in. 150 lb RF TOP WILL BE SPECIFIED IN THE PURCHASE ORDER.

DATE
.3
5. PIPING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 01-SAMSS-17.

REV
NO.
00
A
2. OTHER CONNECTIONS
DISCIPLINE
SERVICE NO. SIZE TYPE 6. PUMP MARK NO(S) -HOLD
ENGINEER
LUBE OIL INLET -G- , -G-
DATE LUBE OIL OUTLET -G- , -G-

PROJECT
SEAL LIQUID INLET
ENGINEER
SEAL LIQUID OUTLET
DATE CASING DRAIN
CERTIFIED VENTS 7. PUMPS OF IDENTICAL TYPE & SIZE IN OPERATION

COOLING WATER
DATE -G- , -G-

CONSTRUCTION
3. CLEARANCES -G- , -G-
AGENCY
.1 RADIAL (DESIGN/MAX./MIN.) in.
DATE .2 AXIAL (DESIGN/MAX./MIN.) in.
OPERATIONS
4. BEARINGS INTERNAL EXTERNAL
DATE .1
5. TIMING GEARS INTERNAL EXTERNAL

EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
6. NUMBER OF SCREWS 3 PITCH 52 PURCHASERS REFERENCE
.1 THRUST EQUALIZATION METHOD
7. HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT JACKSCREWS YES NO 1. DRIVER DATA SHEET

MAX. ALLOW WORK HYDROSTATIC TEST
2. GEAR UNIT DATA SHEET
DATE:
8. PRESSURES
PRESS PRESSURE
BY:
o
AT F AT F 3. LUBE OIL SYST. DATA SHEET
.1 CASE psig 145 217.5 4. SAFETY INSTRUCTION SHEET
.2 JACKETS psig 5. EQUIPM. NOISE DATA SHEET

.3 COILS psig
DATA SHEET FOR ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMP DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DAT
29
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
SAS
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
SUPPLIER Data:
PW
PW
PW
GENERAL INFORMATION
AV
AV
AV
Manufacturer GENERAL ELECTRIC Model 5KS256XAB156 Serial No. TBA
MOTOR DATA
Nameplate Power 20 kW (hp) Voltage 460 Phase 3 Hertz 60
Full Load Speed 3550 RPM Enclosure Type TEFC Frame Size 256TDV
DESCRIPTION
Torque:

3.31

Load 25% 50% 75% Full
Amperes 6.38 11.12 16.40 22.30
Power Factor 80.46 90.18 91.91 91.50
Nominal Efficiency 91.14 93.36 93.16 91.70
Locked Rotor Amps at Rated Voltage 140.53

JO/EWO
Insulation System
DATE
Bearing Information
Coupling End Bearing: Manufacturers Type ROLLER Part No. 6310ZC3

REV
NO.
00
A
Outboard End Bearing: Manufacturers Type ROLLER Part No. 6309ZC3

DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER
Certification: Class 1 Group C/D Div 2 Agency CSA
DATE
PROJECT
ENGINEER
Weights/Dimensions
Net Weight 350 lb Rotor Weight lb
DATE
DATE
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
DATE
OPERATIONS
DATE
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
DATE:
BY:
DAT
31
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
1 FILTER
2 EQUIPMENT NO. SPECIFICATION NO. 32-SAMSS-004
PMT
SAS
SAS
SAS
3 SERVICE Lube Oil Filters P.O. NO. DATE
4 MANUFACTURER YEAR BUILT
ENG'G CERT.
PW
PW
PW 5 MODEL / SIZE (LENGTH, WIDTH, HEIGHT) ELEMENT CATALOG NO.

6 NO. OF UNITS PER ITEM CONNECTED IN (PARALLEL / SERIES) QUANTITY OF ELEMENTS
AV
AV
AV
PROCESS DATA / SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENT SUPPLIER DATA
9 FLUID NAME Lubrication Oil ISO VG 46 Oil ISO VG 46
10 TOTAL FLUID ENTERING (1) USgpm 77.755
11 LIQUID USgpm 77.755
12 VAPOUR USgpm 0
13 NON-COND USgpm 0
14 STEAM USgpm 0
15 WATER USgpm 0
16 67.8
DESCRIPTION
OPERATING PRESSURE psia

17 OPERATING TEMPERATURE (6) F 140
18 DENSITY, LIQUID lb/ft3 52.36
19 SPECIFIC HEAT Btu/lb 0.49

20 VISCOSITY cP 19.73
21 CONDUCTIVITY (LIQUID / VAPOUR) 0.000001789
22 LOADING @ INLET WT % 100
23 LIQUID DENSITY lb/ft3 52.36
24 VISCOSITY @ OP. TEMPERATURE cP 19.73
25 PRESSURE DROP ALLOW / CALCULATED psi STA 5.8 5.8
26 MAX. DIFF. PRESSURE ACROSS FILTER ELEMENTS CLEAN / FOUL (2) psi STA STA 69.6
27 SOLIDS, CONTENT OF (MAXIMUM SOLIDS CONCENTRATION) ppmw

28 ENTRAINED LIQUID ppmw
JO/EWO
29 QUALITY (LIQUID)
30 TOTAL DISSOLVED SOLIDS (LIQUID)
31 DROPLET AND % SIZE CUTOFF microns 10

DATE
32 PARTICLE REMOVAL % SIZE CUTOFF microns
33 EFFICIENCY % SIZE CUTOFF microns

REV
NO.
00
A
34 NATURE OF SOLIDS (ABRASIVE / NON-ABRASIVE)

DISCIPLINE
35 MESH SIZE mesh / microns STA STA 10
ENGINEER
36 TOTAL FILTRATION AREA / FREE AREA in2 / % STA STA
DATE 37 DESIGN - MATERIALS - CONSTRUCTION PER UNIT

PROJECT
38 DESIGN PRESSURE psig 145
ENGINEER
39 TEST PRESSURE psig PER CODE 188.5
DATE 40 DESIGN TEMPERATURE F 212
CERTIFIED 41 CORROSION ALLOWANCE in 0
42 CONNECTIONS IN 2" NB 150 lb RF
DATE 43 SIZE / RATING / FACING OUT 2" NB 150 lb RF

CONSTRUCTION
44 DRAIN & VENTS 3/4" NB 150 lb RF
AGENCY
45 MATERIALS (3) : SHELL ASTM A182 316L COVERS ASTM A182 316L
DATE 46 INTERNAL (SUPPORTS) ASTM A182 316L FILTER ELEMENTS GLASS FIBRE MEDIA
OPERATIONS 47 FLANGES ASTM A182 F316 GASKETS NON ASBESTOS
48 STUD BOLTS ASTM A193 B8M STUD BOLT NUTS ASTM A194 8M
DATE 49 SKIRT OR SUPPORT REQUIRED

50 LEVEL GAUGE:
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
51 WEIGHT lb EMPTY 254 FULL 277

52 SURFACE PREPARATION
53 CODE - ASME VIII, DIVISION 1 STAMP YES UM STAMP
54
DATE:
BY:
55 CLEANING METHOD (SUPPLIER TO ADVISE) :

56
ABBREVIATIONS
57 STA = SUPPLIER TO ADVISE
58 (S) = SUMMER, (W) = WINTER

59 KCS = KILLED CARBON STEEL

60 SS = STAINLESS STEEL
FILTER DATA SHEET DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DAT
35
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
1
2 Equipment No. HOLD Specification No. 32-SAMSS-011
PMT
SAS
SAS
SAS
3 Service Lube Oil Coolers P.O. No. DATE
4 Manufacturer AIRFINS Year Built 2007
ENG'G CERT.
PW
PW
PW 5 Model/Size (length, width) +2LF1400/5-H1.1-6950(1307)4RVF2-11-67X16V1-T8 Forced or Induced FORCED

6 No. of Bays 1
AV
AV
AV
PERFORMANCE DATA - TUBE SIDE PERFORMANCE DATA - AIR SIDE
8 Fluid Name Lubrication Oil ISO VG 46 Altitude 1419 Ft
o
9 Total Fluid Entering 77.755 USGPM Design Inlet Air Temp. 130 F
o
10 IN OUT Outlet Air Temp. 139.1 F
o
11 Liquid Lb/Hr 32625 32625 Min. Design Ambient 32 F
12 Vapor Lb/Hr, Mol Wt 0 0 0 0 Static Pressure 2.176 in. H2O
13 Non-Cond. Lb/Hr, Mol Wt 0 0 0 0 Face Velocity 0.159 FPM
14 Steam Lb/Hr 0 0 Air Quantity (Total) 20.31 SCFM
15 Water Lb/Hr 0 0 Air Quantity (Fan) 6.77 SCFM
16 Viscosity liq./vap. cP 11.47 19.73 Mass Velocity (net free area) Lb/h-ft2
DESCRIPTION
17 Operating Temperature o
F 170 140 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
18 Density, Liquid Lb/Cu.Ft 52.36 52.95 Fans

19 Spec. Heat Btu/Lb oF 0.507 0.49 Manufacturer COMET
Btu/Hr Ft. oF
20 Conduct. liq./vap. 0.000001792 0.000001789 Model

21 Lethal Service Yes No No. Per Bay 1
o
22 Pour/Freeze Point F Diameter 4.593 Ft
o
23 Bubble Point F No. of Blades 4
24 Inlet Pressure 68.2 psig RPM/Tip Speed 600 / 8657 Ft/min
25 Pressure Drop Allow/Calc 15 / 14.94 psi Reqd. H.P. Per Fan 3.5
26 Fouling Resistance 0.00017 m2K/W Hr Ft2 oF/Btu Blade Material Aluminium
27 Surface/Unit Finned Tube 9924 Sq. Ft Pitch Angle: Adj./Auto. Fixed
28 Surface/Unit Bare Tube 453.2 Sq. Ft Speed Reducer
JO/EWO
o
29 M.T.D. Corrected 16.92 F Manufacturer
30 Transfer Rate - Service, Finned Tube 16.5 W/m2K Btu/Hr oF Ft2 Model
31 - Clean, Bare Tube 361 W/m2K Btu/Hr oF Ft2 Type BELT
DATE
32 - Service, Bare Tube N/A Btu/Hr oF Ft2 No. Per Bay 1
33 Latent Heat Btu/Lb Ratio 03:01

REV
NO.
00
A
34 Motor (Driver)
DISCIPLINE
35 Manufacturer GENERAL ELECTRIC
ENGINEER
36 Model 5KS184XAB282W6
DATE 37 Heat Exchanged 488371 Btu/Hr Type TEFC

PROJECT
38 No. Per Bay 1
ENGINEER
39 Horsepower 5
DATE 40 R.P.M. 1755

CERTIFIED 41 Volts/Phase/Hertz 460 / 3 / 60
42 DESIGN - MATERIAL - CONSTRUCTION
o
DATE 43 Design Pressure 145 psig Test Pressure 188.6 psig Design Temperature 203 F
CONSTRUCTION
44 TUBE BUNDLE HEADER Type COVER PLATE TUBE Material A213 TP316L
AGENCY
45 Size 7.5 x 1.5 m Material A240 TP316L (Seamless) (Welded)
DATE 46 No./Bay 1 No. Tube Rows 4 No. Passes* 2 in./ft OD 1 in.

OPERATIONS 47 No. of Tubes/pass 19 Plug Material N/A No. /Bundle 76 / 22.8 ft.
48 Arrangement Gasket Material CAFF Pitch 2.64
DATE 49 Bundles In Parallel In Series Corrosion Allowance 0 in. FIN, Type EXTRUDED
50 Bays In Parallel In Series No., Size Inlet Nozzle 1x2 in. Material ALUMINIUM
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
51 Bundle Frame PAINTED No., Size Outlet Nozzle 1x2 in. OD 2.244 in.
o
52 MISCELLANEOUS Special Nozzles N/A in. No./in. 11 F
53 Struct. Mount (grade) (piperack) c/c Rating & Facing 150 lb RF Code-ASME VIII; Div. 1
54 Surface Preparation TI PI Stamp Yes No
DATE:
BY:
55 Weight - Empty/Full of water 18722 lbs

56 Wind Load psi Standard API 661
57 * Give tube count of each pass when irregular Noise Level Not to Exceed 85 dB(A)
58
59
60
SPECIFICATION SHEET - AIR COOLED HEAT EXCHANGER DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DOC
32
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
BARIC SYSTEMS
DOCUMENT COVER SHEET
PROJECT DETAILS:
CLIENT : SULZER PUMPS (UK) LIMITED
CLIENT O/NO : 48330
PROJECT REF : SAUDI ARAMCO KHURAIS CRUDE SHIPPER PUMPS
BARIC REF : 34481
DOCUMENT: LO COOLER FAN MOTOR DATASHEET
DOCUMENT NO : CMA-34481
CMA-34481 00 First Issue A. PENKETH D. GODSMARK 17-Sep-07
DOCUMENT NUMBER REVISION DESCRIPTION ORIGINATOR APPROVED DATE
2
Marks: CUSTOMER: General Electric International
Page 7 of 7
Final Customer: AIRFINS, U.K.
Wednesday, February 21, 2007
REF.: P.O.4774/P105/Revision 3
Certified Print
Model Number: 5KS184XAB282W6 / Version: v07021163.01
OPRNS
AAN
AAN
AAN
EQUIPMENT NOISE DATA SHEET
PMT
SAS
SAS
SAS
ENG'G CERT.
GENERAL INFORMATION
PW
PW
PW
Project Designation: KHURAIS CENTRAL PROCESSING FACILITY Inquiry / Purchase Order No.:
AV
AV
AV
Location: KHURAIS Manufacturer: BARIC SYSTEMS
Equipment Type: LUBE OIL SYSTEMS Model No.:
Equipment Serial No.: B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D
PURCHASER'S REQUIREMENTS
This form shall be completed for each piece of equipment (or integrated unit) that is likely to generate noise in excess of
85 dBA at a distance of one meter. If the noise level is greater than 90 dBA, the cost of special design and/or acoustic
DESCRIPTION
treatment should be supplied. Measurements are to be made in accordance with ANSI S1.13 and at full design load,
unless otherwise indicated. For rotating electric machinery, use points defined in IEEE Standard 85.
Also measure at: 50% load 120% load Other load

SUPPLIER, MANUFACTURER OR VENDOR INFORMATION
Sound Pressure Level, dBA
Standard Design: Special Design: N/A With Acoustic N/A

Treatment:
JO/EWO
Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels, dBA (Ref. 0.02 mPA)

(Supplier's Guaranteed Maximum Sound Pressure Level at One Meter)
DATE
Octave band Center Frequency Standard Special With Acoustic

REV
NO.
00
A
(Hz) (Hz) Design Design Treatment

DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER
20 - 75 63
75 - 150 125
DATE 150 - 300 250
PROJECT
300 - 600 500
ENGINEER <85 dB(A)
600 - 1200 1000
DATE 1200 - 2400 2000
CERTIFIED 2400 - 4800 4000
4800 - 9600 8000
DATE
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
Description of Special Added Cost:
DATE Design:
OPERATIONS
DATE Description of Acoustic Added Cost:

Treatment:
EDSD VERIFICATION
CONTROL NUMBER
Supplier, Manufacturer or SULZER PUMPS (UK) LTD.

Vendor:
DATE:
BY:
Represented by: Title:

Signature: Date:
EQUIPMENT NOISE DATA SHEET DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
DAT
#REF!
(DCC) NO.

B36 G BE-106004
of 04
PMT OPRNS
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET - PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES CONVENTIONAL & BALANCED TYPES
ENGG CERT
1 INSTRUMENT TAG NUMBER B36-PZV-5600 B36-PZV-5601

2 SERVICE LUBE OIL LUBE OIL
GENERAL DATA
3 SERIAL NUMBER (NOTE 4)

4 P & ID NUMBER PI-34481 PI-34481
5 MANUFACTURER LESER LESER

6 MODEL NUMBER 5264.1122 5264.1122
7 REQUISITION NO. N/A N/A
MATERIAL SOURCE
8 AMS STOCK NO. N/A N/A
9 DESIGN TYPE CONVENT. CONVENT.
10 MATERIAL St. Steel St. Steel
DESCRIPTION
11 SIZE INLET OUTLET 1.5" 3" 1.5" 3"

12 CONNECTION RATING INLET OUTLET 300lb 150lb 300lb 150lb
BODY
13 FLANGE FACING TYPE INLET OUTLET RF RF RF RF

14 SEAT TYPE Metal Metal
15 BONNET (OPEN / CLOSED) Closed Closed
16
17
18 NOZZLE AND DISC St. Steel St. Steel
TRIM MATERIAL
19 GUIDE St. Steel St. Steel

20 SPRING St. Steel St. Steel
JO/EWO
21 SPRING COATING N/A N/A

22 BELLOWS N/A N/A
23
DATE
24 CAP (SCREWED / BOLTED) SCREWED SCREWED

25 LIFTING LEVER (PLAIN / PACKED) N/A N/A
ACCESSORIES
26 TEST GAG (YES / NO) NO NO

REV
NO.
27 VENT WITH BUG SCREEN (YES / NO) NO NO

DISCIPLINE
28 AUXILIARY PISTON (YES / NO) NO NO
ENGINEER
29 LIQUID TRIM (YES / NO) YES YES
DATE: 30
PROJECT 31 ASME CODE (>15 PSIG) DIV (I / VIII) STAMP NO NO NO NO
SELECTION
ENGINEER
BASIS OF
32 FIRE BLOCKED DISCHARGE (F / BD) BD BD

33 OTHER N/A N/A
DATE:
CERTIFIED 34
35 PROCESS FLUID ISOVG 46 ISOVG 46
36 CORROSIVE COMPOUNDS NONE NONE
DATE:
37 REQUIRED CAPACITY 59.17 USGPM 59.17 USGPM
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY 38 MW OR SP. GR. @ RELIEVING TEMPERATURE 0.86 0.86
39 VISCOSITY @ RELIEVING TEMPERATURE CP 11.47 11.47
DATE: 40 WT % FLASH MW OF VAPOR 0 N/A 0 N/A
OPERATIONS
41 TEMPERATURE NORMAL @ RELIEF F 104 104 104 104
SERVICE CONDITIONS
42 PRESSURE NORMAL DESIGN PSIG 58.0 145 58.0 145

43 SET PRESSURE PSIG 101.53 101.53
DATE:
44 SUPERIMPOSED BACK PRESSURE PSIG 0 0
CONTROL NUMBER
VERIFICATION
45 BUILT-UP BACK PRESSURE PSIG 0 0

46 TOTAL MAXIMUM BACK PRESSURE 0 0
EDSD
PSIG
47 COLD DIFFERENTIAL SET PRESSURE PSIG 101.53 101.53
DATE:
48 ACCUMULATION OVERPRESSURE % PSIG 10 10.1 10 10.1

BY:
49 BLOWDOWN % 0 0
50 DISCHARGES TO RESERVOIR RESERVOIR

(DCC) NO.: __________________________.

51 MAXIMUM ALLOW BELLOWS BACK PRESSURE (NOTE 4) N/A N/A

PSIG
52
53
54
ISS FOR DWG. TYPE PLANT NO. INDEX DRAWING NO. SHT.NO. REV.NO.
ISS
J E- 1 OF 3 01
EDSD/8020-611-1-1299.XLS
2

ENGG CERT PMT OPRNS
56 CAL. MAX. TAIL PIPE VELOCITY FT/SEC

57 DESIGN LIMIT ON TAIL PIPE VELOCITY FT/SEC
58 CALCULATED LINE PIPING PRESSURE LOSS PSIG 0 0
PIPING
59 INLET PRESSURE LOSS LIMIT (3% SET PRESSURE) PSIG 0 0

60
61
62
63 SPRING RANGE (NOTE 4) PSIG 93 - 110 93 - 110
SPRING
DATA
64 MANUFACTURER'S SPRING NUMBER (NOTE 4) 12540 12540

DESCRIPTION
65
66 CALCULATED ORIFICE AREA (REFER SH.3) SQ. IN. 0.1266 0.1266
ORIFICE
67 SELECTED API ORIFICE AND AREA API D 0.1279 D 0.1279

AREA
SQ. IN.
68 ACTUAL ORIFICE AREA (NOTE 4) SQ. IN. 0.1279 0.1279
69
70 SET PRESSURE OF LOW VALVE PSIG N/A N/A
71 SET PRESSURE OF INTERMEDIATE VALVE PSIG N/A N/A
MULTIPLE
VALVES
72 SET PRESSURE OF HIGH VALVE PSIG N/A N/A

73 SET PRESSURE OF SPARE VALVE PSIG N/A N/A
74
DATE JO/EWO
75
76
REV.
NO.
DISCIPLINE
ENGINEER
DATE:
PROJECT
ENGINEER
DATE:
CERTIFIED
DATE:
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY
DATE:
OPERATION
DATE:
CONTROL NUMBER
VERIFICATION
EDSD
DATE
BY:
CERTIFICATE
REQUIREMENTS,
(DCC) NO. ______________________________

COMPLETION
DRAWING
ISS
J E- 2 OF 3 01
BY
EDSD/8020-611-2-1299.XLS
2
PMT OPRNS

ENGG CERT
78 A REQUIRED ORIFICE AREA SQ.IN. 0.1266 0.1266

79 A' EXPOSED SURFACE AREA OF VESSEL SQ.FT. N/A N/A
80 C SPECIFIC HEAT COEFF. (SEE API RP 520) N/A N/A
81 F' VALVE FACTOR N/A N/A
82 G SPECIFIC GRAVITY 0.86 0.86
83 K d COEFFICIENT OF DISCHARGE
84 K b BACK PRESSURE CORRECTION FACTOR
NOMENCULATURE
85
86 KSH SUPERHEATED STEAM CORRECTION FACTOR N/A N/A
DESCRIPTION
87 K N NAPIER CORRECTION FACTOR N/A N/A

88 K W BACK PRESSURE CORRECTION FACTOR
89 K V VISCOSITY CORRECTION FACTOR
90 M MOLECULAR WEIGHT N/A N/A
91 P1 SET P + OVER P + ATM. P PSIA 126.2 126.2
92 P SET PRESSURE PSIG 101.5 101.5
93 Pb BACK PRESSURE PSIG 0 0
94 T RELIEVING TEMPERATURE R
F 104 104
95 Q LIQUID FLOW GPM 35.48 USGPM 35.48 USGPM
96 W GAS / VAPOR / STEAM FLOW LB/HR 0 0
JO/EWO
97 Z COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR N/A N/A

98
GAS/VAPOR
ORIFICE AREA CALCULATIONS BASED ON API RP 520 PART 1
DATE
1/2
W (TZ)
A= 1/2
CKd P1 K b (M)
NO.
REV
99
DISCIPLINE STEAM
ENGINEER
W
A=
DATE: 51.5 P K K K
1 d N SH
PROJECT
ENGINEER
100 CERTIFIED LIQUID
1/2
DATE: Q (G)
CERTIFIED A= 1/2
38 K d K W K V (P+OVER P-P )
b
DATE:
101
CONSTRUCTION
AGENCY GAS EXPANSION
F' A'
DATE: A
(P1 ) 1/2
OPERATIONS
NOTES:
DATE:
1. THESE CALCULATIONS DETERMINE MINIMUM REQUIRED ORIFICE AREA. TRUE VALVE CAPACITY DEPENDS ON ACTUAL ORIFICE SELECTED.
CONTROL NUMBER
VERIFICATION
2. VENDOR TO CHECK CALCULATION AND SELECTION AND RETURN COPY OF COMPLETED OR CORRECTED SHEET TO BUYER.
3. FOR GENERAL RELIEF VALVE SPECIFICATION REFER TO 34-AMSS-611.
EDSD
4. VENDOR TO PROVIDE THIS VALUE.

DATE:
5. WHEN A SPECIFIC MANUFACTURER'S VALUE IS USED. THE MANUFACTURER'S SIZING FORMULA MAY BE ATTACHED.
BY:
(DCC) NO.: _____________________________.

ISS
J E- 3 OF 3 01
EDSD/8020-611-3-1299.XLS
2

1.5 Performance Curves and Test Data
The Performance Curves and available Test Data Documentation, listed below, are
included next as inserts to the manual.
Pump Predicted Performance Curve - 4-104.451.653
Test Data to be inserted when available

EFFICIENCY BASED ON API CLEARANCES AT WEAR RINGS
STANDARD CLEARANCES AT BUSHES
NPSH IN FEET
300
40,000 HOUR
200
NPSHR AT IMPLR C
L 90 100
HEAD
2800 MAX IMP DIA. 80
EFFICIENCY PERCENT
2600 70
HEAD IN FEET
2400 60
2200 50
2000 MIN FLOW 40
EFF % TEST TOLERANCE

1800 30
Rated Head : +2%/-2%
Shut Off Head : +2%/-5%
20 15000
BHP
10 10000
BHP AT 0.843 SP GR
0 5000
0 4000 8000 12000 16000 20000 24000 28000
US GALLONS PER MINUTE
FW/HYUNDAI IMPELLER
20 X 24 X 22 G CD 1 STAGE
ARAMCO Sulzer Pumps MAX DIA
578 mm DIA IMPELLER IMPELLER PATT

3895 RPM
KHURAIS 556 mm 1413HSB-30
CURVE NO. REV.
Crude Shipping Pump EYE AREA SQ IN REFERENCE (High Capacity)
ITEM NO: B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D DS 06-APR-2007 S.O 48330 CD-128 C/N 57780 LSF 1.2911 4-104.451.653 A
Document No: IntroSafety 01

Section 2 Introduction and General Safety Revision: 3
Revision Date: 18 Jun 2007
2.1 Introduction
Hazardous Area Classification

The supplied pump and pumpset equipment MAY be designed and manufactured for use
in a Hazardous Area. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area
Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the
pumpset equipment.
Alternatively, if the pumpset equipment IS NOT designed and manufactured for use in a
Hazardous Area, this will be indicated in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 -
Hazardous Area Operation.
This manual details the installation, operating and maintenance procedures required for
the Sulzer pump. It also contains appropriate manufacturers information for the ancillary
equipment supplied by Sulzer.
The manual, which is supplied in accordance with contractual requirements, is not subject
to automatic amendment or revision servicing after initial approval.
The copyright for this installation, operating and maintenance manual remains the property
of Sulzer.
On all correspondence concerning this equipment, including general information inquiries
and the ordering of spare parts, always include the Sulzer reference, which is detailed on
the pump identification plate.
2.1.1 Special Instructions

It is strongly recommended that all installation, operating and maintenance tasks on the
equipment are carried out in accordance with the information, instructions and procedures
contained in this manual. Failure to comply with this requirement may invalidate any
equipment guarantees.
It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that personnel engaged in the installation,
operation or maintenance of this equipment are aware of:
- installation, operating and maintenance information, instructions and procedures
detailed in this manual.
- any special orders or instructions which affect the installation, operation or
maintenance of the equipment.
- actions to be taken in the event of abnormal or emergency conditions.
- approved modifications to installation, operating or maintenance procedures that may
result from experience in operating the equipment.
Before any modification is incorporated in the installation, operating and maintenance
information, instructions and procedures contained in this manual, details of the proposed
modification must first be submitted to Sulzer for approval.
During the period of guarantee, repairs or modifications should be carried out either by
Sulzer engineering personnel or by other approved engineering personnel.
Section 2 Page 1
L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 2\S2 IntroSafety 01-3.doc

2.2 Environmental Considerations
2.2.1 Mineral Oil Based Products

These products are based on severely refined lubricating oils derived from high boiling
fractions of petroleum. They are available in a wide variety of viscosities often containing
special additives. Additives frequently used include polymeric viscosity modifiers, extreme
pressure, anti-wear, anti-oxidants, foam suppressors and corrosion inhibitors. For Health
and Safety purposes they may be considered collectively to be one group.
SULZER pumps and ancillary equipment often use various types of oils and greases for
lubrication of bearings and hydraulic power transmission etc. The following list of
precautions may be used as a guide to the safe handling and disposal of these products.
2.2.2 General Precautions

- Avoid frequent or prolonged skin contact. Wear protective clothing (especially
suitable gloves) and goggles.
- Do not inhale fumes or vapours.
- Avoid swallowing these products. Food and drink should be kept away from areas
where these products are stored or used.
- Adequate washing facilities and suitable cleansing agents should be available.
- Do not exceed the TLV of 5 mg/m2 for mineral oil mist in the working environment.
- Close containers after use.
- Spillages should be cleaned up immediately.
- Apply barrier creams to the skin before handling oils. Afterwards, wash thoroughly (see
below) and apply after work creams to moisturise and replace natural oils in the skin.
- To remove oil from the skin:
- Wash thoroughly with soap and water.
- A nail brush is an effective aid.
- Special hand cleansers help clean dirty hands.
- Do not use petrol, diesel fuel, gas oil or any solvent.
- When skin is clean and dry, apply after work cream.
- Avoid skin contact with oil-soaked clothing.
- Do not keep oily rags in your pockets.
- Launder dirty clothing before re-use.
2.2.3 Disposal of Used Oil

- Collect and dispose of used oil in accordance with local regulations.
- Do not pour used oil onto the ground, into canals, rivers or the sea, or down sewers
and drains.
- Refer to Health and Safety information supplied by the manufacturer of the oil being
used and disposed of.
- Always employ a licensed (where applicable), reputable waste disposal company for
the removal of used oil.
Ensure that a control ticket for the collection and disposal of waste oil is properly
completed and a copy retained for future reference.
Section 2 Page 2

2.2.4 Disposal of Equipment

Customer notice
Information herein concerning laws and regulations is based upon UK and EU regulations
except when specific reference is made to those of other jurisdictions.
Since conditions of use and governmental regulations may differ from one location to
another and may change with time, it is the customer's responsibility to assure that the
customer's workplace, site and disposal practices are in compliance with laws, regulations,
ordinances and other governmental enactment applicable in the jurisdiction(s) having
authority over the customer's operations.
Disposal
Usually Sulzer pumps can be disposed of easily after a thorough cleaning.
Metal parts (steels, stainless steels, non ferrous alloys, cast iron, duplex alloys) can be
segregated and disposed of as scrap metal.
Ceramic materials (synthetic carbons, ceramics, and carbides) belong to waste products.
These can be separated from their housing materials and are physiologically recognised
as safe.
Synthetic materials/plastics (elastomers, PTFE) belong to special waste and must be
disposed of using licensed carriers.
Unless otherwise stated in the Installation and Maintenance Instructions, this product is
recyclable and no ecological hazard is anticipated with its disposal providing due care has
been taken.
Sub Vendor Goods
Please refer to sub vendor installation, operation and maintenance manuals for information
relating to disposal of those goods.
Returning Products
Customers are advised that under EC Health, Safety and Environmental Law, when
returning products to Sulzer Pumps they must provide information on any hazards and the
precautions to be taken due to the contamination, residues or mechanical damage which
may present a health, safety and environmental risk. This information must be provided in
writing including Health and Safety data sheets relating to any substances identified as
hazardous or potentially hazardous.
Section 2 Page 3

2.3 Contact Information
Sulzer Web Site http://www.sulzer.com
Sulzer Pumps (UK) Ltd e-mail: pumpsales.leeds@sulzer.com
Sulzer Spares & Service Information (UK SITES ONLY)
Address Sulzer Pumps (UK) Ltd

Manor Mill Lane
Leeds
LS11 8BR
Spares
Telephone: 0113 272 4516
Fax: 0113 272 4404
e-mail harry.barrow@sulzer.com
Service
Telephone: 0113 272 4515
Fax: 0113 272 4501
e-mail steve.laughton@sulzer.com
Sulzer Spares & Service Information (EXCEPT UK SITES)
Address Sulzer Pumps (UK) Ltd

Manor Mill Lane
Leeds
LS11 8BR
Spares
Telephone: 0113 272 4516
Fax: 0113 272 4404
e-mail harry.barrow@sulzer.com
Service
Telephone: 0113 272 4514
Fax: 0113 272 4404
e-mail andy.whittam@sulzer.com
Section 2 Page 4

2.4 General Safety

This section contains general safety information, which must be observed during the
installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance of the equipment. Service
engineers and operators must familiarise themselves with this information before starting
any maintenance or operating activity. The manual should always be available for
reference adjacent to the installed equipment.
For general safety information relevant to the ancillary equipment supplied by Sulzer, refer
to the manufacturers supplied information later in this manual.
2.4.1 Special Safety Instructions

Special safety instructions, which apply to specific procedures or operations, are indicated
in manuals produced by SULZER through the use of the following symbols:
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in injury to personnel.

Damage to equipment may also occur.
Warning of the presence of dangerous electrical supplies.
Failure to comply with these instructions MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area
classification and could result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
CAUTION Failure to comply with these instructions could result in damage to the equipment.
In manuals and/or documentation produced by other manufacturers, and either included

within this manual or provided separately, special safety instructions may be indicated
using different systems which should be described within that document.
2.4.2 Safety Labels

Where appropriate, safety labels are attached directly to the equipment. These include:
- arrow symbols to indicate correct rotational sense
- markings for fluid connections etc.
Labels must be maintained in a serviceable, legible condition.
Section 2 Page 5

2.4.3 General Safety Instructions for Operators

Notes:
1. The following safety instructions apply to all personnel involved in, or present during,
any operating procedure carried out on the supplied equipment.
2. All personnel involved in any operating procedure must be familiar with, and adhere to,
any safety instructions included in supplied manuals provided by equipment sub-
vendors.
CAUTION
Where local and site safety instructions differ from the following instructions, the
local and site instructions must be followed.
- Operators must be competent (suitably qualified, experienced and with sufficient
knowledge of the equipment and processes) to carry out required tasks, and also
familiar with the appropriate sections of this manual, before starting work.
- Whilst any equipment is running, all guards must remain properly fitted.
Under no circumstances should any person reach into an enclosure to adjust
equipment when not in the company of someone who is capable of rendering aid in
the event of an accident.
Personnel working with or near high voltage power supplies should be familiar with
modern methods of resuscitation.
- Do not operate equipment outside its approved operating parameters.
- Examine equipment, particularly bearings and housings, regularly for indications of
overheating.
- Wear a safety helmet and protective footwear. Use ear protection, goggles / safety
glasses and/or gloves if the work being carried out is noisy or hazardous to eyes
and/or hands. If dust, fumes or vapours present a hazard to the respiratory system, the
appropriate mask and filter must be worn.
- Personnel working with or near high voltage equipment or rotating / moving equipment
should remove watches, rings, or any jewelry that could make physical contact with
circuits or moving parts.
- Clean up any fluid spillage immediately, using appropriate precautions if the fluid being
handled is of a hazardous nature. Take required action to remove the cause of the
spillage.
Follow all other Health and Safety Regulations, procedures and local requirements.
Section 2 Page 6

2.4.4 General Safety Instructions for Maintenance Personnel

Notes:
1. The following safety instructions apply to all personnel involved in, or present during,
any maintenance procedure carried out on the supplied equipment.
2. All personnel involved in any maintenance procedure which includes operating

aspects must be familiar with, and adhere to, the safety instructions in Section 2.4.3 -
General Safety Instructions for Operators, above.
3. All personnel involved in any maintenance procedure must be familiar with, and
adhere to, any safety instructions included in supplied manuals provided by equipment
sub-vendors.
CAUTION
Where local and site safety instructions differ from the following instructions, the
local and site instructions must be followed.
- Maintenance personnel must be competent (suitably qualified, experienced and with

sufficient knowledge of the equipment and processes) to carry out required tasks, and
also familiar with the appropriate sections of this manual, before carrying out any
maintenance task.
- Before carrying out any maintenance activity the equipment must be shut down;
controls should be locked and electrical supplies isolated to prevent unauthorised
start-up. Under certain conditions, dangerous potentials caused by charges retained
by capacitors may exist even when power is switched off. To avoid danger, always
disconnect the power and discharge the circuit before touching it.
Personnel working with or near high voltage power supplies should be familiar with
modern methods of resuscitation.
- Whilst any equipment is running, all guards must remain properly fitted. Following
completion of any work, and before restarting the equipment, ensure all guards are
correctly refitted.
Under no circumstances should any person reach into an enclosure to service or
adjust equipment when not in the company of someone who is capable of
rendering aid in the event of an accident.
- Never work alone.
- Use a lifting harness, safety line and respirator as required.
- Wear a safety helmet and protective footwear. Use ear protection, goggles / safety
glasses and/or gloves if the work being carried out is noisy or hazardous to eyes
and/or hands. If dust, fumes or vapours present a hazard to the respiratory system, the
appropriate mask and filter must be worn.
- Personnel working with or near high voltage equipment or rotating / moving equipment
should remove watches, rings, or any jewelry that could make physical contact with
circuits or moving parts.
- Check for fire or explosion risk before welding or using electrical hand tools.
- Electricity can kill! Isolate all equipment from electrical power supplies before
carrying out any maintenance procedure. All such work should be closely controlled
and a Permit to Work system is recommended.
Section 2 Page 7

- During lifting operations:

- Make sure that all lifting equipment is correctly certified / calibrated and is in
serviceable condition and suitable for the task. Only use approved safe methods of
handling heavy equipment.
- When eyebolts are fitted to individual parts of the system for lifting purposes, do
not attempt to use them to lift the whole assembly. Unless otherwise stated in the
detailed instructions in the manual, eyebolts are only provided to lift the loosened
single part during assembly or dismantling.
- Do not pass under suspended loads.
- De-pressurise and drain all pipework connected to the equipment before dismantling
to prevent danger from sudden leakage. Take appropriate precautions if the fluid being
handled is of a hazardous nature.
- Take care during oil changes, the oil casing may be under pressure. Hold a rag over
the oil plug to prevent splatter into eyes or onto skin.
- Take care when removing worn parts, they may have sharp edges.
- When handling components during dismantling and assembly, ensure that the
equipment is properly secured and that loose parts are supported.
- Provide a suitable barrier around the work area, especially where removal of pumping
equipment leaves open sumps or wells.
Follow all other Health and Safety Regulations, procedures and local requirements.
Section 2 Page 8
Document No: PumpMan 01

Section 3 Pump Manual Revision: 0
Revision Date: 26 Apr 2002
3 Pump Manual
The pump equipment manufacturers information is included next as an insert to the

manual.
L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3 PumpMan 01-0.doc

Document No: CD Intro 01

Section 3.1 Pump - Introduction Revision: 1
Revision Date: 02 May 2003
3.1 Introduction

pumpset equipment.
3.1.1 Scope
This section provides general descriptive information on the Sulzer CD (BBS) and CD-2
(BBT-D) pump.
Use this section in conjunction with the General Arrangement drawing and the Longitudinal
Section drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and
Documents.
3.1.2 Description
The CD pump is the Sulzer single-stage, horizontal, radially spilt pump for industrial and
refinery service. It features a double volute casing and a double-suction impeller.
The CD-2 two-stage variant features a double-suction first stage impeller and a single
suction 2nd stage unit.
3.1.2.1 Features
Volute Casing and Casing Covers

The radially split double volute casing is a machined casting with integral suction and
discharge nozzles. These are normally located one on each side of the casing with
connection flanges uppermost. However, other configurations are possible, including in-
line flanges or suction and discharge nozzles on the same side of the casing.
Depending on specific pump design, the volute casing may have an integral DE end cover
and a bolted NDE casing cover, or it may have similar bolted DE and NDE casing covers.
The end / casing covers have integral or bolted bearing brackets which support the DE and
NDE bearing housing assemblies and the rotating assembly.
Optional DE and NDE cooling jackets may be fitted.
Shaft
Accurate machining provides precision fits and clearances for assembly and operation.
Bushings
DE and NDE throat bushes are fitted.
Section 3.1 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\CD and CD-2\S3.01 CD Intro 01-1.doc
Document No: CD Intro 01

Section 3.1 Pump - Introduction Revision: 1
For two-stage CD pumps, an additional centre bush and shaft sleeve is introduced
between the stages.
Impellers
The impeller is a closed, double-suction design, machined for integral or replaceable wear
rings, depending on application. The impeller is located axially by a thrust ring and
retainer, and by one key.
For the two-stage variant, the single suction 2nd stage impeller is located on a tapered
section of shaft by an impeller nut and a key.
Wear Rings
Replaceable impeller wear rings (when required) and case wear rings are fitted to provide
close running clearances and reduce leakage from impeller high pressure liquid side to the
suction side.
Integral, close running wear surfaces on impellers are also available.
Mechanical Seal
The pump is equipped as standard with mechanical seals.
Bearings
CD pumps can be supplied with ball/ball, ball/sleeve and tilting pad/sleeve bearing
arrangements. Refer to Section 3.9 - Bearing Assemblies.
Coupling
The coupling is selected to suit a specific application, based on operating speed and rated
power. A spacer is normally provided to facilitate bearing and mechanical seal removal
and maintenance without disturbing the volute case or the driver.
Auxiliary Piping
Auxiliary piping may be required for bearing lubrication, oil cooling, seal injection, vent,
drain or inter-stage bleed-off connections. Factory installed piping and required external
connections will be noted on the General Arrangement drawing and on any referenced
piping drawing(s).
Additional equipment such as isolating valves, strainers, heat exchangers and gauges can
be supplied.
3.1.3 Performance Factors

Pump performance is affected by changes in fluid specific gravity, temperature, viscosity,
pump operating speed, and NPSHA (Net Positive Suction Head Available). Centrifugal
pumps are designed for specific operating conditions and may not be suited for any other
without loss of performance or damage.
CAUTION
Do not change operating conditions from original design parameters without
contacting a Sulzer representative.
Section 3.1 Page 2

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\CD and CD-2\S3.01 CD Intro 01-1.doc
Document No: Receiving 01

Section 3.2 Pump - Receiving Revision: 0
3.2 Receiving
3.2.1 Transportation and Lifting
CAUTION
For all transport and/or lifting tasks, the general rules of engineering and
regulations on the prevention of accidents must be strictly observed.
CAUTION
A competent (suitably qualified, experienced and with sufficient knowledge of the
equipment and processes) supervisor must be nominated to oversee all transport
and lifting tasks.
CAUTION
For all lifting tasks, the crane / lifting equipment operator and the handling
personnel must be competent (suitably qualified, experienced and with sufficient
knowledge of the equipment and processes) to perform the work.
3.2.1.1 Protection During Transport

Refer to Protection Packaging Quality Specification - 40-930 in Section 1 - Leading
Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
3.2.1.2 Transportation
Transport equipment must be checked to ensure that it is suitable for the load
weight. The load must be secured correctly during transport to prevent shifting.
Note: The total weight of delivered units is included on the dispatch documentation.
3.2.1.3 Lifting
Lifting Equipment
Do not pass under a suspended load.
Make sure that all lifting equipment is correctly certified / calibrated and is in serviceable
condition and suitable for the task. Only use approved safe methods of handling heavy
equipment.
Note: The total weight of delivered units is included on the General Arrangement drawing
(refer to Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and
Documents) and also on the dispatch documentation.
Suitability of Lifting Equipment
Where specific lifting equipment is NOT supplied, the site operators lifting equipment may
be considered as suitable if it:
- is correctly certified / calibrated - is in serviceable condition
- is fit for the intended purpose - is of an acceptable size and configuration
- can be used without causing damage - has a specified safe working load (SWL)
to any equipment which exceeds the total weight it is
required to accept
Section 3.2 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.02 Receiving 01-0.doc

Slinging Safety Guidelines
Ensure that the load is suitable for lifting with a sling or slings. The sling(s) should not be
allowed to damage the load, nor should the sling(s) be damaged.
Ensure that the safe working load (SWL) of the sling(s) being used is adequate for the lift,
having regard to the method of slinging.
Ensure that the slings being used are in good condition. Damaged slings should be
withdrawn from service immediately
Ensure that the load will be stable and in balance when lifted. Attach the sling(s) to the
designed lifting points where provided
Attachment of Slings / Ropes to Crates
Observe the warning notices on the crates, particularly those regarding slinging locations
and the weights to be handled. These notices take account of the centre of gravity (mass)
of the internal load - this cannot easily be assessed in a closed crate.
The illustration above is an example of the marking of a crate to indicate the correct
position of the slings.
Crates must be maintained in the correct orientation, as marked on the outside of the
crate, and not positioned on a side or upside down.
The illustration above shows the recommended method of slinging a crate. Load spreaders
should be used to protect the sides of the crate during lifting.
Section 3.2 Page 2


Attachment of Slings / Ropes to the Pump / Pumpset
In most installations, attachment / lifting points are normally provided for lifting the pump /
pumpset, The attachment points are normally shown on the General Arrangement drawing
- refer to Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and
Documents.
Note: In some cases, where space is at a premium, the attachment / lifting points may be
removable after use. Such detachable equipment should be stored safely for future use.
Lifting / Handling Equipment
When selecting a suitable crane or hoist, the weight of all handling and lifting equipment
supported by the crane or hoist (lifting beam, slings, shackles etc.) must be added to the
total weight of the parts to be handled. The crane / hoist MUST be capable of safely lifting
the heaviest of items in Sulzer supply.
Section 3.2 Page 3


3.2.2 Inspection Upon Arrival

The equipment supplied by Sulzer will have received a final pre-dispatch inspection in the
factory.
To ensure that the equipment has not been damaged in transit, the package should be
inspected upon arrival. Any damage or shortage should be noted on the transport carrier's
ticket, and should also be reported immediately to the carrier and to Sulzer or a
representative of Sulzer.
3.2.2.1 Unloading
Refer to Section 3.2.1.3 - Lifting and arrange suitable slings and other lifting equipment
(including crane / hoist) to maintain a level lift and avoid damage to piping or other
components.
Support the unloaded equipment on skids or timbers to ease later relocation to the
installation or storage site. Ensure that a sufficient number of supports are provided to
prevent flexing of the equipment.
Section 3.2 Page 4


3.2.3 Storage
Note: The following storage instructions apply only to the pump and may not be
appropriate to furnished auxiliary equipment. Follow vendor instructions for all other
components of the pump system.
3.2.3.1 Requirements
Prior to shipment, the pump and its components are prepared for outside storage. Refer to
Protection & Preservation for Storage Quality Specification - 40-931 in Section 1 -
Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
The following, additional requirements should be followed by the customer.
1. Store equipment above ground on skids or cribbing to prevent accumulation of water
around the equipment.
2. Protect the pump and attachments with a vinyl-coated nylon tarpaulin. Lash the
tarpaulin evenly to:
i. enable drainage of water and prevent the formation of pools on the tarpaulin.
ii. maintain sufficient air circulation with a 3 inch (8 cm) minimum clearance between
tarpaulin and pump.
3. Locate the equipment in a storage area that is free from blowing sand or dirt.
4. Do not stack equipment.
5. Prevent animal entry by keeping connections sealed.
CAUTION
Before using rust prevention or drying products (see requirements 6 and 7, below),
refer to the product manufacturers guidelines on Safety (i.e. COSHH).
6. Maintain rust prevention coatings.
7. Install or maintain drying agent.
3.2.3.2 Inspection and Maintenance During Storage

For information on inspection and maintenance requirements during long-term storage,
refer to Inspection of Pumps in Storage Quality Specification - 40-932 in Section 1 -
Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
Records
Keep an inspection record with the stored equipment, detailing:

1. Date of inspection.
2. Name of person performing inspection or maintenance.
3. Results of inspection.
4. Date of maintenance.
5. Description of maintenance performed.
6. Amount and type of drying agent replaced.
Section 3.2 Page 5


3.2.4 Removal of Preservatives

Any preservatives that require removal before commissioning of the equipment should be
identified by the prominent display of warning notices indicating quantity of preservative
and the need for removal.
CAUTION
Before removing preservative products, refer to the manufacturers guidelines on
Safety (i.e. COSHH) for the preservative and for any required removal products.
CAUTION Before cleaning be sure to remove any desiccant.
Section 3.2 Page 6

Document No: Installation 01

Section 3.3 Pump - Installation Revision: 4
3.3 Installation
pumpset equipment.
Refer to Section 2.4 - General Safety for general safety advice for operators and
maintenance personnel before starting any installation activity. Refer also to
specific safety advice contained as applicable within the installation procedures
included in this manual.
When the supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in
a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during installation procedures MAY
invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided:
failure to use NEW O-ring seals, gaskets, seals or nut locking devices of the
correct type and size at all appropriate stages during assembly procedures
failure to connect main (suction and discharge) pipework correctly to the pump
casing in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations
failure to connect auxiliary pipework correctly in accordance with
manufacturers information and current regulations and to direct the vent and
drain pipework to suitable safe locations / containers
failure to connect electrical equipment power supply and control cables and
instrument cables correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and
current regulations
failure to achieve correct setting positions, clearances and alignment values for
the rotating assemblies during coupling alignment procedures
failure to ensure correct direction of rotation for the driver in accordance with
manufacturers information
failure to install the coupling spacers and coupling guards correctly in
accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations
Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific
information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset
equipment.
Section 3.3 Page 1

K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\S3.03 Installation 01-4.doc

3.3.1 General
Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, and (when applicable) to any other supplied
Foundation / Installation drawings, in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 -
Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
Suitable lifting devices must be available for installation and repair work.
During erection care must be taken to ensure nothing is dropped or left in the pump unit. If
anything is dropped into the pump unit, it must be removed and the pump checked
completely to ensure that any loose item does not remain inside.
CAUTION
Failure to remove any lodged item could result in damage to the pump unit and/or
associated plant.
Good lighting is important and the pump should be readily accessible from all sides.
3.3.1.1 Foundation
The foundation must give adequate system support and meet external piping
requirements. The foundation must also inhibit vibration. The foundation must have a flat
and level surface, sufficient to ensure that the base plate, and hence the pump, are
installed level, and also ensuring that any point contact between base plate and foundation
is avoided.
The General Arrangement drawing provides pump base plate hold-down dimensions
necessary for foundation design.
Concrete Foundations (by others)
Reinforced concrete is the most satisfactory foundation.

After the concrete has cured, remove water and extraneous material, and dry the entire
foundation. It is essential that the concrete be fully cured before mounting the equipment.
Roughen the foundation surface to ensure proper bonding for the grout by scraping with a
chipping hammer. Remove 0.5 - 1 inch (13 - 25 mm) minimum of foundation material to
eliminate the low strength, high porosity surface concrete and to insure proper bonding for
grout. This can vary depending on curing time, proper placement and depth of sound
aggregate.
If grout must be applied to damp concrete, thoroughly coat the concrete with a penetrating
sealer at least four hours in advance of pouring the grout. Remove any loose particles, dirt,
or oil-soaked concrete.
All equipment mounting surfaces that will be in contact with grout must be clean. Remove
rust, oil, paint or other extraneous material.
Note: Do not use oil-based solvents for base plate cleaning. The residue can prevent
grout adherence.
Sulzer recommend a non-shrinking grout that is resistant to damage by any chemicals that
may be spilled, and compatible with the highest temperature to which it may be exposed.
Consult a reputable grout manufacturer for further information on selection, preparation
and placement.
Section 3.3 Page 2


Check the civil structure with respect to all dimensions prior to equipment installation, with
careful reference to the General Arrangement drawing.
Clearly mark the positions of all equipment axial and transverse centre lines on the
associated foundations.
Mark off the positions of packing plates on both sides of foundation bolt pockets, and
check for level and flatness in two planes.
Section 3.3 Page 3


3.3.2 Base Plate Installation

Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, to the Alignment Criteria and Tolerances
diagram(s), and (when applicable) to any other supplied Foundation / Installation drawings,
in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
Ensure that the pump tag number shown on the drawings / diagrams is that of the
CAUTION
pumpset being installed.
The assembled pump, with coupling hub installed on the shaft, was factory mounted on the
base plate.
The Sulzer-supplied gearbox and driver were also factory mounted on the base plate and
complete with installed coupling hubs.
Equipment that is bolted down should not be removed, but piping may be removed as
required to enable access. Any loose equipment, not bolted down, must be removed.
Do not install coupling spacers. The spacers will be assembled after a precision
CAUTION
alignment has been completed and all piping and auxiliary equipment has been
installed.
3.3.2.1 Tools and Equipment Required

The following tools will be required temporarily for the installation work:
- 2 Dial gauges
- 1 Spirit level
- 1 Set of standard hand tools
- 1 Nikon theodolite (optical level) or equivalent.
- Suitable lifting devices for installation and repair work.
- Suitable lighting
3.3.2.2 Base Plate Installation - Concrete Foundation
Note: The supplied foundation anchor bolts for base plate mounting are pre-positioned /
embedded in the concrete foundation plinth by others.
1. Ensure that the support plinth for the base plate is clean and dry.
2. Place suitable packers at both sides of each pre-positioned foundation bolt. The
recommended thickness of the required packers is shown on the General
Arrangement drawing.
3. Attach the supplied lifting beam to suitable lifting equipment and attach the shackles
and slings to the lifting lugs provided on the base plate. Adjust the slings until the
weight of the unit is uniformly distributed between them and the base plate is level.
CAUTION
On no account attempt to sling the pumpset from other lifting points. Do not allow
the slings to foul pipework, instruments etc. when lifting the base plate.
4. Lift the base plate assembly vertically, and check the underside of the base plate for
cleanliness. Remove rust, oil, paint or any other extraneous material.
When epoxy grout has been specified, the underside of the base plate will have been
coated with an epoxy primer. Take care not to damage these painted surfaces when
cleaning mechanically or using solvents.
Section 3.3 Page 4


Note: Do not use oil base solvents for base plate cleaning. The residue can prevent grout
adherence.
5. Carefully lower the base plate until the mounting holes in the base plate just engage
over the pre-positioned mounting bolts. When this is achieved, continue to lower the
base plate until it rests on the pre-positioned packers. Monitor the bolts during base
plate lowering to ensure that the base plate is not deflecting / bending the bolts.
6. The base plate is equipped with a number of datum buttons for levelling measurement,
the positions of which are determined on assembly of the pumpset. These buttons are
each identified on the Alignment Criteria and Tolerances diagram by a unique grid
reference number, and one of the buttons is designated the zero datum. The buttons
themselves are also etched with their grid reference number. A Nikon theodolite
(optical level), or equivalent, may be used for measurement of the relative heights of
all the other buttons to the zero datum.
When the equipment was aligned at the works prior to despatch, the relative heights of
the buttons were recorded on the Alignment Criteria and Tolerances diagram for the
pumpset.
Alter the height of the base plate by adjusting the thickness of the shims under the
support areas adjacent to the foundation bolts. Use the levelling screws provided
adjacent to the foundation bolt holes on the long sides of the base plate to lift the base
plate. Ensure that the relative heights of the datum buttons are reproduced, as shown
on the associated Alignment Criteria and Tolerances diagram. This will ensure that the
minimum of further adjustment is required to the shimming under the equipment feet
when aligning the couplings. Accurate reproduction of the datum levels should enable
reproduction of as built alignment figures.
7. When the base plate is levelled correctly, fit the washers (if applicable) and the nuts to
the foundation bolts. Tighten the lower nuts on each bolt evenly and fully to secure the
base plate in position and re-check base plate levelling. If levelling remains correct
tighten the upper nuts on each bolt to act as lock nuts.
8. On the base plate, loosen each pump, gearbox and driver hold-down bolt Individually,
in turn to check for "Soft Feet" at each location.
Use feeler gauges to check clearance between each mounting foot and the support
surface. Ensure that the maximum clearance is 0.002 inch (0.05 mm); make
corrections with minor adjustments to the base plate levelling screws and shims.
Note: Contact the factory if this requirement cannot be achieved and do not the grout base
plate without factory authorisation.
a Hazardous Area, failure to achieve correct setting positions, clearances and
alignment values for the rotating assemblies during coupling alignment procedures
MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided.
equipment.
9. Refer to Section 3.4 - Coupling Alignment and check the shaft / coupling hub
alignment between the pump and gearbox before fitting and securing pipework.
10. Refer to Section 3.3.3 - Main Piping, below, and fit and secure the main pipework.
Section 3.3 Page 5


11. Refer to Section 3.4 - Coupling Alignment and re-check the shaft / coupling hub
alignment between the pump and gearbox DURING and AFTER fitting and securing
the main pipework.
Note: With concrete foundations, when all pipework has been fitted and secured, and
alignments have been checked and found to be satisfactory, grout the base plate fully to
the foundations as required. Allow the grout to set before using the pumpset.
Section 3.3 Page 6


3.3.3 Main Piping
a Hazardous Area, failure to connect main (suction and discharge) and auxiliary
pipework correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current
regulations MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided.
equipment.
a Hazardous Area, failure to vent and prime the main pipework and pump casing
correctly as detailed in Section 3.5 - Commissioning and Operation MAY invalidate
the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump
Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the
Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment.
Refer to the General Arrangement drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section

1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
CAUTION
During, and on completion of suction and discharge pipework connection, pump
and gearbox shaft alignment MUST be re-checked; refer to Section 3.4 - Coupling
Alignment. If any stage in the connection of pipework results in shaft misalignment,
the pipework MUST be disconnected and modified so that alignment is not affected
after the pipework is subsequently refitted.
If the gearbox or driver installation involves major piping, co-ordinate the activities required
by the equipment manufacturers instruction manual with the procedure described below.
This section addresses only the requirements for installing the pump suction and discharge
piping.
Pipe diameters will have already been determined at the planning stage and many factors
unknown to the pump manufacturer will have been taken into account. It is good
engineering practice for the suction piping to be at least one pipe size larger than the
nominal bore of the suction flange. Do not make abrupt change at the pump suction. Some
advice for installing piping is given below.
3.3.3.1 Assembly
- The pipework must be supported in an adequate manner to ensure that no bending
moments or stresses caused by the weight of the pipework or thermal expansion are
transmitted to the pump flanges (install an expansion piece).
- To prevent dirt and foreign particles from gaining access to the pump, the covers of the
pipework branches are not to be removed until just before the pipework is connected.
- All the pipework is cleaned and checked by SULZER up to the termination points at
the plate edge. Nevertheless, a further check should be made for cleanliness before
continuation pipework is connected.
- The pipework connected to the pump must previously have been flushed clean of any
foreign matter. In order to prevent any impurities entering the pump, it is recommended
that a suction strainer is installed. If at any time, a reduction in pump suction pressure
is observed then the strainer should be removed and cleaned.
- Assemble piping in accordance with pipe manufacturers instructions. All supports and
expansion equipment must be installed before making connections to pump flanges.
Section 3.3 Page 7


- Route pipes to avoid sharp bends, particularly in the pump suction piping, as these
greatly increase the frictional resistance within the piping. A high frictional resistance
within the suction piping contributes to reduced available pressure at the pump
suction, and low pressure can lead to cavitation at the impeller inlet.
Note: Multi-pump installations should have separate suction pipes to each pump. The
exceptions are duty / standby pumps, which may have common suction piping as only one
pump operates at any time. Size manifold such that velocities are similar for each pump.
- Ensure pipe flanges are in line and parallel to pump flanges before bolting up.
Note (where applicable): On flooded suction applications, the horizontal pipe legs must
descend toward the pump. On suction lift applications, the horizontal pipe legs steadily rise
toward the pump to prevent air locks.
- Where flanged joints are used, ensure that the correct gasket is fitted, and that it is
correctly centred so that the bore of the pipe is not restricted.
- Check that valves and fittings have the same nominal bore as the piping being used. If
the pump nozzles have a smaller nominal bore than the fittings, suitable taper pieces
should be installed.
- To prevent turbulent flow into the pump, do not position the shut-off valve in the suction
piping adjacent to the pump suction nozzle. The suction valve should be positioned
with the hand wheel horizontally or vertically downwards to prevent air pockets
forming.
Note: The systems must be designed and constructed to facilitate the free flow of fluid, and
the transition from small to large pipe diameters must be gradual. As a general rule, the
length of a concentric taper piece should be 5 - 7 times the difference in pipe diameters.
3.3.3.2 Pipe Strain Check

Refer to the General Arrangement drawing for details of the permissible branch loads on
the suction and discharge branches.
Check for pipe strain by removing pump hold-down bolts and dowel pins (and alignment
keys when installed) and note pump shaft movement.
Mount dial indicators on the gearbox shaft to measure movement of the shaft in the vertical
and horizontal planes.
CAUTION
Pump shaft movement up to 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) in either direction is acceptable.
Adjustments must be made to the piping if these limits are exceeded or serious
damage to the pump may result.
3.3.3.3 Pressure Test

The pipework should be pressure tested in accordance with the relevant Standard.
Section 3.3 Page 8


3.3.3.4 Final Alignment

Complete a final alignment check after major piping installation as described in Section
3.4 - Coupling Alignment.
CAUTION
If fitting the pipework has resulted in a mis-aligned coupling, the pipework must be
disconnected and modified so that alignment is not affected after the pipework is
subsequently refitted.
3.3.3.5 Cleaning the Piping

1. Flush out the supply tank and piping to remove all traces of foreign matter. Where
piping has been welded, all welding slag must be removed.
2. It is recommended that a temporary suction strainer be installed before the start of
commissioning to prevent any impurities from entering the pump. The strainer should
be made from #8 mesh stainless steel (18-8) wire, with 0.063 inch openings and 2.16
psf double crimp weave, or from perforated 22 G (0.048 inch) stainless steel plate with
144 holes per sq inch (0.057 inch diameter holes). The illustration below shows a
typical strainer installation.
CAUTION
If a suction strainer is installed, the
use of finer mesh screens than
specified may result in insufficient
flow to the pump and subsequent
damage. Contact a Sulzer Spool Piece
representative before proceeding.
Stainless Steel
3. Monitor the pressure drop across the Wire Screen
suction strainer. An increased Pressure
pressure drop across the strainer of Indicator
5 lbf/in2 (34.5 kPa) indicates that the Connection
strainer should be removed and
Strap Screen
cleaned. After a period of time (24 Support is
hours minimum), system flushing Welded to the
should be complete and the suction Screen and Plate
strainer can be removed.
Plate
Gasket on Both
Sides of Plate
Pressure
Indicator
Connection
Section 3.3 Page 9


3.3.4 Auxiliary Piping and Equipment
a Hazardous Area, failure to connect auxiliary pipework correctly in accordance with
manufacturers information and current regulations and to direct the vent and drain
pipework to suitable safe locations / containers MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area
classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 -
Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area
Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment.
a Hazardous Area, failure to vent and prime the auxiliary pipework and connected
equipment correctly as detailed in Section 3.5 - Commissioning and Operation MAY
invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section
1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on
the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment.
Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, and (when applicable) to any other supplied
pipework drawings / diagrams in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer
Drawings and Documents.
The mechanical seal and pump casing must be fully vented prior to start-up.
Connect the on-site pipework to the appropriate auxiliary pipework terminations on the
pumpset, as shown on the drawings detailed above.
Do not mix up connections. After initial installation, and following shutdowns for
maintenance purposes, check the pipe runs.
3.3.4.1 Flushing of External Lube Oil System and Interconnecting Pipework

This generic procedure for pumps which utilise an external lubricating oil system is
intended to ensure that the external lube oil system and connecting pipework is
cleaned to a suitable level.
When the supplied pump is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area,
failure to prepare the external lube oil system correctly for operation in accordance
with manufacturers information MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification
and MUST be avoided. Refer to IOM Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous
Area Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification
assigned to the pumpset equipment.
Refer as applicable to any supplied General Arrangement drawing or P & I Diagram, and
to any other supplied pipework drawings / diagrams in IOM Section 1 - Leading
Particulars, Section 1.2 - Drawings and Documents.
Refer also to the lube oil system manufacturers information, by others.
For lube oil systems supplied by Sulzer - On despatch from the Sulzer factory, all
supplied lube oil system connecting pipework has been pickled and passivated in
preparation for normal operation, and the complete lube oil system has been flushed
clean.
Section 3.3 Page 10


Carrying out the following procedure for flushing the lube oil system is strongly
recommended in the following circumstances to prevent particle contamination:
For Sulzer supplied systems, where interconnecting pipework has been disconnected
and hard blanked for transport of the pumpset equipment to site.
For lube oil systems supplied by others and installed / connected at site.
For lube oil systems that have been stored without use for over six months.
Flushing Procedure
1. Refer to the lube oil system manufacturers information, detailed above, and:
i. Remove covers as necessary and examine the inside of the lube oil reservoir as
far as possible for cleanliness. Remove any debris. Replace covers.
ii. Fill the reservoir to the correct level with the correct grade of clean oil.
iii. If there is a rundown tank in the circuit, and this requires pre-filling, fill the rundown
tank to the correct level with the correct grade of clean oil.
iv. Examine the duplex oil filter elements and ensure that they are clean. If necessary,
clean or replace dirty elements. Select one filter element for use (duty filter).
2. Refer to the appropriate drawings, detailed above, and:
i. Remove the oil pipeline restriction orifices in the supply lines to the pump and drive
motor (Note the fitted position of each orifice plate to ensure correct refitting). Fit
100 mesh size gauze filters in place of the restriction orifices to achieve particle
filtration level specified in API 614.
ii. Disconnect the common return oil pipeline to the lube oil reservoir, fit a 100 mesh
size gauze filter in the line to achieve particle filtration level specified in API 614
and re-connect the pipe.
Record the position of ALL installed mesh filters to ensure their removal on
CAUTION
completion of flushing.
3. Refer to the lube oil system manufacturers information, detailed above, and ensure
that lube oil temperature is at least at minimum start temperature. If necessary, use the
lube oil heater to raise the temperature.
4. Refer to the lube oil system manufacturers information, detailed above, and start the
auxiliary lube oil pump to circulate oil.
Monitor the oil level in the lube oil tank reservoir regularly during the flushing operation
and top up with clean oil of the correct grade as required.
5. Check all lube oil pipework connections for leaks and ensure that an adequate flow of
oil is visible at each bearing return sight glass.
6. At the drive motor bearing pedestals, ensure that oil flow does not result in leakage
into the motor / rotor windings.
7. Monitor the differential pressure across the duty lube oil filter regularly during the
flushing operation. When differential pressure increases to 0.6 bar.g, operate the filter
changeover valve to select the other filter element as duty filter. Remove and replace
or clean / refit the dirty filter element ready for future use.
8. At appropriate intervals (typically 3 hours), stop the auxiliary oil pump and remove
each mesh filter in turn and record the degree of contamination. Clean each mesh filter
and refit it in the same position in the pipework.
Section 3.3 Page 11


9. Continue to flush the system until ALL mesh filters are found to be clean during routine
examination.
10. Following completion of flushing, re-instate the lube oil system by removing ALL mesh
filters, refitting the restriction orifices in their correct positions and re-connecting
pipework.
11. Remove, clean and refit the current duty filter element ready for future use.
12. Run the auxiliary lube oil pump to check for leaks. When running temperature has
stabilised, refer to the lube oil system manufacturers information, detailed above, and
check that bearing oil supply pressure is correct within given limits. Stop the lube oil
pump.
Section 3.3 Page 12


3.3.5 Electrical and Instrument Connections
All electrical work must be carried out by fully qualified and competent personnel.
a Hazardous Area, failure to connect electrical equipment power supply and control
cables and instrument cables correctly in accordance with manufacturers
information and current regulations MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area
Refer to the drawings and documentation available in Section 1 - Leading Particulars,

Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and to the ancillary equipment
manufacturers information, later in this manual.
Electricity can kill!
Equipment being worked on must be isolated to prevent shocks to personnel, and

inadvertent starting. All work on electrical installations should be closely controlled and a
Permit to Work system is recommended.
The pumpset and associated equipment must be properly earthed.
Refer to the gearbox and driver manufacturers information and drawings, later in this
manual, and connect power supply, control and instrument cables.
Refer to the pumpset instrumentation and ancillary equipment manufacturers information,
later in this manual, and make external instrument and equipment connections in the
junction boxes provided.
3.3.5.1 Driver No-Load Run
a Hazardous Area, failure to ensure correct direction of rotation for the driver in
accordance with manufacturers information MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area
classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 3.3 - Installation for specific
equipment.
When required and applicable, a No-Load run of the driver may be carried out with the
driver uncoupled from the gearbox.
"No-Load" driver testing will allow the driver rotation to be checked and provide an
opportunity to make final equipment adjustments before coupling to the pump.
A further run with the driver and gearbox coupled and the pump uncoupled may be carried
out as required to further check the driver and also enable initial gearbox and coupling
checks.
The assembly of the equipment, and the electrical / instrumentation hook-up, must be
completed in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. Refer to the appropriate
manufacturers manual for details.
Section 3.3 Page 13


3.3.5.2 Setting Axial Position Probe Clearance
CAUTION
The 0.50 mm value of total float in the thrust bearing (axial movement of the rotor)
used in the following examples is a TYPICAL value only. During the setting
procedure, the ACTUAL recorded float must be used to centralise the rotor, position
the probes and set the indicators. The ALARM and TRIP settings (0.05 and 0.075
above FLOAT respectively) are correct.
When axial position probes are fitted to the pump, the correct clearance for the probe
can be set as follows:
1. Ensure that the coupling spacer is removed.
2. Position a dial test indicator (DTI) at a fixed point and set it to monitor the axial position
of the pump-half coupling hub.
3. Move the pump rotor fully forward onto the inboard thrust pads. Set the DTI to ZERO.
4. Move the pump rotor fully back onto the outboard thrust pads. Record the total float in
the thrust bearing (axial movement of the rotor).
5. Move the pump rotor to the mid point of the total float.
Example: Rotor Fully Forward 0.00 mm DTI Reading
Rotor Fully Back 0.50 mm DTI Reading
Rotor Correctly Positioned 0.25 mm DTI Reading
6. With the rotor in its central position, set each axial probe by adjusting its position (gap)
until an output voltage of 9 volts is obtained (using a multi-meter). Secure the probe in
this position using the lock nuts or other locking method. Check that output remains at
9 volts - if not, re-position and re-lock probe as required to obtain correct output.
7. Check that the indication on the control panel reads ZERO.
8. Using the Example given in step 5, above:
i. Move the pump rotor fully forward onto the inboard thrust pads. Check that the
indication on the control panel for both probes reads MINUS 0.25 mm.
ii. Move the pump rotor fully back onto the outboard thrust pads. Check that the
indication on the control panel for both probes reads PLUS 0.25 mm.
iii. Initially, set the ALARM and TRIP values to 0.05 mm and 0.075 mm respectively
above the MINUS and PLUS 0.25 mm float values.
Example: FLOAT = 0.25 mm ALARM = 0.30 mm TRIP = 0.325 mm
Note: During commissioning, the control room indication of thrust bearing float (axial
movement of the rotor) may increase slightly above the original value obtained by moving
the rotor by hand. This is because the hydraulic force generated by the operating pump is
greater than the hand pressure available to move the stationary rotor. If this increase in
reading is observed during pump operation, the ALARM and TRIP settings should be re-
set to maintain the 0.05 and 0.075 values above the indicated float.
Example: FLOAT = 0.26 mm ALARM = 0.31 mm TRIP =

0.335 mm
CAUTION
DO NOT adjust the position of the probes in an attempt to obtain the original set
values recorded at step 8, iii, above.
Section 3.3 Page 14


3.3.6 Coupling Spacer Installation
a Hazardous Area, failure to install the coupling spacer and coupling guard(s)
correctly in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations
MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to
Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific
equipment.
The coupling hubs should already be mounted, the pump and gearbox positioned with the
required shaft end separations according to the General Arrangement drawing, and a
precision alignment including "Cold - Offset" completed.
Refer to Section 3.8 - Drive Coupling, and to the coupling, drive motor and gearbox
manufacturers information, later in this manual, for details on fitting of the coupling hubs
and the coupling spacers.
The coupling manufacturers instructions contain detailed information for correctly installing
the spacers and tightening the coupling bolts to the correct torque value(s).
CAUTION Read the coupling manufacturers information before proceeding.
Lock power breakers to the off position.
Install the coupling spacers and also the coupling guards. Check for adequate clearance
between the guards and the couplings.
3.3.7 Storage
If the equipment is not going into immediate service, refer to the storage instructions in
Section 3.2 - Receiving, and also to any available storage information in the ancillary
equipment manufacturers documentation, later in this manual.
Section 3.3 Page 15

Document No: Alignment 01

Section 3.4 Pump - Coupling Alignment Revision: 3
Revision Date: 27 Sep 2003
3.4 Coupling Alignment

pumpset equipment.
maintenance personnel before starting any maintenance activity. Refer also to
specific safety advice contained as applicable within the maintenance procedures
a Hazardous Area, failure to achieve correct setting positions, clearances and
alignment values for the rotating assemblies during coupling alignment procedures
MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided.
equipment.
Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, the pump Longitudinal Section drawing and
the Alignment Criteria & Tolerances drawing (when available) in Section 1 - Leading
Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
Refer also to the coupling and driver (and any other main drive train equipment)
manufacturers information and drawings, later in this manual.
CAUTION
Failure to carry out proper alignment can lead to damage to the coupling and to the
pump and driver bearings.
CAUTION
When applicable, ensure that any rotor locking devices are removed before
attempting to turn rotors.
CAUTION
Bearings must be lubricated using the correct grade of oil specified for operational
use BEFORE attempting to turn rotors. Avoid any unnecessary turning of machine
rotors.
CAUTION Whenever practical, the pump must be filled with product before turning by hand.
CAUTION
Stainless steel fitted pumps are particularly susceptible to pick-up and turning by
hand should be avoided whenever possible.
Section 3.4 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.04 Alignment 01-3.doc

3.4.1 Scope
This section describes recommended procedures for aligning the motor (driving machine)
to the pump (driven machine) for a horizontal pumpset.
Where the drive train includes other equipment (i.e. gearbox, geared fluid coupling,
booster pump etc.), refer to the illustrated examples below and adapt the procedures as
follows:
1. Determine which machine is to be levelled and positioned correctly and then used as
the reference machine. The position of this machine will then remain fixed, and the
adjacent machine(s) will be moved as necessary to align with it.
2. Ensure that the reference machine is level and positioned correctly.
3. Work outwards from the reference machine, and position the next machine A in the
train with the correct gap between coupling flange faces or shaft ends (as applicable)
and align the shaft to the shaft of the reference machine.
4. Where a further machine B is included in the drive train, use machine A as the
reference machine to position and align B to A. In the same way, position and align C
to B, etc.
B A Reference A B
Machine
C B A Reference
D
Machine
Section 3.4 Page 2


3.4.2 General
3.4.2.1 Coupling Hub Spacing and Angular Alignment
Note: Where coupling flange faces do not align with shaft ends, distance between
coupling flange faces (DBCFF or DBFF) is normally specified on the appropriate drawings
(detailed above), and should be used as the reference dimension for setting correct
spacing between machines. The distance between shaft ends (DBSE) may also be shown
but is not to be used as a reference dimension. Where coupling flange faces do align
with shaft ends, distance between coupling flange faces, DBSE is normally specified on
the appropriate drawings (detailed above), and should be used as the reference dimension
for setting correct spacing between machines.
The rotating equipment coupling hubs must be a specific distance apart as detailed on the
drawings and documents detailed above. This should
be checked and adjusted if necessary.
Ensure that the correct allowances for relative thermal
growth are taken into account when aligning the
equipment.
The faces of the hubs must be parallel to within the
tolerance detailed on the drawings and documents
detailed above. This should be checked and adjusted if
necessary.
Note: The standard tolerance is 0.05 mm and this should be used unless order specific
drawings with a different tolerance are included within the IOM manual
3.4.2.2 Coupling Hub Radial Alignment

The axes of the shafts must be parallel and concentric to within the tolerance detailed
on the drawings and documents detailed above. Radial alignment of the coupling hubs
must first be checked before the pipework is installed.
Radial alignment of the hubs must also be monitored
during pipework connection and re-checked after
pipework connection to ensure that pipework
connection does not adversely affect alignment. If
alignment is affected, the pipe connections must be
re-made until alignment remains correct.
Note: The standard tolerance is 0.05 mm and this

should be used unless order specific drawings with a different tolerance are included within
the IOM manual
Do not adjust driver OR driven machine positions to correct alignment errors

CAUTION
caused by pipe connection.
Section 3.4 Page 3


3.4.3 Initial Alignment

1. Obtain the requirement for cold-offset from the drawings and documents detailed
above.
2. Loosen the hold-down bolts on the moveable machine, lift the machine and insert
sufficient shims under the mounting feet to approximately align the shaft with the shaft
of the reference machine, taking into account the cold-offset.
A straight edge and a set of feeler gauges should be used to make the approximate
alignment.
Shims - slotted shims the same size as the mounting foot must be used. The shim
stock should ideally be stainless steel and be available in various thicknesses.
Where a shim stack of thickness greater than 0.13 inches (3 mm) occurs, it must be
replaced by a plate of equivalent thickness before adding more shims.
3. Check the position of the moveable machine in relation to the reference machine shaft
and set to the DBCFF or DBSE (as applicable) dimension shown on the drawings and
documents detailed above.
CAUTION Refer to the equipment manufacturers information, detailed above, and ensure that
the rotating assembly in each machine is set to the required position before moving
the machine to the correct DBCFF or DBSE position (i.e. an electric motor may
require the rotor to be set at the magnetic centre position).
4. Tighten down the reference and moveable machine hold-down bolts to the correct
torque value - refer to the drawings and documents detailed above or to Torque
Tightening of Fasteners, later in this manual.
3.4.4 Final Alignment

There are several satisfactory methods of checking alignment. The face and periphery
method, and the reverse indicator method are detailed on the following pages.
Other methods, involving the use of optical / electronic equipment may be suitable, but
because of the wide range of equipment available, these are not detailed. Refer to the
equipment manufacturers information if this type of equipment is to be used.
Section 3.4 Page 4


3.4.5 Coupling Alignment - Face and Periphery Method

Note: The coupling hubs must be disconnected, i.e. the spacer unit removed.
The face and periphery alignment method involves:
- Checking DBCFF or DBSE (as applicable) and angular alignment by taking average
gap (face) readings using inside micrometers.
- Checking coupling hub radial alignment by taking periphery readings using a dial
indicator.
3.4.5.1 Coupling Hub Spacing and Angular Alignment Check

12
1. Refer to the Illustration right. Mark both coupling hubs at the
same point, (i.e. 12 oclock position), to identify the relative
positions of the reference and moveable machine shafts. Looking
2. Refer to the Illustration below. 9 Towards 3
Driver
3. Measure the gap between the coupling faces as close to the
rim as possible at 12 oclock, 3 o clock, 6 oclock and 9
oclock, and record the results - see Section 3.4.5.3 - Blank 6
Angular Alignment Check Record Sheet.
Clock Position Indication
Internal
micrometer
Reference Moveable
machine - half machine - half
coupling hub coupling hub
Angular Alignment Check

4. Turn the reference and moveable machine shafts by 90 to the 3 oclock position and
then re-measure the gap at the four clock positions (12, 3, 6 and 9), and record the
results.
5. Repeat step (4) twice more, so that four sets of measurements have been taken.
6. The record sheet will now show four columns of four figures, each column identified by
a clock position (12, 3, 6 and 9). Add up each column and divide by four to give an
average gap measurement.
Note: This method ensures that variables such as axial shaft position and tolerances on
coupling machining are not misinterpreted and influence the true coupling alignment
readings.
7. If the obtained values exceed the permitted tolerance, adjust the position of the
moveable machine and repeat the checks until acceptable readings are obtained.
Section 3.4 Page 5


3.4.5.2 Coupling Hub Radial Alignment Check

1. Refer to Section 3.4.5.1 - Coupling Hub Spacing and Angular Alignment Check,
above and mark both coupling hubs at the same point (i.e. 12 oclock position) to
identify the relative positions of the reference and moveable machine shafts.
2. Refer to the Illustration below.
DTI
Moveable Reference
machine - half machine - half
coupling hub coupling hub
Radial Alignment Check

3. Mount the clock gauge (dial test indicator) rigidly on the half coupling hub fitted to the
reference machine. Readings are to be taken on the half coupling hub fitted to the
moveable machine.
4. Position the clock gauge (dial test indicator) probe at Top Dead Centre (12 oclock)
and set gauge reading to zero.
5. Turn both shafts by 90 so that the clock gauge (dial test indicator) probe is at the 3
oclock position. Record the reading on the clock gauge (dial test indicator) results -
see Section 3.4.5.4 - Blank Radial Alignment Check Record Sheet.
6. Repeat step (5) for the 6 oclock and 9 oclock positions of the clock gauge (dial test
indicator) probe.
7. Finally, turn both shafts to the 12 oclock position. The clock gauge (dial test indicator)
should again read zero.
Note: If opposite readings are plus and minus, the readings are added together to
determine the maximum reading.
Section 3.4 Page 6


3.4.5.3 Blank Angular Alignment Check Record Sheet
Equipment Number:
Shaft Gap Measurement
Positions 12 3 6 9
12
3
6
9
Column Total
Average
3.4.5.4 Blank Radial Alignment Record Sheet
Equipment Number:
Shaft Clock Gauge (Dial Test
Positions Indicator) Reading
12 0
3
6
9
Section 3.4 Page 7


3.4.6 Coupling Alignment - Reverse Indicator Method

The reverse indicator alignment method is a graph analysis method based on reverse
indicator readings at the two hubs and the distance from the reference machine hub to the
movable machine hub and mounting feet to achieve a precise alignment.
The most effective way of recording data as it is collected is to plot it on square grid graph
paper. Two charts are necessary to complete the task; one for the vertical alignment and
one for the horizontal alignment as described below.
Ideally, both reference and moveable machine hubs should be turned together. This can
be achieved by connecting them together using the coupling spacer (loosely connected) or
alternatively, using a threaded stock piece through both hubs.
Vertical alignment is checked first, and any required adjustment is applied. Then, the
horizontal alignment is checked and any required adjustment is applied. Vertical alignment
is then re-checked.
3.4.6.1 Vertical Alignment Check

1. Mount two dial indicators as shown
on the illustration, right, with the
indicator tips at the top centre of the
hub peripheries. Ensure that the
supports for each indicator are
sufficiently rigid to eliminate any sag
that may cause spurious readings.
2. Zero both indicators.
3. Rotate both hubs through 180 and record both indicator readings.
4. Refer to the illustration, below. Measure the distance C between the dial indicator tips.
5. Measure the distance F1 between the dial indicator tip on the reference machine hub
and the centre line of the moveable machine front foot.
6. Measure the distance F2 between the dial indicator tip on the reference machine hub
and the centre line of the moveable machine back foot.
Moveable Reference
Machine Machine
F1
F2
7. Draw a horizontal axis in the centre of the chart. Mark the units for the horizontal axis
along the top or bottom of the chart and mark the units for the vertical axis along the
right hand or left hand edge. Choose suitable scales to ensure that the F2 dimension
almost spans the chart horizontally and that the eccentricity value for the reference
Section 3.4 Page 8


machine hub (this is half of the total indicator reading) almost spans the chart vertically
from the centre axis to the top or bottom edge. See the Example Chart, below.
8. Measure off the distances C, F1 and F2 on the horizontal axis. Draw vertical lines
through C, F1 and F2. See the Example Chart, below.
9. On the extreme right scale B, measure off and mark the eccentricity value for the
reference machine hub (half of the total indicator reading). If the value is POSITIVE,
(i.e. indicator tip moves into indicator body), it should be placed above the horizontal
axis of the chart. If the value is NEGATIVE, (i.e. indicator tip moves out from body), it
should be placed below the horizontal axis of the chart.
10. On the vertical line C, measure off and mark the eccentricity value for the moveable
machine hub (half of the total indicator reading). These readings must be reversed
before plotting. If the value is POSITIVE, (i.e. indicator tip moves into indicator body), it
should be placed BELOW the horizontal axis of the chart. If the value is NEGATIVE,
(i.e. indicator tip moves out from body), it should be placed ABOVE the horizontal axis
of the chart.
11. Join the two plotted points and extend the line to cut the vertical lines representing F1
and F2. This extended line represents the relationship between the reference machine
shaft and the moveable machine shaft.
The vertical distance between the plotted line and the centre axis line where it cuts F1
and F2 indicates the vertical correction required at the front and back mounting feet of
the movable machine in the same units as used on the vertical scale of the chart.
12. If the obtained values exceed the permitted tolerance, adjust the thickness of the
shimming under the mounting feet of the moveable machine in accordance with the
plotted corrections. A positive correction value will require removal of shims.
3.4.6.2 Vertical Alignment Example

Refer to the Metric and Imperial Example Charts on the following pages.
1. The following readings have been recorded:
Reference machine hub TIR -1.423 mm (-0.056 inches)
Moveable machine hub TIR +1.067 mm (+0.042 inches)
Dimension C 171.45 mm (6.75 inches)
Dimension F1 349.25 mm (13.75 inches)
Dimension F2 603.25 mm (23.75 inches)
And the following values have been calculated:
Reference machine hub eccentricity -0.711 mm (-0.028 inches)
Moveable machine hub eccentricity +0.533 mm (+0.021 inches)
2. Plot the values on the chart. Draw the vertical lines through C, F1 and F2 and draw an
extended line through the two hub eccentricity values to cut the vertical lines.
3. Measure the distance between the extended line and the centre axis line where it cuts
F1 and F2. The measurement along F1 is the vertical correction required at the front
mounting feet of the moveable machine and the measurement along F2 is the vertical
correction required at the back mounting feet of the movable machine - both in the
same units as used on the vertical scale of the chart.
Section 3.4 Page 9

1.52
1.27
F2 F1 C
1.02
Section 3.4
0.76
0.51
Correction at Moveable Correction at Moveable
Machine Back Foot Machine Front Foot 0.25
0.25
0.51
0.76
Pump - Coupling Alignment

1.02
Moveable Machine Reference Machine

Hub Eccentricity Hub Eccentricity 1.27
1.52
Revision:
711 660 610 559 508 457 406 356 305 254 203 152 102 51 0
Document No:
Revision Date:
Coupling Alignment Record (Example)
Date: 09 May 2002 Correction Plant Item No. P28 Measurement C 171.45
Reference Hub TIR - 1.423 F1 + 0.36 Coupling Type M-70 Measurement F1 345
27 Sep 2003
3
Alignment 01
Section 3.4 Page 10

Moveable Hub TIR + 1.067 F2 + 0.1 D.B.S.E. 165.1 Measurement F2 590
F2 F1 C
Section 3.4
Correction at Moveable Correction at Moveable

Machine Back Foot Machine Front Foot
Pump - Coupling Alignment

Moveable Machine Reference Machine

Hub Eccentricity Hub Eccentricity
Revision:
Document No:
Revision Date:
Coupling Alignment Record (Example)
Date: 09 May 2002 Correction Plant Item No. P28 Measurement C 6.75
Reference Hub TIR - 56 F1 + 14 Coupling Type M-70 Measurement F1 13.75

27 Sep 2003
3
Alignment 01
Section 3.4 Page 11

Moveable Hub TIR + 42 F2 +3 D.B.S.E. 6.5 Measurement F2 23.75

3.4.6.3 Horizontal Alignment Check

Having checked the vertical alignment and carried out any required adjustment, the
horizontal alignment must be checked.
The procedure is the same as for the vertical alignment check except that the two dial
indicators must be moved through 90 with the indicator tips in the centre of the hub
peripheries at the 90 (3-o-clock) position to measure horizontal TIR.
Record the TIR of the two hubs, and measure C, F1 and F2.
Plot a chart in the same way as for vertical alignment. The vertical difference between the
plotted line and the centre axis line where it cuts F1 and F2 indicates the horizontal
correction required at the front and back mounting feet of the moveable machine in the
same units as used on the vertical scale of the chart.
If the obtained values exceed the permitted tolerance, a positive correction value (i.e.
above the centre axis line), indicates that the feet of the moveable machine should be
moved to the left when viewed from the drive end. For negative correction values (i.e.
below the centre axis line), the feet of the moveable machine should be moved to the right
when viewed from the drive end.
Adjust the horizontal position of the moveable machine mounting feet in accordance with
the plotted corrections.
3.4.6.4 Vertical Alignment Re-Check

When horizontal alignment has been checked, and any required adjustment applied, refer
to Section 3.4.6.1 - Vertical Alignment Check, above and re-check vertical alignment.
Section 3.4 Page 12

Document No: CommOp 01

Section 3.5 Pump - Commissioning and Revision: 3
Operation Revision Date: 30 Oct 2006
3.5 Commissioning and Operation

pumpset equipment.
3.5.1 Commissioning
maintenance personnel before starting any commissioning activity. Refer also to
specific safety advice contained as applicable within the commissioning
procedures included in this manual.
Note: Each installation will be subject to its own local procedures for the issuing
and cancelling of permits to work on the plant. These are not covered by this
manual but must be followed in each case. For the purpose of this manual, it is
assumed that the connected systems are available and that there is no restriction
on the operation of the pumpset.
Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, and to any other applicable drawings,
especially those documents covering instrumentation, wiring, pipework, control and
lubrication systems in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings
and Documents.
Refer as required to the equipment data sheets in Section 1 - Leading Particulars,
Equipment Data Sheets, and to the performance curves and test data in Section 1 -
Leading Particulars, Performance Curves and Test Data.
Refer also to the manufacturers information for supplied ancillary equipment, included as
inserts later in this manual.
Section 3.5 Page 1

K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\S3.05 CommOp 01-3.doc

3.5.1.1 Pre-Commissioning Checks
a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during pre-commissioning procedures
MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided:
failure to connect main (suction and discharge) pipework correctly to the pump
casing in accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations
failure to connect auxiliary pipework and associated equipment correctly in
accordance with manufacturers information and current regulations and to
direct the vent and drain pipework to suitable safe locations / containers
failure to prepare the mechanical seals and associated equipment for operation
in accordance with manufacturers information
failure to connect electrical equipment power supply and control cables and
current regulations
failure to prepare the driver correctly for operation, and to ensure correct
direction of rotation for the driver, in accordance with manufacturers
information
failure to prepare the external lube oil system correctly for operation in
accordance with manufacturers information
failure to prepare the gearbox correctly for operation in accordance with
failure to install the coupling spacers and coupling guard(s) correctly in
information on Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment.
- Ensure that all aspects of the installation procedure have been completed. In
particular, ensure that base plate levelling and installation has been completed, main
and auxiliary piping has been connected and secured correctly and that all electrical
and instrument connections have been completed.
- Ensure all debris and any oil spills left over from the installation procedure have been
cleaned up.
- Examine all electrical connections and earthing connections for completion and
security.
- Check the earth loop impedance.
- Check instrumentation insulation resistances.
- Check the set-points of all controls and instrumentation.
- Fit and close all terminal box covers before turning on electrical supplies.
- Check all pipework connections for security. Check that there are no loose bolts.
- Refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, later in this manual, and
check that the mechanical seals and associated equipment are ready for operation.
CAUTION
Failure to disengage the mechanical seal restraining fixtures before running the
pump will result in damage to the mechanical seal and pump components.
Section 3.5 Page 2


- When an external lube oil system is installed, refer to Section 3.11 - Lubrication,
to any applicable documentation in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 -
Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and to the lube system manufacturers information
and drawings, later in this manual, and ensure that the system is ready for operation.
CAUTION
When a 3-way temperature control valve (TCV) is fitted to control lube oil flow to a
cooler, manual over-ride must be used during system priming to ensure that the
cooler is filled with oil.
- When a gearbox is installed, refer to the gearbox manufacturers information and

drawings, later in this manual, and ensure that the gearbox is ready for operation.
- Ensure that drive shafts are not binding when rotated.
- Refer to Section 3.4 - Coupling Alignment and ensure that alignment has been
checked and adjusted as necessary.
- Refer to the driver manufacturers information, later in this manual, and check that the
driver is ready for operation. In particular:
- check that the motor is suitable for the electricity supply voltage and frequency.
- measure the motor insulation resistance using a Megger.
- If appropriate, check the motor anti-condensation heater, which must be wired so
that it switches off when the motor starts, and on again when it stops.
- If required and applicable, refer to the driver manufacturers information and carry
out a light run of the motor or other driver - i.e. with the coupling spacer removed.
For pumpsets with gearboxes, this should be followed by a run of the motor and
gearbox together, before the pumps are connected.
- Refer to Section 3.8 - Drive Coupling and ensure that the coupling spacers are
correctly fitted, before fitting the coupling guards.
- Ensure all guards are fitted.
Section 3.5 Page 3


3.5.1.2 Commissioning Runs
a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during commissioning procedures MAY
failure to vent and prime the main pipework and pump casing, and the auxiliary
pipework and connected equipment (i.e. mechanical seals and associated
equipment, coolers, instruments) correctly, in accordance with manufacturers
information
failure to operate the external lube oil system correctly, in accordance with
failure to operate the driver correctly, in accordance with manufacturers
information
failure to operate the gearbox correctly, in accordance with manufacturers
information
Note: Details of pumpset operation and system monitoring by automatic or remote systems
(by others) is beyond the scope of this manual.
CAUTION
Note the locations of emergency stop buttons prior to starting the equipment in
case problems arise requiring immediate action to prevent possible damage
occurring.
1. Refer to Section 3.5.1.1 - Pre-Commissioning Checks and ensure that all applicable
pre-commissioning checks have been completed.
2. Ensure that pumpset drain valves are closed.
3. Check that the pump discharge valve is initially closed.
CAUTION
Where a significant temperature difference exists between the stationary pump and
the product, failure to allow the pump casing temperature and product temperature
to equalise at the specified rate to within specified limits before pump start up can
cause damage to the pump from thermal shock. Refer to the following table.
CAUTION
Failure to operate the pump within the temperature difference and gradient
parameters stated below may damage the pump.
Temperature Equalisation to Avoid Thermal Shock

Pump Type Conditions Requiring Rate of Equalisation
Temperature Equalisation
CD Product temperature more than 56C 8C (14F) / minute (Maximum) before pump
(100F) above pump temperature - operation
measured at outside of parting flange at
suction end of pump
Where a temperature difference exceeding the above limit exists between the pump casing and the
product, start a controlled circulation of product through the pump to achieve a gradual and steady
increase in pump temperature within the rate specified above. Measure casing temperatures at
several points.
Continues
Section 3.5 Page 4


Continued
Depending on site pipework layout, circulation of product MAY be:
- from suction (using the pressure in the suction line, possibly from a booster pump), through the
pump and out via a minimum flow valve.
pump and out via a partially open discharge valve. In this case, the pressure in the suction line
must be above the pressure in the discharge line and also high enough to open an in-line non-
return valve.
- via a purpose designed pump heating circuit. This would typically inject warm product into the
pump discharge branch and return from the pump suction branch.
Note: In certain installations, where hot product is extremely remote from the pump, the product
temperature close to the stationary pump may be well below the condition requiring temperature
equalisation. In these cases, if pump temperature is likely to rise sufficiently before hot product
reaches the pump during operation, then temperature equalisation may not be required.
Note: Abnormal Operation - Thermal transients are sudden upward or downward temperature
changes, usually caused by abnormal plant conditions. Occurrences should be minimised. Should
thermal transients, or exposure to low ambient temperatures be anticipated, then use of a thermal
insulation enclosure or jacket is recommended.
4. Gradually (slowly) open the pump suction valve fully to allow the pump casing to fill
with liquid via the suction branch (normally TP1).
CAUTION Before running the pump, ensure that the suction valve is fully open.
5. Ensure that any required equipment cooling liquid supply is available and selected ON.
Refer to the cooling equipment manufacturers information and vent the cooler(s) and
associated equipment as required. Ensure that vent connections are closed when an
air-free flow of liquid is obtained.
6. Vent the pump and main pipework system (as far as possible) of trapped air.
Automatic or manual vent valves will normally be provided where necessary - some
pumps, with vertical suction and discharge connections are self venting. When all air is
expelled, and an air-free flow of product is obtained, ensure the vent valves are closed.
Note: If the discharge pipework downstream of the discharge valve cannot be fully primed,
it may be possible to fill the line using the pump, providing that the valve can be throttled to
control the pump flow to not more than 120% of the best efficiency point (BEP) for all
operating conditions. Close each vent valve when an air-free flow of product is obtained.
When applicable, open instrument isolation and vent connections. Close the vent
connections when an air-free flow of product is obtained.
CAUTION To avoid thermal shocking of mechanical seal faces by directing flushing / cooling /
quenching flow on to hot (operating) seal faces, external fluid supplies (when
applicable) must be available and selected on BEFORE STARTING THE PUMP.
7. Ensure that any required mechanical seal flushing / cooling / quenching liquid supply is
available and selected ON before starting the pump.
8. Refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information and vent the mechanical
seals and associated equipment as required. Ensure that vent connections are closed
when an air-free flow of liquid is obtained.
Section 3.5 Page 5


Do not operate the pump against a closed discharge valve (except where a minimum
flow circuit is installed), or below minimum recommended flow rate. When supplied
pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a Hazardous Area,
operation of pump against a closed discharge valve without minimum flow circuit
MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to
Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on
9. If a minimum flow system is installed, ensure that the minimum flow valve is locked
in the open position.
If a minimum flow system is not installed, ensure that the discharge valve is set to
approximately 10% open.
10. When applicable, select the compressed air supply ON. In particular, where pump (and
other equipment as appropriate) bearing oil seals require an air supply, ensure that it is
selected ON.
11. When an external lube oil system is installed, refer to Section 3.11 - Lubrication,
and drawings, later in this manual. Check that the lube oil system is ready for
operation. In particular, ensure that the system is fully primed - refer to Section 3.5.1.1
- pre-Commissioning Checks. Operate the lube oil system to provide the required
flow of oil to the appropriate bearings BEFORE the drive motor is started.
When flow indicating equipment is available, check lubricating oil flow indications.
12. Refer to the driver manufacturers manual and start the driver. Observe that the driver
runs up to speed quickly.
Note: Should the pressure developed by the pump not increase steadily during the starting
operation, it is probably a sign that air is present in the pump circuit, and the pump unit
should therefore be shut down and the priming operation re-commenced.
13. Gradually open the pump discharge valve as required to regulate the flow rate /
differential pressure to the required value.
CAUTION
Do not throttle the suction valve to control pump output. To do so may incur
damage through cavitation within the pump.
Operating Checks
Head:
As soon as operating speed is reached, there should be pressure at the pump discharge.
Shut down immediately if this does not happen.
Pump / Driver Speed:
When applicable, check operating speed remains within specified parameters.
Motor Current:
When an electric motor driver is installed, the full load current shown on the motor
nameplate must not be exceeded.
Vibration:
When vibration measuring equipment is available, monitor vibration levels. Shut down the
pumpset if the vibration limits are significantly exceeded, but note that the vibration
levels will be higher at reduced flow than at the normal operating condition.
Section 3.5 Page 6


Leaks:
Any leak signifies a problem. Particular attention should be paid to leaks in the area of the
shaft mechanical seals, which could indicate a failed seal.
Oil Supply:
Monitor oil level until it stabilises.
When an external lube oil system is installed, and flow indicating equipment is
available, monitor lubricating oil flow.
When temperature measuring equipment is available, monitor oil temperature and ensure
that it does not exceed the maximum allowable value. Shut down the pumpset if the
temperature limit is significantly exceeded.
Bearing Temperature:
a Hazardous Area, excessive bearing temperatures during pump operation MAY
When temperature measuring equipment is available, monitor bearing temperatures until
they stabilise and ensure that they do not exceed the maximum allowable value. Shut
down the pumpset if the temperature limit is significantly exceeded.
Pump Case Temperature:
a Hazardous Area, excessive pump casing temperature during pump operation MAY
When temperature measuring equipment is available, monitor pump casing temperature
and ensure that it does not exceed the maximum allowable value. Shut down the pumpset
if the temperature limit is significantly exceeded.
Suction Strainer:
A suction strainer may be fitted temporarily for initial operation. Refer to Section 3.3 -
Installation, Main Piping. Monitor pressure drop across the suction screen. Clean the
strainer as necessary, and remove the equipment after the elapsed time prescribed.
Performance Monitoring
Monitor pump performance and compare with the operating range of the pump curves.
Refer to Equipment Data Sheets and Performance Curves and Test Data.
During initial commissioning runs, take readings and measurements of temperatures,
pressures, motor current, vibration levels etc. as frequently as practicable. When
conditions have stabilised, readings should be taken every half to one hour. Record these
in a log book for future reference. The frequency of checks may be decreased following
satisfactory running, at the discretion of the engineer in charge.
Section 3.5 Page 7


3.5.2 Operation
maintenance personnel before starting any operating activity. Refer also to specific
safety advice contained as applicable within the operating procedures included in
this manual.
Note: Each installation will be subject to its own local procedures for the issuing
and cancelling of permits to work on the plant. These are not covered by this
manual but must be followed in each case. For the purpose of this manual, it is
assumed that the connected systems are available and that there is no restriction
on the operation of the pumpset.
Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, and to any other applicable drawings,
especially those documents covering instrumentation, wiring, pipework, control and
lubrication systems in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings
and Documents.
Refer as required to the equipment data sheets in Section 1 - Leading Particulars,
Equipment Data Sheets, and to the performance curves and test data in Section 1 -
Leading Particulars, Performance Curves and Test Data.
Refer also to the manufacturers information for supplied ancillary equipment, included as
inserts later in this manual.
Section 3.5 Page 8


3.5.2.1 Routine Runs
a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during operating procedures MAY
failure to vent and prime the main pipework and pump casing, and the auxiliary
pipework and connected equipment (i.e. mechanical seals and associated
equipment, coolers, instruments) correctly, in accordance with manufacturers
information
failure to prepare and operate the external lube oil system correctly, in
failure to prepare and operate the driver correctly, in accordance with
failure to prepare and operate the gearbox correctly, in accordance with
Note: Details of pumpset operation and system monitoring by automatic or remote

systems (by others) is beyond the scope of this manual.
CAUTION
Note the locations of emergency stop buttons prior to starting the equipment in
case problems arise requiring immediate action to prevent possible damage
occurring.
CAUTION
Where a significant temperature difference exists between the stationary pump and
the product, failure to allow the pump casing temperature and product temperature
to equalise at the specified rate to within specified limits before pump start up can
cause damage to the pump from thermal shock. Refer to the following table.
CAUTION
Failure to operate the pump within the temperature difference and gradient
parameters stated below may damage the pump.
Temperature Equalisation to Avoid Thermal Shock

Pump Type Conditions Requiring Rate of Equalisation
Temperature Equalisation
CD Product temperature more than 56C 8C (14F) / minute (Maximum) before pump
(100F) above pump temperature - operation
measured at outside of parting flange at
suction end of pump
Where a temperature difference exceeding the above limit exists between the pump casing and the
product, start a controlled circulation of product through the pump to achieve a gradual and steady
increase in pump temperature within the rate specified above. Measure casing temperatures at
several points.
Depending on site pipework layout, circulation of product MAY be:
pump and out via a minimum flow valve.
Continues
Section 3.5 Page 9


Continued
pump and out via a partially open discharge valve. In this case, the pressure in the suction line
must be above the pressure in the discharge line and also high enough to open an in-line non-
return valve.
- via a purpose designed pump heating circuit. This would typically inject warm product into the
pump discharge branch and return from the pump suction branch.
Note: In certain installations, where hot product is extremely remote from the pump, the product
temperature close to the stationary pump may be well below the condition requiring temperature
equalisation. In these cases, if pump temperature is likely to rise sufficiently before hot product
reaches the pump during operation, then temperature equalisation may not be required.
Note: Abnormal Operation - Thermal transients are sudden upward or downward temperature
changes, usually caused by abnormal plant conditions. Occurrences should be minimised. Should
thermal transients, or exposure to low ambient temperatures be anticipated, then use of a thermal
insulation enclosure or jacket is recommended.
1. Gradually (slowly) open the pump suction valve fully to allow the pump casing to fill
with liquid via the suction branch (normally TP1).
CAUTION Before running the pump, ensure that the suction valve is fully open.
2. Check that the pump and system are fully primed for operation. If not, refer to Section
3.5.1.2 - Commissioning Runs, above, and complete applicable priming actions.
3. When a gearbox is installed, refer to the gearbox manufacturers information and
drawings, later in this manual, and ensure that the gearbox is ready for operation.
CAUTION To avoid thermal shocking of mechanical seal faces by directing flushing / cooling /
quenching flow on to hot (operating) seal faces, external fluid supplies (when
applicable) must be available and selected on BEFORE STARTING THE PUMP.
4. Ensure that any required mechanical seal flushing / cooling / quenching liquid supply is
available and selected ON before starting the pump. Where mechanical seal system(s)
are installed, ensure that they are ready for operation.
5. Ensure that any required cooling liquid supply is available.
Do not operate the pump against a closed discharge valve (except where a minimum
flow circuit is installed), or below minimum recommended flow rate. When the
supplied pump and pumpset equipment is classified as suitable for use in a
Hazardous Area, operation of the pump against a closed discharge valve without a
minimum flow circuit MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST
be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation
for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the
pumpset equipment.
6. If a minimum flow system is installed, ensure that the minimum flow valve is locked
in the open position.
If a minimum flow system is not installed, ensure that the discharge valve is set to
approximately 10% open.
7. When applicable, select the compressed air supply ON. In particular, where pump (and
other equipment as appropriate) bearing oil seals require an air supply, ensure that it is
selected ON.
Section 3.5 Page 10


8. When an external lube oil system is installed, refer to Section 3.11 - Lubrication,
and drawings, later in this manual. Check that the lube oil system is ready for
operation. In particular, ensure that the system is fully primed - refer to Section 3.5.1.1
- pre-Commissioning Checks. Operate the lube oil system to provide the required
flow of oil to the appropriate bearings BEFORE the drive motor is started.
When flow indicating equipment is available, check lubricating oil flow indications.
9. Refer to the driver manufacturers manual and start the driver. Observe that the driver
runs up to speed quickly.
Note: Should the pressure developed by the pump not increase steadily during the starting
operation, it is probably a sign that air is present in the pump circuit, and the pump unit
should therefore be shut down and the priming operation re-commenced.
10. Gradually open the pump discharge valve as required to regulate the flow rate /
differential pressure to the required value.
CAUTION
Do not throttle the suction valve to control pump output. To do so may incur
damage through cavitation within the pump.
3.5.2.2 Operating Checks
Head
As soon as operating speed is reached, there should be pressure at the pump discharge.
Shut down immediately if this does not happen.
Pump / Driver Speed
When applicable, check operating speed remains within specified parameters.
Motor Current
When an electric motor driver is installed, the full load current shown on the motor
nameplate must not be exceeded.
Vibration
When vibration measuring equipment is available, monitor vibration levels. Shut down the
pumpset if the vibration limits are significantly exceeded, but note that the vibration
levels will be higher at minimum flow than at the normal operating condition.
Leaks
Any leak signifies a problem. Particular attention should be paid to leaks in the area of the
shaft mechanical seals, which could indicate a failed seal.
Oil Supply
Monitor oil level until it stabilises.
When an external lube oil system is installed, and flow indicating equipment is
available, monitor lubricating oil flow.
When temperature measuring equipment is available, monitor oil temperature and ensure
that it does not exceed the maximum allowable value. Shut down the pumpset if the
temperature limit is significantly exceeded.
Section 3.5 Page 11


Bearing Temperature
a Hazardous Area, excessive bearing temperatures during pump operation MAY
When temperature measuring equipment is available, monitor bearing temperatures until
they stabilise and ensure that they do not exceed the maximum allowable value. Shut
down the pumpset if the temperature limit is significantly exceeded.
Pump Case Temperature
a Hazardous Area, excessive pump casing temperature during pump operation MAY
When temperature measuring equipment is available, monitor pump casing temperature
and ensure that it does not exceed the maximum allowable value. Shut down the pumpset
if the temperature limit is significantly exceeded.
Suction Strainer
A suction strainer may be fitted temporarily for initial operation. Refer to Section 3.3 -
Installation, Main Piping. Monitor pressure drop across the suction screen. Clean the
strainer as necessary, and remove the equipment after the elapsed time prescribed.
3.5.2.3 Routine Performance Monitoring

When the pump is in normal service, at approximately three monthly intervals, take
readings and measurements of temperatures, pressures, vibration levels etc. as
appropriate. The values obtained may be compared with those originally taken when the
pumps were new. In this way a record of pump performance over a period of time will be
available to maintenance engineers, and any drop in performance will become apparent.
Section 3.5 Page 12


3.5.3 Standby Procedures

Pumps that are on standby duty for seven days without being run operationally should be
started and run for 20 minutes. This will inhibit condensation from accumulating within
bearing housings.
3.5.3.1 Temperature Equalisation

When applicable, refer to Section 3.5.2.1 - Routine Runs and ensure that temperature
equalisation requirements are met before starting a pump.
3.5.3.2 Coolant Systems

Ensure that coolant systems and lube oil systems remain available for pumps that are on
standby for immediate startup.
3.5.4 Shut-Down Procedures
3.5.4.1 Normal Shut-Down
Note: The following procedure assumes that a local Stop button, and a local discharge
valve control is available for the manual operation of the pumpset. The normal shut-down
procedure may be controlled by automatic systems (by others).
1. Press the Stop button to stop the driver. Check that it runs down smoothly.
2. Close the discharge valve.
3. Where applicable, leave lube oil systems and coolant supplies operating for a
minimum of 20 minutes after pumpset shutdown.
4. Where applicable, isolate the pumpset if it is not required on standby duty.
3.5.4.2 Emergency Shut-Down
Note: The following procedure assumes that a local Emergency Stop or Stop button, and
a local discharge valve control is available for the manual operation of the pumpset. The
emergency shut-down procedure may be controlled by automatic systems (by others).
1. Press the Emergency Stop (if available) or Stop button to stop the driver. Check that
it runs down smoothly.
2. Close the discharge valve.
3. Where applicable, leave lube oil systems and coolant supplies operating for a
minimum of 20 minutes after pumpset shutdown.
4. Isolate the pumpset in preparation for fault finding and possible rectification.
CAUTION
The pump must not be returned to normal service until the reason for the
emergency shut-down has been investigated and rectified.
Section 3.5 Page 13


3.5.4.3 Extended Shut-Down Procedures

Site conditions may require that a pump be shut down for an extended period (more than
seven days). If the shut -down period is not long enough to warrant full storage procedures
(see below), the following options are recommended:
a) If Pump Can Be Run During Shut-Down
The pump should be started every week and run for 20 minutes. This will inhibit
condensation from accumulating within bearing housings (and lubrication pipework when
applicable), and also guard against shaft seizure at a later stage.
b) If Pump Cannot Be Run During Shut-Down
Seek advice from Sulzer on required preservation, storage and inspection requirements.
If the pump bearings are not normally immersed in oil when the pump is stationary, the
bearings must be re-lubricated before start-up if the shut-down is for more than 30 days.
CAUTION
Failure to re-lubricate bearings before start-up after an extended shut down (when
appropriate) could result in scored bearings and/or internal damage to the pump.
3.5.4.4 Freeze Damage

If it is possible that the liquid within the pump could freeze during the shut-down period,
seek advice from Sulzer on required draining, preservation, storage and inspection
requirements.
3.5.5 Storage Procedures

For advice on required protection, preservation and inspection procedures for pumps
during storage periods, refer to Section 3.2 - Receiving.
For advice on required protection, preservation and inspection procedures for supplied
drivers and other pumpset equipment during storage periods, refer to the ancillary
equipment manufacturers information, later in this manual.
Section 3.5 Page 14

Document No: Maintenance 01

Section 3.6 Pump - General and Scheduled Revision: 2
Maintenance Revision Date: 23 Nov 2004
3.6 Maintenance
pumpset equipment.
3.6.1 Scope
This section contains general information and advice on pump maintenance procedures for
a horizontal pumpset. These general instructions are provided as guidelines to aid and
direct a safe and efficient maintenance project.
It also provides a generic pumpset maintenance schedule that can be adapted and used
as required when a specific site maintenance schedule is not available.
3.6.2 Equipment Condition
3.6.2.1 Performance Record

Keep a written performance log for the equipment. An ongoing performance record will
assist troubleshooting and future pump service decisions. Long shutdowns and
unnecessary expense can then be avoided.
Pressure indicators can be installed into tapped openings in the suction and discharge
nozzles to provide much of the data required for performance analysis.
Periodic trending vibration recordings are necessary to diagnose excessive vibration
levels.
3.6.2.2 Troubleshooting
Analyse performance before dismantling. A problem might be correctable without
dismantling the pump. A performance record will help narrow the possible causes, and
determine whether the problem is mechanical, hydraulic or system related.
System problems typically originate in the suction system side of the pump. Control mal-
adjustments should be eliminated. Mechanical and hydraulic problems often are
interrelated and the source can be difficult to identify. Refer to Troubleshooting.
Section 3.6 Page 1

K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\S3.06 Maintenance 01-2.doc

3.6.3 General Overhaul Information and Advice
Dismantling
Check for toxic or otherwise harmful fluids before loosening bolted joints or pipe
connections.
Collect and dispose of toxic or otherwise harmful fluids in accordance with the
current environmental regulations to prevent endangering people or the
environment.
- Before starting any maintenance activity, ensure that:

- Electrical power breakers are locked in the OFF position.
- The pump is at ambient temperature.
- Pump system pressure has been isolated.
- The pump is drained and vented (by removing drain plugs or opening valves as
applicable).
- Suction, discharge, and auxiliary piping valves are closed.
- Cap the ends of all disconnected pipework to prevent the entry of dirt.
- During any dismantling procedure, mark all removed parts to enable replacement in
the same position.
- Protect all parts. Place larger parts in a protected area and wrap in cloth or plastic.
Place smaller parts and bolting in bags or boxes, and identify with labels where
components are for re-assembly.
- Protect screwed joints and threads.
- Refer to each dismantling / assembly section for information on specific requirements
for special tools and equipment. Obtain any required items before starting
maintenance activities.
- Check pump rotation. Note that certain threaded shaft components may be tightened
against rotation and may have a left-hand thread.
CAUTION
At all stages during dismantling of the pump, it is essential that the pump shaft is
adequately supported to prevent bending and/or damage to the bearings.
Assembly
a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during maintenance procedures MAY
failure to maintain correct casing / impeller / bearing clearances, as detailed in
Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data
failure to maintain bearings correctly
failure to re-connect main (suction and discharge) pipework correctly to the
pump casing in accordance with manufacturers information and current
regulations
Section 3.6 Page 2


failure to re-connect auxiliary pipework correctly in accordance with

failure to re-connect electrical equipment power supply and control cables and
current regulations
failure to ensure correct direction of rotation for the driver in accordance with
failure to install the coupling spacers and coupling guard(s) correctly in
- All parts must be absolutely clean and free of oil or dust. Technical grade acetone is
recommended for cleaning machined surfaces immediately before assembly. Air dry
(use filtered, dry air) cleaned parts in a dust-free area. The rust inhibitor on machined
surfaces should be removed with a suitable solvent. Ensure that there is no paint on
locating spigots or recesses.
- Handle all parts carefully so that they are not dropped, or damaged in any other way.
- Ensure any burrs or dirt on the faces of sleeves and impeller bores are removed. Anti-
scuffing paste must be applied to sleeves and impeller bores to facilitate later
dismantling.
- New gaskets, seals and O-ring seals of the same material, type and size as originally
supplied must be used for re-assembly operations. The O-rings must be fitted carefully
to prevent the risk of damage.
- Powdered molybdenum disulphide can be used as a shaft lubricant.
- Lubricate screwed joints and threads with glycerine or Teflonspray.
- When applicable, re-assemble small bore pipework using new olives in unions that
have been disconnected.
CAUTION
At all stages during assembly of the pump, it is essential that the pump shaft is
3.6.4 Shipping From Site

All equipment must be completely drained and decontaminated before removal from site.
Shipments received at any Sulzer facility that have not been so treated must be returned to
site at the owners expense.
3.6.5 Completion of Pump Overhaul

Re - commission the pump following every overhaul. Refer to Section 3.5 -
Commissioning and Operation.
Section 3.6 Page 3


3.6.6 Scheduled Maintenance
a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during scheduled maintenance
procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided:
failure to detect and rectify leaks from main (suction and discharge) pipework
connections to the pump casing
failure to detect and rectify leaks from auxiliary pipework and associated
equipment (i.e. mechanical seals and associated equipment, coolers,
instruments) connections
failure to maintain ancillary equipment and systems (i.e. external lube oil system,
mechanical seals and associated equipment, driver, gearbox) in accordance
with manufacturers information
If a site-specific pumpset maintenance schedule is not available, the following

suggested schedule may be used or adapted as required. Please consult Sulzer for
further advice as necessary.
Refer to the General Arrangement drawing, the pump Longitudinal Section drawing, the
Lubrication Schedule (when available), and to any other applicable supplied drawing or
document in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and
Documents.
3.6.6.1 Daily Checks

- Perform a walk-around inspection of the pumpset, preferably while the pumpset is
operating, and:
- Carry out a visual check for leaks, or damage to components. Pay particular
attention to main and auxiliary pipework connections and to mechanical seal
locations. Repair or report any damage or leaks.
Note: The mechanical seals require no routine maintenance except for a daily
visual inspection to check for excessive external leakage. In this event the pump
should be taken out of service and the seal repaired or replaced.
- Check all indicating instruments for correct functioning and unusual readings.
Report faults and investigate the cause of any unusual readings.
- When a self-contained bearing lube system is in use, check the oil level in the
constant level oilers - replenish as required. Record the replenishment amount to
identify excessive oil loss / consumption. Refer to Section 3.11 - Lubrication.
- Check for unusual noises or noise levels. Report or investigate unusual noises or
noise levels.
- When applicable, check strainer / filter differential pressures.
- When applicable, check external utility supplies (air, water etc.).
- Keep the area around the pumpset tidy. Clean up any spillages of oil.
Section 3.6 Page 4


3.6.6.2 Weekly Checks

- When an external bearing lube system is in use, refer to Section 3.11 - Lubrication
and to the available information for the lube oil system. If no scheduled maintenance
information is available, consider the following:
- check the lube oil reservoir level - replenish as required. Record the replenishment
amount to identify excessive oil loss / consumption.
- check the condition of the lube oil filter (check differential pressure gauge reading
if applicable). When a duplex filter system is in use, change over to the clean filter
element if required. Dirty filter element must be changed for new element or
cleaned as appropriate. Record the changeover of filter elements to identify
excessive filter clogging which may indicate problems in the bearings or in the lube
oil system.
- Record readings for all indicating instruments (identifies gradual changes in readings
over time and may help to identify a developing problem in pumpset operation).
- Test run standby pumps to ensure readiness for operation.
3.6.6.3 Monthly Checks

- Check the temperature and vibration levels etc. against the string test reference
readings for normal expected values. (This information should be recorded and used
as a bench mark for future readings).
- Check the security of the coupling guards.
CAUTION
DO NOT check the security of the coupling guards while the equipment is in
operation.
3.6.6.4 Six-Monthly Checks

information is available, consider sampling and analysing the condition of the lube oil
in the reservoir (alternatively, every 2,500 operating hours). Replace the oil in the lube
system reservoir when analysis indicates that degradation of oil condition warrants the
change.
- Check the alignment of the drive coupling - refer to Section 3.4 - Coupling
Alignment.
- Check the pump performance against reference data.
- Inspect all parts for damage to paintwork, and repaint if necessary. If evidence of rust
is found, affected areas must be cleaned, de-rusted and then repainted.
- Bright metal parts should also be examined for rust, the surfaces cleaned, and a film of
Shell Ensis fluid (or Chevron equivalent) re-applied as necessary.
3.6.6.5 Yearly Checks

information is available, consider changing the lube oil filter elements.
- Check the security of all holding down bolts (alternatively, every 8,000 operating
hours).
Section 3.6 Page 5


3.6.6.6 Sub-Vendor Equipment Maintenance Schedules

Refer to the relevant sub-vendor information, later in this manual, for details of any routine
maintenance required on ancillary equipment.
Section 3.6 Page 6

Document No: CD Casing 11

Section 3.7 Pump - Case / Rotating Element Revision: 1
Assembly Revision Date: 06 May 2003
3.7 Case / Element Assembly

pumpset equipment.
3.7.1 Scope
Directions for the opening and closing of the volute case, and for the removal, dismantling,
inspection of parts, re-assembly and re-fitting of the rotating element.
3.7.2 Preparation
Study the following procedures as well as the pump Longitudinal Section drawing, and
other available drawings and documents, and be familiar with the design details and
assembly sequence.
Plan the operations and have withdrawal and assembly equipment, and other special tools
available. This includes any required measuring devices, heating facilities and torque
wrenches.
Note: Supplied special tools and equipment may be detailed in the IOM Manual in Section
1- Leading Particulars, Section 1.1 - List of Equipment Supplied, or elsewhere within
the manual.
Refer to Section 3.7.5 - Removal and Fitting of Components with a Shrink Fit. Be
familiar with the heating temperatures, mounting and dismounting forces and procedures.
Refer to Section 3.12 - Torque Tightening of Fasteners for information on standard
torque tightening procedures and values.
3.7.3 Examination and Cleanliness

Unless the volute casing needs renovation, it will remain installed after the rotating element
has been removed.
The casing must be protected from the ingress of dirt and physical damage during the
maintenance cycle. The rotating element must be removed to a clean work area for
dismantling.
Section 3.7 Page 1

K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\S3.07 CD Casing 11-1.doc

3.7.4 General Information on Dismantling and Assembly
3.7.4.1 Dismantling
Check for toxic or otherwise harmful fluids before loosening bolted joints or pipe
connections.
Collect and dispose of toxic or otherwise harmful fluids in accordance with the
current environmental regulations to prevent endangering people or the
environment.
- Before starting any maintenance activity, ensure that:

- Electrical power breakers are locked in the OFF position.
- The pump is at ambient temperature.
- Pump system pressure has been isolated.
- The pump is drained and vented (by removing drain plugs or opening valves as
applicable).
- Suction, discharge, and auxiliary piping valves are closed.
- Cap the ends of all disconnected pipework to prevent the entry of dirt.
- During any dismantling procedure, mark all removed parts to enable replacement in
the same position.
- Protect all parts. Place larger parts in a protected area and wrap in cloth or plastic.
Place smaller parts and bolting in bags or boxes, and identify with labels where
components are for re-assembly.
- Protect screwed joints and threads.
- Refer to each dismantling / assembly section for information on specific requirements
for special tools and equipment. Obtain any required items before starting
maintenance activities.
- Check pump rotation. Note that certain threaded shaft components may be tightened
against rotation and may have a left-hand thread.
CAUTION
At all stages during dismantling of the pump, it is essential that the pump shaft is
3.7.4.2 Assembly
All parts must be absolutely clean and free of oil or dust. Technical grade acetone is
recommended for cleaning machined surfaces immediately before assembly. Air dry (use
filtered, dry air) cleaned parts in a dust-free area. The rust inhibitor on machined surfaces
should be removed with a suitable solvent. Ensure that there is no paint on locating spigots
or recesses.
Handle all parts carefully so that they are not dropped, or damaged in any other way.
Ensure any burrs or dirt on the faces of sleeves and impeller bores are removed. Anti-
scuffing paste must be applied to sleeves and impeller bores to facilitate later dismantling.
Section 3.7 Page 2


New gaskets, seals and O-ring seals of the same material, type and size as originally
supplied must be used for re-assembly operations. The O-rings must be fitted carefully to
prevent the risk of damage.
Powdered molybdenum disulphide can be used as a shaft lubricant.
Lubricate screwed joints and threads with glycerine or Teflonspray.
When applicable, re-assemble small bore pipework using new olives in unions that have
been disconnected.
CAUTION
At all stages during assembly of the pump, it is essential that the pump shaft is
3.7.4.3 Hazardous Area Classification
failure to re-connect electrical equipment power supply and control cables and
current regulations
equipment.
Section 3.7 Page 3


3.7.5 Removal and Fitting of Components with a Shrink Fit

It must be emphasised that successful results using the following procedure(s)
CAUTION
require either previous experience or first hand advice from a Sulzer representative.
The components must be heated, and permanent damage can result if the level and
duration of heating is not properly controlled.
Impellers have a shrink interference fit to the shaft. Sufficient heat must be used to expand
the outer part, while avoiding higher damaging temperatures.
Note: Impeller removal and mounting can be considered a two person job. Have all tools,
parts, gloves, etc. ready for quick action.
3.7.5.1 Impeller Removal

During the heating and removal process, the impeller must be heated and then
CAUTION
withdrawn from the shaft smoothly and evenly.
Take care not to allow too much heat to soak into the shaft. If significantly more
CAUTION
than two minutes elapses during the heating cycle, stop heating, allow the
components to cool completely, and start again. If problems persist, contact a
Sulzer representative.
Clean and polish the shaft ahead of the impeller before heating and removal.
Protect the shaft with wet rags. If the shaft becomes hot it will expand, increasing the
temperature required to remove the impeller.
Adjust the torch to a soft flame, Do not allow the hot inner blue cone to touch the part.
Heat the impeller slowly and evenly, alternately applying the flame to both sides. A
temperature of 205C (400F) is usually sufficient for removal. Begin heating at the outer
perimeter and work toward the centre, heating the hub last. Avoid producing an
undesirable hot spot on the part, which can be created by stopping and changing direction
at the same location.
Withdraw the impeller from the shaft using a smooth and even motion. Stop the removal
procedure if the impeller starts to move and then seizes. Allow the assembly to cool to the
touch before resuming.
CAUTION
Forcing apart interference fit components that have temperature difference can
result in damage, requiring repair or replacement.
If a soft-face mallet is used, be sure to tap only on the shroud near an impeller vane.
CAUTION Take care to avoid bending the impeller shroud.
3.7.5.2 Impeller Fit

Heat the impeller to 232C (450F) by electric oven or hot oil bath. Heating by torch is not
recommended as it can cause uneven heating and has obvious safety risks.
Slide the heated part smoothly and evenly over the shaft and into position.
Stop the fitting procedure if the impeller starts to move and then seizes. Allow the
assembly to cool to the touch before resuming. In this case, use torch heating as
described in Section 3.7.5.1 above.
3.7.5.3 Fitting Impeller Wear Rings

Heat the new wear ring to 177C (350F) by electric oven or hot oil bath. Heating by torch
is not recommended as it can cause uneven heating and has obvious safety risks.
Section 3.7 Page 4


3.7.6 NDE Casing Cover and Rotating Element - Removal

Refer to the Longitudinal Section drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section 1.2
- Sulzer Drawings and Documents.
Note: Depending on design criteria and specification, pump assemblies may not include
throat bushes. In such cases, the bore of the DE and NDE casing covers are designed to
function as throat bushes - when applicable, please replace any references to throat
bushes in the following procedure with the appropriate casing cover bore.
CAUTION
In order to avoid disturbing the alignment of the pump with the driver, the DE casing
cover is normally left in-situ on the volute casing during dismantling, and the
rotating assembly is removed and refitted from the NDE.
1. Refer to Section 3.9 - Bearing Assemblies and to Section 3.10 - Mechanical Seals,
and remove the DE and NDE bearing assemblies and mechanical seals.
2. Disconnect and remove sections of piping that will interfere with the removal of the
NDE casing cover and rotating assembly. Cap pipe ends to prevent the entry of debris.
3. Measure total axial movement of the rotating element in the volute case and record for
use at re-assembly.
i. Mount a dial indicator to a suitable fixed point with the indicator tip in contact with
the shaft end.
ii. Push the shaft as far as it will go towards the DE. Set the dial indicator to zero.
iii. Move the shaft as far as it will go towards the NDE and note the indicator reading.
iv. Push the shaft back towards the DE by half of the total indicator reading to set the
shaft in the centre position. Remove the dial indicator.
4. Fit a suitable eyebolt into the tapped hole in the top of the NDE casing cover. Attach a
suitable sling and shackles to the eyebolt and to suitable lifting equipment. Adjust the
lifting equipment to just support the weight of the cover.
5. Unscrew and remove the nuts, complete with washers, from the NDE casing cover
mounting studs in the volute casing.
6. Fit and tighten jackscrews evenly to break the joint seal and release the NDE casing
cover from the volute casing.
CAUTION
During removal of the NDE casing cover from the volute casing, guide the casing
cover carefully to prevent damage to the casing cover bore, to the case wear ring in
the cover, and to the pump shaft. Support the rotating assembly as necessary to
prevent damage to the bore of the DE casing cover and to the end of the shaft.
7. Support the NDE casing cover, complete with case wear ring and integral bearing
bracket, using the attached lifting equipment. Withdraw the casing cover assembly
away from the volute casing and off the pump shaft. Collect the gaskets.
8. Lower the NDE casing cover assembly onto suitable timber packing to protect the
machined face. Remove the lifting equipment.
CAUTION
After the NDE casing cover has been removed, the rotating assembly is supported
by the DE casing cover bore and the DE case wear ring. Provide additional support
to the NDE of the rotating assembly to prevent damage to the casing bore and to the
end of the shaft.
Section 3.7 Page 5


CAUTION
During removal of the rotating assembly from the volute casing and DE casing
cover, guide the assembly carefully to prevent damage to the casing cover bore and
to the pump shaft.
9. Support the rotating assembly using suitable soft slings attached to suitable lifting
equipment. Place the slings as close to the impeller as possible to minimise the stress
on the shaft. Withdraw the rotating assembly out of the volute casing and DE casing
cover.
CAUTION
Handle the rotating assembly with care and support it evenly to maintain shaft
straightness.
10. Transport the element to a clean work area for further dismantling and place on 'V'
blocks, providing adequate support for the two ends and the centre of the element.
Section 3.7 Page 6


3.7.7 Rotating Element - Dismantling

Refer as necessary to Section 3.7.5 - Removal and Fitting of Components with a
Shrink Fit.
Note: Check for match-marks or mark the impeller and wearing parts during dismantling to
ensure correct replacement.
CAUTION Handle the shaft with care and support it evenly to maintain straightness.
1. Ensure that the rotating assembly is located securely on suitable supports.

2. Slacken the grub screw and remove the thrust ring retainer.
3. Remove the thrust ring from the groove in the shaft adjacent to the impeller.
4. Clean and polish the shaft from the impeller to the shaft end to ease removal.
5. Refer to Section 3.7.5 - Removal and Fitting of Components with a Shrink Fit;
heat the impeller and remove it smoothly and evenly from the shaft. Remove the key.
Section 3.7 Page 7


3.7.8 Inspection and Repair of Pump Components
3.7.8.1 Clean and Inspect

After dismantling, clean the parts and inspect for wear or damage. In particular, check the
running surfaces of rings and bushings.
Damaged or excessively worn parts should be discarded. Re-usable parts should be
prepared for short-term storage by applying a light machine oil to all machined surfaces.
3.7.8.2 Shaft
CAUTION
Sleeves MAY BE fitted to the shaft at the pump DE/NDE bearing locations. These
sleeves are an integral part of the shaft and are fitted as part of in-process shaft
manufacture. The sleeves are not supplied as separate parts and NO ATTEMPT
SHOULD BE MADE TO REMOVE THEM.
File off any burrs and smooth the resulting file marks with a fine emery paper / cloth.
Protect the surfaces from damage.
Polish the shaft at the impeller, seal, coupling and bearing locations, using a fine emery
paper / cloth.
CAUTION
Handle the shaft with care and support it evenly to maintain straightness. Avoid
bumping, hitting, or springing the shaft.
Rest the shaft on precision rollers at the bearing locations. Use dial indicators to determine
total indicator readings (TIR) at impeller and seal locations; maximum TIR is detailed in
Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data.
CAUTION Never use a bent shaft.
Measure the shaft diameter at the impeller mounting surface, and the impeller bore, to
ensure that shrink fits have been maintained. Check with a Sulzer representative for
further details.
If the shaft is to be stored for re-use, it should be lightly oiled, covered with a protective
sleeve and if possible, hung vertically to maintain straightness.
3.7.8.3 Bearings and Bearing Housings
a Hazardous Area, failure to maintain bearing assemblies correctly in accordance
and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area
Operation for specific information on the Hazardous Area Classification assigned to
the pumpset equipment.
Refer to the bearing assembly instructions in Section 3.9 - Bearing Assemblies for
information on inspection and replacement.
Section 3.7 Page 8


3.7.8.4 Case Wear Rings
a Hazardous Area, failure to maintain bearing assemblies correctly in accordance
and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area
Inspect wear rings for nicks, scratches or uneven wear. Dress minor irregularities with a
fine file and emery paper / cloth and remove any foreign material.
Measure bores and outside diameters of the running surfaces to determine the diametrical
clearance in each case.
A clearance of no greater than 140% of the minimum new design clearance must still
exist over at least 85% of the surface to make the parts re-usable.
The remaining surface must not vary by more than 0.002 inches (0.05 mm), from the
minimum new design clearance on the diameter.
Chrome plating (or equivalent) up to a maximum of 0.010 inches (0.254 mm) on a side
may be suitable if it restores the component to dimensions and tolerances specified for
new item.
Note: Refer to Sulzer for advice on suitability of plating before carrying out the
procedure.
Replace wear rings when pump performance drops below acceptable system standards.
Measure the diametral clearance between corresponding components. Use several
measurement locations, then subtract the average O/D from the average I/D to determine
the diametral clearance.
Note: The MAXIMUM allowable diametral clearance, i.e. the fully worn condition, is twice
the maximum NEW clearance.
The NEW diametral clearances for pump components are shown in Section 1.3 - Pump
Unit Data.
Removal of Case Wear Rings

Case wear rings can be removed by drilling out the tack welding and removing the hex
socket screws and then inserting a pulling tool or pry bar between the ring and the seat.
Apply pressure evenly to remove the ring.
Replacement of Case Wear Rings
CAUTION DE and NDE case wear rings are NOT interchangeable.
1. Ensure that new rings and seats are clean and free of burrs.
2. Align the mounting holes in the new wear ring with the tapped holes in the end cover.
Press the new case wear ring into the casing end cover ensuring the mounting /
tapped holes remain in alignment.
3. Fit new hex socket screws to secure the wear ring in place and tack weld the head of
each screw to secure the screws in place.
Section 3.7 Page 9


3.7.8.5 Impeller
Inspect the impeller for wear and damage. Look for cavitation marks (pits) in the suction
opening, erosion of vanes and cracks in the shroud. Smooth minor irregularities with a very
fine file or with a fine emery paper / cloth. Inspect the impeller key, shaft and impeller
keyway. The impeller should be replaced if damaged or excessively worn or pitted.
3.7.8.6 Mechanical Seals
a Hazardous Area, failure to maintain mechanical seals correctly in accordance with
manufacturers information MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and
MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area
Refer to the manufacturers instructions, later in this manual or supplied separately, for
details of storage and repair procedures and spare parts required.
Section 3.7 Page 10


3.7.9 Rotating Element - Assembly
Refer as necessary to Section 3.7.5 - Removal and Fitting of Components with a
Shrink Fit.
Note: Check for match-marks on impeller and wearing parts during assembly to ensure
correct replacement.
CAUTION
A replacement bearing housing, or any re-work to the case bore, requires that the
rotating element radial centre position be determined in order to establish the
correct bearing housing position. In these cases, refer to Section 3.9 - Bearing
Assemblies, Rotating Element Radial Centring BEFORE re-assembling bearing
housings.
1. Clamp the shaft using a soft-jaw vice, close to the impeller mounting location, leaving
unimpeded clearance.
2. Check the fit of all thrust rings and shaft keys.
3. Clean and polish the shaft from the impeller location to the shaft end to ease impeller
fit.
4. Fit the key to the shaft.
5. Observe match marks to ensure that the impeller is refitted in the correct orientation.
Refer to Section 3.7.5 - Removal and Fitting of Components with a Shrink Fit;
heat the impeller and slide it smoothly and evenly onto the shaft, over the key and up
to the shoulder.
6. Allow the impeller to air-cool
7. Insert the thrust ring into the groove in the shaft adjacent to the impeller.
8. Fit the thrust ring retainer over the shaft and into position over the thrust ring. Tighten
the grub screw in the thrust ring retainer to secure it in place.
Note: All replacement impellers are balanced. A balanced impeller replacement does not
necessitate rotating element balancing, unless this was an original application
requirement. If element balancing is a requirement, contact a Sulzer representative for
limits.
9. Check runout on wear ring surfaces after shaft and impeller assembly. Support the
element assembly on precision rollers at the bearing locations. TIR for the rotating
element must be within the limits shown in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data.
10. Lightly coat the impeller wear surfaces and shaft wear surfaces with powdered
molybdenum disulphide. This lubricant provides protection during storage and
alignment shaft rotation.
Section 3.7 Page 11


3.7.10 Rotating Element and NDE Casing Cover - Fit
failure to maintain correct casing / impeller / bearing clearances, as detailed
in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data
manufacturers information and current regulations and to direct the vent
and drain pipework to suitable safe locations / containers
failure to re-connect electrical equipment power supply and control cables
and instrument cables correctly in accordance with manufacturers
information and current regulations
CAUTION
A replacement bearing housing, or any re-work to the case internal bore, requires
that the rotating element radial centre position be determined in order to establish
the correct bearing housing position. In these cases, refer to Section 3.9 - Bearing
Assemblies, Rotating Element Radial Centring BEFORE re-assembling bearing
housings.
CAUTION
In order to avoid disturbing the alignment of the pump with the driver, the DE casing
cover is normally left in-situ on the volute casing during dismantling, and the
rotating assembly is removed and refitted from the NDE.
CAUTION
Handle the rotating assembly with care and support it evenly to maintain shaft
straightness.
CAUTION
During installation of the rotating assembly into the volute casing, guide the
assembly carefully to prevent damage to the DE casing cover bore, and to the pump
shaft.
CAUTION
When the rotating assembly is initially installed in the volute casing and DE casing
cover, it is supported by the DE casing bore and by the DE case wear ring. Provide
additional support to the NDE of the rotating assembly to prevent damage to the
casing bore and to the end of the shaft.
1. Support the rotating assembly using suitable soft slings attached to suitable lifting
equipment. Take care to minimise the stress on the shaft by placing the slings as close
to the impeller as possible.
2. Insert the rotating assembly carefully into the volute casing. Prevent damage by
guiding the shaft by hand and ensuring that the shaft passes smoothly through the DE
Section 3.7 Page 12


casing bore and that the impeller locates correctly in the DE case wear ring. Support
the shaft end if the slings have to be re-positioned.
3. Fit new gaskets to the NDE casing cover.
4. Fit a suitable eyebolt into the tapped hole in the top of the NDE casing cover. Attach a
suitable sling and shackles to the eyebolt and to suitable lifting equipment. Adjust the
lifting equipment to just support the weight of the cover.
CAUTION
During installation of the NDE casing cover over the shaft and onto the volute
casing, guide the casing cover carefully to prevent damage to the casing bore, to
the case wear ring in the cover, and to the pump shaft. Support the rotating
assembly as necessary to prevent damage to the casing bore, to the case wear ring
in the cover, and to the pump shaft.
5. Lift the NDE casing cover, complete with case wear ring and integral bearing bracket,
over the NDE of the shaft, over the mounting studs and into position on the volute
casing. Ensure that the case wear ring locates correctly over the impeller. Raise the
end of the shaft slightly until the cover is in position.
6. Check for metal-to-metal contact around the circumference of the casing cover joint.
CAUTION
After rotating assembly installation, turn the shaft manually and check that the
rotating element rotates freely.
7. Fit the washers and nuts to the casing cover mounting studs. Refer to Section 3.12 -
Torque Tightening of Fasteners and tighten the nuts evenly to the correct torque
value, using the tightening sequence depicted, to secure the casing cover in place.
Remove the lifting equipment.
8. Re-check the rotating assembly for freedom of rotation.
9. Check total axial movement of the rotating element in the volute casing as detailed
below. It should be no less than the amount recorded during dismantling to indicate
non-binding of the element (typically a minimum of 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) end play).
i. Mount a dial indicator to a suitable fixed point with the indicator tip in contact with
the shaft end.
ii. Push the shaft as far as it will go towards the DE. Set the dial indicator to zero.
iii. Move the shaft as far as it will go towards the NDE and note the indicator reading.
iv. Push the shaft back towards the DE by half of the total indicator reading to set the
shaft in the centre position. Remove the dial indicator.
10. Refer to Section 3.10 - Mechanical Seals and to Section 3.9 - Bearing Assemblies
and refit the mechanical seal cartridges, bearings and bearing housings and reconnect
pipework as required.
Section 3.7 Page 13

Document No: Drive Cplg 03

Section 3.8 Pump - Drive Coupling Revision: 2
Revision Date: 11 Aug 2004
3.8 Drive Coupling

pumpset equipment.
3.8.1 Scope
Directions for removal and installation of the drive-coupling spacer, and for removal and
installation of the pump-half coupling hub (taper pump shaft - hydraulic fit using two
pumps).
3.8.2 Preparation
assembly sequence.
available. This includes any required measuring devices and torque wrenches.
the manual.
Refer to Torque Tightening of Fasteners for information on standard torque tightening

procedures and values.
Section 3.8 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.08 Drive Cplg 03-2.doc

3.8.3 Coupling Spacer
a Hazardous Area, failure to install the coupling spacer(s) and coupling guard(s)
correctly in accordance with manufacturers information MAY invalidate the
Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump
Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area Operation for specific information on the
Hazardous Area Classification assigned to the pumpset equipment.
- Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and also to the coupling manufacturers information
and drawings, supplied either as an insert to this manual or by others.
3.8.3.1 Removal
1. Remove the coupling guards. Check the coupling for match-marking on the spacer
and hubs, create marks if none exist.
Note: The marks ensure that correct balance is maintained on re-assembly.
2. Refer to the documentation detailed above, and remove the coupling spacer.
REMOVAL OF COUPLING SPACER
3.8.3.2 Fit
CAUTION
Ensure that the pump-half coupling hub has been refitted and that coupling
alignment has been checked before fitting the coupling spacer.
1. Check for match-marking on the coupling spacer and coupling hubs.

2. Refer to the documentation detailed above, and refit the coupling spacer.
3. Refit the coupling guards.
Section 3.8 Page 2


3.8.4 Pump-Half Coupling Hub
a Hazardous Area, failure to install the coupling hub correctly in accordance with
manufacturers information MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and
MUST be avoided. Refer to Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data, 1.3.2 - Hazardous Area
Refer to the Longitudinal Section drawing, and to the appropriate Coupling Hub Assembly /
Withdrawal Equipment Arrangement drawing in Section 1 - Leading Particulars, Section
1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and also to the coupling manufacturers
information and drawings, supplied either as an insert to this manual or by others.
Note: The actual title of the supplied arrangement drawing for the coupling hub assembly
and withdrawal equipment may vary.
3.8.4.1 Removal
Incorrect removal of the pump-half coupling hub is potentially EXTREMELY

DANGEROUS. The following fitting procedure MUST be followed precisely, and the
work MUST be carried out by experienced and competent maintenance personnel. If
in doubt, please contact Sulzer for advice.
Refer to the supplied arrangement drawing for the coupling hub assembly and
withdrawal equipment for specific EXPECTED (DESIGN) and MAXIMUM expansion
pressures and EXPECTED (DESIGN) and MAXIMUM advancing pressures before
starting the removal procedure for the pump-half coupling hub.
Note: It is assumed that all appropriate items of maintenance described in Section 3.6.3 -
General Overhaul Information and Advice have been completed.
The coupling hub is removed by applying expansion hydraulic pressure to the coupling hub
using one hydraulic pump, and controlling the movement of the hub off the shaft taper
using the other hydraulic pump.
CAUTION
When a shaft nut / coupling locknut is fitted, check the thread direction (right or left
hand) before loosening the nut.
1. When a shaft nut / coupling locknut is fitted to the DE of the shaft, remove the locking
grub screws and then unscrew and remove the shaft nut / coupling locknut.
2. Remove the match-weighed plugs from the coupling hub hydraulic connections and fit
the air release plug to one connection.
Ensure that the coupling assembly equipment is correctly and securely attached to
the pump shaft and is fully tightened before attempting to expand the coupling hub -
injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result should the hub release
suddenly.
3. Turn the shaft to position the coupling hub air release plug at the top. Fit the coupling
withdrawal equipment to the end of the shaft as shown on the supplied arrangement
drawing. Ensure that the minimum gap detailed on the arrangement drawing is
available between the load cell parts
Section 3.8 Page 3


4. Connect the higher pressure hydraulic pump to the coupling hub (expansion pump),
and connect the lower pressure hydraulic pump (advancing pump) to the load cell, as
shown on the supplied arrangement drawing.
5. Close the non-return valve on the hydraulic pump connected to the load cell.
Always apply hydraulic pressure SLOWLY.
The specified EXPECTED (DESIGN) expansion and advancing pressures are

calculated values that should be sufficient to produce the required movement.
However, if the required movement is not achieved, pressures CAN be increased as
necessary UP TO the specified MAXIMUM values. DO NOT EXCEED the maximum
pressure limits specified on the supplied arrangement drawing for the coupling hub
assembly and withdrawal equipment. Contact Sulzer if maximum pressure is
exceeded, or if use of the maximum pressure fails to achieve the required
movement.
6. Open the air release plug in the coupling hub and operate the expansion pump slowly
to fill the hub. When air-free oil flow is obtained through the air release plug, close the
air release plug.
7. Using the expansion pump, slowly raise hydraulic expansion pressure until it reaches
EXPECTED EXPANSION PRESSURE. Hold this pressure for 30 minutes or until the
coupling pops free.
If there is no movement of the coupling, slowly raise expansion pressure to MAXIMUM
EXPANSION PRESSURE and hold for 30 minutes, or until the coupling hub pops
free.
Note: If the coupling hub pops free, the load cell will compress slightly, and the advancing
pressure on the advancing pump gauge will increase slightly.
8. If the coupling hub has not moved after a reasonable interval of time (30 minutes)
strike the back face of the coupling, as close to the shaft as possible, with a soft mallet.
Do not stand in front of the shaft end when striking the hub. Be sure that the
coupling hub is restrained by the withdrawal equipment as it will release suddenly.
9. When the coupling moves, advancing pressure in the load cell piston chambers will
rise; this is indicated on the gauge of the advancing pump. Release this pressure
SLOWLY by opening the non-return valve on the advancing pump. This will allow the
hub to move off the taper.
10. When the load cell is completely compressed, release the expansion pressure and
open the non-return valve on the expansion pump. The coupling should now be free of
the shaft.
11. Remove the dismantling equipment and remove the coupling hub.
Section 3.8 Page 4


3.8.4.2 Fit
Incorrect fitting of the pump-half coupling hub is potentially EXTREMELY

DANGEROUS. The following fitting procedure MUST be followed precisely, and the
work MUST be carried out by experienced and competent maintenance personnel. If
in doubt, please contact Sulzer for advice.
Refer to the supplied arrangement drawing for the coupling hub assembly and
withdrawal equipment for specific EXPECTED (DESIGN) and MAXIMUM expansion
pressures and EXPECTED (DESIGN) and MAXIMUM advancing pressures before
starting the fitting procedure for the pump-half coupling hub.
Note: It is assumed that all appropriate items of maintenance described in Section 3.6.3 -
General Overhaul Information and Advice have been completed.
The coupling hub is fitted by applying expansion hydraulic pressure to the coupling hub
using one hydraulic pump, and advancing the hub on to the shaft taper using the other
hydraulic pump.
1. Remove the O-ring seals from the coupling hub and the shaft taper.
2. Ensure that the coupling bore has a lead-in radius at the larger end of the taper bore,
as indicated on the arrangement drawing, and that sharp corners and burrs are
removed from the small end of the shaft and hub tapers.
3. Clean the shaft and coupling bore tapers.
4. Remove the match-weighed plugs from the coupling hub hydraulic connections and fit
the air release plug to one connection.
5. Check the fit of the coupling on the taper, by positioning the coupling hub on the shaft
taper by hand. Check for high spots with engineers blue on fit areas, and clean if
necessary.
The coupling to shaft fit should have as a minimum 90% blue.
6. Fit the coupling onto the shaft by hand with the air release plug positioned at the top
and push the coupling onto the shaft taper, as far as it will go. Determine and record its
position relative to the nearest datum face (dimension A on the supplied arrangement
drawing for the coupling hub assembly and withdrawal equipment) with slip gauges.
7. After checking the coupling fit and obtaining dimension A, remove the coupling hub
from the shaft.
8. Calculate dimension C, according to the formula detailed on the supplied
arrangement drawing.
9. Clean the coupling bore and shaft taper thoroughly and then coat lightly with hydraulic
oil.
CAUTION
Use only light machine oil or hydraulic oil around any hydraulic fit. NEVER use
grease.
10. Lubricate the new O-ring seals with hydraulic oil and install them into position on the
coupling hub and onto the shaft taper.
Section 3.8 Page 5


11. Refit the coupling squarely onto the shaft and push it on by hand as far as it will go.
Ensure that the air release plug is at the top.
12. Install the coupling assembly equipment to the end of the shaft, as shown on the
supplied arrangement drawing and ensure that the ram is truly square to the coupling
face to ensure there is no cocking of the hub.
Ensure that the coupling assembly equipment is correctly and securely attached to
the pump shaft and is fully tightened before attempting to expand the coupling hub -
injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result should the hub release
suddenly.
13. Connect the higher pressure hydraulic pump to the coupling hub (expansion pump),
and connect the lower pressure hydraulic pump (advancing pump) to the load cell, as
shown on the supplied arrangement drawing.
Always apply hydraulic pressure SLOWLY.
The specified EXPECTED (DESIGN) expansion and advancing pressures are

calculated values that should be sufficient to produce the required movement.
However, if the required movement is not achieved, pressures CAN be increased as
necessary UP TO the specified MAXIMUM values. DO NOT EXCEED the maximum
pressure limits specified on the supplied arrangement drawing for the coupling hub
assembly and withdrawal equipment. Contact Sulzer if maximum pressure is
exceeded, or if use of the maximum pressure fails to achieve the required
movement.
14. Open the air release plug in the coupling hub and operate the expansion pump slowly
to fill the hub. When air-free oil flow is obtained through the air release plug, close the
air release plug.
15. Using the advancing pump, apply an initial advancing pressure of 34 bar, 500 lbf/in2 to
the load cell. Use callipers at dimension A to check that the coupling is being pushed
on to the shaft squarely.
16. Using the expansion pump, apply pressure slowly to the coupling hub, increasing
pressure slowly up to approximately HALF OF THE EXPECTED EXPANSION
PRESSURE. Observe movement of the coupling hub using the callipers AND a dial
indicator.
CAUTION
The callipers and DTI are used for showing relative movement only.
Dimension C must be used to determine the final axial position of the hub.
Note: If the expansion pressure cannot be maintained due to leakage from the O-ring
seals, increase advancing pressure sufficiently to maintain a seal.
During the following procedure, ensure that expansion pressure does not exceed
the MAXIMUM specified value.
17. With expansion pressure established and stable at HALF OF THE EXPECTED
EXPANSION PRESSURE, slowly increase advancing pressure in 500 lbf/in2
increments. Observe movement of the coupling hub with the callipers, and an
automatic increase in the expansion pressure at the gauge on the expansion pump,
until the coupling hub is in the correct position (indicated by measuring dimension C
with slip gauges).
Section 3.8 Page 6


Note: An INCREASE in advancing pressure moves the coupling hub ONTO the shaft
taper and automatically increases expansion pressure. If advancing pressure is
REDUCED, the expansion pressure across the taper moves the coupling hub OFF the
shaft.
18. Check dimension C.

19. If dimension C is correct, slowly release expansion pressure and then re-check
dimension C.
20. When the expansion pressure is fully released, remove the hose and air release plug,
but LEAVE THE ADVANCING RAM PRESSURISED FOR AT LEAST TWO HOURS
to permit oil to flow completely from the clearance space in the coupling hub fit.
CAUTION
Failure to leave the advancing ram pressurised for at least two hours will require re-
assembly and could damage the coupling/shaft tapers.
21. Check dimension C with slip gauges.

22. Remove the rest of the coupling assembly / withdrawal equipment.
23. Observe any movement of the coupling hub using the dial indicator. If the hub moves
OFF the taper by more than 0.05 mm:
i. record the actual movement.
ii. repeat steps 12 to 23, but subtract the value recorded at (i) above from dimension
C.
CAUTION
When a shaft nut / coupling locknut is used, check the thread direction (right or left
hand) before fitting and tightening the nut.
24. When a shaft nut / coupling locknut is fitted to the DE of the shaft, refit the shaft nut /
coupling locknut and tighten it up to the coupling hub. Refit and tighten the locking
grub screws through the nut into the tapped holes in the coupling hub to secure the
shaft nut / coupling locknut in place.
25. Refit the two match-weighed blanking plugs in the hydraulic connections in the
coupling hub, secured with LOCTITE 222, or equivalent.
Section 3.8 Page 7

Document No: Bearings 04

Section 3.9 Pump - Bearings - Multi-Lobe / JHJ9 Revision: 0
Tilting Pad Revision Date: 15 Jan 2008
3.9 Bearings
pumpset equipment.
3.9.1 Scope
Directions for dismantling, inspection and assembly of the pump DE and NDE Multi Lobe
journal / JHJ-9 Tilting Pad thrust bearings.
3.9.2 Preparation
assembly sequence.
available. This includes any required measuring devices and torque wrenches.
the manual.

Section 3.9 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.09 Bearings 04-0.doc

3.9.3 DE Bearing Assembly
a Hazardous Area, the following conditions during DE and NDE pump bearing
maintenance procedures MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area classification and
MUST be avoided:
failure to maintain bearing assemblies correctly in accordance with this
procedure and with any applicable manufacturers information
either in Section 1.3 - Pump Unit Data or in this procedure
failure to connect instrument cables correctly in accordance with
manufacturers information and current regulations
failure to maintain / install the mechanical seal assemblies correctly in
failure to install the coupling spacer(s) and coupling guard(s) correctly in
3.9.3.1 Dismantling
Note: It is assumed that all appropriate items of maintenance described in Section 3.6 -
Maintenance, General Overhaul Information and Advice have been completed.
1. Refer to Section 3.8 - Drive Coupling and remove the coupling spacer and the pump-
half coupling hub.
2. Disconnect and remove the instrumentation from the bearing housing, and store in a
safe place.
3. Drain any remaining oil from the bearing housing into a suitable container.
4. Carefully disconnect and remove auxiliary pipework from the bearing housing. Plug
pipework ends to prevent ingress of dirt.
5. If deflectors are fitted, loosen the setscrews securing inboard and outboard deflectors
to the pump shaft.
6. Remove the taper pins / dowel pins from the joint flanges of the bearing housing
halves.
7. Remove the screws securing the top half of the bearing housing to the bottom half.
Section 3.9 Page 2


8. Remove the plug and fit an eyebolt to the top of the bearing housing top half. Attach a
suitable sling to the eyebolt and to suitable lifting equipment. Lift the bearing housing
top half carefully away from the bottom half and lower it onto a flat surface, padded
with cloth to protect the machined surface. Remove the lifting equipment.
Note: If temperature detector wires are fitted, they must be guided carefully as the bearing
housing top half is removed.
9. Remove the socket headed screws securing the journal bearing top half to the bottom
half. Verify match-marks for re-assembly, and then remove the top half.
10. If thermocouple probes are fitted, remove them before removing the journal bearing
bottom half.
11. Lift the shaft slightly (maximum 0.004 inches, 0.1 mm) using a suitable piece of
wood, then rotate the journal bearing bottom half around the shaft and remove it.
Lower the shaft.
12. Fit two suitable eyebolts to the bearing housing bottom half, one on each side using
suitable tapped screw holes in the joint flange. Attach a suitable sling to the eyebolts
and to suitable lifting equipment. Remove the taper pins / dowel pins and screws
securing the bearing housing bottom half to the volute case and lower the housing
carefully onto a flat surface, padded with cloth to protect the machined surface.
13. Remove the outboard Inpro seal / deflector (complete with carrier ring when
applicable), from the shaft.
14. Remove the inboard Inpro seal / deflector (complete with carrier ring when applicable),
from the shaft.
15. If deflectors were fitted, dress off any burrs caused by the deflector set screws.
3.9.3.2 Examination of Bearings

Visually inspect the journal bearing surfaces for excessive scoring and heat damage.
Check the wear pattern on the running surfaces, the bearings and the shaft. Renew the
bearings if excessive wear or damage is present.
Bearing Housing
Check bearing housing fits, filing off any interference points. Remove old sealant from
housing flanges.
3.9.3.3 Assembly
CAUTION
A replacement bearing housing, or any re-work to the case parting flange or internal
bore, requires that the rotating element radial centre position be determined in order
to establish the correct bearing housing position. In these cases, refer to Section
3.9.5 - Rotating Element Radial Centring BEFORE re-assembling bearing housings.
Note: Ensure that the DE mechanical seal is installed before re-assembling the DE bearing
assembly.
1. Slide the inboard Inpro seal / deflector (complete with carrier ring when applicable), as
far as possible onto the shaft.
Section 3.9 Page 3


2. Slide the outboard Inpro seal / deflector (complete with carrier ring when applicable),
onto the shaft, into the approximate fitted position.
and to suitable lifting equipment. Lift the bearing housing bottom half into position on
the volute case, ensuring that it engages correctly over the inboard and outboard Inpro
seals / deflectors (or the carrier rings when applicable). Where a carrier ring is used,
ensure that the carrier ring anti-rotation pins engage correctly in the recesses in the
housing flanges.
4. Insert the taper pins / dowel pins through the bearing housing bottom half, into the
volute casing to position the housing. Fit the mounting screws and tighten them evenly
to secure the housing in place. Remove the lifting equipment.
CAUTION
Check taper pins / dowel pins for proper fit and seating (not "bottoming") before
tightening the screws. Incorrect seating affects rotating element radial centring.
Refer to Section 3.9.5 - Rotating Element Radial Centring.
5. Wipe clean and then generously lubricate the babbit surface of the journal bearing
bottom half and the shaft bearing surface.
6. Raise the shaft slightly (maximum 0.004 inches, 0.1 mm) using a suitable piece of
wood and fit the bearing half. Lower the shaft.
7. Wipe clean and then generously lubricate the babbit surface of the journal bearing top
half and the shaft bearing surface.
8. Fit the journal bearing top half, aligning match-marks, and fit and tighten the socket
head screws to secure the two halves together.
9. Rotate the journal bearing as necessary to enable the anti-rotation pin in the journal
bearing shell to enter the locating hole in the bearing housing.
10. Apply a thin coating of room temperature vulcanising (RTV) silicone sealer to the
machined horizontal mating surface of the bottom half bearing housing.
top half carefully into position on the housing bottom half, ensuring that it engages
correctly over the inboard and outboard Inpro seals / deflectors (or the carrier rings
when applicable) and the journal bearing anti-rotation pin.
12. Insert the taper pins / dowel pins through the flange joint between bearing housing
halves to position the bearing housing top half. Fit the mounting screws and tighten
them evenly to secure the housing top half in place. Remove the lifting equipment.
Where taper pins are used, release the taper pins between the bearing housing halves
but allow the pins to remain loose in place.
13. If deflectors are fitted, position the inboard and outboard deflectors to provide a 0.02
inches (0.5 mm) clearance from the bearing housing and tighten the setscrews to
secure the deflectors in place.
14. Refit auxiliary pipework and refit and connect instrumentation as appropriate.
CAUTION
After both bearing assemblies have been fitted, turn the shaft manually and check
that the rotating element rotates freely. Refer to Section 3.9.4 - NDE Bearing
Assembly, Thrust Bearing Axial Clearance Check and Adjustment, and check the
clearance remains correct.
Section 3.9 Page 4


15. When DE and NDE bearing assemblies are installed, refer to Section 3.10 -
Mechanical Seals if appropriate and complete the installation of the DE and NDE
mechanical seals as required.
16. Refer to Section 3.8 - Drive Coupling and refit the pump-half coupling hub and
coupling spacer as required.
Section 3.9 Page 5


3.9.4 NDE Bearing Assembly
MUST be avoided:
failure to connect instrument cables correctly in accordance with
manufacturers information and current regulations
failure to install the coupling spacer(s) and coupling guard(s) correctly in
3.9.4.1 Dismantling
Note: It is assumed that all appropriate items of maintenance described in Section 3.6 -
Maintenance, General Overhaul Information and Advice have been completed.
1. Refer to Section 3.8 Drive Coupling and remove the coupling spacer.
2. Disconnect and remove the instrumentation from the bearing housing, and store in a
safe place.
3. Drain any remaining oil from the bearing housing into a suitable container.
4. Carefully disconnect and remove auxiliary pipework from the bearing housing. Plug
5. If a deflector is fitted, loosen the setscrews securing the inboard deflector to the pump
shaft.
6. When a shaft driven lube oil pump is fitted to the NDE of the pump shaft, remove
the shaft driven lube oil pump including oil pump-half drive coupling.
7. Loosen the screws securing the bearing end cover. Remove only those screws that
locate in the top half of the thrust bearing housing.
halves.
Section 3.9 Page 6


9. Remove the screws securing the top half of the bearing housing to the bottom half.
top half carefully away from the bottom half and lower it onto a flat surface, padded
with cloth to protect the machined surface. Remove the lifting equipment.
Note: If temperature detector wires are fitted, they must be guided carefully as the bearing
housing top half is removed.
11. Remove the exposed inboard and outboard thrust bearing pads. Rotate the thrust pad
carrier rings (cages) to remove the remaining pads.
Note: Wrap each pad individually in soft material to protect the babbit face. RTD-equipped
pads must be returned to their original position on re-assembly.
12. For the inboard and the outboard split carrier rings in turn, rotate the carrier ring so that
the split line aligns with the bearing housing joint flange, and then lift off the carrier ring
top half. Rotate the carrier ring bottom half out of the bearing housing. Ensure that
matched halves are kept together.
13. Remove the remaining screws from the bearing end cover. Remove the cover,
complete with 0-ring seal(s) and shim arrangement. The bearing end cover has a
thrust bearing shim plate screwed to the inboard face to abut against the outboard
faces of the outboard thrust pads.
14. When a shaft driven lube oil pump is fitted to the NDE of the pump shaft, remove
the lube oil pump drive coupling components from the main pump shaft and remove
the key.
15. Loosen the locking screw, and then unscrew and remove the bearing nut. Dress off
any burrs.
16. Remove the rotating thrust collar and key.
17. Slide the adjusting piece / spacer sleeve off the shaft.
18. Remove the socket headed screws securing the journal bearing top half to the bottom
half. Verify match-marks for re-assembly, and then remove the top half.
19. If thermocouple probes are fitted, remove them before removing the journal bearing
bottom half.
20. Lift the shaft slightly (maximum 0.004 inches, 0.1 mm) using a suitable piece of
wood, then rotate the journal bearing bottom half around the shaft and remove it.
Lower the shaft.
and to suitable lifting equipment. Remove the taper pins / dowel pins and screws
securing the bearing housing bottom half to the volute case and lower the housing
carefully onto a flat surface, padded with cloth to protect the machined surface.
22. Remove the seal ring.
23. Remove the inboard Inpro seal / deflector (complete with carrier ring when applicable),
from the shaft.
24. If deflectors were fitted, dress off any burrs caused by the deflector set screws.
Section 3.9 Page 7


3.9.4.2 Examination of Bearings

Thrust Bearings
Inspect every thrust bearing pad. Renew pads if they show extreme wear, scratches, or
any 'smearing' of the babbitt lining. New and used pads should not be mixed. If a pad must
be renewed, renew all pads on that side of the bearing.
CAUTION Prevent damage to the thrust collar bore and bearing surfaces.
Inspect both faces of the thrust bearing collar. The running surfaces should be smooth.
Replacement is generally recommended, but a rough surface can be ground or lapped if
proper equipment is available.
Grinding or lapping the collar will affect pump end-play movement. Refer to the assembly
instructions for the thrust bearing.
Check the run-out of a re-worked collar after it is refitted to the shaft.
The maximum allowed TIR for pump operating speeds UP TO 3600 rev/min is 0.001
inches (0.025 mm). For pump operating speeds ABOVE 3600 rev/min, the maximum
allowed runout is 0.0005 inches (0.013 mm).
Journal bearings
Visually inspect the journal bearing surfaces for excessive scoring and heat damage.
Check the wear pattern on the running surfaces, the bearings and the shaft. Renew the
bearings if excessive wear or damage is present.
Bearing Housings
Check bearing housing fits, filing off any interference points. Remove old sealant from
housing flanges.
3.9.4.3 Assembly
CAUTION
A replacement bearing housing, or any re-work to the case parting flange or internal
bore, requires that the rotating element radial centre position be determined in order
to establish the correct bearing housing position. In these cases, refer to Section
3.9.5 - Rotating Element Radial Centring BEFORE re-assembling bearing housings.
Note: Ensure that the NDE mechanical seal is installed before re-assembling the NDE
bearing assembly.
1. Slide the inboard Inpro seal / deflector (complete with carrier ring when applicable), as
far as possible onto the shaft.
2. Slide the seal ring into position on the shaft, into the approximate fitted position.
and to suitable lifting equipment. Lift the bearing housing bottom half into position on
the volute case, ensuring that it engages correctly over the Inpro seal / deflector (or the
carrier ring when applicable). Ensure that the carrier ring (when applicable) and seal
ring anti-rotation pins engage correctly in the recesses in the housing flanges.
4. Insert the taper pins / dowel pins through the bearing housing bottom half, into the
volute casing to position the housing. Fit the mounting screws and tighten them evenly
to secure the housing in place. Remove the lifting equipment.
Section 3.9 Page 8


Check taper pins / dowel pins for proper fit and seating (not "bottoming") before
CAUTION
tightening the screws. Incorrect seating affects rotating element radial centring.
Refer to Section 3.9.5 - Rotating Element Radial Centring.
5. Wipe clean and then generously lubricate the babbit surface of the journal bearing
bottom half and the shaft bearing surface.
6. Raise the shaft slightly (maximum 0.004 inches, 0.1 mm) using a suitable piece of
wood and fit the bearing half. Lower the shaft.
7. Wipe clean and then generously lubricate the babbit surface of the journal bearing top
half and the shaft bearing surface.
8. Fit the journal bearing top half, aligning match-marks, and fit and tighten the socket
head screws to secure the two halves together.
9. Rotate the journal bearing as necessary to enable the anti-rotation pin in the journal
bearing shell to enter the locating hole in the bearing housing.
Rotor Axial Position - Check and Adjustment

10. Mount a dial indicator on the NDE bearing housing, with the indicator tip in contact with
the end of the shaft.
11. Push the shaft as far as it will go towards the drive end, then set the indicator to zero.
12. Push the shaft as far as it will go towards the non-drive end and note the reading on
the dial indicator.
13. Move the shaft to the centre position, i.e. one-half of the total reading.
14. Refer to the illustration, below. Fit the rotating thrust collar and bearing nut temporarily
at the NDE of the shaft.
Thrust Plate
Bearing Nut
Rotor Axial Positioning - Typical
15. Hand-tighten the bearing nut to adjust the distance A between the thrust collar inner
face and the internal face of the bearing housing inboard flange to the correct value as
shown below:
Kingsbury Code Size Distance A (inches) Distance A (mm)

JHJ-9 / JJ-9 3.0 76.2
Section 3.9 Page 9


16. Using feeler gauges, measure the gap between the thrust collar face and the shoulder
of the shaft B. Record this measurement - this is the required thickness of the
adjusting piece / spacer sleeve.
17. If the thickness of the original adjusting piece / spacer sleeve is not correct, a new
sleeve must be machined to within 0.010 inches (0.25 mm) of the required thickness.
Ground surfaces must be parallel within 0.005 inches (0.013 mm).
18. Remove the bearing nut and the rotating thrust collar from the NDE of the shaft.
NDE Bearing Assembly - Continuation (1)
19. Fit the adjusting piece / spacer sleeve of the correct thickness into place on the shaft
up to the shoulder.
20. Fit the key to the shaft and fit the thrust collar onto the shaft over the key and up to the
adjusting piece / spacer sleeve.
21. Fit the bearing nut onto the shaft up to the thrust collar. Tighten the bearing nut to the
correct torque value, as detailed in the table, below. Tighten the locking screw to
secure the bearing nut in place.
Kingsbury Code Size Bearing Nut Torque (lbf.ft) Bearing Nut Torque (Nm)
JHJ-9 / JJ-9 150 203
22. Check the runout of the inboard and outboard faces of the rotating thrust collar after
the locknut has been tightened to the correct torque. For pump operating speeds UP
TO 3600 rev/min, the maximum allowed runout is 0.001 inches (0.025 mm). For
pump operating speeds ABOVE 3600 rev/min, the maximum allowed runout is 0.0005
inches (0.013 mm).
Note: To check runout, mount two dial indicators to read collar position 180 apart on one
face of the collar. Rotate the shaft in four 90 turns, recording both dial indicator readings
at each stop. The runout is the difference of the two readings at each 90 stop. Repeat the
checks for the other face of the collar.
23. Fit the inboard carrier ring bottom half over the shaft. The bottom half has no drive key.
Rotate the carrier ring half into the bearing housing lower half.
Note: The thrust bearing pads must be lubricated before installation. Return RTD-equipped
pads to their original positions.
24. Fit the bottom thrust pads into the carrier ring. Rotate the carrier ring, complete with
thrust pads, to align the split line with the bearing housing flange.
25. Fit the inboard carrier ring top half into position on the bottom half. Ensure that
26. Fit the top thrust pads into the carrier ring. Rotate the complete carrier ring, complete
with thrust pads, to position the drive key at the top.
Thrust Bearing Axial Clearance Check and Adjustment
To allow clearance for the necessary formation of oil films on bearing surfaces, and for
heat expansion, it is necessary to provide an axial clearance between the thrust collar and
the thrust bearing pads. The clearance is the distance that the thrust collar can be moved
between the inboard and outboard bearing pad surfaces. The measurement, and any
necessary adjustment, is done during installation, without applying load to bearings.
CAUTION Bearing clearance must be checked before operation of the pump.
Section 3.9 Page 10


27. Temporarily fit the bearing end cover, complete with thrust bearing shim plate. Secure
the cover to the bottom half of the bearing housing with socket head screws inserted
finger-tight only.
28. Fit the outboard carrier ring bottom half over the shaft. The bottom half has no drive
key. Rotate the carrier ring half into the bearing housing lower half.
Bearing
End Cover
Shim Plate
Thrust Bearing Axial Clearance Check - Typical
Note: The thrust bearing pads must be lubricated before installation. Return RTD-
equipped pads to their original positions.
29. Fit the bottom thrust pads into the carrier ring. Rotate the carrier ring, complete with
thrust pads, to align the split line with the bearing housing flange.
30. Fit the outboard carrier ring top half into position on the bottom half. Ensure that
31. Ensure that the inboard and outboard thrust bearing carrier rings are positioned
correctly with drive keys at the top and that the anti-rotation pin in the journal bearing
shell top half is positioned correctly to enter the locating hole in the top half of the
bearing housing. Any mis-alignment will interfere with the installation of the top half of
the bearing housing.
top half carefully into position temporarily on the housing bottom half, ensuring that it
engages correctly over the Inpro seal / deflector (or the carrier ring when applicable),
over the seal ring, over the inboard and outboard thrust bearing carrier ring drive keys
and the journal bearing anti-rotation pin.
them evenly to secure the housing top half in place.
34. Fit the remaining screws to secure the bearing end cover to the bearing housing
halves. Tighten all bearing end cover screws securely.
35. Mount a dial indicator on the drive end bearing housing, with the indicator tip in contact
with the shaft end. Push the shaft as far as it will go towards the NDE and hold it in
place. Set the dial indicator to zero.
Section 3.9 Page 11


36. Now push the shaft towards the DE as far as it will go and record the dial indicator
reading. Compare the reading with the required thrust bearing axial clearance value
detailed in the table, below.
Kingsbury Code Size Thrust Bearing Axial Thrust Bearing Axial
Clearance (inches) Clearance (mm)
JHJ-9 / JJ-9 0.015 - 0.017 0.39 - 0.44
37. If the indicator reading (bearing axial clearance) is too large, adjust by removing
the bearing end cover and adding the appropriate thickness of shims between the
bearing end cover and the thrust bearing shim plate.
If the indicator reading (bearing axial clearance) is too small, adjust by removing
the bearing end cover and removing the appropriate thickness of shims from between
the bearing end cover and the thrust bearing shim plate. If there are no more shims to
remove to correct the clearance, grind the thrust bearing shim plate to the required
thickness. Ground surfaces must be parallel within 0.002 inches (0.05 mm).
38. After adjustment, refit the bearing end cover with the correct thickness of shimming
and repeat steps 35 to 37 above to re-check the available bearing clearance.
NDE Bearing Assembly - Continuation (2)

39. Remove the bearing end cover, complete with thrust bearing shimming.
halves and remove the screws securing the top half of the bearing housing to the
bottom half. Lift the bearing housing top half carefully away from the bottom half.
41. Apply a thin coating of room temperature vulcanising (RTV) silicone sealer to the
machined horizontal mating surface of the bottom half bearing housing.
42. Lower the bearing housing top half carefully into position on the housing bottom half,
ensuring that it engages correctly over the Inpro seal / deflector (or the carrier ring
when applicable), over the seal ring, over the inboard and outboard thrust bearing
carrier ring drive keys and the journal bearing anti-rotation pin.
them evenly to secure the housing top half in place. Remove the lifting equipment.
Where taper pins are used, release the taper pins between the bearing housing halves
but allow the pins to remain loose in place.
44. When a shaft driven lube oil pump is fitted to the NDE of the pump shaft, fit the
key and fit the pump-half and the connecting piece of the lube oil pump coupling to the
pump shaft.
45. Fit new O-ring seal(s) to the bearing end cover. Lubricate the O-ring sealing surfaces,
then push the cover, complete with shim arrangement, into the bearing housing,
aligning the screw holes. Fit the cover securing screws and tighten them evenly to
secure the cover in place.
46. When a shaft driven lube oil pump is fitted to the NDE of the pump shaft, apply
silicone sealant to the mounting flange of the shaft driven lube oil pump and to the
mounting flange on the bearing end cover. Fit the shaft driven lube oil pump to the
bearing end cover, ensuring that the oil pump drive coupling half engages correctly in
the connecting piece.
Section 3.9 Page 12


47. If a deflector is fitted, position the inboard deflector to provide a 0.02 inches (0.5 mm)
clearance from the bearing housing and tighten the setscrews to secure the deflector
in place.
48. Refit auxiliary pipework and refit and connect instrumentation as appropriate.
CAUTION
After both bearing assemblies have been fitted, turn the shaft manually and check
that the rotating element rotates freely. Refer to Thrust Bearing Axial Clearance
Check and Adjustment, above, and check the clearance remains correct.
49. When DE and NDE bearing assemblies are installed, refer to Section 3.10 -
Mechanical Seals if appropriate and complete the installation of the DE and NDE
mechanical seals as required.
50. Refer to Section 3.8 - Drive Coupling and refit the pump-half coupling hub and
coupling spacer as required.
Section 3.9 Page 13


3.9.5 Rotating Element Radial Centring
MUST be avoided:
equipment.
A replacement bearing housing requires that the rotating element radial centre position be
determined and adjusted as required in order to establish the correct bearing housing
position.
Any re-work to the case parting flange or internal bore requires radial re-centring of the
rotating element.
CAUTION
Improper bearing housing to casing dowel pin seating, and re-work to the case
parting flange or internal bore can affect rotating element radial centring. An off-
centre element can cause damage.
1. Remove the DE and NDE bearings, bearing housings and mechanical seals.
2. Re-install only the DE and NDE bearing housing lower halves and the sleeve bearing
assemblies.
Note: A telescopic gauge or dial indicator is recommended for measurement accuracy.

3. Begin the measurement and adjustment procedure at either the DE or NDE end. Both
ends must be within centring specification before dowel holes are drilled.
0
Pump
Shaft
a Stuffing Box
Inner Diameter
270 d b 90
180
Section 3.9 Page 14

4. Refer to the illustration, above. Make four measurements (a, b, c and d) at 90

intervals, in each case measuring the distance from the shaft outer diameter to the
stuffing box inner diameter. Do not make any measurements directly on casing split
lines.
5. Adjust the position of the bearing housing as necessary until the four measurements
(a, b, c and d) are equal to within 0.001 in. (0.025 mm).
6. Tighten the bearing housing mounting screws and re-check the four measurements.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 as necessary if measurements are outside the specified
tolerance.
7. Repeat steps 4, 5 and 6 for the other end of the pump.
8. When the DE and NDE bearing housings are both within the centring specification,
either ream existing dowel pin holes (if practical) or drill and ream new dowel pin holes.
Fit the dowel pins.
9. Repeat step 4 for the DE and NDE of the pump. If measurements are outside the
specified tolerance, repeat steps 5 to 9 as necessary.
10. Remove the bearing housings and sleeve bearings. Refer to the appropriate sections
and refit the DE and NDE mechanical seals and bearing assemblies.
Section 3.9 Page 15

Document No: MSeal 01

Section 3.10 Pump - Mechanical Seals Revision: 3
Revision Date: 05 Jan 2005
3.10 Mechanical Seals

pumpset equipment.
equipment.
3.10.1 Scope
Directions for dismantling and assembly of the pump DE and NDE mechanical seals.
3.10.2 Preparation
assembly sequence.
available. This includes any required measuring devices and torque wrenches. Also, have
suitable spare parts (i.e. seal faces, bolts etc.) available.
the manual.
Section 3.10 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.10 Mseal 01-3.doc

3.10.3 DE Mechanical Seal

- Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and also to the mechanical seal manufacturers
Note: The coupling hub and DE bearing assembly must be removed before removal and/or
installation of the DE mechanical seal. The DE bearing should be inspected before refitting
and this MAY necessitate replacement or refurbishment of the bearing.
3.10.3.1 Removal
1. Refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 - Bearings and remove the DE bearing assembly.
2. Remove auxiliary pipework as appropriate from the DE mechanical seal. Plug
CAUTION
The mechanical seal components must be restrained axially before removal of the
mechanical seal.
3. Refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above. Fit the
appropriate seal component restraining fixtures in position to restrain the mechanical
seal components.
4. Where the seal sleeve is attached to the pump shaft by grub screws / set screws
inserted through tapped holes in the seal sleeve and engaging in dimples in the shaft,
loosen the screws sufficiently to disengage the sleeve fully from the pump shaft.
5. Where the seal sleeve is attached to the
pump shaft by a shrink disc system, refer
Mechanical Seal
to the illustration, right, and proceed as
follows:
Clamping Ring
CAUTION
Do not detach the tension ring from the
clamping ring.
i. Loosen (but do not remove) the hex
socket screws securing the tension
ring and clamping ring together and Thrust Ring
separate the two rings.
Note: Two tapped holes are provided in Seal Sleeve
the outboard face of the clamping ring to
enable the use of jack screws to assist in
Pump Shaft
initial separation of theclamping ring and
tension ring.
Retaining Ring
ii. Slide the tension ring / clamping ring
assembly off the mechanical seal
shaft sleeve, over the retaining ring Tension Ring
and off the pump shaft.
iii. Remove the retaining ring and the
thrust ring from the pump shaft. Seal Sleeve - Shrink Disc Attachment
6. Loosen the seal retaining screws and free the mechanical seal from its housing in the
casing. Two diametrically opposed tapped holes are provided in the seal plate for
jackscrews to assist in initial removal.
7. Withdraw the mechanical seal from its housing and off the shaft.
Section 3.10 Page 2


3.10.3.2 Installation
Note: Cleaning / inspection of mechanical seal components before seal installation, and
any subsequent required replacement of component parts, must be carried out in
accordance with the seal manufacturers information, detailed above.
1. Lubricate the pump shaft lightly.
CAUTION
Ensure that the mechanical seal restraining fixtures are fitted to secure the
mechanical seal components axially.
2. Refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above. Ensure that
the appropriate seal component restraining fixtures are fitted to restrain the mechanical
seal components.
3. Slide the mechanical seal, complete with new shaft O-ring seals and housing O-ring
seal, over the pump shaft and into the housing in the casing. Ensure that seal is
orientated correctly for pipework connections.
4. Fit the mounting screws through the seal plate and into the tapped holes in the casing.
Tighten the screws evenly to the torque value specified either on the Longitudinal
Section drawing, or on the seal manufacturers drawing, to secure the mechanical seal
in place.
position the sleeve to align the screws with the dimples in the shaft.
i. If the grub screws / set screws are accessible with the DE bearing assembly
in place (and by turning the shaft as necessary), refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 -
Bearings and refit the DE bearing assembly at this stage and then refer to the
mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above, and tighten the grub
screws / set screws evenly to secure the seal sleeve to the pump shaft. Withdraw
the seal component restraining fixtures and secure them clear.
ii. If the grub screws / set screws are NOT accessible with the DE bearing
assembly in place, refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information,
detailed above, and tighten the grub screws / set screws evenly to secure the seal
sleeve to the pump shaft. Withdraw the seal component restraining fixtures and
secure them clear. Refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 - Bearings and refit the DE bearing
assembly.
6. Where the seal sleeve is attached to the pump shaft by a shrink disc system,
refer to the illustration in Section 3.10.3.1, above, and proceed as follows:
i. Fit the thrust ring into the groove in the pump shaft and fit the retaining ring over
the shaft and over the thrust ring to secure the thrust ring in place.
ii. Slide the tension ring / clamping ring assembly over the pump shaft, over the
retaining ring and the mechanical seal shaft sleeve into the position shown on the
Longitudinal Section drawing.
iii. Tighten the hex socket screws evenly to the torque value specified on the
Longitudinal Section drawing to tighten the tension ring / clamping ring assembly
and secure the mechanical seal shaft sleeve to the pump shaft. Withdraw the seal
component restraining fixtures and secure them clear. Refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 -
Bearings and refit the DE bearing assembly.
7. Refit auxiliary pipework as appropriate to the DE mechanical seal.
Section 3.10 Page 3


3.10.4 NDE Mechanical Seal

- Sulzer Drawings and Documents, and also to the mechanical seal manufacturers
Note: The NDE bearing assembly must be removed before removal and/or installation of
the NDE mechanical seal. The NDE bearing should be inspected before refitting and this
MAY necessitate replacement or refurbishment of the bearing.
3.10.4.1 Removal
1. Refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 - Bearings and remove the NDE bearing assembly.
2. Remove auxiliary pipework as appropriate from the NDE mechanical seal. Plug
CAUTION
The mechanical seal components must be restrained axially before removal of the
mechanical seal.
3. Refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above. Fit the
appropriate seal component restraining fixtures in position to restrain the mechanical
seal components.
loosen the screws sufficiently to disengage the sleeve fully from the pump shaft.
5. Where the seal sleeve is attached to the
pump shaft by a shrink disc system, refer
Mechanical Seal
to the illustration, right, and proceed as
follows:
Clamping Ring
CAUTION
Do not detach the tension ring from the
clamping ring.
i. Loosen (but do not remove) the hex
socket screws securing the tension
ring and clamping ring together and Thrust Ring
separate the two rings.
Note: Two tapped holes are provided in Seal Sleeve
the outboard face of the clamping ring to
enable the use of jack screws to assist in
Pump Shaft
initial separation of theclamping ring and
tension ring.
Retaining Ring
ii. Slide the tension ring / clamping ring
assembly off the mechanical seal
shaft sleeve, over the retaining ring Tension Ring
and off the pump shaft.
iii. Remove the retaining ring and the
thrust ring from the pump shaft. Seal Sleeve - Shrink Disc Attachment
6. Loosen the seal retaining screws and free the mechanical seal from its housing in the
casing. Two diametrically opposed tapped holes are provided in the seal plate for
jackscrews to assist in initial removal.
7. Withdraw the mechanical seal from its housing and off the shaft.
Section 3.10 Page 4


3.10.4.2 Installation
Note: Cleaning / inspection of mechanical seal components before seal installation, and
any subsequent required replacement of component parts, must be carried out in
accordance with the seal manufacturers information, detailed above.
1. Lubricate the pump shaft lightly.
CAUTION
Ensure that the mechanical seal restraining fixtures are fitted to secure the
mechanical seal components axially.
2. Refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above. Ensure that
the appropriate seal component restraining fixtures are fitted to restrain the mechanical
seal components.
3. Slide the mechanical seal, complete with new shaft O-ring seals and housing O-ring
seal, over the pump shaft and into the housing in the casing. Ensure that seal is
orientated correctly for pipework connections.
4. Fit the mounting screws through the seal plate and into the tapped holes in the casing.
Tighten the screws evenly to the torque value specified either on the Longitudinal
Section drawing, or on the seal manufacturers drawing, to secure the mechanical seal
in place.
position the sleeve to align the screws with the dimples in the shaft.
i. If the grub screws / set screws are accessible with the NDE bearing
assembly in place (and by turning the shaft as necessary), refer to Section 3.8 /
3.9 - Bearings and refit the NDE bearing assembly at this stage and then refer to
the mechanical seal manufacturers information, detailed above, and tighten the
grub screws / set screws evenly to secure the seal sleeve to the pump shaft.
Withdraw the seal component restraining fixtures and secure them clear.
ii. If the grub screws / set screws are NOT accessible with the NDE bearing
assembly in place, refer to the mechanical seal manufacturers information,
detailed above, and tighten the grub screws / set screws evenly to secure the seal
sleeve to the pump shaft. Withdraw the seal component restraining fixtures and
secure them clear. Refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 - Bearings and refit the NDE bearing
assembly.
6. Where the seal sleeve is attached to the pump shaft by a shrink disc system,
refer to the illustration in Section 3.10.4.1, above, and proceed as follows:
i. Fit the thrust ring into the groove in the pump shaft and fit the retaining ring over
the shaft and over the thrust ring to secure the thrust ring in place.
ii. Slide the tension ring / clamping ring assembly over the pump shaft, over the
retaining ring and the mechanical seal shaft sleeve into the position shown on the
Longitudinal Section drawing.
iii. Tighten the hex socket screws evenly to the torque value specified on the
Longitudinal Section drawing to tighten the tension ring / clamping ring assembly
and secure the mechanical seal shaft sleeve to the pump shaft. Withdraw the seal
component restraining fixtures and secure them clear. Refer to Section 3.8 / 3.9 -
Bearings and refit the NDE bearing assembly.
7. Refit auxiliary pipework as appropriate to the NDE mechanical seal.
Section 3.10 Page 5

Document No: Lubric 03

Section 3.11 Pump - Lubrication Revision: 1
3.11 Lubrication
pumpset equipment.
a Hazardous Area, failure to maintain bearing assemblies correctly MAY invalidate
the Hazardous Area classification and MUST be avoided.
equipment.
For specific information on required type of oil, required oil change frequency and oil fill
quantity, refer to the Lubrication Schedule or the Utility Schedule in Section 1 - Leading
Particulars, Section 1.2 - Sulzer Drawings and Documents (if available). Alternatively,
the required information may be available in Section 1.1.1 - External Requirements.
3.11.1 Bearings
The pump radial and thrust bearings are lubricated by a pressurised oil supply from an
external lubricating oil system (LOS). Refer to the LOS manufacturers information, later in
this manual.
Oil Flush
Before shipment, the anti-friction bearings were coated with an oil-soluble rust preventive.
Flush bearings and bearing housing with clean oil. Refit drain plugs (and refill with fresh oil
to the correct level.
CAUTION
Do not wash a new bearing with solvent. A new bearing is packaged in a clean
condition, and the coating should not be removed.
Section 3.11 Page 1

K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\S3.11 Lubric 03-1.doc
Document No: TorqVal 01

Section 3.12 Pump - Torque Tightening of Revision: 0
Fasteners Revision Date: 02 May 2002
3.12 Torque Tightening of Fasteners
CAUTION
Where a specific torque tightening value for a fastener is detailed within a manual or
drawing, that value must be used in preference to the standard values given in this
document.
This process establishes standard methods and values for torque tightening of fasteners.
The suggested torque values are recommended to produce properly stressed joints with a
minimum probability of nuts, bolts or studs breaking or loosening.
Avoid possible distortion by using the correct tightening sequence during torque
development.
All fasteners are to be lubricated (if lubricants are permitted) with graphite and oil,
molybdenum disulfide, or another anti-seize lubricant of comparable quality that is
compatible with the fastener application. Cleaning specifications must be consulted to
determine suitability or allowance of thread lubricant.
Note: When using plated studs and nuts, oil threads lightly - DO NOT use molybdenum
disulfide.
Consult the appropriate Parts List (if applicable), or other suitable information source, to
determine the fastener size and the component material when identifying standard torque
values.
Consult the Fastener Application Guideline on the following page to determine the
appropriate torque setting table to use, based on the fastener application.
Torque Value Conversion: 1 lbf.ft = 1.356 Nm 1 Nm = 0.738 lbf.ft
3.12.1 Torque Development

When developing the required torque, tighten opposing fasteners in an alternating
sequence, as illustrated in the examples below.
Lubricate and then install fasteners finger-tight. Develop the required fastener torque
value in a minimum of three steps, with a maximum of 30% of the torque value being
reached on the initial pass.
After the last torque-development pass, a final "check pass", tightening to the required
torque value, should be performed in a clockwise bolt-to-bolt sequence.
10
4 14
9
8 5
7 6
12 1
2 3
16 15
4 1
2 11
5 8
6 7
10 13 3
9
Circular Multi-Bolt, Non-Circular Multi-Bolt,

Example Pattern Example Pattern
Section 3.12 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.12 TorqVal 01-0.doc

3.12.2 Fastener Application Guideline

1. Refer to the appropriate manufacturers information and drawings for specific torque
values on sub-vendor equipment.
2. Look for a grade identification marking on the fastener. If the fastener is not covered by
a specific table (2-6), then refer to the appropriate column in Torque Table 1 or 7.
3. The material into which the fastener is threaded must also be considered. For
example:
A 0.75 inch fastener of A193
grade B7, threaded into AISI 316 FASTENER TABLE
stainless steel (SS) material, is APPLICATION NUMBER
tightened to 62 lbf.ft (i.e use the Flat face flange joint with gasket 1 (Imperial)
LOWER value appropriate to the or
316 stainless steel in Table 1 - 7 (Metric)
Column 7 and not the HIGHER
value appropriate to A193 grade Case parting Flange (horizontally split 2
B7). case pump)
The same fastener, in a steel Raised face flange joint with gasket 3
raised face flange with gasket, is
Pump thrust end hold-down bolts for 4
tightened to 155 lbf.ft (Table 3). alignment keys
4. Where the material or fastener
grade marking is unknown, and
Bearing nut torque values 5
the application is for Table 1, use Pivot shoe bearing nut torque values 6
the values in column 7 (AISI 304,
316, or monel material). Note: Table 7 is similar in scope to Table 1, but
covers metric fasteners
5. Case parting flange torque values
(Table 2) must be established
based on either materials of B7/L7 or B7M/L7M fasteners as appropriate.
6. Torque values in Tables 4 - 6 will be unchanged regardless of the fastener material.
Typical applications that could have either flat or raised face flanges include, but are not
limited to:
- Bowl and column (vertical pump)
- Discharge head to receiver can (vertical pump)
- Isolation chamber, seal housing, reservoir (J-unit application)
- Impeller retainer (capscrew)
- Stuffing box or case cover (suction and discharge)
- Seal plate
- Inner case (double case pump)
- Driver stand (vertical pump)
- Pump and driver mounting, coupling, bearing assembly and mounting components
Select either Table 1 or Table 3, as applicable.
Section 3.12 Page 2


Section 3.12 Pump - Torque Tightening of Fasteners Revision: 0
3.12.2.1 Table 1 (Torque Values)

Column No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Material and A &SA193 Gr B7 SAE Gr 5 A193 Gr B6 A &SA193 Gr B7M SAE Gr 2 SAE gr 1 AISI 304, 316
Grade A & SA320 Gr L7 A325 & A449 A & SA320 Gr L7M ASTM A307 gr A or ASTM A193 gr B8,
ASTM F468 - B B8M Monel
N05500 (Monel UNS S32760
Fastener Size lbf.ft Nm lbf.ft Nm lbf.ft Nm lbf.ft Nm lbf.ft Nm lbf.ft Nm Lbf.ft Nm

0.250 - 20 UNC 8 11 7 9 6 9 6 8 4 6 3 4 2 3
0.3125 - 18UNC 15 21 14 18 13 17 12 16 8 11 5 7 4 6
0.375 - 16 UNC 27 36 23 31 21 29 20 27 14 20 9 12 8 10
0.4375 - 14UNC 41 56 36 49 34 46 32 43 23 31 14 19 12 16
0.500 - 13 UNC 63 86 55 75 51 69 48 65 34 47 22 29 18 24
0.625 - 11 UNC 124 168 109 147 100 136 95 128 67 91 43 58 35 48
0.750 - 10 UNC 217 295 190 258 176 238 165 224 118 160 74 101 62 84
0.875 - 9 UNC 347 470 304 412 281 381 264 358 119 161 119 161 99 134
1.000 - 8 UNC 517 702 453 615 419 568 394 535 177 241 177 241 148 200
1.125 - 8 UN 750 1017 579 785 607 824 572 775 257 349 257 349 214 291
1.250 - 8 UN 1044 1415 805 1092 845 1146 795 1078 358 485 358 485 298 404
1.375 - 8 UN 1405 1905 1084 1469 1137 1542 1070 1451 482 653 482 653 401 544
1.500 - 8 UN 1840 2496 1420 1925 1490 2020 1402 1901 631 856 631 856 526 713
1.625 - 8 UN 2375 3221 1312 1779 1923 2608 1810 2454 - - 814 1104 679 920
1.750 - 8 UN 2964 4019 1637 2220 2399 3254 2258 3062 - - 1016 1378 847 1148
2.000 - 8 UN 4470 6061 2469 3348 3618 4907 3406 4618 - - 1533 2078 1277 1732
2.250 - 8 UN 6414 8698 3543 4804 5192 7041 4887 6627 - - 2199 2982 1833 2485
2.500 - 8 UN 8853 12004 4890 6631 7166 9718 6745 9146 - - 3035 4116 2529 3430
2.750 - 8 UN 10714 14528 6541 8870 9586 12999 - - - - 4060 5505 3383 4588
3.000 - 8 UN 13966 18938 8527 11562 12496 16944 - - - - 5292 7176 4410 5980
Note: Torque values are based on 60% of material yield strength except for the following: SAE Grade 8 fasteners and Socket Head Capscrews shall be torqued to column 1 values. All other
material grades not listed or unidentifiable fasteners are to be torqued to column 7 values.
Torque values based on lightly lubricated threads.
Section 3.12 Page 3



Case Parting Flange (Horizontal Split Case Pumps)
Material and Grade A &SA193 Gr B7 A &SA193 Gr B7M
A & SA320 Gr L7 A & SA320 Gr L7M
Fastener Size lbf.ft Nm lbf.ft Nm
0.250 - 20 UNC - -
0.3125 - 18UNC - -
0.375 - 16 UNC - -
0.4375 - 14UNC - -
0.500 - 13 UNC - -
0.625 - 11 UNC - -
0.750 - 10 UNC 280 379 213 289
0.875 - 9 UNC - - - -
1.000 - 8 UNC 661 896 504 683
1.125 - 8 UN 968 1312 737 1000
1.250 - 8 UN 1329 1802 1013 1373
1.375 - 8 UN 1784 2420 1360 1844
1.500 - 8 UN 2339 3171 1782 2416
1.625 - 8 UN 2969 4026 2262 3068
1.750 - 8 UN 3506 4754 2671 3622
2.000 - 8 UN 5215 7071 3973 5388
2.250 - 8 UN 7486 10152 5704 7735
2.500 - 8 UN 10532 14282 8024 10881 Torque values based on
2.750 - 8 UN 12495 16943 10865 14733 lightly lubricated threads.
3.000 - 8 UN - - - --

Raised Face Flange Joint With Gasket
Fastener Size Table 1 Col 1-4 MTL Table 1* Col 5-7 MTL
lbf.ft Nm lbf.ft Nm
0.250 - 20 UNC 6 8 2 3
0.3125 - 18UNC 11 15 4 6
0.375 - 16 UNC 19 26 8 10
0.4375 - 14UNC 30 40 12 16
0.500 - 13 UNC 45 61 18 24
0.625 - 11 UNC 89 120 35 48
0.750 - 10 UNC 155 210 62 84
0.875 - 9 UNC 248 336 99 134
1.000 - 8 UNC 370 501 148 200
1.125 - 8 UN 536 727 214 291
1.250 - 8 UN 745 1011 298 404
1.375 - 8 UN 1003 1361 401 544
1.500 - 8 UN 1315 1783 526 713
1.625 - 8 UN 1697 2301 679 920
Torque values based on
1.750 - 8 UN 2117 2871 847 1148
lightly lubricated threads.
2.000 - 8 UN 3193 4329 1277 1732
2.250 - 8 UN 4582 6213 1833 2485 * Ensure that these values
2.500 - 8 UN 6323 8574 2529 3430 will allow clamping
2.750 - 8 UN 8458 11469 3383 4588 pressure adequate to seal
3.000 - 8 UN 11026 14951 4410 5980 the joint.
Section 3.12 Page 4



Pump Thrust End Hold-Down Bolts for Hot Alignment
Keys
Fastener Size lbf.ft Nm
0.250 - 20 UNC - -
0.3125 - 18UNC - -
0.375 - 16 UNC - -
0.4375 - 14UNC - -
0.500 - 13 UNC - -
0.625 - 11 UNC - -
0.750 - 10 UNC 35 47
0.875 - 9 UNC 55 75
1.000 - 8 UNC 85 115
1.125 - 8 UN 125 170
1.250 - 8 UN 175 237
1.375 - 8 UN 240 325
1.500 - 8 UN 300 407
1.625 - 8 UN 400 542
1.750 - 8 UN 500 678
2.000 - 8 UN 750 1017
2.250 - 8 UN - -
2.500 - 8 UN - -
Torque values based on
2.750 - 8 UN - -
lightly lubricated threads.
3.000 - 8 UN - -
3.12.2.5 Table 5 (Bearing Nut Torque Values)

Locknut Designation 7300 Series Angular Contact 6300 Series Deep Groove Ball 6200 Series Deep Groove Ball
Ball Bearings Bearings Bearings
Maximum allowable Maximum allowable Maximum allowable
tightening torque tightening torque tightening torque
lbf.ft Nm lbf.ft Nm lbf.ft Nm
N-06 20 25 15 20 11 15
N-07 25 30 20 30 17 25
N-08 35 50 30 40 25 35
N-09 50 70 45 60 30 45
N-10 70 95 60 85 35 50
N-11 90 125 80 110 50 70
N-12 115 155 100 135 65 85
N-13 145 195 125 170 85 115
N-14 175 235 150 210 100 135
AN-15 220 295 185 250 115 160
AN-16 260 350 220 300 140 190
AN-17 310 420 260 355 175 235
AN-18 360 490 310 420 210 285
AN-19 425 580 360 490 250 335
AN-20 525 710 450 610 300 405
AN-21 600 815 515 700 350 475
AN-22 680 920 635 860 415 565
Section 3.12 Page 5


3.12.2.6 Table 6 (Pivot Shoe Bearing Nut Torque Values)

Thrust Bearing Size Torque Value
lbf.ft Nm
JHJ-4 100 135
JHJ-5 100 135
JHJ-6 100 135
JHJ-7 150 203
JHJ-8 150 203
JHJ-9 150 203
3.12.2.7 Table 7 (Torque Values - Metric)

BS 6105 Stainless Steel BS 3692 Carbon Steel Duplex SS
Material and Grade A2 A4 4.6 5.6 8.8 12.9 32760
BS 3076
(NA 18 Ni CuAl
Alloy)
Nominal Size (M) Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm
6 1.94 2.15 2.51 3.14 6.70 11.3 5.76
8 4.60 5.09 5.96 7.45 15.9 26.8 13.66
10 9.12 10.1 11.8 14.8 31.6 53.2 27.13
12 15.6 17.3 20.3 25.3 54.0 91.2 46.38
14 24.7 27.3 32 40 85.3 144 73.33
16 37.2 41.2 48.2 60.3 129 217 110.55
18 52.0 57.7 67.5 84.4 180 304 154.73
20 72.6 80.4 94.1 118 251 424 216.3
22 96.5 107 125 157 334 563 287.8
24 125 139 162 203 433 730 372
27 181 200 234 293 625 1060 537
30 248 275 322 403 859 1450 739
33 334 370 434 542 1160 1950 994
36 428 474 555 694 1480 2500 1272
39 549 608 712 890 1900 3200 1632
42 684 757 887 1110 2360 3990 2035
45 847 939 1100 1370 2930 4950 2512
48 1030 1140 1330 1670 3560 6010 3062
56 1640 1810 2120 2650 5660 9560 4858
64 2430 2700 3160 3950 8420 14200 7242
Section 3.12 Page 6

Document No: FieldMount 01

Section 3.13 Pump - Field Mounting the Driver Revision: 1
3.13 Field Mounting the Driver

pumpset equipment.
maintenance personnel before starting any installation activity. Refer also to
specific safety advice contained as applicable within the installation procedures
a Hazardous Area, failure to maintain / install the drive motor correctly in
accordance with manufacturers information MAY invalidate the Hazardous Area
In general, if an uninstalled driver is received from the Sulzer factory with the pump and the
base plate, it will have previously been mounted and aligned in the factory. Holes tapped in
the base plate driver pedestals for hold-down bolts will confirm this. On some occasions,
however, a driver may be delivered to site without any initial mounting and alignment.
In either case, the driver must be mounted on the base plate after the base plate is
secured to the support structure.
Refer to the driver manufacturers information and drawings, later in this manual.
1. Check that the driver to be installed is the correct one for the application.
2. Using a dial indicator mounted on the frame, confirm that the driver shaft runout does
not exceed 0.002 inches (0.0508 mm) TIR. If this tolerance is not met, do not proceed
without Sulzer approval.
3. If the runout is satisfactory, assemble the drive key and mount the coupling hub
following the coupling vendors instructions.
4. Lift the driver, clean the mounting surfaces of the driver and pedestals, and place the
driver on the base plate.
5. Separate the pump (or gearbox or fluid coupling as appropriate) shaft and driver shaft
end to the dimension shown on the coupling assembly drawing.
Note: The rotor of a sleeve bearing motor must be placed at its magnetic centre prior to
moving to the correct shaft separation position.
6. Align the driver shaft approximately with the driven shaft using a straight edge and a
taper gauge or a set of feeler gages.
Section 3.13 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.13 FieldMount 01-1.doc
Document No: FieldMount 01

Section 3.13 Pump - Field Mounting the Driver Revision: 1
7. Select the correct driver hold-down bolts according to the manufacturers instructions.
Ensure the mounting hole size is adequate and has sufficient clearance for a precise
alignment later on.
8. For units that have not previously been installed, mark hole positions using the
driver feet as templates. Use marker blue on the pedestal surfaces to facilitate hole
positioning from the driver mounting holes.
9. Remove the driver, drill and tap holes to suit the hold-down bolts selected.
10. During final alignment of the driver, it may be necessary to add or remove shims at
each driver mounting foot position to position the driver correctly.
11. After final alignment of the driver and tightening of the driver hold-down bolts, holes
are normally drilled through the driver mounting feet and shims and into the support
structure for insertion of locating dowels to secure the driver in position.
Section 3.13 Page 2

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.13 FieldMount 01-1.doc
Document No: CD Trouble 01

Section 3.14 Pump - Troubleshooting Revision: 0
Revision Date: 12 Jul 2002
3.14 Troubleshooting
The following table identifies problems that may occur during start-up or normal operation.
It also suggests a course of action based on the initial diagnosis of the problem.
Further assistance is available by contacting a Sulzer representative.
Problem Diagnosis Course of Action

No discharge Speed is too low - turbine or Refer to the driver manufacturers information
pressure. Failure to engine drives. and take the recommended action.
deliver liquid at start- Lack of downstream back- Check control valve setting and adjust valve to
up. pressure. increase pressure.
Direction of rotation wrong - Check power supply cables to motor driver,
electric drive motor. remove and reconnect to the correct terminals.
Pump not primed. Refer to Commissioning and Operation and
prime system with product.
Impeller passages obstructed. Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Remove
rotor and check between impeller vanes.
Remove all foreign material without scoring
hydraulic passages.
Loss of discharge Downstream control valve Investigate valve actuator and control system
pressure after start- opening too far. operation. Adjust as necessary to maintain
up. correct valve opening.
Air pocket in suction line. Open all vents to eliminate air from pumping
system.
Insufficient suction pressure Check pump design requirements and proceed
causing product to vaporise in to make necessary changes or adjustments to
pump. system and create sufficient pressure.
Suction strainer clogged. Remove and clean, or replace, suction strainer
screen.
Vibration and noise. Pipe strain or coupling Refer to Installation and Coupling Alignment.
misalignment. Check alignment and pipe strain - adjust as
necessary.
Pump base not grouted, or air Locate voids by tapping on top plate. Fill voids
pockets exist between grout and completely with grout, drilling additional holes in
base plate top plate. top plate if necessary to evacuate air.
Cold offset not accounted for Refer to Installation and Coupling Alignment.
during final alignment. Check alignment taking cold offset into account.
Improperly balanced rotating Dismantle pump to remove each assembly and
element or coupling. rebalance to correct tolerances.
Impeller passages obstructed. Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Remove
rotor and check between impeller vanes.
hydraulic passages.
Bent shaft. Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Requires
complete pump / rotating element dismantling to
check shaft runout. Straighten to correct
excessive runout tolerances or replace shaft.
Cavitation as air or gas comes Check pump design requirements. Make
out of entrainment at first stage necessary changes or adjustments to system to
impeller. create more pressure at pump suction.
Section 3.14 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\CD and CD-2\S3.14 CD Trouble 01-0.doc


Reduced pump Minimum flow line open or Review minimum flow circuit and make
output flow. partially open. corrections to ensure proper operation.
Worn minimum flow orifice / Locate worn unit. Remove and replace with new.
warm up orifice.
Impeller or case obstructed with Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Remove
foreign material. rotor and check between impeller vanes.
hydraulic passages.
Pump internals worn on close Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Dismantle
running clearance surfaces. pump. Measure clearances at all wear part
surfaces. Replace worn parts.
Short seal life. Seal flush Seal flush system Refer to seal manufacturers information. Open
Excessive seal flow rate not vented. seal flush line vents to remove all entrapped air
leakage. insufficient. from system.
Seal flush injection Seal pumping ring Refer to Mechanical Seals and to seal
line hot. not secure or manufacturers information. Remove and check
rotating mechanical seal assembly for loose parts and
backwards. pumping ring orientation.
Fouled seal cooler. Refer to seal cooler manufacturers information.
Check cooler. Back flush to clean out or replace
if necessary.
Excessive Wrong orifice up- Remove from line, check size against flow
seal flush stream of seal. requirements and replace if necessary.
flow velocity.
Restriction throat Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Remove
bushing worn. casing cover(s) and check throat bushing
clearances. Replace worn bushing if required.
Particulates Clogged seal Refer to Mechanical Seals and to seal
in seal flush. springs lock up. manufacturers information. Remove seal
assembly and replace springs. Review seal
application if problem persists.
Seal face materials Review application with seal vendor and replace
inadequate for parts according to recommendation.
abrasive service.
Coupling misalignment. Refer to Installation and Coupling Alignment.
Check alignment.
Bent pump shaft. Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Requires
complete pump / rotating element dismantling to
check shaft runout. Straighten to correct
excessive runout tolerances or replace shaft.
Section 3.14 Page 2



High bearing Coupling misalignment. Refer to Installation and Coupling Alignment.
temperature. Check alignment.
Oil level too low or high. Refer to Lubrication for correct level, and adjust
level. Check constant level oiler setting.
Oil viscosity too high. Use oil of recommended grade.
Excessive pump thrust. Refer to Case / Element Assembly. Remove
casing cover(s) and check wear part clearances.
Dismantle rotating element as necessary to
replace worn parts.
Worn out bearings. Refer to Bearing Assemblies. Replace
bearings.
Incorrectly installed bearing. Refer to Bearing Assemblies. Examine
assembly and condition of bearing and
associated parts. Adjust assembly and replace
parts as necessary.
Pump overheating / Pump operating below minimum Review pump operating parameters with a
seizure. flow. Sulzer representative. Dismantle and repair unit
and follow correct procedures during future
operation.
Short term corrosion Materials of construction not Review pump operating parameters with a
erosion compatible with product. Sulzer representative and make necessary
corrections to unit design.
Pitting oxidation or Abrasive material entrained in Refurbish pump with correct parts, clean system,
loss of material product. re-commission and operate as detailed in the
manual.
Insufficient suction pressure or
entrained vapour.
Electrolysis.
Section 3.14 Page 3

Document No: RepParts 01

Section 3.15 Pump - Replacement Parts Revision: 0
3.15 Replacement Parts
3.15.1 Spare Parts

Spare parts should be kept to reduce downtime. Service of a pump determines number of
spare parts.
For pumps used in critical service, it is recommended that a complete rotating element,
pre-assembled as far as practical, be stocked on-site.
3.15.2 Parts Orders

When ordering spare parts, provide the following details:
1. Pump serial number (from pump duty plate)
2. Longitudinal Section drawing item number
3. Description of part
4. The number of part as shown on Longitudinal Section drawing and parts list.
Refer to Section 2 - Introduction and General Safety, Contact Information for contact
information in regard to spare parts.
3.15.3 After Sales Service

Service Engineers are available on request to carry out commissioning and on-site repairs.
Refer to Section 2 - Introduction and General Safety, Contact Information for contact
information in regard to after sales service.
3.15.4 Spare Parts List and Interchangeability Record

When appropriate, a Spare Parts List and Interchangeability Record is included in Section
1 - Leading Particulars.
Section 3.15 Page 1

L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 3\S3.15 RepParts 01-0.doc
Document No: Purge 02

Section 3.16 Nitrogen Charged Storage Container Revision: 0
- Charging and Purging Procedures Revision Date: 04 Jan 2008
3.16 Nitrogen Charged Storage Container - Charging and Purging

Procedures
Refer to the CD 20x24x22G Rotor Assembly Transportation / Preservation Unit General
Arrangement drawing and Bill of materials in Section 1.2 - Sulzer drawings and
Documents.
3.16.1 Lifting
Lifting Equipment
Do not pass under a suspended load.
Make sure that all lifting equipment is correctly certified / calibrated and is in serviceable
condition and suitable for the task. Only use approved safe methods of handling heavy
equipment.
Suitability of Lifting Equipment
Where specific lifting equipment is NOT supplied, the site operators lifting equipment may
be considered as suitable if it:
- is correctly certified / calibrated - is in serviceable condition
- is fit for the intended purpose - is of an acceptable size and configuration
- can be used without causing damage - has a specified safe working load (SWL)
to any equipment which exceeds the total weight it is
required to accept
Slinging Safety Guidelines
Ensure that the load is suitable for lifting with a sling or slings. The sling(s) should not be
allowed to damage the load, nor should the sling(s) be damaged.
Ensure that the safe working load (SWL) of the sling(s) being used is adequate for the lift,
having regard to the method of slinging.
Ensure that the slings being used are in good condition. Damaged slings should be
withdrawn from service immediately
Ensure that the load will be stable and in balance when lifted. Attach the sling(s) to the
designed lifting points where provided
Lifting / Handling Equipment
When selecting a suitable crane or hoist, the weight of all handling and lifting equipment
supported by the crane or hoist (lifting beam, slings, shackles etc.) must be added to the
total weight of the parts to be handled. The crane / hoist MUST be capable of safely lifting
the heaviest of items in Sulzer supply.
When using a fork lift to move the container, use the fork lifting points included in the
container base plate construction.
Section 3.16 Page 1

K:\In Work Manuals\48329, 30 CP CD Khurais\48330\S3.16 Purge 02-0.doc

3.16.2 Nitrogen Charging Procedure
Note: The storage container may be fitted with pressure and vacuum relief valves.
When fitted, these valves will be set to operate at a safe positive and negative
pressure differential between container and ambient pressure to prevent structural
damage to the container.
1. Ensure all flange bolts are fully tightened around the full perimeter of the container.
CAUTION
Refer to the Storage Container General Arrangement drawing and to the Lifting
guidelines, above, before lifting the container.
2. Lift the container into the vertical position.

3. If an external nitrogen supply is in use, connect the nitrogen supply to the inlet
connection.
Note: The inlet pipework fitted permanently to the storage container must include an
inlet control valve / regulator to enable control of nitrogen gas flow into the
container and to prevent gas leakage when the external supply is disconnected.
4. Ensure that the outlet purge valve is in the open position.
During the container purging procedure, there is a risk of suffocation from an

excessive concentration of nitrogen in inhaled air. The purging procedure MUST be
carried out in a well-ventilated location or outdoors.
5. Turn on a low pressure nitrogen supply to the storage container using the valve /
regulator to control delivery pressure BELOW the pressure relief valve setting. Allow
nitrogen to flow through the container and out of the open purge valve for 3 hours to
ensure that the container is purged of air.
6. Close the purge valve.
7. Continue / increase the flow of nitrogen until the required internal positive pressure
specified by the container manufacturer is obtained within the container.
8. Turn off the nitrogen supply. Where an external nitrogen supply is in use, disconnect
the supply.
3.16.2.1 Routine Maintenance

Routine pressure check - Check the storage container pressure gauge or pressure
indicator every week to ensure that the positive differential pressure within the container is
being maintained. If pressure is low, re-charge the container to the correct value using the
above procedure. Record re-charging actions to identify possible leaks in the container
system.
Stored equipment check - Open the container and assess the condition of the stored
equipment every 12 months. If the equipment remains in good condition, re-seal and
pressurise the container for a further 12 month storage period. If the condition of the
equipment has deteriorated, take any remedial actions to restore the equipment and then
re-seal and pressurise the container for a further 12 month storage period.
Section 3.16 Page 2


3.16.3 Nitrogen Purging Procedure
During the container purging procedure, there is a risk of suffocation from an

excessive concentration of nitrogen in inhaled air. The purging procedure MUST be
carried out in a well-ventilated location or outdoors.
1. Slowly open the purge valve fully to release pressure from the container.
CAUTION Refer to the Lifting guidelines, above, before lifting the container.
2. When internal pressure has been dissipated, lower the container carefully into the
horizontal position.
3. Flange bolts can now be released to allow access to the internal equipment.
Section 3.16 Page 3

Document No: MecSeal 01

Section 4 Mechanical Seal Revision: 0
4 Mechanical Seal
The mechanical seal manufacturers information, and the associated equipment

manufacturers information, is included next as an insert to the manual.
L:\I O M Manuals\NEW STANDARD MODULES\Common Modules\Section 4\S4 MecSeal 01-0.doc

OPERATING MANUAL
This document was drawn up observing the EC directives

"Machinery" 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-2 and the German Standard VDI 4500.
In case of this mechanical seal is operated in explosion area an appropriate

additional operating manual, following EC directives 94/9/EC (ATEX 95), has
to be observed by all means! If required this could be ordered at BURGMANN.
BURGMANN MECHANICAL SEAL (M.S.)
SHV8/165-E1
These instructions are intended for the assembly, operating and control personnel and
should be kept at hand on site.
Project : ARAMCO KHURAIS CRUDE OIL SHIPPER
Item no. : B36-G-0002 A/B/C/D
End user : ARAMCO
Machine manufacturer : SULZER
Type of machine : CD 20x24x22G
PLEASE READ this manual carefully and OBSERVE the information contained as to:
Safety Transport / Storage Information about the product

Installation Operation Servicing
If there are any unclear points please contact BURGMANN by all means!
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 2 / 19
Table of Contents
Keywords and Symbols.......................................................................................3
GENERAL SAFETY NOTES............................................................................4

Instructions for worker's protection......................................................................5
TRANSPORT / STORAGE .................................................................................6

Transport.............................................................................................................6
Packing and storage ...........................................................................................6
INFORMATION ABOUT THE PRODUCT .......................................................8

Manufacturer and country of origin .....................................................................8
Declaration by the manufacturer .........................................................................8
Type designation.................................................................................................8
Designated use ...................................................................................................8
Operating conditions ...........................................................................................9
Materials .............................................................................................................9
Drawings, diagrams ............................................................................................9
Description ..........................................................................................................9
Required space, connecting dimensions ..........................................................10
Supply of M.S....................................................................................................10
Emissions..........................................................................................................10
INSTALLATION................................................................................................11
Assembly utilities ..............................................................................................11
Preparation for assembly ..................................................................................11
Assembly / installation ......................................................................................12
Supply connections...........................................................................................14
OPERATION.....................................................................................................15
Safe operation...................................................................................................15
Start up .............................................................................................................15
SERVICING ......................................................................................................16
Maintenance .....................................................................................................16
Directives in case of failure ...............................................................................16
After-sales service by BURGMANN ..................................................................16
Reconditioning (repair)......................................................................................17
Disassembly / removal......................................................................................17
Spare parts .......................................................................................................18
Required details for enquiries and orders .........................................................18
Disposal of the BURGMANN mechanical seal..................................................19
Copyright...........................................................................................................19
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 3 / 19
Keywords and Symbols
Following symbols for particularly important information are used:
"Attention, please pay special attention to these sections of text"
DANGER! Draws attention to a direct hazard that will lead to injury or death
of persons
WARNING! Draws attention to the risk that a hazard could lead to serious
injury or death of persons
CAUTION! Draws attention to a hazard or unsafe method of working that

could lead to personal injury or damage to equipment
ATTENTION! Identifies a potentially dangerous situation. If it is not avoided the

product or something in its vicinity could be damaged
IMPORTANT! Identifies tips for use and other particularly useful information.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 4 / 19
GENERAL SAFETY NOTES
Any person being involved in assembly, disassembly, start up, operation and
maintenance of the BURGMANN Mechanical Seal must have read and understood
this Instruction Manual and in particular the safety notes. We recommend the user to
have this confirmed.
BURGMANN Mechanical Seals are manufactured on a high quality level and they
keep a high working reliability. Yet, if they are not operated within their intended
purpose or handled inexpertly they may cause risks.
The machine has to be set up in such a way that seal leakage can be led off and
disposed properly and that any personal injury caused by spurting product in the
event of a seal failure is avoided.
Any operation mode that affects the operational safety of the mechanical seal is not
permitted.
Unauthorised modifications or alterations are not permitted as they affect the

operational safety of the mechanical seal.
BURGMANN mechanical seals must be installed, operated, maintained, removed or

repaired by authorised, trained and instructed personnel only.
The responsibilities for the respective jobs to be done have to be determined

clearly and observed in order to prevent unclear competencies from the point of
security.
Any work to be done on the mechanical seal is generally only permitted when the
seal is neither operating nor pressurised.
WARNING! Seals that have been used with hazardous substances must be properly
cleaned so that there is no possible danger to people or to the environment.
Apart from the notes given in this manual the general regulations for worker's
protection and those for prevention of accidents have to be observed.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 5 / 19
Instructions for worker's protection
WARNING! If the medium to be sealed and/or the supply liquid is subject to the
Hazardous Substances Regulation (GefStoffV), the instructions for handling
dangerous substances (safety data sheets to EU Directive 91/155/EEC) and the
accident prevention regulations have be observed.
Medium to be sealed and/or supply medium may escape if the seal fails. Injury of
persons and environment may be prevented by the user providing for splash
protection and wearing safety goggles. Care has to be taken by the user for proper
disposal of the leakage. The user has to control these measures.
The user has to check what effects a failure of the mechanical seal might have and
what safety measures have to be taken to prevent personal injury or damage to the
environment.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 6 / 19
TRANSPORT / STORAGE
Transport
If not specified differently by contract the BURGMANN standard packing is used

which is suitable for dry transport by truck, train or plane. The warning signs and
notes on the packing must be observed.
In addition seaworthy packing may become necessary.
Notes for income inspection:

Check packaging for visible damages.
Open packaging carefully. Do not damage or lose parts supplied separately.
Check if consignment is complete (delivery note). Inform the supplier immediately
in writing if parts are damaged or missing.
The mechanical seal has to be protected from damage during transport and storage.
The transport case in which the seal is supplied is well suited for this purpose and
should be kept for a possible return transport.
ATTENTION! If the machine as well as the mechanical seal installed into the machine
are transported together the assembly fixtures have to be inserted and fixed. The
shaft has to be protected from deflection and shocks.
Packing and storage
The following recommendations apply to all BURGMANN mechanical seals which

have been supplied and stored in their undamaged original packaging, as well as
to seals which have been installed in a machine (e.g. pump, compressor, agitator,
etc.) but have not yet been put into operation.
BURGMANN mechanical seals and spare parts are super finished and repeatedly
tested machine elements. For the storage special conditions have to be followed.
Sliding materials and elastomers are subject to material-specific and time-based

alterations (distortion, ageing) which might reduce the full efficiency of the
mechanical seals. Yet, this may be avoided by observing the storage instructions.
For the stock keeping of elastomers special conditions are required. For all rubber-
elastic parts the rules of DIN 7716 resp. of ISO 2230-1973 (E) are valid.
Conveniences for storing of mechanical seals

dust free
moderately ventilated
constantly tempered
relative air humidity below 65 %,
temperature between 15 C and 25 C.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 7 / 19
Protect the seal from

direct exposure to heat (sun, heating)
ultraviolet light (halogen or fluorescent lamps, sunlight, arc welding)
presence or development of ozone (arc welding, mercury vapour lamps, high-
voltage devices, electric motors)
risk of embrittlement of elastomeric materials
It has to be differentiated between:

M.S. stored in the stock room
M.S. installed in the machine, but not yet in operation.
M.S. in the stock

IMPORTANT! Store the seal in the original packing lying on a flat surface.
Check the packaging periodically for damages.

Plastic sheet packagings with humidity indicators have to be checked every
8 weeks. The check has to be recorded.
Packings exceeding 50 % rel. humidity values have to be sent to the manu-
facturer or the nearest BURGMANN service centre for inspection and new
packaging.
Duly stored mechanical seal:

Latest 3 years after delivery of the mechanical seal
For reasons of safety shipment of the M.S. to BURGMANN resp. nearest
BURGMANN service centre for
Exchange of all secondary seals and springs
Verification of the flatness of the faces
Perhaps static pressure test.
M.S. installed into the machine:

ATTENTION! A preservation of the BURGMANN mechanical seals is not allowed.
Check in case of a preservation of complete machines with mechanical seals

installed BURGMANN has to be contacted.
Do not use corrosion protection agents.
Risk of deposition and possibly chemical attack of the secondary seals.
Due to longer erecting times of new designed plants the period between delivery of
the mechanical seal and on the other hand its installation and start up may exceed
the period of 2-3 years.
Latest after 3 years and in time before the planned start-up of the plant the seal
has to be dismantled and to be sent to the manufacturer or the nearest BURGMANN
service centre where it can be checked and reconditioned, if necessary.
Damages caused by improper storage may not be claimed with reference to the
warranty on the BURGMANN company.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 8 / 19
INFORMATION ABOUT THE PRODUCT

All technical information given is based on the results of extensive testing and on
BURGMANN's long term practical experience. However, in view of the great diversity
of possible applications the technical data can only be taken as being of approximate
nature. We can only guarantee the safe and efficient functioning in individual cases if
we have been comprehensively informed of the operating conditions to which they
will be subject, and if this has been confirmed in a separate agreement.
Manufacturer and country of origin
Burgmann Industries GmbH & Co. KG

uere Sauerlacher Str. 6-10
D - 82515 Wolfratshausen
Germany
Declaration by the manufacturer

within the meaning of the EC-directive "MACHINERY" 98/37/EG
A mechanical seal does not function independently. It is intended to be

incorporated into or assembled with machinery.
Type designation
BURGMANN Mechanical Seal SHV8/165-E1
Designated use
This mechanical seal is exclusively designed for the use in the specified application.
A different utilisation or a utilisation going beyond the specification is considered
contrary to its designated use and excludes a liability by the manufacturer.
Operation under conditions lying outside those limits stated in the drawing
SHV8/165-E1 is considered contrary to its designated use.
Should the seal be operated under different conditions or at a different

application BURGMANN has to be asked for recognition as safe in advance.
Changes to operating conditions have to be documented.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 9 / 19
Operating conditions
Information about the operating conditions can be found in the BURGMANN

assembly drawing SHV8/165-E1 or in the specification sheets of the machine
manufacturer.
The selection of the mechanical seal (type, suitability, materials) should be done by
BURGMANN staff or other authorised persons. A wrong selection by unauthorised
persons is not covered by BURGMANN's warranty.
Materials
The materials of the mechanical seal depend on the application and are fixed in the
order.
Drawings, diagrams
Assembly drawing SHV8/165-E1
The original assembly drawing in its latest edition (latest revision) only is decisive for
both the design of M.S. as well as the utilisation of this manual.
In the following description all figures in parentheses, e.g. (2) define the respective
part item no. in the assembly drawing.
Description
cartridge design with shaft sleeve (11), cover (13), washer (17),
assembly fixtures (19)
installation horizontal
single seal
balanced
bi-directional
stationary seal face (1)
rotating seat (5)
multiple springs (3)
floating throttle ring (15) at outboard
axial movability 3 mm
torque transmission from the M.S. to the shaft by means of a shrink disk (part of
customer)
operation with circulation (API, plan 31)
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 10 / 19
Required space, connecting dimensions
The available mounting space was decisive for the design of the housing parts. All
connecting dimensions have to be checked with regard to the BURGMANN drawing
before mounting the mechanical seal.
The connecting dimensions of the mechanical seal were checked and approved by
the customer on the main drawing.
Supply of M.S.
For a safe operation of the M.S. a circulation of the medium to be sealed is required,
from the pump housing via a cyclone separator to the seal, in accordance with API,
plan 31.
At outboard threaded connections are provided according to API, plan 61, for
purpose at user's option (e.g. for quench, leakage, venting etc.).
Emissions
A mechanical seal is a dynamic seal that cannot be free of leakage due to physical
and technical reasons. Seal design, manufacture tolerances, operating conditions,
running quality of the machine, etc. mainly define the leakage value. In fact,
compared to other sealing systems there is few leakage.
A possibly increased leakage during start-up will decrease to a normal quantity after
the running-in period of the sliding faces.
If this is not the case or if there are other malfunctions the mechanical seal has to be
shut down, removed and checked for reasons of safety.
A throttle ring at outboard provides for a quench and prevents gushes of leakage.
The leakage can be liquid or gaseous. Its aggressiveness corresponds to that of the
medium to be sealed.
Leakage of mechanical seal at outboard side has to be drained and disposed

properly.
IMPORTANT! Components which may get in contact with the leakage have to be
corrosion-resistant or have to be adequately protected.
WARNING! If the medium to be sealed and/or the supply liquid is subject to the
Hazardous Substances Regulation (GefStoffV), the instructions for handling
dangerous substances (safety data sheets to EU Directive 91/155/EEC) and the
accident prevention regulations have be observed.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 11 / 19
INSTALLATION
Assembly utilities
ethyl alcohol
cellulose-tissue (no rag, no cloth!)
suitable lubricants
Elastomers made of EP-rubber must never come into contact with lubricants
on the base of mineral oil (swelling, decomposition).
set of hexagon keys
set of open end or ring spanners
torque wrench
Preparation for assembly
ATTENTION! The seal should remain packed until the following working steps have
been completely terminated.
Check the parts of the machine for:

chamfered edges
(sliding cones i.e. 2 mm / 30 or
in accordance with EN 12756)
radiused transitions
mating fits and o-ring
surfaces:
fine finished Rz 10 m (= N7 =
CLA 63)
Shaft surface in the area of the mechanical seal finished: Ra = 0.8 m (= N6 =

CLA 32).
Check at the machine:

damage of connecting surfaces to the M.S.
mating dimensions, rectangularity and concentricity to the shaft axis.
Check run-out accuracy of the shaft (acc. to DIN ISO 5199: 100 m).
Lubricate the shaft with a suitable grease slightly in the area of the mechanical
seal.
Elastomers made of EP-rubber must never come into contact with lubricants on

the base of mineral oil ( swelling, possibly decomposition).
ATTENTION! Degrease the shaft in the area of the clamping device as well as possible.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 12 / 19
Prepare the place of assembly, take away any not required tool, cuttings, dirty
cleaning wool etc.
Cover the work bench with a piece of clean, non-fibrous cardboard.
Assembly / installation
The mechanical seal is supplied as a cartridge unit, premounted at works, and does
not require any adjustment during installation. This document provides the required
information for installation and removal of the cartridge only.
For installation the assembly drawing SHV8/165-E1 has to be observed.
O-rings in sliding contact with other parts when mounting the mechanical seal may
be lubricated very thinly, if not described otherwise.
The order of assembly to install the mechanical seal into the machine depends on
the design of the machine and has to be determined by the machine manufacturer.
During installation of the mechanical seal the machine auxiliaries (holding device
for the shaft, etc.) have to be used in accordance with the instructions of the
machine manufacturer.
The mechanical seal has to be installed under the cleanest conditions

and very carefully.
Avoid unnecessary rotation of the shaft (damage of the sliding faces is
possible).
Do never force during installation.
Avoid knocking the seal! Damage to mechanical seals has an adverse
effect on their safe operation.
When fitting the PTFE-sealing elements in no case widen or
compress them. Otherwise, their sealing function cannot be ensured.
Observe the notes in the current drawing if necessary please contact
BURGMANN.
Possible installation order:
Make sure that all sealing elements are installed which contact the surrounding
machine parts.
Unpack the seal.
Check, if the o-rings (12; 14) are installed.
Lubricate the shaft with a suitable grease slightly in the area of the mechanical
seal.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 13 / 19
Feed the complete seal cartridge onto the shaft.
Feed the shrink disk (part of customer) onto the shaft.
ATTENTION! Avoid knocking the seal! Damage to mechanical seals has an adverse
effect on their safe operation.
Feed the retaining elements (part of customer) onto the shaft.
Bolt the machine housing to the bearing housing.
Bolt the mechanical seal to the machine housing in the way that the connections
for supply and disposal are positioned in accordance with view "X" in the drawing.
Degrease the shaft in the area of the clamping device of the shaft sleeve as well
as possible to obtain best transmission ratio.
Fastening of the shrink disc (part of customer):

First tighten some bolts of the shrink disc slightly crosswise until the discs are
parallel.
Afterwards tighten all bolts in sequence evenly (one after the other) in so many
revolutions until all of them have the same torque.
Check the tightening torque with a torque wrench.
ATTENTION! Observe the maximum tightening torque.
Check: at correct bracing the outer ring and inner ring has to be in alignment!
The correct bracing condition is thus optically checkable.
IMPORTANT! Remove the assembly fixtures (19) and keep them for a later removal of
the seal.
Further assembly of the machine in accordance with the instructions of the

machine manufacturer.
Remove the plastic protection caps from the supply and disposal connections after
installation of M.S.
Close unused supply connections pressure-tight with threaded plugs.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 14 / 19
Supply connections
The supply connections are designed as female threaded NPT connections in

accordance with ANSI B1.20.1.
The supply connections are marked on the mechanical seal and must not be
interchanged during installation.
ATTENTION! Sealing agents for threads (PTFE-tape, etc.) endanger the safe function of
the seal if they enter the seal chamber. When screwed connections are opened take
care by all means that sealing agents cannot enter the mechanical seal.
Assignment of the connections:

Circulation (plan 31) "IN" at internal connection F
Quench (plan 61) "IN" at connection Q (plugged with head screw plug #21)
( NPT)
Drainage (plan 61) "OUT" at connection D (plugged with head screw plug #21)
( NPT)
Pressure indicator ant connection P (plugged with head screw plug #21)
( NPT)
Supply piping:
Use pipes of stainless steel with a big cross-section.
Install the pipes continuously rising, as short and as convenient as possible for
the flow to ensure self-venting.
Avoid air inclusions and provide for venting connections, if necessary.
Clean the piping thoroughly.
Fasten all pipe connections pressure-sealed.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 15 / 19
OPERATION
Safe operation
During every state of operation the mechanical seal has to be constantly wetted by
the medium to be sealed in its liquid form, in particular when the machine is
started or stopped. The machine design has to be such as to take this necessity into
consideration.
Damages due to dry-running are excluded from the warranty.
If the medium to be sealed builds deposits or tends to solidify during cooling down or
standstill of the machine the stuffing box has to be flushed with suitable clean liquid.
The flow and the liquid should be determined by the user.
If the operation limit values and the instructions given in this manual are followed a
trouble-free operation of the mechanical seal can be expected.
Start up
Safety checks before start up

Seal assembly fixtures (19) removed
Torque transmission (shrink disk #part of customer) between mechanical seal and
shaft duly installed
Supply connections tightened pressure-sealed
Disposal connections installed environmentally safe
For a safe operation of the M.S. a circulation of the medium to be sealed is required,
from the pump housing via a cyclone separator to the seal, in accordance with API,
plan 31.
Flood machine and seal cavity (stuffing box) with process fluid.
Thoroughly vent seal cavity and circulation system.
After a short start up period repeat the venting procedure several times with the
machine being at standstill.
At outboard threaded connections are provided according to API, plan 61, for
purpose at user's option (e.g. for quench, leakage, venting etc.).
Now the seal is ready for operation.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 16 / 19
SERVICING
Maintenance
A correctly operated mechanical seal needs low maintenance. Wear parts, however,
have to be replaced, if necessary.
A duly operation includes a regular check of the following parameters:

Temperature
Leakage (drainage) rate of the mechanical seal
An inspection of the mechanical seal should be carried out during a revision of the
complete plant. We recommend to have this inspection be performed by responsible
BURGMANN personnel.
If the mechanical seal is removed during a revision of the plant the sliding faces
should be refinished at the manufacturer and both, elastomeric seal rings and springs
should be replaced.
Directives in case of failure
Try to define the kind of failure and record it.
In the event of excessive leakage, note changes in the leakage amount and
switch the machine off if necessary.
If a constant amount is leaking in a steady flow, the mechanical seal is damaged.
In the event of a inadmissible temperature rise, the machine has to be stopped
for safety reasons.
If there is a malfunction which you cannot correct on your own, or if the cause of
malfunction is not clearly recognisable please immediately contact the nearest
BURGMANN agency, a BURGMANN service centre or the BURGMANN
headquarters.
During the warranty period the BURGMANN mechanical seal must only be
disassembled with approval of the manufacturer or when a representative is present.
After-sales service by BURGMANN
BURGMANN's customer service department offers a comprehensive service

package covering consultancy, engineering, standardisation, installation,
commissioning as well as damage analysis right through to seminars on sealing
technology.
Addresses are listed in various BURGMANN brochures as well as under

www.burgmann.com.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 17 / 19
Reconditioning (repair)
If reconditioning is necessary, the complete seal should be sent to the
manufacturer, as this is the best way to find out which components can be
reconditioned or which parts must be replaced in order to ensure an optimum
tightness.
If, for compelling reasons, a reconditioning has to be carried out on site (e.g. no.
spare seal on stock, long transport, problems with customs) the seal may be repaired
in a clean room by trained personnel of the user under the direction of BURGMANN
mechanics.
Disassembly / removal
Stop the machine as instructed, allow to cool, depressurise and

ensure that pressure cannot build up again.
Work on the M.S. is only permitted when the machine is at a standstill
and depressurised.
There must be no product on the M.S. if necessary drain the
machine and rinse it out.
Isolate the machine to prevent it starting up unexpectedly.
Comply with the safety notes (safety data sheets).
IMPORTANT! When removing, please observe by all means:

current accident prevention regulations
regulations for handling hazardous substances
WARNING! Seals that have been used with hazardous substances must be properly
cleaned so that there is no possible danger to people or to the environment.
IMPORTANT! The packaging used to transport the seal must

be identified with the relevant hazard symbol and
include the safety data sheet for the product and/or supply medium.
If the medium to be sealed builds deposits or tends to solidify during cooling down or
standstill of the machine the stuffing box has to be flushed with suitable clean liquid.
The flow and the liquid should be determined by the user.
The order of disassembly to remove the mechanical seal out of the machine depends
on the design of the machine and should be determined by the machine
manufacturer.
During removal of the mechanical seal the drive auxiliaries (closing device for the
shaft exit, holding device for agitator shaft, etc.) have to be used in accordance
with the instructions of the drive manufacturer.
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 18 / 19
Shut off (or drain) the supply system.
Remove the supply piping to the mechanical seal. Collect drained liquid and
dispose it properly.
Drain the mechanical seal. Collect the drained liquid and dispose it properly.
IMPORTANT! Insert the assembly fixtures (19) into the groove in the shaft sleeve (11)
and fasten them.
Relieve the shrink disk (part of customer) by loosening the screws in sequence.
Loosen all screw connections between seal cartridge and the respective machine
parts.
Remove the seal in the reverse sequence as described for assembly (set up).
For an easier removal of the seal cartridge it is equipped with forcing threads.
Spare parts
Only BURGMANN original spare parts must be used. Otherwise

Risks of a seal failure, endangering persons and environment.
The BURGMANN guarantee for the mechanical seal lapses.
For a quick exchange a complete spare seal should be on stock.
Required details for enquiries and orders
For enquiries and orders the following details are required:

BURGMANN commission no.
Drawing no. of mechanical seal: SHV8/165-E1
Part item no., designation, material, number of pieces acc. to drawing.
Address of headquarters:
Burgmann Industries GmbH & Co. KG
Postfach 1240
D - 82515 Wolfratshausen
Germany
+49 (0) 81 71-23 0
Fax +49 (0) 81 71-23 12 14
www.burgmann.com
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

Operating Manual
SHV8/165-E1 page 19 / 19
Disposal of the BURGMANN mechanical seal
Usually, the BURGMANN mechanical seals can be easily disposed after a thorough
cleaning.
Metal parts (steels, stainless steels, non-ferrous heavy metals) divided into the
different groups belong to scrap metal waste.
Ceramic materials (synthetic carbons, ceramics, carbides) belong to waste
products. They can be separated from their housing materials, as are
physiologically recognised as safe.
Synthetic materials/plastics (elastomers, PTFE) belong to special waste.
CAUTION! Material containing fluorine must not be burnt.
IMPORTANT! Some of the synthetic materials, divided into the different groups can be
recycled.
Copyright
The Burgmann Industries GmbH & Co. KG (Germany) holds the copyright to this
document. Customers and operators of mechanical seals are free to use this
document in the preparation of their own documentation. No claims of any type or
form can be derived in such instance.
We reserve the right to carry out technical modifications of the product, even if
they have not yet been considered in this manual.
April 23, 2007

Department Technical Documentation
en SHV8/165-E1 / April 23, 2007 Rev. 0

EagleBurgmann Industries UK LP
12 Welton Road, Wedgnock Industrial Estate, Warwick CV34 5PZ
Fax : 01926 - 417617 Telephone : 01926 - 417621
OPERATING MANUAL
BURGMANN CYCLONE SEPARATOR
06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2
These instructions are intended for the

assembly, operating and control personnel
and should be kept at hand on site.
PLEASE READ this manual carefully and OBSERVE the information contained as to:
06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 - Rev. 0 -
Operating Manual
06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 Page 2
Safety Start up Removal

Storage Maintenance Repair
Installation
If there are any unclear points please contact BURGMANN by all means.
MANUFACTURER
EagleBurgamannIndutriesUKLP DRAWINGS
12 Welton Road
Wedgenock Ind Est Assembly drawing
Warwick 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2
CV34 5PZ
United Kingdom The assembly drawing in the original
scale and in its latest edition (latest
revision) only is decisive for the design
DECLARATION and the use in connection with this
within the meaning of the EC-directive manual.
Machinery In the following description all figures in
parentheses, e.g. (2) define the
A cyclone separator does not function respective part item no. in the
independently. It is intended to be assembly drawing.
assembled with machinery.
DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
Cyclone separators of the ZY series
are used to clean mainly aqueous
06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 liquids containing dirt and solids in
suspension (e.g. in circulation systems
Cyclone separator with replaceable of sewage sludge, crude, etc.).
insert made of elastomer or ceramic
The best possible filtration efficiency is
achieved if the specific weight of the
solids is much higher than that of the
OPERATING LIMITS carrier liquid, and if the differential
pressure is as large as possible.
Design pressure (bar) 150/128/116 The viscosity of the medium is also a
factor that needs to be taken into
Design temperature C) 38/93/149
account.
Differential pressure (bar) min. 1.5 Legend
Connections (inch) flange ANSI 1 = Pin 2 = Housing 3 = insert
B16.5 -
CL900-RF 4 = Cap Screw 5 = Cover 6 = O-Ring
Weight, approx. (kg) 30
Height (mm) 292
Materials: housing / cover 316/316L
Materials: O-rings V10
*) with elastomer insert
DESIGNATED USE
Operation under conditions lying
outside those limits stated in
paragraph operating limits is
considered contrary to its
designated use.
Should the cyclone separator be

operated under conditions other
than those recommended
BURGMANN has to be asked for
recognition as safe.
- Rev. 0 - 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2
Operating Manual
06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2 Page 3
may not be claimed on the BURGMANN

company with reference to their
warranty. HOW TO ORDER
For enquiries and orders the following

INSTALLATION details are required:
Installation of the cyclone separator

must be in vertical position only. BURGMANN commission no.
The pressure at outlets C and Drawing no. of cyclone separator :

B must be lower than at inlet A . 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2
Cleaned liquid is conveyed to the top Part item no., designation, material,
( B ) and the separated dirt to the number of pieces.
suction port of the pump.
Address of headquarters
The local regulations as well as the Product field "Supply systems":
rules for the prevention of accidents
have to be observed.
EagleBurgmannIndustries
For installation the assembly drawing 12 Welton Road
06-ZY61S5/NW12-A1 has to be on Warwick
hand CV34 5PZ
United Kingdom
The cyclone separator has to be
installed very carefully and under the +49-1926 417600
cleanest conditions. Telefax +49-1926 417617
Do not force during installation.
Installation into the piping of the
circulation circuit.
The cyclone separator is ready for AFTER-SALES
operation.
The range of services offered by
BURGMANN not only includes advise
SAFE OPERATION during the planning stages but also
technical support after commissioning.
If the operation limit values and the This is supported by a world-wide
instructions given in this manual are comprehensive network of
observed a trouble-free operation of subsidiaries, field engineers and
the cyclone separator can be expected. service centres.
Addresses are listed in the known

BURGMANN Design Manuals as well
TROUBLES as in various other BURGMANN
brochures.
Try to define the kind of failure and
record it.
If there is a malfunction which you
cannot correct on your own, or if the
cause of malfunction is not clearly
recognizable please immediately
contact the nearest BURGMANN
agency, a BURGMANN service centre
or the BURGMANN headquarters.
REPAIR
Repair of the cyclone separator is only
possible by trained user personnel
replacing a damaged insert (3).
Replacing must only be carried ouit
when the circulation circuit is
pressureless !
SPARE PARTS
Only BURGMANN original parts must
be used. Not observing this damages
- Rev. 0 - 06-ZY201S9/NW19-A2
Document No: DriveCplg 01

Section 5 Drive Coupling Revision: 0
5 Drive Coupling
The drive coupling equipment manufacturers information is included next as an insert to the
manual.
K:\Module Update\S5 DriveCplg 01-0.doc

Cannon Way, Mill Street West, Dewsbury, West Yorkshire England, WF13 1EH.
Tel: +44 (0) 1924 460 801 Fax: +44 (0) 1924 457 668
INSTALLATION, OPERATING AND

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR
BIBBY TURBOFLEX COUPLINGS HAVING
BOLTED ADAPTORS AND HUBS.
C. N. McConnell (chapters 4 5 & 6 added) 20/02/07 C

C. N. McConnell 18/01/07 B
C. N. McConnell 12/01/06 A
AUTHOR DATE ISSUE
DOCUMENT NUMBER MANUAL 2LAH STD C
Contents
Contents ...................................................................................................................................................... 2
Preface......................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 General Notes ...................................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Dos .............................................................................................................................................. 4
1.2 Donts ........................................................................................................................................... 4
2 Description of Coupling.......................................................................................................................5
3 Operating Conditions .......................................................................................................................... 5
4 Product indentification/marking for non-electrical equipment.......................................................... 6
5 Limitations of product use .................................................................................................................. 7
6 Product servicing................................................................................................................................. 7
7 Maintenance Instructions.................................................................................................................... 8
8 Alignment Instructions........................................................................................................................ 9
8.1 Alignment Method:........................................................................................................................ 9
8.2 Axial: ............................................................................................................................................ 9
8.3 Parallel / Radial / Angular:............................................................................................................. 9
9 Installation Instructions .................................................................................................................... 10
9.1 Maximum Element Compression. ................................................................................................ 12
10 Removal Instructions..................................................................................................................... 12
Page 2 of 12
Preface
This manual covers the general installation, maintenance and operating requirements of Bibby Turboflex disc
couplings having the following configuration.
2LAH, Couplings having hubs supplied for both ends
LAH/LA, Couplings having a hub for one end and an adaptor at the other end to interface with the customers
flange.
2LA, Coupling having adaptors at both ends to interface with the customers flanges.
All configurations are generically a 2LA design, however hubs may be supplied to give the LAH/LA or 2LAH
configurations.
Page 3 of 12
1 General Notes
It is essential that a competent person carry out all the instructions contained in the following documents.
Should any problems be anticipated or encountered then Bibby Turboflex personnel are available for site
visits or, alternatively, repairs and overhauls can be undertaken in our works.
Prior to performing any maintenance works (including inspections) it is essential that the power supply is
isolated and that no accidental movement of rotating machinery is possible.
This product is designed for a specific purpose. It is vital that it is not used for any purpose other than that for
which it is designed and supplied, and that the limits of its capacities, as detailed here or in any other
document, are not exceeded.
No liability will be accepted and any warranty, either expressed or implied, will be null and void should any
component of whatever kind, including nuts, bolts and washers, be used in the assembly, or modifications be
made to all or part of the product which are not supplied, specified or agreed by Bibby Turboflex.
1.1 Dos
The following instructions should be read and understood prior to starting any assembly or maintenance work
on the disc coupling.
Prior to fitting any component, care should be taken to ensure that it is clean and free from any dirt.
When tightening any bolts or screws, this should be done evenly, cylinder head fashion, to 50% torque then to
100% torque in the same sequence. Where specified it is essential that torque-tightening figures are not
exceeded nor should it be allowed for them to be below specification.
Whilst installing and removing the transmission unit, the unit should be supported to ensure that the weight is
not imposed on one side only.
Where hub/shaft connections require a standard interference fit the hubs may be heated in oil at 200-250
Celsius and rapidly positioned on the shaft. It is essential that this heat is evenly applied over the whole hub
and that spot heating is avoided.
Record the Bibby Turboflex order number, coupling type and size and any relevant information for future
use.
Contact Bibby Turboflex for refurbishment works and spare components.
1.2 Donts
Do not use any component that is not supplied or approved by Bibby Turboflex in the assembly of this
product.
Do not attempt, where the weight of the unit is excessive, to lift the coupling without the use of lifting
equipment.
The inherent balance of these couplings could be disturbed if they are allowed to be knocked either by striking
or rolling. Care should be taken when transporting and fitting to avoid such knocks. This is particularly when
a coupling is specifically balanced.
Page 4 of 12
2 Description of Coupling
The coupling is of the dry laminated diaphragm or disc type. Flexibility is obtained by the deformation of the
disc packs, within defined limits, which are separated by a tubular spacer.
Individual laminations are of regular polygonal profiles, which are assembled into a stack of previously
designated thickness and secured by bushing. Flexibility is accomplished by connecting through the bushed
holes, on a common pitch circle diameter, by means of bolts, alternately, to driving and driven components.
The bolts, bushes and associated holes are machined to close limits associated with fitted bolts. Due to the
need for reasonable ease of assembly, interference fits are undesirable and, consequently, tolerances are such
as to allow for a close slide or slight transition fit. To compensate for these clearances and to ensure the best
possible concentricity between components, the pitch circle diameter of the bolt holes in the flexible element
is made smaller than that of the mating holes in the adjacent components. On assembly, all inherent clearances
are, therefore, eliminated. Coupling bolts are sized such that they are capable of inducing a load equivalent to
4 times the tensile load in the flexible element laminations, between driving and driven bolt, when
transmitting the full rated continuous torque of the coupling. This assumes a coefficient of friction between
the various components of 0.25 but experience has shown that, due to the high loads induced, minute
compressive deformation is sufficient to raise this to about 0.3.
The reason for adopting this principle of using large, highly loaded, bolts is two-fold a) to prevent interface
slip, as already mentioned, and b) to eliminate any chance of bolt bending due to the overhung radial loading
imposed by the flexible element. Avoiding either slip or bending helps to avoid fretting which occurs when
bolts are designed only to drive in shear.
In general, the design is identical to a large number of units already in operation.
3 Operating Conditions
In operation the flexible elements are subjected to both tensile and bending stresses, each having an influence
on the allowable magnitude of the other. It is important, therefore, that the operating limits of the various
deflections for which the coupling is designed to accommodate, are kept, as far as practicable, within those
indicated on the Allowable Misalignment Curve which was individually supplied with the final engineering
data.
In practice, the initial alignment of the coupling should be as close as possible and within the alignment limits
given in the Installation Instructions. This will allow for changes during operation to remain within
allowable limits.
As the Bibby Turboflex units are designed to transmit the torque in friction between the driving and driven
bolts and the flexible elements, it is essential that, should the need arise, these bolts should be correctly
tightened to the torque indicated on the assembly drawing or in the Installation and Maintenance
Instructions.
Torque and speed should remain within the originally specified conditions.
Page 5 of 12
4 Product indentification/marking for non-electrical equipment.
Scope: Disc Coupling Assemblies, excluding component spares.
Equipment manufactured or supplied by Bibby Transmissions is marked legibly and indelibly, in a variety of
ways, with the following (subject to contractual obligations permitting): -
Name and telephone number of manufacturer
Designation of the series or type and size (Part Number)
Contract/Order Number and if applicable the unique serial number
If applicable, for equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres, the following will be
marked on the equipment in accordance with the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC and EN 13463-1
Name and address of manufacturer
Designation of the series or type and size (Part Number)
Contract/Order Number and if applicable the unique serial number
CE Mark.
Year of construction
Document of Conformity identification to ATEX Directive
The specific marking of explosion protection followed by the symbol of the equipment group
and category.
The letter G (concerning explosive atmospheres caused by gases, vapours or mists); and/or the letter D
(concerning explosive atmospheres caused by dust)
The letter c for constructional safety
The ambient temperature range when different to 200 C to 400 C
Page 6 of 12
5 Limitations of product use
Unless otherwise agreed with Bibby Transmissions, these products must selected in accordance with the
recommended selection procedure and must only be used within the performance criteria set out below: -
The rated torque capacities, which are stated in the product catalogue and/or product arrangement drawing.
A continuous temperature range of:-
General Purpose Disc Couplings
Series Designation D and DJ -20 C to 280 C

Series Designation DJCFT -20 C to 80 C
High Performance Disc Couplings
Alloy Steel Couplings -40 C to 280 C

Alloy Steel/Composite Spacer Shafts -20 C to 80 C
Within the permissible operating limits for angular, radial and axial misalignment.
6 Product servicing
Although with proper selection and careful installation a long working life and very high degree of operational
safety can be expected we would recommend that for ATEX certified couplings the element assembly, coupling
bolts and attachment screws are replaced at 50000 operational hour intervals.
The operation of a damaged coupling in a hazardous area is contrary to ATEX and in doing so becomes an
explosive hazard and is wholly the end users responsibility.
Page 7 of 12
7 Maintenance Instructions
General maintenance of the coupling consists of a check of the following during normal machinery
maintenance schedules. API617 references this time period as 3 years for compressor applications.
Axial, Angular & Parallel misalignment to ensure that these are still within the acceptable limits and that no
major movements have occurred.
All bolts to ensure that they are correctly tightened.
The flexible elements, by visual inspection, for signs of fatigue cracking local to the washer anchoring points
or general signs of fretting corrosion. Slight bowing or S like distortion is not detrimental to the operation of
the unit. Note that any cracking will begin at the outermost edge of the outside blade. This means that this
inspection is still possible without disturbing the element bolting. The element packs should be replaced at the
earliest opportunity should cracking / damage be detected.
Bibby Turboflex use self locking nuts containing a stainless steel spring insert. This gives a high level of
performance over many reinstallations. It is recommended by Bibby Turboflex that these be replaced after
being re-torqued 10-12 times.
Note: Any requirement for spare parts should be made quoting the original purchasers original purchase order
number and the coupling serial number. (This will be etched on the major coupling flanges) and will appear
on all documentation.
Page 8 of 12
8 Alignment Instructions
Bibby Turboflex Ltd. couplings will accept substantial amounts of misalignment, the configuration of each
individual unit defining the actual acceptable level. The allowable misalignment is shown graphically on a
curve produced uniquely for any unit. This curve shows the maximum permitted level of misalignment for
operation and is NOT intended to define set up limits.
8.1 Alignment Method:

Each company has its own method for aligning machinery all of which are well documented in both internal
and freely available documents and books. Hence it is not our intention to describe methods for setting
machines. Instead, the following gives guidelines for quick checks for alignment suitable after initial
installation and for general maintenance checks.
8.2 Axial:
The suggested limits for axial set up distance between the machinery shafts will generally be specified in the
installation instructions unique for the coupling. However, as a general rule, the following may be used:
4-bolt couplings:- +/- 0.4mm
These values may be exceeded in certain cases and, if no reference is made in the unique installation
instructions, reference should be made to Bibby Turboflex Ltd.
8.3 Parallel / Radial / Angular:

Having basically aligned the machinery shafts using one of the established techniques, the coupling may be
installed as per the instructions. It is then worth performing a check to establish that the overall alignment is
correct for the particular coupling. This may be simply performed by one of the following two methods:
Attach a dial indicator securely to the back of one of the coupling flanges, with the needle in contact with the
flange face the other side of the flexible element as near the outside periphery as possible. Rotate the
machinery & coupling and locate the minimum reading position. At this position, set the dial reading to zero.
Rotate the machinery again and record the maximum reading over 360 degrees. Divide this maximum value
by the coupling flange diameter to gain a value in mm/mm, which should be no greater than that shown in the
following list. (This should be repeated at both flexible elements in a spacer coupling).
An alternative method is, where possible, to accurately measure the distance across the flanges that sandwich
the flexible element to obtain a maximum and minimum value. The difference between these two values
should be divided by the flange outside diameter to obtain a value in mm/mm, which should be no greater
than that shown in the following list. (This should be repeated at both flexible elements in a spacer coupling).
4-bolt couplings - 0.004 mm/mm

NOTE: These values are intended as guides only and, in certain cases, may be exceeded. IF IN DOUBT,
CONTACT BIBBY TURBOFLEX LTD.
Page 9 of 12
9 Installation Instructions
No liability will be accepted, and any warranty, either expressed or implied, will be null and void should any
components of whatsoever kind, including nuts, bolts and washers, be used in the assembly or any modifications
be made to all or part of the unit which are not supplied, specified or agreed by Bibby Turboflex.
For general Safety, Alignment and Maintenance Instructions see other sections of this manual.
IMPORTANT: The main Coupling Bolts/Nuts at both ends are tightened by Bibby Turboflex, and should,
under normal circumstances, NOT BE TOUCHED unless specified in the installation instructions.
When tightening any other bolt or screw, this should be done evenly, i.e. cylinder head fashion, to 50% torque
then to 100% torque in the same sequence. Threads should be lubricated with Molybdenum Disulphide grease
or equivalent.
Check that the parallel & and axial misalignments of the shafts are within the limits defined on the separate
alignment sheet or curves. Bibby Turboflex do not recommend any specific alignment method as this varies
due to personnel preference, however the alignment should be within the operational envelope shown on the
misalignment curve. (Section 5 and separate operating curves)
1. Reference any applicable drawings for sizes and dimensions. Ensure that all required tools and equipment
are available.
2. The coupling is supplied in an assembled state with its misalignment capabilities locked by gagging
blocks and installation screws near the element packs. The coupling is packed appropriately for
transportation and storage. Inspect the coupling for:
Indication of deviation from specification to ensure that it conforms to requirements.
Potential damage due to transportation.
3. For balanced couplings, note any match markings, which must be aligned when the coupling is installed.
For 2LA configuration, go to step 6
4. For 2LAH and LAH/LA, the coupling must be split at the hub and adaptor joints to allow installation.
Remove the connecting nuts and bolts from the hub/adaptor flanges and using jacking screws force the
flanges apart. Store the nuts and bolts along with the packing ring and shims (if supplied) for future stages
of installation.
Figure 1: Typical coupling construction.
Page 10 of 12
5. The hubs may now be fitted to the driver and driven shafts. Where hub/shaft connections require a
standard interference fit the hubs may be heated in an oil bath or oven at 200-250 Celsius and rapidly
positioned on the shaft. It is essential that this heat is evenly applied over the whole hub and that spot
heating is avoided. Ensure that one shaft rotates so that the coupling match marks can be aligned.
6. Check the shafts (or flange face) misalignments and DBSE (distance between shaft ends) are within
allowable limits. (Reference Section 5 and also operating curves).
7. The main bolts in the transmission unit are factory assembled and must not be disturbed. Undo the
installation screws and remove the packing blocks if present. The coupling should now be in a relaxed
state.
Compression screws are generally

cap-head found mid way between
main coupling bolts.
If no packing ring or shims are supplied, go to step 12.
8. Measure the free length of the transmission unit. Add to this the thickness of the packing plate Record
this value as X.
9. Now measure the distance between the flange faces (DBFF) of the machinery. Adjust this length by either
subtracting pre-stretch or adding pre-compression. Record this value as Y.
10. Calculated the required number of shims from the following equation
Number of shims = (Y-X) shim thickness
Round this value to a whole number of shims. Shim thickness is approximately 0.381mm
11. Fit shims between packing ring and the transmission unit. Ensure match marks are aligned.
12. Install the installation screws and tighten in cylinder head fashion, maintaining parallelism between the
flange faces of the adaptor and spacer, until both elements packs are compressed by a minimum required
amount to allow the transmission unit to be put into position. Do not compress the elements beyond the
value stated in "Maximum Element Compression" Values.
13. Position the transmission unit between the hub (machinery) flanges, ensuring match marks are aligned.
14. Fit and tighten in cylinder head fashion the connecting bolts that pass through the packing ring and shims.
15. Release and remove the compression screws.
16. Fit and tighten in cylinder head fashion the connecting bolts that pass through the remaining flange. If a
pre-stretch is present, it may be necessary to pull the flanges together using the connecting bolts.
17. Ensure all match marks are aligned, all tooling is removed and inspect the coupling before operation.
Page 11 of 12
9.1 Maximum Element Compression.
It may be necessary to compress the element packs in order to fit the coupling. These values express the
maximum amount of compression allowed per element pack. However, it is recommended to use the
minimum amount of compression required when installing couplings.
Coupling bolt size Maximum Compression (mm)

per element pack
M6 1.75
M8 1.75
M10 2.0
M12 2.3
M14 2.3
M16 2.5
M18 2.5
M20 2.5
M22 3.0
M24 3.0
M27 3.0
M30 3.5
M33 3.5
M36 3.5
M39 4.0
M42 4.0
Contact Bibby Transmission for sizes not stated here.
10 Removal Instructions.
Coupling removal is a reverse of the above installation process ensuring that, upon re-installation, the above
process is again followed in careful sequence.
Page 12 of 12
Document No: DriveMotor 01

Section 6 Drive Motor Revision: 0
6 Drive Motor
The drive motor manufacturers information, and the associated equipment manufacturers
information, is included next as an insert to the manual.
K:\Module Update\S6 DriveMotor 01-0.doc

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. ABB
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SQUIRREL-CAGE INDUCTION MOTOR
CLIENT : ABB UK
PROJECT : Aramco Sulzer Khurais
TYPE : AMC 900M4A BSNV
OUR REFERENCE : 8000555/200
DRIVING : Pump
DATE : 2006-08-31
____________________________________________________
SECTION PAGE
A. RATED DATA 2
B. STANDARDS 2
C. OTHER PERFORMANCE DATA 2
D. SITE CONDITIONS 2
E. STARTING CHARACTERISTICS 3
F. INSTALLATION DATA 4
G. INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 5
H. WORKSHOP TESTS 7
K. REMARKS 7
J. Equivalent Circuit Diagram 8
MOTOR CURVES : 3BSY 200026-ETX
PAGE
- CURRENT & POWERFACTOR - SPEED CURVES, DOL 1
- TORQUE & SPEED CURVES, DOL 2
- TIME & TERMINAL VOLTAGE SPEED CURVES, DOL 3
- CURRENT & POWERFACTOR - SPEED CURVES, 80 % VOLTAGE 4

- TORQUE & SPEED CURVES, 80 % VOLTAGE 5
- TIME & TERMINAL VOLTAGE SPEED CURVES, 80 % VOLTAGE 6
SHORT CIRCUIT EQUATIONS 3BSY 200011-ETX
MAGNETIC FORCE AS A FUNCTION OF AXIAL DISPLACEMENT 8000555D0009 A
AL009337
No. of sh.
Prep. ATAP/MME Savinovic 2006-09-14 Technical Specification
Appr. Johansson Magnus J 2007-10-15 SULZER Khurais 9
Resp.
dept.
ATAP/MK 8000555/200
Document number Lang. Rev. ind. Sheet
ABB Automation Technologies 3BSY200001-ETX en C 1

TEMPLATE: NORMAL.DOT; PRINTDATE: 2007-10-15 1:10:00 PM; SAVEDATE: 2007-10-15 13:10; OSKAR VERSION: 3.35 (2006-06-29)
A. RATED DATA
Output (continuous duty) kW : 9694 HP : 13000

Torque kNm : 51.8 lbf ft : 38215
Power factor : 0.92
Voltage V (10%) : 13200 Y-Connection
Frequency Hz (5%) : 60
Speed r/min : 1787
Current A : 477 A
B. STANDARDS
Applicable standards : NEMA, 17-SAMSS-502

Insulation class : F
Temperature rise within class : B
Increased safety, Standards/Form : NEC article 505
C. OTHER PERFORMANCE DATA
Efficiency at 100 / 75 / 50 / 25 % load* % : 96.0 95.8 95.0 91.6

Efficiency at 100 / 75 / 50 / 25 % load (guaranteed)* % : 95.1 94.9 93.4 88.9
Power factor at 100 / 75 / 50 / 25 % load* : 0.92 0.93 0.92 0.84

*(Sinusoidal feeding)
No-load current A : 66.6

Max. compensation kVAR : 1359
Break down torque % : 227
Max. continuous negative sequence current % : 19
D. SITE CONDITIONS
Ambient temperature range C : 0 - 50 F : 32 - 122

Altitude m : < 1000 ft : < 3280
Location : Outdoors
Hazardous area classification : Class 1, Zone2, Group IIA, T2

E. STARTING CHARACTERISTICS
Load break away torque % : 6

Load torque at full speed % : 64 A
Load inertia J (at motor speed) kgm2 : 227 lb-ft2 : 5387
Short circuit capacity at motor bus MVA : 0 (used in start calculations)
Starting method : DOL
Terminal voltage at start % : 100 80

Current at start % : 481 379
Current at start, guaranteed. No positive tolerance % : 580 450 B
Mean torque at break away % : 46 29
Mean torque at 50 % speed % : 62 39
Starting time (+20%) s : 12.2 26.7 A
Locked rotor time, cold s : 9.5 21.5 B
Locked rotor time, warm s : 7.5 20.5 B
Stall time, cold s : 9.5 21.5 B
Stall time, warm s : 7.5 20.5 B
Number of successive starts from cold : 3

Number of successive starts from warm : 2

F. INSTALLATION DATA
Protection form and cooling form : TEAAC
Heat losses (sinusoidal feeding):

- Cooling air kW : 447 ( at 9694 kW )
Arrangement form : IM 1001
Sleeve bearings:
- Max. axial play towards D-end mm : 6.5 in : 0.256
- Max. axial play towards N-end mm : 6.5 in : 0.256
- Max. permissible axial thrust kN : 0 lbf : 0
- Oil temperature range to bearings C : 40 - 65 F : 104 - 149
- Type of oil : ISO VG 46
- Degree of purity for oil : 17/15/12 acc. to ISO 4406:1999
Weights:
- Total (complete machine, excluding terminal box) kg : 42000 lb : 92610 A
- Stator kg : 11150 lb : 24540 A
- Rotor kg : 10400 lb : 22928 A
Rotor inertia kgm2 : 1446 lb-ft2 : 34302
Direction of rotation (at drive end, facing shaft end) : COUNTER CLOCKWISE
First lateral critical speed (based on stiff foundation) rpm : 2250
Noise level (at 1m acc.to ISO 3744) dB(A) : 86 , Tol. +0 dB(A)
Static force on each machine foot kN : 103 lbf :23036 A

Dynamic force on each machine foot kN : 195 lbf : 43890 A

G. INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Cooling arrangement TEAAC

Self circulated inner air circuit cooled by
built-on air-air heat exchanger.
Mounting arrangement IM 1001

Horizontal machine with two bearings,
one shaft extension.
DE shaft end cylindrical with key.
Coupling half and shaft end details

Coupling half to be supplied by others.
Finish boring of coupling by customer.
Mounting by ABB.
Rotor balanced with half key.
Foundation details
Machine provided with 4 feet.
Holding down bolts, mounting shims, dowel pins and horizontal machine jacking bolts.
No alignment or grouting included in ABB scope of supply.
Jacking bolts vertical adjustment.
Bearings
Sleeve bearings suitable for flood oil lubrication
provided by others.
Connection at each bearing
The lube oil drain pressure must be less than or

equal to the machine ambient pressure.
An oil drain pressure of 200-1000 Pa lower than
the bearing ambient is recommended.
Customer connection flange acc. to ANSI B16.5 Cl.150.
Inlet pipe in stainless steel.

Outlet pipe in stainless steel.
Orifice valve for pressure reduction.
Bearings not provided with emergency oil ring.

Machines with 4-lobe bearings have an emergency running time of 3 seconds.
Make sure that in case of failure of the oil supply system a backup system
will start within 3 seconds.

Main terminal
Standard stator terminal box, left side.
Complies with IEEE/ANSI.
Stator terminal box protection IP55 with all 6

ends brought out and neutral point terminated
inside the box. Connection from underneath.
Grounding clamps inside and outside.
The main terminal box is delivered as a loose item,

assembly on site is not included in ABB's scope of supply.
3 - Current transformers in neutral and line, self

balancing connection
Line side
3 - Surge capacitor
3 - Lightning arrestors
3 IRIS buscouplers
Anticondensation heaters
"Black heat" anti condensation heaters.
In main both machine and MTB
Termination in separate boxes (normally opposite

main supply side).
The anticondensation heaters should always be

connected during stand still.
Measurement and control

Resistance temperature detectors
All PT100 double elements (excl. stator) ANSI.
9 in the stator winding

2 in each bearing
Oil sight glass on sleeve bearing housing, 1 per bearing.
1 Key phasor and 1 proximitor A
Vibration control proximity type in two radial planes, 90 apart

2 probes per bearing mounted outboard the bearing centerline
2 proximitors per bearing
including mounting and intercables.
Acceptance test for shaft run-out measurement is made in V-blocks.
Burnishing surface for proximity type of vibration probes,

maximum combined electrical and mechanical run out 13 m (0.51 mils) peak-to-peak.
Bonding.

Surface treatment
Epoxy-Offshore coating acc. to ISO 12944 C5M.
Primer coating - two component zinc rich epoxy primer : 75 m 3.0 mils
Intermediate coating - two component epoxy : 200 m 7.9 mils
Finish coating - acrylic two component isocyanate free topcoat : 60 m 2.4 mils
Colour : Green RAL 6021
Tools for rotor removal

Rotor extension tool design with 2 m non split tube.
H. WORKSHOP TESTS
ABB Automation Technologies standard procedure is to

perform a type test for a single machine order. If two or
more identical machines are ordered, then a type test is
performed on the first machine and routine tests on the
remaining machines.
Proposed workshop tests according to enclosed

INSPECTION PLAN are part of our manufacturing
program and are part of the quoted price of the machine.
Witnessing of testing
Participation in a test specially arranged, time to be agreed between

ABB Automation Technologies and customer, 2 weeks advance notice,
date will be confirmed 1 week prior to scheduled test date.
The performance calculations are carried out and presented
to customer during his visit.
K. REMARKS
Catalog no. 5000353

J. E Q U I V A L E N T C I R C U I T D I A G R A M
_______ _______
I1 | | ********* UE ********* | | I2'
*--->--| R1 |-----*X1 SIG *------*------*X2 SIG'*-----| R2'/S |--<---
|_______| ********* | ********* |_______| |
| ----*---- |
| | | |
| Z EIN ***** ----- |
| U1 =====> * * | | |
| COS PHI *X H* |RFE| |
| * * | | |
| ***** ----- |
| | | |
V ----*---- |
| |
*-----------------------------------*-----------------------------------
U1, I1, Z ein : phase values X1 sig, X2 sig' : saturated values
ue : ratio ue2 : ratio squared
X2 sig' = ue2 * (Q2/3) * X2 sig I2' = I2 / ue R2' = ue2 * (Q2/3) * R2
--------------------
0 Data for rated operation (with iron, friction, ventilation, and addit. losses)
----------------------------
U1 = 7621. V R1 = 0.05411 OHM X H = 113.243 OHM
I1 = 476.5 A R2' = 0.11134 OHM R FE = 5505.8 OHM
I2 = 2134.3 A X1 SIG = 2.159 OHM N NENN = 1787.3 1/MIN
Z EIN = 16.157 OHM X2 SIG' = 1.795 OHM M NENN = 51801. NM
COS PHI = 0.9307 UE = 4.639 F NENN = 60.0 HZ
ETA = 0.9569 S KIPP = 0.0310 PU M KIPP = 118354. NM
----------------------------
0 Data for short circuit (s = 1, with 100 % voltage)
----------------------------
U1 = 7621. V R1 = 0.05411 OHM X H = 113.243 OHM
I1 = 2292.2 A R2' = 0.01805 OHM R FE = 5505.8 OHM
I2 = 10509.8 A X1 SIG = 1.982 OHM ALFA1 SA = 0.9181
Z EIN = 3.325 OHM X2 SIG' = 1.340 OHM ALFA2 SA = 0.9181
COS PHI = 0.1011 UE = 4.639 M A = 23575. NM

REVISION
Rev. Page (P) Description Date
ind. Chapt.(C) Dept./Init.
A P3 New pump load curve. Curve no. 4-104.451.432. Load torque at 2006-11-30
full speed was 60%. Starting time was 11.7 and 24.4 seconds. MME/DS
Current was 475 A.
A P4 Weights and foundation dimensions revised.
A P6 Key phasor added

B P3 No positive tolerance added 2007-05-23
Locked rotor time and stall time added MME/DS
B P8 Equivalent Circuit Diagram added
C P7 Colour changed to RAL 6021 from ABB standard blue 2007-10-15

/MMO/MJ

Formulas for torsional analysis calculations
Airgap torque equation - 3-phase short circuit
Torque(t) = - 5.40 * e(-t/0.041) * sin(wt) p.u.
Max. torque = -4.89 p.u. after 4.00 ms
Airgap torque equation - 2-phase short circuit
Torque(t) = 1.35 * (1 + e(-t/0.041)) * sin(2wt) - 2.70 * (e(-t/0.083) + e(-t/0.041)) * sin(wt) p.u.
Airgap torque equation - start from standstill
Torque(t)= 0.46 * (1 + e(-t/ 5.74) e(-t/0.042)) - 4.51 * (cos(wt-1.47) e(-t/ 5.74) + cos(wt+1.47) e(-t/0.042)) p.u.
Max. torque = 4.78 p.u. after 212.3 ms
Airgap torque equation - automatic reclosing at high speed
Torque(t) = e(-t/0.057) (-3.65 + -6.50 * cos(wt-2.166))
Rated torque: 1.0 p.u. = 51.81 kNm
t = time in seconds
w = 2 * pi * 60.0 at 60.0 Hz line frequency
AL009337
Prep. ATAP/MME Savinovic 2006-08-31 Short circuit equations No. of sh.
Appr. Savinovic Djordje 2006-09-13 SULZER Khurais 2

Resp.
dept.
ATAP/MK 8000555/200
ABB Automation Technologies 3BSY200011-ETX en 1

TEMPLATE: NORMAL.DOT; PRINTDATE: 2006-09-13 09:59; SAVEDATE: 2006-09-13 09:39; OSKAR VERSION: 3.35 (2006-06-29)
REVISION
ABB Automation Technologies 3BSY200011-ETX en 2

TEMPLATE: NORMAL.DOT; PRINTDATE: 2006-09-13 09:59; SAVEDATE: 2006-09-13 09:39; OSKAR VERSION: 3.35 (2006-06-29)
CURRENT & POWERFACTOR - SPEED CURVES, DOL

AMC 900M4A BSNV 9694 kW 60 Hz 0.92 PF 13200 V 477 A 1787 rpm
6.0 1.00
5.4 0.90
1.
4.8 0.80
4.2 0.70
3.6 0.60
POWER FACTOR
CURRENT [p.u.]
3.0 0.50
2.4 0.40
1.8 0.30
1.2 0.20
2.
0.6 0.10
0.0 0.00
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
SPEED [p.u.]
1. Current at 100 % voltage
2. Power factor at 100 % voltage
CURRENT 1 p.u. = 477.0 A
SPEED 1 p.u. = 1800.0 rpm
AL009337
No. of sh.
Prep. ATAP/MME Savinovic 2006-11-30 Motor Curves
Appr. Bergman Leif I 2007-10-12 SULZER Khurais 8
Resp.
dept.
ATAP/MK 8000555/200

TORQUE - SPEED CURVES, DOL

2.50
2.25
2.00
1.75
1.50
TORQUE [p.u.]
1.25
1.00
0.75
2.
0.50
0.25
1.
0.00
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
SPEED [p.u.]
1. Load torque
2. Average torque at 100 % voltage
TORQUE 1 p.u.= 51.8 kNm
SPEED 1 p.u.= 1800.0 rpm

TIME & TERMINAL VOLTAGE - SPEED CURVES, DOL

14.0 1.0
12.6 0.9
11.2 0.8
9.8 0.7
TERMINAL VOLTAGE [p.u.]

8.4 0.6
TIME [SEC]
7.0 0.5
5.6 0.4
4.2 0.3
2.
2.8 0.2
1.4 0.1
0.0 0.0
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
SPEED [p.u.]
2. Starting time at 100 % voltage
LOAD INERTIA J = 227.0 kgm2 SPEED 1 p.u. =1800.0 rpm

ROTOR INERTIA J = 1439.9 kgm2 TERMINAL VOLTAGE 1 p.u. =13200.0 V

CURRENT & POWERFACTOR - SPEED CURVES, 80% VOLTAGE

4.0 1.00
1.
3.6 0.90
3.2 0.80
2.8 0.70
2.4 0.60
POWER FACTOR
CURRENT [p.u.]
2.0 0.50
1.6 0.40
1.2 0.30
0.8 0.20
2.
0.4 0.10
0.0 0.00
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
SPEED [p.u.]
1. Current at 80 % voltage
2. Power factor at 80 % voltage
CURRENT 1 p.u. = 477.0 A
SPEED 1 p.u. = 1800.0 rpm

TORQUE - SPEED CURVES, 80% VOLTAGE

1.50
1.35
1.20
1.05
0.90
TORQUE [p.u.]
0.75
0.60
0.45
2.
0.30
0.15
1.
0.00
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
SPEED [p.u.]
1. Load torque
2. Average torque at 80 % voltage
TORQUE 1 p.u.= 51.8 kNm
SPEED 1 p.u.= 1800.0 rpm

TIME & TERMINAL VOLTAGE - SPEED CURVES, 80% VOLTAGE

30.0 1.0
27.0 0.9
24.0 0.8
21.0 0.7
TERMINAL VOLTAGE [p.u.]

18.0 0.6
TIME [SEC]
15.0 0.5
12.0 0.4
9.0 0.3
2.
6.0 0.2
3.0 0.1
0.0 0.0
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
SPEED [p.u.]
2. Starting time at 80 % voltage
LOAD INERTIA J = 227.0 kgm2 SPEED 1 p.u. =1800.0 rpm

ROTOR INERTIA J = 1439.9 kgm2 TERMINAL VOLTAGE 1 p.u. =13200.0 V

THERMAL CAPABILITY CURVE

10000.
1000. 2.
1.
100.
8.
TIME [SEC.]
6. 7.
4.
10. 5. 3.
1.
0.1
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
STATOR CURRENT [p.u.]
1. Running warm 3. Stalling warm 5. Starting at rated voltage
2. Running cold 4. Stalling cold 6. Starting at 80% voltage CURRENT 1 p.u. = 477A
7. Acceleration curve at 100% voltage
8. Acceleration curve at 80% voltage

REVISION
A P2-3 New pump load curve. Curve no. 4-104.451.432. Load torque at 2006-11-30
P5-6 full speed was 60%. Starting time was 11.7 and 24.4 seconds MME/DS
B P7 Thermal capability curve added 2007-05-23
MME/DS
C P7 Acceleration curves added. Curve 1 and 2 corrected 2007-10-09
MME/LB

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information
contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third
parties without express authority is strictly forbidden.
ABB
Itm Qty Location Article no Specification Name Remark

1 3 In machine 3BSM 013326-A 120V 400W Space heater.
I maskinhus Vrmare. Tranberg AS
2 2 D- and ND-bearings 3BSM 014541-A 3-wire dubbel RTD in bearing.
D- och ND-lager RTD i lager. Minco
3 1 D-bearing 3BSY 800048-ETX EMZLB 22-280 Bearing insulated. RENK
D-lager Mittflnslager isol.
4 1 ND-bearing 3BSY 800048-ETX EMZLB 22-280 Bearing insulated. RENK
ND-lager Mittflnslager isol.
5 4 D-and-ND bearing 3BSM 016775-A BN-givare 3300 Vibration transmitter.
D- och ND-lager Vibrationsgivare. Bentely Nevada
6 1 ND-bearing 3BSM 016775-A BN-givare 3300 Key phasor
ND-lager Key phasor Bentaly Nevada
ISS
SULZER Khurais Based on Pcl 808253 Reg No Machine Parts List
ABB UK Prepared 06-11-23 P.Kaskikallio List of machine details
Type des. AMC 900M4A BSNV Approved 06-12-07 L. Natterlund
Intended for Resp dept ATAP/MKK Take over dept Revision Lang 82
Trade name 8000555/200 Page 1
ABB Automation Technologies 3BSY 200004-ETX Cont -
Installation & Maintenance Squirrelcage Motors AMB
& AMC
Squirrelcage Motors AMB & AMC
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1.1 General.........................................................................................................................1
1.2 Operative range and intended application ...................................................................1
1.3 Information on electromagnetic compatibility ............................................................1
1.4 Required qualifications for erection and operating personnel .....................................1
Chapter 2 - Safety instructions

2.1 Safety ...........................................................................................................................2
2.2 Site conditions..............................................................................................................2
2.3 Prerequisites.................................................................................................................2
2.4 Contraindications .........................................................................................................3
Chapter 3 - Storage and transport

3.1 Inspection of delivery ..................................................................................................4
3.2 Oil lubricated bearings.................................................................................................4
3.3 Rotor transport lock .....................................................................................................4
3.4 Turning a vertical motor to the horizontal position .....................................................5
3.5 Storage of the motor ....................................................................................................9
3.5.1 Short term storage of crated motor .............................................................9
3.5.2 Long term storage of crated motor .............................................................9
3.5.3 Short term storage of uncrated motor .......................................................10
3.5.4 Long term storage of uncrated motor .......................................................11
3.5.5 Space heater ..............................................................................................11
3.5.6 Prevention of corrosion damage an air-water coolers...............................11
Chapter 4 - Preparing for commissioning

4.1 Removing the rotor transport lock .............................................................................12
4.1.1 Motors with anti-friction bearings ............................................................12
4.1.2 Motor with sleeve bearings.......................................................................12
4.2 Mounting the coupling hub........................................................................................12
4.2.1 Cylindrical-bore coupling hub with a feather key ....................................13
4.2.2 Cylindrical-bore coupling hub with a shrink fit (plain or stepped seat) ...14
4.2.3 Taper-bore coupling hub with a shrink fit.................................................15
4.3 Installing the motor....................................................................................................15
4.3.1 Prerequisites for installation .....................................................................15
4.4 Foundation .................................................................................................................17
4.4.1 Grouting ....................................................................................................17
4.4.2 Installation of motor with soleplates.........................................................17
4.5 Aligning to driven equipment ....................................................................................18
4.5.1 Influence of the axial position of the rotor on motor alignment...............18
4.5.1.1 Motors without a guide bearing (sleeve bearing designs) .......18
4.5.2 Motors with guide bearings (anti-friction or special
sleeve bearing design)...............................................................................18
4.5.3 Increase in shaft height due to thermal expansion....................................19
3BSM 008369, rev. E i

Table of Contents
4.5.4 Alignment procedure ................................................................................20

4.5.5 Tightening torque for the anchor bolts......................................................21
4.5.6 Alignment report.......................................................................................21
4.5.7 Additional information for vertical motors...............................................22
4.5.7.1 General.....................................................................................22
4.5.7.2 Vertical motors with sleeve bearings .......................................22
4.5.8 Bearings ....................................................................................................22
4.5.9 Anti-friction bearings................................................................................22
4.5.10 Sleeve bearings .........................................................................................22
4.5.10.1 Laying the oil pipes .................................................................23
4.5.10.2 Layout of oil supply system.....................................................23
4.5.10.3 Monitoring of the oil supply system ........................................24
4.5.11 Bearing temperature monitoring...............................................................24
4.5.12 Bearing insulation .....................................................................................24
4.6 Mounting the ventilation unit ....................................................................................25
4.6.1 AMB motors .............................................................................................25
4.6.2 AMC motors .............................................................................................25
4.6.3 Air-to-water cooler ...................................................................................25
4.7 Electrical connections ................................................................................................25
4.7.1 Insulation resistance..................................................................................25
4.7.1.1 Minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance ..............25
4.7.2 Cable penetration plate on the terminal box .............................................27
4.7.3 Terminals, preparing for connection .........................................................28
4.7.4 Cleaning the terminals ..............................................................................28
4.7.5 Measures to prevent oxidation and corrosion ...........................................28
4.7.6 Stud terminals ...........................................................................................28
4.7.7 Bar terminals.............................................................................................29
4.7.8 Fully insulated connectors ........................................................................30
4.7.9 Fastening the bolts for the terminal connectors ........................................31
4.7.10 Earthing.....................................................................................................31
4.7.11 Earth brushes.............................................................................................31
Chapter 5 - Commissioning
5.1 Sleeve bearings with forced oil lubrication ...............................................................32
5.2 Direction of rotation...................................................................................................32
5.3 Air to water coolers....................................................................................................33
5.3.1 General......................................................................................................33
5.3.2 Prevention of corrosion damage on air-to-water coolers..........................33
5.4 Starting frequency......................................................................................................33
5.5 Starting, operation, shut-down...................................................................................34
5.6 Continuous monitoring during operation...................................................................34
3BSM 008369, rev. E ii

Table of Contents
5.7 Check list ...................................................................................................................35

5.7.1 Page 1........................................................................................................36
5.7.2 Page 2........................................................................................................37
5.7.3 Page 3........................................................................................................38
Chapter 6 - Inspection and maintenance

6.1 General.......................................................................................................................39
6.2 Instrumentation ..........................................................................................................40
6.3 Maintenance on sleeve bearings ................................................................................40
6.3.1 Oil change .................................................................................................40
6.3.2 Oil ring......................................................................................................40
6.3.3 Oil leakage ................................................................................................41
6.3.4 Emergency running for motors with forced oil lubrication ......................41
6.3.5 Maintenance on a separate oil supply system
(Lube oil or jacking oil supply) ................................................................41
6.3.6 Maintenance plan for sleeve bearings.......................................................41
6.4 Maintenance on anti-friction bearings .......................................................................42
6.4.1 Validity of the regreasing intervals, conversion........................................42
6.4.2 Regreasing procedure ...............................................................................43
6.4.3 Choice of lubricating grease .....................................................................43
6.4.4 Maintenance plan for anti-friction bearings on horizontal and
vertical motors ..........................................................................................44
6.5 Bearing monitoring instruments and bearing insulation............................................45
6.5.1 Bearing temperatures ................................................................................45
6.5.2 Bearing condition monitoring by the shock-pulse method
(SPM, only for anti-friction bearings) ......................................................45
6.5.3 Bearing housing and shaft vibration .........................................................45
6.5.3.1 Bearing housing vibration........................................................46
6.5.3.2 Shaft vibration .........................................................................46
6.5.4 Bearing insulation .....................................................................................47
6.6 Checking the cooling elements of heat exchangers ...................................................47
6.6.1 Checking and replacing the sacrificial anodes on water coolers ..............47
6.7 Maintenance plan for cage-induction motors ............................................................48
Chapter 7 - Servicing and cleaning

7.1 Servicing ....................................................................................................................50
7.1.1 Dismantling and reassembly.....................................................................50
7.1.2 Service sleeve bearings.............................................................................50
7.1.2.1 Inspection of the sliding surfaces of sleeve bearings...............50
7.1.2.2 Oil rings ...................................................................................50
7.1.3 Service of anti-friction bearings ...............................................................51
7.1.4 Reconditioning work during servicing .....................................................51
3BSM 008369, rev. E iii

Table of Contents
7.2 Cleaning .....................................................................................................................51

7.2.1 Mechanical dry cleaning...........................................................................51
7.2.2 Wet cleaning with cleaning agents............................................................51
7.2.3 Cleaning the air-to-water cooler ...............................................................52
7.2.3.1 Cleaning interval......................................................................52
7.2.3.2 Dismantling..............................................................................52
7.2.3.3 Cleaning the inside of the cooling tubes..................................52
7.2.3.4 Cleaning the outside of the cooling tubes................................53
7.2.3.5 Sacrificial anodes (expendable anodes) for air-water coolers .53
7.3 Stocking of spare parts...............................................................................................54
Chapter 8 - Dismantling and reassembly

8.1 Safety instructions......................................................................................................56
8.2 Dismantling................................................................................................................56
8.2.1 Coupling hub with a feather key...............................................................56
8.2.2 Coupling hub with a cylindrical shrink fit ................................................56
8.2.3 Coupling hub with a tapered shrink fit .....................................................58
8.2.4 Removing the ventilation unit from a horizontal motor ...........................60
8.2.4.1 Air-to-water cooler ..................................................................60
8.2.4.2 Air-to-air cooler .......................................................................60
8.2.4.3 Motors type AMB....................................................................60
8.2.5 Weather protection units ...........................................................................61
8.2.5.1 All ventilation units .................................................................61
8.2.6 Removing the ventilation unit from a vertical motor ...............................61
8.2.6.1 Air-to-water cooler ..................................................................61
8.2.7 Weather protection unit.............................................................................63
8.2.8 Dismantling anti-friction bearings on horizontal motors..........................63
8.2.9 Dismantling anti-friction bearings from vertical motors ..........................64
8.2.10 Dismantling sleeve bearings .....................................................................65
8.2.11 Space heater ..............................................................................................66
8.2.11.1 Rotor withdrawal .....................................................................67
8.3 Reassembly ................................................................................................................68
8.3.1 Fitting the air guide rings..........................................................................68
8.3.2 Assembling anti-friction bearings.............................................................69
8.3.3 Assembling sleeve bearings......................................................................71
8.4 Recommended tightening torque for bolts on the motor ...........................................73
Chapter 9 - Trouble shooting

9.1 Operational faults on cage-induction motors.............................................................74
3BSM 008369, rev. E iv

Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 General
This installation and maintenance manual for the motor is a part of the main
documentation for the project.
Actions shown in this manual are only to be performed by trained personnel authorized by
the user.
1.2 Operative range and intended application

Electric motors are components intended for application in high voltage industrial installations.
Due to the nature of their electrical and mechanical operating conditions, improper installation
or operation, as also insufficient maintenance, could introduce hazards which could lead to the
most severe bodily injury or damage to property. The technical data for the motor was
determined with due consideration to the standards and specifications agreed in the order. This
data is shown on the motor dimension drawing and in the test report. The motor may only be
operated within the scope of this data. In case of deviations the manufacturer must be contacted.
These instructions only consider those measures which must be observed when the motor is
being operated in its operative range and in its intended application. The applicable national,
local and plant regulations must also be taken into consideration.
1.3 Information on electromagnetic compatibility

The user must take the following precautionary measures during installation and operation in
order not to impair the electromagnetic compatibility.
The motor may only be connected to a power supply system which is properly earthed in
conformity with the applicable regulations.
Have technical modifications carried out by qualified personnel who, after completing the
modifications, can check that the electromagnetic compatibility has not been in adversely
influenced.
If it is necessary to replace possible anti-interference components, filters or screened cables, the
new parts must be identical to the originals.
1.4 Required qualifications for erection and operating personnel

Installation, operation, maintenance and repair work may only be carried out by mechanically
and electrically skilled personnel qualified and properly trained for this work. These persons
must be conversant with the motor, that is, they must have completely read and fully understand
the relevant chapters of these operating instructions.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 1-1

Chapter 2 Safety instructions
2.1 Safety
The machine is manufactured and intended for use only as prescribed by this manual.
Modification, alteration, or lack of maintenance procedures as described in the labeling,
may adversely affect the safety and efficacy of this device. The manufacturer is not
responsible for malfunctions that comprise safety as a result of alteration, use of non ABB
replacements parts, neglect or misuse.
Replacements parts may vary from those shown in this manual. Should you have questions on
those parts please contact ABB Automation Technologies AB.
The actual appearance of the machine may vary from the illustration in this manual.
Should pre-owned ABB equipment be purchased and reconditioned, the equipment should not
be used until testing and analysis demonstrate that the equipment meets the original or upgraded
specifications.
The use of solvents as cleaning agents and the use of lubricants can involve health and/or safety
hazards. The recommended precautions and procedures of the manufacturers should be
followed.
2.2 Site conditions

This motor is to be used on a site with conditions according to ABBs Technical Specification
Site conditions and applicable standards (included in binder Users Manual).
2.3 Prerequisites
The operator must:
be proficient in the application of the machine and electricity.
be thoroughly trained in the skills and have the knowledge required to operate this
machine.
be thoroughly familiar with the contents of this manual and other operators manuals that
deals with the machine and accessory devices that may be used with this machine.
be fully qualified and trained in the operation of this machine and able to distinguish
normal from aberrant device behavior.
never reset an alarm or trip until the reason for the alarm/trip has been located and
necessary correction has been made to make a safe restart of the machine.
The motors are suitable for a wide range of mounting and operating conditions. These
variants greatly influence noise emission. With due consideration to all the factors
involved, noise levels for the work location can only be measured on the commissioned
motor on site.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 2-2

2.4 Contraindications
The machine is not designed, sold or intended for any use except as indicated above.
Furthermore, it is not intended to be used outside of the machine specifications or limitations.
The machine must be in good working order.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 2-3

Chapter 3 Storage and transport
3.1 Inspection of delivery

The motor will be packed in a case or bolted to a wooden skid for transport. Unpacking should
be done carefully in order to avoid damage. The delivery should be checked against the packing
list for completeness.
The motor was checked in the factory and tested for faultless running.
NOTE: When the motor arrives at its destination a general check must be carried out in
order to determine possible transport damage as quickly as possible. Any damage
or deviations between delivery and packing list must be entered in a report in
cooperation with the responsible forwarder.
Should the motor have suffered damage during transport or installation, this must be rectified
before commissioning.
3.2 Oil lubricated bearings

Motors with oil lubricated bearings will be transported without oil filling.
NOTE: Anytime the motor is to be transported, the lubrication oil must first be drained
from the bearings, otherwise it could ingress through the seals to the inside of the
motor.
3.3 Rotor transport lock

In order to prevent vibration arising during transport from causing bearing damage, a rotor
transport lock is fitted which blocks the rotor axially.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 3-4

WARNING - Heavy lift

Whenever the motor is to be lifted, the lifting equipment must have adequate lifting
capacity. The weight of the motor is given on the rating plate. When two or more motors
are mounted on a common bedplate, this machine set may neither be lifted nor
transported as a single unit.
In case of special designs, contact ABB.
When a motor is equipped with a ventilation unit, under no circumstances may the motor
plus ventilation unit be lifted together using the lifting lugs on the ventilating unit (see
figure 3-1). When lifting the motor, always use all four lifting lugs provided on the motor
itself.
Figure 3-1 Lifting the motor
3.4 Turning a vertical motor to the horizontal position

As a general rule vertical motors are transported in their vertical location. Horizontal transport is
possible on request.
Vertical motors are always packed for transport in the vertical position. They must never be
transported or stored in the horizontal position. However, it is permitted to turn a vertical motor
to the horizontal position for short periods in special cases were this is necessary due to space
limitation during installation. In such a case the following procedure is to be followed:
1. The ventilation unit exchanger must be removed before beginning.
2. Should the access opening be too narrow, it may be necessary to remove the main terminal
box.
3. Fit the rotor locking device.
4. Before beginning, figure 3-2 to figure 3-7 should be studied and the necessary slings and
blocks etc. be made ready.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 3-5

5. The whole turning process must be carried out slowly and smoothly avoiding swinging,
sudden shifts in suspension, or shock forces, which could be detrimental to the motor
bearings.
6. During the turning process ensure that the slings do not come into contact with junction
boxes or any other accessories fitted.
7. Follow the instructions given under figure 3-2 to figure 3-7.
8. The motor can be turned from the horizontal back to the vertical by following the
instructions in the reverse sequence.
Raise motor with slings arranged at the

four top lifting lugs and using two crane
hooks. All slings with same tension.
Figure 3-2
Gradually relieve tension

of slings on one side so
that the motor is
suspended at one side
only.
Figure 3-3
3BSM 008369, rev. E 3-6

Remove slack slings

from top lifting lugs and
relocate to two bottom
lugs.
See figure 3-5
Figure 3-4
Slings now located on top and bottom

lugs. Weight of motor still taken up by
slings on top lugs only.
Figure 3-5
3BSM 008369, rev. E 3-7

Gradually tension slings

on bottom lugs and raise
crane hook while
simultaneously lowering
the crane hook with the
slings on the top lugs.
Figure 3-6
Bring the motor into the horizontal

position and rest onto suitable blocks
positioned under the corners of the motor
frame.
Figure 3-7
3BSM 008369, rev. E 3-8

3.5 Storage of the motor
3.5.1 Short term storage of crated motor
Storage < 9 month

Measures to be taken by customer or other part.
The machine should be left in the crate.
The crate should preferably be stored indoors and shall be placed on a vibration-free, flat
and well-drained surface. If the crate is to be stored outdoors, the crate must be covered
with a tarpaulin on the top extending at least 1 meter out from the crate to avoid direct rain
on the crate.
The crate should be kept dry, protected from rain and moisture.
Before commissioning the following items should be carried out:
Visual external inspection of bearings and entering shaft
Check insulation resistance in accordance with section 4.7.1
3.5.2 Long term storage of crated motor
Storage > 9 month

Long-term storage must be notified before delivery, so that the machine can be prepared and
packed for the actual condition. If an unscheduled long-term storage is needed, please contact
ABB.
The machine should preferably be stored indoors and shall be placed on a vibration-free, flat
and well-drained surface.
1. Remove top and sides of the wooden crate.
2. Open the plastic protection to allow for a good ventilation.
3. If cooler top is delivered separate, the cooler top must be mounted immediately on the
machine.
4. If the machine is prepared for air ducts, dont remove the temporary transport covers.
5. The machine should be protected from rain and moisture. If the machine is to be stored
outdoors, it must be covered with a tarpaulin on the top extending at least 1 meter out from
the crate to avoid direct rain on the machine. If the machine is stored in a harsh
environment measures should be taken to protect it against dust and dirt.
6. To avoid condensation in the machine, the heating elements in main machine and exciter
must be connected according to the circuit diagram, included in the binder Users
Manual.
7. Check regularly the anti-corrosion coating on NOT painted areas like shaft, flanges etc.
and touch up if necessary.
8. Measures should be taken to ensure that the heaters work properly at all time.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 3-9

9. If sleeve bearings, corrosion preventive oil should be filled in the bearings once every 12
month. Rotation of the rotor is not required.
10. The axial transport-locking device must always be mounted during transportation of the
machine.
Visual external inspection of bearings and entering shaft.
Visual inspection of exciter.
Visual inspection of rotor and stator windings.
The corrosion preventive oil in the bearings must be drained before rotation.
Check insulation resistance in accordance with section 4.7.1.
3.5.3 Short term storage of uncrated motor
Storage < 9 month

1. Open the plastic protection to allow for a good ventilation.
2. If cooler top is delivered separate, the cooler top must be mounted immediately on the
machine.
3. If the machine is prepared for air ducts, dont remove the temporary transport covers.
4. The machine should be protected from rain and moisture. If the machine is to be stored
outdoors, it must be covered with a tarpaulin on the top extending at least 1 meter out from
the crate to avoid direct rain on the machine and be placed on at least 100 mm high rigid
supports, as to make sure that no water can enter the machine from below. If the machine is
stored in a harsh environment measures should be taken to protect it against dust and dirt.
5. To avoid condensation in the machine, the heating elements in main machine and exciter
must be connected according to the circuit diagram, included in the binder Users
Manual.
6. Check regularly the anti-corrosion coating on NOT painted areas like shaft, flanges etc.
and touch up if necessary.
7. Measures should be taken to ensure that the heaters work properly at all time.
8. The axial transport-locking device must always be mounted during transportation of the
machine
3BSM 008369, rev. E 3-10

3.5.4 Long term storage of uncrated motor
Storage > 9 month

Long-term storage must be notified before delivery, so that the machine can be prepared and
packed for the actual condition. If an unscheduled long-term storage is needed, please contact
ABB.
Measures to be taken accordance with section 3.5.3 Short term storage of machine, <
9 month and in accordance to below:
If sleeve bearings, corrosion preventive oil should be filled in the bearings once every 12
month. Rotation of the rotor is not required.
Visual inspection of exciter.
Visual inspection of rotor and stator windings.
The corrosion preventive oil in the bearings must be drained before rotation.
3.5.5 Space heater

NOTE: The motor space heater must be energized during the motor storage period.
Take care to connect up with the correct supply voltage as shown on the motor connection
diagram.
3.5.6 Prevention of corrosion damage an air-water coolers

In order to avoid corrosion damage, care should be taken to ensure that the water quality and
possible inhibitors or sacrificial anodes etc. are conform with that or those agreed upon in the
order.
When a motor is delivered, the cooler will have been drained but may not be completely dry.
Should commissioning not be planned within 6 months after delivery, or if ever the motor must
be shut down for such a long period of time for other reasons, then the cooler must be dried out
in order to prevent corrosion. This can be done by removing the covers of both water chambers
and blowing through with warm air.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 3-11

Chapter 4 Preparing for commissioning
4.1 Removing the rotor transport lock
4.1.1 Motors with anti-friction bearings
Unscrew the locking bolt

(tagged with a red label) at
the D-end bearing by 5 mm
and relock using jam nut.
Figure 4-1 Rotor lock on motors with anti-friction bearings
4.1.2 Motor with sleeve bearings
Dismantle the whole rotor

locking gear, bar and studs,
from the D-end.
Figure 4-2 Rotor lock on motors with sleeve bearings
4.2 Mounting the coupling hub

Torque transmission between the motor and the driven equipment is achieved by a coupling,
mounted to the motor shaft and having either a feather key or a shrink fit. The form of shaft
extension is shown on the binding motor outline drawing and could be one of the following:
Cylindrical with a feather key
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-12

Cylindrical with a shrink fit (plain or stepped)

Tapered with a shrink fit.
CAUTION - Risk of personal injury

Handle hot couplings with care to avoid burns!
4.2.1 Cylindrical-bore coupling hub with a feather key

In general, the instructions issued by the coupling manufacturer are applicable for mounting and
removing a coupling. The motor rotor will have been balanced with a half-key. Therefore,
coupling parts must have been balanced on a mandrel, also with half-keys in their keyways.
1. Clean shaft extension and coupling hub, check hub bore and slot for damage.
2. Check diameters of hub bore and shaft extension against drawings.
3. Check lengths of shaft extension, coupling hub and key.
4. When the coupling hub is shorter than the shaft extension and a spacer ring is not to be
fitted, then the length of key protrusion must be halved in order to avoid unbalance (see
Fig. 4-3).
Figure 4-3 Coupling fitted without a spacer ring
5. Under no circumstances may mating surfaces be coated with agents containing

molybdenum sulphide (e.g. Molykote or similar). Light oiling of the shaft and the hub bore
is recommended.
6. Heat coupling hub to 110 C. Refer to section Shrink couplings for heating up and
mounting procedures.
CAUTION - Component damage

In the case of vertical motors, the coupling must be secured against slipping off.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-13

4.2.2 Cylindrical-bore coupling hub with a shrink fit (plain or stepped seat)
1. Clean shaft extension and coupling hub, blow out oil channels, check hub bore for
damage.
2. Have following tools ready:
two threaded studs
two large lead hammers
protective gloves
wirerope slings or belts.
3. Measure shaft and bore. Document interference.
4. In case of a gear coupling, position sealing ring on the shaft beyond the coupling seat.
5. Lightly oil shaft extension with hydraulic oil (e.g. type HL 68). Do not use Molykote!
6. Heat coupling according to the Fig. 4-4:
Check temperature before fitting
The coupling hub should always be mounted by a two-man team.
Figure 4-4 Shrink temperature of coupling hub as a function of diameter
T Required shrink temperature of coupling hub

A Oil bath
B Induction oven
C Measured interference
D Diameter of shaft extension
7. After cooling, stress relieve the hub by injecting oil at about 1000 bar so long until oil
appears from between the shaft and hub at both ends.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-14

NOTE: In the case of stepped shrink seats, it is essential to leave the middle hole open,
otherwise the shrink fit will loosen and the coupling will be pushed towards the
end of the shaft.
4.2.3 Taper-bore coupling hub with a shrink fit

1. Clean shaft extension and coupling hub, blow out oil channels, check hub bore for
damage.
2. Have following tools ready:
two threaded studs
two large lead hammers
protective gloves
wire rope slings or belts.
3. Slip cold coupling hub onto the shaft. Document axial position of the hub and remove
again.
4. In case of a gear coupling, position sealing ring on the shaft beyond the coupling seat.
5. Set temporary stop at the definitive axial location of the coupling hub according to data
given by the responsible party.
6. Lightly oil shaft extension with hydraulic oil (e.g. type HL 68). Do not use Molykote!
7. Heat coupling according to figure 4-4:
Check temperature before fitting
The coupling hub should always be mounted by a two-man team.
8. After cooling, fit shaft-end nut or other locking device, and tighten up. Stress relieve the
hub by injecting oil at about 1000 bar so long until oil appears from between the shaft and
hub at both ends.

Before injecting oil, the shaft-end nut, or retaining disc, must be fitted to prevent the
coupling hub from jumping off the shaft.
9. Check shaft-end nut or retaining disc, retighten if necessary.
4.3 Installing the motor

Normally, the motor is installed on soleplates or a bedplate, which, together with the anchor
bolts are later concreted into the foundation.
4.3.1 Prerequisites for installation

The environmental conditions must correlate with those agreed in the order, e.g.:
Altitude of plant
Ambient temperature
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-15

Humidity
Cooling water:
Inlet temperature
Pressure
Flow rate
Quality.
Lube oil:
Inlet temperature
Pressure
Flow rate
Viscosity.
For details see labels on the motor.

The cooling air must be free of dust, oil, aggressive gases particularly ammonia, sulphur,
chlorine and silicone.
The motor must be installed on a solid foundation, which guarantees for plan-parallelism of the
machined surfaces of the motor feet of at least 0.1 mm.
After installation (driving and driven equipment), the running quality of the motor must be at
least acceptable according to ISO 3945.
The structural design of the foundation is not included in ABBs undertaking and the customer
or a third party is therefore responsible for this. Furthermore, the grouting operation is normally
also outside ABBs undertaking and responsibility.
The installation should be planned as early as possible.
NOTE: Pay attention to the direction of the cooling air.

In the case of open-ventilated motors it must be ensured that the air inlet and outlet openings are
not obstructed by ducts, piping or other objects. Warm exhaust air must not be drawn back into
the motor.

Air inlet and outlet openings are to be covered during the installation phase in order to
prevent the ingress of foreign matter into the motor. It is absolutely essential that these
covers are removed again before commissioning.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-16

4.4 Foundation

The concreting in of the motor soleplates or bedplate must be done by personnel qualified
for this work. The construction management is responsible to ensure this work is carried
out properly.
4.4.1 Grouting
When the motor has been properly aligned, its base elements are attached to the foundation by
grouting. Use only non-shrinking concrete for grouting to ensure proper adhesion between the
base frame and grouting. Make sure that the grouting fills properly the whole space around and
under the base element. Do not use a vibrator in order to avoid any disturbance in the alignment.
After the grouting has set (cured), adjust vertically to the final elevation by putting shims
between the base frame and the base element. Check also the other alignments of the motor and
adjust, if necessary.
Non-shrink grout is recommended for the best results. For shaping and grouting, the
manufacturers instructions to be followed.
4.4.2 Installation of motor with soleplates

Normally, the motor is installed on soleplates with anchor bolts, which are to be concreted into
the foundation. Proceed as follows:
1. Check the prepared concrete foundation against the outline drawing, correct if necessary.
2. Fasten soleplates (with at least 2 mm of shims between the mating faces) to the bottom of
the motor feet by means of the holding-down bolts. Ensure the bolts are centrally
positioned in their holes to permit later correction. The shims must be clean and free of
burrs.
3. Mark the location of the pads on the foundation. Place the pads in position and adjust the
height with special mortar so there will be a clearance of about 15 mm between the bottom
of the soleplates and the foundation. Align using a spirit level. Maintain the specified
setting time for the special mortar.
4. Suspend the motor on the crane and hang the anchor bolts centrally in their holes in the
sole plates. Screw the levelling bolts in until the bolt heads protrude about 10 mm below
the bottom edge of the soleplates. Position the slide plates onto the pads underneath the
bolt heads. Rest motor down.
5. Align motor, or driven equipment, to an accuracy of approx. 0.2 mm.
6. Grout in anchor bolts up to the level of the pads and permit the grouting to set.
7. Finish grouting foundation in conformity with the outline drawing or foundation plan.
Vibrate grouting beneath the soleplates and ensure there are no cavities.
8. The final tightening of the anchor bolts are to be done after the alignment. See section
4.5.4
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-17

4.5 Aligning to driven equipment

NOTE: Careful alignment of the motor to the definitive installed driven equipment is an
indispensable prerequisite for smooth running.
4.5.1 Influence of the axial position of the rotor on motor alignment
4.5.1.1 Motors without a guide bearing (sleeve bearing designs)

The rotor of a motor with sleeve bearings, B or K shells, must be guided by the coupling of the
driven machine in such a way, that under no circumstances can a shaft shoulder come into
contact with an end face of a bearing shell.
B Shells at the D-end

The deviation between the magnetic and mechanical centres is given on the label figure 4-5
beside the shaft position indicator.
Figure 4-5 Shaft position label
As a general rule the shaft should be positioned in its mechanical centre. However, in order to
keep the axial force acting on the guide bearing of the driven equipment low, a shaft
displacement towards the magnetic centre is permitted so long that the clearance in the coupling
and thermal expansion do not result in contact between the shaft shoulder and the bearing shell.
K-Shells with zero bearing play at the D-end

The axial position of a sleeve bearing with a K-shell is set in the factory, by inserting shims or
machining the seating face of the bearing endshield, so that the magnetic and mechanical
centres correlate.
The uncoupled motor can be operated for test runs in this condition. In operation, the driven
equipment must guide the rotor by way of a rigid coupling. The guide bearing on the driven
equipment must have zero clearance.
4.5.2 Motors with guide bearings (anti-friction or special

sleeve bearing design)
Motors with anti-friction bearings or A-shell type sleeve bearings can accept axial force (refer
to outline drawing for permissible values).
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-18

Consequently, the driven machine must not provide for axial guidance. During alignment the
specified clearance between the coupling halves is to be ensured.
In the case of motors with anti-friction bearings, the axial clearance between the coupling halves
must be able to absorb the thermal expansion of the motor shaft.
4.5.3 Increase in shaft height due to thermal expansion

When assessing the vertical mismatch, the change in shaft height due to thermal expansion must
be taken into consideration.
Formula for growth in shaft height h:
h = Shaft height Temperature rise Factor
For the motor, a temperature rise of 20 and 30 K must be reckoned with.

For the driven equipment, the data from the manufacturer is applicable. When no data is
available, it will be assumed as being zero.
Permissible angular mismatch
Rigid coupling a= 0.02 mm
Curved-tooth coupling a= 0.05 mm
Flexible coupling a= 0.1 mm
Figure 4-6 Angular mismatch
Permissible radial mismatch
Rigid coupling r = 0.02 mm
Curved-tooth coupling r = 0.05 mm
Flexible Coupling r = 0.1 mm
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-19

r
Figure 4-7 Radial mismatch
4.5.4 Alignment procedure

1. Motors with sleeve bearings: Before the rotor may be turned, the bearings must be
lubricated with 0.1 0.2 l of oil.
Measure run-out at the largest diameter of the coupling hub. The run-out on the shaft extension
was measured in the factory and verified to be conform with the following tables:
Diameter of shaft exten- Run-out tolerance of shaft

sion extension
(=total deflection)
[mm] [m]
> 30 - 50 25
> 50 - 80 30
> 80 - 120 35
> 120 - 180 40
> 180 - 250 45
> 250 - 315 50
> 315 - 400 55
The run-out on the coupling hub may not be much greater than these values. Document
measured values.

The motor is very heavy.
2. Measure angular mismatch a and document result.

Equalize vertical gap by inserting shims under the corresponding motor feet.
Correct horizontal gap by moving motor laterally.
3. Measure radial mismatch r and document result.
Equalize vertical mismatch by inserting shims under all four motor feet. (Consider
change in shaft height due to thermal expansion).
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-20

Correct horizontal mismatch by moving motor laterally.

4. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the permissible values have been attained.
4.5.5 Tightening torque for the anchor bolts
Motor type Bolt diameter [mm] Tightening torque

[Nm]
AMB 560 - AMB 710 M42 800
AMC 800 - AMC 900 M56 1900
AMC 1000 - AMC 1120 M64 2800
4.5.6 Alignment report

Enter the values for the aligned motor into the alignment report.
Figure 4-8 Alignment report
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-21

4.5.7 Additional information for vertical motors
4.5.7.1 General
Radial mismatch( r)
Vertical motors have a spigot seating on the mounting flange as standard design. Therefore,
radial alignment is not necessary, but a check is advisable.
Angular mismatch( a)
The engine flange surface should be checked for perpendicular aligment against the shaft end.
Table: Allowed values
Any correction required to match up with the counter-flange can be done by inserting shims,
which should have as large an area as possible.
4.5.7.2 Vertical motors with sleeve bearings

To enable the rotor to be turned, the N-end thrust bearing must be relieved of load. This requires
that the rotor weight be taken up by suitable lifting equipment.
The radial clearance of the guide bearing at the N-end must be set as small as possible.
4.5.8 Bearings
4.5.9 Anti-friction bearings

The motor bearings will have been packed with lithium-soap grease in the factory.

Storing the motor over a period of several months can lead to oil leakage due to separation
from the bearing grease. In such a case, the outer bearing cover must be dismantled to
remove the grease with the oil residue.
Fresh grease must be injected, with the motor running, directly after starting up.
4.5.10 Sleeve bearings

Motors with sleeve bearings are delivered without oil in the bearings. When filling with oil, the
correct filling level is the middle of the sight glass. A higher level is not recommended as oil
could escape at the seals during operation.
In the case of bearings without a separate lube oil supply system, lubrication is provided by the
oil rings.
During longer periods of motor standstill, the weight of the rotor will press out the oil film from
between the bearing shells and the journals. The bearings will be dry!
Therefore, prior to the first commissioning, or before starting up after a longer period of
standstill, 0.1 to 0.2 l of oil must be poured over the bearings.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-22

4.5.10.1 Laying the oil pipes
NOTE: Only properly cleaned pipes are to be used for the lube oil lines.
In order to achieve stress-free connections, flexible compensating elements are to be included in
the field piping just before the connection flanges on the motor bearings. The piping must be
rigidly supported on the field side of the compensator.
The oil return lines must have a continuous downward gradient of at least 5% from the
connections on the motor bearings to the oil tank. Return lines are always to be kept as short as
possible. The free pipe section must never be less than that at the bearing outlet points. Pipe
bends should be avoided as far as possible. In order to avoid the danger of oil build-up or
overpressure in the bearings, syphons and bridge sections are forbidden (see figure 4-9).
Observe information given on outline drawing!
The speed of the runback flow of the lubricant (referred to the pipe cross section) shall not
exceed 0.17m/s. Thus, only 70% of the cross section is filled under the most unfavourable
operation conditions, so that any oil mist present can be transported to the oil reservoir along
with the returning oil.
Branch connections are to be arranged in the flow direction.
The pipe sections must be large enough to ensure the following oil flow velocities:
Oil supply (full pipe section), < 1.5 m/s
Oil return lines (full pipe section), < 0.17 m/s.
Vertical drops in the line > 1 m are to be avoided in order to prevent the formation of oil foam.
In the case of bearing seals with sealing air, suitable venting of the bearing housing must be
provided for. This can be done via the oil return pipe or by means of sufficiently sized vent
filters, which will prevent the escape of oil vapour.
4.5.10.2 Layout of oil supply system
A B
3
Figure 4-9 Layout of oil supply system
1 Oil return line

2 Vent
3 Vent holes
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-23

The oil tank must have a condensed water separator and, if required by the ambient temperature,
also a heater. Suitable inside protection against corrosion will enhance the prevention of oil
contamination. Do not fit any equipment such as filters or similar in the return line as these will
hinder the flow.
The oil return line should ideally enter the oil tank above the oil level (A). However, should it
submerge into the oil, then vent holes must be provided above the oil level to allow oil-borne air
to escape from the pipe (B).
The oil level in the tank must never, under any operating condition, be allowed to fall below the
location of the oil suction line.
Filters must block any particles larger than 15 25 m. When necessary, for process related
reasons, switchable double filters must be used which can be cleaned during operation, i.e.
without switching off the oil supply.
Oil reservoirs
The capacity of oil reservoirs should be approximately eight times the quantity delivered per
minute. The lubricant content in small, very confined systems should not be less than five times
this amount.Small plants should have a settling chamber permitting the air entrained in the oil to
escape.
If the return pipes which lead into the oil reservoir dip into the lubricant, vent holes shall be
provided above the oil level (permitting the air entrained in the lubricant to escape).
The suction pipe of the pump shall be adequately vented and provided with an oil level
indicator. It shall be adequately distant from the bottom of the reservoir so as to prevent so as to
prevent any desposits being sucked up. The oil reservoir shall have a sloping base for the oil to
run off.

ABB will not accept any responsibility for oil leakage at the bearings when the above
mentioned conditions have not been fulfilled.
4.5.10.3 Monitoring of the oil supply system

The oil supply to each bearing should be monitored by a flow indicator. If the oil flow falls
below 70% of the nominal value the flow indicators should shut the motor down.
4.5.11 Bearing temperature monitoring

If the motor bearings are equipped with temperature monitors, the alarm and shutdown values
are to be set according to the connection diagram.
4.5.12 Bearing insulation

When both bearings are insulated, it should be ensured that the short-circuiting cable at the D-
end is connected (see outline drawing).
In the case of anti-friction bearings ensure that all auxiliary connections to the bearings are
insulated (only use original parts from the motor manufacturer!)
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-24

NOTE: The jumper cable may only be connected to the non-short-circuiting position for
measuring purposes.
4.6 Mounting the ventilation unit
4.6.1 AMB motors

Motors of the series AMB will normally be delivered with the ventilation unit already mounted.
See section 8.2.4 on page 60 for dismantling and reassemble instructions.
4.6.2 AMC motors

For AMC motors the ventilation unit will be removed for transport. See section 8.2.4 on page
60 for dismantling and reassemble instructions.
4.6.3 Air-to-water cooler

Prior to commissioning, we recommend that the cooler be tested at the specified operating
pressure to determine possible transport damage and to check for leakage. Tighten up any loose
screws in the covers.
After the leakage test the cooler can be connected up and vented. This is done by removing the
vent plug from the connection-side water chamber and then slowly filling the cooler until
bubble-free water is expelled from the vent hole. Screw the vent plug back into position. The
cooler can then be put into operation. Only after this may the motor be started up.
4.7 Electrical connections

Work on the terminal box is to be carried out with care. It could contain sensitive
equipment such as current transformers etc.
4.7.1 Insulation resistance

The insulation resistance of the winding is an indication of the condition of the insulation. The
insulation resistance must be measured and documented before the motor is switched on for the
first time (before connecting the cables).
4.7.1.1 Minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance

The minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance are:
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-25

a) For the stator winding:

R1min (20C) 3x(1+Un) in M
where Un = rated voltage of the motor in kV (line-to-line)
b) For a wound rotor winding:

R1min (20C) 1xUn in M;
where Un = rated voltage of the rotor kV (line-to-line)
c) For the resistance temperature detectors:

2000 M
It is usual to apply a DC test voltage of 1000 to 5000 V.

The insulation resistance varies with the winding temperature. A temperature rise of 12 K
halves the value of the insulation resistance. When taking the measurement, in addition to the
insulation resistance, the test voltage, the winding temperature and the time / date are also to be
documented.
Rmin [M ]
50 UN [kV]
13.2
40 11.2
10.0
6.6
30 6.0
4.2
20 3.3
10
10 20 30 40 50 60 T amb [C]
Figure 4-10 Minimum values of insulation resistance for stator windings
The insulation resistance is taken 1 min. after applying the test voltage. It is recommended to
extend the measurement and also take the 10 min. reading to determine the polarization index
(R10 min. / R1 min.). This data is very helpful at later diagnoses.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-26

Should the minimum permissible value not be obtained, then the winding must first be cleaned
if this is necessary, and afterwards dried out.
Winding with Y-connection
DC Voltage supply (Megger)
Figure 4-11 Measuring the whole winding
Example: Measuring phase W

(all phases are to be measured)
DC Voltage supply (Megger)
Figure 4-12 Phase-by-phase measurement
4.7.2 Cable penetration plate on the terminal box
4 5
3
Figure 4-13 Terminal box with cable penetration plate

The terminal box is fitted with a separate cable penetration plate, which has to be adapted to the
actual requirements of the plant (number and size of cable penetration). To remove the cable
penetration plate the terminal box lid (3) must first be lifted off, to do this remove the earth strap
(1) and bolts (2).
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-27


Remove lid with care. Danger of bodily injury if lid is dropped. The lid is not normally
hinged.
Unscrew bolts (4) and remove the penetration plate (5).
4.7.3 Terminals, preparing for connection

The terminals may not be subjected to any forces from the weight of the incoming cables. Strain
relief must be arranged external to the terminal box to prevent such forces acting on the
terminals or the terminal box itself.
After removing screws (4) the penetration plate (5) may be removed.
NOTE: All electrical screwed connections accessible are to be checked and if necessary
tightened up as specified. Always use a torque spanner.
4.7.4 Cleaning the terminals

Any dirt, oil or grease on the terminals is to be cleaned off using mineral spirits or another
suitable solvent. Surface treated bar terminals (e.g. tinned, nickel or silver plated) may not be
cleaned mechanically.
4.7.5 Measures to prevent oxidation and corrosion

The contact surfaces of electrical connections are to be treated, depending on the environmental
conditions, as indicated in the table below:
Environment Measures
Indoors, dry environment None
Outdoors, humid or aggressive Apply a light coating of vaseline using clean cloths
environment
Table 4-1. Measures to prevent oxidation and corrosion

Should another inhibitor be used, the manufacturers instructions are to be followed.
4.7.6 Stud terminals

Stud terminals are designed for a max. current of 400 A.
The nominal torque for tightening the nuts is given in Tab. 4-2:
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-28

Size of thread on stud Tightening torque [Nm]
M16 30 - 40
Table 4-2. Tightening torque for stud terminals
Figure 4-14 Stud terminal for max. 400 A / 11 kV (max. 2 cables per phase)
Figure 4-15 Stud terminal EEx e for max. 400 A / 11 kV (max. 1 cable per phase)
4.7.7 Bar terminals
Size of thread on stud Tightening torque [Nm]
M12 40
M16 80
Table 4-3. Tightening torque for dry or lightly greased bolts of property class 8.8.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-29

Figure 4-16 Bar terminal for max. 1600 A / 4.2 kV (max. 4 cables per phase)
Figure 4-17 Bar terminal for max. 2000 A / 11 kV (max. 4 cables per Phase)
4.7.8 Fully insulated connectors
1
3
A B
Figure 4-18 Fully insulated connector for max. 400 A / 13.8 kV per connection
1 Winding lead with connector fitted

2 Connector for fitting to cable on site (supplied lose)
3 Shrink sleeve, shrunk into place on site after bolting up
4 Strain relief clamp
A Connectors as delivered
B Connectors ready for operation
Connecting up on site
1. Drill out hole in connector (2) for accepting the cable, according to Tab. 4-4
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-30

2. Soft-solder field-side cable into the supplied connector (2)

3. Slip shrink sleeve (3) over the cable. Fit and bolt the two connectors together.
4. Move shrink sleeve (3) to its final position over the connection and shrink on with warm
air of approx. 140 C
5. Secure cable in the strain relief clamp (4).
Cable section
70 95 120 150 185 240 300 400
in mm2
Hole diameter D 11.3 13.5 15.2 16.7 18.4 21.1 23.7 27.0
in mm
Table 4-4.
4.7.9 Fastening the bolts for the terminal connectors
Size of thread Tightening torque[Nm]
M8 18 - 25
Table 4-5. Tightening torque for bolts for the terminal connectors
4.7.10 Earthing
WARNING - The motor housing must be earthed

The motor housing must be connected to the plant earthing system (for connection points
on the motor see outline drawing). All potential equalizing cables between the motor
housing and the parts fitted to it must be connected up. Any special (local) requirements
are also to be observed!
4.7.11 Earth brushes

NOTE: The brush tracks on the shaft must be bare and clean.
The brushes must not come into contact with solvents.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 4-31

Chapter 5 Commissioning
5.1 Sleeve bearings with forced oil lubrication

The bearings are connected to a separate oil supply system which must be in operation before
the motor is started up until after it is has been switched off and come to rest.
As a general rule the bearing oil inlet temperature must be between 20 C and 50 C.
5.2 Direction of rotation

Phase connections: Terminal designations according to IEC Recommendation 34-8:
For clockwise rotation when facing onto the drive end of the motor (figure 5-1):
L1-U1 / L2-V1 / L3-W1
For anti-clockwise rotation when facing onto the drive end of the motor (figure 5-2):
L1-W1 / L2-V1 / L3-U1
A corresponding label will be fastened to the inside of the terminal box. The motor outline
drawing will also show the planned direction of rotation.
U1 W1 U1 W1
V1 V1
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
Figure 5-1 Clockwise rotation Figure 5-2 Anti-clockwise rotation
3BSM 008369, rev. E 5-32

5.3 Air to water coolers
Figure 5-3 Figures of coolers
5.3.1 General
The coolers are provided with compensators to prevent the transfer of vibration between the
cooler and the piping system.
The agreed quality, quantity and inlet temperature of the cooling water must be maintained.
Larger foreign bodies in the cooling water must be filtered out to prevent ingress into the cooler.
The water inlet flange is the bottom one of the two. This ensures that the cooler remains full of
water even after the system has been shut down. The cooling water flow rate should be
regulated so that the required cooling capacity is attained at full load.
The cooling capacity can be checked directly by measuring the cold air temperature (cold air
entering into the motor), generally 40 C, or indirectly via the stator winding temperature. The
set values for the sensors are given on the connection diagram.
5.3.2 Prevention of corrosion damage on air-to-water coolers

In order to avoid corrosion damage, care should be taken to ensure that the water quality and
possible inhibitors or sacrificial anodes etc. are conform with that or those agreed upon in the
order.
5.4 Starting frequency

During the starting phase, the motor will be subjected to thermal and mechanical stressing.
Therefore, in order to avoid unnecessary damage the starting frequency agreed upon in the order
should be adhered to. Any changes must be explicitly approved by the manufacturer.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 5-33

5.5 Starting, operation, shut-down

NOTE: Short power interruptions cause current and torque fluctuations.
Should the supply voltage at reclosure be in phase-opposition to the residual voltage, this would
mean high stressing for the gearbox and the driven equipment. This can be avoided by providing
suitable protection, otherwise the whole shaft train must be suitably dimensioned for the stresses
involved.
Step Activity Remarks
1 Switch off space heater When one is fitted
2 Switch on separate lube-oil system for sleeve For forced oil lubrication
bearings
3 Turn on water supply for air-to-water cooler When one is fitted
4 Switch on fan-motor for ventilation unit When one is fitted
5 Close stator circuit braker. Motor starts

(When the motor is to be started up via a
starting transformer, then this must be inter-
locked with the circuit-breaker, so the motor
can not be switched on when the starting
transformer is in its operating position).
6 Operation
7 Open stator circuit breaker Motor runs down
8 Set starting transformer to starting position When provided for start-

ing
9 Switch-off fan-motor on ventilation unit When one is fitted
10 Turn off water supply to air-water cooler When one is fitted
11 Turn off lube-oil supply to sleeve bearings For forced oil lubrication
12 Switch on space heater When one is fitted
5.6 Continuous monitoring during operation

The motor will be monitored during operation by the field monitoring system. For further
inspections see Chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance.
In case of anything unusual of arising, the motor should be switched off and the cause
investigated in conformity with the trouble-shooting procedures given in Chapter 9 Trouble
shooting.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 5-34

5.7 Check list

The following checklist and protocols should be completed during commissioning and returned
to ABB together with the commissioning report after completed commissioning.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 5-35

5.7.1 Page 1
Customer: Name and company of responsible commissioning engineer:
Site name:
Serial number:
Order number: Date:
First run up, date .....................................

Direction of rotation: clockwise (Seen from D-end)
Direction of rotation: counterclockwise (Seen from D-end)
No abnormal noise
Comments ...............................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................
Second run up (to full speed), date ................................

Starting time ............................. s
Retardation time .................. min
Comments ...............................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................
Running unconnected, date ................................

Starting time ............................. s
Comments ...............................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................
Running of connected machine, date ................................

Starting time ............................. s
Comments ...............................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................
Motor data
Output: kVA Power factor: Voltage: V
Frequency: Hz Speed: r/min Current: A
Excitation: V A Oil quality:
3BSM 008369, rev. E 5-36

5.7.2 Page 2
Site name:
Serial number:
Order number: Date:
Time Bearing temp. Inlet Oil Vibr. Winding Cooling Comments

o
( C) (mm/s, m) temp. air/water Vibrations, noise, etc.
(oC)
D- N- (oC) (l/s) D- N- max min m3/h o

C
side side side side
3BSM 008369, rev. E 5-37

5.7.3 Page 3
Site name:
Serial number:
Order number: Date:
Time Stator Load Comments

(MW) Vibrations, noise, etc.
(A) (cos) (V)
3BSM 008369, rev. E 5-38

Chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance
6.1 General
Thorough and conscientious maintenance is the best foundation for high availability of the
plant.
WARNING - High voltage

This work involves the main circuits of the motor normally connected to the high voltage
supply net. Before you start to work:
1. Make sure the motor is disconnected from the high voltage net and the circuit breaker is
locked in the open position so it not accidentally (or otherwise) can be closed during
measurements.
2. Note also that capacitors can contain dangerous voltages, so be sure to ground all details
before you touch them.
The maintenance plans presented in the following are based on ABBs many years of
experience. The given time intervals are based on continuous trouble-free operation and are
offered as reference values.
It is recommended to draw up a maintenance plan tailored for the plant in question and to
include deadlines.
The following influential factors must be taken into consideration:
Actual periods of operation
Environmental conditions (e.g. dirt deposits)
Loading, switching frequency.
Inspections given in the maintenance plans Table 6-4. should ideally be carried out by the same
personnel to ensure that any deviations from the normal conditions will be recognized quickly.
Regular plant inspection and recording of important operating quantities and events such as:
Oil levels
Earth fault monitoring
Temperatures
Noise, vibration, discolouring, odours.
afford valuable information when seeking the cause of a fault.
It is essential that the cause of a fault (shutdown) is clarified before switching on again.
Also in the case of abnormal operating conditions such as an alarm, a short-circuit, an overload
etc., the cause should be determined and any corrective action necessary, carried out without
delay.
The actual maintenance work which is mostly carried out during planned periods of shutdown
can be divided up as follows:
3BSM 008369, rev. E 6-39

Cleaning
Replacing consumables
Replacing wear and tear parts
Elimination of recognized deficiencies.
6.2 Instrumentation
The set values for the monitoring instruments will normally have been agreed upon at the time
of the order (see connection diagram).
When this is not the case, then the values given in these instructions shall apply. The values are
to be set during commissioning and may not be changed without first consulting the
manufacturer.
6.3 Maintenance on sleeve bearings
6.3.1 Oil change

Oil qualities acc. to ABBs drawing Outline drawing, included in the binder Users Manual.
The oil is to be changed:
After a specified fixed interval of time (see lube label).
Rule of thumb:,
Oil-ring lubricated bearings, 8'000 hours
Forced lubricated bearings, 20'000 hours
Shorter intervals are necessary for frequent starting, high oil temperatures or
excessive oil contamination.
Refer to the lube label for the oil change interval, viscosity, oil flow rate and quality
Top up or change the oil only when the motor is at standstill.
3 Max. oil level during operation

1 Filling level
2 Min. oil level during operation
Figure 6-1 Oil level inspection at the sight glass
6.3.2 Oil ring

Correct functioning of the oil ring (i.e. uniform running and oil transport) can be checked at the
top oil sight glass.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 6-40

6.3.3 Oil leakage

In case of oil leakage, replacement seals should be made ready for fitting during the next
service.
6.3.4 Emergency running for motors with forced oil lubrication

Should the oil supply fail, the motor must be switched off immediately. All sleeve bearings are
equipped with an oil ring which permits the motor to run down safely. If the process requires an
emergency running time at rated speed, the manufacturer must be consulted.
6.3.5 Maintenance on a separate oil supply system

(Lube oil or jacking oil supply)
If the motor manufacturers scope of supply includes a separate oil supply system to provide the
motor with lube or jacking oil, then instructions for maintenance will be given in a separate
document.
6.3.6 Maintenance plan for sleeve bearings
Every two years
During service
Quarterly
Machine part Maintenance or inspection work
Annually
Monthly
Sleeve bear- Check physical, chemical and mechanical Weekly
Before first commissioning
ings properties of the lube oil.
If the recommended lube oil change inter-
val is to be increased, a regular check on
the oil is to be carried out at least every 4
months.
Check condition of bearing oil (discolour-

ing, contamination) at sight glass. Filter if
necessary. Determine cause and elimi-
nate.
Read off temperatures at the provided

measuring points and record.
Measure machine vibration, by means of

provided sensors or a portable measuring
instrument, and record. Measuring points:
middle of bearing housing, horizontal and
vertical (see section 6.5.3 on page 45).
Check lube rings at top sight glasses for

uniform running and oil transport.
Check bearing seals for oil leakage and

clean off any dirt deposits.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 6-41

Every two years
During service
Quarterly
Annually
Monthly
Weekly
Sleeve bear- Check bearing shell insulation (see sec-
ings, both tion 6.5.4 on page 47).
insulated
Sleeve bear- Change oil.

ings and sepa-
rate oil supply Change wear and tear parts. If bearing After evaluation of the
system for parts are changed, change the oil after above periodic checks and
lube or jacking running for 3 hours to remove any metal inspections
oil particles rubbed off during running in.
Check for rust. (see Chapter 7 Servicing

and cleaning).
Separate oil Clean filter on oil supply system. After indication from filter
supply system monitor (optical/electrical)
for lube or
jacking oil Check:
- Oil supply system for proper functioning
- Oil level and for loss oil on the system
incl. piping and fittings.
Oil-to-water Check water piping for leakage.

cooler (when
provided) Check water pipes for deposits and possi-
ble signs of corrosion.
Table 6-1. Maintenance plan on sleeve bearings
6.4 Maintenance on anti-friction bearings

All data such as bearing nos., grease quantities and regreasing intervals are given on the lube
labels fastened to the motor.
6.4.1 Validity of the regreasing intervals, conversion

The regreasing intervals are given for the longest possible maintenance interval.
Regreasing may be carried out more frequently. In such a case the regreasing quantities are
to be reduced proportionally.
When the motor is to be connected to a central lubrication system with continuous
regreasing, the grease quantities are to be converted proportionally.
When the place of operation is very dirty the regreasing intervals are to be shortened.
When the bearing temperature is higher than 70 C, the regreasing interval must be halved
for every excessive 15K.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 6-42

6.4.2 Regreasing procedure

Regreasing may only be carried when the motor is running. Excessive grease will be guided to
the used grease container by the grease regulator thus preventing overgreasing of the bearing. A
temporary increase in bearing temperature may be observed during the regreasing procedure.
This increase can be avoided by injecting the grease into the bearing slowly. The used grease
container should be checked at each regreasing and emptied when necessary.
6.4.3 Choice of lubricating grease

The bearings will have been packed with lithium-soap grease in the factory.
Only greases of the same soap basis may be used for regreasing. Should it be necessary to
change the grease quality (e.g. because of lower ambient temperatures) the bearings must be
dismantled and washed out, refer to separate section on service.
In case of doubt we recommend seeking advice from the grease manufacturer.
Lubricants
When regreasing, use only special grease with the following properties:
good quality grease with lithium complex soap and with mineral- or PAO-oil.
base oil viscosity 100-150 cST at 40oC.
consistency NLGI grade 2 or 3
temperature range -30oC - + 120oC, continuously
Grease with the correct properties is available from all the major lubricant manufacturers.
ABB grease corresponds to:
Elf Epexelf 2
BP Energrease L S 2
Esso Beacon 2
Shell Alvania Grease G3
SKF Alfalub LGMT 2
Mobil Oil Mobilux EP2
3BSM 008369, rev. E 6-43

6.4.4 Maintenance plan for anti-friction bearings on horizontal and

vertical motors
Every two years
During service
Quarterly
Annually
Monthly
Weekly
Anti-friction Measure temperature at the provided
bearings measuring points and record.
Measure motor vibration using the

installed instruments or a portable
meter. Measuring points/directions: On
horizontal motors, on bearing housing
and vertical. On vertical motors, on
bearing endshield in two directions.
Take measurements of the bearing con-

dition by the shock-pulse method (SPM)
and record. Always do this at the same
speed and operating conditions. (See
section 6.5.2 on page 45).
Regrease the bearings. (Only when the

motor is running, see lube labels on the
motor).
Check bearing seals for loss of grease

and clean off any dirt deposits.
Replace wear and tear parts (bearings,

sliding or rubbing seals etc.).
Wash out bearing covers, labyrinth

seals etc. and renew grease filling.
Check for rust. (See Chapter 7 Servicing

and cleaning).
Anti-friction Check insulation on bearing endshields.

bearings, (See section 6.5.4 on page 47).
when both
insulated.
Table 6-2. Maintenance plan for anti-friction bearings

Observe regreasing intervals given on the general arrangement drawing. In case of bearing
temperatures >70 C and/or very dusty environments, the intervals for regreasing the bearings
and for emptying the used grease container must be shortened. When, for process reasons, a
motor is frequently at standstill, regreasing must be done at least once per year. This is made
necessary by the useful life of the grease, possible condensation in the bearing enclosures etc.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 6-44

6.5 Bearing monitoring instruments and bearing insulation

The set values will normally have been agreed upon at the time of placing the order (see
connection diagram).
6.5.1 Bearing temperatures

When not agreed otherwise the set values for bearing temperature monitoring are:
Alarm 90 C
Shutdown 100 C
A sudden increase in bearing temperature compared with the normal operating temperature is an
indication of the development of damage. If necessary, the cause must be investigated with the
motor at standstill.
6.5.2 Bearing condition monitoring by the shock-pulse method

(SPM, only for anti-friction bearings)
All anti-friction bearings are equipped with measuring nipples, as a standard, for taking
readings with portable equipment. The measurements pick up the shock-pulses emitted when
the rolling elements pass over an unevenness in the raceway. The measuring equipment converts
this value into a so-called spike pulse with the unit SV (= Shock Value).
The speed and the bearing diameter are decisive to allocate the measured values to one of the
ranges good, average or poor.
The SPM method is intended for trend measurement. Evaluation is only meaningful when the
records show the initial values taken during the trial runs in the plant and those of following
measurements taken periodically at the same speed and load conditions. (Never take
measurements directly after regreasing).
NOTE: During the trial runs, the values good and average are evaluated as being
acceptable.
After a certain running-in time the values can improve.
Starting with the initial values, further measurements indicate the trend. A rapid worsening is a
deciding factor in determining the time for a pending bearing change.
It follows, that a bearing condition diagnosis based on one single measurement can not be made
with SPM, but periodic comparison measurements must be taken under the same conditions,
whereby the differences in obtained values are the criteria for evaluation.
6.5.3 Bearing housing and shaft vibration

The limit values for bearing housing acc. to section 6.5.3.1 and shaft vibration acc. to section
6.5.3.2.
These values are not valid for motors driving reciprocating compressors, diesel generators or
machines mounted on a foundation having a low natural frequency. For these machines, values
must be agreed upon with the customer at the time of the order.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 6-45

6.5.3.1 Bearing housing vibration

The applicable quantity is the rms value of the vibration velocity measured on the bearing
housing.
Veff
Alarm 4.5 mm/s
Trip 7.1 mm/s
6.5.3.2 Shaft vibration

The applicable quantity is the peak-to-peak value of the vibration amplitude of the shaft. The
shaft vibration is to be measured directly beside the bearing.
s(p-p)
Alarm s = 9000 ( n ) []
(p-p)
Trip s (p-p) = 13200 ( n ) []
n = speed[1/min]
Speed Alarm Trip Alarm Trip
[m] [m] [mills] [mills]
1200 260 381 10.2 15.0
1500 232 341 9.1 13.4
1800 212 311 8.4 12.2
2400 184 269 7.2 10.6
3000 164 241 6.5 9.5
3600 150 220 5.9 8.7
Table 6-3. Peak-to-peak values of shaft vibration amplitude in m and mills.

mills = [inch/1000]
3BSM 008369, rev. E 6-46

6.5.4 Bearing insulation

This work involves the main circuits of the motor normally connected to the high voltage
supply net. Before you start to work:
1. Make sure the motor is disconnected from the high voltage net and that the circuit breaker
is locked in the open position so it not accidentally (or otherwise) can be closed during the
measurements.
2. Note also that capacitors can contain dangerous voltages, so be sure to earth all details
before you touch them.
When both bearings are insulated, the condition of the bearing insulation can be measured on
the assembled motor. When taking the measurement, the short-circuit across the insulation must
be opened (switch jumper cable from steel bolt to insulation bolt).
Measuring instrument: megger
Evaluation: no signal
When only one bearing is insulated, the condition can only be assessed when the bearing or
bearing endshield is dismantled.
6.6 Checking the cooling elements of heat exchangers

Heavy deposits in the cooling tubes can considerably reduce the cooling effect, i.e. the heat
transfer. Depending on the degree of contamination, annular inspections could be necessary.
In the case of water coolers, if there is evidence of corrosion, the water analysis should be
repeated and replacement parts considered for a possible spare parts order.
6.6.1 Checking and replacing the sacrificial anodes on water coolers

Checking and replacing sacrificial anodes is described in section 7.2.3.5 on page 53.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 6-47

6.7 Maintenance plan for cage-induction motors
during service
every 2 years
quarterly
annually
monthly
weekly
Temperature Follow up of temperatures at the provided
monitoring of measuring points (e.g. RTDs) by monitor-
the stator ing system
winding and
cooling air
Stator winding Measurement of insulation resistance (see

section 6.5.4 , Page 47). A winding diag-
nosis is recommendable after 3 years.
Bearings Refer to maintenance plans Table 6-1. ,

Page 42 and Table 6-2. , Page 44.
Complete Listen for unusual machine noise or

Machine changes in noise emission (e.g. rubbing or
knocking noises).
Check all accessible places for rust (see

Chapter 7 Servicing and cleaning).
Connections Check all cables and wires, and their

for power sup- connections for condition, fastening and
ply, instrumen- cleanliness.
tation and con-
trol
Earthing Check extent of wear, ease of movement

brushes (when in the holders, and brush pressure. Clean
such are fitted) contact surfaces of brushes and shaft with
a fine polishing cloth.
Air-to-water Check piping and cooler for leakage.

heat
exchanger Check inside of cooling tubes for possible
deposits or signs of corrosion (depending
on water contamination and water treat-
ment).
Check sacrificial anodes (depending on

water contamination and water treatment).
Air-to-air heat Check inside of cooling tubes for deposits.

exchanger
Other ventila- Check filter for degree of contamination.

tion units (e.g. Clean or replace filter after filter monitor
IPW24 responds (depending on contamination of
weather pro- ambient air).
tection units).
3BSM 008369, rev. E 6-48

during service
every 2 years
quarterly
annually
monthly
weekly
Coupling Check state of coupling alignment and
record values.
Maintenance on coupling according to the

manufacturers instructions. Should the
vibration level increase carry out check
immediately or decrease maintenance
interval.
Foundation Check machine foundation bolts for tight-

ness.
Fastening Check for tightness and condition of lock-

bolts ing elements.
Fan-motor on Regrease antifriction bearings. Check for

ventilation rust and cleanliness (see section 7.1 on
unit, when page 50).
such is fitted
Table 6-4. Maintenance plan for cage-induction motors
3BSM 008369, rev. E 6-49

Chapter 7 Servicing and cleaning
7.1 Servicing
Well planned and carefully carried out servicing helps to maintain high availability of the plant
and to avoid consequential damages.
7.1.1 Dismantling and reassembly

Detailed information on dismantling and reassembly are presented in Chapter 8, Dismantling
and reassembly, page 56.
7.1.2 Service sleeve bearings

Before filling the bearings with new oil, flush them out with a halogen-free solvent (e.g.
SANGOJOL, VARSOL or WHITE SPIRIT).
Following recommissioning, a bearing inspection after running for three hours is still the best
means of preventing damage and should not be ignored. (Refer to chapter 8, for instructions on
dismantling and reassembling). The important thing is to carry out servicing at the right time.
The first service should be carried out after either 500 starts or 8000 hours of operation, but not
later than two years after commissioning. Afterwards, servicing is recommended at intervals of
2 to 4 years. Services should be planned to utilize normal operational shut-downs:
Draw up the service plan in good time with ABB and if necessary with the insurance
company. The records taken and the observations made during regular maintenance serve
as an important basis for this.
Reserve necessary workshop capacity.
Ensure necessary tools and equipment are ready.
Determine requirements for possible replacement parts, complement stock of spare parts.
7.1.2.1 Inspection of the sliding surfaces of sleeve bearings

The condition of the contact surfaces indicates whether the bearing shells were correctly fitted
and are matched to the forces arising during operation. Indication is also given as to whether the
oil supply is sufficient.
Remove any imperfections in the load-bearing surfaces using a scraper (do not use emery
cloth!). Clean load-bearing surfaces until a white cloth remains clean!
7.1.2.2 Oil rings

Check roundness of oil rings with values given in Table 7-1 on page 51.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 7-50

Permissible out-of-round
Inside diameter of oil ring [mm] *)
[mm] (In accordance with DIN 322)
> 140 - 200 0.5 mm

> 200 - 280 0.6 mm
> 280 - 400 0.7 mm
> 400 - 500 0.8 mm
> 500 - 600 0.9 mm
> 600 - 760 1.0 mm
Table 7-1. *) Average value of two measurements displaced by 90
7.1.3 Service of anti-friction bearings

If a lubricating grease of another soap base is to be used then the bearings must be washed out
with a halogen-free solvent (e.g. SANGOJOL, VARSOL or WHITE SPIRIT) prior to filling
with the new lubricating grease. This requires dismantling the bearings, refer to chapter 8, for
instructions on dismantling and reassembling. After the bearing components have been cleaned,
they should be greased immediately to prevent corrosion.
A rise in bearing temperature for a brief time after relubricating is insignificant as the grease
regulator quickly eliminates the initial over- presure and ejects excessive grease.
7.1.4 Reconditioning work during servicing

Cleaning.
Remove any signs of rust or burrs (in particular on the shaft seats, bearing shoulders and
bore of bearing endshields) by brushing off, or rubbing off using a whet stone (oil stone)
and then polish over.
Check functional dimensions and if necessary correct by means of a suitable resurfacing
process (e.g. metal spraying).
Where painting is not allowed, give blank surfaces a coating of a suitable rust inhibitor,
and protect them from moisture during possible periods of storage.
Replace damaged wear and tear parts such as bearings, seals etc.
7.2 Cleaning
7.2.1 Mechanical dry cleaning

As a basic rule a mechanical process (scraper, vacuum cleaner with a soft nozzle or brush,
compressed air) should be carried out first. When using compressed air, care is to be taken that
dirt is not blown into the windings.
7.2.2 Wet cleaning with cleaning agents

Wet cleaning should only be carried out after an initial dry cleaning to avoid dirt from being
transported into the windings which would be potentially dangerous.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 7-51

WARNING - Danger of fire

Some technical liquids are very flammable. Use them with care. Do not smoke or have a
flame near the working place. Have a person prepared with a fire extinguisher at the
working place during the work. Also use a breathing mask during the task.
As the cleaning agent will become contaminated by dipping in the brush, prepare only small
quantities and replace as necessary. Prepare plenty of small, clean and lint-free cleaning cloths.
Working on small areas in turn, apply the cleaning agent using a hard brush and then
immediately wipe over with a cleaning cloth. Change the cloths regularly.
7.2.3 Cleaning the air-to-water cooler
7.2.3.1 Cleaning interval

The degree of deposit build-up on the heat-exchanging surfaces of the cooler will depend on the
cleanliness and composition of the coolants. Heavy deposits can considerably affect the cooling
capacity making cleaning essential.
It is therefore recommended to inspect the cooler periodically and to clean when necessary to
prevent any deposits building up to form thick hard layers or even complete blocking of the
tubes. The deposits can be removed either mechanically or chemically, whereby mechanical
cleaning is the preferred method with consideration to corrosion. Should there be any signs of
corrosion, the water analysis should be repeated and the results considered when ordering spare
parts.
7.2.3.2 Dismantling
Drain the cooler and connected piping. Remove the bolts from the pipe flanges and those from
the cooler fastening flanges, and withdraw the cooling element from the cooler housing.
The water chamber covers can be removed to enable cleaning the insides of the cooling tubes.
When reassembling, ensure that the joint faces are clean, free of grease and dry. It is not
permitted to use sealing pastes or compounds etc. Clean the gaskets and ensure that they are not
damaged. Tighten up the bolts working on diagonally opposite pairs.
7.2.3.3 Cleaning the inside of the cooling tubes

Loose dirt can be flushed out by increasing the flow velocity (increasing the pressure up to the
test pressure).
Soft deposits can be removed by using a nylon tube brush. Fasten the brush to a rod and push
through the tubes.
High pressure water has proven to be effective for removing hard crusted deposits. High
pressure equipment can operate at pressures of up to 500 bar.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 7-52

Chemical cleaning agents must be chosen with great caution giving due consideration to
corrosion. It is advisable to consult the supplier in advance and obtain his confirmation that the
proposed product will not harm the tubes. Cleaning of the air water cooler to cooling coil.
7.2.3.4 Cleaning the outside of the cooling tubes

The following methods can be applied depending on the kind of dirt deposits involved:
Blowing down with compressed air.
Swill with warm water or steam, adding a cleaning agent if the dirt is oily or sooty.
Spray with high pressure water: Caution, adjust the pressure so that the cooling fins will
not be bent.

Adjust the pressure so that cooling fins will not be bent.
7.2.3.5 Sacrificial anodes (expendable anodes) for air-water coolers

When metals of different electrochemical potential are galvanically joined together, the
presence of an electrolyte, such as sea water for example, results in the formation of a galvanic
element and the electrochemical degradation of the baser metal. Controlled degradation of a
sacrificial anode prevents this degradation and produces a protective coating on those parts
made of copper alloy.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 7-53

Figure 7-1 Sacrifial anode

The pure iron sacrificial anodes (figure 7-1) are screwed into the bottom part of the cooler. They
should be checked at regular intervals, at least once per year. The cooler element need not be
emptied for this inspection, but the water pressure should be reduced.
The surface of an active sacrificial anode will show signs of its own material degradation and
also deposits of corrosion products. In case of excessive corrosion the water analysis should be
repeated. When the sacrificial anodes are dirty they must be cleaned.
When ordering replacement sacrificial anodes quote the motor type and serial number. Any dirt
accumulated during transport or storage is to be thoroughly cleaned off prior to fitting.
7.3 Stocking of spare parts

The following is a recommendation for the stocking of spare parts depending on the machine
type and its design.
This low investment can often prevent minor defects from developing into a more serious
situation.
For all kinds of machines, depending on its design
1 Set of bearing shells incl. oil rings and seals
1 Set of anti-friction bearings (type designation engraved in bearing)
1 Set of air filters
1 Set of earthing brushes and their holders
Sacrificial anodes.
In the case of a single motor for a very important drive system or when there are several
identical motors in the plant, the following additional spare parts are also recommended:
1 Spare rotor
1 Spare slide-in stator
1 Spare slipring.
Orders for spare parts should be directed to our responsible representative quoting the
following data:
1. Motor for which the parts are intended.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 7-54

2. Type designation and serial number of the machine. (This data is given on the motor rating
plate. Please copy this data very carefully in order to avoid incorrect deliveries).
3. Quantities and names of the desired spare parts, Item Number. (when such is given) or
drawing or sheet number.
This data listed under points 1 3 is still to be given, even when spare parts are being ordered
based on a submitted example, otherwise it can be difficult to determine where the parts belong.
The motor type designation and serial number should also be quoted in all correspondence.
Example for a spare parts order or request for quotation:
Machine type and Serial number.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 7-55

Chapter 8 Dismantling and reassembly
8.1 Safety instructions

When carrying out any work on electrical conductors the local rules and regulations are to
be observed. Non-observance of these could result in severest bodily injury or to loss of
life.
Prior to removing protection covers, ventilation units, bearing endshields etc. the
following points are to be conscientiously carried out:
1. Switch off all circuits feeding the motor such as the main power supply, auxiliary systems
for the monitoring equipment and any accessories fitted.
2. Ensure all power supplies to the motor are dead and secured against unauthorized
reconnection.
3. Disconnect the cables at the motor for the main power supply, monitoring equipment, any
accessories fitted and earthing.
8.2 Dismantling
First of all:
uncouple the motor
remove the holding-down bolts and any dowel pins fitted.
8.2.1 Coupling hub with a feather key

The coupling hub is to be removed cold using a puller. When necessary, it can be flame heated
to ease removal.
8.2.2 Coupling hub with a cylindrical shrink fit

1. Fit studs (1) and holding plate (2).
2. Connect all the tapped oil-injection holes in the hub to the pump with the high-pressure
hoses (5).
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-56

NOTE: Do not damage the cone seals!

Under no circumstances may the tapped oil-injection holes in the coupling hub be
recut.

Support the coupling hub in the crane slings in such a way that it can not tip and slip out.
3. Place a drip tray underneath the coupling hub.

4. Inject oil, ISO VG 68 (68 mm2/s at 40 C), until the oil slots are full.
5. Maintain a constant pressure of max 1200 to 2000 bar at the middle connection, when
there is one, otherwise at the outer connection. When the pressure begins to fall, maintain
the max. pressure also at the other connections. After about 10 to 15 min oil will emerge
from each end of the shrink fit.
6. Change oil type to ISO VG 150 and repeat the whole procedure. Waiting time, at least 20
min.
7. Coupling hub with plain cylindrical shrink fit
Begin the removal process by producing a force of 45 t using the pump (8). Gradually
increase the force to max 65 t within 10 to 15 min. When the coupling hub begins to move,
continuously pump in more oil to maintain the full pressure and removal occurs in one
swift movement without interruption. In case of oil leakage, try changing to cylinder oil, or
clean the joint areas with acetone and seal with Araldite (AV 121 N).
8
5
7
4
1 Stud 6
2 Holding plate
3 Hydraulic jack
4 Oil pump 2
5 High-pressure hose 3
6 Pump support
7 Sling
8 Manometer 1
Figure 8-1
8. Coupling hub with a stepped cylindrical shrink fit

Begin the removal process by injecting oil into the connection (6) using the oil pump (5).
This will force the coupling hub to move axially. Removal must occur in one smooth
movement without interruption. The oil pumps (1) must be maintained at full pressure
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-57

during the whole removal process.
7 7
2 2 4
1 1
3
1 Oil pump
2 High-pressure hose
3 Pump support
4 Sling 5
2
5 Oil pump (pneumatic 6
or motor driven)
6 Connection nipple
7 Manometer
Figure 8-2
NOTE: If the stroke of the hydraulic jack is not long enough to pull the hub off in one
single operation, then interrupt the process while the last oil slot is still on the
shaft (approx. 70 mm of hub length). Insert a spacer and pull off the remaining
length of hub without further interruption.
NOTE: The pump (5) must be able to produce a pressure of at least 1000 bar.
8.2.3 Coupling hub with a tapered shrink fit
1. Loosen shaft-end nut, or locking device, so far to afford sufficient clearance for axial
movement of the coupling hub.
Insert a rubber or wooden spacer between coupling hub and the stop nut to avoid damage
of the thread in the nut.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-58


Shaft-end nut, or locking device, must never be completely removed because the coupling
hub can suddenly and unexpectedly break from its seat!
2. Connect injection hole, in the hub, to the oil pump (3) by means of the high-pressure hose
(2).
3. Place a drip tray underneath the coupling hub.
4. Inject oil, ISO VG 68 (68 mm2/s at 40 C), until the oil slots are full.
5. Maintain a constant pressure of max 1200 to 2000 bar at the middle connection, when
there is one, otherwise at the outer connection. When the pressure starts to fall maintain the
max. pressure also at the other connections. After about 10 to 15 min oil will emerge from
each end of the shrink fit.
6. Maintain max oil pressure (1200 to 2000 bar) until the coupling hub slides up to its limit of
axial movement. In case of too much oil leakage, try changing to cylinder oil, or clean the
joint areas with acetone and seal with Araldite (AV 121 N).
1 Coupling hub
2 High-pressure hose
3 Oil pump
4 Manometer
5 Pump support
Figure 8-3
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-59

8.2.4 Removing the ventilation unit from a horizontal motor
8.2.4.1 Air-to-water cooler

Drain cooling elements and piping. Disconnect flanges.
8.2.4.2 Air-to-air cooler
Figure 8-4
When provided, dismantle noise damping units from air inlet (1) and air outlet (2).
8.2.4.3 Motors type AMB
4
AMB
2
3 1
5
Figure 8-5
1. Dismantle cover (1) and air-guide ring (2). Remove circlip (5).
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-60

2. Flame-heat fan (3) and pull off using an extractor.

3. Loosen 4 nuts (6) and remove fan cowling (4).
8.2.5 Weather protection units
8.2.5.1 All ventilation units

The ventilation unit is very heavy.
AMB AMC
3 1
3 1 2 4
Figure 8-6
Remove 4 fastening bolts (1) and washers (2) and lift off cooler with the crane. Check seal (3),
replace if necessary. Seal must be perfectly seated.
8.2.6 Removing the ventilation unit from a vertical motor
8.2.6.1 Air-to-water cooler
1 2 4
5 7
Figure 8-7
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-61

1. Remove cover (1) and air-guide ring (2).

2. Loosen bolts (3) on tension element (4) and pull off fan (5).
3. Loosen nuts (6) and take off fan cowling (7).
3
4
2
Figure 8-8

The unit is very heavy.
4. Sling cooler (4) on crane and unscrew 4 fastening bolts (1).

5. Remove washers (2) and lift away cooler.
g s ig n
W a rn in
Figure 8-9
6. Before turning motor to the horizontal position lock rotor axially by means of locking
screws.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-62

Instructions for turning the motor are given in section 3.4.
8.2.7 Weather protection unit
8.2.8 Dismantling anti-friction bearings on horizontal motors

D and N ends
7D
5D
10D
6D D-Lager
8D 2D
9D 5N
12D
11D 1D 10N
4D
12N
6D
13D 2N
13N
1N 4N 3N 14N
N-Lager
Figure 8-10
1. Remove circlips 1D, 1N.
2. Dismantle labyrinth covers 2D, 2N or cover plate 3N.
3. Pull off labyrinth rings 4D, 4N cold using an extractor. If necessary flame-heat to ease
removal.
4. Remove bearing covers 5D, 5N.
5. Unscrew bearing endshield fastening screws and pull off bearing endshields 6D, 6N incl.
outer rings of roller bearing.
6. Pull off inner ring of roller bearing cold using an extractor. If necessary flame-heat to ease
removal.
Only D-end
7. Loosen bolts 11D and remove bearing ring 7D incl. spacer rings (2 pcs.) 8D.
8. Pull off at ball bearing 9D cold using an extractor. If necessary flame-heat to ease removal.
D + N ends
9. Remove bearing covers 10D, 10N from the shaft.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-63

8.2.9 Dismantling anti-friction bearings from vertical motors
AMB 560
AMB 630 , 710

9 5
6 7
4 8
2
10
7
3
Figure 8-11
Top bearing (N-end)

1. Turn motor to horizontal position (see Chapter 3.4 ).
2. Remove cover (1).
3. Remove ring (2) and 2 half-rings (3).
4. Pull off balance disc (4) cold using an extractor. If necessary flame-heat to ease removal.
5. Unscrew fastening bolts from cover (5) and pull off bearing endshield.
6. Pull off angular contact ball bearing (7) cold using an extractor (one on motors type
AMB560 and 2 on larger motors). If necessary flame-heat to ease removal.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-64

Bottom bearing
15D
9D
10D
6D
13D
5D
2D 11D
4D
Figure 8-12
1. Same as Dismantling anti-friction bearing from horizontal motors.
NOTE: Do not lose bearing prestress springs 15D!
8.2.10 Dismantling sleeve bearings
3 10 12)
9 12)
4 4b 4a
4b
5
13)
4a 13)
11
2
7 1
6
8
1. Cover 8. Lower half bearing housing
2. Seal cover 9. Motor seal
3. Upper half bearing housing 10. Spring
4. Bearing seal (4a and 4b) 11. Bearing endshield
5. Upper half bearing shell 12. Stopper
6. Lower half bearing shell 13. Oil drain hole
7. Lube ring
Figure 8-13
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-65

1. Drain off oil.

2. Remove the cover (1) or the seal carrier (2).
3. Remove the bolts in the upper half of the bearing housing (3) and lift the upper half away.
4. Remove the springs (10) on each bearing seal (4a,b) and remove the bearing seal.
5. Remove the bolts from the upper half of the bearing shell (5) and disconnect the earthing
cable.
6. Insert a lifting eyes and carefully lift the upper half of the bearing shell away.

7. Loosen the bolts holding together the lube ring (7) and remove the two halves (the lube
ring is made of brass in two halves, held together with bolts and cylindrical pins).
8. In order not to damage the bottom half of the bearing shell during removal, the rotor must
be carefully raised until the shaft just touches the bore of the motor seal (9).
9. Attach a lifting eye into the lower half of the bearing shell and draw the assembly toward
you so that is slides around the journal. Insert lifting eyes in the top of the bearing shell and
carefully lift lower bearing shell away. See figure 8-14.
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
Figure 8-14

10. Screw eye bolt into bearing endshield (11), remove the bolts and lift carefully the bearing
endshield away by using a crane.
11. Remove the motor seal (9).
8.2.11 Space heater

1. On machines with 6 poles or more, an air guide ring is fitted, which must be removed.
2. Remove space heater.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-66

NOTE: The space heater can also be removed without taking off the bearing endshield.
Remove access cover (1) and work from the side of the motor.
Figure 8-15 Removing the space heater
8.2.11.1 Rotor withdrawal

The rotor is very heavy.
NOTE: Do not damage the core or winding. Insert presspahn in stator bore.
1. Withdraw rotor with the help of an extension pipe (1).
2. Inside diameter of pipe must be matched to the shaft diameter. Protect shaft.
3. Before removing the internal fan, mark its circumferential location on the fan carrier ring
(so not to introduce unbalance at re-assembly).
4. For AMC motors, mark fans D and N. Remove N-end fan before withdrawing the rotor.
Do not interchange fans at reassembly!
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-67

Figure 8-16
8.3 Reassembly
Reassemble the motor following the instructions given for dismantling in the reverse sequence.
(Rotor withdrawal Section 8.2.10 )
8.3.1 Fitting the air guide rings
2 3 4
1 2
Figure 8-17 AMB with shaft-mounted fan Figure 8-18 AMB 2-pole
1 Air-guide ring 3 Air-guide-ring (D+N)
2 Fastening screws 4 Bearing endshields (D+N)
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-68

7
5
2
2
1 1
3 4
Figure 8-19 AMC

1. Ensure all bolts inside the motor are properly tightened up and provided with their original
locking elements.
2. In the case of AMC motors pay particular attention to the direction of rotation. Do not
interchange the fans.
3. Carefully insert rotor (see rotor withdrawal).
4. Fit ventilation unit.
8.3.2 Assembling anti-friction bearings
D-End N-End
Figure 8-20
1. Normally the bearings will be replaced by new ones.
2. Wash out bearing cover.
3. Carry out dimensional check on shaft and bore of bearing endshield.
4. Check seats for possible damage. When necessary smooth imperfections using emery
paper (coarseness P220).
5. Apply a light coating of oil to shaft and bore of bearing inner ring (only fill pores).
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-69

6. Apply a coating of Wevopat 2000 to all seatings and spigot faces.

7. Grease quality for packing out and relubrication.
8. Clean lube holes in the bearing cover and bearing endshield. Important: Inject grease
through the lube channels until clean grease is discharged.
9. Fill bearing cover with grease and slide onto shaft: On vertical motors fix spring in inner
cover with grease.
10. Heat bearing to 115 C in an oil bath and slide onto shaft. Flame-heat labyrinth and fit into
place.

Temperatures above 120 C damage the bearings.
When necessary, exchange the O-ring (1) (Figure 8-21).
In the case of angular contact bearings, pay particular attention to correct location
(Figure 8-22).
11. Fill grooves in the labyrinth cover with special grease USBB 312 and fit parts.
Figure 8-21
Figure 8-22
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-70

8.3.3 Assembling sleeve bearings

Before beginning, ensure that the shaft surfaces and the bearing components are clean. When
necessary exchange worn parts.
1. Assemble the motor seal (9) to the bearing endshield (11). Apply a thin coat of sealing
compound (WEVOPAT) to the contact surfaces between motor seal and bearing endshield.
Tightening torque according to table below:
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Tightening torque (Nm) 89 89 215 420 725 1450
2. Assemble the bearing endshield to the motor housing. Apply a thin coat of sealing
compound (WEVOPAT) to the contact surfaces between bearing endshield and the motor
housing.

3. Assemble the lower half of the bearing housing (8) and the bearing endshield. Apply a thin
coat of sealing compound (WEVOPAT) to the contact surfaces between bearing housing
and the bearing endshield. Tightening torque according to table in point 1.
4. In order not to damage the lower half of the bearing shell during assembling, the rotor
must be carefully raised until the shaft just touches the bore of the motor seal (9).
5. Apply coating of oil (bearing lube oil) to faces of spherical seat and bearing contact
surfaces. Insert lifting eyes in the lower bearing shell over and onto the rotor shaft. Hold
onto the lifting eye and allow the shell to glide around the journal until the lower shell is
inserted. See figure 8-23.
Step 1 Step 2 Step3

Figure 8-23
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-71


6. Lower the rotor shaft carefully into the bearing shell.

7. Check the distance between the bearing journal and the bearing shell with a feeler gauge
on front and rear end of the shell on both sides.
8. Assemble the lube ring. Apply Loctice to the bolts and tighten. Tightening torque
according to table below:
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Tightening torque(Nm) 1.4 2.7
9. Oil shaft and bearing shell top-half (5) and set onto shaft.
10. Connect the earth cable.
11. Insert the bolts and tighten the bolts with a torque wrench.
NOTE: Check location of stop to prevent the bearing seal from turning. See figure 8-13.
12. Coat joint faces and assemble the inner bearing seal (4b). Check location of the oil drain
hole (13) and the stopper (12) to prevent turning.
NOTE: Identification marks on the top and bottom shell halves must be identical and on
the same side.
13. Hand tighten joint-face fastening bolts in turn, working in a cross-wise sequence.
14. Clean the upper part of the bearing housing and apply thin coat of oil to the spherical
bearing seat.

15. Clean the horizontal joint of the upper and lower bearing housing carefully and apply a
thin coat of the sealing compound WEVOPAT.
16. Coat the contact surfaces between enshield and the upper bearing housing.
17. Tighten up flange bolts in top-half of bearing housing with torque specified in table below.
Lock bolts with Loctite.
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-72

Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Tightening torque (Nm) 89 89 215 420 725 1450
18. Tighten up joint-face fastening bolts, in turn working in a cross-wise sequence, with the
torques given in table under point 17.
19. Prepare outer bearing seals as for the inner ones and set onto shaft, fit seal-carrier halves
(2). Tightening torque according to the table below.
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Tightening Torque (Nm) 10.5 26
8.4 Recommended tightening torque for bolts on the motor

Recommended tightening torque for bolts, property class 8.8, slightly coated with oil.
NOTE: Do not use Molybdenum di-sulphide
Bolt size M8 M 10 M 12 M 16
Torque (Nm) 22.5 45 79 190
(lbft) 16.6 33 58 140
Bolt size M 20 M 24 M 30 M 36
Torque (Nm) 400 690 1390 2450
(lbft) 295 510 1022 1800
3BSM 008369, rev. E 8-73

Chapter 9 Trouble shooting
9.1 Operational faults on cage-induction motors

Instructions for determining the cause of abnormal behaviour or fault conditions on cage-
induction motors and proposed corrective measures.
Should abnormal behaviour arise when starting or operating the motor, the cause should be
determined and eliminated immediately, whereby prompt action can often avoid serious
damage. In case of phenomena which can not be satisfactorily explained, we and our sales
offices are at your disposal for further clarification.
The following lists are offered as guidelines for trouble shooting.

The motor must be isolated from the power supply system prior to carrying out any
investigations. Even when switched off at the stator switch, previous isolation from the
power supply system is still necessary.
Fault Possible cause of fault Corrective action
Motor does not start, no Interruptions in at least two Check fuses, supply cables
noise of the supply lines and terminal connections
No voltage Check supply cables
Motor does not start, hums Interruption in one supply Check supply cable and
line repair
Motor will not start under Load torque too high Correct driven equipment.
load, normal magnetic Uncouple motor and test at
noise no-load (Pay attention to
starting time and axial guid-
ance)
Supply voltage too low Measure supply voltage
Motor runs at no-load, stalls Break in a supply cable after Check supply cables
under load start-up
Rotor bars broken, sparking Inspect rotor

in air-gap
Soldered joints between

bars and cage rings loose
(an ammeter in the stator
circuit indicates periodic
fluctuations
3BSM 008369, rev. E 9-74

Motor overheats even at no- Stator wrongly connected Correct connection accord-
load (e.g. delta instead of star) ing to connection diagram
Supply voltage too high Measure supply voltage and

no-load current
Insufficient cooling as a Clean air passages

result of blocked air pas-
sages
Wrong direction of rotation Check direction of rotation

for motors fitted with uni- and fans
directional fans (angled
blades)
Motor overheats under load Motor is overloaded Check current input
Voltage too high or too low Measure voltage
Motor is single-phasing Check for break in supply

cables
Rotor is rubbing in the stator Check air-gap

bore
Local overheating in stator Short-circuits in stator wind- Dismantle motor to afford

winding ing (individual coils will be detailed inspection, call in
too hot, singed appearance) specialist, when necessary
send motor or rotor to
Humming noise, emission Rotor rubbing in stator bore manufacturer
of smoke, signs of fire (when signs of fire in air-
gap), broken or loose rotor
bars
Motor speed decreases Motor too weak or load Decrease load torque
greatly at low load torque too high
Voltage dip too great Check supply voltage and

section of supply cables
Periodic fluctuation at Interruption in rotor circuit Inspect rotor

ammeter in stator circuit (up due to broken or loose bars
to about 6 times per
second). Dependent on slip
Motor emits abnormal noise Mechanical or electrical When cause is electrical,

cause noise will disappear when
motor is switched off, when
mechanical it will usually
decrease with decreasing
speed. Consult manufac-
turer
3BSM 008369, rev. E 9-75

Abnormally high bearing Axial force too high Determine cause and elimi-
temperature nate
High vibration from an
extraneous source
Bearing damaged or insuffi-

ciently lubricated
Oil rings out-of-round or

have stepped lateral wear
Oil filling not correct

(level/grade) or oil is con-
taminated
Vibration on rotor Bearings or coupling dam- Check bearings, coupling,

aged, fault on gearbox or gearbox and driven equip-
driven equipment ment
Change in state of balance, Check balance of compo-

cause could be on motor, nents and dynamically
coupling or driven equip- rebalance when necessary
ment
Sinking of foundation, infe- Realign shaft train, rectify

rior foundation foundation
3BSM 008369, rev. E 9-76

3BSM 008369, rev. E
2006-12-08
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer System
Description
Transducer System
The 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer System consists of:
a 3300 XL 8 mm probe
a 3300 XL extension cable
a 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor1
The system provides an output voltage directly proportional to the distance between
the probe tip and the observed conductive surface. It is capable of both static
(position) and dynamic (vibration) measurements, and is primarily used for vibration
and position measurement applications on fluid-film bearing machines, as well as
Keyphasor and speed measurement applications2.
The 3300 XL 8 mm system represents our most advanced performance in an eddy
current proximity transducer system. The standard 3300 XL 8 mm 5 metre system
is also 100% compliant with the American Petroleum Institutes (API) 670 Standard
(4th Edition) for mechanical configuration, linear range, accuracy, and temperature
stability. All 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer Systems achieve this level of
performance while allowing complete interchangeability of probe, extension cable,
and Proximitor Sensor without the need for individual component matching or
bench calibration.
Each component of the 3300 XL 8 mm Transducer System is backward compatible
and interchangeable3 with other non-XL 3300 series 5 and 8 mm transducer system
components4. This includes the 3300 5 mm probe, which is used when an 8 mm
probe is too large for the available mounting space5,6.
Proximitor Sensor
The 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor incorporates numerous improvements over
previous designs. Its physical packaging permits high-density DIN-rail installation.
It can also be mounted in a traditional panel mount configuration, where it shares an
identical footprint to older 4-hole mounted Proximitor Sensor designs. The
mounting base for either option provides electrical isolation, eliminating the need for
separate isolator plates. The 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor is highly immune to
radio frequency interference, allowing installation in fiberglass housings without
adverse effects from nearby radio frequency signals. Improved RFI/EMI immunity
allows the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor to achieve European CE mark approvals
without requiring special shielded conduit or metallic housings, resulting in lower
installation costs and complexity.
The 3300 XLs SpringLoc terminal strips require no special installation tools and
facilitate faster, more robust field wiring connections by eliminating screw-type
clamping mechanisms that can loosen.
Part number 141194-01 Specifications and Ordering Information Page 1 of 29

Revision G, June 2005
Proximity Probe and Extension Cable system for tachometer or overspeed measurements.
The 3300 XL probe and extension cable also reflect 3. 3300 XL 8 mm components are both electrically
improvements over previous designs. A patented TipLoc and physically interchangeable with non-XL 3300
molding method provides a more robust bond between the 5 and 8 mm components. Although the packaging
probe tip and the probe body. The probes cable is more of the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor differs from
securely attached as well, incorporating a patented its predecessor, it is designed to fit in the same 4-
CableLoc design that provides 330 N (75 lbf) pull hole mounting pattern when used with the 4-hole
strength where the probe cable attaches to the probe tip. mounting base, and will fit within the same
mounting space specifications (when minimum
3300 XL 8 mm Probes and Extension Cables can also be permissible cable bend radius is observed).
ordered with an optional FluidLoc cable option. This
option prevents oil and other liquids from leaking out of the 4. When XL and non-XL 3300-series 5 and 8 mm
machine through the cables interior. system components are mixed, system
performance is limited to the specifications for the
Connectors non-XL 3300 5 and 8 mm Transducer System.
The 3300 XL probe, extension cable, and Proximitor 5. The 3300-series 5 mm probe (refer to
Sensor have corrosion-resistant, gold-plated ClickLoc Specifications and Ordering Information p/n
connectors. These connectors require only finger-tight 141605-01) uses smaller physical packaging, but
torque (connectors will "click"), and the specially does not permit reduced sideview clearances or
engineered locking mechanism prevents the connectors tip-to-tip spacing requirements compared to an 8
from loosening. They do not require any special tools for mm probe. It is used when physical (not
installation or removal. electrical) constraints preclude the use of an 8 mm
3300 XL 8 mm Probes and Extension Cables can also be probe. When narrow sideview probes are required,
ordered with connector protectors already installed. use the 3300 NSv Proximity Transducer System
Connector protectors can also be supplied separately for (refer to Specifications and Ordering Information
installation in the field (such as when the cable must be run p/n 147385-01).
through restrictive conduit). Connector protectors are 6. 8 mm probes provide a thicker encapsulation of
recommended for all installations and provide increased the probe coil in the molded PPS plastic probe tip.
environmental protection7. This results in a more rugged probe. The larger
diameter of the probe body also provides a
Extended Temperature Range Applications
stronger, more robust case. Bently Nevada
An Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Probe and recommends the use of 8 mm probes when
Extension Cable are available for applications where either possible to provide optimal robustness against
the probe lead or extension cable may exceed the 177 C physical abuse.
(350 F) temperature specification. The Extended
Temperature Range Probe has an extended temperature 7. Silicone tape is also provided with each 3300 XL
rating for up to 260 C (500 F) for the probe lead and extension cable and can be used instead of
connector protectors. Silicone tape is not
connector. The probe tip must remain below 177 C (350
recommended in applications where the probe-to-
F). The Extended Temperature Range Extension Cable is
extension cable connection will be exposed to
also rated for up to 260 C (500 F). Both the ETR probe turbine oil.
and cable are compatible with standard temperature
probes and cables. For example, you can utilize an ETR
probe with the 330130 extension cable. The ETR system
uses the standard 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor. When Specifications
using any ETR component as part of your system, the Unless otherwise noted, the following specifications are for a
accuracy is limited to the accuracy of the ETR system. 3300 XL 8 mm Proximitor Sensor, extension cable and 8
Notes: mm probe between +18 C and +27 C (+64 F to +80 F),
with a -24 Vdc power supply, a 10 kilo load, an AISI 4140
1. Proximitor Sensors are supplied by default steel target, and a probe gapped at 1.27 mm (50 mils).
from the factory calibrated to AISI 4140 steel. Performance characteristics are applicable for systems that
Calibration to other target materials is available consist solely of 3300 XL 8 mm components. The system
upon request. accuracy and interchangeability specifications do not apply
when using a transducer system calibrated to any target
2. Consult Bently Nevada Applications Note, other than a Bently Nevada AISI 4140 steel target.
Considerations when using Eddy Current
Proximity Probes for Overspeed Protection
Applications, when considering this transducer
Electrical
Proximitor Extension cable
Sensor Input: capacitance:
Accepts one noncontacting 3300- 69.9 pF/m (21.3 pF/ft) typical
series 5 mm, 3300 8 mm or 3300 XL Field wiring:
8 mm Proximity Probe and Extension
Cable. 0.2 to 1.5 mm2 (16 to 24 AWG) .
Recommend using three-conductor
Power: shielded triax cable and tinned field
Requires -17.5 Vdc to -26 Vdc wiring. Maximum length of 305 metres
without barriers at 12 mA maximum (1,000 feet) between the 3300 XL
consumption, -23 Vdc to -26 Vdc with Proximitor Sensor and the monitor.
barriers. Operation at a more See the frequency response graphs,
positive voltage than -23.5 Vdc can figures 10 through 13 (pages 22 and
result in reduced linear range. 23) for signal rolloff at high frequencies
Supply when using longer field wiring lengths.
Sensitivity: Linear Range:
Less than 2 mV change in output 2 mm (80 mils). Linear range begins at
voltage per volt change in input approximately 0.25 mm (10 mils) from
voltage. target and is from 0.25 to 2.3 mm (10
Output to 90 mils) (approximately 1 to 17
resistance: Vdc).
50 Recommended Gap
Setting:
Probe dc resistance (nominal) (RPROBE) table:
Probe Resistance from the Center Conductor
1.27 mm (50 mils)
Length to the Outer Conductor (RPROBE) (ohms) Incremental Scale
0.5 7.45 0.50 Factor (ISF)
1.0 7.59 0.50

Standard 5 metre
1.5 7.73 0.50 system:
2.0 7.88 0.50 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 5% including
interchangeability error when
5.0 8.73 0.70 measured in increments of 0.25 mm
9.0 9.87 0.90
(10 mils) over the 80 mil linear range
from 0 to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F).
Standard 9 metre
Extension cable dc resistance (nominal):
Length of Resistance Resistance
system:
Extension from Center from Outer 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 6.5%
Cable Conductor to Conductor to including interchangeability error when
Center Outer measured in increments of 0.25 mm
Conductor Conductor (10 mils) over the 80 mil linear range
(RCORE) (RJACKET) from 0 to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F).
(ohms) (ohms) Extended
3.0 0.66 0.10 0.20 0.04 Temperature Range
(ETR) 5 and 9 metre
3.5 0.77 0.12 0.23 0.05 systems:
4.0 0.88 0.13 0.26 0.05 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 6.5%
including interchangeability error when
4.5 0.99 0.15 0.30 0.06 measured in increments of 0.25 mm
7.0 1.54 0.23 0.46 0.09 (10 mils) over the 80 mil linear range
from 0 to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F).
7.5 1.65 0.25 0.49 0.10
Deviation from best fit straight line (DSL)
8.0 1.76 0.26 0.53 0.11 Standard 5 metre
8.5 1.87 0.28 0.56 0.11 system:

Less than 0.025mm (1 mil) with remains within 18% of 7.87 V/mm
components at 0 C to +45 C (+32 (200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains
F to +113 F). within 0.152 mm (6 mils).
Standard 9 metre Extended
system: Temperature Range
Less than 0.038mm (1.5 mil) with system
components at 0 C to +45 C (+32 performance over
F to +113 F). extended
temperatures:
Extended
Over a probe and extension cable
Temperature
temperature range of 35 C to + 260
Range 5 and 9
C (-31 F to +500 F) with the
metre systems:
Proximitor Sensor between 0 C to
Less than 0.038mm (1.5 mil) with
+45C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF
components at 0 C to +45 C (+32
remains within 18% of 7.87 V/mm
F to +113 F).
(200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains
within 0.152 mm (6 mils).
Standard 5 metre Frequency
system Response:
performance over 0 to 10 kHz: +0, -3 dB, with up to 305
extended metres (1000 feet) of field wiring.
temperatures:
Minimum Target
Over a probe temperature range of
Size:
35 C to +120 C (-31 F to +248
15.2 mm (0.6 in) diameter (flat target)
F) with the Proximitor Sensor and
extension cable between 0 C to Shaft Diameter
+45C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF
Minimum:
50.8 mm (2 in)
Recommended
Over a Proximitor Sensor and
minimum:
extension cable temperature range of
76.2 mm (3 in)
35 C to +65 C (-31 F to +149 F)
with the probe between 0 C to +45 When gapped at the center of the
C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF linear range, the interaction between
remains within 10% of 7.87 V/mm two separate transducer systems
(200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains (cross-talk) will be less than 50 mV on
within 0.076 mm (3 mils). shaft diameters of at least 50 mm (2 in)
or greater. Care should be taken to
Standard 9 metre
maintain minimum separation of
system
transducer tips, generally at least 40
performance over
mm (1.6 in) for axial position
extended
measurements or 38 mm (1.5 in) for
temperatures:
radial vibration measurements to limit
Over a probe temperature range of
cross-talk to 50 mV or less. Radial
35 C to +120 C (-31 F to +248 F)
vibration or position measurements on
with the Proximitor Sensor and
shaft diameters smaller than 76.2 mm
extension cable between 0 C to
(3 in) will generally result in a change in
+45C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF
scale factor. Consult Performance
Specification 159484 for additional
information.
Over a Proximitor Sensor and
extension cable temperature range of
35 C to +65 C (-31 F to +149 F)
with the probe between 0 C to +45
C (+32 F to +113 F), the ISF
Effects of 60 Hz Magnetic Fields Up to 300 Gauss: Terminal Block Connections
Output voltage in mil pp/gauss: Ui= -28V Ci = 0
Gap 5 metre 9 metre Probe Ext. Ii= 140mA Li =10H
Proximitor Proximitor Cable
Sensor Sensor Pi= 0.84W
10 0.0119 0.0247 0.0004 0.0004 Coaxial Connection
mil
Ui = -28V Ci= 5.7nF
50 0.0131 0.0323 0.0014 0.0014
mil Ii = 140mA Li = 0.85mH
90 0.0133 0.0348 0.0045 0.0045 Pi = 0.84W

mil Load Parameters
Electrical Classification: The capacitance and either the
Complies with the European CE mark. inductance or the inductance to
resistance (L/R) ratio of the load
Hazardous Area Approvals connected to the probe coaxial
terminal, must not exceed the following
Note: Multiple approvals for hazardous areas values:
certified by Canadian Standards Association
(CSA/NRTL/C) in North America and by
Baseefa (2001) in Europe. Group Capacitance Inductance L/R
F mH Ratio
North America: H/?
IIC 0.077 0.99 35
Ex ia IIC T4/T5; Class I Zone 0 or
Class 1 Division 1; Groups A, B, C, IIB 0.644 7.41 142
and D, when installed with IIA 2.144 15.6 295
intrinsically safe zener barriers per
drawing 141092 or when installed
with galvanic isolators. The Proximitor must be installed so
as to minimize the risk of impact or
Ex nA IIC T4/T5 Class I Zone 2 or friction with other metallic surfaces.
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C,
and D when installed without barriers 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor, nA
per drawing 140979. IECEx BAS04.0057X
T5 @ Ta = -35 C to +85 C. AEx nA II T4 / T5 (-51C = Ta =
+100C / -35C = Ta = +85C)
T4 @ Ta= -51 C to +100 C.
The terminals must be provided with a
Europe: level of protection of at least IP54.
II 1 G EEx ia IIC T4/T5. EC
certificate number BAS99ATEX1101, Ui = -28V
when installed per drawing 141092. 3300 XL 8mm Eddy Current Probe, ia
II 3 G EEx nAII T4/T5. EC IECEx BAS04.0056
certificate number AEx ia IIC Temperature Classification
BAS99ATEX3100U,when installed per the table below.
per drawing 140979
T5 @ Ta= -35 C to +85 C Temperature Ambient Temperature
Classification (Probe Only)
T4 @ Ta= -51 C to +100 C.
T1 -51C to +232C
IEC Ex T2 -51C to +177C
3300 XL Proximitor Sensor, ia T3 -51C to +120C
T4 -51C to +80C
IECEx BAS04.0055X
T5 -51C to +40C
Ex ia IIC T4 / T5 (-51C = Ta =
+100C / -35C = Ta = +85C)

Ui = -28V Ci = 1.5nF 5 or 9 metres including extension cable
Ii = 140mA Li = 200H Standard Probe and
Extension Cable
Pi =0.84W
Armor (optional):
3300 XL 8mm Eddy Current Probe, Flexible AISI 302 or 304 SST with FEP
nA outer jacket.
IECEx BAS04.0058X Extended
Temperature Range
Ex nA II Temperature Classification Probe and
per the table above. Extension Cable
Must be supplied from a voltage Armor (optional):
limited source. Flexible AISI 302 or 304 SST with PFA
outer jacket.
EEx nA for Zone 2, Group IIC, EC
certificate number Tensile Strength
BAS99ATEX3100U. (maximum rated):
330 N (75 lbf) probe case to probe
Mechanical lead. 270 N (60 lbf) at probe lead to
Probe Tip extension cable connectors.
Material: Connector material:
Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS). Gold-plated brass or gold-plated
Probe Case beryllium copper.
Material: Probe case Maximum Recommended
AISI 303 or 304 stainless steel (SST). torque: Rated
Probe Cable Standard forward- 33.9 Nm 11.2 Nm
Specifications: mounted probes
Standard cable: (300 inlbf) (100 inlbf)
75 triaxial, fluoroethylene Standard forward- 22.6 Nm 7.5 Nm
propylene (FEP) insulated probe mount probes -
first three threads (200 inlbf) (66 inlbf)
cable in the following total probe
lengths: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 5, or 9 metres. Reverse mount 22.6 Nm 7.5 Nm
Extended probes
(200 inlbf) (66 inlbf)
Temperature
Range cable:
75 triaxial, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) Connector-to-connector torque
insulated probe cable in the following
total probe lengths: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 5,
or 9 metres. Recommended
torque:
Extension Cable see table:
Material:
75 triaxial, fluoroethylene Connector Type Tightening
propylene (FEP) insulated. Instructions
Extended Two 3300 XL gold "click" Finger tight

type connectors
Temperature
Range (ETR) One non-XL stainless Finger tight plus 1/8 turn
Extension Cable steel connector and one using pliers
Material: 3300 XL connector
75 triaxial, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA)
insulated.
Proximitor Maximum torque:
Sensor Material: 0.565 Nm (5 inlbf)
A308 aluminum Minimum Bend
System Length: Radius:
25.4 mm (1.0 in)
Total System Storage
Mass (typical): Temperature:
0.7 kg (1.5 lbm) -51 C to +105 C (-60 F to +221 F)
Probe: Relative Humidity:
323 g (11.38 oz) Less than a 3% change in Average
Scale Factor (ASF) when tested in 93%
Extension Cable:
humidity in accordance with IEC
34 g/m (0.4 oz/ft)
standard 68-2-3 for up to 56 days.
Armored Extension
Probe Pressure:
cable:
3300 XL 8 mm probes are designed to
103 g/m (1.5 oz/ft)
seal differential pressure between the
Proximitor probe tip and case. The probe sealing
Sensor: material consists of a Viton O-ring.
246 g (8.7 oz) Probes are not pressure tested prior to
shipment. Contact our custom design
Environmental Limits department if you require a test of the
Probe Temperature Range pressure seal for your application.
Note: It is the responsibility of the customer or
user to ensure that all liquids and gases are
Operating and contained and safely controlled should leakage
Storage occur from a proximity probe. In addition,
Temperature: solutions with high or low pH values may erode
Standard the tip assembly of the probe causing media
leakage into surrounding areas. Bently
probe: Nevada, LLC will not be held responsible for
-51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 any damages resulting from leaking 3300 XL 8
F) mm proximity probes. In addition, 3300 XL 8 mm
proximity probes will not be replaced under the
Extended service plan due to probe leakage.
Temperature
Range probe: Patents:
-51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 5,016,343;
F) for the probe tip; -51 C to +260 5,126,664;
C (-60 F to +500 F) for the probe
cable and connector. 5,351,388, and
Note: Exposing the probe to temperatures 5,685,884.
below 34 C (-30 F) may cause premature
failure of the pressure seal. Components or procedures described in these patents apply
to this product.
Extension Cable Temperature Range
Ordering Information
Operating and Storage Temperature: 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes:
Standard cable: 330101 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread,
-51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 without armor3
F)
330102 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, with
Extended armor3
Temperature
Range cable: Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX-EXX
-51 C to +260 C (-60 F to +500 Option Descriptions
F)
A: Unthreaded Length Option
Proximitor Sensor Temperature Range Note: Unthreaded length must be at least 0.8
inches less than the case length.
Operating Order in increments of 0.1 in

Temperature:
-51 C to +100 C (-60 F to +212 Length configurations:
F) Maximum unthreaded length: 8.8 in
Minimum unthreaded length: 0.0 in
Example: 0 4 = 0.4 in Example: 0 6 = 60 mm
B: Overall Case Length Option B: Overall Case Length Option
Order in increments of 0.1 in Order in increments of 10 mm.
Threaded length configurations: Metric thread configurations:
Maximum case length: 9.6 in Maximum length: 250 mm
Minimum case length: 0.8 in Minimum length: 20 mm
Example: 2 4 = 2.4 in Example: 0 6 = 60 mm
C: Total Length Option C: Total Length Option
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet) 15 1.5 metres (4.9 feet)
20 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 20 2.0 metres (6.6 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)1 50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
D: Connector and Cable-Type Option
D: Connector and Cable-Type Option 01 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM
01 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector
connector with connector protector, standard cable
protector, standard cable 02 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM
02 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector, standard cable
connector, standard cable 11 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM
11 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector
connector with connector protector, FluidLoc cable
protector, FluidLoc cable 12 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc
12 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector, FluidLoc cable
connector, FluidLoc cable E: Agency Approval Option
E: Agency Approval Option 00 Not required
00 Not required 05 Multiple Approvals
05 Multiple Approvals
3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probes
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Metric: 330105-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX, 3/8-24 UNF threads3
330103 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, without 330106-05-30-CXX-DXX-EXX, M10 x 1 threads3
armor3
Option Descriptions
330104 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, with
armor3 C: Total Length Option
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX-EXX
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
Option Descriptions
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet)
Note: Unthreaded length must be at least 20 20 2.0 metres (6.6 feet)
mm less than the case length.
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
Order in increments of 10 mm.
90 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
Length configuration:
D: Connector Option
Maximum unthreaded length: 230 02 Miniature ClickLocTM coaxial
mm connector
Minimum unthreaded length: 0 mm

12 Miniature ClickLocTM coaxial 3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range
connector, FluidLoc cable
(ETR) Proximity Probes:
Note: The FluidLoc cable options 10 and 330191 3300 XL 8 mm ETR Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread,
12 are not necessary on the vast majority of
330105 and 330106 installations due to the without armor
presence of the probe sleeve. Consider
carefully the application before ordering the
330192 3300 XL 8 mm ETR Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread,
FluidLoc cable options with armor
Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX
. E: Agency Approval Option Option Descriptions
00 Not required
05 Multiple Approvals Note: Unthreaded length must be at least 0.8
inches less than the case length.
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Smooth
Case: Order in increments of 0.1 in
330140 3300 XL 8 mm Probe without armor2 Length configurations:
330141 3300 XL 8 mm Probe with armor2 Maximum unthreaded length: 8.8 in
Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX Minimum unthreaded length: 0.0 in
Option Descriptions Example: 1 5 = 1.5 in
A: Overall Case Length Option B: Overall Case Length Option
Order in increments of 0.1 in Order in increments of 0.5 in
Length configurations: Threaded length configurations:
Maximum length: 9.6 in Maximum case length: 9.6 in
Minimum length: 0.8 in Minimum case length: 0.8 in
Example: 2 4 = 2.4 in Example: 2 5 = 2.5 in
B: Total Length Option C: Total Length Option
15 1.5 metres (4.9 feet) 15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)1
C: Connector and Cable-Type Option
01 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM D: Agency Approval Option
connector with connector 00 Not required
protector, standard cable
02 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM
connector, standard cable 3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range
11 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM (ETR) Proximity Probes, Metric:
connector with connector 330193 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, without
protector, FluidLoc cable armor
12 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM 330194 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, with
connector, FluidLoc cable armor
D: Agency Approval Option Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX
00 Not required Option Descriptions
05 Multiple Approvals A: Unthreaded Length Option

Note: Unthreaded length must be at least 20
mm less than the case length.
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range
(ETR) Proximity Probes, Smooth Case:
Order in increments of 10 mm. 330197 3300 XL 8 mm Probe without armor2
Length configuration: 330198 3300 XL 8 mm Probe with armor2
Maximum unthreaded length: 230 Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX
mm
Option Descriptions
A: Overall Case Length Option
Example: 0 6 = 60 mm
Order in increments of 0.5 in
B: Overall Case Length Option Length configurations:
Maximum length: 9.5 in
Metric thread configurations:
Minimum length: 1.0 in
Maximum length: 250 mm
Example: 3 5 = 3.5 in
Minimum length: 20 mm
B: Total Length Option
Example: 0 6 = 60 mm 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
C: Total Length Option 10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
C: Agency Approval Option
90 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) 00 Not required
D: Agency Approval Option
00 Not required
05 Multiple Approvals 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor
330180-AXX-BXX
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range
(ETR) Reverse Mount Probes Option Descriptions
330195-02-12-CXX-DXX, 3/8-24 UNF threads A: Total Length and Mounting Option
50 5.0 metre (16.4 feet) system
330196-05-30-CXX-DXX, M10 x 1 threads length, panel mount
Option Descriptions 51 5.0 metre (16.4 feet) system
C: Total Length Option length, DIN mount
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 52 5.0 metre (16.4 feet) system
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) length, no mounting hardware
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet) 90 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system

length, panel mount
91 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1 length, DIN mount
90 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) 92 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system
D: Agency Approval Option length, no mounting hardware
00 Not required B: Agency Approval Option
05 Multiple Approvals 00 Not required
05 Multiple approvals

3300 XL Extension Cable 045 4.5 metres (14.8 feet)
330130-AXXX-BXX-CXX 070 7.0 metres (22.9 feet)
Note: Make sure that the extension cable 075 7.5 metres (24.6 feet)
length and the probe length, when added
together, equal the Proximitor Sensor total 080 8.0 metres (26.2 feet)
length.
085 8.5 metres (27.9 feet)
Option Descriptions
B: Cable Option
A: Cable Length Option 00 Standard cable
01 Armored cable
035 3.5 metres (11.5 feet)
040 4.0 metres (13.1 feet) 00 Not required
045 4.5 metres (14.8 feet) 05 Multiple Approvals
070 7.0 metres (22.9 feet) Accessories
075 7.5 metres (24.6 feet) 141078-01
080 8.0 metres (26.2 feet) Manual
085 8.5 metres (27.9 feet) 159484

Performance Specification 3300 XL
B: Connector Protector and Cable Option Proximity Transducer System
00 Standard cable
162735
01 Armored cable Performance Specification 3300 XL
ETR probes and extension cables
02 Standard cable with
connector protectors 02120015
03 Armored cable with Bulk field wire. 1.0 mm2 (18 AWG), 3
connector protectors conductor, twisted, shielded cable with
drain wire. Specify length in feet.
10 FluidLoc cable
137491-AXX
11 Armored FluidLoc cable
Aluminum probe clamp bracket2
12 FluidLoc cable with
connector protectors Option Descriptions
13 Armored FluidLoc cable A: Mounting screw option

with connector protectors 01 10-24 UNC-2A mounting
screws
00 Not required 02 M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws
05 Multiple Approvals The aluminum clamp bracket is an unthreaded mounting

bracket designed to use with the smooth case probes
3300 XL Extended Temperature Range (ETR) (330140, 330141, 330197 and 330198). After gapping the
Extension Cable probe, tighten the clamp bracket by tightening the screws.
The mounting screws have pre-drilled holes for safety wire.
330190-AXXX-BXX-CXX
137492-AXX
Note: Make sure that the extension cable
length and the probe length, when added Aluminum probe threaded mounting
together, equal the Proximitor Sensor total
length.
bracket
Option Descriptions
Option Descriptions
A: Thread size
A: Cable Length Option
01 3/8-24
04 M10 x 1
035 3.5 metres (11.5 feet)
The aluminum probe threaded mounting bracket is the
040 4.0 metres (13.1 feet)
standard mounting bracket for most 3300 and 3300 XL probe
installations. The -01 option is supplied with two 10-24 for use inside the casing of the
UNC-2A mounting screws. The -04 option is supplied with machine.
two M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws. The mounting screws
40113-02
have pre-drilled holes for safety wire.
Connector Protector Kit. Connector
27474-AXX Protector Kit for 3300 XL 8 mm probes
and extension cables, including
Phenolic threaded probe mounting
connector protectors and installation
bracket
tools.
Option Descriptions
136536-01
A: Thread size Connector Protector Adapter. Allows
01 3/8-24 connector protector installation tools
manufactured prior to 1998 to be used
04 M10 x 1
with 75 ClickLoc connectors.
The phenolic threaded mounting bracket is recommended
40180-02
if additional electric isolation from the mounting location is
Connector Protectors. Package
required (as in some generator and electrical motor bearing
contains 10 pairs of connector
locations). The -01 option is supplied with two 10-24 UNC-
protectors for 3300 XL 8 mm probes
2A mounting screws. The -04 option is supplied with two
and 3300 XL 5 and 8 mm extension
M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws. The mounting screws have
cables.
pre-drilled holes for safety wire.
03839410
138492-01
75 ohm Triaxial Male Connector
Replacement panel-mount
Protector. Male connector protectors
mounting pad
are installed onto the extension cable
138493-01 and attach to the female connector
Replacement DIN-mount mounting protector on the probe, providing
pad environmental protection of connectors.
148722-01 03839420
3300 XL Test Plug. The 3300 XL 75 ohm Triaxial Female Connector
Test Plug contains three small test Protector. Female connector
pins attached to three color-coded protectors are installed onto the probe
wires 1 metre in length, each lead and attach to the male connector
terminated in a banana plug. The protector on the extension cable,
three-pin adapter plugs into the test providing environmental protection of
pin holes on 3300 XL-style connectors. Also placed on the
Proximitor Sensors. It is used to extension cable to slide over the
check the performance of the connection to the Proximitor Sensor
Proximitor Sensor from the test pin and protect it from the environment.
holes in the terminal strip without
04301007
requiring the removal of the field
3/8-24 Probe Lock Nut with safety
wiring.
wire holes. Single probe lock nut with
04310310 two holes drilled through the nut in
3300 XL Proximitor Sensor order to secure the lock nut in place
Panel-mount Screws. Package with safety wire.
includes four 6-32 UNC thread
04301008
forming mounting screws. (Supplied
M10 x 1 Probe Lock Nut with safety
standard with Proximitor Housings
wire holes. Single probe lock nut with
[3300 XL panel-mount option]).
two holes drilled through the nut in
03200006 order to secure the lock nut in place
Silicone self-fusing tape. A 9.1 with safety wire.
metre (10 yard) roll of silicone tape to
330153-01
protect connectors. It is easy to install
3300 XL Connector Kit. Used on
and provides excellent electrical
3300 XL 8 mm probes and extension
isolation and protection from the
cables. Contains one pair of male and
environment. It is not recommended
female ClickLocTM connectors, two

color-coded sleeves, two pieces of 02-05, 330101-00-12-10-02-00, 330101-00-12-10-
slit FEP tubing, and one strip of 02-05, 330101-00-16-10-02-00, 330101-00-16-10-
silicone tape. 02-05, 330101-00-20-05-02-00, 330101-00-20-10-
02-00, 330101-00-20-10-02-05, 330101-00-30-10-
163356
02-00, 330101-00-30-10-02-05, 330101-00-40-05-
Connector Crimp Tool Kit.
02-00, 330101-00-40-10-02-00, 330101-00-40-10-
Includes one set of multiconnector
02-05, 330101-00-60-10-02-00, 330101-00-60-10-
inserts and connector installation
02-05, 330102-00-20-10-02-00, 330103-00-02-10-
instructions. Compatible only with
02-05, 330103-00-03-10-02-05, 330103-00-04-10-
330153 connector kits or with probes
02-00, 330103-00-04-50-02-00, 330103-00-05-10-
shipped in 2003 or later with
02-00, 330103-00-06-10-02-00, 330104-00-06-10-
ClickLoc connectors uninstalled.
02-00, 330104-01-05-50-02-00, 330105-02-12-05-
Supplied with carrying case.
02-00, 330105-02-12-05-02-05, 330105-02-12-10-
Notes: 02-00, 330105-02-12-10-02-05, 330106-05-30-05-
02-00, 330106-05-30-05-02-05, 330106-05-30-10-
1. Five metre probes are designed for use with the
02-00 and 330106-05-30-10-02-05.
five metre Proximitor Sensor only.
2. Mounting clamps must be ordered separately for
330140, 330141, 330197, and 330198.
3. For a shorter delivery time, order commonly
stocked probes. Currently, stocked probes
consist of the following part numbers:
330101-00-08-05-02-00, 330101-00-08-05-02-
05, 330101-00-08-10-02-00, 330101-00-08-10-
Graphs and Dimensional Drawings

Gap (m m )0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
2 0.05
Referenced to
mV/mil)
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
5
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
5m @ 25 C (77 F) 5m @ 45 C (113 F) 5m @ 0 C (32 F)
Figure 1 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System over API 670 Testing Range

Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6 0.15
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
Referenced to
2 0.05
mV/mil)
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
5
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
9m @ 25 C (77 F) 9m @ 45 C (113 F) 9m @ 0 C (32 F)
Figure 2 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System over API 670 Testing Range

Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6 0.15
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
Referenced to
2 0.05
mV/mil)
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
5
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
1m Probe @ 25 C (77 F) 1m Probe @ -35 C (-31F)
1m Probe @ 120 C (248 F)
Figure 3 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm Probe over API 670 Operating Range

Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6 0.15
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
Referenced to
2 0.05
mV/mil)
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
5
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
TC=25 C (77 F) Tc=-34 C (-30 F) Tc=-51C (-60 F)
Figure 4 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m Proximitor Sensor with 4 m of Extension Cable

@ Tc (Probe is at 25 C)

Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
Referenced to
200(mV/mil)
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
15
10
Referenced to
ISF Error (%)
200(mV/mil)
-5
-10
-15
-20
-18
-16
-14
Output (Volts)
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
Gap (m ils) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
25 C (77 F) 65 C (149 F) 85 C (185 F) 100 C (212 F)
Figure 5 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m Proximitor Sensor with 4 m Extension Cable @

Th (Probe is at 25C)

Gap (m m )
0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
Tc=+25 C (+77 F) Tc=-34 C (-30 F) Tc=-51C (-60 F)

@ Tc (Probe is at 25 C)

Gap (m m )
0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
Th=+25 C (+77 F) Th=+65 C (+149 F)
Th=+85 C (+185 F) Th=+100 C (+212 F)

@ Th (Probe is at 25 C)

Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
10 0.25
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
-10 -0.25
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
Gap (m ils) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Th=+25 C (+77 F) Th =+260 C (+500 F)
Figure 8 Typical 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range Probe and 4 metres of

Extended Temperature Range Extension Cable @ Th (Proximitor Sensor and probe
tip with 1 foot of cable are at +25 C)

Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
10 0.25
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
-10 -0.25
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
Gap (m ils) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Th=+25 C (+77 F) Th=+260 C (+500 F)
Figure 9 Typical 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range Probe and 8 metres of

Extended Temperature Range Extension Cable @ Th (Proximitor Sensor and probe
tip with 1 foot of cable are at +25 C)

Frequency Response to Different Field Wiring Lengths
without Barriers (5 m System)
1
0
Magnitude (dB)
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
No field wiring 1000' wiring 2000' wiring

5000' wiring 12,000' wiring
Figure 10 Frequency Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System with varying

lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers
Phase Response with Different Field Wiring Lengths, No
Barriers (5 m System)
0
-10
-20
Phase Angle (degrees)
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
Figure 11 Phase Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System with varying lengths of

field wiring attached, no barriers

Frequency Response to Different Field Wiring Lengths without
1
-1
Magnitude (dB)
-2
-3
-4
-5
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
No field wiring 1000' field wiring 2000' field wiring

5000' field wiring 12,000' field wiring
Figure 12 Frequency Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System with varying

lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers

0.00
-10.00
-20.00
-30.00
-40.00
-50.00
-60.00
-70.00
-80.00
-90.00
-100.00
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)

Figure 13 Phase Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System with varying lengths of

field wiring attached, no barriers

14.3 (9/16) for 3/8-24 threads2 8 (5/16) Wrench Flats, 4 each
17.0 (0.67) for M10 threads2 75 ohm Cable
8.0 3.7 (0.15) Max. Outside Dia.
Dia.
(0.31) Case R
Probe Tip Thread 7.6 (0.30) Outside Dia. of Armor
9.0 (0.35) Max Dia. of Armor Ferrule
Miniature Male
2.5 (0.10) Coaxial Connector
Unthreaded Length 7.23 (0.285) Outside
"A" Dia. Maximum "D"
Case Length "B"
6.0 (0.235) Max.
3
Total Length "C", +30%, -0%
Figure 14 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity probes, Standard Mount

330101 and 330191, 3/8-24 UNF-2A, without armor 7
330102 and 330192, 3/8-24 UNF-2A, with armor 6
330103 and 330193, M10X1 thread, without armor 7
330104 and 330194, M10X1 thread, with armor 6
Figure 15 Installed Connector Protectors

Figure 16 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Reverse Mount 4, 7
330105 and 330195, 3/8-24 UNF-2A threads
330106 and 330196, M10X1 threads
75 Ohm Cable
3.68 (0.145) Dia. Max.
3.9 (0.16) Max. Dia. for FluidLoc R Cable
With Armor, outside Dia. is 8.0 (0.315)
9.6 (0.38) 7.9 (0.31)
Max. Dia. Wrench Flats
8 (0.31) 4 each Male (Plug) Connector
Dia. Tip
7.23 (0.285) Dia. Max.
2.54 (0.100)
Case Length "A" 349.25 (13.750) Max.
6.0 (0.235) Max.

3
Cable Length
Figure 17 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case

330140 and 330197, without armor 7
330141 and 330198, with armor 6

75 ohm cable
3.7 (0.15) max. O.D.
Miniature Male 3.9 (0.16) Max. Dia. for FluidLocR cable
Coaxial Connector 7.6 (0.30) Max. O.D. of Armor
FEP or PFA 9.0 (0.35) Max Dia. of Armor Ferrule
Coated Armor 6 83.8 7.2 (0.285)
7.2 (0.285) 83.8 Armor Length:
Max. Dia. (3.30) (3.30) Max. Dia.
300 (11.8)
less than cable length
83.8 83.8
(3.30) (3.30) FEPTriaxial
or PFA Insulated
Cable
Stainless Steel Ferrules Miniature Female
8.4 (0.33) Dia. Coaxial Connector
Cable Length +20%, -0%
Figure 18 330130, 3300 XL Extension Cable (FEP armor and insulation)

30190, 3300 XL ETR Extension Cable (PFA armor and insulation)
Mounting Option
"A" Options -50 or -90
63.5 (2.50)
50.8 50.8
(2.00) (2.00)
81.3 61.2
(3.20) (2.41)
5.1
(0.20)
Figure 19 Panel Mount 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor

Figure 20 DIN Mount 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor

50
(1.95)
86
25.4
(3.4)
(1.00)
50.8
(2.00)
50.8
(2.00)
79.4
(3.125)
60.2
(2.37)
Mounting Option
63.5
(2.50)
81
(3.2)
50.8
(2.00) 50.8
81.3 (2.00)
(3.20)
61.2
(2.41)
5.1
(0.20)
Figure 21 Physical mounting characteristics showing interchangeability of 3300 and

3300 XL Proximitor Sensors when 4-hole mounting option is used8
Notes:
1. All dimensions on figures are in millimetres (inches) unless otherwise noted.
2. Standard mount 8 mm probes supplied with 17 mm or 9/16 inch lock nut.
3. Probes ordered with 5 or 9 metre integral cables have a length tolerance of +20%, -0%.
4. Reverse mount probes not available with armor or connector protector options.
5. Letters inside quotation marks on figures refer to probe ordering options.
6. Stainless steel armor is supplied with FEP outer jacket for standard probes, PFA outer jacket for ETR probes.
7. FEP jacket is standard non-armored portion of the cable for standard probes, PFA jacket on non-armored
portion for ETR probes.
8. Use M3.5 or #6 screws for panel-mount Proximitor Sensors (screws provided when purchasing Bently
Nevada housings).
2004 Bently Nevada LLC
CableLoc, ClickLoc, FluidLoc, Keyphasor, NSv, Proximitor, and TipLoc are trademarks of Bently Nevada, LLC. Viton
is a trademark of DuPont.

21000, 24701 Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies
Description
Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies

Bently Nevada offers two all-metal Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies for
external mounting of proximity probes: the 21000 aluminum probe housing
assembly, and the 24701 stainless steel probe housing assembly. These
housings consist of a dome cover that screws into the body of the housing,
threaded ports for conduit connections, a probe sleeve of optional length, O-
rings, a reverse mount proximity probe, a thread seal, optional conduit fit-
tings and an optional standoff adapter. Use of a proximity probe housing
allows external access to the proximity probe and its extension cable, permit-
ting gap adjustment or probe replacement without disassembly of the
machine.
Note: A newer 31000/32000 proximity probe housing assembly is available

with more flexible mounting options, better environmental resistance, and
other improved features. It is recommended for installations where an
explosion proof housing is not required. Consult specifications and ordering
information (p/n 141610-01).
Both the 21000 and the 24701 housing assemblies are available in a Cana-
dian Standards Association (CSA) approved version that is rated explosion
proof in hazardous areas. In addition, CSA and BASEEFA approved proxim-
ity probes can also be ordered with both 21000 aluminum and 24701 stain-
less steel housings for intrinsically safe applications. Both housings are
certified as CSA Type 4 enclosures, and both are fully compliant with the
American Petroleum Institutes (API) 670 Standard for externally mounted
proximity probe housings.
Sleeve length is determined by the location in which the probe and housing
will be installed. The probe lead must be longer than the sleeve. Sleeve
lengths longer than 304 mm (12 inches) require additional sleeve support in
order to reduce the vibration associated with unsupported long sleeve
lengths. A probe support/oil seal, P/N 37948-01, is available to support long
sleeves going through an inner bearing housing, or the customer or BNC can
provide a custom sleeve support (see Figure 1. Proximity Probe Housing
Assemblies Dimensions are in millimetres (inches) on page 7).

Revision E, January 2003
Environmental
Related Documents Temperature Range
For probe information, refer to the following manuals: 3300 XL 8 mm and

3300 XL 11 mm
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer System 141078-01
probes: -51 C to +177 C
3300 XL NSv Proximity Transducer System 147357-01 (-60 F to +351 F).
3300 NSV probe:
3300 XL 11 mm Proximity Transducer System 146255-01
Operating: -34 C to +177 C
Radiation Resistant Probe & Proximitor System TW8029407 (-30 F to +351 F).
Storage: -51 C to +177 C

(-60 F to +351 F).
Specifications Note: Exposing 3300 XL or 3300 NSV probes to
temperatures below 34 C (-30 F) may cause
Electrical premature failure of their pressure seals.
Electrical
Mechanical
Classification: Complies with the CE mark for
Europe. Material
Intrinsically Safe 21000: Aluminum body with 304 stainless
Applications: Multiple approvals for hazardous steel sleeve.
areas certified by Canadian 24701: 303 stainless steel body, with 304
Standards Association (CSA/ stainless steel sleeve.
NRTL/C) in North America and by
BASEEFA/CENELEC in Europe for Mass (weight)
hazardous applications when used 21000: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb) typical, without
with an approved Proximitor fittings.
Sensor, extension cable, and
24701: 1.8 kg (4.1 lb) typical, without
either intrinsically safe or
fittings.
galvanically isolated barriers.
CSA/NRTL/C: Class I, Divisions 1 and 2: Groups

A, B, C, and D.
Class 2, Divisions 1 and 2: Groups Ordering Information
E, F, and G.
BASEEFA/
CENELEC: Zones 0, 1, and 2: Groups I, IIA, Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies
IIB, and IIC. 21000-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXXX-EXX-F02
Explosion Proof 24701-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXXX-EXX-FXX
Applications: CA housings certified by CSA for
explosion-proof applications in the
following applications
Explosion-Proof Housing Assemblies
Class I, Divisions 1 and 2: Groups CA21000-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXXX-EXX-F02
C and D. CA24701-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXXX-EXX-FXX
Class II, Divisions 1 and 2: Option Descriptions
Groups E, F, and G.
A: Probe Option, With
Class III. Connector: 00 Probe not required
16 3300 XL 8 mm probe
26 3300 NSV probe

27 3300 NSV probe, multiple D: Probe Penetration
approvals (Option D
Dimension): Order in increments of 0.1 in (3 mm).
28 3300 XL 8 mm probe, multiple
approvals Minimum length: 1.0 in = 0 1 0 (25.4
mm).
29 3300 XL 11 mm probe
Maximum length: See Table 2,
30 3300 XL 11 mm probe, multiple
Maximum Length of C and D
approvals
Dimension for Proximity
31 3300 NSV probe with Probes, on page 6.
connector protector
Example:
32 3300 NSV probe with
3.7 in (94 mm) = 0 3 7.
connector protector, multiple
approvals 22.4 in (569 mm) = 2 2 4.
33 3300 XL 8 mm probe with Note: Installed probe P/N and S/N may not be
visible for all available C plus D options. See
connector protector Table 3, Maximum C and D Dimension with Visible
Probe P/N and S/N, on page 6.
34 3300 XL 8 mm probe with
connector protector, multiple For Probe Penetration Lengths between 1.0 and
2.0 inches, counter bore may be required in
approvals machine case to reduce probe side view and/or
rear view effects.
35 3300 XL 11 mm probe with
connector protector "C'' plus "D'' lengths greater than 300 mm (12 in)
require additional sleeve support near the probe to
36 3300 XL 11 mm probe with prevent resonance from occurring. Adjustment
connector protector, multiple range of Probe Penetration Option "D'' is 13 mm (
0.5 in). For maximum C plus D see Table 2,
approvals Maximum Length of C and D Dimension for
Note: If option -00 (probe not required) is selected Proximity Probes, on page 6.
for Option A, then Option B (Probe Cable Length
Option) must also be -00. E: Fittings Option: 00 Without fittings
Order only multiple approvals probes for CA21000 01 One Explosion-proof fitting and
or CA24701 housings.
one plug
B: Probe Cable Length 02 Two Explosion-proof fittings
Option (see Table 2,
03 One 3/4-14 NPT plug; one 3/4-14
Maximum Length of
to 1/2-14 NPT reducer; one
C and D Dimension
cable seal grip with grommets
for Proximity
for cable sizes: 1/8 to 3/16, 1/4
Probes, on
to 5/16, and 5/16 to 3/8-in
page 6): 00 Probe cable not required
04 One 3/4-14 NPT plug only
05 0.5 metre (20 in)
Note: Explosion-proof fittings are available for all
10 1.0 metre (39 in) housings. However, only CA versions of the
housing are rated as explosion-proof by CSA when
Note: 3300 XL 11 mm probes only available in 1.0 ordered with the E:00, E:01, E:02, or E:04 options.
metre length.
Excessive cable lengths should be avoided to F: Mounting Thread

reduce the possibility of damaging the cable when Option: 01 As cast, without threads
the housing lid is screwed onto the housing.
02 3/4-14 NPT (Must be ordered if
C: Standoff Adapter Standoff Adapter Length Option
(Option C is not -00.)
Dimension): Order in increments of 0.5 in (13 mm).
03 1-11 1/2 NPT
Minimum length: 1.5 in = 1 5 (38 mm).
04 1/2-14 BSP
Maximum length: 7.5 in = 7 5 (191
05 7/8-14 UNF-2A
mm).
Note: For 21000 and CA21000 housings, Option F
Example: must be 02.
1.5 in (38 mm) = 1 5.

No standoff adapter = 0 0.

Housing AXX options for AXXX: = Standoff Adapter Option from
Accessories 7200 Series 11 mm original housing (21000, CA21000, 24701,
probe options (A: 06 or or CA24701 option C) + Probe penetration
A: 12) option from original housing (21000,
37948-01 Probe Support/Oil Seal CA21000, 24701, or CA24701 option D) +
Recommended for sleeves longer 0 3 9.
than 305 mm (12 in). Example: original part number is
CA24701-12-10-30-113-01-02. AXXX:
44382-AXXX option for replacement sleeve is (030 +
Individual Probe Sleeve for 21000/24701Proximity Probe 113 + 039) = 1 8 2.
Housings A: Probe sleeve length
This is the measured probe
sleeve length. Order in Minimum Probe Sleeve
increments of 0.1 in (3 mm). Note Length: For all probes except NSv and
that the individual probe sleeve 11 mm probes: 5.5 in (140 mm) = 0
length does not include the 55
distance from the end of the sleeve
to the probe tip or the gap from the 3300 NSv Probe: 5.5 in (142
probe tip to the target material. If mm) = 0 5 6
only the part number of the original 3300 XL 11 mm probe: 4.7 in (119
housing is known and the sleeve mm) = 0 4 7
cannot be measured, use the
following table to determine the
sleeve length:
Maximum Probe Sleeve
Length: All 0.5 metre probes except
All housing AXX options AXXX: = Standoff Adapter Option from NSv and 11 mm probes: 18.0 in
except NSv and 11 mm original housing (21000, CA21000, 24701, (457 mm) = 180
probes (options other or CA24701 option C) + Probe penetration 3300 NSv 0.5 metre probe:
than A:06, A:12, A:26, option from original housing (21000, 18.1 in (460 mm) = 1 8 1
A:27, A:29, A:30, A:31, CA21000, 24701, or CA24701 option D) +
A:32, A:35, or A:36) 0 4 5. 7200-series 0.5 metre 11 mm
Example: original part number is 21000- probe: 15.4 in (391 mm) = 1 5 4
16-10-15-035-03-02. AXXX: option for
All 1.0 metre probes except
replacement sleeve is (015 + 035 + 045) =
0 9 5. NSv and 11 mm probes: 33.7 in
(856 mm) = 3 3 7
3300 NSv 1.0 metre probe:
3300 NSv probe original housing (21000, CA21000, 24701,
options (A:26, A:27, or CA24701 option C) + Probe penetration 33.8 in (859 mm) = 3 3 8
A:31, or A:32) option from original housing (21000, 3300 XL 1.0 metre 11 mm probe:
CA21000, 24701, or CA24701 option D) + 32.9 in (836 mm) = 3 2 9
0 4 6. Example: original part number is
24701-31-10-15-090-03-02. AXXX: 7200 Series 1.0 metre 11 mm
option for replacement sleeve is (015 + probe: 33.1 in (841 mm) = 3 3 1
090 + 046) = 1 5 1.
21003-AXXX
3300 XL 11 mm probe original housing (21000, CA21000, 24701, Individual Standoff
options (A:29, A:30, or CA24701 option C) + Probe penetration Adapter: Order in increments of 0.5 in (13 mm).
A:35, or A:36) option from original housing (21000, Minimum length: 1.5 in = 0 1 5 (38
CA21000, 24701, or CA24701 option D) + mm).
0 3 7. Example: original part number is
CA24701-36-10-40-053-02-02. AXXX: Maximum length: 7.5 in = 0 7 5 (191
option for replacement sleeve is (040 + mm).
053 + 037) = 1 3 0. Example: 4.5 in (114 mm) =0 4 5 .

Note: For desired probe penetration lengths of
less than 25 mm (1.0 in), order a separate
Individual Standoff Adapter. The effective probe Spare 3300 XL 11 mm Reverse Mount Probe, 3/8-24 UNF
penetration length will then be reduced by the threads
length of the Individual Standoff Adapter, plus an
additional 13 mm (0.5 in) due to the NPT thread 330705-02-18-CXX-DXX-EXX
engagement.
Example: The customer desires a probe Option Descriptions: C:
penetration length of 13 mm (0.5 in). To do this,
they can order a 21000 housing with DXXX (probe Total Length
penetration) option of 0 3 0 [76 mm (3 in)] and a Option: 10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
separate individual standoff adapter that is 51 mm
(2.0 in) in length (part number 21003-020). The 50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)
standoff adapter would cover 38 mm (2.0 in) of the
probe sleeve, plus an additional 13 mm (0.5 in). 90 9 0 metres (29.5 feet)
Therefore, the effective probe penetration length
would drop to 13 mm (0.5 in).
Note: Signal affects due to probe side view and/or D: Connector Option: 00 Without connector
rear view of metal components are likely when
effective penetration lengths of less than 1.0 inch 02 With miniature male coaxial
are used. connector
Spare 3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probe, 3/8-24 UNF threads
E: Agency Approval
330105-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX
Option: 00 Not required
C: Total Length
Option: 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) Tables
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet)
20 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) Table 1. Part Dimensions in mm (inches)
90 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) Dimension
Catalog
D: Connector Option: 00 Connector not installed Number
A B C&D E
TM coaxial
02 Miniature ClickLoc
83.3 161.6 See Order- 26.7
connector
21000 (3.28) (6.36) ing Option C (1.05)
&D
E: Agency Approval
Option: 00 Not required 78.2 151.9 See Order- 27.9
05 Multiple Approvals 24701 (3.08) (5.97) ing Option C (1.10)
&D
Spare 3300 NSV Reverse Mount Probe, 3/8-24 UNF threads

330906-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX
C: Total Length
Option: 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
D: Connector Option: 00 Connector not installed
02 Miniature ClickLoc TM coaxial

connector
E: Agency Approval
Option: 00 Not required

Table 2. Maximum Length of C and D Dimension for
Proximity Probes
Probe Cable Length Maximum C & D Dimension
0.5 metre (3300 Series) 343 mm (13.5 in)
1.0 metre 742 mm (29.2 in)
Table 3. Maximum C and D Dimension with Visible

Probe P/N and S/N
Probe Cable Length Maximum C & D Dimension
0.5 metre Not Visible
1.0 metre 432 mm (17.0 in)

Dimensional Drawing
Figure 1. Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies Dimensions are in millimetres (inches)

Revision D, December 2002
Instructions
For Installation and Operation
Slide Bearings TYPE EM
with external oil supply
RH EMZEI E 7.02
Installation and Operation
RENK AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Werk Hannover
Weltausstellungsallee 21
D 30539 Hannover
Telephone: (0511) 86010
Telefax: (0511) 8601266
email: gleitlager.hannover@renkag.com
http:\\www.renk.de
All rights reserved. Copy or reproduction without prior permission of RENK Aktiengesellschaft Hannover
prohibited.
2 RHEMZEIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 RENK AG Werk Hannover

EM with external oil supply
Contents
Bearing Coding .............................................................................................................................................5

General Drawing of the Slide Bearing EM with External Oil Supply .............................................................7
General Drawing of the Thrust Part with RDThrust Pads............................................................................9
General Drawing of the Loose Oil Ring.......................................................................................................11
General Drawing of the Floating Labyrinth Seal with Seal Carrier..............................................................13
General Drawing of the Rigid Labyrinth Seal..............................................................................................15
General Drawing of the Baffle.....................................................................................................................17
General Drawing of the Dust Flinger...........................................................................................................19
1 Considerations for Use ...........................................................................................................................21
2 Safety Instructions ..................................................................................................................................22
3 Preparatory Work ....................................................................................................................................23
3.1 Tools and equipment .......................................................................................................................23
3.2 Use of lifting equipment ...................................................................................................................23
3.3 Dismantling of the bearing ...............................................................................................................26
3.3.1 Dismantling of the shaft seal outboard side...........................................................................26
3.3.2 Dismantling of the machine seal...............................................................................................27
3.3.3 Dismantling of the housing .......................................................................................................27
3.3.4 Dismantling of the shaft seal machineside ...........................................................................27
3.4 Cleaning of the bearing ....................................................................................................................28
3.5 Checks .............................................................................................................................................28
3.6 Assembly of the RDthrust pads ......................................................................................................29
4 Assembly of the Bearing.........................................................................................................................32
4.1 Assembly of the the machine seal ...................................................................................................32
4.2 Assembly opening for bearing fittting ..............................................................................................32
4.3 Assembly of the bottom half of the housing into the machine shield..............................................34
4.4 Fitting in the bottom half of the shell................................................................................................34
4.5 Assembly of the shaft seal machineside ......................................................................................35
4.6 Installation of the loose oil ring ........................................................................................................37
4.7 Fitting in the top half of the shell......................................................................................................38
4.8 Assembly of the top half of the housing ..........................................................................................39
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHEMZEIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 3

5 Assembly of the Seals Outboard Side ................................................................................................41

5.1 Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10).......................................................................................................41
5.2 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11) ............................................................................45
5.3 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle ( Type 12)....................................................................................46
5.4 Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20) ...........................................................................................................46
5.5 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21).................................................................................48
5.6 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22)..........................................................................................49
6 Instructions for Assembly of Peripheral Equipment ............................................................................ 50
6.1 Assembly of the oil supply equipment .............................................................................................50
6.2 Temperature measurement..............................................................................................................52
6.3 Water supply ....................................................................................................................................52
6.4 Closing of the assembly opening.....................................................................................................52
7 Bearing Insulation....................................................................................................................................53
8 Operation..................................................................................................................................................53
8.1 Filling up with lubricating oil .............................................................................................................53
8.2 Trial run ............................................................................................................................................54
9 Glossary....................................................................................................................................................55

Bearing Coding

Type Housing Heat Dissipation Shape of Bore and Type of Thrust part Size Diameter
Lubrication
E M centre flange Z lubrication by oil circulation with C plain cylindrical bore Q without thrust part 9 80D100
mounted bearing external oil cooling without oil ring (non locating bearing )
11 100D125
X lubrication by oil circulation with L plain cylindrical bore with B plain sliding surfaces
external oil cooling when loose oil ring with oil grooves 14 125D160
oil throughput is high (locating bearing)
Y twolobe bore (lemon bore) 18 160D200
U circulating pump and natural without oil ring E taper land faces for one
cooling sense of rotation 22 200D250
V fourlobe bore (locating bearing)
T circulating pump and water without oil ring 28 250D315
cooling (finned cooler in K taper land faces
oil sump ) (locating bearing)
A elastically supported
circular tilting pads
(RDthrust pads)
(locating bearing)
Example for bearing coding:

E M Z L K 22200 Type EM slide bearing with centre flangemounted housing, lubrication by
oil circulation with external oil cooling, plain cylindrical bore with loose
oil ring, locating bearing with taper land faces, size 22, diameter 200.
Shaft seals Type 10 floating labyrinth seal (IP 44)

Type 11 floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (IP 54)
Type 12 floating labyrinth seal with baffle (IP 55)
Type 20 rigid labyrinth seal (IP 44)

Type 21 rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (IP 54)
Type 22 rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (IP 55)
6 RH-EMZEI-E Version: 2 Juli, 2002 RENK AG Werk Hannover

General Drawing
Slide Bearing EM
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHEMZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 7

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
5
14
15
4 16
3
17
2
xxx
1 xxx
18
36
19
xxx
20
35
21
22
34
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
33 32 31 30
1 Engraved numbers housing
2 Top half of the housing
3 Tapped hole for the thrust part oil supply (optional )
4 Positioning pin nut
5 Plate ( Assembly opening )
6 Screw
7 Eye bolt
8 Positioning pin
9 Top sight glass
10 Tapped hole ( in the top and bottom halves of the shell, up size 14 )
11 Top half of the shell
12 Screw
13 Machine seal
14 Hamp packing seal groove
15 Hamp packing
16 Screw (split line of the housing)
17 Screw (split line of the machine seal)
18 Bottom half of the shell
19 Tapped hole
20 Engraved number shell
21 Bottom half of the housing
22 Recess
23 Pressure equalizing hose
24 Screw (split line of the shell)
25 Screw
26 Spherical seating
27 Tapped hole for temperature measurement of the journal part
28 Oil inlet connection hole
29 Tapped hole for the oil sump temperature measurement
30 Outlet/Inlet cooling water (Type E.T..)
31 Cooler ( Type E.T..)
32 Hexagon head plug (Oil drain plug)
33 Metal tabs ( optional for EMZL. )
34 Oil outlet connection hole
35 Oil outlet pipe with lock nut and lead seal
36 Marking
General Drawing of the
Thrust Part with Circular Tilting Pads
(RDThrust Pads)
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHRDZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 9

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
37 Carrier ring
38 Location groove
39 Shroud ring top half
40 Screw
41 Shroud ring bottom half
42 Circular tilting pad (RDthrust pad)
43 Anti Rotation pin
Loose Oil Ring
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHLSZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 11

44
45
46
47
44 Loose Oil Ring
45 Dowel pin
46 Hole
47 Screw
Floating Labyrinth Seal
with Seal Carrier
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHSSZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 13

Bearing side
48
49
54
53
50
52
51
Outer view
58 55
57
56
48 Seal carrier top half
49 Garter spring
50 Groove
51 Seal carrier bottom half
52 Bottom half of the seal
53 Top half of the seal
54 Anti rotation pin
55 Screw
56 Engraved number
57 Groove ( Type 11 )
58 Engraved number
General drawing of the
Rigid Labyrinth Seal
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHKDZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 15

59
60
65
61 (2x)
62
64
63
59 Rigid labyrinth seal top half
60 Screw
61 Screw (split line)
63 Rigid labyrinth seal bottom part
64 Engraved number
65 Engraved number
Baffle
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHDSZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 17

66
67
68
66 Baffle top half
67 Screw
68 Baffle bottom half
Dust Flinger
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHLRZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 19

69
70 (2x)
69 Dust flinger
1 Considerations for Use
The instructions for installation and operation are addressed to qualified technical personnel
(fitters, mechanic installers, mechanical engineers).
Read these instructions carefully before starting assembly.
Slide bearings of type EM are almost universally used in the engineering industry. Therefore it is
not possible to provide detailed information on all possible types and range of applications for
these bearing types. For instance, the position of the connection points for supply and monitoring
equipment is determined by the place of application ( in the following called " installation " ).
Please keep ready the guidelines with the technical documentation before starting assembly and
operation of the slide bearings.
Additional technical documentation with detailed information is supplied in case of special design
bearings. Please contact RENK Export or Domestic Department for supplementary information on
bearings. Please indicate the bearing coding and the full reference number, too.
Following indications should be observed when reading these instructions.
Safety instructions are marked as follows:
Danger!
Warning of dangers for personnel.
Example: Warning of injury
Attention!
Warning of damage for the bearing or installation.
Useful recommendations and additional information are framed.
EM...Q This is how chapters, instructions or recommendations are marked when referring to a single type
or size of a bearing.
Example: Slide bearing type EM without thrust part ( nonlocating bearing )
Instruction follows.
Beginning of an enumeration.
( ) This is how the different parts of a bearing as described in the general drawings ( numbers )
are marked in the text.
- Use the enclosed checklist before starting assembly or operation. Copies available on request.
- The check list provides the experienced mechanical fitters of RENK bearings with the
necessary instructions for installation and operation.

2 Safety Instructions
Danger!
The maintenance and inspection of the slide bearings should be carried out by:
persons nominated by the safety representative
persons correspondingly trained and instructed
persons with knowledge on appropriate standards, regulations and accident
prevention rules
persons with knowledge on firstaid measures and local rescue centres.
Warning of injury!
Before starting work on the bearing:
Switch off the installation.
Make sure the installation is not in operation.
Never lift or transport machines, etc.by the bearing eye bolts. These are only
intended for assembly and dismantling of the bearing !
Warning of injury!
Do not grab such heavy bearing parts as the bearing housing during assembly or
dismantling works. This could result in bruising or injury to hands !
Attention!
All metal parts of a slide bearing consisting of top and bottom part such as the housing, shells,
shaft seals are marked by engraved numbers. Fit together only the parts with the same number.
Attention!
In case the admissible bearing temperature exceeds 15 K
inadmissible vibrations occur
unusual noises or odours are noticed
monitoring equipment triggers alarm
shut down the installation and inform the maintenance personnel in charge.
Attention!
Do not operate the bearing below the transition speed values indicated in the bearing calculation,
thus avoiding inadmissible operating conditions, which could lead to damage to the bearing.
Attention!
Please observe our leaflet Technical Information No. 85 which refers to various sealing compounds
for extended technical applications.

3 Preparatory Work
3.1 Tools and equipment
- Following tools and equipment are necessary:

Allan key set
Wrenching key set
Openjawed spanner set
Feeler gauges ( up 0,05 mm )
Caliper gauge
Emery paper, plain scraper
Oil stone
Lifting equipment
Permanent sealing compound
Clean (close weave) rags
Oil with the correct viscosity ( see bearing type plate )
Detergents
Liquid screw locking compound ( e.g. LOCTITE 242 )
Liquid sealing compound and Teflontape
3.2 Use of lifting equipment
Warning of injury!
Before transport or lifting check if the eye bolts are tight ! Insecure eye bolts could
result in bearing becoming loose.
Before moving the bearing by the eye bolts make sure that the split line screws are
tightened, otherwise the bottom half of the bearing could become detached.
Make sure that the eye bolts are not exposed to bending stress, otherwise the bolts
could break.
Follow exactly the instructions for the use of lifting equipment.
- Use lifting equipment for assembly or transport of the following items:
Transport/Assembly of: Use lifting equipment

for the following bearing sizes
Whole bearing unit 928
Top half of the housing 1428
Bottom half of the housing 1128
Bearing shells 1428

- Following steps are to be observed before using the lifting equipment:
Whole bearing unit

- Check if the screws at the split line are tight (16):
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] 40 69 170 330 570 1150
- Check if the eye bolts (7) are tight.

- Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts (7).
Top half of the housing

- Check if the eye bolts (7) are tight.
- Connect the lifting devices to the eye bolts (7).
Size - Sizes 22 and 28 are delivered equipped with an assembly device.
22 and When not in use, this assembly device is located in the "parking position" behind the flange and
28 as such it is not allowed to use it as transport device.
Illustration 1: Assembly device

To mount the top half of the housing remove the top sight glass and screw in the assembly device.
By using the appropriate lifting equipment and with the help of the assembly device it is possible
to lift and mount the top half of the housing in a straight position.
After assembling the top half of the housing put the assembly device back into the "parking
position" behind the flange and screw in the top sight glass.
Bottom half of the housing

- Screw two eye bolts (7) with suitable threads tight into the crossplaced opposite tapped holes
(19).
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Tapped hole M 10 M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30

Bearing shells
- Screw two eye bolts or screw hooks with suitable threads tight into the tapped holes (10):
Bearing size 14 18 22 28
Tapped hole M8 M 12 M 12 M 16
- Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts or to the screw hooks.

3.3 Dismantling of the bearing
Attention
Make sure that the work place and the parts to be assembled are clean. Contamination and
damage to the bearing, especially to the working surfaces, have a negative influence on the
operating quality and could lead to premature failure.
3.3.1 Dismantling of the shaft seal outboard side
- Dismantle the shaft seals of the bearing. Proceed according to the sealing type:
Type Floating labyrinth seal with baffle ( Type 12 ):

12 - Disconnec t the top half of the baffle (66) and the bottom (68). To do so, loosen the screws (67).
- Further proceed as in the case of type 10 and 11 seal.
Type Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10)

10 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11)
Type
- Loosen and remove all screws (55).
11
- Simultaneously take away in axial direction both top half (48) and bottom half (51) of the seal
carrier from the housing.
- Lift off the top half of the seal carrier (48) and take out the floating labyrinth seal from the
bottom half of the seal carrier (51).
- Remove the protective cardboard (for transport protection) from the floating labyrinth seal.
Proceed as indicated for sizes 911
1428
Size - Take hold of the floating labyrinth seal with both hands.Press out the protective cardboard with
9 11 both thumbs.
Size - Take both halves of the seal (52), (53) by the split line.Pull both halves apart, till you can press
1418 out the protective cardboard. Remove carefully by pressing along the edge of the split line.
Warning of injury!
During dismantling of the floating labyrinth seal hold on tight to the tensioned garter
spring (49) which otherwise could bounce back and lead to injury.
- Take both seal halves (52),(53) and pull them apart by approximately 20 mm.
- Open the garter spring (49).
Type Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (type 22)

22 - Separate the top and bottom half (66), (68) of the baffle, by untightening the screws (67).
- Further proceed as in the case of types 20 and 21.
Type Rigid labyrinth seal (type 20)

20 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (type 21)
Type
- Untighten all screws (60) and remove them.
21
- Simultaneously remove in axial direction both top and bottom (59), (63) halves of the rigid
labyrinth seal.
- Remove the screws (61) at the split line.
- Separate the top half of the rigid labyrinth seal (59) from the bottom half (63) and take out the
protective cardboard (used for safe transport).

3.3.2 Dismantling of the machine seal
- Loosen the hose clamps at the bottom half of the housing.

- Pull off the pressure equalizing hose (23).
- Loosen the split line screws (17) of the machine seal and turn them out.
- Loosen the screws (12) and remove the seal parts.
3.3.3 Dismantling of the housing
EM.V. - Unscrew the screw plug with the weldedon positioning pin.
- Replace the top sight glass (9) by the assembly device. The top half of the housing can be lifted
Size 22 and transported by using the assembly device, well tight, and the appropriate lifting equipment.
and 28
- Unscrew the screws (16) at the split line and lift the top half of the housing (2).
- Take out both top (11) and bottom (18) halves of the shell from the bottom half of the housing
(21).
Attention!
Do not damage the thrust and radial working surfaces!
- Unscrew the screws (24) at the split line and separate the top and bottom halves of the shell
(11), (18) without using any tools or other devices.
Attention!
If the bottom half of the shell (18) is provided with metal tabs (33) do not remove them.They
regulate the oil level in the oil pockets.
EMT.. The oil cooler (31) is already assembled and does not have to be removed for cleaning purposes.
3.3.4 Dismantling of the shaft seal machineside
The machine side seal is of Type 10, floating labyrinth seal.

- Remove the floating labyrinth seal from the bottom half of the housing.
- Notice the antirotation pin at the split line of the bottom half of the housing.
- Remove the protective cardboard (for transport protection) from the floating labyrinth seal.
Proceed as indicated for sizes 911
1428
Size - Take hold of the floating labyrinth seal with both hands. Press out the protective cardboard with
9 11 both thumbs.
Size - Take both halves of the seal (52), (53) by the split line. Pull both halves apart, till you can press
1418 out the protective cardboard. Remove carefully by pressing along the edge of the split line.
Warning of injury!
During dismantling of the floating labyrinth seal hold on tight to the tensioned garter
spring (49) which otherwise could bounce back and lead to injury.
- Take both seal halves (52), (53) and pull them apart by approximately 20 mm.
- Open the garter spring (49).

3.4 Cleaning of the bearing
Attention!
Use only nonaggressive detergents, such as for instance:
VALVOLINE 150.
Alcaline cleaning compounds (pH-value 6 to 9, short reaction time).
Warning of injury!
Please observe the instructions for the use of the detergents.
Attention!
Never use cleaning wool or fibrous cloth. Residues of such materials left in the bearing could lead
to excessive temperatures.
- Clean the following parts thoroughly, to remove all residues of preservation :

inside the top half of the housing (2)
inside the bottom half of the housing (21)
all plain parts of the top and bottom half of the housing (2),(21)
top half of the shell (11)
bottom half of the shell (18)
sealing surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier or of the rigid labyrinth
seal
EM.L. loose oil ring (44).
3.5 Checks
- Please check if there is any visible damage. Check the split line and the working surfaces in
particular.
EM.L. The loose oil ring (44) should show absolutely no burrs or have no shoulders.
Insulated
Bearings - Check the insulating layer of the spherical seating (26).
- If necessary, change the damaged parts.

EM..A 3.6 Assembly of the RDthrust pads
- Clean both top (39) and bottom (41) halves of the shroud ring and all RDthrust pads (42).
Proceed as described under chapter 3.4 (Cleaning of the bearing).
Bearing size Diameter Number of RDthrust pads per bearing [Pieces]
80 14
9 90 16
100 20
100 16
11 110 18
125 22
125 18
14 140 20
160 24
160 18
18 180 20
200 24
200 18
22 225 20
250 24
250 18
28 280 20
300 24
- Check if the parts show any visible damage.
Carry out the assembly of both thrust parts of the top (11) and bottom (18) half of the shell
according to the following instructions:
One RDthrust pad on both sides of the top half of the shell has a bore for the insertion of a
thermo sensor ( thrust part temperature measurement).

To mount the RDthrust pad into the correct position proceed as follows:
- Find the position of the location groove (38) on the top half of the shroud ring (39). Insert the
RDthrust pad (42) with the antirotation pin (43) into the corresponding thrust pad location hole
(37).
- Insert all other RDthrust pads (42) into the corresponding thrust pad holes (37)
of the top and bottom half of the shell (11), (18).
42
37
Illustration 2: Assembly of the RDthrust pads
- Place the top half of the shroud ring (39) into the the top half of the shell (11) by inserting the
antirotation pin (43) into the location hole (38). Match the split line of the top half of the shell
(11) with the split line of the top half of the shroud ring (39) in true alignment.
38
39
43
42
Illustration 3: Assembly of the shroud ring

- Tighten the screws (40) to the following torque rates:
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Tapped hole M4 M4 M5 M6 M8 M 10
Torque [Nm] 1,4 1,4 2,7 8 20 40
- Place the bottom half of the shroud ring (41) into the bottom half of the shell (18). Match the
corresponding split lines in true alignment. Tighten the screws (40) to the same torque value as
valid for the top half of the shell (11).
- Check the mobility of all RDthrust pads (42).
If the RDthrust pads jam, realign the top (39) and bottom half (41) of the shroud ring.
Attention!
Insufficient mobility of the RDthrust pads will cause damage of the bearing.
Both top and bottom halves of the shells are prepared for assembly.

4 Assembly of the Bearing
Attention!
Remove all impurities or other objects such as screws, nuts, etc. from inside the bearing.If left
inside they could lead to damage to the bearing. Cover up the opened bearing during work breaks.
Attention!
Carry out all assembly operations without making use of force.
Attention!
Secure all screws of the housing at the split line and flange with a liquid scrw locking compound
(e.g. LOCTITE 242).
4.1 Assembly of the the machine seal
- Fit the bottom half of the machine seal around ist locating spigot on the bottom half of the
housing.
- Align the split lines of the housing and of the seal in true alignment.
- Tighten the screws (12) by using the following torque value:
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Tapped hole M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 M8
Torque [Nm] 8 8 8 20 20 20
- Fit the top half of the machine seal around ist locating spigot on the top half of the housing.
- Align the split lines of the housing and of the seal in true alignment.
- Tighten the screws (12) by using the following torque value:
- Place the pressure equalizing hoses (23) between the machineside seal (13) and the bottom
half of the housing into the clamps and tighten them.
4.2 Assembly opening for bearing fittting
The machine shield is designed in two versions:

Split machine shield:
In this case the bottom half has a thick wall and is provided with the recess to permit the fitting of
the housing. The top half of the machine shield can have either the thick wall or only a thin sheet.
In both cases, after completed bearing installation, the top half of the machine shield is fastened to
the top half of the bearing housing.
Nonsplit machine shield
In this case the bottom half is provided with the recess to permit the fitting of the bottom half of
the housing. The top half is provided with a greater opening which is used as assembly opening
for the bearing. The following graph shows the minimum values necessary for the different bearing
sizes.

EM..Q, Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28

EM..B,
EM..K, Diameter of the mounting recess Z [mm] 375 450 530 630 800 1000
EM..E Flat surface of the bottom half / Radius Rumin [mm] 215 255 305 360 455 565
Flat surface of the top half / Radius Romin [mm] 240 280 310 360 455 565
Opening height H [mm] 195 230 280 330 415 515
Opening width A [mm] 135 150 85 95 120 155
EM..A, Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28

Diameter of the mounting recess Z [mm] 375 450 530 630 800 1000
Flat surface of the bottom half / Radius Rumin ]mm] 215 255 305 360 455 565
Flat surface of the top half / Radius Romin [mm] 250 285 310 365 470 570
Opening height H [mm] 205 240 290 350 440 540
Opening width A [mm] 135 150 85 95 120 155
Attention!
The flat surface of the bottom half Rumin must not be lower than 4 mm.
Size 9 11 Size 14 28
A
45
A
15
H
Ro
H
Ro
Ru Z
Ru Z
Illustration 4: Assembly opening slide bearing type EM
After completed bearing installation the remaining opening is covered by a thin metal plate (5).

4.3 Assembly of the bottom half of the housing into the machine shield
Attention!
The lifting equipment should not come to contact with the seal and working surfaces of the shaft.
- Lift the shaft high enough to give room for the assembly operations.
- Protect the shaft against unintended movement.
- Place the bottom half of the housing with the spigot (22) into the mounting recess of the
machine shield.
- Tighten the flange screws to the following torque rates. Use only 8.8 quality screws.
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Suitable flange screws M 10 M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30
Torque [Nm] for m tot 40 69 170 330 570 1150

(lightly oiled)
4.4 Fitting in the bottom half of the shell
EM..E Attention!
Mounting the bottom half of the shell (not marked with an arrow) correctly will ease the assembly
of the top half shell (marked with an arrow) (see chapter 4.7).
- Apply some lubricant to the spherical seating (26) in the bottom half of the housing (21) and to
the working surfaces of the shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as indicated for bearing
operation ( see type plate ).
- Place the bottom half of the shell (18) on the working surface of the shaft. Turn the bottom half
of the shell (18) into the bottom half of the housing (21) with the split line surfaces of both halves
in true alignment.
In case the bottom half of the shell doesn`t turn in easily, check the position of the shaft and the
alignment of the bearing housing
EM..B, Attention!
EM..K, These operations should be carried out most carefully. The thrust parts of the bottom shell must
EM..E, not be damaged.
EM..A
- Lower down the shaft till it sits on the bottom half of the shell (18).

4.5 Assembly of the shaft seal machineside
The machineside shaft seal is , as standard, a floating labyrinth seal. The integrated seal groove is
in the top and bottom halves of the housing.
Warning of injury!
During assembly hold the garter spring ends securely to avoid them suddenly
releasing and causing possible injury !
Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft in the seal area outside the housing.
- Put the garter spring (49) around the shaft and hook both ends into each other.
- Put both halves of the seal (52),(53) in their place on the shaft.
- Put the garter spring (49) into the groove (50).
- Turn the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft.
Attention!
The floating labyrinth seal should turn easily on the shaft. A jammed seal could lead to overheating
during operation and even to shaft wear.
If the floating labyrinth seal jams,
dismantle the seal
remove the worn parts of the seal carefully, by using emery paper or a plain scraper.
- Dismantle the floating labyrinth seal.

- Apply sealing compound to the guide surfaces of the integrated seal groove in the bottom half
of the housing.
Illustration 5: Application of sealing compound to the integrated seal groove

- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the guide surfaces and on the split line surfaces
of both halves of the seal (52), (53).
Illustration 6: Application of sealing compound to the floating labyrinth seal
Please observe the instructions for the use of sealing compound.
- Place the bottom half of the seal (52) with the labyrinths onto the shaft.
- The oil return holes at the bearing side must be clear and open.
- Turn the seal in opposite direction from the antirotation pin into the groove of the housing until
the split lines of the bottom half of the housing and the bottom half of the seal match each
other.
- Remove the residue of sealing compound.
- Push the garter spring into the integrated seal groove between the bottom half of the housing
and the seal until both ends jut out from the split line.
- Place the top half of the seal with the cam facing the inside of the bearing on the bottom half of
the seal.
- Stretch the garter spring till both ends can be hooked.

4.6 Installation of the loose oil ring

- Open both split lines of the loose oil ring (44) by untightening and removing the screws (47).
Separate both halves of the loose oil ring (44) carefully without using any tools or other devices.
I II
44
44 44
47
Illustration 7: Opening of the loose oil ring
- Place both halves of the loose oil ring into the shell groove encircling the shaft.Press the
positioning pin (45) of each split line into the corresponding hole (46).
- Adjust both halves of the loose oil ring till the split lines match each other.
21
45
44
44 18
Illustration 8: Installation of the loose oil ring
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] 1,4 1,4 1,4 2,7 2,7 2,7

4.7 Fitting in the top half of the shell
- Apply some lubricant to the working surfaces of the shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as
indicated for bearing operation (see type plate).
- Check if the engraved number (20) on the bottom half of the shell corresponds with the
engraved number (20) on the top half of the shell.
- Place the top half of the shell (11) on the shaft; both engraved numbers(20) should be on one
side.
Attention!
An incorrectly placed shell could jam the shaft thus leading to the damage of both shaft and
bearing.
EM..B,
EM..K, Attention!
EM..E, Place the top half of the shell carefully on the shaft. The thrust parts of the top half of the shell
EM..A should not be damaged.
insulated In the case of bearings arranged for insulation monitoring, connect the black cable for insulation
bearing monitoring to the bearing shell.
According to the bearing type, there are two possibilities of connection.
1. The black cable is provided with a cable connector.
- Plug the cable with the cable connector into the counterpart available on the top of the shell.
- Lead the cable through the cable gland in the bottom half of the housing and out of the
bearing.
- Tighten the cable gland oiltight.
2. The black cable is provided with an eyelet.
- Fasten the cable with the eyelet to the split line of the shell, by using one of the shell joint bolts.
bearing.
- Tighten up the screw (24) at the split line of the shell to the following torque rates:
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] 8 8 20 69 69 170
- Check the split line of the bearing shell by using a feeler gauge. The split line gap should be
less than 0,05 mm. If the split line is greater than this, dismantle both top (11) and bottom (18)
halves of the shell. Rework the split line surfaces of the top (11) and bottom (18) half of the shell
with an oil stone.
EM.L. - Check the mobility of the loose oil ring (44).
Marine A guide bush in the top half of the shell secures the function of the loose oil ring.
bearings
- Check the mobility of the loose oil ring (44) in the guide bush.

EM..E Shells with taper land faces suitable only for one direction of rotation are marked with an arrow on
the top half shell, which indicates the sense of rotation of the shaft.
The arrow indicates the allowed direction of shaft rotation after completion of the bearing
assembly.
- Before mounting the top half of the housing check that the proposed direction of rotation of the
shaft corresponds to the direction indicated by the arrow on the top half of the shell.
- If the directions match, continue the assembly of the bearing.
- If the directions do not match, the shell must be disassembled, realigned and mounted again.
Attention!
A wrongly placed shell, without observance of the direction of rotation of the shaft, impairs the
operational safety of the bearing.
4.8 Assembly of the top half of the housing
- Check the true alignment of the split lines of the shell (11), (18) and bottom (21) half of the
housing.
EM.C.
EM.L.
The positioning pin (8) in the top half of the housing fits in the corresponding hole (4) in the shell.
EM.Y.
- Check if the engraved numbers (1) on the top and bottom halves of the housing correspond.
- Clean the split line surfaces of the top and bottom halves of the housing.
- Apply CurilT over the whole surface of the split line of the bottom half (21) of the housing.
- Place the top half of the housing carefully into the machine shield, without touching the seals or
the bearing shell.
Illustration 9: Assembly of the top half of the housing

- Lower the top half of the housing (2) vertically on the bottom half of the housing (21). Lower the
top half of the housing (2) till the split line of the housing is not visible any more.
- Gently hit the bottom half of the housing (21) with a nylon hammer, thus ensuring the alignment
of the spherical seating.
- Insert the screws (16) at the split line of the housing. Tighten them crosswise to the following
torque rates:
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] 40 69 170 330 570 1150
- Handtighten the screws at the split line of the machine seal.

Size 22 - Unscrew the assembly device and put it back into its "parking position" behind the flange.
and 28. Tighten the assembly device by using the following torque: 40 Nm.
- Replace the top sight glass and screw it handtight into place.
EM.V. - Tighten the screw plug with the weldedon positioning pin into the top half of the housing (2).
insulated Insulation monitoring

bearing
In the case of electric insulated bearings provided with insulation monitoring, the cable coming out
of the bearing housing must be connected in a professional manner.
According to the type supplied, please follow the assembly instructions given below.
a) The cable is very short and provided with a further cable connector at the end of it.
This cable is ready for connection to the bearing housing.
The bottom half of the bearing housing is provided with the counterpart.
- Plug the cable connector into the counterpart.
Attention!
This connection bypasses the electrical insulation of the bearing.
In the case of electric machines, make sure at least one bearing is electrically insulated.
To check the electrical insulation, interrupt the connection cable bearing housing. Check the
electrical resistance with a suitable measuring instrument. Make sure that both bearings and the
coupling are electrically insulated.
b) The cable has a free end. In this case the customer has to make the connection.
Attention!
If only one bearing is insulated, the end of the cable must not be earthed.
Any further connection depends on the customers requirements related to the insulation
monitoring and can not therefore be described here.

5 Assembly of the Seals Outboard Side
- Assemble the outboard side seals.

Proceed according to the seal type used.
Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) Chapter 5.1
Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11) Chapter 5.2
Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12) Chapter 5.3
Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20) Chapter 5.4
Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21) Chapter 5.5
Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22) Chapter 5.6
Type 5.1 Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10)

10
Warning of injury!
During assembly hold the garter spring ends securely to avoid them suddenly
releasing and causing possible injury !
Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft.

- Put both halves of the seal (52),(53) in their place on the shaft.
Attention!
dismantle the seal

- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the guide surfaces and on the split line surfaces
of both halves of the seal (52), (53).
- Press the bottom half of the seal (52) against the shaft.
- Place the top half of the seal (53) on the shaft and align both halves of the seal to each other.
- Place the garter spring (49) into the groove (50) and stretch until both ends can be hooked.
54 53 2
49 52 21
Illustration 11: Assembly of the floating labyrinth seal

- Place in true alignment the split line of the floating labyrinth seal and the split line of the seal
carrier.
- Check that both engraved numbers (56) and (58) on top and bottom halves of the seal carrier
(48), (51) correspond.
- Clean the following parts:
the seal surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier (the groove of the
floating labyrinth seal, the flange surfaces)
the split line surfaces of the top (48) and bottom half (51) of the seal carrier
the flange surfaces of the housing.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to:

the lateral surfaces of the groove at the top (48) and bottom half (51) of the seal carrier
the flange surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier
the split line surfaces of the bottom half of the seal carrier (51).
Ilustration 12: Application of sealing compound on the seal carrier

- Place the top half of the seal carrier (48) on the top half of the seal (53). Press the bottom half
(51) of the seal carrier against it. Push the shaft seal completely into the housing.
48
54
53
Illustration 13 Assembly of the seal carrier
- Place in true alignment the split lines of the seal carrier and the housing.
- Tighten up the screws (55) to the following torque rates:
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] 8 8 8 20 20 20

Type11 5.2 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11)
- Assemble the floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger as described in Chapter 5.1, Floating
labyrinth seal type 10.
- Place both halves of the dust flinger (69) in front of the shaft seal around the shaft. Loosely
screw in the screws (70) at the split line of the flinger.
69 48
e 57
Illustration 14: Clearance between dust flinger and seal carrier
EM..Q - Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (57) of the seal carrier.
- Set the clearance "e" at the following figure around the whole unit:
maximum longitudinal extension of the shaft in operation + 1 mm

(Parameters indicated in the Technical Documentation of the Installation).
- Tighten up both screws (70) to the following torque rates:
Seal diameter [mm] 80140 >140
Torque [Nm] 7 18
- Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (57) of the seal carrier.
EM..B,
- Set the clearance "e"at 1 mm around the whole unit.
EM..K,
- Tighten both screws (70) to the following torque rates:
EM..E,
EM..A
Torque [Nm] 7 18

Type 5.3 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle ( Type 12)

12
- Assemble the floating labyrinth seal with baffle as described in Chapter 5.1, type10.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the flange surfaces of the top half (66) and
bottom half (68) of the baffle.
- Screw the top half of the baffle (66) onto top half of the seal carrier (48)
the bottom half of the baffle (68) onto bottom half of the seal carrier (51).
Torque [Nm] 4 10
Type 5.4 Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20)

20
- Check if the engraved numbers (64) and (65) on the bottom half (63) and top half (59) of the rigid
labyrinth seal correspond.
- Clean
the flange surfaces of the top half (59) and bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal
the split line surfaces of the top half (59) and bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the following parts:
the flange surfaces of the top (59) and bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal
the split lines of the bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
Illustration 15: Application of sealing compound to the rigid labyrinth seal

- Place the top half (59) of the rigid labyrinth seal on the shaft and press slightly the bottom half
(63) of the rigid labyrinth seal from below against it. Lightly push the rigid labyrinth seal
completely into the housing.
- Tighten the screws (61) at the labyrinth seal split line.
- Place in parallel alignment the split line of the rigid labyrinth seal and the split line of the
housing. Press the rigid labyrinth seal slightly from below against the shaft. Adjust the rigid
labyrinth seal in such a way that the clearance "f" between the shaft and the rigid labyrinth seal
at both split lines has the same figure.
2 59
f f
21 63
llustration 16: Alignment of the rigid labyrinth seal
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] 8 8 8 20 20 20

Type 5.5 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21)
21
- Assemble the rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger as described in Chapter 5.4, type 20.
- Place both halves of the dust flinger (69) round the shaft, in front of the rigid labyrinth seal.
Mount both screws (70) at the split line loose.
69 59
e
62
Illustration 17: Clearance between dust flinger and rigid labyrinth seal
EM..Q - Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (62) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
- Set the clearance "e" at the following figure around the whole unit.

(Parameters are indicated in the Technical Documentation of the Installation).
- Tighten both screws (70) to the following torque rates:
Torque [Nm] 7 18
EM..B, - Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (62) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
EM..K, - Set the clearance "e" at 1 mm around the whole unit.
EM..E, - Tighten both screws (70) to the following torque rates:
EM..A
Torque [Nm] 7 18

Type 5.6 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22)

22
- Assemble the rigid seal with baffle as described in Chapter 5.4, type 20.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound on the flange surfaces of the top half (66) and
- Screw
the top half of the baffle (66) to the top half (59) of the rigid labyrinth seal
the bottom half of the baffle (68) to the bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
Torque [Nm] 4 10

6 Instructions for Assembly of Peripheral Equipment
6.1 Assembly of the oil supply equipment
The oil supply equipment together with the pressure, temperature and flow measuring instruments
are usually provided by the user. The oil quantity and viscosity necessary for the operation of the
bearing are specified in the bearing calculations. This manual contains only indications on the
connection points with the bearing. The connection bores for the oil inlets inand outlets are on
both lateral sides of the bearing, closed with screw plugs. Remove only those plugs where pipes
are to be connected.
Connection conditions
Pipelines Flow speed Indications
Inlet Precision steel pipe about 1,5 m/s Place the throttle valve in the inlet
DIN 2391 pipeline directly in front of the
bearing
Steel pipe DIN 2448
Outlet Steel pipe DIN 2448 max. 0,15 m/s 15 inclination
if 15 inclination is not possible

enlarge correspondingly the cross
sections of the pipeline directly
behind the bearing.
Too low inclination or / and too small

crosssection lead to oil back
pressure in the bearing.
Leakage or overflowing are the
consequences.
- Before starting assembly pickle all pipes which have been welded
have been bent hot
are contamined and rusty inside.
Warning of injury!
Please observe the instructions for the use of the pickling fluid. Wear rubber
gloves, rubber apron, rubber boots and safety glasses.

Rinsing of the oil circuit

- Rinse the whole oil circuit to remove all impurities. The bearing must not be connected to the
oil circuit during rinsing operations. The rinsing should be done before connecting the oil
supply to the bearing or the bearing should be disconnected from the oil circuit. If this is not
possible, dismantle the top half of the housing and remove the shells.
To avoid damage to the fittings:

- Remove all measuring and switching fittings.
- Close all connections (see also the Technical Documentation of the Installation).
- Fill up the oil supply system with lubricant. Use the type with the viscosity indicated on the
bearing type plate.
- Start operating the oil supply system.Collect the first charge of high contamined oil separately.
Continue rinsing until the lubricant contains no impurities.
- Drain off the oil supply system completely. Clean the oil tank and the filters.
Warning of environmental pollution!

Please observe the instructions for the use of the lubricant. The manufacturer could provide
information on waste oil disposal.
- Assemble all fittings.
Oil inlet
- Connect the inlet pipe at the connection hole (28) for the oil inlet. Seal with Teflon tape or liquid
sealing compound.
Depending on the bearing size, the connection hole has the following threads:
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Connection hole / G 3/8 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 3/4 G 3/4

Oil inlet (28)
If the bearing calculation specifies a separate supply source for the thrust parts:
- connect the inlet pipes to the connection hole of the thrust part supply (3) on the lateral side of
the bearing. Seal with Teflon tape or liquid sealing compound.

Oil outlet
EMZ.., - Screw the oil outlet with special nut and lead sealing ring (35) into the oil outlet connection hole
EMX.. (34) . Connect the oil outlet pipe to the flange.
Depending on the bearing size the connection hole for the oil outlet (35) has the following
standard threads (larger threads are possible):
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Connection hole for oil G 1 1/4 G 1 1/4 G 1 1/2 G 1 1/2 G2 G 2 1/2

outlet (35)
EM.L. - Screw the oil outlet with special nut and lead sealing ring (35) into the corresponding hole (34)
with the marking at top dead centre. The spillover oil weir then ensures the minimum oil level
for the emergency lubrication by means of the loose oil ring. Connect the oil outlet pipe to the
flange.
EMU.., - Screw in the outlet pipe to the selected oil sump temperature measurement connection hole
EMT.. (29) and seal with Teflon tape or liquid sealing compound. The slide bearing type EM is
provided with a tapped hole (G11/4) on both sides for the installation of an oil cooler and oil
sump thermometer.Use an adapter with the necessary thread to connect suction pipes or oil
sump thermometers.
6.2 Temperature measurement
- Fix suitable thermo sensors:

into one of the tapped holes (27) for temperature measurements of the journal parts
into one of the tapped holes (29) for temperature measurements of the oil sump
into one of the tapped holes (optional) for temperature measurement of the thrust parts.
Proceed as follows:
- Take out the screw plugs from the connection holes.
- Place the thermo sensor into the bore by using Teflon tape or sealing compound.
- Connect the thermo sensor at the temperature monitoring equipment of the installation (see the
Technical Documentation of the Installation for connecting and adjustement).
EMT..
6.3 Water supply
Following requirements should be observed before connecting the oil cooler (31):
water velocity of maximum 1,5 m/s in the cooling water inlet
water pressure of maximum 5 bar
adjusting tap on inlet
outlet of cooling water under no pressure.
The direction of the cooling water passage in the oil cooler (31) is arbitrary.
6.4 Closing of the assembly opening
After completed bearing assembly and before starting operation close the assembly opening of
the machine shield (with the thin metal plate (5)).

7 Bearing Insulation
These bearings are delivered insulated. The electrical insulation is assured by:
plastic coating of the spherical seatings (26)
shaft seals made out of nonconducting materials
insulated positioning pin (8)
insulated screwed connections for thermometers.
It is not necessary to insulate the pipelines.
- Mark the insulated bearing with the delivered plate "Insulated bearing shells". Install the plate in
a visible place by using two grooved drive studs.
8 Operation
8.1 Filling up with lubricating oil
Attention!
Make sure that no impurities get into the bearing.
- Tighten all screw plugs in the connection holes (27), (28), (32), (34) to the necessary torque
rates:
Screw plug threads G 3/8 G 1/2 G 3/4 G1 G 1 1/4 G 1 1/2 G2 G 2 1/2
Torque [Nm] for plugs 30 40 60 110 160 230 320 500

with injectionmoulded
plastic sealing ring

with flexible sealing ring
- Check that:
the top sight glass (9) is tight, the screws should be handtight.
- Retighten the screws for oil inlet and outlet, and for the thrust parts (if existing). The necessary
torque rates depend on the screw connections used.
In case thermo sensor or/and oil sump thermometer are used:

- Check if they are tight (according the the manufacturer's instructions).
- Fill up the oil supply system with lubricant. Use a lubricant with a viscosity as indicated for the
spedific bearing operation.
- Start operating the oil supply system in order to fill the bearing with lubricant.
EM.C., - Remove the protective layer from the top sight glass (9).
EM.L., Continue as already mentioned above.
EM.Y.

8.2 Trial run
- Before the trial run, check the following:

the way the oil supply system functions ( see also the Technical Documentation of the
Installation).The lubricant quantity at the bearing oil inlet must correspond to the values
indicated in the EDPcalculations.
if the temperature monitoring equipment works.
EMT.. if the water cooling installation works.
Attention!
Not enough lubricant leads to
temperature rises and thus damage of the bearing.
Too much lubricant leads to

leakages.
The bearing is ready for operation.
- Supervise the bearing during the trial run (510 operating hours).
Pay special attention to:
the way the oil supply installation works ( necessary lubricant quantity, lubricant temperature,
lubricant pressure before entering the bearing )
bearing temperature
sliding noises of the shaft seals
tightness
occurrence of inadmissible vibrations.
Attention!
If the bearing temperature exceeds the calculated value by 15 K ( see bearing calculation ) stop the
installation immediately. Carry out an inspection of the bearing as described under Instructions for
Service and Inspection of the Slide Bearings Type EM with External Oil Supply.

9 Glossary
Baffle With bearing types 10 and 20 the baffles are assembled externally in front of the shaft
seals. The baffle, made of reinforced polyamide, protects the bearing from dust and
water.
Rigid labyrinth seal The rigid labyrinth seal (type 20) is used with slide bearings type E with high oil
throughput.It corresponds to the protective system IP44 and is made of an aluminium
alloy.
The rigid labyrinth seal is built of two halves, flanged at the housing.The labyrinths that
wipe out the lubricant are arranged into two groups.The first two labyrinths , installed
inside keep back most of the lubricant. Five further labyrinths protect the bearing from
outside.They prevent the lubricant overflow and the ingress of impurities.The overflow
lubricant is collected into a chamber between the both groups of labyrinths.Through
the return bores the lubricant flows back into the bearing.
Spherical seating The spherical seating is a special feature enabling the alignment of the shell in the
housing.The shell is seated on two spherical seatings. The advantages of the spherical
seating are:
easy at assembly
good heat transfer from the shell to the housing
suitable for such applications with high thrust or journal loads.
Dust flinger In the case of bearing types 10 and 20 a light alloy ring is clamped on the shaft in front
of the shaft.This ring fits into a groove in the seal carrier or the rigid labyrinth seal, thus
building a labyrinth. The labyrinth protects the shaft exit against low pressure that could
otherwise " absorb " the lubricant. Low pressure occurs for instance in the case of
rotating discs, such as couplings or cooling discs.
Floating labyrinth The floating labyrinth seal (type 10) in the seal carrier is used as a shaft seal in the
seal case of bearings type E operating under normal conditions. It prevents the lubricant
and lubricant mist coming out and the ingress of impurities. The floating seal has a high
capacity of resistance to wear. It is made of a highperformance, high temperature
stability and electrically insulated plastic material.The floating seal consists of two
halves held together by a garter spring. Both ends of the spring are hooked together. In
the case of slide bearings type EM the floating seal is mounted into a twopiece seal
carrier. The groove allows for radial movement of up to 1 mm. The seal is thus
insensitive to shaft radial displacement or deflection. The sealing effect is produced by
the baffles wiping off the lubricant from the shaft. The lubricant flows back into the
bearing via oil return opening.
Machine seal In the case of the flange mounted bearings, the machine seal reduces the influence of
positive and negative pressure in the machine thus preventing leakages at the inner
seal area. The space between the machine seal and the bearing housing must always
be vented to atmospheric pressure. The size of the gap between shaft and machine
seal influences the sealing effect.

Instructions
for Maintenance and Inspection
Slide Bearings Type EM
RH EMZWI E 7.02
Maintenance and Inspection
RENK AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Werk Hannover
Weltausstellungsallee 21
D 30539 Hannover
Telephone: (0511) 86010
Telefax: (0511) 8601266
email: gleitlager.hannover@renkag.com
http:\\www.renk.de
All rights reserved. Copy or reproduction without prior permission of RENK Aktiengesellschaft Hannover
prohibited.
2 RHEMZWIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 RENK AG Werk Hannover

Contents
Bearing Coding ..............................................................................................................................................5
General Drawing of the Slide Bearing EM with External Oil Supply ..............................................................7
General Drawing of the Thrust Part with Circular Tilting Pads (RDThrust Pads)..........................................9
General Drawing of the Loose Oil Ring........................................................................................................11
General Drawing of the Floating Labyrinth Ring with Seal Carrier ..............................................................13
General Drawing of the Rigid Labyrinth Seal ...............................................................................................15
General Drawing of the Baffle ......................................................................................................................17
General Drawing of the Dust Flinger ............................................................................................................19
1 Considerations for Use ...........................................................................................................................21
2 Safety Instructions ..................................................................................................................................22
3 Operating Instructions after Standstill ..................................................................................................23
4 Maintenance Schedule ...........................................................................................................................24
5 Oil Change................................................................................................................................................25
6 Dismantling of the Bearing .....................................................................................................................26
6.1 Tools and equipment .......................................................................................................................26
6.2 Use of lifting equipment ...................................................................................................................26
6.3 Preparation for dismantling..............................................................................................................29
6.4 Dismantling of the shaft seal outboard side ..................................................................................30
6.4.1 Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) ...............................................................................................30
6.4.2 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11).....................................................................30
6.4.3 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12)..............................................................................30
6.4.4 Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20) ....................................................................................................30
6.4.5 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21) .........................................................................30
6.4.6 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22) ..................................................................................30
6.5 Opening of the machine seal ...........................................................................................................31
6.6 Dismantling of the top half of the housing .......................................................................................31
6.7 Removal of the top half of the shell .................................................................................................32
6.7.1 Dismantling of the loose oil ring................................................................................................32
6.7.2 Dismantling the machine side shaft seal ..................................................................................32
6.8 Removal of the bottom half of the shell ...........................................................................................33
6.9 Dismantling of the machine seal ......................................................................................................33
7 Cleaning and Checking of the Bearing..................................................................................................34
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHEMZWIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 3

8 Assembly of the Bearing.........................................................................................................................36

8.1 Fitting in the bottom half of the shell................................................................................................36
8.2 Assembly of the shaft seal machineside ......................................................................................37
8.3 Installation of the loose oil ring ........................................................................................................39
8.4 Fitting in the top half of the shell......................................................................................................40
8.5 Closing of the bearing ......................................................................................................................41
8.6 Assembly of the Seals Outboard Side...........................................................................................43
8.6.1 Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) ...............................................................................................43
8.6.2 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11).....................................................................47
8.6.3 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12)..............................................................................48
8.6.4 Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20) ....................................................................................................48
8.6.5 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21) .........................................................................50
8.6.6 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22) ..................................................................................50
9 Starting Operation after Inspection.......................................................................................................51
10 Corrosion Protection for Longer Standstill Periods ............................................................................52
11 Transport Protection...............................................................................................................................52
12 Glossary ...................................................................................................................................................53

Bearing Coding

Type Housing Heat Dissipation Shape of Bore and Type of Thrust part Size Diameter
Lubrication
E M centre flange Z lubrication by oil circulation with C plain cylindrical bore Q without thrust part 9 80D100
mounted bearing external oil cooling without oil ring (non locating bearing )
11 100D125
X lubrication by oil circulation with L plain cylindrical bore with B plain sliding surfaces
external oil cooling for high loose oil ring with oil grooves 14 125D160
oil throughput (locating bearing)
Y twolobe bore (lemon shape) 18 160D200
U circulating pump and natural without oil ring E taper land faces for one
cooling sense of rotation 22 200D250
V fourlobe bore (locating bearing)
T circulating pump and water without oil ring 28 250D315
cooling (finned cooler in K taper land faces
oil sump ) (locating bearing)
A elastically supported
circular tilting pads
(RD thrust pads)
(locating bearing)
Example for bearing coding:

E M Z L K 22200 Type E slide bearing with centrally flanged mounted housing, lubrication by
oil circulation with external oil cooling, plain cylindrical bore with loose
oil ring, locating bearing with taper land faces, size 22, diameter 200.
Shaft seals Type 10 floating labyrinth seal (IP 44)

Type 11 floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (IP 54)
Type 12 floating labyrinth seal with baffle (IP 55)
Type 20 rigid labyrinth seal ( IP 44)

Type 21 rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (IP 54)
Type 22 rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (IP 55)
6 RH-EMZWI-E Version: 2 Juli, 2002 RENK AG Werk Hannover

General Drawing
Slide Bearing EM
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHEMZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 7

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
5
14
15
4 16
3
17
2
xxx
1 xxx
18
36
19
xxx
20
35
21
22
34
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
33 32 31 30
1 Engraved numbers housing
2 Top half of the housing
3 Tapped hole for the thrust part oil supply (optional )
4 Positioning pin nut
5 Plate ( Assembly opening )
6 Screw
7 Eye bolt
8 Positioning pin
9 Top sight glass
10 Tapped hole ( in the top and bottom halves of the shell, up size 14 )
11 Top half of the shell
12 Screw
13 Machine seal
14 Hamp packing seal groove
15 Hamp packing
16 Screw (split line of the housing)
17 Screw (split line of the machine seal)
18 Bottom half of the shell
19 Tapped hole
20 Engraved number shell
21 Bottom half of the housing
22 Recess
23 Pressure equalizing hose
24 Screw (split line of the shell)
25 Screw
26 Spherical seating
27 Tapped hole for temperature measurement of the journal part
28 Oil inlet connection hole
29 Tapped hole for the oil sump temperature measurement
30 Outlet/Inlet cooling water (Type E.T..)
31 Cooler ( Type E.T..)
32 Hexagon head plug (Oil drain plug)
33 Metal tabs ( optional for EMZL. )
34 Oil outlet connection hole
35 Oil outlet pipe with lock nut and lead seal
36 Marking
Thrust Part with Circular Tilting Pads
(RDThrust Pads)
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHRDZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 9

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
37 Carrier ring
38 Location groove
39 Shroud ring top half
40 Screw
41 Shroud ring bottom half
42 Circular tilting pad (RDthrust pad)
43 Anti Rotation pin
Loose Oil Ring
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHLSZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 11

44
45
46
47
44 Loose Oil Ring
45 Dowel pin
46 Hole
47 Screw
Floating Labyrinth Seal
with Seal Carrier
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHSSZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 13

Bearing side
48
49
54
53
50
52
51
Outer view
58 55
57
56
48 Seal carrier top half
49 Garter spring
50 Groove
51 Seal carrier bottom half
52 Bottom half of the seal
53 Top half of the seal
54 Anti rotation pin
55 Screw
56 Engraved number
58 Engraved number
General drawing of the
Rigid Labyrinth Seal
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHKDZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 15

59
60
65
61 (2x)
62
64
63
59 Rigid labyrinth seal top half
60 Screw
63 Rigid labyrinth seal bottom part
64 Engraved number
65 Engraved number
Baffle
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHDSZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 17

66
67
68
66 Baffle top half
67 Screw
68 Baffle bottom half
Dust Flinger
RENK AG Werk Hannover RHLRZE/WIE Version: 2 Juli, 2002 19

69
70 (2x)
69 Dust flinger
1 Considerations for Use
The instructions for maintenance and inspection are addressed to qualified technical personnel
(fitters, mechanic installers, mechanical engineers).
Read these instructions carefully before starting assembly.
Slide bearings of type EM are almost universally used in the engineering industry. Therefore it is
not possible to provide detailed information on all possible types and range of applications for
these bearing types. For instance, the position of the connection points for supply and monitoring
equipment is determined by the place of application ( in the following called " installation " ).
Please keep ready the guidelines with the technical documentation before starting maintenance
and inspection of the slide bearings.
Additional technical documentation with detailed information is supplied in case of special design
bearings. Please contact RENK Export or Domestic Department for supplementary information on
bearings. Please indicate the bearing coding and the full reference number, too.
Following indications should be observed when reading these instructions.
Safety instructions are marked as follows:
Danger!
Warning of dangers for personnel.
Example: Warning of injury
Attention!
Warning of damage for the bearing or installation.
Useful recommendations and additional information are framed.
EM..Q This is how chapters, instructions or recommendations are marked when referring to a single type
or size of a bearing.
Example: Slide bearing type E without thrust part ( nonlocating bearing )
Instruction follows.
Beginning of an enumeration.
( ) This is how the different parts of a bearing as described in the general drawings ( numbers )
are marked in the text.
- Use the enclosed checklist before starting assembly or operation. Copies available on request.
- The check list provides the experienced mechanical fitters of RENK bearings with the
necessary instructions for installation and operation.

2 Safety Instructions
Danger!
The maintenance and inspection of the slide bearings should be carried out by:
persons nominated by the safety representative
persons correspondingly trained and instructed
persons with knowledge on appropriate standards, regulations and accident.
prevention rules
persons with knowledge on firstaid measures and local rescue centres.
Warning of injury!
Before starting work on the bearing:
Switch off the installation.
Make sure the installation is not in operation.
Never lift or transport machines, etc.by the bearing eye bolts. These are only
intended for assembly and dismantling of the bearing !
Warning of injury!
Do not grab such heavy bearing parts as the housing during assembly or dismantling
work. This could result in bruising or injury to hands !
Attention!
All metal parts of a slide bearing consisting of top and bottom part such as the housing, shells,
shaft seals are marked by engraved numbers. Fit together only the parts with the same number.
Attention!
In case the admissible bearing temperature exceeds 15 K
inadmissible vibrations occur
unusual noises or odours are noticed
monitoring equipment triggers alarm
shut down the installation and inform the maintenance personnel in charge.
Attention!
Do not operate the bearing below the transition speed values indicated in the bearing calculation,
thus avoiding inadmissible operating conditions, which could lead to damage to the bearing.
Attention!
Please observe our leaflet Technical Information No. 85 which refers to various sealing compounds
for extended technical applications.

3 Operating Instructions after Standstill
- Clean the external parts of the bearing. Dust and dirt impede the radiation of the heat.
- Check with the instructions to determine if an oil change is necessary. Depending on the
duration of the standstill an oil change is either prescribed or recommended. Carry out the oil
change as indicated in Chapter 5.
- Retighten the screws (16) to the following torque rates:
Bearing Size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] for 40 69 170 330 570 1150

tot = 0,1 ( lightly oiled )
- Check the firm position of the top sight glass (9).

- Retighten the tapped holes for oil inlets and outlets, the oil supply hole for the thrust part
(optional). The necessary torque rates depend on the used pipe joints.
In case a thermo sensor or/and an oil sump thermometer are used:

- Check that they are well fitted (see also the manufacturer's instructions).
- Retighten all screw plugs in the connection holes (27), (28), (32), (34) to the necessary torque
rates:

with moulded on plastic
seal

with elastic seal
- Start operating the oil supply system and check its functioning ( see also the Technical
Documentation of the Installation ). The supplied oil quantity at the bearing oil inlet must
correspond to the values indicated in the EDPcalculations.
- Check that the temperature monitoring equipment is functioning correctly.
EMT.. Check that the water cooler is functioning correctly
The bearing is now ready to work.

4 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance work Deadline
Exterior cleaning of the bearing every 1001000 hours
Oil change Bearing in reversing operation every 5000 operating hours.

Bearing in continous operation every 20.000 operating hours
(please observe also the indications for the use of the
lubricating oil).
Bearing inspection During prevention maintenance work for the installation.

Immediately if:
the bearing temperature exceeds 15 K over the indicated

value (see the EDPcalculations)
unusual operating noises occur
unusual changes of the lubricating oil become visible
increased oil level in the case of bearing type EMT....

5 Oil Change
Risk of pollution!
Please observe the instructions for the use of the lubricating oil. The manufacturer can provide
information on waste oil disposal.
- Shut down the installation and secure it against unintended operation.

- Shut down the oil supply system.
- Take all necesarry measures to collect the whole quantity of the lubricating oil.
- Drain off the lubricating oil while still in a warm condition. Impurities and residues will thus be
scavenged. Go ahead as follows:
Let off and collect the lubricating oil of the oil supply system.
- Unscrew the hexagon head plug (32). Drain off the lubricating oil and collect it.
Attention!
In case the lubricating oil contains unusual residues or is visibly changed, eliminate the causes. If
necessary, carry out an inspection.
- Tighten the hexagon head plug (32) to the following torque rates:
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] 30 30 30 40 60 60
- Clean the oil tank.

- Fill up the oil supply system with lubricating oil. Use a lubricant with the viscosity indicated on
the bearing type plate.
- Start the oil supply system in order to fill up the bearing with lubricating oil.
The bearing is ready to work when the quantity of oil supplied at the bearing oil inlet corresponds
to the values indicated in the EDPcalculations.

6 Dismantling of the Bearing
6.1 Tools and equipment
- Following tools and equipment are necessary:

Allan key set
Wrenching key set
Openjawed spanner set
Feeler gauges (up 0,05 mm)
Caliper gauge
Emery paper, plain scraper
Oil stone
Lifting equipment
Permanent sealing compound
Clean (cloth weave) rags
Oil with the correct viscosity (see bearing type plate)
Detergents
Liquid screw locking compound (e.g.LOCTITE 242)
Liquid sealing compound and Teflon tape.
6.2 Use of lifting equipment
Risk of injury!
Before transport or lifting check if the eye bolts are tight! Insecure eye bolts could
result in bearing becoming loose.
Before moving the bearing by the eye bolts make sure that the split line screws are
tightened, otherwise the bottom half of the bearing could become detached.
Make sure that the eye bolts are not exposed to bending stress, otherwise the bolts
could break.
Follow exactly the instructions for the use of the lifting equipment.
- Use lifting equipment for following assembly and transport works:
Transport/Assembly of: Use lifting equipment

for the following bearing sizes
Whole bearing unit 928
Top half of the housing 1428
Bottom half of the housing 1128
Shells 1428

- Following steps are to be observed before using the lifting equipment:

Whole bearing unit
- Check if the screws are tight (16):
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque value [Nm] for 40 69 170 330 570 1150

- Check if the eye bolts are tight (7).

Size Sizes 22 and 28 are delivered equipped with an assembly device.

22 and When not in use this assembly device is located in the "parking position" behind the flange and as
28 such it is not allowed to use it as transport device.
Illustration 1: Assembly device
To mount the top half of the housing remove the top sight glass and screw in the assembly device.
By using the appropriate lifting equipment and with the help of the assembly device it is possible
to lift and mount the top half of the housing in a straight position.
After assembling the top half of the housing put the assembly device back into the "parking
position" behind the flange and screw in the top sight glass.

Top half of the housing

- Check if the eye bolts are tight (7).
Bottom half of the housing

- Screw two eye bolts (7) with suitable threads tight into the crossplaced opposite tapped holes
(19).
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Tapped hole M 10 M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30
Shells
- Screw two eye bolts or screw hooks with suitable threads tight into the tapped holes (10):
Bearing size 14 18 22 28
Tapped hole M8 M 12 M 12 M 16
- Connect the lifting equipment to the screw hooks.

6.3 Preparation for dismantling
Attention!
Make sure that the work place is clean. Contamination and damage to the bearing, especially to
the working surfaces, have a negative influence on the operating quality and could lead to
premature failure.
Attention!
Do not use any violence or force!
- Shut down the installation and ensure it against unintended operation.

- Shut down the oil supply system.
EM.T. - Interrupt the cooling water supply.
- Dismantle all thermo sensors from the connection holes.

- Take all necessary measures to collect the lubricating oil.
- Unscrew the hexagon head plug (32) and collect the lubricating oil.
Risk of pollution!
Please observe the instructions for the use of the lubricating oil. The manufacturer can provide
necessary information on waste oil disposal.
- Remove the thin metal plate (5) to get access to the assembly opening or, in the case of the
split machine shield, dismantle the top half of the shield.
- Tighten the hexagon head plug (32) to the following torque rates
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque (Nm] 30 30 30 40 60 60
- Inform yourself about maintenance and inspection of the oil supply system ( see also the
Technical Documentation Oil Supply System ). Carry out all necessary maintenance and
inspection works.

6.4 Dismantling of the shaft seal outboard side
- Dismantle the outboard side seals of the bearing.

Proceed correspondingly to the seal type:
Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) Chapter 6.4.1
Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11) Chapter 6.4.2
Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12) Chapter 6.4.3
Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20) Chapter 6.4.4
Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21) Chapter 6.4.5
Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22) Chapter 6.4.6
Type 6.4.1 Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10)

10
- Loosen all screws (55) and take them out.
- Remove simultaneously in axial direction both top half (48) and bottom half (51) of the seal
carrier from the housing.
- Shift a little (about 20 mm ) the top half (53) of the seal. Tilt it over carefully until the garter
spring (49) unbends.
Warning of injury!
During dismantling of the floating labyrinth seal hold tight the garter spring (49) which
is under tension and could bounce back and lead to injury.
- Open the garter spring (49) and remove the bottom half of the seal (52) from the shaft.
Type 6.4.2 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11)
11 - Dismantle the dust flinger (69). Loosen the screws (70) and take out the dust flinger (69) from
the groove (57) of the seal carrier.Remove both halves of the dust flinger.
- Go on as indicated for type 10 (see Chapter .4.1).
Type 6.4.3 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12)

12 - Disconnect both top (66) and bottom (68) halves of the baffle by untightening the screws (67).
- Go on as indicated for type 10 (see Chapter 6.4.1).
Type 6.4.4 Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20)

20 - Loosen all screws (60) and take them out.
- Take out the screws (61).
- Remove simultaneously in axial direction both top (59) and bottom (63) halves of the rigid
labyrinth seal.
Type 6.4.5 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21)
21
- Dismantle the dust flinger (69). Loosen the screws (70) and take out the dust flinger (69) from
the groove (62) of the rigid seal. Remove both halves of the dust flinger.
Type 6.4.6 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22)

22
- Unscrew the top half (66) and the bottom half (68) of the baffle by untightening the screws (67).

6.5 Opening of the machine seal
- Loosen the screws (17) at the split line of the machine seal.
6.6 Dismantling of the top half of the housing
EM.V. - Unscrew the screw plug with the weldedon positioning pin.
Size 22 - Replace the top sight glass (9) by the assembly device.The top half of the housing can be lifted
and 28 and transported by using the assembly device, well tight, and the appropriate lifting equipment.
- Remove the screws (16) and lift the top half of the housing.
- Lift the top part of the housing in axial direction until the top part of the flange becomes free.
- Go on lifting until the top part of the housing can be moved in axial line over the shell, without
touching it.
Illustration 2: Dismantling of the housing top half

6.7 Removal of the top half of the shell
- Unscrew the screws (24) and lift the top half of the shell (11).
Attention!
Do not damage the thrust and radial working surfaces.
Attention!
In the case of insulated housings ( white plastic insulating foil ) avoid any jamming of the top half of
the shell when you lift it up.
Jamming could lead to damage of the insulating foil in the bottom half of the housing.
EM.L. 6.7.1 Dismantling of the loose oil ring

- Open both split lines of the loose oil ring (44) by untightening and taking out the screws (47).
I II
44
44 44
47
Illustration 3 Opening of the loose oil ring
To check the geometry of the loose oil ring put it together as follows:
- Press the positioning pin (45) into the holes (46).
- Tighten the screws (47).
6.7.2 Dismantling the machine side shaft seal
- Shift a little ( about 20 mm ) the top half (53) of the seal. Tilt it over carefully until the garter
spring (49) unbends.
Warning of injury!
During dismantling of the floating labyrinth seal hold tight the garter spring (49) which
is under tension and could bounce back and lead to injury.
- Open the garter spring (49) and turn the bottom half of the seal (52) in opposite direction from
the antirotation pin out of the integrated seal groove of the bottom half of the housing.

6.8 Removal of the bottom half of the shell
Attention!
Make sure that all bearings mounted on a shaft line are opened. Loosen the screws at the split line
of the housings.
Attention!
The lifting equipment should not come into touch with the seal and working surfaces of the shaft.
- Lift the shaft up to the point where shaft and bottom half of the shell (18) do not touch each
other any more. Protect the shaft against unintended movement.
- Turn the bottom half of the shell (18) out of the bottom half of the housing (21) and remove it
from the shaft.
Attention!
If the bottom half of the shell (18) is provided with metal tabs (33) do not remove them. They
regulate the oil level in the oil pockets.
6.9 Dismantling of the machine seal
Usually it is not necessary to dismantle the machine seal if maintenance works are carried out.
However in case the machine seal must be dismantled , dismantle the bottom half of the housing.
Attention!
The assembly and dismantling of the bottom half of the bearing are fully described in the
Instructions for Installation and Operation. Please observe these instructions.
After dismantling the bottom half of the housing both halves of the machine seal can be
unscrewed. In the case the machine seal is equipped with a hamp packing (15), some visible
changes can be noticed, such as : tallow excess, black colour of the seal due to temperature
development. Even in such cases it is not necessary to renew the hamp packing (15). Colour
changes will appear with a new hamp packing too, until the seal clearance adjusts during
operation.

7 Cleaning and Checking of the Bearing
Attention!
Use only nonaggressive detergents such as for instance
VALVOLINE 150
Alcaline cleaning compounds (pHvalue 6 to 9, short reaction time).
Warning of injury!
Please observe the instructions for the use of the detergents.
Attention!
Never use cleaning wool or cloth. Residues of such materials left in the bearing could lead to
excessive temperatures.
- Clean the following parts thoroughly:

top half of the housing (2)
bottom half of the housing (21)
top half of the shell (11)
bottom half of the shell (18)
sealing surfaces of the top half (48) and bottom half (51) of the seal carrier or of the rigid
labyrinth seal
EM.L. loose oil ring (44).
EM.T. - Check the condition of the water cooler (31).

In case the water cooler (31) is incrusted with oil sludge:
- Dismantle the water cooler. Remove the incrustation by using for instance a wire brush.
- Install the water cooler (31) into the bearing.

- Carry out a visual check of the wear condition of all bearing parts. The following table provides
information on the parts that must be replaced in case of wear.The right evaluation of the wear
condition, especially of the running surfaces of the shell, implies a lot of experience. If in doubt,
replace the worn part with new ones.
Bearing part Wear condition Maintenance procedure
Shell Scoring Bearing temperature before inspection:

not increased no new shells
increased new shells
White metal lining damaged New shell
Bow wave ridges New shells
Shaft seal Baffles broken or damaged New shaft seal
Loose oil ring Geometrical form New loose oil ring

( roundness, flatness ) visibly
changed
EM.C. - Check the projection of the positioning pin (8) according to the values indicated below:
EM.L.
EM.Y.
Size Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
914
Projection of the 7 8 10 12 14 16
positioning pin (4) mm
In case the projection is less than indicated,

- drive the positioning pin (8) into the top half of the housing (2) until the indicated value is
reached.
insulated - Check the insulating layer of the spherical seating (26) of the top half (2) and bottom half (21) of
bearings the housing. In case of damage contact the RENKsales agency in charge.
EM..A - Check the mobility of all circular tilting pads (42).

8 Assembly of the Bearing
Attention!
Remove all impurities or other objects such as screws, nuts, etc. from inside the bearing. If left
inside they could lead to damage of the bearing. Cover up the opened bearing during work breaks.
Attention!
Carry out all assembly operations without making use of force.
Attention!
Secure all screws of the housing at the split line and flange with a liquid screw locking compound
(e.g.LOCTITE 242).
8.1 Fitting in the bottom half of the shell
EM..E Attention!
Mounting the bottom half of the shell (not marked with an arrow) correctly will ease the assembly
of the top half shell (marked with an arrow) (see chapter 4.6).
- Apply some lubricant to the spherical seating (26) in the bottom half of the housing (21) and to
the working surfaces of the shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as indicated for bearing
operation ( see type plate ).
- Place the bottom half of the shell (18) on the working surface of the shaft. Turn the bottom half
of the shell (18) into the bottom half of the housing (21) with the split line surfaces of both halves
in true alignment.
In case the bottom half of the shell doesn`t turn in easily, check the position of the shaft and the
alignment of the housing
EM..B, Attention!
EM..K, These operations should be carried out most carefully. The thrust parts of the bottom shell must
EM..E, not be damaged.
EM..A
- Lower down the shaft till it sits on the bottom half of the shell (18).

8.2 Assembly of the shaft seal machineside
The machineside shaft seal is, as standard, a floating labyrinth seal. The integrated seal groove is
in the top and bottom halves of the housing.
Warning of injury!
During assembly hold the garter spring ends (49) securely to avoid them suddenly
releasing and causing possible injury!
Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft in the seal area outside the housing:
- Put both halves of the seal (52), (53) in their place on the shaft.
Attention!
dismantle the seal

- Apply sealing compound to the guide surfaces of the integrated seal groove in the bottom half
of the housing.
Illustration 4: Application of sealing compound to the integrated seal groove

- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the seal surfaces and on the split line surfaces of
both halves of the seal (52), (53).
- Place the bottom half of the seal (52)) with the labyrinths onto the shaft.
- The oil return holes at the bearing side must be clear and open.
- Turn the seal in opposite direction from the antirotation pin into the groove of the housing until
the split lines of the bottom half of the housing and the bottom half of the seal match each
other.
- Remove the residue of sealing compound.
- Push the garter spring into the integrated seal groove between the bottom half of the housing
and the seal until both ends jut out from the split line.
- Place the top half of the seal with the cam facing the inside of the bearing on the bottom half of
the seal.
- Stretch the garter spring till both ends can be hooked.

EM.L. 8.3 Installation of the loose oil ring
- Open both split lines of the loose oil ring (44) by untightening and removing the screws (47).
I II
44
44 44
47
Illustration:6 Opening of the loose oil ring
- Place both halves of the loose oil ring into the shell groove (18) encircling the shaft. Press the
positioning pin (45) of each split line into the corresponding hole (46).
21
45
44
44 18
Illustration 7: Installation of the loose oil ring
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] 1,4 1,4 1,4 2,7 2,7 2,7

8.4 Fitting in the top half of the shell
- Apply some lubricant to the working surfaces of the shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as
indicated for bearing operation (see type plate).
- Check if the engraved numbers (20) on the bottom and top halves of the shell correspond.
- Place the top half of the shell (11) on the shaft; both engraved numbers (20) should be on the
same side.
Attention!
An incorrectly placed shell could jam the shaft thus leading to the damage of both shaft and
bearing.
EM..B, Attention!
EM..K, Place the top half of the shell carefully on the shaft. The thrust parts of the top half of the shell
EM..E, must not be damaged.
EM..A
insulated In the case of bearings arranged for insulation monitoring, connect the black cable for insulation
bearings monitoring to the shell.
According to the bearing type, there are two possibilities of connection.
1. The black cable is provided with a cable connector.
- Plug the cable with the cable connector into the counterpart available on the top of the shell.
bearing.
2. The black cable is provided with an eyelet.
- Fasten the cable with the eyelet to the split line of the shell, by using one of the shell joint bolts.
bearing.
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] 8 8 20 69 69 170
- Check the split line of the shell by using a feeler gauge. The split line gap should be less than
0,05 mm. If the split line is greater than this, dismantle both top and bottom (11),(18) halves of
the shell. Rework the split line surfaces of the top half (11) and bottom half (18) of the shell with
an oil stone.
EM.L. - Check the mobility of the loose oil ring (44).
EM.L. A guide bush in the top half of the shell secures the function of the loose oil ring.
Marine
Bearing - Check the mobility of the loose oil ring (44) in the guide bush.

EM..E Shells with taper land faces suitable only for one direction of rotation are marked with an arrow on
the top half shell, which indicates the sense of rotation of the shaft.
The arrow indicates the allowed direction of shaft rotation after completion of the bearing
assembly.
- Before mounting the top half of the housing check that the proposed direction of rotation of the
shaft corresponds to the direction indicated by the arrow on the top half of the shell.
- If the directions match, continue the assembly of the bearing.
- If the directions do not match, the shell must be disassembled, realigned and mounted again.
Attention!
A wrongly placed shell, without observance of the direction of rotation of the shaft, impairs the
operational safety of the bearing.
8.5 Closing of the bearing
- Check the true alignment of the shell (11), (18) and bottom half (21) of the housing.
EM.C.
EM.L. The positioning pin (8) in the top half of the housing fits in the corresponding hole (4). The shell is
EM.Y. thus placed into its right position.
- Check if the engraved numbers (1) on the top and bottom halves of the housing correspond.
- Clean the split line surfaces of the top and bottom halves (2), (21) of the housing.
- Apply sealing compound to the whole surface of the split line of the bottom half (21) of the
housing.
- Place the top half of the housing carefully into the machine shield, without touching the seals or
the shell.
Illustration 8: Assembly of the top half of the housing

- Lower the top half of the housing (2) vertically on the bottom half of the housing (21). Lower the
top half of the housing (2) till the split line of the housing is not visible any more.
- Gently hit the bottom half of the housing (21) with a nylon hammer, thus ensuring the alignment
of the spherical seating.
- Insert the screws (16). Tighten them crosswise to the following torque rates:
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] 40 69 170 330 570 1150

- Handtighten the screws at the split line of the machine seal.

Size 22 - Unscrew the assembly device and put it back into its "parking position" behind the flange.
and 28. Tighten the assembly device to the following torque: 40 Nm.
- Replace the top sight glass and screw it handtight.
EM.V. - Tighten the screw plug with the weldedon positioning pin into the top half of the housing.
insulated Insulation monitoring

bearings
In the case of electric insulated bearings provided with insulation monitoring, the cable coming out
of the housing must be connected in a professional manner.
According to the type supplied, please follow the assembly instructions given below.
a) The cable is very short and provided with a further cable connector at the end of it.
This cable is ready for connection to the housing.
The bottom half of the housing is provided with the counterpart.
- Plug the cable connector into the counterpart.
Attention!
This connection bypasses the electrical insulation of the bearing.
In the case of electric machines, make sure at least one bearing is electrically insulated.
To check the electrical insulation, interrupt the connection cable housing. Check the electrical
resistance with a suitable measuring instrument. Make sure that both bearings and the coupling
are electrically insulated.
b) The cable has a free end. In this case the customer has to make the connection.
Attention!
If only one bearing is insulated, the end of the cable must not be earthed.
Any further connection depends on the customers requirements related to the insulation
monitoring and can not therefore be described here.

8.6 Assembly of the Seals Outboard Side
- Assemble the outboard side seals.

Proceed according to the seal type used:
Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10) Chapter 8.6.1
Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11) Chapter 8.6.2
Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12) Chapter 8.6.3
Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20) Chapter 8.6.4
Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21) Chapter 8.6.5
Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22) Chapter 8.6.6
Type 8.6.1 Floating labyrinth seal (Type 10)

10
Warning of injury!
During assembly hold the garter spring ends (49) securely to avoid them suddenly
releasing and causing possible injury!
Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft in the seal area outside the housing.
- Put both halves of the seal (52), (53) in their place on the shaft.
Attention!
dismantle the seal

- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the seal surfaces and on the split line surfaces of
both halves of the seal (52), (53).
- Press the bottom half of the seal (52) against the shaft.
- Place the top half of the seal (53) on the shaft and align both halves of the seal to each other.
- Place the garter spring (49) into the groove (50) and stretch until both ends can be hooked.
54 53 2
49 52 21
Illustration 10: Assembly of the floating labyrinth seal

- Place in true alignment the split line of the floating labyrinth seal and the split line of the seal
carrier.
- Check that both engraved numbers (56) and (58) on top and bottom halves of the seal carrier
(48), (51) correspond.
- Clean the following
the seal surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier (the groove of the
floating labyrinth seal, the flange surfaces)
the split line surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to:
the lateral surfaces of the groove at the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier
the flange surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the seal carrier
the split line surfaces of the bottom half of the seal carrier (51).
Illustration 11: Application of sealing compound to the seal carrier

- Place the top half of the seal carrier (48) on the top half of the seal (53). Press the bottom half
(51) of the seal carrier against it. Push the shaft seal completely into the housing.
48
54
53
Illustration 12: Assembly of the seal carrier
- Place in true alignment the split lines of the seal carrier and the housing.
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] 8 8 8 20 20 20

Type
8.6.2 Floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 11)
11
- Assemble the floating labyrinth seal with dust flinger as described in Chapter 8.6.1, Floating
labyrinth seal type 10.
- Place both halves of the dust flinger (69) in front of the shaft seal around the shaft. Loosely
screw in the screws (70) at the split line of the flinger.
69 48
e 57
Illustration 13: Clearance between dust flinger and seal carrier
EM..Q - Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (57) of the seal carrier.
(Parameters indicated in the Technical Documentation of the Installation).
Torque [Nm] 7 18
EM..B, - Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (57) of the seal carrier.
EM..E, - Tighten the screws (70) to the following torque rates:
EM..A
Torque [Nm] 7 18

Type 8.6.3 Floating labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 12)

12 - Assemble the floating labyrinth seal with baffle as in Chapter 8.6.1, Type 10.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the flange surfaces of the top half (66) and
- Screw the top half of the baffle (66) to the top half of the seal carrier (48)
the bottom half of the baffle (68) to the bottom half of the seal carrier (51).
Torque [Nm] 4 10
Type 8.6.4 Rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20)

20
- Check if the engraved numbers (64) and (65) on the bottom half (63) and top half (59) of the rigid
labyrinth seal correspond.
- Clean
the split line surfaces of the top half (59) and bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound to the following parts:
the split lines of the bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
Illustration 14: Application of sealing compound to the rigid labyrinth seal

- Place the top half (59) of the rigid labyrinth seal on the shaft and press slightly the bottom half
(63) of the rigid labyrinth seal from below against it. Lightly push the rigid labyrinth seal
completely into the housing.
- Tighten the screws (61) at the split line of the labyrinth seal.
- Place in parallel alignment the split line of the rigid labyrinth seal and the split line of the
housing. Press the rigid labyrinth seal slightly from below against the shaft. Adjust the rigid
labyrinth seal in such a way that the clearance "f" between the shaft and the rigid labyrinth seal
at both split lines has the same figure.
2 59
f f
21 63
Illustration 15: Alignment of the rigid labyrinth seal
Bearing size 9 11 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] 8 8 8 20 20 20

Type 8.6.5 Rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger (Type 21)
21
- Assemble the rigid labyrinth seal with dust flinger as indicated in Chapter 8.6.4, Type 20.
- Place both halves of the dust flinger (69) round the shaft, in front of the rigid labyrinth seal.
Mount the screws (70) loose.
69 59
e
62
Illustration 16: Clearance between dust flinger and rigid labyrinth seal
EM..Q - Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (62) of the rigid labyrinth seal.

(Parameters are indicated in the Technical Documentation of the Installation).
Torque [Nm] 7 18
EM..B, - Push the dust flinger (69) into the groove (62) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
EM..E, - Tighten the screws (70) to the following torque rates:
EM..A
Torque [Nm] 7 18
Type 8.6.6 Rigid labyrinth seal with baffle (Type 22)

22
- Assemble the rigid labyrinth seal with baffle as described in Chapter 8.6.4.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound on the flange surfaces of the top half (66) and
- Tighten the top half of the baffle (66) on the top half (59) of the rigid labyrinth seal
the bottom half of the baffle (68) on the bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal.
Torque [Nm] 4 10

9 Starting Operation after Inspection
- Fit the thermo sensors for:

temperature measurement of the journal part in the connection holes (27)
temperature measurement of the thrust part in the connection holes (optional).
- Retighten all screw plugs in the tapped holes (27), (28), (32), (34) to the following torque rates:

with moulded on plastic
seal

with elastic seal
- Check if the top sight glass (9) is tight.

- Retighten the connection holes for oil inlet and oil outlet and the holes for the thrust part oil
supply system (optional). The torque depends on the threaded joints used.
- Carry out a visual check of the assembled bearing.
- Fill up the oil supply system with lubricant. Use the same type of lubricant as indicated on the
type plate.
- Start operating the oil supply system in order to fill up the bearing with lubricant.
- Check
the way the oil supply system works ( see also the Technical Documentation of the
Installation ).The lubricant quantity at the bearing oil inlet must correspond to the values
indicated in the EDPcalculations.
that the temperature monitoring equipment works.
Attention!
Not enough lubricant leads to temperature rises and thus to damage to the bearing.
Too much lubricant leads to leakages.
EMT.. - Start operating the cooling water supply system and check its functioning.
The bearing is ready for operation.
- Close the assembly opening of the machine shield (with the thin metal plate (5))
- Supervise the bearing during the trial run ( 5 10 operating hours ).
Pay special attention to:
the way the oil supply system works (necessary lubricant quantity, lubricant pressure before
entering the bearing)
bearing temperature
sliding noises of the shaft seals
tightness
occurrence of inadmissible vibrations.
Attention!
If the bearing temperature exceeds the calculated value by 15 K (see the EDPbearing
calculations) stop the installation immediately. Carry out an inspection of the bearing and find out
the causes.

10 Corrosion Protection for Longer Standstill Periods
If you want to protect the bearing mounted on an installation against corrosion proceed as follows:
- Dismantle the bearing (see Chapter 6).
- Clean the bearing (see Chapter 7).
- Paint or spray the top half of the shell (11), the bottom half of the shell (18) and the shaft with
TECTYL 511.
- Assemble the bearing (see Chapter 8).
- Close all connection holes with screw plugs.
- Seal the gaps between shaft seal and housing
shaft seal and shaft
by using a selfadhesive, permanent tape.
- Remove the top sight glass (9). Spray some anticorrosive such as TECTYL 511 or VALVOLINE
into the bearing.
- Put a bag of dessicant (silicate gel) inside. The dessicant absorbs the humidity and prevents the
formation of condensation water into the bearing.
- Close the bearing tight with the top sight glass (9).
In case the standstill period is longer than 1/2 year:

- Repeat the preservation procedures.
- Put a new bag of dessicant into the bearing.
In case the standstill period lasts more years:

- Dismantle the shells.
- Preserve and store the bearing parts.
11 Transport Protection
In case of a machine equipped with slide bearings type EM:

- Carry out the corrosion protection as described in Chapter 10 and apply enough lubricant on
the working surfaces of the bearing.
- Secure the shaft against thrust and radial movements during transport.

12 Glossary
Baffle With bearing types 10 and 20 the baffles are assembled externally in front of the shaft
seals. The baffle, made of reinforced polyamide, protects the bearing from dust and
water.
Rigid labyrinth seal The rigid labyrinth seal (type 20) is used with slide bearings type E with high oil
throughput.It corresponds to the protective system IP44 and is made of an aluminium
alloy.
The rigid labyrinth seal is built of two halves, flanged at the housing.The labyrinths that
wipe out the lubricant are arranged into two groups.The first two labyrinths , installed
inside keep back most of the lubricant. Five further labyrinths protect the bearing from
outside.They prevent the lubricant overflow and the ingress of impurities.The overflow
lubricant is collected into a chamber between the both groups of labyrinths.Through
the return bores the lubricant flows back into the bearing.
Spherical seating The spherical seating is a special feature enabling the alignment of the shell in the
housing.The shell is seated on two spherical seatings. The advantages of the spherical
seating are:
easy at assembly
good heat transfer from the shell to the housing
suitable for such applications with high thrust or journal loads.
Dust flinger In the case of bearing types 10 and 20 a light alloy ring is clamped on the shaft in front
of the shaft.This ring fits into a groove in the seal carrier or the rigid labyrinth seal, thus
building a labyrinth. The labyrinth protects the shaft exit against low pressure that could
otherwise " absorb " the lubricant. Low pressure occurs for instance in the case of
rotating discs, such as couplings or cooling discs.
Floating labyrinth The floating labyrinth seal (type 10) in the seal carrier is used as a shaft seal in the
seal case of bearings type E operating under normal conditions. It prevents the lubricant
and lubricant mist coming out and the ingress of impurities. The floating seal has a high
capacity of resistance to wear. It is made of a highperformance, high temperature
stability and electrically insulated plastic material.The floating seal consists of two
halves held together by a garter spring. Both ends of the spring are hooked together. In
the case of slide bearings type EM the floating seal is mounted into a twopiece seal
carrier. The groove allows for radial movement of up to 1 mm. The seal is thus
insensitive to shaft radial displacement or deflection. The sealing effect is produced by
the baffles wiping off the lubricant from the shaft. The lubricant flows back into the
bearing via oil return opening.
Machine seal In the case of the flange mounted bearings, the machine seal reduces the influence of
positive and negative pressure in the machine thus preventing leakages at the inner
seal area. The space between the machine seal and the bearing housing must always
be vented to atmospheric pressure. The size of the gap between shaft and machine
seal influences the sealing effect.

Document No: Insts 01

Section 7 Instrumentation Revision: 0
Revisi on Date: 26 Apr 2002
7 Instrumentation
The instrument equipment manufacturers information is included next as an insert to the

manual.
K:\Module Update\S7 Insts 01-0.doc

Explosionproof/Flameproof RTD Sensors
L REF. INSERTION DEPTH D

27 mm MINIMUM
Ex d IIC
AEx d IIC
CONDUIT THREAD
Overview Explosionproof and flameproof ratings:

National and Canadian Electrical Code:
Explosionproof and flameproof rating for hazardous areas
Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B, C, and D,
where accurate temperature sensing is critical.
Class II, Groups E, F, and G,
Tip sensitive, all stainless or MgO filled probes available T6 (Ta = 40C),
T2 (Ta = 260C). Ta limited to 160C for CSA Class II locations.
Hazardous area rated
National Electrical Code (Article 505):
Class I, Zones 1 and 2, AEx d IIC,
T6 (Ta =40C), T2 (Ta = 260C).
Specifications Canadian Electrical Code (IEC 60079):
Temperature range: -50 to 260C (-58 to 500F). Zones 1 and 2, Ex d IIC,
T6 (Ta = 40C), T2 (Ta = 260C).
Material:
Probe: Stainless steel (tip sensitive models have copper alloy tip).
Holder: Stainless steel.
Connection head:
Copper free aluminum alloy (CH104) Hazardous area requirements
316L stainless steel (CH106).
Refer to Minco's Application Aid #19 entitled Specifying
Pressure rating: See table on next page. Temperature Sensors for Hazardous Areas for more
information on how to classify a hazardous area, methods
Insulation resistance: 10 megohms min. at 100 VDC,
of protection, and the various standards and agencies
leads to case.
(including FM, CSA, CENELEC and ATEX). Application Aid #19
Connection: Terminal block for wires to 14 AWG. is available at www.minco.com/sensoraid/.
Time constant: Typical value in moving water.

Tip sensitive:
Single element 1.5 seconds.
Dual element 5 seconds.
Specify and order products at:
All stainless and MgO filled: 10 seconds.
www.minco.com/sensors_config
Specifications subject to change
Page 2-10 |
Assembly numbers
ASSEMBLIES
Probe diameters 0.215" (5.5 mm) 0.236" (6.0 mm) 0.250" (6.4 mm)
Number of elements Single Dual Single Dual Single Dual
Tip-sensitive AS760 AS761 AS700 AS701 AS720 AS721
All stainless AS762 AS763 AS702 AS703 AS722 AS723
MgO filled (platinum only) AS704 AS724 AS725
Connection head and fitting options

CH104: Aluminum IP65, Type 3 and 4.
CH106: 316L stainless steel IP66, Type 3, 4, and 4X.
Fitting Process thread Pressure Rating L REF. Head Code

1
Welded 2 - 14 NPT 200 psi (13.8 bar) 4.4" (112 mm) CH104 0*
1
Welded 2 - 14 NPT 200 psi (13.8 bar) 4.2" (106 mm) CH106 1*
Welded G 12 200 psi (13.8 bar) 4.2" (107 mm) CH104 2*
Welded G 12 200 psi (13.8 bar) 4.0" (101 mm) CH106 3*
1
Adjustable spring-loaded 2 - 14 NPT 50 psi (3.4 bar) 5.7" (144 mm) CH104 4
1
Adjustable spring-loaded 2 - 14 NPT 50 psi (3.4 bar) 5.4" (138 mm) CH106 5
Adjustable spring-loaded G 12 50 psi (3.4 bar) 5.7" (144 mm) CH104 6
Adjustable spring-loaded G 12 50 psi (3.4 bar) 5.4" (138 mm) CH106 7
1
Fixed spring-loaded 2 - 14 NPT None 4.4" (112 mm) CH104 8**
1
Fixed spring-loaded 2 - 14 NPT None 4.2" (106 mm) CH106 9**
* 0.250 diameter only for all stainless and MgO probes.
** 0.236 and 0.250 diameters only for fixed spring-loaded fittings.
Note: Connection head dimensions are found on pages 4-2 to 4-3.
Sensing elements Specification and order options

Element Code AS720 Assembly number from table
Single Dual 4 Connection head/fitting from table
Platinum (0.00392 TCR) 100 0.5% at 0C PA PAPA PD Sensing element from table
Platinum (0.00385 TCR) 100 0.1% at 0C PD PDPD 100 Insertion depth D (in mm):
(Meets EN60751, Class B) (431219 mm)
Platinum (0.00385 TCR) 100 0.06% at 0C PM PMPM X Leads per sensing element:
Y = 2 leads (n/a for copper)
(Meets EN60751, Class A)
Z = 3 leads
Platinum (0.00385 TCR) 100 0.5% at 0C PE PEPE X = 4 leads (n/a for dual models)
Platinum (0.00375 TCR) 1000 0.12% at 0C PW PWPW 3 Conduit thread:
3 = 12 - 14 NPT
Copper (0.00427 TCR) 10 0.2% at 25C CA
4 = 34 - 14 NPT
(dual) 10 0.5% at 25C CCCC
AS7204PD100X3 = Sample part number
Nickel (0.00672 TCR) 120 0.5% at 0C NA NANA
Nickel (0.00618 TCR) 100 0.22% at 0C NB NBNB
Specifications subject to change
| Page 2-11
Part Number 141078-01
Revision F, June 2005
3300 XL 8mm & 3300 5mm

Proximity Transducer
System
Manual
3300 XL 8mm Proximity Transducer System Manual
Copyright 1999 Bently Nevada, LLC

All Rights Reserved.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Bently Nevada, LLC in the United States
and Other Countries:
ACM, Actionable Information, Actionable Information

to the Right People at the Right Time, ADRE, , Asset
Condition Management, Asset Condition Monitoring,
Bently ALIGN, Bently BALANCE, Bently
DOCUVIEW, Bently LUBE, Bently Nevada,
Bently PERFORMANCE, Bently RELIABILITY,
CableLoc, ClickLoc, Data Manager, Decision
SupportSM, DemoNet, Dynamic Data Manager, Engineer
Assist, FieldMonitor, flexiTIM, FluidLoc, Helping
You Protect and Manage All Your Machinery,
HydroScan, HydroView, Keyphasor, Machine
Condition Manager 2000, MachineLibrary, Machine
Manager, MicroPROX, Move Data, Not People,
Move Information, Not Data, NSv, Prime Spike,
PROXPAC, Proximitor, REBAM, RuleDesk,
SE, Seismoprobe, Smart Monitor, Snapshot,
System 1, System Extender, TDXnet,
TDIXconnX, The Plant Asset Management CompanySM,
TipLoc, TorXimitor, Transient Data Manager,
Trendmaster, TrimLoc, Velomitor
The Bently Nevada orbit logo and other logos

associated with the trademarks in bold above, are also
all trademarks or registered trademarks of Bently
Nevada in the United States and other countries.
The following ways of contacting Bently Nevada, LLC are provided for those times when you
cannot contact your local Bently Nevada representative:
Mailing Address 1631 Bently Parkway South

Minden, NV 89423
USA
Telephone 1 775 782 3611
1 800 227 5514
Fax 1 775 215 2876
Internet www.bently.com
ii
Related Documents
The following documents contain additional information that you may find
helpful when you install the transducer. Most of these documents are available
on ww.bently.com.
Installing the Transducer

Best Practices Document - Proximity Probes and Related Accessories: The
Installation and Application of Eddy Current Proximity Transducers.
Guidelines for Grounding (Earthing) Bently Nevada Rotating Machinery
Information Systems.
Installation of Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas.
Considerations when using Eddy Current Proximity Probes for Overspeed
Protection Applications.
Glitch: Definition of and Methods for Correction, Including Shaft Burnishing
to Remove Electrical Runout.
Transducer Installation Accessories

31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Manual (124200-01).
31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Data Sheet (141610-01)
3300 XL Proximitor Housing Data Sheet (141195-01)
3300 XL Monitor and Transducer Verification Kits Data Sheet (141196-01)
Electrical and Mechanical Runout

API 670, Fourth Edition, Sections 6.1.1 (Location and Orientation Radial Shaft
Vibration Probes) and 6.1.2 (Location and Orientation Axial Position Probes.
Available from the American Petroleum Institute, Publications and Distribution,
1220 L Street NW, Washington DC, 20005, USA.
Reference
Bently Nevada Glossary (133055-01).
Disposal Statement
Customers and third parties who are in control of the product at the end of its life
or at the end of its use are solely responsible for the proper disposal of the
product. No person, firm, corporation, association or agency that is in control of
product shall dispose of it in a manner that is in violation of United States state
laws, United States federal laws, or any applicable international law. Bently
Nevada, LLC is not responsible for the disposal of the product at the end of its
life or at the end of its use.
iii
Symbols
Procedures in this manual use the following symbols:
Connect Disconnect Observe Record

Value
iv
European CE mark for the Bently Nevada 3300 XL
Transducer System
In this Document
is a list of the 3300 XL Transducer Assemblies that have the CE mark, applicable
standards used for certification, and installation instructions required for
compliance.
Proximity Transducer Systems

are electronic devices typically used in industrial applications. The 3300 XL
Transducer System has been certified using the same Technical Construction File
(TCF) and Declaration of Conformity as the 3300 8mm Transducer System
because they are similar in design and application. The 3300 XL Proximity
Transducer System consists of a Proximitor Sensor, Proximity Probe, and
Extension Cable.
TCF through TUV Rheinland of North America

A Technical Construction File has been prepared through TUV Rheinland of
North America (TUV Rheinland File Number: P9472350.07). The Certificate of
Compliance is for Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive). The applicable
Generic Norms are: EN50081-2 and EN50082-2.
Installation Instructions
These instructions are an addition to the Installation Instructions in Section 2.
Proximity Probes
All probe cases must have a solid connection to earth ground.
Compliant Systems and Component Part Numbers

# Model Model Numbers
1 3300 XL 8mm 330180, 330101*, 330102*, 330103*, 330104*, 330105*, 330106*,
and 3300 5mm 330140, 330141, 330145, 330171, 330172, 330173, 330174, 330191,
330192, 330193, 330194, 330195, 330196, 330197, 330198, 330255,
330130, and 330190**
Includes all options and all approval versions of the base model numbers listed
*--Pre XL probes and cables may be used as part of a CE XL system.
**--any proximity probe, or extension cable that works correctly with the listed
module.
v
Testing and Test Levels

Title EN EN ENV ENV EN ENV ENV EN
55011 61000-4-2 50140 50204 61000-4-4 50142 50141 61000-4-8
(EN Rad. RFI (EN (61000-4- Mag.
61000-4-3) 61000-4-5) 6) Fields
Emission ESD EFT
Rad. RFI Surge Cond. RFI
Test Emission 4kV; 8kV
Levels Class A
10V/m 10V/m 2kV 0.5kV 10V 30A/m,
50Hz
Criteria N/A A A A B A B A
These notes listed below apply only to the table Testing and Test Levels
discharge method: Contact; Air
80-1000 MHz sweep with 80% 1 kHz sine wave amplitude modulation
900 MHz dwell with 100% 200 Hz square wave modulation
lines tested: I/O
150 kHz-80 MHz sweep with 80% 1 kHz sine wave amplitude modulation
For the purposes of the 3300 XL 8mm and 3300 5mm System CE
certification, the following criteria are defined as follows:
- Criteria A: Transducer system will output less than one third of a
3mil p-p meter scale (less than 1 mil p-p) and will return to steady
state after test completion.
- Criteria B: Transducer system may react in any manner during test,
but must self recover after test completion.
- Criteria C: N/A
vi
Contents
Related Documents ...........................................................................................................................iii
European CE mark for the Bently Nevada 3300 XL Transducer System.......................................... v
Section 1 System Description ......................................................... 1
Transducer Systems ........................................................................................................................... 1
Proximitor Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 1
Proximity Probe and Extension Cable ............................................................................................... 2
Connectors ......................................................................................................................................... 2
Extended Temperature Range Applications....................................................................................... 2
Receiving, Inspecting, and Handling the System............................................................................... 3
Customer Service ............................................................................................................................... 4
Section 2 Installation........................................................................ 5
Installing the Probe ............................................................................................................................ 5
Mounting the Proximitor Sensor..................................................................................................... 7
Interchangeable Mounting Feet.......................................................................................................... 8
Mounting the Proximitor Sensor with DIN Mount Part.................................................................. 9
Removing the Proximitor Sensor from the DIN Rail.................................................................... 10
Termination of Field Wiring in the Terminal Block ........................................................................ 10
Routing the Extension Cable and Field Wiring ............................................................................... 11
Section 3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting .............................. 13
Scale Factor Verification ................................................................................................................. 14
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................... 17
Fault Type 1: VXDCR > -17.5 Vdc or VXDCR < -26 Vdc.................................................................... 19
Fault Type 2: VSIG = O Vdc ............................................................................................................ 20
Fault Type 3: -1 Vdc < VSIG < 0 Vdc .............................................................................................. 20
Fault Type 4: VXDCR <VSIG < VXDCR + 2.5 Vdc............................................................................... 23
Fault Type 5: VSIG = VXDCR ............................................................................................................. 23
Section 4 3300 XL Proximitor Housing ...................................... 25
Mounting Options ............................................................................................................................ 25
Environmental Certifications ........................................................................................................... 25
Removable gland plates ................................................................................................................... 25
Dimensional Drawings..................................................................................................................... 26
Panel Mount Orientation .............................................................................................................. 27
DIN Mount Orientation................................................................................................................ 28
Section 5 System Specifications .................................................. 29
Electrical .......................................................................................................................................... 29
Electrical Classification: .............................................................................................................. 32
Mechanical ....................................................................................................................................... 34
Environmental Limits ...................................................................................................................... 36
Section 6 System Ordering Information....................................... 39
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes: ................................................................................................... 39
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Metric:....................................................................................... 40
3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probes............................................................................................ 40
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case: ............................................................................ 41
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes: ....................................... 42
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes, Metric:........................... 42
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Reverse Mount Probes ................................ 43
vii
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes, Smooth Case: ................ 43
3300 5 mm Proximity Probes:.......................................................................................................... 44
3300 5 mm Proximity Probes, Metric: ............................................................................................. 45
3300 XL Proximitor Sensor .......................................................................................................... 46
3300 XL Extension Cable ................................................................................................................ 46
3300 XL Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Extension Cable .................................................... 47
Accessories....................................................................................................................................... 47
Section 7 System Graphs and Dimensional Drawings ............... 51
Section 8 Micrometer Specifications and Ordering Information 71
Mechanical ....................................................................................................................................... 71
Ordering Information ....................................................................................................................... 72
3300 XL Precision Micrometer.................................................................................................... 72
3300 XL Shaft Micrometer .......................................................................................................... 72
Accessories................................................................................................................................... 72
Dimensional Drawings..................................................................................................................... 73
Section 9 Housing Specifications and Ordering Information..... 75
Mechanical ....................................................................................................................................... 75
Ordering Information ....................................................................................................................... 75
3300 XL Proximitor Housing.................................................................................................... 75
Accessories................................................................................................................................... 77
viii
ix
Section 1 System Description

Transducer Systems
The 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer System consists of:
a 3300 XL 8 mm probe
The 3300 XL 8 mm system represents our most advanced performance in an
eddy current proximity transducer system. The standard 3300 XL 8 mm system
is also 100% compliant with the American Petroleum Institutes (API) 670
Standard (4th Edition) for such transducers. All 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity
Transducer Systems achieve this level of performance while allowing complete
interchangeability of probe, extension cable, and Proximitor Sensor without the
need for individual component matching or bench calibration.
Each component of the 3300 XL 8 mm Transducer System is backward
compatible and interchangeable3 with other non-XL 3300 series 5 and 8 mm
transducer system components4. This includes the 3300 5 mm probe, which is
used when an 8 mm probe is too large for the available mounting space4, 5, and 6.
The 3300 5mm Proximity Transducer System consists of:
a 3300 5 mm probe 4, 5, 6
Like the 3300 XL 8mm, the 3300 5mm system also provides an accurate, stable
signal output over a wide temperature range while allowing complete
interchangeability of probe, extension cable, and Proximitor Sensor without the
need for individual component matching or bench calibration.
Both systems provide an output voltage directly proportional to the distance

between the probe tip and the observed conductive surface. They are capable of
both static (position) and dynamic (vibration) measurements, and are primarily
used for vibration and position measurement applications on fluid-film bearing
machines, as well as Keyphasor measurement and speed measurement
applications2.
Proximitor Sensor
The 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor incorporates numerous improvements over
previous designs. Its physical packaging permits high-density DIN-rail
installation. It can also be mounted in a traditional panel mount configuration,
where it shares an identical footprint to older 4-hole mounted 3300
Proximitor Sensor. The mounting base for either option provides electrical
isolation, eliminating the need for separate isolator plates. The 3300 XL
Proximitor Sensor is highly immune to radio frequency interference, allowing
installation in fiberglass housings without adverse effects from nearby radio
1
frequency signals. Improved RFI/EMI immunity allows the 3300 XL

Proximitor Sensor to achieve European CE mark approvals without requiring
special shielded conduit or metallic housings, resulting in lower installation costs
and complexity.
The 3300 XLs SpringLoc terminal strips require no special installation tools and
facilitate faster, more robust field wiring connections by eliminating screw-type
clamping mechanisms that can loosen.
Proximity Probe and Extension Cable

The 3300 XL probe and XL extension cable also reflect improvements over
previous designs. A patented TipLoc molding method provides a more robust
bond between the probe tip and the probe body. The probes cable is more
securely attached as well, incorporating a patented CableLoc design that
provides 330 N (75 lbf) pull strength where the probe cable attaches to the probe
tip.
3300 XL 8 mm Probes and XL Extension Cables can also be ordered with an
optional FluidLoc cable option. This option prevents oil and other liquids from
leaking out of the machine through the cables interior.
Connectors
The 3300 XL 8mm and 3300 5mm probe, extension cable, and Proximitor
Sensor have corrosion-resistant, gold-plated ClickLoc connectors. These
connectors require only finger-tight torque (connectors will "click"), and the
specially engineered locking mechanism prevents the connectors from loosening.
They do not require any special tools for installation or removal.
3300 XL 8 mm Probes and Extension Cables can also be ordered with connector
protectors already installed. Connector protectors can also be supplied separately
for installation in the field (such as when the cable must be run through
restrictive conduit). Connector protectors are recommended for all installations
and provide increased environmental protection7.
Extended Temperature Range Applications

An Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Probe and Extension Cable are available
for applications where either the probe lead or extension cable may exceed the
177 C (350 F) temperature specification. The Extended Temperature Range
Probe has an extended temperature rating for up to 260 C (500 F) for the probe
lead and connector. The probe tip must remain below 177 C (350 F). The
Extended Temperature Range Extension Cable is also rated for up to 260 C (500
F). Both the ETR probe and cable are compatible with standard temperature
probes and cables. For example, you can utilize an ETR probe with the 330130
extension cable. The ETR system uses the standard 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor.
When using any ETR component as part of your system, the accuracy is limited
to the accuracy of the ETR system.
2
Notes:
1. Proximitor Sensors are supplied by default from the factory calibrated to AISI 4140
steel. Calibration to other target materials is available upon request.
2. Consult Bently Nevada Applications Note Considerations when using Eddy Current
Proximity Probes for Overspeed Protection Applications when considering this
transducer system for tachometer or overspeed measurements.
3. 3300 XL 8 mm components are both electrically and physically interchangeable with
non-XL 3300 5 and 8 mm components. Although the packaging of the 3300 XL
Proximitor Sensor differs from its predecessor, it is designed to fit in the same 4-
hole mounting pattern when used with the 4-hole mounting base, and will fit within
the same mounting space specifications (when minimum permissible cable bend
radius is observed).
4. When XL and non-XL 3300-series 5 and 8 mm system components are mixed,
system performance is limited to the specifications for the non-XL 3300 5 and 8 mm
Transducer System.
5. A 5 mm probe uses smaller physical packaging while providing the same linear range
as a 3300 XL 8 mm probe (ref 141194-01); however, it does not permit reduced side
view clearances or tip-to-tip spacing requirements compared to an XL 8 mm probe.
It is used when physical (not electrical) constraints preclude the use of an 8 mm
probe, such as mounting between thrust bearing pads or other constrained spaces.
When narrow side view probes are required, use the 3300 XL NSv probe and
extension cable with the 3300 XL NSv Proximitor Sensor (refer to Specifications
and Ordering Information p/n 147385-01).
6. XL 8 mm probes provide a thicker encapsulation of the probe coil in the molded PPS
plastic probe tip. This results in a more rugged probe than the 3300 5 mm probe.
The larger diameter of the probe body also provides a stronger, more robust case.
Bently Nevada, LLC recommends the use of XL 8 mm probes when possible to
provide optimal robustness against physical abuse.
7. Silicone tape is also provided with each 3300 XL extension cable and can be used
instead of connector protectors. Silicone tape is not recommended in applications
where the probe-to-extension cable connection will be exposed to turbine oil.
Receiving, Inspecting, and Handling the System

The probe, extension cable and Proximitor Sensor are shipped as separate units
and must be interconnected at the installation site by the user. Carefully remove
all equipment from the shipping containers and inspect the equipment for
shipping damage. If shipping damage is apparent, file a claim with the carrier
and submit a copy to the nearest Bently Nevada, LLC office. Include part
numbers and serial numbers on all correspondence. If no damage is apparent and
the equipment is not going to be used immediately, return the equipment to the
shipping containers and reseal until ready for use.
Store the equipment in an environment free from potentially damaging
conditions such as high temperature or a corrosive atmosphere. See
Environmental Limits on page 36 for environmental specifications.
3
Customer Service
Bently Nevada, LLC maintains numerous Sales and Service offices worldwide.
To locate the office nearest you, visit our website http://www.bently.com. Here,
you can also find specifications on all standard product offerings.
Support for products and services should be directed to one of these departments:
For product quotations, product applications, product ordering, scheduling on-

site Services, and questions regarding existing orders, please contact your nearby
Bently Nevada, LLC Sales and Service Office.
For general product pricing, delivery, or other ordering information, contact your
local BN office or contact Customer Service Department, Minden, Nevada, USA
Phone: 1-775-215-1011 Fax: 1-775-215-2873.
For technical questions or problems regarding installed BN products, contact our
Technical Support Staff at:
techsupport@bently.com
or at the following locations:
Technical Support (North America)

Phone: 1-775-782-1818 Fax: 1-775-215-2890
Technical Support (UK)

Phone: (44) 1925 818504 Fax: (44) 1925 817819
4
Section 2 Installation
This section contains a checklist of items that you must consider when you install
a 3300 XL Transducer system.
Installing the Probe

The following figures show the probe sizes and the minimum values for probe
separation, side clearance and target configuration. Refer to Probe Case Torque
on page 35, for proper torque and the dimensions of the thread.
Description XL 8 mm probe 5 mm probe

Probe tip 8 mm 5 mm
Thread types M10x1, 3/8-24, M8x1 or 1/4-28

or unthreaded
Wrench Flats 8 mm or 5/16 in 7 mm or 7/32 in
Lock nut 17 mm or 9/16 in 13 mm or 7/16

Hex Hex
5
76.2 mm 50.8 mm
(3.00 in) (2.00 in)
Min * Min **
15.2 mm
(0.60 in)
5 mm and XL 8 mm Probe Min
Target Sizes
16.0 mm
(0.63 in)
6.4 mm Min
(0.25 in)
Min
16.0 mm
(0.63 in)
Min
17.8 mm
(0.70 in)
Min
8.9 mm 8.9 mm 40.6 mm

(0.35 in) (0.35 in) (1.60 in)
Min Min Min
5 mm and XL 8 mm Probe 5 mm and XL 8 mm Probe-to-Probe

Mounting Dimensions Separation Due to Cross Talk
Notes:
* At or below 76.2 mm (3.00 in), an increase in scale factor as the
target size is reduced will occur per performance specification 159484.
See application alert below.
** At or below 50.8 mm (2.00 in), a small vibration signal will occur per
performance specifications 159484, due to cross talk.
Application Alert: Mounting dimensions and target size affect the

scale factor of proximity transducer systems. The minimum
recommended dimensions above were chosen to minimize error yet
retain flexibility for different mounting situations.
Adjust the distance between the probe tip and the shaft using one of the methods
shown in the following figure. The electrical method for setting the probe gap is
preferred.
6
Voltage at the center of

Voltmeter Power Source
the linear range (typically
-9 V -24 V 1
-9 Vdc)
OUT
COM
Vt
Spacer
10 kohm, 1%
MADE IN U.S.A.
1270 um
(50 mil)
Mechanical Method Electrical Method
Mounting the Proximitor Sensor

Mount the Proximitor Sensor in a location that is compatible with its
environmental specifications (see Environmental Limits on page 36). Consider
the local electrical codes and the presence of hazardous or explosive gas at the
installation site. (Refer to document Installation of Electrical Equipment in
Hazardous Areas.)
MADE IN U.S.A.
7
MADE IN U.S.A.
Interchangeable Mounting Feet

The mounting feet for the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor are interchangeable. If a
Proximitor Sensor is purchased with one mounting option, either the DIN
mount option or the panel mount option, the mounting hardware can be changed
simply by removing the mounting foot that is currently on the Proximitor
Sensor and replacing it with the other type mounting foot.
(1) DIN Mount Part (part number 138493-01)

(2) 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor
(3) Panel Mount Part (part number 138492-01)
8
Mounting the Proximitor Sensor with DIN Mount

Part
To mount the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor with a DIN Mount Part on a DIN
rail:
1. Install the Proximitor Sensor into the DIN Mount Part (if not already installed).
2. Examine the underneath side of the DIN Mount Part. There is a spring-loaded clip
on one side and two protrusions that will catch the edge of the DIN rail on the other
side. The side with the two protrusions will need to be installed so that the edge of
the DIN rail fits into the gap.
(1) Spring-loaded clip

(2) DIN rail
(3) Edge of DIN rail must fit into this gap
3. Push down on the Proximitor Sensor until the unit snaps into place. The unit is
now installed.
9
Removing the Proximitor Sensor from the DIN Rail

Remove the Proximitor Sensor from the DIN rail by using a regular
screwdriver to unclip the unit from the rail.
Install a regular screwdriver into the rear of the spring-loaded clip and push the
top of the screwdriver towards the Proximitor Sensor to pry the spring-loaded
clip back so that the Proximitor Sensor can be removed from the DIN rail.
Termination of Field Wiring in the Terminal Block

1. Strip the insulation from the field wiring to be installed into the terminal
block. The recommended strip length is 10 mm (0.4 in.).
10
2. Conductor strands must be twisted together before installing the field wire
into the terminal block. It is highly recommended to tin the conductor
strands as well.
The terminal block can accommodate field wiring conductor sizes of 0.2
1.5 mm2 (16 24 AWG).
3. Using a small regular screwdriver push down on the orange lever
corresponding to the position in the terminal block where the field wire will
be installed and insert the field wire.
(1) Small screwdriver

(2) Field wiring
Removal of the field wire is accomplished by pushing down on the orange lever
and pulling on the field wire to remove it from the terminal block. If a stranded
wire is used for the field wiring and a strand is broken off inside the terminal
block, turn the Proximitor Sensor upside down while pushing down the orange
lever to remove the strand from the terminal block.
Routing the Extension Cable and Field Wiring

Route the extension cable using the following guidelines.
Check that the sum of the extension cable and probe lead lengths equal the
Proximitor Sensor system length. (For example, a 9 metre Proximitor Sensor
will work with an 8 metre extension cable and a 1 metre probe.)
11
Check component compatibility by verifying system color identification

on all system components. For the 3300 XL 8 mm system and 3300 5
mm probe, components will be marked with a blue color code.
Secure the extension cable to supporting surfaces by using mounting
clips or similar devices.
Identify the probe and both ends of the extension cable by inserting
labels under the clear Teflon sleeves and applying heat to shrink the
tubing.
Join the coax connectors between the Proximitor Sensor, extension
cable and probe lead. Tighten connectors to finger tight.
Use either a connector protector or self-fusing silicone tape to insulate
the connection between the probe lead and the extension cable. Do not
use self-fusing silicone tape to insulate a connection where the
silicone tape may be exposed to turbine oil.
If the probe is in a part of the machine that is under pressure or vacuum,
seal the hole where the extension cable leaves the machine by using
appropriate cable seals and terminal boxes.
Use the following wiring diagrams to connect the field wiring between the
Proximitor Sensor and the monitoring instruments. (Refer to documents
Guidelines for Grounding (Earthing) Bently Nevada Rotating Machinery
Information System and Installation of Electrical Equipment in Hazardous
Areas.)
No Barriers or 3300/3500
Transducer Power Internal Barriers
Vt
Common (ground) COM
OUT
Input Signal Monitor Cable Proximitor Sensor Connector Probe
Terminal Shield Protector
Strip
Transducer Power External Barriers

Vt
Common (ground) COM
OUT
Input Signal Monitor Cable Cable Proximitor Sensor Connector Probe
Terminal Shield Shield Protector
Strip External
Barrier
12
Section 3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Section 3 Maintenance and

Troubleshooting
This section shows how to verify that the system is operating properly and
identify parts of the system that are not working properly.
The 3300 XL Transducer System (probe, cable and Proximitor Sensor), when
correctly installed and verified, does not need calibration or verification at
regular intervals. If the monitor OK light (green) indicates a NOT OK condition
(light is not illuminated), either a fault has occurred in the field wiring/transducer
system/power source, the probe is too close to target, the probe is detecting other
material than the target, the target material is not AISI 4140, the probe is too far
from the target.
Bently Nevada, LLC recommends the following practices to assure continued
satisfactory operation. Verify operation using the scale factor verification
method on the following page, if:
Any of the system components (probe, cable or Proximitor Sensor) are
replaced.
Any of the components are removed and reinstalled or moved and
remounted.
Any of the components appear to be damaged.
The machine being monitored is over-hauled.
Please note that a step change in the output of the transducer system, or other
output that is not consistent with the associated machinerys trended data is, in
most instances, not a transducer problem but a machinery problem. Verification
of the transducer system under these conditions can be done at the users
discretion.
Under harsh operating conditions some users prefer to verify all transducers at a
regular interval. As noted above, this is not required with the 3300 XL
Transducer System. Users who wish to verify the system on a regular interval
should use an interval consistent with their own practices and procedures, which
may or may not be based upon ISO 10012-1 Quality Assurance Requirements
for Measuring Equipment (section 4.11).
For target materials other than AISI 4140 steel and for other special applications,
contact your local Bently Nevada office.
Note:
Hazardous Locations: Area must be free of hazardous material
before any maintenance or troubleshooting can be performed.
The scale factor verification requires the following instruments and equipment:
Digital multimeter
Spindle micrometer
Fixed resistor, 10 k
Power supply (-24 Vdc 1)
The scale factor verification uses the test setup as shown in the following figure:
13
Multimeter Power Supply

Vdc
-24 Vdc
Vin Com
10 kohm
OUT + -
COM
Vt
Proximitor Sensor Probe, Target, and Spindle

Micrometer
Scale Factor Verification

1. Compensate for mechanical backlash and adjust the spindle micrometer for
electrical zero.
2. Adjust the gap to electrical zero by moving the probe.
14
3. Compensate for mechanical backlash in the micrometer and adjust to the

start of the linear range.
4. Record voltages in the following table and calculate Incremental Scale

Factors (ISFs) and Average Scale Factor (ASF) using the equations.
15
N Adjust Micrometer to Record Voltages Calculate Scale Factor
mmn miln Vdcn ISFn Vdiffn

(Incremental (Difference
Scale Factor) Voltage)
1 0.25 10 >> >>
2 0.50 20 >> >> >>
3 0.75 30 >> >> >>
4 1.00 40 >> >> >>
5 1.25 50 >> >> >>
6 1.50 60 >> >> >>
7 1.75 70 >> >> >>
8 2.00 80 >> >> >>
9 2.25 90 >> >> >>
>> = Enter values into these cells ASF
(Average Scale
Factor)
>>
Vdc n - 1 Vdc n
ISFn (V/mm) =
0.25
Vdc 0.25 mm Vdc 2.25 mm
ASF(V/mm) =
2
Vdc n - 1 Vdc n Vdc 10 mil Vdc 90 mil
ISFn (mV / mil) = ASF(mV / mil) =
0.01 0.08
16
Vdiffn = Vdc n + (mmn 7.87) Vdiffn = Vdc n + (miln 0.2)
5. Use the following formula to determine maximum Deviation from Straight

Line (DSL):
Vdif (max) Vdif (min)
DSL(mm) = = ______ mm
15.74
Vdif (max) Vdif (min)
DSL(mil) = = ______ mil
0.4
If the ISF or DSL of the system is out of tolerance, contact Bently Nevada,
LLC for further information on possible calibration problems.
The preceding pages indicate scale factor verification using a TK-3. This is
suitable for rough verification. For API 670 system verification a more precise
micrometer and target must be used. There are two different 3300 XL
Micrometer Kits that can be used to verify the calibration of Bently Nevada
transducer systems or to check the scale factor of specific shafts. Both
micrometer kits will work with Bently Nevada eddy current transducers
ranging in size from the 3300 XL NSv Transducer System up to the 3300 XL
11 mm Transducer Systems. Both micrometers also have options for either a
metric or English micrometer.
The 3300 XL Precision Micrometer (part number 330185) is a highly accurate
verification device. It should be used when performing acceptance testing on our
transducer systems. All of our transducer systems have a specified linear range
and average scale factor (ASF). The transducer systems also have a maximum
deviation from straight line (DSL) and ISF tolerances for ambient and extended
temperatures. The 3300 XL Precision Micrometer comes with a high precision
4140 steel target and is used to make precise measurements and verify whether
the transducer system is working properly and within published specifications.
The 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer (part number 330186) is used to check the
scale factor of the transducer system directly on your shaft. You can compare
the scale factor of your transducer system with that of a Bently Nevada
supplied 4140 steel target to check whether errors in the measurement are due to
runout, target material or a problem in the transducer system.
Troubleshooting
This section shows how to interpret a fault indication and isolate faults in an
installed transducer system. Before beginning this procedure, be sure the system
has been installed correctly and all connectors have been secured properly in the
correct locations.
When a malfunction occurs, locate the appropriate fault, check the probable
causes for the fault indication and follow the procedure to isolate and correct the
fault. Use a digital voltmeter to measure voltage. If you find faulty transducers,
contact your local Bently Nevada, LLC office for assistance.
The troubleshooting procedures use measured voltages as shown in the following
figure and tables:
17

Vps Vxdcr
MADE IN U.S.A.
Vsig
Table 3-1. Symbols for Measured Voltages
Symbol Meaning Voltage measured

between...
VSIG Signal voltage from the transducer OUT and COM
VPS Power supply voltage Power Source and Common
VXDCR Supply voltage at transducer -VT and COM
Note: VSIG, VPS, and VXDCR are all negative voltage values.
Table 3-2 Definitions
Symbol Definition Example
A>B "A" value is more positive than "B" -21 > -23
A<B "A" value is more negative than "B" -12 < -5
A=B "A" same value (or very close) to -24.1 = -24.0
"B"
18
Fault Type 1: VXDCR > -17.5 Vdc or VXDCR < -26 Vdc
Possible causes:
Faulty power source
Faulty field wiring
Faulty Proximitor Sensor
MADE IN U .S.A.
Vps
Measure VPS: Is VPS > -23 Vdc or VPS < -26 Vdc?
Yes: Faulty power supply.
No: Go to next step.
MADE IN U.S.A.
Vxdcr
Measure VXDCR: Is VXDCR > -23 Vdc or VXDCR < -26 Vdc?
Yes: Faulty Field wiring.
No: Faulty Proximitor Sensor.
19
Fault Type 2: VSIG = O Vdc

Possible causes:
Incorrect power source voltage
Short circuit in field wiring
Short circuit at Proximitor Sensor terminal connection
Does fault condition type 1 exist?
Yes: Use the procedure for fault type 1
No: Go to the next step
MADE IN U.S.A.
Vsig
Measure VSIG: Is VSIG = 0 Vdc?

No: Incorrect power source voltage or short in field wiring or short at
Proximitor Sensor terminal connection.
Yes: Faulty Proximitor Sensor.
Fault Type 3: -1 Vdc < VSIG < 0 Vdc

Possible causes:
Probe is incorrectly gapped (too close to target)
Probe is detecting other material than target (counter bore or machine
case)
Short or open circuit in a connector (dirty or wet) or loose connectors
Short or open circuit in the probe
Short or open circuit in extension cable
20

Is the probe gapped correctly? Are counter bore dimensions correct? (See
Installing the Probe on page 5.)
No: Regap the probe or check counter bore. Retest system.
Yes Go to the next step.
Step 2
Original probe/
extension cable
MADE IN U.S.A.
Vsig Known good probe

with correct length
cable (open gap with
probe held away from
conductive material)
Measure VSIG: Is VSIG < VXDCR + 1 Vdc?

No: Faulty Proximitor Sensor
Yes: Go to next step
Inspect for clean connection: Is the connection dirty, rusty, or a poor connection?
Yes: Clean the connector using isopropyl alcohol or electronic terminal cleaner,
reassemble and retest the system.
21
No: Go to the next step.
Measure resistance RTOTAL: Is RTOTAL within specifications?

5 m system: 8.75 0.70
9 m System: 9.87 0.90
Yes: Retest original system
Measure resistance, RPROBE: Is RPROBE within specifications (see Probe dc

resistance (nominal) (RPROBE) table on page 29)?
No: Faulty probe.
Yes: Go to next step.
22
Measure the resistance, RJACKET and RCORE: Is the resistance within specifications
(see Extension cable dc resistance [nominal] table on 29)?
No: Faulty extension cable
Yes: Retest the original system
Fault Type 4: VXDCR <VSIG < VXDCR + 2.5 Vdc

Possible causes:
Probe is incorrectly gapped (too far from target)
MADE I N U. S.A.
Measure VSIG: Is 1.2 < VSIG < -0.3 Vdc?

No: Faulty Proximitor sensor
Yes: Reconnect the system. Regap the probe. Retest the system.
Fault Type 5: VSIG = VXDCR

Possible causes:
Faulty field wiring (between Out and VT)
23
MADE IN U.S.A.
Vsig
Measure VSIG: Is VSIG = VXDCR?

Yes: Faulty Proximitor Sensor
No: Faulty field wiring (short between Out and VT)
Bently Nevada, LLC performs failure analysis on all returned transducers that
are in warranty. The information gained during analysis of failed products is
used to improve our current and future products. If you encounter a part that has
failed, return the part with a brief description of the product application and
symptoms observed to Bently Nevada headquarters in Minden, Nevada for
analysis:
Bently Nevada, LLC
Attn: Product Repair Department
1631 Bently Parkway South
Minden, Nevada 89423 USA
24
Section 4 3300 XL Proximitor Housing
Section 4 3300 XL Proximitor

Housing
The 3300 XL Proximitor Housing allows you to protect Proximitor Sensors,
interface modules and electrical terminal blocks in areas that would otherwise be
subjected to possible damage from moisture or other adverse environmental
conditions.
Mounting Options
The 3300 XL Proximitor Housing is designed to accommodate both DIN-rail
and panel mounted Proximitor Sensors. The housing holds up to eight DIN-rail
3300 XL Proximitor Sensors or six panel-mounted Proximitor Sensors.
Environmental Certifications
The 3300 XL Proximitor Housing has been tested and certified to meet
stringent IP66 and Type 4X environmental ratings for protecting enclosed
electronic equipment in harsh conditions. The 304L stainless steel construction
resists moisture, corrosion and impacts in virtually all installations. The Housing
may be hosed down for cleaning when necessary. The 3300 XL Proximitor
Housing can be used for North American Division 1 and 2 and European Zone 0,
1, and 2 hazardous area applications when used with approved fittings. However,
it is not an explosion-proof housing.
Removable gland plates

The 3300 XL Proximitor Housing is a housing with removable gland plates.
This feature makes it easy to remove the side plates or bottom gland plate for
drilling or punching conduit holes. In addition, the door can be easily unlatched
and removed due to its stainless steel slip hinge.
The gland plates have four thickness options to suit various conduit installation
requirements. If you want a threaded conduit hole, a gland plate thickness of 3.05
mm (0.120 in) or greater is required in order to properly drill and tap the holes.
The conduit fittings come with a lock nut and O-ring to firmly tighten and seal
the conduit fitting into both tapped and untapped holes. Fittings are available in
stainless steel, brass, aluminum or chrome-plated zinc.
25
Dimensional Drawings
Figure 4-1 3300 XL Housing Outline Drawing

(1) Stainless steel slip hinge. Allows cover to be removed from housing
(2) M10 x 1.5 6 g ground stud, stainless steel
(3) M6 slotted hex head captive fastener, stainless steel
(4) Approval/ identification label
(5) M6 x 16 mm hex head bolt, stainless steel
26
Section 4 3300 XL Proximitor Housing
(6) 8.33 [0.328] padlock hasp

(7) Removable gland plate, 3 places
Panel Mount Orientation

The following illustration shows the correct orientation for six panel mounted
3300 XL Proximitor Sensors in the 3300 XL Proximitor Housing:
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
(1) Mounting plate, 3300 XL Proximitor Housing
27
DIN Mount Orientation

The following illustration shows the correct installation for eight DIN-mounted
MADE IN U.S.A.
3300 XL Proximitor Sensors in a 3300 XL Proximitor Housing:
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
MADE IN U.S.A.
(1) Mounting plate, 3300 XL Proximitor Housing

(2) DIN rail end cap
28
Section 5 System Specifications

Unless otherwise noted, the following specifications are for a 3300 XL 8/5 mm
Proximitor Sensor, extension cable and XL 8 mm or 3300 5 mm probe between
+18 C and +27 C (+64 F to +80 F), with a -24 Vdc power supply, a 10 kilo
load, an AISI 4140 steel target, and a probe gapped at 1.27 mm (50 mils).
Performance characteristics are applicable for systems that consist solely of 3300
XL 8 mm or 3300 5 mm components. The system accuracy and
interchangeability specifications do not apply when using a transducer system
calibrated to any target other than a Bently Nevada, LLC AISI 4140 steel
target.
Electrical
Proximitor Sensor Input:
Accepts one non-contacting 3300-series 5 mm, or 3300
XL 8 mm Proximity Probe and XL Extension Cable.
Power:
Requires -17.5 Vdc to -26 Vdc without barriers at 12 mA
maximum consumption, -23 Vdc to -26 Vdc with barriers.
Operation at a more positive voltage than -23.5 Vdc can
result in reduced linear range.
Supply Sensitivity:
Less than 2 mV change in output voltage per volt
change in input voltage.
Output resistance:
50
Probe dc resistance (nominal) (RPROBE) table:
Probe Length Resistance from the Center Conductor
to the Outer Conductor (RPROBE) (ohms)
0.5 7.45 0.50
1.0 7.59 0.50
1.5 7.73 0.50
2.0 7.88 0.50
5.0 8.73 0.70
9.0 9.87 0.90
Extension cable dc resistance (nominal):

Length of Extension Resistance from Center Resistance from Outer
Cable Conductor to Center Conductor to Outer
Conductor (RCORE) Conductor (RJACKET)
(ohms) (ohms)
3.0 0.66 0.10 0.20 0.04
3.5 0.77 0.12 0.23 0.05
4.0 0.88 0.13 0.26 0.05
4.5 0.99 0.15 0.30 0.06
7.0 1.54 0.23 0.46 0.09
7.5 1.65 0.25 0.49 0.10
8.0 1.76 0.26 0.53 0.11
8.5 1.87 0.28 0.56 0.11
29
Extension cable capacitance:

69.9 pF/m (21.3 pF/ft) typical
Field wiring:
2
0.2 to 1.5 mm (16 to 24 AWG). Recommend using
three-conductor shielded triad cable. Maximum length of
305 metres (1,000 feet) between the 3300 XL
Proximitor Sensor and the monitor. See the frequency
response graphs Figure 7-11 Frequency Response,
typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System with varying lengths
of field wiring attached, no barriers, Figure 7-12 Phase
Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System with
varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers,
Figure 7-13 Frequency Response, typical 3300 XL 8
mm 9 m System with varying lengths of field wiring
attached, no barriers, and Figure 7-14 Phase
Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System with
varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers for
signal roll off at high frequencies when using longer field
wiring lengths.
Linear Range:
2 mm (80 mils). Linear range begins at approximately
0.25 mm (10 mils) from target and is from 0.25 to 2.3
mm (10 to 90 mils) (approximately 1 to 17 Vdc).
Recommended Gap Setting:
1.27 mm (50 mils)
Incremental Scale Factor (ISF)
XL 8 mm standard 5
metre system:
7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 5% including
interchangeability error when measured in increments of
0.25 mm (10 mils) over the 80 mil linear range from 0 to
+45 C (+32 F to +113 F).
XL 8 mm standard 9
metre system:
7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 6.5% including
+45 C (+32 F to +113 F).
3300 5 mm standard 5
and 9 metre systems:
7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 6.5% typical, including
0.25 mm (10 mils) over the linear range.
Extended
Temperature Range
(ETR) 5 and 9 metre
systems:
7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) 6.5% including
+45 C (+32 F to +113 F).
30
Deviation from best fit straight line (DSL)

XL 8 mm standard 5
metre system:
Less than 0.025mm (1 mil) with components at 0 C
to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F).
XL 8 mm standard 9
metre system:
Less than 0.038mm (1.5 mil) with components at 0 C
to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F).
3300 5 mm standard 5
Less than 0.038mm (1.5 mil) with components at
18 C to 27 C (64 F to 80 F)
Extended
Temperature Range 5
Less than 0.038mm (1.5 mil) with components at 0 C
to +45 C (+32 F to +113 F).
XL 8 mm and 3300 5 mm standard 5 metre system

performance over extended temperatures:
Over a probe temperature range of 35 C to +120 C
(-31 F to +248 F) with the Proximitor Sensor and
extension cable between 0 C to +45C (+32 F to +113
F), the ISF remains within 10% of 7.87 V/mm (200
mV/mil) and the DSL remains within 0.076 mm (3
mils).
Over a Proximitor Sensor and extension cable
temperature range of 35 C to +65 C (-31 F to +149
F) with the probe between 0 C to +45 C (+32 F to
+113 F), the ISF remains within 10% of 7.87 V/mm
(200 mV/mil) and the DSL remains within 0.076 mm
(3 mils).
XL 8 mm and 3300 5 mm standard 9 metre system
performance over extended temperatures:
Over a probe temperature range of 35 C to +120 C
(-31 F to +248 F) with the Proximitor Sensor and
extension cable between 0 C to +45C (+32 F to +113
F), the ISF remains within 18% of 7.87 V/mm (200
mV/mil) and the DSL remains within 0.152 mm (6
mils).
Over a Proximitor Sensor and extension cable
temperature range of 35 C to +65 C (-31 F to +149
F) with the probe between 0 C to +45 C (+32 F to
(6 mils).
Extended Temperature Range system performance over

extended temperatures:
Over a probe and extension cable temperature range of
35 C to + 260 C (-31 F to +500 F) with the
Proximitor Sensor between 0 C to +45C (+32 F to
31

(6 mils).
Frequency Response:
0 to 10 kHz: +0, -3 dB, with up to 305 metres (1000 feet)
of field wiring.
Minimum Target Size:
15.2 mm (0.6 in) diameter (flat target)
Shaft Diameter
Minimum:
50.8 mm (2 in)
Recommended
minimum:
76.2 mm (3 in)
Measurements on shaft diameters smaller than 50 mm
(2 in) usually require close spacing of radial vibration or
axial position transducers with the potential for their
electromagnetic emitted fields to interact with one
another (cross-talk), resulting in erroneous readings.
Care should be taken to maintain minimum separation of
transducer tips, generally at least 40 mm (1.6 in) for
axial position measurements or 38 mm (1.5 in) for radial
vibration measurements. Radial vibration or position
measurements on shaft diameters smaller than 76.2 mm
(3 in) will generally result in a change in scale factor.
Effects of 60 Hz Magnetic Fields Up to 300 Gauss:
Output voltage in mil pp/gauss:
Gap 5 metre XL 9 metre XL Probe Ext. Cable
Proximitor Proximitor
Sensor Sensor
10 mil 0.0119 0.0247 0.0004 0.0004
50 mil 0.0131 0.0323 0.0014 0.0014
90 mil 0.0133 0.0348 0.0045 0.0045
Electrical Classification:
Complies with the European CE mark.
Hazardous Area Approvals
Note: Multiple approvals for hazardous areas certified by Canadian

Standards Association (CSA/NRTL/C) in North America and by Baseefa
(2001) in Europe.
North America:
Ex ia IIC T4/T5; Class I Zone 0 or Class 1 Division 1;
Groups A, B, C, and D, when installed with intrinsically
safe zener barriers per drawing 141092 or when
installed with galvanic isolators.
Ex nA IIC T4/T5 Class I Zone 2 or Class I, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C, and D when installed without barriers
per drawing 140979.
32
T5 @ Ta = -35 C to +85 C.
T4 @ Ta= -51 C to +100 C.
Europe:
II 1 G EEx ia IIC T4/T5. EC certificate number
BAS99ATEX1101, when installed per drawing 141092.
II 3 G EEx nAII T4/T5. EC certificate number

BAS99ATEX3100U,when installed per drawing 140979.
T5 @ Ta= -35 C to +85 C
T4 @ Ta= -51 C to +100 C.
IEC Ex:
3300 XL Proximitor Sensor, ia
IECEx BAS04.0055X
Ex ia IIC T4 / T5 (-51C Ta +100C / -35C Ta +85C)
Terminal Block Connections
Ui= -28V Ci = 0
Ii= 140mA Li =10H
Pi= 0.84W
Coaxial Connection
Ui = -28V Ci= 5.7nF
Ii = 140mA Li = 0.85mH
Pi = 0.84W
Load Parameters
The capacitance and either the inductance or the inductance
to resistance (L/R) ratio of the load connected to the probe
coaxial terminal, must not exceed the following values:
Group Capacitance Inductance L/R

F mH Ratio
H/
IIC 0.077 0.99 35
IIB 0.644 7.41 142
IIA 2.144 15.6 295
The XL Proximitor Sensor must be installed so as to minimize the risk of impact

or friction with other metallic surfaces.
3300 XL Proximitor Sensor, nA
IECEx BAS04.0057X
AEx nA II T4 / T5 (-51C Ta +100C / -35C Ta +85C)
The terminals must be provided with a level of protection of at least
IP54.
Ui = -28V
3300 XL 8mm and 3300 5 mm Eddy Current Probes, ia
IECEx BAS04.0056
33
AEx ia IIC Temperature Classification per the table below.
Temperature Ambient Temperature

Classification (Probe Only)
T1 -51C to +232C
T2 -51C to +177C
T3 -51C to +120C
T4 -51C to +80C
T5 -51C to +40C
Ui = -28V Ci = 1.5nF
Ii = 140mA Li = 200H
Pi =0.84W
3300 XL 8mm and 3300 5mm Eddy Current Probes, nA
IECEx BAS04.0058X
Ex nA II Temperature Classification per the table above.
Must be supplied from a voltage limited source.
EEx nA for Zone 2, Group IIC, EC certificate number
BAS99ATEX3100U.
Mechanical
Probe Tip Material:
Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS).
Probe Case Material:
AISI 304 stainless steel (SST) for forward mount and
smooth case probes; AISI 303 SST for reverse mount
probes.
Probe Cable Specifications:
XL 8 mm standard
cable:
75 triaxial, fluoroethylene propylene (FEP) insulated
probe cable in the following total probe lengths: 0.5, 1,
1.5, 2, 5, or 9 metres.
3300 5 mm standard
cable:
75 coaxial, fluoroethylene propylene (FEP) insulated
probe cable in the following total probe lengths: 0.5, 1, 2,
5, or 9 metres.
Extended
Temperature Range
cable:
75 triaxial, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) insulated probe
cable in the following total probe lengths: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2,
5, or 9 metres.
Extension Cable Material:
75 triaxial, fluoroethylene propylene (FEP) insulated.
Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Extension Cable Material:
34
75 triaxial, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) insulated.

Proximitor Sensor Material:
A380 aluminum
System Length:
5 or 9 metres including extension cable
Standard Probe and Extension Cable Armor (optional):
Flexible AISI 302 or 304 SST with FEP outer jacket.
Extended Temperature Range Probe and Extension Cable
Armor (optional):
Flexible AISI 302 or 304 SST with PFA outer jacket.
XL 8 mm and ETR Tensile Strength (maximum rated):
330 N (75 lbf) probe case to probe lead. 270 N (60 lbf) at
probe lead to extension cable connectors.
3300 5 mm Tensile Strength (maximum rated):
220 N (50 lbf) probe case to probe lead. 220 N (50 lbf)
probe lead to extension cable connectors.
Connector material:
Gold-plated brass and gold-plated beryllium copper.
Probe case torque: Maximum Rated Recommended
Standard forward-mounted 33.9 Nm 11.2 Nm
XL 8 mm probes (300 inlbf) (100 inlbf)
(3/8-24, M10x1)
Standard forward-mounted 7.3 Nm 5.1 Nm
3300 probes (65 inlbf) (45 inlbf)
(1/4-28, M8x1)
Standard forward-mount XL 22.6 Nm 7.5 Nm
8 mm probes - first three (200 inlbf) (66 inlbf)
threads
(3/8-24, M10x1)
Reverse mount probes 22.6 Nm 7.5 Nm
(200 inlbf) (66 inlbf)
Connector-to-connector torque
Recommended torque:
see table:
Connector Type Tightening Instructions
Two 3300 XL gold "click" type connectors Finger tight
One non-XL stainless steel connector and Finger tight plus 1/8 turn using pliers
one
3300 XL connector
Maximum torque:
0.565 Nm (5 inlbf)
Minimum Bend Radius:
25.4 mm (1.0 in)
Total System Mass (typical):
35
0.7 kg (1.5 lbm)

Probe:
323 g (11.4 oz)
Extension Cable:
34 g/m (0.4 oz/ft)
Armored Extension
cable:
103 g/m (1.5 oz/ft)
Proximitor Sensor:
246 g (8.7 oz)
Environmental Limits
Probe Temperature Range
Operating and Storage Temperature:

Standard probe:
-51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 F)
Extended
Temperature Range
probe:
-51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 F) for the probe tip;
-51 C to +260 C (-60 F to +500 F) for the probe
cable and connector.
Note: Exposing the probe to temperatures below 34 C (-30 F) may
cause premature failure of the pressure seal.
Extension Cable Temperature Range
Operating and Storage Temperature:

Standard cable:
-51 C to +177 C (-60 F to +351 F)
Extended
Temperature Range
cable:
-51 C to +260 C (-60 F to +500 F)
Proximitor Sensor Temperature Range
Operating
Temperature:
-35 C to +85 C (-31 F to +185 F)
Storage Temperature:
-51 C to +100 C (-60 F to +212 F)
Relative Humidity:
Less than a 3% change in Average Scale Factor (ASF)
when tested in 93% humidity in accordance with IEC
standard 68-2-3 for up to 56 days.
Probe Pressure:
36
3300 XL 8 mm and 3300 5 mm probes are designed to

seal differential pressure between the probe tip and
case. The probe sealing material consists of a
Fluorocarbon O-ring. Probes are not pressure tested
prior to shipment. Contact our custom design
department if you require a test of the pressure seal for
your application.
Note: It is the responsibility of the customer or user to ensure that all
liquids and gases are contained and safely controlled should leakage
occur from a proximity probe. In addition, solutions with high or low pH
values may erode the tip assembly of the probe causing media leakage
into surrounding areas. Bently Nevada, LLC will not be held
responsible for any damages resulting from leaking 3300 XL 8 mm or
3300 5 mm proximity probes. In addition, 3300 XL 8 mm or 3300 5 mm
proximity probes will not be replaced under the service plan due to
probe leakage.
Patents:
5,016,343;
5,126,664;
5,351,388, and
5,685,884.
Components or procedures described in these patents apply to this product.
37
38
Section 6 System Ordering Information

3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes:
330101 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, without armor3
330102 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, with armor3
Option Descriptions
Note: Unthreaded length must be at least 0.8 inches less than the case
length.

Length configurations:
Maximum unthreaded length: 8.8 in
B: Overall Case Length Option
Threaded length configurations:
Maximum case length: 9.6 in
Minimum case length: 0.8 in
C: Total Length Option
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)1

01 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector,
standard cable
FluidLoc cable
E: Agency Approval Option
00 Not required
39
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Metric:

330103 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, without armor3
330104 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, with armor3
Option Descriptions
Note: Unthreaded length must be at least 20 mm less than the case
length.

Maximum unthreaded length: 230 mm
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
standard cable
FluidLoc cable
12 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc connector, FluidLoc cable
00 Not required
3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probes

330105-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX, 3/8-24 UNF threads3
330106-05-30-CXX-DXX-EXX, M10 x 1 threads3
Option Descriptions
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
40
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet)

50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
D: Connector Option
02 Miniature ClickLocTM coaxial connector
12 Miniature ClickLocTM coaxial connector, FluidLoc cable
Note: The FluidLoc cable options 10 and 12 are not necessary on
the vast majority of 330105 and 330106 installations due to the
presence of the probe sleeve. Consider carefully the application before
ordering the FluidLoc cable options

00 Not required
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case:

330140 3300 XL 8 mm Probe without armor2
330141 3300 XL 8 mm Probe with armor2
Option Descriptions
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
C: Connector and Cable-Type Option
standard cable
FluidLoc cable
00 Not required
41
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR)

Proximity Probes:
330191 3300 XL 8 mm ETR Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, without armor
330192 3300 XL 8 mm ETR Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, with armor
Option Descriptions
length.

05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)1

00 Not required

Proximity Probes, Metric:
330193 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, without armor
330194 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, with armor
Option Descriptions
length.

42

05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
00 Not required

Reverse Mount Probes
330195-02-12-CXX-DXX, 3/8-24 UNF threads
330196-05-30-CXX-DXX, M10 x 1 threads
Option Descriptions
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
00 Not required

Proximity Probes, Smooth Case:
330197 3300 XL 8 mm Probe without armor2
330198 3300 XL 8 mm Probe with armor2
Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX
Option Descriptions
43
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
00 Not required
3300 5 mm Proximity Probes:

330171 3300 5 mm Probe, 1/4-28 UNF thread, without armor
330172 3300 5 mm Probe, 1/4-28 UNF thread, with armor
Option Descriptions
length.

05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)1

44
TM
01 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc connector with connector protector,
standard cable

00 Not required
3300 5 mm Proximity Probes, Metric:

330173 3300 5 mm Probe, M8 x 1 thread, without armor
330174 3300 5 mm Probe, M8 x 1 thread, with armor
Option Descriptions
length.

05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1

standard cable

00 Not required
45
3300 XL Proximitor Sensor

330180-AXX-BXX
Option Descriptions
A: Total Length and Mounting Option
50 5.0 metre (16.4 feet) system length, panel mount
51 5.0 metre (16.4 feet) system length, DIN mount
52 5.0 metre (16.4 feet) system length, no mounting hardware
90 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system length, panel mount
91 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system length, DIN mount
92 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system length, no mounting hardware
B: Agency Approval Option
00 Not required
05 Multiple approvals
3300 XL Extension Cable

330130-AXXX-BXX-CXX
Note: Make sure that the extension cable length and the probe length,
when added together, equal the Proximitor Sensor total length.
Option Descriptions
0 3 0 3.0 metres (9.8 feet)
035 3.5 metres (11.5 feet)
040 4.0 metres (13.1 feet)
045 4.5 metres (14.8 feet)
070 7.0 metres (22.9 feet)
075 7.5 metres (24.6 feet)
080 8.0 metres (26.2 feet)
085 8.5 metres (27.9 feet)
B: Connector Protector and Cable Option
00 Standard cable
01 Armored cable
02 Standard cable with connector protectors
03 Armored cable with connector protectors
10 FluidLoc cable
11 Armored FluidLoc cable
12 FluidLoc cable with connector protectors
13 Armored FluidLoc cable with connector protectors
00 Not required
46
3300 XL Extended Temperature Range (ETR)

Extension Cable
330190-AXXX-BXX-CXX
Note: Make sure that the extension cable length and the probe length,
when added together, equal the Proximitor Sensor total length.
Option Descriptions
0 3 0 3.0 metres (9.8 feet)
035 3.5 metres (11.5 feet)
040 4.0 metres (13.1 feet)
045 4.5 metres (14.8 feet)
070 7.0 metres (22.9 feet)
075 7.5 metres (24.6 feet)
080 8.0 metres (26.2 feet)
085 8.5 metres (27.9 feet)
B: Cable Option
00 Standard cable
01 Armored cable
00 Not required
Accessories
141078-01
Manual
02120015
2
Bulk field wire. 1.0 mm (18 AWG), 3 conductor,
twisted, shielded cable with drain wire. Specify length in
feet.
137491-AXX
Aluminum probe clamp bracket2
Option Descriptions
A: Mounting screw option
01 10-24 UNC-2A mounting screws
02 M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws
The aluminum clamp bracket is an unthreaded mounting bracket designed to use
with the smooth case probes (330140, 330141, 330197 and 330198). After
gapping the probe, tighten the clamp bracket by tightening the screws. The
mounting screws have pre-drilled holes for safety wire.
137492-AXX
Aluminum probe threaded mounting bracket
Option Descriptions
A: Thread size
01 3/8-24
02 1/4-28
47
03 M8 x 1
04 M10 x 1
The aluminum probe threaded mounting bracket is the standard mounting bracket
for most 3300 and 3300 XL probe installations. The -01 and -02 options are
supplied with two 10-24 UNC-2A mounting screws. The -03 and -04 options are
supplied with two M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws. The mounting screws have pre-
drilled holes for safety wire.
27474-AXX
Phenolic threaded probe mounting bracket
Option Descriptions
A: Thread size
01 3/8-24
02 1/4-28
03 M8 x 1
04 M10 x 1
The phenolic threaded mounting bracket is recommended if additional electric
isolation from the mounting location is required (as in some generator and
electrical motor bearing locations). The -01 and 02 options are supplied with
two 10-24 UNC-2A mounting screws. The -03 and -04 options are supplied with
two M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws. The mounting screws have pre-drilled holes
for safety wire.
138492-01
Replacement panel-mount mounting pad
138493-01
Replacement DIN-mount mounting pad
148722-01
3300 XL Test Plug. The 3300 XL Test Plug is contains
three small test pins attached to three color-coded wires
1 metre in length, each terminated in a banana plug.
The three-pin adapter plugs into the test pin holes on
3300 XL-style Proximitor Sensors. It is used to check
the performance of the Proximitor Sensor from the test
pin holes in the terminal strip without requiring the
removal of the field wiring.
04310310
3300 XL Proximitor Sensor Panel-mount Screw.
Package includes one 6-32 UNC thread forming
mounting screw. (Supplied standard with Proximitor
Housings [3300 XL panel-mount option] ).
03200006
Silicone self-fusing tape. A 9.1 metre (10 yard) roll of
silicone tape to protect connectors. It is easy to install
and provides excellent electrical isolation and protection
from the environment. It is not recommended for use
inside the casing of the machine.
40113-02
Standard Connector Protector Kit. Connector
Protector Kit for 3300 XL 8 mm probes and extension
48
cables, including connector protectors and installation

tools.
40113-03
5 mm/NSv Connector Protector Kit. Connector
Protector Kit for 3300 5 mm probes, including connector
protectors and installation tools.
136536-01
Connector Protector Adapter. Allows connector
protector installation tools manufactured prior to 1998 to
be used with 75 ClickLoc connectors.
40180-02
Standard Connector Protectors. Package contains 10
pairs of connector protectors for 3300 XL 8 mm probes
and 3300 XL extension cables.
40180-03
5 mm/NSv Connector Protectors. Package contains
10 pairs of connector protectors for 3300 5 mm probes.
03839410
Standard Connector Protector - Male. Male connector
protectors are installed onto the 3300 XL extension
cable and attach to the female connector protector on
the probe, providing environmental protection of
connectors.
03839420
Standard Connector Protector - Female. Female
connector protectors are installed onto the 3300 XL
probe lead and attach to the male connector protector
on the 3300 XL extension cable, providing
environmental protection of connectors. Also placed on
the 3300 XL extension cable to slide over the connection
to the Proximitor Sensor and protect it from the
environment.
03800001
5mm/NSv Connector Protector - Female. Placed onto
3300 5 mm probe leads; attaches to the male connector
protector on the extension cable to provide
environmental protection of connectors.
04301007
3/8-24 Probe Lock Nut with safety wire holes. Single
probe lock nut with two holes drilled through the nut in
order to secure the lock nut in place with safety wire.
04301008
M10 x 1 Probe Lock Nut with safety wire holes.
Single probe lock nut with two holes drilled through the
nut in order to secure the lock nut in place with safety
wire.
330153-01
3300 XL Connector Kit. Used on 3300 XL 8 mm
probes and 3300 XL extension cables. Contains one pair
TM
of male and female ClickLoc connectors, two color-
coded sleeves, two pieces of slit FEP tubing, and one
strip of silicone tape.
49
330153-04
3300 5 mm Connector Kit. Used on 3300 5 mm
probes. Contains one male ClickLocTM connector, one
color-coded sleeve, one piece of slit FEP tubing, and
one strip of silicone tape.
330153-09
3300 XL ETR Connector Kit. Used on ETR 3300 XL 8
mm probes and 3300 ETR XL extension cables.
Contains one pair of male and female ClickLocTM
connectors, two color-coded sleeves, two pieces of high
temperature slit FEP tubing, and one strip of silicone
tape.
163356
Connector Crimp Tool Kit. Includes one set of
multiconnector inserts and connector installation
instructions. Compatible only with 330153 connector
kits or with probes shipped in 2003 or later with
ClickLoc connectors uninstalled. Supplied with
carrying case.
Notes:
1. Five metre probes are designed for use with the five metre Proximitor
Sensor only.
2. Mounting clamps must be ordered separately for 330140, 330141, 330197,
and 330198.
3. For a shorter delivery time, order commonly stocked probes. Currently,
stocked probes consist of the following part numbers:
330101-00-08-05-02-00, 330101-00-08-05-02-05, 330101-00-08-10-02-00,
330101-00-08-10-02-05, 330101-00-12-10-02-00, 330101-00-12-10-02-05,
330101-00-16-10-02-00, 330101-00-16-10-02-05, 330101-00-20-05-02-00,
330101-00-20-10-02-00, 330101-00-20-10-02-05, 330101-00-30-10-02-00,
330101-00-30-10-02-05, 330101-00-40-05-02-00, 330101-00-40-10-02-00,
330101-00-40-10-02-05, 330101-00-60-10-02-00, 330101-00-60-10-02-05,
330102-00-20-10-02-00, 330103-00-02-10-02-05, 330103-00-03-10-02-05,
330103-00-04-10-02-00, 330103-00-04-50-02-00, 330103-00-05-10-02-00,
330103-00-06-10-02-00, 330104-00-06-10-02-00, 330104-01-05-50-02-00,
330105-02-12-05-02-00, 330105-02-12-05-02-05, 330105-02-12-10-02-00,
330105-02-12-10-02-05, 330106-05-30-05-02-00, 330106-05-30-05-02-05,
330106-05-30-10-02-00 and 330106-05-30-10-02-05.
50
Section 7 3300 XL 8mm System Graphs and Dimensional Drawings
Section 7 System Graphs and

Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
2 0.05
Referenced to
mV/mil)
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
5
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
5m @ 25 C (77 F) 5m @ 45 C (113 F) 5m @ 0 C (32 F)
Figure 7-1 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System over API 670 Testing Range
51
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6 0.15
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
Referenced to
mV/mil) 2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
5
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
9m @ 25 C (77 F) 9m @ 45 C (113 F) 9m @ 0 C (32 F)
Figure 7-2 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System over API 670 Testing Range
52
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils) 4 0.10
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
Referenced to 2 0.05
mV/mil)
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
5
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
1m P ro be @ 25 C (77 F) 1m P ro be @ -35 C (-31F)
1m P ro be @ 120 C (248 F)
Figure 7-3 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm Probe over API 670 Operating Range
53
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6
7.87V/mm (200mV/mil)
DSL ERROR (MILS)
Referenced to
2
-2
-4
-6
10%
Referenced to 7.87 V/mm
5%
ISF ERROR
(200mV/mil)
0%
-5%
-10%
-24
-22
-20
-18
OUTPUT (VOLTS)
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
GAP (m ils)
1M Probe @ 25 C (77 F) 1M Probe @ -35 C (-31 F)

1M Probe @ 120 C (248 F)
Figure 7-4 Typical 3300 5 mm Probe over API 670 Operating Range
54
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6 0.15
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
Referenced to
2 0.05
mV/mil)
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
5
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
TC=25 C (77 F) Tc=-34 C (-30 F) Tc=-51C (-60 F)
Figure 7-5 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m Proximitor Sensor with 4 m of

Extension Cable @ Tc (Probe is at 25 C)
55
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
Referenced to
200(mV/mil)
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
15
10
Referenced to
ISF Error (%)
200(mV/mil)
-5
-10
-15
-20
-18
-16
-14
Output (Volts)
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
Gap (m ils) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
25 C (77 F) 65 C (149 F) 85 C (185 F) 100 C (212 F)
Figure 7-6 Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m Proximitor Sensor with 4 m

Extension Cable @ Th (Probe is at 25C)
56
Gap (m m )
0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
Tc=+25 C (+77 F) Tc=-34 C (-30 F) Tc=-51C (-60 F)

Extension Cable @ Tc (Probe is at 25 C)
57
Gap (m m )
0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
Th=+25 C (+77 F) Th=+65 C (+149 F)
Th=+85 C (+185 F) Th=+100 C (+212 F)

Extension Cable @ Th (Probe is at 25 C)
58
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
10 0.25
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
-10 -0.25
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
Gap (m ils) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Th=+25 C (+77 F) Th =+260 C (+500 F)
Figure 7-9 Typical 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range Probe and 4 m of

Extended Temperature Range Extension Cable @ Th (Proximitor Sensor
and probe tip with 1 foot of cable are at +25 C)
59
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
10 0.25
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
-10 -0.25
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
Gap (m ils) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Th=+25 C (+77 F) Th=+260 C (+500 F)
Figure 7-10 Typical 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range Probe and 8

metres of Extended Temperature Range Extension Cable @ Th (Proximitor
Sensor and probe tip with 1 foot of cable are at +25 C)
60
Frequency Response to Different Field Wiring Lengths

without Barriers (5 m System)
1
0
Magnitude (dB)
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)

Figure 7-11 Frequency Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System with

varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
Figure 7-12 Phase Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5 m System with

61
Frequency Response to Different Field Wiring Lengths without

1
0
Magnitude (dB)
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)

Figure 7-13 Frequency Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System with


0.00
-10.00
-20.00
-30.00
-40.00
-50.00
-60.00
-70.00
-80.00
-90.00
-100.00
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)

Figure 7-14 Phase Response, typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9 m System with

62
14.3 (9/16) for 3/8-24 threads2 8 (5/16) Wrench Flats, 4 each

17.0 (0.67) for M10 threads2 75 ohm Cable
8.0 3.7 (0.15) Max. Outside Dia.
Dia.
(0.31) Case 3.9 (0.16) Max. Dia. for FluidLoc R Cable
Miniature Male
Case Length "B"
6.0 (0.236) Max.
3
Total Length "C", +30%, -0%
Figure 7-15 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity probes, Standard Mount

7
330101 and 330191, 3/8-24 UNF-2A, without armor
6
330102 and 330192, 3/8-24 UNF-2A, with armor
7
330103 and 330193, M10X1 thread, without armor
6
330104 and 330194, M10X1 thread, with armor
5.6 (7/32) Wrench Flats for 1/4-28 threads,

7.0 (0.28) for M8 threads, 4 each
11.1(7/16) for 1/4-28 threads 3

13.0 (0.51) for M8 threads3
5.2 75 ohm Cable
Dia.
(0.21) Case 2.8 (0.11) Max Outside Dia.
Miniature Male
Case Length "B"
6.0 (0.235) Max.
Total Length 8 "C", +30%, -0%
Figure 7-16 3300 5 mm Proximity probes

7
330171, 1/4-28 UNF-2A, without armor
6
330172 , 1/4-28 UNF-2A, with armor
7
330173, M8X1 thread, without armor
6
330174, M8X1 thread, with armor
63
12 (0.47) 12 (0.47)
Dia. Max. 36.3 Dia. Max.
Max. 51.1 (2.01) Max.
(1.43)
Connector Protector
(Fluorosilicone Material)
Figure 7-17 Installed Connector Protectors
7/16 or M10
8.0 Hex Case
Dia. Thread
(0.31)
Probe Tip 75 ohm Cable
3.7 (0.15) outside Dia.
2 (0.08)
5 (0.2) Miniature Male
Coaxial Connector
Unthreaded Length "A" 7.23 (0.285) Outside
5.0 (0.20) Dia. Maximum "D"
Case Length "B"
30 (1.2)
6.0 (0.236) Max.
Total Length3 "C", +30%, -0%
4, 7
Figure 7-18 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Reverse Mount
330105 and 330195, 3/8-24 UNF-2A threads
330106 and 330196, M10X1 threads
64
75 Ohm Cable
3.68 (0.145) Dia. Max.
3.9 (0.16) Max. Dia. for FluidLoc R Cable
With Armor, outside Dia. is 8.0 (0.315)
9.6 (0.38) 7.9 (0.31)
Max. Dia. Wrench Flats
8 (0.31) 4 each Male (Plug) Connector
Dia. Tip
7.23 (0.285) Dia. Max.
2.54 (0.100)
Case Length "A" 349.25 (13.750) Max.
6.0 (0.236) Max.

3
Cable Length
Figure 7-19 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case

7
330140 and 330197, without armor
6
330141 and 330198, with armor
75 ohm cable
3.7 (0.15) max. O.D.
Miniature Male 3.9 (0.16) Max. Dia. for FluidLocR cable
Coaxial Connector 7.6 (0.30) Max. O.D. of Armor
FEP or PFA 9.0 (0.35) Max Dia. of Armor Ferrule
Coated Armor 6 83.8 7.2 (0.285)
7.2 (0.285) 83.8 Armor Length:
Max. Dia. (3.30) (3.30) Max. Dia.
300 (11.8)
less than cable length
83.8 83.8
(3.30) (3.30) FEPTriaxial
or PFA Insulated
Cable
Stainless Steel Ferrules Miniature Female
8.4 (0.33) Dia. Coaxial Connector
Cable Length +20%, -0%
Figure 7-20 330130, 3300 XL Extension Cable (FEP armor and insulation)
330190, 3300 XL ETR Extension Cable (PFA armor and insulation)
65
Mounting Option
63.5 (2.50)
50.8 50.8
(2.00) (2.00)
81.3 61.2
(3.20) (2.41)
5.1
(0.20)
Figure 7-21 Panel Mount 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor
Figure 7-22 DIN Mount 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor

66
50
(1.95)
86
25.4 (3.4)
(1.00)
50.8
(2.00)
50.8
(2.00)
79.4
(3.125)
60.2
(2.37)
Mounting Option
63.5
(2.50)
81
(3.2)
50.8
(2.00) 50.8
81.3 (2.00)
(3.20)
61.2
(2.41)
5.1
(0.20)
Figure 7-23 Physical mounting characteristics showing interchangeability

of 3300 and 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors when 4-hole mounting option is
used8
Notes:
1. All dimensions on figures are in millimetres (inches) unless otherwise noted.
2. Standard mount 8 mm probes supplied with 17 mm or 9/16 inch lock nut.
3. Probes ordered with 5 or 9 metre integral cables have a length tolerance of
+20%, -0%.
4. Reverse mount probes not available with armor or connector protector
options.
5. Letters inside quotation marks on figures refer to probe ordering options.
6. Stainless steel armor is supplied with FEP outer jacket for standard probes,
PFA outer jacket for ETR probes.
67
7. FEP jacket is standard non-armored portion of the cable for standard probes,
PFA jacket on non-armored portion for ETR probes.
8. Use M3.5 or #6 screws for panel-mount Proximitor Sensors (screws
provided when purchasing Bently Nevada housings).
68
69
Section 8 Micrometer Specifications and Ordering Information
Section 8 Micrometer Specifications

and Ordering Information
Mechanical
Target Buttons:
AISI 4140 Alloy Steel, 30.5 mm (1.20 in) diameter flat
target
Note: Contact your nearest Bently Nevada Sales Professional for
details on special target materials.
Casing Material:
3300 XL Precision
Micrometer:
Fiberglass and Plastic.
3300 XL Shaft
Micrometer:
ABS Plastic.
Micrometer specifications:
Table 8-1 3300 XL Precision Micrometer:

Part number Resolution Accuracy Range
330185-01 0.000020 in 0.000015 in 0-1 in
330185-02 0.0005 mm 0.0004 mm 0-25 mm
Table 8-2 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer

Part number Resolution Accuracy Range
330186-01 0.001 in 0.0001 in 0-1 in
300186-02 0.01 mm 0.003 mm 0-25 mm
Size
3300 XL Precision Micrometer (case dimensions)
Height:
226 mm (8.9 in)
Width:
274 mm (10.8 in)
Length:
356 mm (14.0 in)
3300 XL Shaft Micrometer (case dimensions)
Height:
71
152 mm (6.0 in)

Width:
246 mm (9.7 in)
Length:
356 mm (14.0 in)
Total System Mass
3300 XL Precision
Micrometer:
6.8 kg (15.0 lbm)
3300 XL Shaft
Micrometer:
2.8 kg (6.2 lbm)
3300 XL Precision Micrometer
330185-AXX
Option Descriptions
A: Scale Units
01 Micrometer in English units (0-1 in)
02 Micrometer in metric units (0-25 mm)
3300 XL Shaft Micrometer

330186- AXX
Option Descriptions
A: Scale Units
01 Micrometer in English units (0-1 in)

02 Micrometer in metric units (0-25 mm)
Note: The 3300 shaft micrometer and precision micrometer come with
probe mounting adapters for 1/4 inch, 3/8 inch, 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, M8,
M10, M14 and M16 probe thread sizes.
Accessories
Part Number Description
138751-01 3300 XL Precision Micrometer Instruction Sheet
140273-01 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer Instruction Sheet
27505-01 Target button: A replacement 4140 target button that comes
standard with the 3300 XL shaft micrometer. There can be a
variation of up to 5% in the average scale factor (ASF) between
each target button.
136534-01 High Precision target button: A replacement 4140 target button
that comes standard with the 3300 XL precision micrometer.
There can be a variation of up to 0.6% in the Average Scale
Factor (ASF) between each target button.
02200218 Shaft Micrometer Strap: A replacement strap for the 3300 XL
Shaft Micrometer.
72
Section 8 Micrometer Specifications and Ordering Information
Part Number Description

49478-01 Probe mounting adapter, suitable for M5 threads.
49478-02 Probe mounting adapter, 1/4 inch threads.
49478-03 Probe mounting adapter, M8 threads.
280 (11) Typical

89 (3.5)
3 22
2 23
00
1 24
28
46
64
0 0
82
00
0 1 2
0 9 8
24 1
23 2
22 3
89 (3.5) 165 (6.5)
203 (8.0) 152 (6.0)
Figure 8-1 3300 XL Precision Micrometer

(1) Collets to fit both metric and English 5mm, 8mm, 11mm, and 14mm
probes.
(2) Removable AISI 4140 target
73
160.0 (6.30) max.
24
23
22
21
4
3
2
1
150.9 (5.94) min.
2 3
0 1
59.2
(2.33)
105.4
(4.15)
Figure 8-2 - 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer

Note: Dimensions for figures are in millimetres (inches)
74
Section 9 Housing Specifications and Ordering Information
Section 9 Housing Specifications and

Mechanical
Housing Rating:
For North America, the Canadian Standards Association
(CSA) tested and certified the housing to a Type 4X
waterproof and corrosion-resistant rating. For Europe,
the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) also tested
and certified the housing to meet the IP66 waterproof
and dust-proof rating along with the 7 joule high impact
mechanical risk test required by CENELEC standard
EN50 014. Verified by Baseefa (2001) certificate number
Ex85122 for use in ExN applications and by certificate
number BAS99ATEX3102 for EEx n applications.
Housing Material:
304L stainless steel.
Gland Plate Gasket Material:
Neoprene.
Cover Gasket Material:
Poron.
Total System Mass:
6.4 kg (14.0 lbm) with standard gland plates but without
conduit fittings installed; 8.0 kg (17.5 lbm) with standard
gland plates and conduit fittings installed.
3300 XL Proximitor Housing
330181 -AXX - BXX - CXX DXX
The 3300 XL Proximitor Housing is rated for IP66 and Type 4X environmental
conditions. It can accommodate up to eight 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors in the
DIN-mount configuration or six panel-mount Proximitor Sensors. It has three
removable gland plates, making it easier to install conduit fittings and cable
gland seals.
Option Descriptions
A: Transducer Type Option
00 No mounting hardware
01 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors (DIN mount), DIN-rail terminal blocks
03 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors (panel mount)
04 3300 Proximitor Sensors
05 3000 or 7200 Proximitor Sensors, VDCs, and Interface Modules
Note: Proximitor Sensors, Interface Modules, and Velocity-to-
Displacement Converters are not included and must be ordered
separately.
75
Application Advisory: Care must be taken during system length

selection to avoid having excess cable length coiled up inside of the
housing. Excess cable coiled up in the housing may cause chafing and
premature failure of the cables. Additional conduit boxes, armored
cable or special provisions are recommended for long lengths of cable
that must be coiled in the 330181 housing.
B: Conduit Fitting Option

00 Without fittings.
01 One brass M32 cable gland seal outlet, six brass M25 cable gland
seal inlets.
02 One brass M32 cable gland seal outlet, eight brass M25 cable gland
seal inlets.
03 One aluminum 1 -11 NPT conduit outlet, six aluminum -14
NPT conduit inlets, six aluminum -14 to -14 NPT reducers.
04 One aluminum 1-11 NPT conduit outlet, eight aluminum -14
NPT conduit inlets, eight aluminum -14 to -14 NPT reducers.
05 One 316 stainless steel 1 -11 NPT conduit outlet, six 316
stainless steel -14 NPT conduit inlets, six 303 stainless steel -
14 to -14 NPT reducers.
06 One 316 stainless steel 1 -11 NPT conduit outlet, eight 316
stainless steel -14 NPT conduit inlets, eight 303 stainless steel -
14 to -14 NPT reducers.
07 One chrome-plated zinc 1 -11 NPT conduit outlet, six chrome-
plated zinc -14 NPT conduit inlets, six 303 stainless steel -14 to
-14 NPT reducers.
08 One chrome-plated zinc 1 -11 NPT conduit outlet, eight chrome-
plated zinc -14 NPT conduit inlets, eight 303 stainless steel -14
NPT to -14 NPT reducers.
C: Gland Plate Thickness
01 Standard 2.34 mm (0.092 in)
02 3.05 mm (0.120 in)
03 4.76 mm (0.188 in)
04 6.35 mm (0.250 in)
D: Terminal Mounting Block Option
00 No terminal blocks
01 4 DIN rail terminal blocks
21 1 terminal block
22 2 terminal blocks
76
Section 9 Housing Specifications and Ordering Information
Note: Each DIN rail terminal block accepts only one wire. The
standard terminal blocks each accept four wires. Thus, four DIN rail
terminal blocks equal one standard terminal block.
Accessories
Part number Description
137936-01 Brass cable gland seal, M32
137937-01 Brass cable gland seal, M25
03818111 Nickel-plated brass conduit fitting, PG21 x M20
03839130 Aluminum conduit fitting, -14 NPT
03839132 Aluminum conduit fitting, 1 -11 NPT
03850021 Aluminum reducer, -14 to -14 NPT
03813103 Chrome-plated zinc conduit fitting, -14 NPT
03813105 Chrome-plated zinc conduit fitting, 1-11 NPT
03813106 Chrome-plated zinc conduit fitting, 1 -11 NPT
03818099 AISI 316 stainless steel conduit fitting, 1 -11 NPT
03818100 AISI 316 stainless steel conduit fitting, -14NPT
26650-01 AISI 303 stainless steel reducer, -14 to -14 NPT
26650-03 AISI 303 stainless steel reducer, 1 -11 to 1-11 NPT
03818102 AISI 316 stainless steel conduit fitting, PG21 x M20
03818103 AISI 316 stainless steel conduit fitting, PG21 x PG11
03818104 AISI 303 stainless steel conduit seal, PG11
03818105 AISI 316 stainless steel conduit seal, M20
103537-01 Terminal Mounting Block This 4-wire terminal mounting block
includes screws and is easily installed. Terminal mounting blocks are
used to connect transducer cables to field wiring that is routed back to
the monitoring system. These blocks are used with the PROXPAC
Transducer Assembly, integral 25 mm and 50 mm DE transducers,
temperature sensors, Velomitor Sensors, and seismic transducers.
01691029 DIN-rail Terminal Strip
01691028 DIN-rail Terminal Strip Cover The DIN-rail terminal strip with cover is
a single wire terminal strip that snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail.
04490104 Conduit Seal Punch Tool A punch tool set is used when installing
conduit seals. The conduit seals come with a rubber insert, with
markings for where to "punch" holes. Use the punch tool set to punch
the number of holes you need for the cables going through each
conduit seal.
Sealtite Flexible
Conduit Assembly
14847-XX -14 NPT Threads
14848-XX -14 NPT Threads
Option Descriptions
A: Length Option
Order in increments of 1 foot (300 mm)
Minimum length: 1 foot = 0 1
Maximum length: 99 feet = 9 9
77
R

31000, 32000 Proximity Probe Housings
Description
Bently Nevada's 31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies are
recommended when mounting proximity probes through the machine case
and are typically used for radially mounted transducers, whether vibration or
Keyphasor measurements.
Notes:
1. When using these housings to measure radial vibration, ensure that the machine casing is
affixed to the bearing in order to get an accurate relative vibration signal.
2. When measuring shaft axial position with dual proximity probes, use housing 21022
instead. Consult specifications and ordering information (p/n 141601-01).
Use of a proximity probe housing allows external access to the proximity

probe and its extension cable, permitting gap adjustment or probe
replacement without disassembly of the machine. The 31000/32000
Proximity Probe Housing Assembly is made of polyphenylene sulfide (PPS),
an advanced, high-strength, thermoplastic with excellent corrosion
resistance. Other elements of the housing assembly are made of corrosion-
resistant stainless steel. The housing can be ordered with installed 3300 XL
Proximity Probes and a variety of conduit fittings.
The 31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Assembly is fully compliant with

the American Petroleum Institute's (API) 670 Standard for externally mounted
proximity probe housings.
When installed in conjunction with an approved transducer system and

appropriate I.S. barriers, the 31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing
Assembly can be used in intrinsically safe hazardous area applications.
Note: The 31000/32000 Housing is intended to provide mechanical and environmental

protection only, and is not an explosion-proof housing. When an explosion proof proximity
probe housing assembly is required, use housing CA21000 or CA24701. Consult specifications
and ordering information (p/n 141600-01).
Specifications
Mechanical
Protection Ratings: Type 4X rating certified by Canadian Standards Association

(CSA). IP66 rating verified by SC115582-1 (e) 106.
CENELEC standard EN50014 rating for electrostatic
dissipation of a plastic material located in a hazardous area.
Housing Material: Glass-reinforced Polyphenylene Sulfide (PPS) thermoplastic

containing conductive fibers.
BN Part Number 141610-01 Page 1 of 9

Revision E, August 2003
Sleeve Material and AISI 304 stainless steel Probe Pressure
Retaining Chain: The 31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Assembly is
designed to seal differential pressure between the probe tip
Outer Sleeve and AISI 303 stainless steel and the housing main body when used with a 3300 XL 8 mm
Exterior Screws: probe. The sealing material internal to the probe case
consists of a Viton O-ring; the O-ring between the sleeve
O-Ring Material: Neoprene and the housing is a Neoprene O-ring. The plastic housing
is certified to seal against hose-directed water according to
Recommended 29.4 Nm (260 inlb) NEMA 4X and IP66 standards but is not designed to resist
Torque internal or external pressure. Probes are not pressure tested
(retaining nut): prior to shipment. Contact our custom design department if
you require a test of the pressure seal for your application.
Housing Strength Outer sleeve was mounted on a test
(typical): stand with its axis parallel to Note: It is the responsibility of the customer or user to ensure that all liquids
and gases are contained and safely controlled should leakage occur from a
horizontal and the housing mounted Proximity Probe Housing Assembly. Solutions with high or low pH values
on the outer sleeve through an end may erode the tip assembly of the probe, causing media leakage into
hole. The housing supported surrounding areas. Bently Nevada Corporation will not be held responsible
912 N (205 lb) placed approximately for any damages resulting from leaking Proximity Probe Housing
Assemblies. In addition, Proximity Probe Housing Assemblies and 3300 XL
38 mm (1.5 inches) from the 8 mm proximity probes will not be replaced under the service plan due to
unsupported end with the cover probe leakage.
fastened in place and grounding
liner installed. Probe Cable Length Maximum C plus D
0.5 metre 394 mm (15.5 in)
Housing Impact Certified by BASEEFA to withstand 1.0 metre 760 mm (30.0 in)
Strength: two separate 4 Joule (3.0 ftlb) Table 1: Maximum "C" Option plus "D" Option for different
impacts at -39C (-38F) and at "B" Options (probe cable length)
115 C (239F). Samples of the
housing and cover were verified by
Probe Cable Length Maximum C plus D with
CSA to withstand a 7 Joule
Visible P/N and S/N Label
(5.2 ftlb) impact at ambient room
0.5 metre 64 mm (2.5 in)
temperature.
1.0 metre 483 mm (19.0 in)
Weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb) typical. Table 2: Maximum "C" Option plus "D" Option for different
"B" Options (probe cable length) where P/N and S/N Label on
Probe Cable is visible outside of probe sleeve
Environmental Limits
Temperature Rating: -34C to +105C (-29F to +221F)
Hot Water and Steam Exposure Effects:

(Specification not guaranteed) Brief periods (up to one week)
of contact with hot water (95C [203F]) and/or condensing
steam should not significantly affect the strength of the plastic
housing. Contact with these beyond this length of time may
eventually cause the strength of the plastic housing to
permanently decrease during the first 6 to 8 weeks of
exposure, and then level at approximately half of its initial
value. Tests of actual housing performance after contact with
hot water and condensing steam have not been conducted.

For penetration lengths between 1.0 and 2.0
inches, counter bore may be required in
Ordering Information machine case to reduce probe side view
and/or rear view effects.
Note: Conduit fittings are necessary when hardline conduit or metal tubing is Order in increments of 0.1 in
brought into the housing. Flexible conduit should be ordered with integral (3 mm).
3/4-14 NPT fittings and do not require additional conduit fittings with the Minimum length: 1.0 in (25 mm).
housing. If using flexible conduit, order the "E" = 00 option. Maximum length: 30 in (762 mm),
see Table 1 for cable length limits.
31000-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXXX-EXX-FXX
Note: To order housing only, use -00 for all Options. Example:
Option Descriptions 0 0 0 = No probe sleeve.
0 3 7 = 3.7 in ( 94 mm).
A: Probe Option, 0 0 Probe not required (Note: 2 2 4 = 22.4 in (569 mm).
With Connector Option B must also be -00).
1 6 3300 XL 8 mm probe E: Fittings Option 0 0 No fittings; two plugs and two
2 6 3300 XL NSv probe washers.
2 7 3300 XL NSv probe, multiple 0 1 One 3/4-14 NPT fitting, two
approvals plugs.
2 8 3300 XL 8 mm probe, multiple 0 2 Two 3/4-14 NPT fittings, one
approvals plug.
2 9 3300 XL 8mm probe, with 0 3 Two plugs, one 3/4-14 NPT
connector protector fitting, one 3/4-14 NPT to 1/2-
3 0 3300 XL 8mm probe, with 14 NPT SST reducer, and a
connector protector, multiple cable seal grip with grommets
approvals for cable sizes: 1/8 to 3/16,
3 1 3300 XL NSvTM probe, with 1/4 to 5/16, and 5/16 to 3/8-in.
connector protector 0 6 One 3/4-14 NPT fitting one
3 2 3300 XL NSvTM probe, with 3/4-14 NPT to 1/2-14 NPT
connector protector, multiple SST reducer and two plugs.
approvals
3 3 3300 XL 11mm probe F: Mounting Thread 0 0 No outer sleeve, retainer, or
3 4 3300 XL 11mm probe, multiple Option retaining nut
approvals 0 2 3/4-14 NPT (Required if
3 5 3300 XL 11mm probe, with ordering Standoff Adapter
connector protector Option).
3 6 3300 XL 11mm probe, with 0 5 7/8-14 UNF 2A
connector protector, multiple
approvals
B: Probe Cable 0 0 Probe cable not required (Note:

Length Option Option A must also be -00).
(See Table 1) 0 5 0.5 metre (20 in)
1 0 1.0 metre (39 in)
C: Standoff Adapter Order in increments of 0.5 in

Option (13 mm).
("C" Dimension) Minimum length: 1.5 in (38 mm).
Maximum length: 7.5 in (191 mm).
Example:
0 0 = No standoff adapter.
1 5 = 1.5 in (38 mm).
D: Probe Penetration Note: "C" plus "D" dimensions greater than

12 in (305 mm) require additional sleeve
Option support near the probe to prevent resonance
("D" Dimension) from occurring. Sleeve adjustment range of
Probe Penetration Option "D" is 0.5 in
(13 mm).

Metric Proximity Probe Housing see Table 1 for cable length limits.
32000-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXXX-EXX-FXX Example:
Option Descriptions 0 0 0 = No probe sleeve.
Note: To order housing only, use -00 for all options. 0 5 0 = 50 mm
7 6 0 = 760 mm
A: Probe Option, 00 Probe not required. (Note:
With Connector Option B must also be -00). E: Fittings Option 0 0 No fittings; two plugs and two
16 3300 XL 8 mm probe. washers.
26 3300 XL NSv probe 0 1 One M25 fitting, two plugs.
27 3300 XL NSv probe, 0 2 Two M25 fittings, one plug.
multiple approvals 0 3 Two plugs, M20 fitting, and
28 3300 XL 8 mm probe, multiple one cable seal grip with
approvals. grommet for armored probe
29 3300 XL 8mm probe, with cable.
connector protector 0 5 One DIN PG11 fitting, two
30 3300 XL 8mm probe, with plugs.
connector protector, multiple 0 7 One PG21 x M20 fitting, two
approvals plugs
31 3300 XL NSvTM probe, with 0 8 Two PG21 x M20 fittings, one
connector protector plug
32 3300 XL NSvTM probe, with
connector protector, multiple F: Mounting Thread 0 0 No outer sleeve, retainer or
approvals Option retaining nut
33 3300 XL 11mm probe 0 1 M24 X 3
34 3300 XL 11mm probe, multiple 0 2 3/4-14 NPT (Required if
approvals ordering Standoff Adapter
35 3300 XL 11mm probe, with Option.)
connector protector
36 3300 XL 11mm probe, with
connector protector, multiple Terminal Housing
approvals 106769 - AXX
The 106769 housing consists of a 31000-style PPS housing
B: Probe Cable 0 0 Probe cable not required (Note: with two terminal mounting blocks (each terminal block has
Length Option Option A must also be -00). four terminals) mounted in each housing. Sixteen ring lugs
0 5 0.5 metre are supplied loose inside the housing for connecting
1 0 1.0 metre transducer cables. Conduit fittings are 3/4-14 NPT chrome-
plated zinc fittings.
C: Standoff Adapter Order in increments of 10 mm. Option Descriptions
Option Minimum length: 40 mm.
("C" Dimension) Maximum length: 200 mm. A: Conduit Fitting 0 0 No fittings
Example: Option 0 1 One fitting
0 0 = No standoff adapter. 0 2 Two fittings
0 4 = 40 mm.
2 0 = 200 mm.
D: Probe Penetration Note: "C" plus "D" dimensions greater than

305 mm (12 in) require additional sleeve
Option support near the probe to prevent resonance
("D" Dimension) from occurring. Sleeve adjustment range of
Probe Penetration Option "D" is 13 mm
(0.5 in).
For penetration lengths between 25 and 50
millimeters, counter bore may be required in
machine case to reduce probe side view
and/or rear view effects.
Minimum length: 25 mm.
Maximum length: 760 mm,

Housing AXX option for AXXX: = Standoff Adapter Option
Accessories 3300 XL 11 mm probe from original housing (31000
option (A: 33 or A: 34) option C) + Probe penetration
124200-01 Operation Manual option from original housing
(31000 option D) + 0 1 7.
37948-01 Probe Support/Oil Sleeve Example: original part number is
Recommended for sleeves with "D" 31000-33-10-30-113-01-02.
dimension longer than 12 in (305 m) AXXX: Option for replacement
sleeve is (030 + 113 + 017)
108883-AXXX = 1 6 0.
English Probe Sleeve (spare)
A: Probe sleeve This is the measured probe sleeve Minimum Probe 3300 XL 8 mm probes:
length length. Order in increments of 0.1 in Sleeve Length: 3.5 in (89 mm) = 0 3 5
(3 mm). Note that the individual
probe sleeve length does not 3300 NSv probes:
include the distance from the end of 3.6 in (91 mm) = 0 3 6
the sleeve to the probe tip or the
gap from the probe tip to the target 3300 XL 11 mm probes:
material. If only the part number of 2.7 in (69 mm) = 0 2 7
the original housing is known and
the sleeve cannot be measured, use Maximum Probe 3300 XL 0.5 metre 8 mm probe:
the following table to determine the Sleeve Length: 18.0 in (457 mm) = 1 8 0
sleeve length:
3300 NSv 0.5 metre probe:
AXX Option from Calculation for 108883-XXX 18.1 in (460 mm) = 1 8 1
31000 Proximity Probe Probe sleeve length if original
Housing part number part number is known 3300 XL 0.5 metre 11 mm probe:
16.0 in (406 mm) = 1 6 0
Housing AXX option for AXXX: = Standoff adapter option
3300 XL 8 mm probe from original housing (31000
option (A: 16 or A: 28) option C) + Probe penetration 3300 XL 1.0 metre 8mm probe:
32.5 in (826mm) = 3 2 5
option from original housing
(31000 option D) + 0 2 5.
Example: original part number is 3300 XL NSv 1.0 metre probe:
31000-16-10-15-035-03-02. 32.6 in (828mm) = 3 2 6
AXXX: option for replacement
3300 XL 1.0 metre 11 mm probe:
sleeve is (015 + 035 + 025)
= 0 7 5. 31.7 in (805 mm) = 3 1 7
Metric Probe Sleeve (Spare)

Housing AXX option for AXXX: = Standoff adapter option
108882-AXXX
3300 NSvTM probe from original housing (31000
option (A: 26 or A: 27) option C) + Probe penetration
A: Probe sleeve This is the measured probe sleeve
length length. Order in increments of 1 mm
(31000 option D) + 0 2 6.
(0.04 in). Note that the individual
Example: original part number is
probe sleeve length does not
31000-27-10-20-035-03-02.
include the distance from the end of
the sleeve to the probe tip or the
sleeve is (020 + 035 + 026)
gap from the probe tip to the target
= 0 8 1.
material. If only the part number of
the original housing is known and
the sleeve cannot be measured, use
the following table to determine the
sleeve length:

AXX Option from Calculation for 108882-XXX 823 mm (32.4 in) = 8 2 3
32000 Proximity Probe Probe sleeve length if original
Housing part number part number is known 3300 NSv 1.0 metre probe:
Housing AXX option for AXXX: = Standoff Adapter Option 826 mm (32.5 in) = 8 2 6
3300 XL 8 mm probe from original housing (32000
option (A: 16 or A: 28) option C) *10 + Probe penetration 3300 XL 1.0 metre 11 mm probe:
option from original housing 802 mm (31.6 in) = 8 0 2
(32000 option D) + 0 6 3.
Example: original part number is English Standoff Adapter (Spare)
32000-16-10-08-205-03-02. 109319-AXXX
sleeve is A: English standoff Hex = 1 3/8 in; threads = 3/4-14
(080 + 205 + 063) = 3 4 8 Adapter length NPT
Housing AXX option for AXXX: = Standoff adapter option (13 mm).
3300 NSvTM probe from original housing (32000 Minimum length: 1.5 in (38 mm).
option (A: 26 or A: 27) option C) *10 + Probe penetration Maximum length: 7.5 in (191 mm).
option from original housing Example: 0 4 5 = 4.5 in (114 mm).
(32000 option D) + 0 6 6.
Example: original part number is Metric Standoff Adapter (Spare)
32000-27-10-10-105-03-02. 109318-XX
sleeve is (100 + 105 + 066) A: Metric Standoff Wrench flats = 35 mm;
= 2 7 1. Adapter length threads = 3/4-14 NPT.
Housing AXX option for AXXX: = Standoff adapter option Minimum length: 40 mm.
3300 XL 11mm probe from original housing (32000 Maximum length: 200 mm.
option (A: 33 or A: 34) option C) *10 + Probe penetration Example: 1 2 = 120 mm.
Note: For desired probe penetration lengths of less than 25 mm (1.0 in),
(32000 option D) + 0 4 2.
order a separate Individual Standoff Adapter. The effective probe penetration
Example: original part number is length will then be reduced by the length of the Individual Standoff Adapter,
32000-33-10-10-105-03-02. plus an additional 13 mm (0.5 in) due to the NPT thread engagement.
AXXX: option for replacement Example: The customer desires a probe penetration length of 13 mm (0.5
in). To do this, they order a 31000 housing with DXXX (probe penetration)
sleeve is (100 + 105 + 042)
option of 0 3 0 [76 mm (3.0 in)] and a separate individual standoff adapter
= 2 4 7. that is 51 mm (2.0 in) in length (part number 109319-020). The standoff
adapter would cover 38 mm (2.0 in) of the probe sleeve, plus an additional
13 mm (0.5 in). Therefore, the effective probe penetration length would drop
to 13 mm (0.5 in).
Minimum Probe 3300 XL 8 mm probes: Note: Signal affects due to probe side view and/or rear view of metal
Sleeve Length: 88 mm (3.5 in) = 0 8 8 components are likely when effective penetration lengths of less than 1.0
inch are used.
3300 NSv probes: Spare 3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probe, 3/8-24 UNF
91 mm (3.6 in) = 0 9 1 threads
330105-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX
3300 XL 11 mm probes:
67 mm (2.6 in) = 0 6 7 Spare 3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probe, M10 X 1
threads
Maximum Probe 3300 XL 0.5 metre 8 mm probe: 330106-05-30-CXX-DXX-EXX
Sleeve Length: 457 mm (18.0 in) = 4 5 7 Option Descriptions
3300 NSv 0.5 metre probe: C: Total Length 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
460 mm (18.1 in) = 4 6 0 Option 10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet)
3300 XL 0.5 metre 11 mm probe: 20 2.0 metres (6.6 feet)
436 mm (17.2 in) = 4 3 6 50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)
3300 XL 1.0 metre 8 mm probe:

Revision D, February 2003
D: Connector Option 0 0 Connector not installed Note: Plugs fill extra holes in plastic housing
where needed.
0 2 Miniature ClickLocTM coaxial
connector
Heavy Duty Conduit and Cable Fittings
E: Agency Approval 0 0 Not required
Option 0 5 Multiple Approvals 03813103 Chrome-plated Zinc Conduit Fitting,
3/4-14 NPT
Spare 3300 NSv Reverse Mount Probe, 3/8-24 UNF
threads 03818100 AISI 316 Stainless Steel Conduit
330906-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX Fitting, 3/4-14 NPT
Spare 3300 NSv Reverse Mount Probe, M10 X 1 threads 03818101 AISI 316 Stainless Steel Conduit
330907-05-30-CXX-DXX-EXX Fitting, PG21 x M25
Option Descriptions
03818102 AISI 316 Stainless Steel Conduit
C: Total Length 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) Fitting, PG21 x M20
Option 10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 03818103 AISI 316 Stainless Steel Conduit
90 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) Fitting, PG21 x PG11
D: Connector Option 0 0 Connector not installed 03818104 AISI 303 Stainless Steel Cable
0 2 Miniature ClickLocTM coaxial Gland, PG11
connector
E: Agency Approval 0 0 Not required 03818105 AISI 316 Stainless Steel Cable
Option 0 5 Multiple Approvals Gland, M20
Sleeve and Blanking Plugs 03818111 Nickel-plated Brass Conduit Fitting,

PG21 x M20
104968-01 English Sleeve Plug, threaded,
303 stainless steel. 26650-01 AISI 303 Stainless Steel Reducer,
3/4-14 NPT to 1/2-14 NPT
104968-02 Metric Sleeve Plug,
threaded, 303 stainless steel.
Note: Plugs fill opening when sleeve is
removed from machine case.
104288-01 English Blanking Plug
104288-02 Metric Blanking Plug.
2002 Bently Nevada, LLC

used in this document are registered marks of Bently Nevada, LLC

Dimensional Drawing
Figure 1: Dimensions for 31000 and 32000 Proximity Probe Housings

Dimensions are in millimetres (inches)

All 4 holes in housing base, 1 per side, will accept sleeve or conduit fittings and cable glands.
Fittings are supplied with housing depending on English, metric or DIN type.
Hole plugs are provided to seal unused holes.
Installation Procedures
1. Install outer sleeve into machine case.
2. Insert probe sleeve and adjust probe gap.
3. Disconnect probe cable and fit housing over outer sleeve.
4. Slide retainer under retaining nut. Tighten nut.
5. Re-connect probe cable and Connector Protector.
6. Place housing cover on housing and tighten captive screws.
7. If hole plugs are used, tighten hole plug nuts to 0.5 N-m (5 in-lbs).
Figure 2: Vertical profile and horizontal profile views of the Proximity Probe Housings

Revision G, November 2006
330500 Velomitor Sensor

330525 Velomitor XA
Sensor
330530 Radiation Resistant
Velomitor Sensor
User's Guide
330500 Velomitor Sensor, 330525 Velomitor XA Sensor, 330530 Radiation Resistant Velomitor Sensor
User's Guide
Bently Nevada, LLC has attempted to identify areas of risk created by improper installation and/or
operation of this product. These areas of information are noted as DANGER, WARNING or
CAUTION for your protection and APPLICATION ALERT or APPLICATION ADVISORY for
the safe and effective operation of this equipment. Read all instructions before installing or operating
this product. Pay particular attention to those areas designated by the following notices.
Application Alert: Improper installation may result in a decrease in the

velocity sensor's amplitude and frequency response and/or generate
false signals that do not represent actual vibration.
DANGER
Removing the terminal strip
cover will expose the user to
elevated voltages. Contact with
exposed terminals may result in
severe injury or death. Remove
power from the unit before
attempting to service the relay
contacts.
Copyright 1991 Bently Nevada, LLC

All Rights Reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated
into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the
copyright owner.
The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Bently Nevada, LLC in the United States
and Other Countries:
ACM, Actionable Information, Actionable Information to the Right People at the Right Time, ADRE, ,
Asset Condition Management, Asset Condition Monitoring, Bently ALIGN, Bently BALANCE, Bently
DOCUVIEW, Bently LUBE, Bently Nevada, Bently PERFORMANCE, Bently RELIABILITY,
CableLoc, ClickLoc, Data Manager, Decision SupportSM, DemoNet, Dynamic Data Manager, Engineer
Assist, FieldMonitor, flexiTIM, FluidLoc, Helping You Protect and Manage All Your Machinery,
HydroScan, HydroView, Key , Keyphasor, Machine Condition Manager 2000,
MachineLibrary, Machine Manager, MicroPROX, Move Data, Not People, Move Information, Not
Data, NSv, Prime Spike, PROXPAC, Proximitor, REBAM, RuleDesk, SE, Seismoprobe,
Smart Monitor, Snapshot, System 1, System Extender, TDXnet, TDIXconnX, The Plant Asset
Management CompanySM, TipLoc, TorXimitor, Transient Data Manager, Trendmaster, TrimLoc,
Velomitor
Bently Nevadas Orbit logo and other logos associated with the trademarks in bold above, are also all
trademarks or registered trademarks of Bently Nevada in the United States and other countries.
Crescent is a trademark of Crescent Tool and Horseshoe Corporation.

Loctite is a trademark of Henkel Corporation.
ii
The following provides ways of contacting Bently Nevada for those times when you cannot contact
your local Bently Nevada representative:
Mailing Address 1631 Bently Parkway South

Minden, NV 89423
USA
Telephone 1 775 782 3611
1 800 227 5514
Fax 1 775 215 2876
Internet www.bently.com
Disposal Instructions Non-Nuclear Applications

Customers and third parties, who are not member states of the European
Union, who are in control of the product at the end of its life or at the end
of its use, are solely responsible for the proper disposal of the product.
No person, firm, corporation, association or agency that is in control of
product shall dispose of it in a manner that is in violation of any applicable
federal, state, local or international law. Bently Nevada LLC is not
responsible for the disposal of the product at the end of its life or at the
end of its use.
Disposal Instructions Nuclear Applications

This product is intended for use at nuclear site needs and it is the
responsibility of the respective site to correctly dispose of this hardware
as required by applicable regulations. The product is not covered under
the WEEE directive and no person, firm, corporation, association or
agency that is in control of product shall dispose of it in a manner that is
in violation of any applicable federal, state, local or international law.
Bently Nevada LLC is not responsible for the disposal of the product at
the end of its life or at the end of its use.
iii
User's Guide
Foreword
This manual describes the Bently Nevada Velomitor Sensor, a piezo-
velocity sensor, and contains instructions for its installation and
maintenance. If you need additional assistance contact the nearest Bently
Nevada LLC office.
This manual is intended for technicians and engineers experienced in the
use of electronic instrumentation and machinery monitoring equipment.
Section 1 describes the Velomitor Sensor, tells how it works, and lists
applications and optional accessories. This section also includes
information on the Bently Nevada machinery monitoring systems that are
compatible with the Velomitor Sensor.
Section 2 gives instructions for receiving and inspecting the Velomitor

Sensor, choosing the proper monitoring points, and mounting the device.
This section also shows how to install connecting cables.
Section 3 tells how to maintain the Velomitor Sensor by describing the

test procedures and equipment needed to verify that the device is
operating properly.
Section 4 contains instructions for field-testing and troubleshooting

problems with the Velomitor Sensor and compatible Bently Nevada
monitoring systems.
Section 5 provides detailed specifications and sensitivity curves

representing typical Velomitor Sensor operation.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
3500/42M Proximitor/Seismic Monitor Operation and Maintenance
Manual, 143489-01
3300/55 Dual Velocity Monitor Operation Manual, 130747-01
3300/55 Dual Velocity Monitor Maintenance Manual, 130748-01
iv
Contents
Section 1 Operating Information..................................................... 1
Application......................................................................................................................................... 1
Principle of Operation ........................................................................................................................ 1
Ordering Options and Accessories..................................................................................................... 3
Velomitor Sensor Options........................................................................................................... 3
Mounting Adapters Option AA................................................................................................. 4
Agency Approvals Option BB .................................................................................................. 4
Compatible Monitoring Systems and Connections............................................................................ 4
Cable Options..................................................................................................................................... 8
Transducer Accessories.................................................................................................................... 15
Section 2 Installation...................................................................... 17
Receiving Inspection........................................................................................................................ 17
Installing the Transducer.................................................................................................................. 17
Positioning the Sensor.................................................................................................................. 17
Mounting...................................................................................................................................... 17
Installing Connecting Cable............................................................................................................. 18
Routing Cable (for Velomitor Sensor 330500)......................................................................... 18
Routing Armored Cable ............................................................................................................... 21
Sealing the Connecting Cable ...................................................................................................... 21
Section 3 Maintenance................................................................... 23
Test Setup......................................................................................................................................... 24
Performance Test Procedure ............................................................................................................ 25
Polarity Test Procedure.................................................................................................................... 26
Installation Note............................................................................................................................... 26
Section 4 Field Testing and Troubleshooting.............................. 27
Fault Indication #1 Cause/Solution............................................................................................... 27
Section 5 Specifications ................................................................ 29
Standard Use Specifications (330500, 330525) ............................................................................... 29
Nuclear Use Specifications (330530)............................................................................................... 30
Mechanical Drawing (330500, 330530) .......................................................................................... 31
Mechanical Drawing (330525) ........................................................................................................ 32
v
User's Guide
vi
Section 1 Operating Information

Application
Velocity sensors measure machinery casing vibration and are used on
machines where using eddy current proximity transducers are not
practical. Typical applications include pumps, electric motors,
compressors, and fans.
The 330525 Velomitor XA Sensor is designed for applications where a
transducer housing is either unnecessary or not desired.
The 330530 Radiation-Resistant Velomitor Sensor is designed for
applications requiring a resistance to the effects of gamma-radiation.
Application Alert: Casing measurements may not be appropriate for

some machinery protection applications.
If you measure the velocity of casing vibration to protect machinery,

evaluate the usefulness of the measurement for each application. Most
common machine malfunctions, such as unbalance or misalignment,
occur on the rotor and originate as an increase (or at least a change) in
rotor vibration. In order for any casing measurement alone to be effective
for overall machine protection, the machine must faithfully transmit a
significant amount of rotor vibration to the machine casing or mounting
location of the sensor.
Exercise care when physical installing of the sensor on the bearing
housing or machine casing. Section 2 tells how to install the sensor.
Application Alert: Improper installation may result in a decrease in the

velocity sensor's amplitude and frequency response and/or generate
false signals that do not represent actual vibration.
Principle of Operation
The Velomitor Sensor is a piezoelectric velocity sensor. The sensing
element of the device is a piezoelectric ceramic shear-mode element and
electronics. When subjected to machinery vibration, this system exerts a
force on the piezoelectric ceramic, which generates a signal proportional
to that force. The sensor internally amplifies and integrates this signal to
produce a low-noise output signal that is proportional to velocity.
Application Advisory: A sudden mechanical impulse may cause the

piezoelectric velocity sensor to generate a low frequency signal that
does not represent actual machinery vibration. This signal may change
the state of alarm and/or danger relays.
1
User's Guide
The Velomitor Sensor is designed to monitor vibration in frequencies
ranging from:
330500: 4.5 Hz to 5 kHz
330525: 4.5 Hz to 2 kHz
330530: 4.5 Hz to 5 kHz
The sensor has a calibrated sensitivity of 100 mV/in/s (4 mV/mm/s) and
some of the sensors can measure velocities up to 50 in/sec pk (1270
mm/s pk) see the specification section for details. The stainless steel
casing protects the Velomitor Sensor in highly corrosive environments.
The operating temperature range is from -67F to 250F (-55C to
121C).
Traditional velocity sensors consist of either a moving wire coil
surrounding a fixed magnet or a fixed wire coil surrounding a moving
magnet. The Velomitor Sensor is more accurate than traditional
velocity sensors. Because the Velomitor Sensor contains no moving
parts, it is also more durable and less sensitive to transverse motion than
traditional seismic transducers. Its piezoelectric sensing element and
solid-state circuitry let the Velomitor Sensor withstand years of
continuous use.
The Velomitor Sensor is a two-wire device that requires an external
power supply. The power supply must provide a DC voltage of 22 to 30
Volts and a current of 10 mA. A constant current diode must be used to
limit the current to the sensor to 2.5 to 6 mA. Figure 1-1 shows a simple
block diagram of the Velomitor Sensor system.
(1) Velomitor Sensor

(2) Pin A
(3) Pin B
(4) Shielded cable
(5) A white
(6) B black
(7) SHLD
(8) Constant current source
(9) DC voltage supply
Figure 1-1.
2
The Velomitor Sensor internal circuitry automatically sets the DC output

bias when a constant current is supplied. The DC bias and AC signal
appears between pins "A" and "B".
Application Alert: Use a constant current diode or other current-

regulating circuitry to provide power to the Velomitor Sensor. Failure
to do so may result in damage to the device and/or improper operation.
Compatible Bently Nevada monitoring systems provide the power

required by the Velomitor Sensor without the need for additional
external circuitry.
Ordering Options and Accessories

Velomitor Sensor Options
When ordering a Velomitor Sensor you may choose from the following
list of options.
Table 1-1 Ordering Information
Part Number Options Description

330500 AA BB
01 1/2 - 20 UNF P/N: 89409-01
02 M8 X 1 P/N: 89410-01
03 1/4 - 28 UNF P/N: 89411-01
04 1/4 - 20 UNC P/N: 89412-01
05 1/4 - 18 NPT P/N: 89413-01
06 5/8-18 UNF P/N: 04300015
07 3/8-16 UNC P/N: 165025-01
08 1/2-13 UNC P/N: 161191
00 No Approvals

330525 AA
00 No Approvals
01 CSA Approvals
02 ATEX Approvals
3
User's Guide

330530 AA
01 1/2 - 20 UNF P/N: 89409-01
02 M8 X 1 P/N: 89410-01
03 1/4 - 28 UNF P/N: 89411-01
04 1/4 - 20 UNC P/N: 89412-01
05 1/4 - 18 NPT P/N: 89413-01
06 5/8-18 UNF P/N: 04300015
07 3/8-16 UNC P/N: 165025-01
08 1/2-13 UNC P/N: 161191
Mounting Adapters Option AA

The base of the 330500 and 330530 Velomitor Sensor are machined
with a 3/8-24 internal thread that will accommodate a variety of
purchased or customer-manufactured mounting studs. Bently Nevada
offers the 7 adapter studs listed in Table 1-1. You can order one stud with
each transducer or purchase the studs separately. Table 1-1 also lists
Bently Nevada part numbers used for ordering separate adapter studs.
The base of the 330525 Velomitor Sensor is machined with a 1/4-18
NPT external thread.
Agency Approvals Option BB

Consult your local Bently Nevada sales representative for information
regarding hazardous area approvals.
Compatible Monitoring Systems and Connections

The Velomitor Sensor is compatible with the Bently Nevada 3500/42
Proximitor/Seismic Monitor and 3300/55 Dual Velocity Monitor.
For more information on the 3500/42 and 3300/55 please refer to Bently
Nevada data sheets 143694-01 and 141516-01, respectively.
Connections to the "A" and "B" terminals of the Velomitor Sensor are
made through the terminal connector of the interconnect cable. At the
monitor end of the cable, connect the cable "A" lead to the "A" terminal on
the monitor and the "B" lead to the "B" terminal. The terminal
connections appear in Figures 1-2 through 1-4. Refer to the 3500/42 and
3300/55 Monitor Manuals (P/Ns 143489-01, 130747-01 and 130748-01,
respectively) for further information.
4
(1) 3500/42 Prox/Velom I/O Module with internal terminations, Velomitor

Sensor input.
(2) Wiring shown for Channels 1 and 2. Wiring typical for Channels 3 and 4.
(3) Channel 1 Velomitor Sensor
(5) Velomitor Sensor top view
Figure 1-2. 3500/42 Monitor with Prox/Velom I/O Module
5
User's Guide
(1) Wiring shown for Channels 1 and 2. Wiring typical for Channels 3 and 4.
(2) 3500 Prox/Velom I/O Module with internal terminations, Velomitor
Sensor input with external barriers.
(3) Safe area or Zone 2, Division 2
(4) Hazardous area
(7) Velomitor Sensor top view
Figure 1-3. 3500/42 Monitor with Prox/Velom I/O Module with External
Barriers
6
(1) Signal input relay module location

(2) Channel A recorder output
(3) Channel B recorder output
(4) Alert relay contacts
(5) Danger relay contacts
(6) Signal input relay module, dual relays
(7) Channel A Velomitor Sensor
(8) Channel B Velomitor Sensor
Figure 1-4. 3300 System Connections (3300/55 Monitor)
7
User's Guide
Cable Options
The Velomitor Sensor requires a two-conductor cable. We recommend
using shielded cable to minimize noise interference. Table 1-2 describes
the Bently Nevada cables used with the 330500 Velomitor Sensor,
Table 1-3 describes the cables used with the 330525 Velomitor Sensor,
and Table 1-4 describes the cables used with the 330530 Radiation
Resistant Velomitor Sensor. Figures 1-5 through 1-9 show the
configuration of the cable and connector for each of the sensors.
Table 1-2. 330500 Velomitor Sensor Interconnect Cable and

Accessories
APPLICATION P/N CABLE DESCRIPTION
Standard Temperature 9571-AA Shielded 22 AWG cable
Unarmored Cable with moisture-resistant
female socket connector at
transducer end, ring lugs at
monitor end.
Standard Temperature 84661-AA Same as 9571-AA but with
Armored Cable flexible stainless steel
armored cable.
Cable for use with weather- 89477-AA Two-conductor shielded
proof housing cable with a connector
adapted for use with the
21128 Velocity Transducer
Housing Assembly.
Bulk Cable 02173006 Two-conductor shielded 18
AWG bulk cable. Specify
number of feet.
Spare Connector 00531061 Velomitor Sensor Cable
Connector
Spare Connector Clamp 00530574 Connector Clamp
Table 1-3. 330525 Velomitor Sensor Interconnect Cable and

Accessories
Standard Temperature 106765-AA Flexible Stainless Steel
Armored Cable Armored Cable
number of feet.
Spare Boot 03839144 Fluorosilicone Elastomer
Boot
Spare Boot Clamps 03839142 Bottom Clamp
03839143 Top Clamp
8
Table 1-4. 330530 Velomitor Sensor Interconnect Cable and Accessories

Standard Temperature 330533-AA Shielded 18 AWG cable
Unarmored Cable with moisture-resistant
female socket connector at
transducer end, ring lugs at
monitor end.
number of feet.
Spare Connector 00531061 Velomitor Sensor Cable
Connector
9
User's Guide
PART NUMBER 9571 - (SEE NOTE)
NOTE
ORDER IN INCREMENTS OF 1.0 FOOT (0.30 m)
EXAMPLE: 0 2 2 FEET (0.61 m)
2 5 25 FEET (7.6 m)
MINIMUM LENGTH = 2 FEET (0.61 m)

MAXIMUM LENGTH = 99 FEET (30 m)
(1) Cable 2-22 AWG conductor shielded, Teflon insulated

(2) Clear shrink tubing, 63.5 mm (2.5 in)
(3) 51 mm 13 mm (2.00 in 0.5 in)
(4) A, white
(5) B, black
(6) 126 mm 13 mm (5.00 in 0.5 in)
(7) SHLD, green
(8) Overall length 150 mm ( 6.0 in)
Figure 1-5. 9571 Cable for use with 330500 Velomitor Sensor
10
NOTE
2 5 25 FEET (7.6 m)

(1) Stainless steel armor over cable

(2) Clear shrink tubing, 63.5 mm (2.5 in) typical
(3) 635 mm 76 mm (25.0 in 3.00 in)
(4) 51 mm 13 mm (2.00 in 0.5 in)
(5) A, white
(6) B, black
(7) 126 mm 13 mm (5.00 in 0.5 in)
(8) SHLD, green
11
User's Guide
1
2
NOTE
2 5 25 FEET (7.6 m)

(1) Schematic
(2) A, white
(3) B, black
(4) SHLD, green
12
NOTE
ORDER IN INCREMENTS OF 3.0 METER (9.8ft)
EXAMPLE: 1 0 10 METER (33 ft)
2 5 25 METER (82 ft)
MINIMUM LENGTH = 1 METER (3.3 ft)

MAXIMUM LENGTH = 25 METER (82.0 ft)
1. 2-pin connector 11. Approvals label

2. Stainless steel armor, FEP coated 12. B, black
3. 7/8 single snap-grip hose clamp 13. SHLD, green
14. Nickel-plated copper Teflon insulated
4. 15/32 single snap-grip hose clamp ring terminal (size #6 stud) typical, 3
places
5. BN part number and serial number
15. Overall length 150 mm ( 6 in)
label
6. A, white 16. Shield
7. 38.1 mm (1.50 in) maximum 17. Green
8. 14.5 mm (0.57 in) maximum 18. White
9. Fluorosilicone elastomer oil-resistant
19. Black
boot
10. 2-conductor shielded and jacketed
20. Figure B, Wiring Diagram
cable
13
User's Guide
NOTE
2 5 25 FEET (7.6 m)

(1) Cable 2-18 AWG conductor shielded, Tefzel insulated

(2) Clear shrink tubing, 63.5 mm (2.5 in)
(3) 51 mm 13 mm (2.00 in 0.5 in)
(4) A, white
(5) B, black
(6) 126 mm 13 mm (5.00 in 0.5 in)
(7) SHLD, green
Application Advisory: This cable is not like most other Velomitor

cables in that the shield and drain wire are connected to the sensors
connector. The sensor is connected to the machine that should be
correctly grounded. So the sensor is the primary shield grounding point.
See the special installation details in the section below.
14
Transducer Accessories
ACCESSORY BENTLY NEVADA PART NO.
Velocity Transducer Requires a 21128
Housing Assembly 1/2 - 20 UNF
Velomitor
Sensor
adapter stud.
Quick Connect Requires a 46122-01
1/2 - 20 UNF
Semi-permanent Velomitor
mounting method Sensor
using permanently adapter stud.
mounted bolts.
Several bolts can be
mounted and a single
velocity transducer
carried from bolt to
bolt to measure
vibration.
Super Mag 100 Requires a 46000-01
1/4 - 28 UNF
Quick temporary Velomitor
method for mounting a Sensor
velocity transducer. adapter stud.
Junction Boxes 03818016 (Body and Cover)
03818022 (Cavity extension)
Weather proof or explosion proof 03818065 (1/2 inch Conduit)
housing for making electrical (1.27 cm)
connections to interconnect cables. 03818066 (3/4 inch Conduit)
(1.91 cm)
Flexible Conduit 1/2 in. (1.27 cm) 14847 - AA
3/4 in. (1.91 cm) 14848 - AA
A convenient way to protect cables

from moisture and abrasion. AA - Specifies required length
(See Bently Nevada Catalog or your local Bently Nevada Sales Representative for
details.)
15
User's Guide
16
Receiving Inspection
Inspect the components of the your order as soon as you receive them for any
shipping damage. Keep all shipping forms and invoices. If you discover any
shipping damage, file a claim with the carrier and submit a copy to Bently
Nevada LLC. Include all model numbers and serial numbers with the claim. We
will either repair or replace damaged parts according to the terms and conditions
of the sale.
The velocity sensor is shipped in a protective package and the connector will be
protected with a plastic cap. The Velomitor Sensor is a sensitive instrument
and these precautions help to prevent damage during shipping.
Application Alert: Leave the protective cap on the connector until the final field
wiring connection is made. This will prevent foreign debris from contaminating
the connector possibly causing performance issues.
Installing the Transducer

Positioning the Sensor
For optimum performance and accurate measurements, place the velocity
sensor at a position on the machine casing that is most responsive to vibration.
Proper placement is often dependent on the application. Bently Nevada offers
Machinery Diagnostic Services, which can help determine the best place to
mount the sensor for your application.
Mounting
Follow these steps to install the Velomitor Sensor:
Applies to the 330500 and 330530 Velomitor Sensors:
Step 1. Verify that the ambient temperature and the temperature of the
installation surface are within the temperature rating of the transducer.
Step 2. Verify that the mounting site is flat, clean, and dry. The sensor requires
a flat surface at least 1.25 inches in diameter. For the best results the roughness
of the mounting surface should be no more than 32 micro-inch RMS and its
flatness should be at least .0008 inches Total Indicator Reading (TIR).
Step 3. Determine if the sensor requires a protective housing for the sensor.
We recommend using the Velocity Transducer Housing Assembly (P/N 21128) if
maintenance operations will expose the Velomitor Sensor or its connecting
cable to possible physical damage or if the sensor will operate in an environment
containing solvents, corrosives, or excessive moisture.
Step 4. Drill and tap the mounting hole to the dimensions required by the
adapter stud. Drill the hole so that the sensitive axis of the transducer will be
perpendicular to a tangential plane on the machine casing. For the best results
the hole should be within 6 minutes of perpendicular.
17
330500 Velomitor Sensor, 330525 Velomitor XA Sensor, 330530 Radiation Resistant Velomitor Sensor User's
Guide
Step 5. Apply one drop of Loctite 242 brand or an equivalent adhesive to both
ends of the mounting stud.
Step 6. Apply a small portion of Sperry Multi-Purpose Ultrasonic Couplant (P/N
04567900) to the mounting surface.
Step 7. With the adapter stud tightened to the Velomitor Sensor torque the
sensor to the machine case to 40 in-lb (4.5 N-m).
Applies to 330525 Velomitor Sensor:

Step 1. Verify that the ambient temperature and the temperature of the
installation surface are within the temperature rating of the transducer.
Step 2. Verify that the mounting site will be suitable for drilling and tapping a
hole for a 1/4-18 NPT thread. Consider the hole depth and casing thickness
when selecting a mounting site for the transducer.
Step 4. Drill and tap the mounting hole to the dimensions required by the 1/4-18
NPT stud. Standard drill size and depth is 7/16-inch and 0.90 inch, respectively.
Drill the hole so that the sensitive axis of the transducer will be perpendicular to
a tangential plane on the machine casing. For the best results, the holes should
be within 30 minutes of perpendicular. When hand tight, the mounting stud of
the transducer will have 2 or 3 threads exposed.
Step 5. Using a Crescent or socket wrench, tighten the 330525 Velomitor
Sensor to the mounting site to turn past hand tight engagement. This
corresponds to a mounting torque of approximately 400 in-lb.
Installing Connecting Cable

Application Alert: Improper routing of cables through conduit can fray the
wiring, which may result in a short or loss of signal.
Application Alert: If the sensor field wiring is reversed, then the bias voltage of
Velomitor Sensor output will be within the monitors OK limits, but the unit will
not generate a vibration signal. The product specification lists the valid voltage
bias limits for the different Velomitor Sensors. The sensor must be within these
limits to have a valid output signal.
Application Advisory: When routing the cable, consider protecting the cable
from exposure to RF (radio frequency) energy by shielding the cable via
grounded metal surfaces when possible. The product has been design to
tolerate this interference, but careful routing of the cable can improve signal
quality.
Routing Cable (for Velomitor Sensor 330500)

Bently Nevada LLC supplies connecting cables with ring lugs or military-type
circular connectors. The cable connector must be compatible with the
Velomitor Sensor connector.
Route the connecting cable away from the moving components of the machine
and avoid sharp corners during installation. To minimize noise, avoid routing
18
cables in the same cable tray with high voltage power lines. Tie the cable to a
stationary part of the machine to prevent it from whipping and premature failure.
Prevent the cable from bending sharply, twisting, kinking, knotting, or straining.
To prevent physical damage route the cable through conduit. Before pulling
cable through conduit, wrap the connector or terminals with tape or a similar
covering to protect them from damage. Ensure that the cable does not rub
against rough or sharp surfaces.

Bently Nevada LLC supplies connecting cables with military-type circular
connectors. The cable connector must be compatible with the 330525
Velomitor Sensor connector. The 106765-AA cable assembly includes a quick
connect/disconnect connector and clamps to secure and seal the splash-
resistant boot.
The cable assembly comes with the top clamp secured in position and the
bottom clamp looped around the boot. Use a small screwdriver to open the
clamps by prying the teeth of the clamps apart. Slide the boot back to reveal the
connector. This will allow the cable assembly to easily install on the transducer.
Once the connector is engaged, slide the boot down over the connector
assembly and top of the transducer. The groove on the inside bottom of the
boot should fit neatly over the lip above the hex flats. The grooves on the
outside of the boot at the top and bottom indicate the placement of the clamps.
Secure the clamps with pliers.

Bently Nevada LLC supplies connecting cables with ring lugs or military-type
circular connectors. The cable connector must be compatible with the
Velomitor Sensor connector.
Route the connecting cable away from the moving components of the machine
and avoid sharp corners during installation. To minimize noise, avoid routing
cables in the same cable tray with high voltage power lines. Tie the cable to a
stationary part of the machine to prevent it from whipping and premature failure.
Prevent the cable from bending sharply, twisting, kinking, knotting, or straining.
To prevent physical damage route the cable through conduit. Before pulling
cable through conduit, wrap the connector or terminals with tape or a similar
covering to protect them from damage. Ensure that the cable does not rub
against rough or sharp surfaces.
The radiation resistant cable 330533 is built from materials that are tolerant to
gamma-radiation, but the life of the cable can be extended, if during installation,
the cable should be routed in a manner to shield or keep the maximum distant
between the cable and the radiation sources.
One possible installation scenario involves piping which the fluid has radioactive
material floating in it. In this instance you should not strap the cable to the
piping, but instead try to route the cable away from the radiation source as soon
as the cable leaves the sensors connection interface.
19
Guide
Special installation instruction for 330530s cable (330533) and installation
in nuclear environments
This cable has the shield and drain wire connected at the sensors connector.
The sensor should be correctly grounded on the machine and so this becomes
the primary shield grounding point inside containment. Our best practice says
that only one point should be used to connect to the cables shield and so to
keep with this practice, an isolation capacitor needs to be installed, see diagram
for our recommendation.
(1) B, black
(2) A, white
(3) SHLD
(4) Capacitor, 0.01uF to 0.05, minimum of 300 V
(5) Feed-through Terminal Block, Outside Containment
(6) Feed-through Terminal Block, Inside Containment
(7) Velomitor Sensor Connector
(8) Typical Monitor
(9) Wall of Containment
Figure 2-1. Recommendations for 330533 Cable Hook-up
Application Advisory: The capacitor is required to prevent ground loops. If

the case of the machine that the 330530 is mounted to is not at the same
voltage potential as the monitors common, a current will flow through the shield
of the interconnect cable. This low level current could cause false readings or
trips. At high levels, this current could destroy the monitor if the capacitor is not
used.
20
Routing Armored Cable

If you will not route the cable inside conduit, use armored cable and secure it to
supporting surfaces with clips or similar devices. Route the cable through
protected areas to reduce the chance of damage. Connect one end of the armor
directly to the enclosure or other structure in which the monitor is mounted.
Rigidly connect the other end of the armor to a structure near the Velomitor
Sensor. The recommended minimum bend radius for armored cable is 1.5
inches (38.1 mm).
Sealing the Connecting Cable

When conduit-enclosed cable is routed through oil or gaseous environments,
seal the ends of the conduit to prevent leakage into the protected enclosure.
Table 2-1 describes the strategies for sealing conduit and the differential
pressures for which they apply.
Table 2-1. Conduit Sealing Techniques

Differential Pressure Seal Type
Less than one atmosphere ZY5 cable seal similar to Bently Nevada
P/N 10076-AA or duct seal putty.
Greater than one atmosphere Special interconnecting cable. (Contact

Bently Nevada for details.)
Bently Nevada cable seals protect against splash and abrasion but they do not
protect against immersion. Contact Bently Nevada if greater protection is
required.
21
Guide
22
Section 3 Maintenance
This section shows how to check the performance of the Velomitor Sensor.
Table 3-1 lists the recommended maintenance equipment. If the required
equipment is not available, contact the nearest Bently Nevada LLC field office,
or a testing laboratory for testing.
Table 3-1. Recommended Maintenance Equipment
Recommended Equipment Specification
MB Dynamics
Model PM50 Exciter Shake Table
MB Dynamics, Model 2250 Power

Amplifier
Krohn-Hite Model 1200A Function

Generator (Bently Nevada P/N 02280852)
Bently Nevada LLC

Model 330180-50-00 Proximitor Sensor
Model 330101-00-08-10-02-00 Probe
Model 330130-040-00-00 Extension
Cable
Power Supply, Bently Nevada TK15 -24.0 Vdc with minimum output current of
20 mA and less than 5 mV peak-peak
noise
AISI 4140 Steel Target Material 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick, 0.85 inch
(21.6 mm) diameter, 16 in pp (0.41 m
pp)
3 mA (Motorola P/N 1N5309) current

diode Bently Nevada P/N 00643485
23
Guide
Test Setup
(1) Oscilloscope
(2) Proximitor Sensor
(1) Pin B (black)
(2) Pin A (white)
(3) Probe
(5) Target
(6) Shake table
(7) Power amplifier
(8) Signal generator
(9) 3 mA current diode
(10) 24Vdc TK-15
Figure 3-1
Step 1. Connect test equipment as shown in Figure 3-1.

Step 2. Mount the 4140 steel target to the shake table so that it is rigidly
attached to the moving armature as shown in Figure 3-2.
24

(2) Probe
(3) Target
(4) Shake table base
Figure 3-2
Step 3. Mount a 3300 XL 8mm, 1 meter probe (P/N 330101) such that it is
isolated from the motion of the shake table.
Step 4. Connect the probe to a four meter extension cable (P/N 330130-040-
00-00) and Proximitor Sensor (P/N 330180-50-00).
Step 5 Apply -24 Vdc power to the Proximitor Sensor and monitor the output
with a voltmeter or oscilloscope.
Note: The accuracy of the system can be improved by mounting the probe and
target on the same axis as the sensitive axis of the Velomitor Sensor and by
verifying that there is no mechanical resonance in the probe or target fixture at
the frequency of calibration (100 Hz).
Step 6. Mount the velocity sensor to be checked on the shake table and tighten
by hand.
Step 7. Adjust the probe-to-target gap so that the Proximitor Sensor output is
at midrange, -10.0 0.5 Vdc.
Step 8. Connect the velocity transducer to the oscilloscope or voltmeter as
shown in Figure 3-1.
Performance Test Procedure

Step 1. Set the signal generator to 100 1 Hz and adjust the power amplifier
gain so that the Proximitor Sensor output is .318 .003 volts peak-to-peak
(0.112 0.001 Vrms). This signal corresponds to a peak-to-peak displacement
of 0.00159 inches (0.0404 mm) and a peak-to-peak velocity of 1.0 inch per
second (25.4 mm/s).
25
Guide
Step 2. Verify that the output of the velocity sensor is between .095 and .105
volts peak-to-peak (.0336 to .0371 Vrms). If the output is not in this range, return
the unit to the factory.
Polarity Test Procedure

Use this test to verify the proper phase response. Any out-of-phase response
will adversely affect machinery balancing.
Step 1. Connect the cable as shown in the setup in Figure 3-1.
Step 2. Set the time base on the oscilloscope to 20 milliseconds/division.
Step 3. Hold the velocity sensor in hand and tap the bottom. Verify that the
waveform on the oscilloscope first goes positive as shown in Figure 3-3. If it
goes negative first, return the unit to the factory for replacement.
(1) Display goes positive
Figure 3-3
Installation Note
Verify that the connector and the mating part of the sensor both are free of any
foreign debris. If required, clear out material before connecting parts to prevent
shorting out of the signal.
26
Section 4 Field Testing and Troubleshooting
Section 4 Field Testing and

Troubleshooting
Use the following procedure to test an installed Velomitor Sensor and isolate a
suspected malfunction. The Velomitor Sensor is a hermetically sealed unit with
no adjustments or field repairable components. If you determine that the
Velomitor Sensor is not functioning properly, return it to a factory authorized
repair center for further evaluation and disposition.
When the Velomitor Sensor is used with a Bently Nevada monitoring system,
the system indicates a sensor fault when the monitor's OK LED goes OFF. A
fault may be due to a sensor malfunction or a malfunction in the field wiring.
Before troubleshooting a suspected problem: first check to make sure that the
sensor has been correctly installed, all connections are secured and in the
proper locations. If the sensor is properly installed, use the following steps to
help identify the problem.
Fault Indication #1 Cause/Solution

Bently Nevada Monitor OK LED is off
Monitor Power is off.
Check that the monitor power supply is plugged in and power is on.
Interconnect cable is disconnected, connected loosely, or connected to

the wrong monitor.
Verify that the sensor is connected to the correct monitor and to the correct
monitor terminals. Check that the screws are tight.
Interconnect cable is not connected, connection is loose at the sensor, or

sensor is open/shorted.
Verify that the sensor is connected either visually or by measuring the DC bias
voltage between terminals A and B on the monitor (with the cable connected
to the sensor and monitor). The absolute value should be 123 Vdc. If the
measured DC bias voltage is not within the values indicated and the
interconnect cable has been verified not to be a problem (by using the next two
steps), then the sensor may be damaged.
Interconnect Cable is Damaged: Shorted

Visually inspect the interconnect cable for apparent damage. Disconnect the
interconnect cable at both ends and measure the resistance between the two
conductors, "A" to "B". If the measurement is intermittent or shorted, then
replace the cable.
Interconnect Cable is Damaged: Open

Disconnect the interconnect cable at both ends. Then short the two conductors
together at one end and measure the resistance of the cable at the other end. If
the cable is open circuited, replace the cable.
27
Guide

Unusually low vibration with non-machine related low level, broadband
noise.
Sensor signal is not isolated, is shorted to the case or has noise coupled
to the signal.
Use the following procedure:

Step 1: Measure the resistance between the A terminal pin and the sensor
case. Repeat the resistance measurement from the B terminal pin to the
sensor case. Resistance should be 1M or greater.
Step 2: Inspect and/or clean sensor connector to remove foreign debris.
Step 3: Repeat resistance measurement of step 1. Replace sensor if resistance
is not 1M or greater.

Monitor is indicating transducer is OK (not-OK indicator is off), but there
is no vibration signal.
Sensor wiring is mis-wired or faulty Velomitor Sensor.
Use the following procedure:

Step 1: Measure the bias voltage of the sensor at the monitor terminals.
Normally the voltage should be around 12 volts reference to the B terminal. If
the voltage is outside the specification limits (like 7 volts for the 330530) the
transducer wiring is most likely reversed.
Step 2: At the monitor input terminal reverse the wiring connection between A
terminal and B terminal.
Step 3: Retest the sensor as described in Step 1. If the voltage level is still
outside the specification limits then the Velomitor Sensor is most likely at fault.
28
Section 5 Specifications
Standard Use Specifications (330500, 330525)
Parameters are specified at 77 F (25 C) unless otherwise indicated.
330500 Velomitor 330525 Velomitor

Sensor XA Sensor
Electrical
Sensitivity 4 mV/mm/s (100 mV/in/s) 5% at 100 Hz
Frequency Response 0.9 dB, 6.0 Hz to 2.5 kHz 0.9 dB, 6.0 Hz to 1.0 kHz
3.0 dB, 4.5 Hz to 5.0 kHz 3.0 dB, 4.5 Hz to 2.0 kHz
Velocity Range 1270 mm/s (50 in/s), peak
Transverse Sensitivity <5% of axial sensitivity
Amplitude Linearity 2% to 6.0 in/s, peak
Mounted Resonant 12 kHz, minimum
Frequency
Power Requirements DC Voltage: -22 to -30 Vdc
Bias Current: 2.5 to 6.0 mA
Output Bias Voltage -12.03.0 Vdc, Over Temperature
Referenced to pin A
Dynamic Output Impedance <2400
Broadband Noise Floor < 0.004 mm/s (160 in/s)
Grounding Case Isolated
Maximum Cable Length 305 m (1000 ft) with no signal degradation
Environmental
Operating Temperature -55 C to 121 C (-67 F to 250 F)
Range
Shock Limit 5000 gs, peak
Humidity Limit 100% Relative (hermetically sealed)
Mechanical
Weight 150 g, (5.3 oz), typical
Dimensions See Figures 5-1 See Figures 5-1
Case Material 304L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel
Connector 2 pin Mil-C-5015, 2 pin Mil-C-26482,
hermetically sealed, hermetically sealed,
304 stainless steel shell 304 stainless steel shell
Mounting Torque 4.5 N-m (40 in-lbs) 45.3 N-m (400 in-lbs)
Polarity Pin A goes positive with respect to Pin B when the sensor
case motion is toward the connector.
Note: Operation outside the specified limits will result in false readings or loss of machine
monitoring.
29
User's Guide
Nuclear Use Specifications (330530)

Parameters are specified at 77 F (25 C) unless otherwise indicated.
330530 Velomitor 330530 Velomitor

Sensor Sensor
(Pre-Radiation) (Post Radiation)
Electrical
Sensitivity 4 mV/mm/s (100 mV/in/s) 4 mV/mm/s (100 mV/in/s)
5% at 100 Hz 10% at 100 Hz
Frequency Response 0.9 dB, 6.0 Hz to 2.5 kHz 1.0 dB, 6.0 Hz to 2.5 kHz
3.0 dB, 4.5 Hz to 5.0 kHz 3.0 dB, 4.5 Hz to 5.0 kHz
Velocity Range 635 mm/s (25 in/s), peak 420 mm/s (16.5 in/s), peak
Transverse Sensitivity < 5% of axial sensitivity
Amplitude Linearity 2% to 6.0 in/s, peak
Mounted Resonant 12 kHz, minimum
Frequency
Power Requirements DC Voltage: -22 to -30 Vdc
Bias Current: 2.5 to 6.0 mA
Output Bias Voltage, -12.01.0 Vdc, Room Temp -12.02.0 Vdc, Room Temp
referenced pin B to pin A -12.03.45 Vdc, Over Temp -12.03.7 Vdc. Over Temp
Referenced to pin A Referenced to pin A
Dynamic Output Impedance < 2400
Broadband Noise Floor < 0.008 mm/s (320 in/s)
Grounding Case Isolated
Maximum Cable Length 305 m (1000 ft) with no signal degradation
Environmental
Operating Temperature -55 C to 121 C (-67 F to 250 F)
Range
Shock Limit 5000 gs, peak
Humidity Limit 100% Relative (hermetically sealed)
Radiation Dosage 3 Mrads, maximum guarantee,
See White-paper for test summary
Mechanical
Weight 150 g, (5.3 oz), typical
Dimensions See Figures 5-1
Case Material 304L Stainless Steel
Connector 2 pin Mil-C-5015, hermetically sealed,
304 stainless steel shell
Mounting Torque 4.5 N-m (40 in-lbs)
Polarity Pin A goes positive with respect to Pin B when the sensor
case motion is toward the connector.
Note: Operation outside the specified limits will result in false readings or loss of machine
monitoring.
30
Mechanical Drawing (330500, 330530)
1
25.3mm [0.995]
18.0mm [0.71]
63.2mm [2.49]
44.2mm [1.74]
33.0mm [1.30]
0.4 mm [0.015]
32
21.3mm [0.84]
(1) 25.4 mm [1.00] hexagonal

(2) MIL-C-5015 stainless steel receptacle, 2-pin, 5/8 24 UNEF-2A
(3) 3/8 24 UNF-2B x .25 DP, minimum, C-bore .50 x .03 DP
Notes:
1. Dimensions are in millimetres [inches]
2. Finished machine surfaces

3. Tolerances:
Decimal .XX = 0.3 mm [0.01]
.XXX = .13 mm [.005]
Figure 5-1
31
User's Guide
Mechanical Drawing (330525)
1
2
70.1mm [2.76]
44.7mm [1.76]
34.3mm [1.35]
5.1mm [0.20] 14.2mm [0.56]
27.8mm [1.10]
(1) 25.4 mm [1.00] hexagonal

(2) MIL-C-26482 stainless steel receptacle, 2-pin
(3) 1/4 18 NPT
Notes:
1. Dimensions are in millimetres [inches]
2. Finished machine surfaces

3. Tolerances:
Decimal .XX = 0.3 mm [0.01]
.XXX = .13 mm [.005]
Figure 5-2
32
21128, CA21128, BA42608 Velocity Transducer
Housings
Description
Velocity Transducer Housings protect velocity sensors from damage caused by
hose-directed water, corrosion, physical abuse, or other adverse environmental
conditions.
Constructed of 303 stainless steel, these housings are designed to meet NEMA
4X and IP65 requirements when properly installed.
The 21128 housing is preferred for most non-hazardous environmental

conditions. The CA21128 is the explosion-proof version that is CSA certified for
use in Classes I, II, and III, Division 1, Groups B,C,D,E,F, and G. It must be ordered
and shipped with a CSA approved velocity sensor installed in the assembly. The
BA42608 housing is used for BASEEFA-approved installations where compliance
with British Standard 5345 is necessary. It provides the environmental and
physical protection needed to comply with the IP65 rating defined in IEC
standard 144.

Rev. C (06/07)
Page 1 of 4
03 1/2-in NPT, explosion-proof
Specifications and cable grip fittings
Physical
Explosion-proof velocity housing including transducer
Outlet Port Size:
CA21128-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX
1/2-in NPT.
Note: B00 Transducer Mounting Angle/Minimum
Internal Operating Frequency option is applicable to A00 and
Mounting A01 Transducer Type Options. The others are
Thread applicable to the A04 Transducer Type Option.
21128 and A: Transducer Type Option
CA21128: 00 No Transducer
1/2-in 20 UNF. 01 330500 Velomitor velocity
sensor, data sheet 141632-01
BA42608: 04 9200 Seismoprobe velocity
sensor, data sheet 141626-01
5/8-in 18 UNF-2B.
B: Transducer Mounting Angle/Minimum Operating
Weight: Frequency Option
00 No option
1.6 kg (3.55 lb) without velocity
31 0 2.5, 4.5 Hz (270 cpm)
sensor or fittings. 32 45 2.5, 4.5 Hz (270 cpm)
Environmental Limits 33 90 2.5, 4.5 Hz (270 cpm)
36 0 100, 10 Hz (600 cpm)
Temperature
39 0 180, 15 Hz (900 cpm)
rating:
C: Mounting Thread Option
-29C to +121C (-20 F to +250F) 01 Unthreaded boss, 28.5 mm
(1.125 in) diameter
Moisture: 02 3/4-in 14 NPT
Resistant to moisture and 03 1/2-in 14 NPT
corrosion but is not submersible. 04 1/2-in 14 BSP (G 1/2-in)
D: Cable Exit Fitting Option
O-Ring material: 01 1/2-in NPT plug
Neoprene 02 1/2-in NPT, explosion-proof
fitting
Ordering Information 03 1/2-in NPT, explosion-proof
and cable grip fittings
Water and Corrosion-Resistant Velocity Transducer
Housing IP65 Water and Dust-Resistant Velocity Transducer
Housing
21128-AXX-BXX
BA42608-AXX-BXX
Note: Compatible with all Bently Nevada velocity
sensors having 1/2-in 20 UNF mounting threads and Note: Requires a BASEEFA-approved velocity sensor
a top mount connector or equivalent. with an isolator having 5/8-in 18 UNF-2B male
threads and a top mount terminal strip.
A: Mounting Thread Option
01 Unthreaded boss, 28.5 mm A: Mounting Thread Option
(1.125 in) diameter 01 Unthreaded boss, 28.5 mm
02 3/4-in 14 NPT (1.125 in) diameter
03 1/2-in 14 NPT 02 3/4-in 14 NPT
04 1/2-in 14 BSP (G 1/2-in) 03 1/2-in 14 NPT
B: Cable Exit Fitting Option 04 1/2-in 14 BSP (G 1/2-in)
01 1/2-in NPT plug B: Cable Exit Fitting Option
02 1/2-in NPT, explosion-proof 01 1/2-in NPT plug
fitting 02 1/2-in NPT, explosion-proof
fitting
Rev. C (06/07)
Page 2 of 4
03 1/2-in NPT, explosion-proof
and cable grip fittings

Rev. C (06/07)
Page 3 of 4
Dimensional Drawing
Figure 1: Velocity Transducer Housing

Dimensions are in millimetres (inches)
Bently Nevada and Velomitor are trademarks of General Electric Company.

Neoprene is a trademark of the DuPont Corporation.
Copyright 1999. Bently Nevada LLC.

1631 Bently Parkway South, Minden, Nevada USA 89423
Phone: 775.782.3611 Fax: 775.215.2873
www.ge-energy.com/bently
All rights reserved.

Rev. C (06/07)
Page 4 of 4
4021_Rev DA_QIG.fm Page 1 Tuesday, February 27, 2007 2:53 PM
Quick Installation Guide

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
February 2007 Rosemount 3144P
Rosemount 3144P HART

Temperature Transmitter
Start
Step 1: Configure (Bench Calibration)

Step 2: Set the Switches
Step 3: Mount the Transmitter
Step 4: Wire and Apply Power
Step 5: Perform a Loop Test
Safety Instrumented Systems
Product Certifications
End
www.rosemount.com
00825-0100-4021e

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
Rosemount 3144P February 2007
2007 Rosemount Inc. All rights reserved. All marks property of owner.
Emerson Process Management Emerson Process Management Emerson Process Management
Rosemount Division Temperature GmbH Asia Pacific Private Limited
8200 Market Boulevard Frankenstrasse 21 1 Pandan Crescent
Chanhassen, MN USA 55317 63791 Karlstein Singapore 128461
T (US) (800) 999-9307 Germany T (65) 6777 8211
T (Intnl) (952) 906-8888 T 49 (6188) 992 0 F (65) 6777 0947
F (952) 949-7001 F 49 (6188) 992 112
IMPORTANT NOTICE
This installation guide provides basic guidelines for the Rosemount 3144P. It does not
provide instructions for detailed configuration, diagnostics, maintenance, service,
troubleshooting, explosion-proof, flameproof, or intrinsically safe (I.S.) installations. Refer to
the 3144P reference manual (document number 00809-0100-4021) for more instruction.
The manual and this QIG are also available electronically on www.rosemount.com.
WARNING
Explosions could result in death or serious injury:
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the
appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Please
review the approvals section of this manual for any restrictions associated with a safe
installation.
In an Explosion-proof/Flame-proof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers
when power is applied to the unit.
Process leaks may cause harm or result in death
Install and tighten thermowells or sensors before applying pressure.
Do not remove the thermowell while in operation.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
2

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
STEP 1: CONFIGURE (BENCH CALIBRATION)

The Rosemount 3144P communicates using a 375 Field Communicator (communication
requires a loop resistance between 250 and 1100 ohms) or AMS. Do not operate when
power is below 12 Vdc at the transmitter terminal). Refer to the 3144P Reference Manual
and 375 Field Communicator Reference Manual (document number 00809-0100-4276) for
more information.
Update the 375 Field Communicator Software
The 375 Field Communicator Field Device Revision Dev v4, DD v1 or greater is required to
fully communicate with the 3144P. The Device Descriptors are available with new
communicators or can be loaded into existing communicators at any Emerson Process
Management Service Center.
Perform the following steps to determine if an upgrade is required.
1. Connect the sensor (see the wiring diagram located on the inside of the housing cover)
2. Connect the bench power supply to the power terminals (+ or ).
3. Connect a 375 Field Communicator to the loop across a loop resistor or at the
power/signal terminals on the transmitter.
4. The following message will appear if the communicator has a previous version of the
device descriptors (DDs).
NOTICE: Upgrade the communicator software to access new XMTR functions. Continue
with old description?
NOTE:
If this notice does not appear, the latest DD is installed.
If the latest version is not available, the communicator will communicate properly, but
when the transmitter is configured some new capabilities may not be visible.
To prevent this from happening, upgrade to the latest DD or answer NO to the question
and default to the generic transmitter functionality.
Figure 1. Connecting a Communicator to a Bench Loop.
Power/Signal Terminals
250 RL 1100
3144-0000a04a
Power
Supply
3

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
STEP 1 CONTINUED...
Verify Transmitter Configuration
A check () indicates the basic configuration parameters. At minimum, these parameters
should be verified as part of the configuration and startup procedure.
Table 1. HART Fast Key Sequences(1)
Function HART Fast Keys
Active Calibrator 1, 2, 2, 1, 3
Alarm Values 1, 3, 4, 2, 1
Analog Output 1, 1, 4
Average Temperature Setup 1, 3, 3, 2
Average Temperature Configuration 1, 3, 3, 2
Burst Mode 1, 3, 4, 3, 3
Burst Option 1, 3, 4, 3, 4
Calibration 1, 2, 2
Clear Log 1, 2, 1, 6
Configure Hot Backup 1, 3, 3, 4
Configuration 1, 3
D/A Trim 1, 2, 2, 2
Damping Values 1, 3, 4, 1, 3
Date 1, 3, 5, 2
Descriptor 1, 3, 5, 3
Device Information 1, 3, 5
Diagnostics and Service 1, 2
Differential Temperature Setup 1, 3, 3, 1
Differential Temperature Configuration 1, 3, 3, 1
Drift Alert 1, 3, 3, 5
Filter 50/60 Hz 1, 3, 6, 1
First Good Temperature Setup 1, 3, 3, 3
First Good Temperature Configuration 1, 3, 3, 3
Hardware Revision 1, 4, 1
Hart Output 1, 3, 4, 3
Intermittent Sensor Detect 1, 3, 6, 2
Intermittent Threshold 1, 3, 6, 3
Loop Test 1, 2, 1, 1
LRV (Lower Range Value) 1, 3, 4, 1, 1
LSL (Lower Sensor Limit) 1, 3, 4, 1, 5
Master Reset 1, 2, 1, 3
Message 1, 3, 5, 4
Meter Options 1, 3, 4, 4
Open Sensor Holdoff 1, 3, 6, 4
Percent Range 1, 1, 5
Poll Address 1, 3, 4, 3, 1
Process Temperature 1, 1
Process Variables 1, 1
Range Values 1, 3, 4, 1
Review 1, 4
Scaled D/A Trim 1, 2, 2, 3
4

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
Function HART Fast Keys

Sensor 1 Configuration 1, 3, 2, 3
Sensor 2 Configuration 1, 3, 2, 4
Sensor Limits 1, 3, 2, 2
Sensor 1 Serial Number 1, 3, 2, 3, 3
Sensor 2 Serial Number 1, 3, 2, 4, 3
Sensor 1 Setup 1, 3, 2, 3
Sensor 2 Setup 1, 3, 2, 4
Sensor Trim 1, 2, 2, 1, 1
Sensor Type 1, 3, 2, 1
Sensor 1 Unit 1, 3, 2, 3, 1
Sensor 2 Unit 1, 3, 2, 4, 1
Software Revision 1, 4, 1
Status 1, 2, 1, 4
Tag 1, 3, 5, 1
Terminal Temperature Setup 1, 3, 2, 5
Test Device 1, 2, 1
Transmitter-Sensor Matching 1, 3, 2, 1
URV (Upper Range Value) 1, 3, 4, 1, 2
USL (Upper Sensor Limit) 1, 3, 4, 1, 6
Variable Mapping 1, 3, 1
View Log 1, 2, 1, 5
Wires 1, 3, 2, 1
2-wire Offset Sensor 1 1, 3, 2, 3, 6(1)
2-wire Offset Sensor 2 1, 3, 2, 4, 6
(1) This table contains the minimum functions required for complete transmitter configuration. Refer
to the 3144P Reference Manual for the full list.
Input/Verify Callendar Van-Dusen Constants

If sensor matching is being used with this combination of a transmitter and sensor, verify the
constants input. When using two sensors, repeat Steps 1 5 for the second sensor.
1. At the Home screen, select 1 Device Setup, 3 Configuration, 2 Sensor Config, 1 Change
Type/Conn., 1 Sensor 1 (Select Sensor 2 two sensors). Set the control loop to manual.
Select OK
2. Select Cal VanDusen at the Enter Sensor Type prompt.
3. Select the appropriate number of wires at the Enter Sensor Connection prompt.
4. Enter the Ro, Alpha, Beta, and Delta values from the stainless steel tag attached to the
special-order sensor.
5. Select OK after you return the control loop to automatic control.
5

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
STEP 2: SET THE SWITCHES

The Security and Failure Mode Switches are located on the top center of the electronics
module. Follow the steps below to set the switches.
Without a LCD Display
1. Set the loop to manual (if applicable) and disconnect the power.
2. Remove the electronics housing cover.
3. Set the switches to the desired position. Reattach housing cover.
4. Apply power and set the loop to automatic control.
With a LCD Display
1. Set the loop to manual (if applicable) and disconnect the power.
2. Remove the electronics housing cover.
3. Unscrew the LCD display screws and slide the meter straight off.
4. Set the switches to the desired position.
5. Reattach the LCD display and electronics housing cover (consider LCD display
orientation rotate in 90 degree increments).
6. Apply power and set the loop to automatic control.
STEP 3: MOUNT THE TRANSMITTER

Mount the transmitter at a high point in the conduit run to prevent moisture from draining into
the transmitter housing.
Typical Field Mount Installation
1. Mount the thermowell to the process container wall. Install and tighten thermowells.
Perform a leak check.
2. Attach any necessary unions, couplings, and extension fittings. Seal the fitting threads
with silicone or tape (if required).
3. Screw the sensor into the thermowell or directly into the process (depending on
installation requirements).
4. Verify all sealing requirements.
5. Attach the transmitter to the thermowell/sensor assembly. Seal all threads with silicone
or tape (if required).
6. Install field wiring conduit into the open transmitter conduit entry (for remote mounting)
and feed wires into the transmitter housing.
7. Pull the field wiring leads into the terminal side of the housing.
8. Attach the sensor leads to the transmitter sensor terminals (the wiring diagram is located
inside the housing cover).
9. Attach and tighten both transmitter covers.
3144-0433QIG
C
A B
E
D
A = Thermowell D = Conduit for Field Wiring (dc power)
B = Extension (Nipple) E = Extension Fitting Length
C = Union or Coupling
6

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
STEP 3 CONTINUED...
Typical Remote Mount Installation
1. Mount the thermowell to the process container wall. Install and tighten thermowells.
Perform a leak check.
2. Attach a connection head to the thermowell.
3. Insert sensor into the thermowell and wire the sensor to the connection head (the wiring
diagram is located inside the connection head).
4. Mount the transmitter to a 2-in. (50 mm) pipe or a panel using one of the optional
mounting bracket (B4 bracket is shown below).
5. Attach cable glands to the shielded cable running from the connection head to the
transmitter conduit entry.
6. Run the shielded cable from the opposite conduit entry on the transmitter back to the
control room.
7. Insert shielded cable leads through the cable entries into the connection head /
transmitter. Connect and tighten cable glands.
8. Connect the shielded cable leads to the connection head terminals (located inside the
connection head) and to the sensor wiring terminals (located inside the transmitter
housing).
A D
644-0000b05b
B
A = Cable Gland
B = Shielded Cable from Sensor to Transmitter
C = Shielded Cable from Transmitter to Control Room
D = 2-in. (50 mm) pipe
E = B4 Mounting Bracket
7

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
STEP 4: WIRE AND APPLY POWER

Wiring diagrams are located inside the terminal block cover.
An external power supply is required to operate the transmitter.
The power required across the transmitter power terminals is 12 to 42.4 V DC (the
power terminals are rated to 42.4 V DC). To prevent damaging the transmitter, do not
allow terminal voltage to drop below 12.0 Vdc when changing the configuration
parameters.
Load Limitations
Maximum Load = 40.8 X (Supply Voltage - 12.0)(1)
420 mA dc
1240
1100
1000
Load (Ohms)
750 HART and Analog

Operating Range
500
250
Analog Only
0 Operating Range
10 18.1 30 42.4
12.0 Min
Supply Voltage (V dc)
(1) Without transient protection (optional).
Power the Transmitter

1. Remove the terminal block cover. Sensor Terminals (1 5)
2. Connect the positive power lead to the + terminal.
Connect the negative power lead to the terminal.
3. Tighten the terminal screws.
+
4. Reattach and tighten the cover. Test
5. Apply power.
Ground
8

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
Wiring Diagram
3144P Single-Sensor
2-wire RTD 3-wire RTD 4-wire RTD T/Cs and RTD with
and Ohms and Ohms** and Ohms Millivolts Compensation
Loop*
* Transmitter must be configured for a 3-wire RTD in order to recognize an RTD with a compensation loop.
** Rosemount provides 4-wire sensors for all single-element RTDs. You can use these RTDs in 3-wire
configurations by leaving the unneeded leads disconnected and insulated with electrical tape.
3144P Dual-Sensor
R W W&G
T/Hot T/Hot T/Hot T/Hot T/

Backup/Dual Backup/Dual Backup/Dual Backup/Dual Hot Backup/Dual
Sensor with 2 Sensor with 2 Sensor with Sensor with Sensor with 2 RTDs
RTDs* Thermocouples* RTDs/ RTDs/ with Compensation
** Thermocouples * Thermocouples * Loop*
* Rosemount provides 4-wire sensors for all single-element RTDs. You can use these RTDs in 3-wire
configurations by leaving the unneeded leads disconnected and insulated with electrical tape.
** Typical wiring configuration of a Rosemount dual-element RTD is shown (R=Red, W=White, G=Green,
B=Black)
Ground the Transmitter

Ungrounded Thermocouple, mV, and RTD/Ohm Inputs
Each process installation has different requirements for grounding. Use the grounding
options recommended by the facility for the specific sensor type, or begin with grounding
Option 1 (the most common).
Option 1 (recommended for ungrounded transmitter housing):
1. Connect signal wiring shield to the sensor wiring shield.
2. Ensure the two shields are tied together and electrically isolated from the transmitter
housing.
3. Ground shield at the power supply end only.
4. Ensure that the sensor shield is electrically isolated from the surrounding grounded
fixtures.
Transmitter
420 mA loop Connect shields together,
Sensor Wires electrically isolated from the
transmitter
Shield ground point
9

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
STEP 4 CONTINUED...
Option 2 (recommended for grounded transmitter housing):
1. Connect sensor wiring shield to the transmitter housing (only if the housing is grounded).
2. Ensure the sensor shield is electrically isolated from surrounding fixtures that may be
grounded.
3. Ground signal wiring shield at the power supply end.
Transmitter
Sensor Wires 420 mA loop
Shield ground point
Option 3:
1. Ground sensor wiring shield at the sensor, if possible.
2. Ensure that the sensor wiring and signal wiring shields are electrically isolated from the
transmitter housing and other fixtures that may be grounded.
Transmitter
Shield ground point
Grounded Thermocouple Inputs

1. Ground sensor wiring shield at the sensor.
2. Ensure that the sensor wiring and signal wiring shields are electrically isolated from the
transmitter housing and other fixtures that may be grounded.
Transmitter
Shield ground point
10

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
STEP 5: PERFORM A LOOP TEST

The Loop Test verifies transmitter output, loop integrity, and operation of any recorders or
similar devices installed in the loop.
Initiate a loop test:
1. Connect an external ampere meter in series with the transmitter loop (so the power to
the transmitter goes through the meter at some point in the loop).
2. From the Home screen, select 1 Device Setup, 2 Diag/Serv, 1 Test Device, 1 Loop Test.
The communicator displays the loop test menu.
3. Select a discreet milliampere level for the transmitter to output. At Choose Analog
Output select 1 4mA, 2 20mA or select 4 Other to manually input a value between 4 and
20 milliamperes. Select Enter to show the fixed output. Select OK.
4. In the test loop, check the transmitters actual mA output and the HART mA reading are
the same value. If the readings do not match, either the transmitter requires an output
trim or the current meter is malfunctioning.
5. After completing the test, the display returns to the loop test screen and allows the user
to choose another output value. To end the Loop Test, Select 5 End and Enter.
Initiate Simulation Alarm
1. From the Home screen, select 1 Device Setup, 2 Diag/Serv, 1 Test Device, 1 Loop Test,
3 Simulate Alarm.
2. The transmitter will output alarm current level based on the configured alarm parameter
and switch settings.
3. Select 5 End to return the transmitter to normal conditions.
SAFETY INSTRUMENTED SYSTEM

When using a 3144P transmitter, the following guidelines should be followed. For additional
Safety Instrumented Systems information consult the Rosemount 3144P reference manual
(document number 00809-0100-4021). The manual is available electronically on
www.rosemount.com or by contacting a sales representative.
3144P Safety Certified Identification

All safety certified 3144P transmitters require safety certified electronics.
To identify a safety certified transmitter, verify one of the following:
1. See a yellow tag affixed to outside of transmitter.
2. Verify the option code B in the model string.
3. Verify the option code QT in the model string.
11

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
Installation
No special installation is required in addition to the standard installation practices outlined in
this document. Always ensure a proper seal by installing the electronics housing cover(s) so
that metal contacts metal.
Environmental limits are available in the 3144P Product Data Sheet (document number
00813-0100-4021). This document can be found at www.rosemount.com.
The loop should be designed so the terminal voltage does not drop below 12 Vdc when the
transmitter output is 24.5 mA.
Position the security switch to the ON position to prevent accidental or deliberate change
of configuration data during normal operation.
Configuration
Use any HART-compliant master to communicate with and verify configuration of the 3144P
SIS (see "Table 1: HART Fast Key Sequences" to verify configuration). DD revision 3144P
SIS Dev. 4 Rev 1 or greater is required.
User-selected damping will affect the transmitters ability to respond to changes in the
applied process. The damping value + response time should not exceed the loop
requirements.
NOTES
1. Transmitter output is not safety-rated during the following: configuration changes,
multidrop, loop test. Alternative means should be used to ensure process safety during
transmitter configuration and maintenance activities.
2. DCS or safety logic solver should be configured to match transmitter configuration.
Figure 2 identifies the Rosemount alarm and saturation levels. (Alarm and saturation values
are user-configurable.) Position the alarm switch to the required HI or LO alarm position.
With a HART communicator, select
the alarm and saturation levels using the following HART fast keys
1 Device Setup, 3 Configuration, 4 Dev Output Config, 2 Alarm/Saturation, 2 AO Levels.
Figure 2. Rosemount Standard Alarm Levels
Normal Operation
(1)
3.75 mA 4 mA 20 mA 21.75(2)
max 3.9 mA 20.5 mA min.
low saturation high saturation
(1) Transmitter Failure, hardware alarm in LO position.
(2) Transmitter Failure, hardware alarm in HI position.
4. Some detected faults are indicated on the analog output at a level above high alarm or
below low alarms regardless of the alarm levels configured.
5. For specific saturation and alarm level settings, see the reference manual
(00809-0100-4021).
12

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
Operation and Maintenance

The following proof tests are recommended. In the event that an error is found in the safety
functionality, proof test results and corrective actions taken must be documented at
www.rosemount.com/safety.
Use "Table 1: HART Fast Key Sequences" to perform Loop Test, Review Device
Variables, and view Status. See the 3144P Reference Manual for additional information.
The required proof test intervals will depend on the transmitter configuration and the
temperature sensor(s) in use. Refer to the FMEDA report and reference manual for further
information.
Abbreviated Proof Test
Conducting the Abbreviated Proof Test will detect approximately 63% of transmitter DU
failures and approximately 90% of temperature sensor(s) DU failures, not detected by the
3144P safety-certified automatic diagnostics, for a typical overall assembly coverage of
72%.
1. Using Loop Test enter the milliampere value representing a high alarm state.
2. Check the reference meter to verify the mA output corresponds to the entered value.
3. Using Loop Test enter the milliampere value representing a low alarm state.
4. Check the reference meter to verify the mA output corresponds to the entered value.
5. Use a HART communicator to view detailed device status to ensure no alarms or
warnings are present in the transmitter.
6. Check that sensor value(s) are reasonable in comparison to a basic process control
system (BPCS) value.
7. Document the test results per the plants requirements.
Extended Proof Test
Conducting the Extended Proof Test, which includes the Abbreviated Proof Test, will detect
approximately 96% of transmitter DU failures and approximately 99% of temperature
sensor(s) DU failures, not detected by the 3144P safety-certified automatic diagnostics, for
a typical overall assembly coverage of 97%.
1. Execute the Abbreviated Proof Test.
2. Perform a minimum two point sensor verification check. If two sensors are used, repeat
for each sensor. If calibration is required for the installation, it may be done in conjunction
with this verification.
3. Verify that the housing temperature value is reasonable.
4. Document the test results per the plants requirements.
13

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
Inspection
Visual Inspection
Not required
Special Tools
Not required
Product Repair
All failures detected by the transmitter diagnostics or by the proof-test
must be reported. Feedback can be submitted electronically at
www.emersonprocess.com/rosemount/safety/certtechdocumentation.htm.
The 3144P is repairable by major component replacement.
Reference
Certification
3144P is designed, developed, and audited to be compliant to IEC 61508 Safety certified
SIL 2 Claim Limit (redundant in SIL 3).
Specifications
The 3144P must be operated in accordance to the functional and performance
specifications provided in the 3144P reference manual.
The 3144P Safety Certified specifications are the same as the 3144P.
Start-up time
Performance within specifications is achieved within 6 seconds after power is applied to the
transmitter when the damping is set to 0 seconds.
Failure Rate Data
The FMEDA report includes failure rates and common cause Beta factor estimates. This
report is available at www.rosemount.com/safety.
3144P Safety Certified Safety Failure Values
Safety accuracy: 2.0%(1) or 2 C, whichever is greater.
Safety response time - 5.0 seconds
Self-diagnostics Test Interval: At least once per hour
Product Life
50 years based on worst case component wear-out mechanisms, not based on the
wear-out of process sensors.
(1) A 2% variation of the transmitter mA output is allowed before a safety trip. Trip values in the DCS or safety
logic solver should be derated by 2%.
14

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
PRODUCT CERTIFICATIONS
Rosemount 3144P With HART / 420 mA
Approved Manufacturing Locations
Rosemount Inc. Chanhassen, Minnesota, USA
Rosemount Temperature GmbH Germany
Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Singapore
European Union Directive Information
The EC declaration of conformity for all applicable European Directives for this product can
be found on the Rosemount website at www.rosemount.com. A hard copy may be obtained
by contacting an Emerson Process Management representative.
ATEX Directive (94/9/EC)
Rosemount Inc. complies with the ATEX Directive.
Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) (89/336/EEC)
EN 50081-1: 1992; EN 50082-2:1995; EN 61326-A1+A2+A3:1997 Industrial
Hazardous Locations Installations
North American Certifications
Factory Mutual (FM) Approvals
I5 FM Intrinsic Safety and Non-incendive:
Intrinsically Safe for Class I/II/III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G.
Temperature codes: T4A (Tamb = 60 to 60 C)
T5 (Tamb = 60 to 50C)
Zone Marking: Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC
T4 (Tamb = 50 to 60 C)
Intrinsically Safe when installed in accordance with control drawing 03144-0321.
Non-incendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D. Suitable for use in
Class II / III, Division 2, Groups F and G. Non-incendive when installed in accordance
with Rosemount drawings 03144-0321.
Temperature codes: T6 (Tamb = 60 to 60 C),
T5 (Tamb = 60 to 85C)
E5 Explosion Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D.
Dust Ignition-Proof for use in Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G. Explosion-Proof
and Dust Ignition-Proof when installed in accordance with Rosemount drawing
03144-0320. Indoor and outdoor use. NEMA Type 4X.
Temperature code: T5 (Tamb = 50 to 85 C)
NOTE
For Group A, seal all conduits within 18 inches of enclosure; otherwise, conduit seal not
required for compliance with NEC 501-15(A)(1).
Non-incendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D. Suitable for use in
Class II/III, Division 2, Groups F and G. Non-incendive when installed in accordance
with Rosemount drawing 03144-0321.
Temperature codes: T5 (Tamb = 60 to 85 C),
T6 (Tamb = 60 to 60C)
15

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Approvals

I6 CSA Intrinsic Safety and Division 2
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F, and G; Class III, Division 1; Suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C,
and D. Intrinsically Safe and Division 2 when installed per Rosemount drawing
031440322.
K6 Combination of I6 and the following:
Explosion Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D; Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F, and G; Class III, Division 1 hazardous locations. Factory sealed.
European Certifications
E1 ATEX Flameproof Approval (Zone 1)
Certificate Number: KEMA01ATEX2181
ATEX Category Marking II 2 G
EEx d IIC T6 (Tamb = 40 to 70 C)
EEx d IIC T5 (Tamb = 40 to 80 C)
Max supply voltage: 55 Vdc
ND ATEX Dust Ignition Proof Approval
Certificate Number: KEMA01ATEX2205
ATEX Category Marking II 1 D
T95 C (Tamb = 40 to 85 C)
Max supply voltage: 55 Vdc
N1 ATEX Type n Approval (Zone 2)
Certificate Number: BAS01ATEX3432X
EEx nL IIC T6 (Tamb = 40 to 50 C)
EEx nL IIC T5 (Tamb = 40 to 75 C)
Ui = 55V
Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
The transmitter is not capable of withstanding the 500 v insulating test required by
Clause 9.1 of EN50021:1999. This condition must be taken into account during
installation.
I1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety Approval (Zone 0)
Certificate Number: BAS01ATEX1431X
EEx ia IIC T6 (Tamb = 60 to 50 C)
EEx ia IIC T5 (Tamb = 60 to 75 C)
Table 2. Input Entity Parameters

Power/Loop Sensor
Ui = 30 V dc Ci = 5 nF Uo = 13.6 V Ci = 78 nF
Ii = 300 mA Li = 0 Io = 56 mA Li = 0
Pi = 1.0 W Po =190 mW
Special Conditions for Safe Use (x):

The transmitter is not capable of withstanding the 500V insulation test as defined in
Clause 6.4.12 of EN50 020. This condition must be taken into account during
installation.
16

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
Australian Certifications
Standard Australia Quality Assurance Services (SAA)
E7 Flameproof Approval
Certificate Number: AUS Ex 02.3813X
Ex d IIC T6 (Tamb = 20 to 60 C)
IP66
1. Apparatus must be installed in accordance to Rosemount drawing 03144-0325.
2. If the sensor is intended to be remote mounted, it should be installed in a suitable
Standards Australia certified Flame-Proof enclosure and installed in accordance
with Rosemount drawing 03144-0325.
3. Standards Australia certified cable glands or conduit adapters must be used when
connecting to external circuits. Where only one conduit entry is used for connection
to external circuits, the unused entry is to be closed by means of a blanking plug
supplied by Rosemount or by a suitable Standards Australia certified blanking plug.
N7 Type N Approval
Certificate Number: IECEx BAS 07.0003X
Ex nA nL IIC T6 (Tamb = 40 to 50 C)
Ex nA nL IIC T5 (Tamb = 40 to 75 C)
Ui = 55 V
I7 Intrinsic Safety Approval
Certificate Number: IECEx BAS 07.0002X
Ex ia IIC T6 (Tamb = 60 to 50 C)
Ex ia IIC T5 (Tamb = 60 to 75 C)
Table 3. Input Entity Parameters

Power/Loop Sensor
Ui = 30 V dc Ci = 0.005 F Uo = 13.6 V Ci = 78 F
Ii = 300 mA Li = 20 H Io = 100 mA Li = 0 H
Pi = 1.0 W Po = 80 mW

1. For options using the transient protection board, the apparatus should be connected
to earth with a copper conductor of 4 mm2 or greater.
2. For the label with more than one type of marking on it, upon completion of
commissioning the apparatus the irrelevant marking code(s) shall be permanently
scribed off.
Brazilian Certifications
Centro de Pesquisas de Energia Eletrica (CEPEL) Approval
I2 CEPEL Intrinsic Safety Consult factory for availability.
E2 CEPEL Explosion-proof: BR - Ex d IIC
T5 (Tamb = 40 to 80 C)
Japanese Certifications
Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS) Flameproof Certification
E4 Without sensor: Ex d IIB T6 (Tamb = 20 to 55 C)
With sensor: Ex d IIB T4 (Tamb = 20 to 55 C)
17

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
Combination Certifications
Stainless steel certification tag is provided when optional approval is specified. Once a
device labeled with multiple approval types is installed, it should not be reinstalled using any
other approval types. Permanently mark the approval label to distinguish it from unused
approval types.
KA Combination of K1 and K6
KB Combination of K5 and K6
K1 Combination of E1, N1, and I1
K7 Combination of E7, N7, and I7
K5 Combination of I5 and E5
Additional Certifications
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval
ABS Type Approval for temperature measurements in hazardous locations on ABS Classed
Vessels, Marine and Offshore Installations. Type Approval is based on Factory Mutual (FM)
Approvals; therefore, specify order code K5. Please contact an Emerson Process
Management representative if a copy of the certification is required.
Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval for Shipboard and Offshore Installations
DNV rules for classifications of ships and mobile offshore units for temperature
measurements in the following locations:
Table 4. Applications / Limitations

Location Class
Temperature D
Humidity B
Vibration B/C
Enclosure D
NOTE
The transient protector (option code T1) is required when requesting DNV Type Approval.
Additionally, hazardous locations approvals may be required (based on shipboard location)
and will need to be specified by the Hazardous Locations option code.
Please contact an Emerson Process Management representative if a copy of the
certification is required.
GOSTANDART
Tested and approved by Russian Metrological Institute
18

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
NOTES
19

00825-0100-4021, Rev DA
NOTES
20
Document No: LubSystem 01

Section 8 Lubricating Oil System Revision: 0
8 Lubricating Oil System
The lubricating oil system equipment manufacturers information, and the associated
equipment manufacturers information, is included next as an insert to the manual.
K:\Module Update\S8 LubSystem 01-0.doc

APPROVED DOCUMENT TO BE
INCLUDED WHEN AVAILABLE
Document No: GBox 01

Section 9 Gearbox Revision: 0
9 Gearbox
The gearbox manufacturers information, and the associated equipment manufacturers

information, is included next as an insert to the manual.
K:\Module Update\S9 GBox 01-0.doc

_I000_01
Register Structure
I Operating instructions
II Drawings and alignment diagram
III
IV Spare parts
VI
VII
VIII
IX
X Manufacturer's declaration
GB 1/2
_I000_01
GB 2/2
T0000_01
I Operating instructions
High Speed,
Parallel Shaft Gear Unit
Type: FD 48-3
Serial No.: 518 117
GB 1 / 38
T0000_01
Revision history
Revision Content of change Document pages

total :
01 Corrections to the address/telephone numbers in chapter 8 38
02 Revision of layout 38
GB 2 / 38
T0000_01
Table of Contents
Chapter Page
1 GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................................................5
1.1 Notes on warranty ................................................................................................................................5
1.2 Technical data.......................................................................................................................................6
1.3 Functional verification.........................................................................................................................6
1.4 Terms of Delivery..................................................................................................................................6
2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ..............................................................................................................................7

2.1 Symbols for important instructions/operations..............................................................................7
2.2 Personnel qualification .......................................................................................................................8
2.3 Non-observance of safety instructions ............................................................................................8
2.4 Safety regulations.................................................................................................................................8
2.5 Safety instructions for the user..........................................................................................................9
2.6 Safety instructions for installation and maintenance.................................................................10
2.7 Safety requirements for spare parts ...............................................................................................10
2.8 General summary of safety requirements......................................................................................10
3 PACKING, SHIPPING, STORAGE, WASTE DISPOSAL ..........................................................................11

3.1 Packing .................................................................................................................................................11
3.2 Shipping................................................................................................................................................11
3.3 Storage..................................................................................................................................................14
3.4 Waste Disposal ...................................................................................................................................15
4 DESCRIPTION...............................................................................................................................................17
4.1 Design ...................................................................................................................................................17
4.1.1 Housing..........................................................................................................................................17
4.1.2 Gear set .........................................................................................................................................17
4.1.3 Bearings ........................................................................................................................................17
4.1.4 Oil supply.......................................................................................................................................17
4.1.5 Seals ..............................................................................................................................................17
4.1.6 Instrumentation............................................................................................................................17
5 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION.............................................................................................................19

5.1 Preparing the gearbox .......................................................................................................................19
5.2 Mounting instructions........................................................................................................................19
5.2.1 Mounting the couplings..............................................................................................................19
5.2.2 Alignment of shafts .....................................................................................................................20
5.2.3 Mounting the gearbox ................................................................................................................21
GB 3 / 38
T0000_01
5.2.4 Mounting of the pipes .................................................................................................................22

5.2.5 Flushing of the pipes ...................................................................................................................23
5.3 Oil supply ..............................................................................................................................................23
5.3.1 Lubrication oil supply ..................................................................................................................23
5.3.2 Lubrication oil pump....................................................................................................................23
6 OPERATION...................................................................................................................................................25
6.1 Commissioning ....................................................................................................................................25
6.1.1 Commissioning procedure .........................................................................................................26
6.1.2 Check list A ...................................................................................................................................27
6.1.3 Check list B ...................................................................................................................................27
6.1.4 Check list C ...................................................................................................................................28
6.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................29
6.3 Slow down and standstill .................................................................................................................29
7 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................31

7.1 Inspection and maintenance ............................................................................................................31
7.1.1 Notes for inspection and maintenance ...................................................................................31
7.1.2 Maintenance of the oil................................................................................................................32
7.1.3 Selection of lubricating oils for high capacity gearboxes ...................................................33
7.2 Repair ....................................................................................................................................................34
7.3 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................................35
8 SPARE PARTS ..............................................................................................................................................37
GB 4 / 38
_0100_01
1 GENERAL INFORMATION
BHS gearboxes are developed to the most current know-how and , processes in
gearbox engineering for special applications, e.g. compressors, turbines ventilators,
cooling water pumps, etc.
The calculation of the gear dimensions is performed in accordance with standard
dimensioning rules, like DIN 3990, ISO 6336, AGMA 421.06, API 613 and others.
BHS gearboxes are available in different constructions, according to different
revolutions and torques. For more information see our brochures which we send you
on demand.
BHS offers different monitoring sensor elements, e.g. temperature detectors, vibration
and speed probes.
1.1 Notes on warranty

BHS gear units must only be used under the field conditions which are described in
this instruction manual.
The manufacturer is not liable for any malfunction or damage caused by any other
than the intended use of the gear units or individual modules or parts of it. The same
also applies to any repair or other service operation performed or attempted by
persons other than duly authorized service staff. Such action will invalidate any claim
under warranty, including for parts not directly affected.
Opening or disassembling of the gear unit without approval of the manufacturer will
render all warranty claims null and void.
The manufacturer is not liable for any malfunction or damage caused by ignorance of
this instruction manual respectively non-observance of safety requirements, warnings
and cautions. The same also applies to any consequential damages.
The gear unit must be operated by properly trained and well instructed staff. The
proper operating condition of the gear unit and the associated equipment must be
verified before putting into operation.
Any device modification, particularly the removal or replacement of device parts or
the use of accessories from other manufacturers is not permitted. Mind that any such
action will render all warranty claims null and void.
Annotation: Technical device upgrading by the manufacturer are subject to change

without prior notice.
GB 5 / 38
_0100_01
1.2 Technical data

Gearbox data
Power rating.....................................................................................................................9695 kW
Input speed......................................................................................................................1787 rpm
Output speed...................................................................................................................3895 rpm
Total weight....................................................................................................................... 6900 kg
Assembly between .......................................................................................... E-Motor / Pump
Lubrication
FZG-failure load stage (DIN 51354) .................................................................................. min. 7
Used lubricant ..............................................................................................................ISO VG 46
Gear oil requirement......................................................................................................195 l/min
Working oil pressure (overpressure) ......................................................................... 1,5 bar g
Switch-off oil pressure (overpressure)...................................................................... 0,9 bar g
Oil inlet temperature............................................................................................................. 50C
Heat to be dissipated by the lube oil ............................................................................100 kW
Gearbox noise
Average sound pressure @ 1 m* ................................................................................ 87 dB(A)
Sound power level* ..................................................................................................... 102 dB(A)
For further information to the gearbox refer to outline drawing.
*Refer to chapter 2.5, "Safety instructions for the user".
1.3 Functional verification

Each gearbox has been checked by a mechanical test run before delivery.
The functional verification is confirmed in a test certificate.
Please also pay attention to the notes in case of shipping damages (refer to
chapter 3.2).
1.4 Terms of Delivery

The general terms of delivery of BHS Getriebe GmbH, Sonthofen are valid in their
actual version.
GB 6 / 38
_0200_01
2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The following instructions include fundamental notes and warnings which have to be
observed for installation, operation and maintenance.
To fulfil the safety aspects, these instructions must be read in particular before
performing any installation, operation or maintenance work.
2.1 Symbols for important instructions/operations

The following symbols are marking important manual instructions. Disregarding these
instructions may result in damage to the equipment respectively in injury to the
operator of the equipment.
NOTE
This symbol (hand) indicates an information, which should be
especially observed.
CAUTION
This symbol (warning triangle) indicates danger to the equipment.
WARNING
This symbol (varying with each danger) indicates danger to personnel.
The symbol shown warns of dangerous rotating parts.
GB 7 / 38
_0200_01
2.2 Personnel qualification

Operation, maintenance and service work must be performed by properly qualified
personnel. The specific areas of responsibility must be observed and inspected by the
customer.
Personnel without the specific qualification must be properly trained before working
at the equipment. Ensure that the necessary operating instructions have been
completely understood. This encloses all actions on installation, connection, operation
and maintenance.
2.3 Non-observance of safety instructions

Non-observance of the safety instructions may result in serious damage to the
equipment and the direct environment as well as in serious injury to the personnel.
In addition this will render all warranty claims of the manufacturer null and void.
2.4 Safety regulations

Together with the instructions in this manual, the relevant national safety regulations
as well as the legal directives for installation, commissioning and operation of the
plant and the corresponding prevention of accidents regulations must be observed.
The following are safety regulations in the EU:
DIN VDE 0100
DIN VDE 0113
EN 60204 Part 1
EN 50110-1 VDE 0105
Beyond this the internal safety precautions and regulations of the company must be
observed by the personnel.
The customer is responsible for the observance of all legal directives and regulations
at the plant.
GB 8 / 38
_0200_01
2.5 Safety instructions for the user

Rotating shafts of gearboxes must be protected and not be touched during operation.
It is recommended to use coupling covers.
NOTE
Gear specific technical data must be noticed.
WARNING
Safety devices must not be dismantled during operation.
Danger of injury!
According to the third rule concerning the machinery safety law (machinery noise
information rule 3. GSGV), the following data is provided about gearbox noise:
The sound pressure level quoted in the Technical Data chapter is the mean
value.
The measurement is performed at a distance of 1 m from the surface of the
gearbox, at the height of the shaft center line
The measuring process takes place according to DIN 45635-01-KL2 or DIN 45635-
01-KL3 and DIN 45635 part 23.
NOTE
We are firmly instructing that in the installed state, some coupling and
installation circumstances beyond our control could cause substantial
changes of noise emission as a result of solid-body sound
transmission, ensuing mutually from the aggregates in addition to
secondary emission from neighboring components.
GB 9 / 38
_0200_01
2.6 Safety instructions for installation and maintenance

At the plant, the customer is responsible for carrying out installation and maintenance
work only by qualified personnel..
WARNING
It is only allowed to work on gearboxes when the plant is in standstill.
Switch off the complete plant and protect it against switching on.
Attach the following warning sign:
Do not switch on! Personnel is

working on the plant.
NOTE
Refer to chapter 7 for further maintenance instructions and the
scheduled maintenance!
2.7 Safety requirements for spare parts

The manufacturer is not liable for any damage caused by unauthorized work,
particularly as the result of any removal or replacement of device parts or as the
result of using spare parts from other manufacturers than BHS.
Such action will render all warranty claims null and void.
Changes and modifications at system components must be carried out by service staff
of the manufacturer or persons expressly authorized and trained by the manufacturer.
Use original spare parts from BHS only.
NOTE
For further information about original spare parts from BHS refer to
Chapter 8 respectively to register IV of this instruction manual.
2.8 General summary of safety requirements

Safety and reliability of the gearbox can only be guaranteed when observing all of the
installation instructions, operation instructions and the system parameters of the data
sheets (Chapter 1.2).
GB 10 / 38
_0300_01
3 PACKING, SHIPPING, STORAGE, WASTE DISPOSAL

3.1 Packing
If not desired by the customer otherwise, the gearbox is dispatched on a stable
wooden base ready to build in. Every opening of the gearbox is closed with a lid or a
plug. Modules and attachments to be dispatched separately are packed in wooden
boxes.
Spare parts are normally provided with wax-based conservation (e.g. Tectyl),
wrapped in aluminum-coated paper or polyethylene flat foil and dispatched in stable
wooden boxes.
3.2 Shipping
CAUTION
Observe the shipping dimensions and the maximum save load of the
transporter.
Please refer to the shipping documents for the exact weight.

Observe the shipping and loading instructions on the wooden base respectively on the
shipping container. The following
means:
Fragile ware
Protect from moisture
Upside
Sling here
Do not lift with a fork

stacker
Example of a shipping container
GB 11 / 38
_0300_01
The transportation of the gearbox has to take place cautiously in order to avoid
damages through an exertion of force or careless loading and unloading. Adequate
loading security devices (transport belts, anti-skid devices etc.) should be provided
during shipping. High temperature fluctuations and strong impacts should be avoided.
CAUTION
The gearbox may only be slung at the points provided! For this, see
also the gearbox installation plan!
V E R Y I M P O R T A N T !
Please exactly observe our instructions in cases of shipping damage. If
you don't observe the formal requirements the transport insurer is not
liable.
NOTE
The shipping documents contain a red information sheet which eases
handling in case of shipping damages.
If this sheet is missing in the shipping documents, you can simply copy
the following page to handle shipping damages.
GB 12 / 38
_0300_01
To determine the extent of shipping damages, consult the commissioner of the transport
companies timely, according to their relevant regulations. This guarantees the claims for damage
in your interest.
EXTERNAL RECOGNIZABLE DAMAGES OR LOSSES
Damages or losses must be attested on the way-bill by a specific note before taking the
ware. On railway transports demand a factual statement from the railway company. On
postal transports the damage has to be attested in writing before taking damaged packets
from the postal service.
NOT RECOGNIZABLE DAMAGES
Inform the transport company immediate and in writing about damages which expose
during unpacking. Observe the following terms for notification:
a) Postal service................................................................... Immediate (not later than 24 hours) after
delivery by the transport company.
b) Railway company ...................................................................... Not later than 7 days after delivery
by the transport company.
c) Forwarding agency transports
together with railway transports ............................................ Not later than 4 days after delivery
by the transport company.
The following text is recommended to use for the required notifications to the transport
companies:
To the goods office in .......................................................................................................
(respectively to the postal service, forwarding agency, transport company).
The consignment with date..........................(sender.....................................) from............
.....................to..........................................(statement of the way-bill, parcel, signature)
has been taken without reclamation since no external damages were recognized. However on
opening the consignment there was found out that the content has been damaged and / or stolen
during shipping. We consider that you are responsible for the damage occurred. If it is necessary
from your point of view you can convince yourself
in our company.................................................................................................................
in our depot (road, number)
about the extent of damage.
In addition we would like you to inform the sender of our company by telling us the number of the
delivery note and / or the bill number.
GB 13 / 38
_0300_01
3.3 Storage
In case the customer does not persist on special preservation rules, our gearboxes
are delivered in preserved condition under use of our test stand preservation oils of
the ARAL Konit series or equivalent types.
These oil types are highly endurable (FZG-standard test DIN 51354/2 Load Stage 10)
and correspond in their viscosity to the ISO viscosity classes VG 32, VG 46 or VG 100
Without additional packing but with all gearbox openings closed (delivery state), the
corrosion protection with the oil types mentioned above would last for approximately 6
months.
CAUTION
Storage is only allowed in a well ventilated room under normal
temperature conditions and a non-corrosive atmosphere!
If the gearbox has been taken in operation after delivery even for a
short time (e.g. on a customer test stand), then the protection against
corrosion would be washed out and thereby raised.
Should you have questions regarding long-term conservation, please contact our
Service Department (for the address refer to Chapter 8)
The above mentioned preservation oils as well as equivalent products of other
manufacturers can be used for subsequent treatment of preservation.
If a further test run becomes necessary, we recommend a preservation test stand oil
to the customer. This type of oil sticks to the moistened surfaces and protects against
corrosion. The maximum reachable preservation time will be given by the
manufacturer of the oil. The remaining oil is usually compatible with the later used
kind of oil. But always customer and oil manufacturer may decide whether the
remaining test stand oil must be washed out.
GB 14 / 38
_0300_01
CAUTION
We are expressly warning against the use of preserving wax or similar
agents inside the gearbox!
These preservatives can lead to clogged lubricant jets, lubricant sprays, small
lubricant holes and to clogged or damaged filter elements. When applying such
agents, the gearbox should be dismantled and carefully washed prior to starting.
Opening the gearbox is only allowed to BHS service personal (refer to Chapter 1.1,
Notes on warranty).
For an external preservation of metallic bright parts we recommend the application of
tangible (when dry) type of wax products as Tectyl 846 or something similar.
External preservation is to be washed carefully before further assembly or installation
inside the machinery is done. Parts not delivered with the gearbox in the mounted
state should be cleaned as mentioned above; the same applies to spare parts.
We recommend cold cleaner (e.g. Eskapon) for washing. You should certainly prevent
the cleaning agent from entering into the interior of the gearbox..
CAUTION
When using a cleaning agent, the respective working rules and
instructions of the manufacturer should be observed.
3.4 Waste Disposal
In addition to the details given here, observe the relevant national

waste disposal provisions and legal requirements.
Housing parts, gears as well as gear shafts shall be disposed of like steel scrap.
The same goes for parts made of gray cast iron if they are not collected separately.
Sealing rings and hydrodynamic bearings are partly made of nonferrous metal
and shall be disposed of accordingly.
Waste oil shall be collected and disposed of according to regulations.
GB 15 / 38
_0300_01
GB 16 / 38
T0400101
4 DESCRIPTION
4.1 Design
The design of the BHS gearboxes is determined by the latest research and
developments in gearing technology and by the requirements of the main applications.
4.1.1 Housing
Gearcases are of massive and rigid designs assuring optimum vibrations and noise
damping. Amply dimensioned inspection holes allow an easy inspection of the gear
sets.
4.1.2 Gear set

The gear sets are designed as single stage, parallel shaft gears. All gearings are
manufactured from high alloy steels, hardened and ground.
4.1.3 Bearings
The shafts are running in easy to service and split hydrodynamic bearings of a high
load carrying capacity and stable running behavior also under partial load.
An adjustable radial bearing at the pinion shaft or at the gear shaft allows to optimize
the tooth contact pattern for full load. The adjustment of the bearings to correct the
tooth contact pattern may only be done by BHS service personnel.
Axial forces are absorbed by an axial bearing.
A hydraulic jacking oil system for the slide bearings is provided in case of severe
starting conditions.
4.1.4 Oil supply

The gearboxes are lubricated via a central pressure oil supply. Every bearing and
gearing is fed with oil separately, via internal connections.
The oil leaving the lubrication points is collected in the oil sump, from where it flows
back either directly or through a conduit to the oil tank.
4.1.5 Seals
For static sealing of the partition joints, a non-hardening surface sealing is used.
The shafts are sealed with contact-less labyrinth seals. These are made of two
pieces.
4.1.6 Instrumentation
Instrumentation supplied by BHS is described on the outline drawing, register II.
GB 17 / 38
T0400101
GB 18 / 38
_0500_01
5 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

5.1 Preparing the gearbox
Carefully remove the packing material completely.
Remove corrosion protection on shaft ends just before the couplings are
mounted. For the cleaning agent refer to Chapter 3.3, Storage.
Clean the base surfaces.
Put the gearbox onto the base.
Mount loosely delivered sensors and parts only after the installation, so long as
conditions allow, in order to avoid damages.
5.2 Mounting instructions

Coupling hubs will be mounted onto the shafts and misalignment of the coupled shafts
will be corrected. After the alignment and mounting of the gearbox on the base, the
pipes of the pressure oil supply will be laid.
5.2.1 Mounting the couplings

If the coupling is mounted at the customer, the coupling hub must be cleaned
carefully and mounted either with suitable mounting device or mounted by warming-
up the gear shaft.
CAUTION
Do not use impact tools!
NOTE
Use suitable dismounting devices for dismounting coupling elements
from the shafts.
All gearbox shafts are carefully dynamical balanced. If the coupling hub is mounted
later, verify if further balancing is necessary.
GB 19 / 38
_0500_01
5.2.2 Alignment of shafts

For aligning the shafts refer to guideline VDI 2726, Alignment of gearboxes as well
as to the operating instructions of the coupling manufacturer.
It would be an advantage to correct first the angular alignment before correcting the
radial alignment. When the angular alignment is done, the shafts remain to be
corrected only axially parallel in horizontal and vertical direction.
In the operation state, the shafts to be coupled must be in true alignment, so that
disadvantageous effects cannot influence either the safety or on the connected
machines. This also applies to the application of flexible couplings. Note the alignment
tolerances of the plant and the coupling manufacturer.
Following effects for shaft alignment must be considered when shaft alignment is
done:
Heat dilatation of the machine foundation
Heat dilatation of the machine housing
Deflection of the machine shafts
Variation of shaft position during operation condition against mounting condition
because of shaft displacement in bearings, bearing loading, hydrodynamic
lubrication and tooth forces on gearboxes.
Slant positioning of the shafts because of outside mounted masses.
NOTE
Displacements which can be expected in respect of the gearbox can
be determined on the alignment diagram in the appendix.
For the admissible alignment tolerances of the inserted coupling please see the
operating instructions of the coupling manufacturer.
CAUTION
If a very heavy coupling is mounted onto the low speed shaft
the displacement of the center of gravity may cause an overturning of
the gearbox.
Overturning of the gearbox must be avoided in any case. Therefore the shaft must be
supported near the coupling and the central position has to be determined by means
of a dial gauge. After the first times of running under full load the accuracy of the
alignment should be ascertained once more.
GB 20 / 38
_0500_01
5.2.3 Mounting the gearbox

The gearbox has to be fastened on a foundation absorbing reaction forces and
torques. Avoiding deformations and vibrations it is necessary to use a stiff
construction of the foundation with plane horizontal and clean surfaces. The mounting
of the gearbox has to be done as follows:
The gearbox is fastened on its location on the foundation, using fixtures (e.g.
tapered pins or parallel keys).
When tightening foundation screws, ensure that the tightening torque is uniform,
in order to avoid deforming the housing
After tightening the gearbox on the foundation, it is necessary to recheck the
alignment of the shafts relating to the demanded accuracy.
Housing deformations result in an unfavorable variation of the tooth contact pattern.
The reference surfaces at the two front sides of the gearbox are used for ascertaining
and eliminating housing deformations. This has to be done as follows:
Remove the protection cover of reference surfaces.
Put a bubble level (precision 0.05 mm/m) on the first reference surface and read
the horizontal deviation (for definition of (+) and (-) refer to next page).
Repeat procedure with the second reference surface.
Beside the two reference surfaces the actual value is imprinted. The difference
between the read horizontal deviations must correspond to the difference of the
imprinted actual values.
Level the gearbox until the difference correspond. For this put shims between
gearbox and foundation. A twisting of the gearbox up to 0.1 mm/m is acceptable.
Preserve reference surface (rust protection).
Reconnect the protection cover on the reference surfaces.
The following table and figure illustrate the correct gearbox:
Ref. surface Imprinted actual value Read value

I 0,10 mm/m 0,05 mm/m
II -0,15 mm/m -0,20 mm/m
Difference 0,25 mm/m 0,25 mm/m
GB 21 / 38
_0500_01
Definition for (+) and (-) values on reference surfaces
Precision
Bubble level
Reference surface Low Speed Side
5.2.4 Mounting of the pipes

Mounting of the pipes must be done in such a manner, that no impurities, transported
with the lubricant can get inside the gearbox.
Impurities in the lubricant are damaging or prematurely destroying the slide bearings
and running teeth. Special care should be taken to ascertain that these pipes are free
from scales and slag particles in their interior after welding (if possible the pipes
should be washed with acid or welded with protective gas).
Both the suction pipe and the return pipe should lead to the oil tank, with as short
length as possible, without sharp curves.
CAUTION
It should be ensured that neither gearbox nor pump parts become
subjected to deformation by connected lubricant pipes.
Deformations caused by lubricant pipes can be avoided under use of expansion joints.
The lubricant return pipe from the gearbox to the tank should be laid inclined as much
as possible.
The following lubricant velocities should be reached:
Suction pipe 1.0 to 1.5 m/s
Pressure pipe 2.0 to 2.5 m/s
Lubricant drainage pipe < 0.15 m/s
GB 22 / 38
_0500_01
5.2.5 Flushing of the pipes

Prior to initial starting, the whole pipe system should be flushed for several hours,
using the auxiliary oil pump. Thereby, the oil inlet to the gearbox should be separated
(insert blanks) and led to the tank via a provisional oil pipe. Flushing through the
gearbox is not permitted.
Care should also be taken when flushing the pipes so that no dirt collects at the
blanks, and eventually drop into the gearbox when the discs are removed.
CAUTION
After flushing the pipes it must be checked whether all blanks are
disconnected from the gear oil input.
5.3 Oil supply

5.3.1 Lubrication oil supply
Lubrication oil for the lubrication and cooling of the gearbox avoids scuffing at the
high loaded tooth flanks. The lubrication oil supply of the gearbox is integrated in the
lubrication system of the unit mutually using the pressure and temperature control. It
should be ascertained that the oil is running calmly and free of bubbles into the
gearbox
The oil temperature at the input of the gearbox can be taken from Chapter 1.2,
Technical Data.
The lubrication oil of the gearbox must be refined by means of filters. Following notes
must be considered:
The oil filter must filter dirt particles until a size of 25 m
A filtration is recommended according to fineness class --/15/12, ISO 4406
Bypass micro-filters are recommendable.
In the initial operation period, the filter must be cleaned frequently.
5.3.2 Lubrication oil pump

In many cases the lubrication oil supply will be done by a lubrication oil pump
mounted at the gearbox (refer to pump documentation in Register V).
The pump is sucking up the oil with an underpressure which can be taken from the
gearbox outline drawing.
GB 23 / 38
_0500_01
GB 24 / 38
_0600_01
6 OPERATION
6.1 Commissioning
The delivered gearbox has been submitted to a mechanical test run. If no other
special agreements are made and installation conditions are fulfilled the gear box can
be taken into operation according to the commissioning procedure as described in
chapter 6.1.1.
The exact working oil pressure has to be noted and can be referred to on the
nameplate. Further technical data are shown in chapter1.2.
CAUTION
Changes on bearings and lubricant devices may not be implemented
without the permission of BHS!
CAUTION
During the initial operation period, filter elements should be cleaned at
shortened intervals.
After the first 200 service hours, a first oil sample should be taken and its
characteristics analyzed (refer to chapter 7). The filter elements should be cleaned or
replaced if necessary.
GB 25 / 38
_0600_01
6.1.1 Commissioning procedure
Step Activities
1 Mounting of the gearbox according to chapter 5
2 Check list A according to chapter 6.1.2.
All points okay continue with step 3.
If faulty, stop the commissioning process and repair the defects.
Restart with step 2.
3 Start the oil plant.
CAUTION
Observe the guidelines given by the person responsible for
the complete system!
CAUTION
Observe the guidelines of the oil supplier!
4 Check list B according to chapter 6.1.3.

All points okay continue with step 5.
5 Start the plant.
NOTE
During the starting phase, monitor the behavior of the plant,
especially vibrations and noise.
CAUTION
Observe the guidelines given by the person responsible for
the complete system!
6 Check list C according to chapter 6.1.4.

All points okay continue commissioning process.
GB 26 / 38
_0600_01
6.1.2 Check list A

Check the gearbox prior to starting:
Inspection cover closed.
Temperature and shaft vibration sensor installed and connected.
Unused connection holes closed with metal plugs.
Oil inlet and outlet pipes connected and sealed, all closing discs removed (see
chapter 5).
Sense of rotation checked prior to coupling the driving machine.
Alignment of individual aggregates according to the alignment instructions
(prepare a report of actual values).
Screw connections provided on the shaft line fitted according to suppliers
instructions (tightening torque or bolt extension).
Tightening torque of foundation bolts checked.
Gearbox connected to earth.
Pressure gauges installed right at the entry of the oil into the gearbox.
Couplings mounted and checked according to suppliers instructions
Driving machine, engine, oil system etc. checked according to suppliers
instructions.
Axial assembly dimensions according to outline drawing.
Devices to avoid shaft currents installed.
Loose parts such as tools, free hanging cables etc. removed away from rotating
parts.
Protective devices installed.
6.1.3 Check list B

Check the oil supply of the gearbox prior to commissioning the machinery:
Oil pressure p, at oil inlet.
Nominal value: See chapter 1.2, "Technical data".
Oil temperature TOil at oil inlet:
Bearing temperature TL at the bearing metal.
Nominal value: TL approximately TOil .
Check whether oil system are tight.
GB 27 / 38
_0600_01
6.1.4 Check list C

After commissioning, check the gearbox at nominal speed, at nominal load and upon
reaching the steady condition:
Oil pressure p, at oil inlet.
Oil temperature TOil at oil inlet:
Bearing temperature TL at the bearing metal.
Nominal value: TL < TL Alarm(3)
Check weather casing, oil pipes, partial joints, instrument connections and
sealing ring are tight.
Casing vibrations veff.
Nominal value: veff < veff Alarm(1).
Shaft vibrations s.
Nominal value: s < sAlarm(1) .
Noise LPA, summed level (mean value at 1 m distance).
Nominal value: According to regulation(2).
(1)
Alarm and trip values for vibrations according to outline drawing.
(2)
Refer to chapter 2, Safety instructions
(3)
The bearing temperatures measured during mechanical test run do not allow a
reliable assessment of the full load temperatures. It is recommended to adjust the
alarm values not before the real indications are stabilized under full load with
regard to variations of the oil inlet temperature.
The alarm value should be set 5C above the real temperature indication under
full load, the trip value should be set 5C above the alarm value.
The limits given on the outline drawing must not be exceeded.
GB 28 / 38
_0600_01
6.2 Operation
During operation the gearbox should be checked continuously in accordance to
check list C. In the event of substantial deviation from the mentioned operation
parameter, the plant should be switched off immediately and the cause investigated,
in order to prevent a gearbox failure.
Lubrication oil and filter elements should be checked regularly (refer to chapter 7.1).
6.3 Slow down and standstill

Also during the slow down period, the gearbox has to be fed with sufficient lubricant.
The indicated gearbox switch-off pressure, the Plant-Quick-Stop must not be fallen
short of (switch on the auxiliary pump). Check at which oil pressure the auxiliary oil
pump begins to work.
It is recommended to keep running the auxiliary oil pump even after standstill of the
plant until the gearbox and lubricant have considerable cooled down. Thus the
formation of condensed water inside the gearbox will be prevented.
If the standstill period extends over several months, preservation measures will
become necessary for the gearbox (refer to chapter 3.3, Storage).
GB 29 / 38
_0600_01
GB 30 / 38
T0700_01
7 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

For all service and maintenance works, chapter 2, Safety instructions is to be
observed!
NOTE
All maintenance and repair works may only be performed by
competent personnel.
7.1 Inspection and maintenance

7.1.1 Notes for inspection and maintenance
The operating performance of the gearbox or the whole plant is to be submitted to a
continuous monitoring process. Reasonably, this should be realized with a kind of an
automatic system.
Following items have to be noted especially for inspection and maintenance of the
gearbox:
The oil filling of the lube oil system or the system itself should have to be checked.
Any changes are to be reported immediately to the person or authority
responsible for the operation, or if necessary the machinery should be brought to a
standstill immediately!
At continuous operation, the inspection of the whole gearbox (bearings, gearing,
lubricating devices, etc.) is recommended at 2 to 3-year intervals or the adjustment
to inspection schedules of the adjoining machines.
Please be aware that maintenance and repair work may only be performed by
BHS fitters.
CAUTION
Operation faults, which result from inadequate or inappropriate
maintenance, may involve high costs of repair and long standstill
periods.
Spare parts may be ordered using the attached spare parts list (refer to register IV).
For further information please contact the specialists of our service department.
GB 31 / 38
T0700_01
7.1.2 Maintenance of the oil

Quality and maintenance of the oil and fineness of the filters have a positive influence
on the preservation of the failure load stage. Micro filters, mounted in bypass will
increase the durability of the lubrication oil efficiently. It is also useful for a good oil
maintenance to remove the condensation water at the lowest point of the oil tank.
CAUTION
You should pay particular attention to the fact, that no dust penetrates
into the oil system, even during inspection or other times of standstill.
Please bear in mind that the lowest failure load stage required for a
gearbox must be retained practically throughout the whole life of the
lubricating oil.
It has to be ensured that the quality of the oil corresponds over the hole working time
of the gearbox to the data given in chapter 7.1.3.
Because of this the lubrication oil has to be checked and perhaps changed according
to the information given by the manufacturer of the complete plant.
A precise analysis of the oil has to be performed according to the
requirements/recommendations of the oil manufacturer or when color of the oil has
changed substantially or not later than 4000 operation hours.
Following approximate values can be taken for the assessment. But only a detailed
check can show whether single values can be exceeded.
Consistency 10 - 15 % Opposite to origin state
Viscosity 10 - 15 % Opposite to origin state
Neutralizing number Origin value + 0,5 mg KOH/g
Infrared diagram when origin diagram is changed
Impurity min. class of purity /15/12 to ISO 4406
Before filling the oil system, the oil tank, oil filter and the pipes have to be cleaned
thoroughly.
NOTE
Rules for disposal waste of oil and filter elements must be noticed.
GB 32 / 38
T0700_01
7.1.3 Selection of lubricating oils for high capacity gearboxes

Usually the gearbox will operate in a common oil circulation with several machines.
For this reason oil producers developed special types of oil, which become fair the
request of the different applications.
The following points are to be particularly considered:
Oil type Industrial Oil ISO 6743-6
Viscosity See chapter 1.2 ISO 3448
Failure load stage See chapter 1.2 ISO 14635
Flash point > 200C ISO 2592
Additives No zinc-dithiophosphates (ZnDTP)
Undissolved air in oil max. 2 %
supply
CAUTION
A low flash point may result in spontaneous ignition of the lube oil.
NOTE
Obtain written confirmation of the failure load stages of these oils from
your oil supplier.
Higher FZG failure load stages are not disadvantageous for the
gearbox.
The technical services of the oil producers should be included to the lubricating oil
selection. All possible loads soiling the lubricant oil are to be declared to the oil
manufacturer (e.g. condensed water, water vapour, process gases etc.).
CAUTION
Synthetic lubricants may only be used after consultation and permission
of BHS.
For reasons of operation safety no oil containing zinc-dithiophosphate

(ZnDTP) may be used in BHS gearboxes.
Scientific investigations have shown that lubricating oils including the oil additive
zinc-dithiophosphate (ZnDTP) may react with copper in the oil system.
Since the oil circulation system contains copper-bearing items (e.g. oil cooler, copper
plated teeth) resulting deposits may damage the gearbox.
GB 33 / 38
T0700_01
Lubricating oils have to be kept basically in clean closed containers (doses, cans,
barrels) in order to avoid the penetration of dust and humidity into the interior, and to
keep the risk of oxidation with air as low as possible. The storage location should be
dry and cool. Moreover, the instructions of the oil manufacturer should be observed.
7.2 Repair
With the beginning of the repairs is to be waited until oil and gearbox are cooled down
(danger of scalding or burn)!
NOTE
With all repairs, chapter 2 "Safety instructions" is to be particularly
considered.
WARNING
All repairs may be executed only in the standstill of the gearbox. It
must be guaranteed that the plant cannot be set into operation while
working on it.
CAUTION
Larger components or modules are to be fastened carefully to the
lifting device while removing or mounting
Only use suitable and perfect lifting device and lifting attachment!
Stay of persons under the floating load is forbidden!
Additionally to this manual the generally accepted legal and other obligatory
regulations are to be observed for accident prevention.
While standstill of the gearbox a visual check of teeth can be made regarding the
tooth contact pattern and the abrasion. To do this the inspection cover must be
removed and the shafts be turned. The evaluation must be executed by expert
personnel or by our service department.
GB 34 / 38
T0700_01
7.3 Troubleshooting
The following table serves the definition of possibly occurring disturbances at the
gearbox. If disturbances occur during operation, which are not specified in the table,
we recommend to contact our service department.
Fault Possible causes Measures

Oil pressure low - Pump damaged, - Repair pump, check valve or
or irregular Safety valve damaged repair
or not correct adjusted
- Filter clogged - Clean or perhaps change filter
- Air in the inlet pipe - Repair leak
- Oil level low in oil tank - Find cause, refill oil
- Leak in oil pipe - Repair leak
- Oil pressure insufficient - Increase inlet pressure,
perhaps enlarge diaphragm
High bearing - Oil pressure insufficient - Check oil system, increase
temperature in the bearing quantity of oil flow to the
gearbox
- Oil cooling insufficient - Check oil cooling unit,
change heat exchanger
- Misalignment of the shafts - Realign the gearbox
High gearbox - Quantity of oil flow too - Check oil pressure, check
temperature high whether orifice has been
dismounted erroneously
- Oil return insufficient - Enlarge oil return and check
slope of pipe system
- Foaming of lubricant oil - Change oil,
inform oil manufacturer
GB 35 / 38
T0700_01
Fault Possible causes Measures

High vibrations - Failure in balancing - Balance the shaft
- Misalignment - Check alignment
- Deformation of gearbox - Check foundation
housing
- Shaft bent - Check true running of shaft
- Mount spare gear set
- Bearings damaged or - Change bearings
used up
- Tooth system damaged - Mount spare gear set
Unusual noises - Oil pump damaged - Change pump and drive unit
(when directly mounted
pumps are used)
- Toothing damaged - Mount spare gear set
- Bad tooth contact - Check foundation,
pattern new alignment
Tooth damaged - Viscosity of lubricant oil - Change lubricant oil,
(scuffing, insufficient inform the oil manufacturer
corrosion, - chemically aggressive - Analyze oil, change oil,
overheating) constituents in the inform the oil manufacturer
lubricant oil
- Oil supply insufficient - Check oil system, clean nozzle
at gearing orifice
- Dirt in lubricant oil - Clean system and gearbox
Tooth breakage - Bad tooth contact - Check foundation, new

pattern alignment, mount spare gear
set
- Impact load, caused by - Mount spare gear set
foreign matter between
the teeth
- Fatigue damages - Mount spare gear set
GB 36 / 38
_0800_01
8 SPARE PARTS
When placing orders for spare parts, please use the attached spare parts list in
Register IV.
We only give a warranty according to Chapter 1.1 for spare parts and accessories
supplied by us.
We expressly inform you that we do not approve spare parts from other suppliers.
Installing such products therefore can under circumstances impair the safety. We rule
out any liability for damages which result from using non-original spare parts and
accessories.
Please be aware that there are production and delivery specifications for original and
non-original parts and we always offer you spare parts according to the latest
technical standard and legal directives.
For the most prompt processing of your spare parts order the following data should be
quoted:
Serial No. as per nameplate
Type of gearbox as per nameplate
Part-no. according to Register IV
Denomination according to Register IV
Quantity
Likewise for other correspondence, please always quote the serial number of your
gearbox.
Thus the processing of your order will be quickened significantly.
GB 37 / 38
_0800_01
The following is our address for service and spare parts sales:
BHS Getriebe GmbH
"Service Department"
Postfach 12 51
D-87516 Sonthofen
Phone: (0 83 21) 8 02-0

Divisions:
Sales, spare parts: -541
Sending of technicians: -541 or 540
Technical advice: -541
Telefax: +49 8321 / 802-545

eMail: info@bhs-getriebe.de
GB 38 / 38
_Z000_01
II Drawings and alignment

diagram
GB 1/1
Job No.: 518117 Khurais Crude Oil Shipping Pump Aligning Scheme
DRIVE
fixed
Alignment values are constituted of the following components:

(Values are based on a temperature difference of 32,5 C)
Due to housing heat-up Due to bearing

temperature [mm] clearance [mm] Total [mm]
HS shaft: X-direction 0,00 -0,09 X1 = -0,09
Y-direction 0,31 0,19 Y1 = 0,50
LS shaft: X-direction 0,17 -0,03 X2 = 0,14
Y-direction 0,31 0,06 Y2 = 0,37
Lenght Expansion at coupling:

(due to heat up) HS shaft: 0,26 [mm]
LS shaft: 0,25 [mm]
The above given theoretical shaft displacements (radial displacements) are based on the following values :
Alignment temperature (room temperature) 30,0 [C]

Pressure angle of gearing 20,00 []
Bearing clearance of low speed shaft 0,290 - 0,339 [mm]
Bearing clearance of high speed shaft 0,220 - 0,263 [mm]
Oil inlet temperature 50,0 [C]
Oil heat-up temperature 12,5 [C]
BHS Getriebe GmbH 16. Mrz 07 TTA braendl

_E000_01
IV Spare parts
GB 1/1
A
BHS Getriebe GmbH Seite/Page: 1
Ersatzteilestckliste / Spare part List: TURBO-STIRNRADGETRIEBE FD48-3 Z.Nr. 601634900
Schnittzeichnung / Cross Sectional Drawing: 601790400 Auftragsnummer: 518117 / 48330
Pos. Artikel-Nr Stk. Bezeichnung 1 Bezeichnung 2 Material Gewicht Kg/Stck

Pos. Part-no. Qty. Denomination 1 Denomination 2 Material Weight Kg/pc.
0200 602189800 1 RADIALLAGER Z315/225X140 ST/WM 39

RADIAL BEARING
0210 602189801 1 RADIALLAGER Z315/225X140 ST/WM 39
RADIAL BEARING
0220 602190200 1 RADIALLAGER W250/180x160 EINSTELLBAR ST/WM 26,2
RADIAL BEARING
0230 602190201 1 RADIALLAGER W250/180x160 EINSTELLBAR ST/WM 26,2
RADIAL BEARING
0240 004571308 1 AXIALKIPPSEGMENTLAGER-PAAR AK07-178/89X60-BZ 16,1
AXIAL TILTING PAD BEARING PAIR
0260 513937100 1 DICHTRING 355/225X68 ALMG4,5MN 0
SEALING RING
0270 513936900 1 DICHTRING 280/180X64 ALMG4,5MN 5,4
SEALING RING
0410 601677700 1 RADWELLE EINTEILIG M=7 Z=85 18CRNIMO7-6 1738
ONE-PIECE WHEEL SHAFT
0450 601676900 1 RITZELWELLE Z=39 M=7 18CRNIMO7-6 491
PINION SHAFT
0910 101007275 4 WIDERSTANDSTHERMOMETER L1=2500 MM , L2=2800 MM IEC 751 Kl. A 0
RESISTANCE THERMOMETER
0911 101004983 4 WIDERSTANDSTHERMOMETER L1=2000 MM , L2=2300 MM IEC 751 Kl. A 0
0915 101006656 4 WIDERSTANDSTHERMOMETER L1=240 MM,L2=40 MM,LK=200 MM IEC 751 KL. A 0
Ende Druckdatum: 12.04.2007 11:25
TE000_01
Customer procedure no.: 518117

Edition: 2007
Operating instructions
Spare Parts Storage System
BHS Getriebe GmbH

Postfach 1251
D-87516 Sonthofen
Telephone: +49(0)8321-802-200
Fax: +49(0)8321-802-220
Internet: www.bhs-getriebe.de
e-mail: info@bhs-getriebe.de
1 / 17
TE000_01
Contents
1. REVISION INDEX...................................................................................................... 3
2. ABOUT THIS MANUAL ............................................................................................. 4

2.1. Validity 4
2.2. Target audience 4
2.3. Other applicable documents 4
2.4. Symbols and markings 4
3. DESIGNATED USE ................................................................................................... 5
4. SAFETY..................................................................................................................... 6
4.1. Product safety 6
4.2. Safety regulations 6
4.3. Qualification of personnel 6
4.4. Heavy loads 7
4.5. Markings on the product 7
5. TECHNICAL DATA.................................................................................................... 8
6. DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................... 9
7. PACKAGING AND TRANSPORT............................................................................ 10

7.1. Packaging 10
7.2. Symbols on the transport packaging 10
7.3. Transportation of the product 11
8. INSTALLATION AND STORAGE ............................................................................ 12

8.1. Preparations 12
8.2. Storage system installation 12
8.3. Moving / relocating the spare parts storage system 12
8.4. Preservation on delivery 13
8.5. Gas filling 13
8.6. Opening and closing the spare parts storage system; fitting and removing spare parts 14
9. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................... 15

9.1. Faults 17
9.2. Disposal 17
2 / 17
TE000_01
1. REVISION INDEX
Table 1-1: Revision index
Revision Change
00 This manual is a new edition
3 / 17
TE000_01
2. ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This manual is an integral part of the product.
BHS Getriebe GmbH accepts no liability whatsoever and grants no war-
ranty cover for primary damage or secondary damage arising as a result of
non-observance of this manual.
Read the manual carefully before use.
Keep the manual for the entire lifetime of the product.
Keep the manual accessible to operating staff and maintenance per-
sonnel at all times.
Pass the manual on with the product to any subsequent owner or user.
Insert any supplements received from the manufacturer in the manual.
2.1. Validity
This manual applies only to the product named on the front page.
2.2. Target audience

This manual is aimed at qualified professionals who are trained in assem-
bly, commissioning, operating, servicing and decommissioning.
2.3. Other applicable documents

Due notice should be taken of the following documents in addition to the
manual:
List of spare parts
2.4. Symbols and markings
2.4.1. Warning signs
Nature, source and consequences of danger!

SIGNAL WORD
- Action required to avert danger.
4 / 17
TE000_01
2.4.2. Levels of danger on warning signs

Table 2-1: Levels of danger on warning signs
Danger level Likelihood of occurrence Consequences of disregard
Imminent danger Death, serious injury

DANGER
Potential danger Death, serious injury

WARNING
Potential danger Moderate injury

ATTENTION
ATTENTION Potential danger Damage to property
2.4.3. Notes
Tips for simpler work / safe work.
NOTE - Action which can be taken to simplify work / safety meas-
ures.
3. DESIGNATED USE
The spare parts storage system is specifically designed and manufactured
for the parts named in Chapter 5. The spare parts storage system may
therefore be used only for long-term corrosion-resistant storage of these
parts supplied by BHS-Getriebe.
5 / 17
TE000_01
4. SAFETY
4.1. Product safety

BHS Getriebe GmbH products have been developed with reference to the
best available technology and approved safety regulations. Nevertheless,
the use of products developed by BHS Getriebe GmbH may entail danger
to life and limb of the user or third parties or damage to the product and
other material assets.
Do not use the product if it is damaged in any way and handle it cor-
rectly in a safety-conscious manner with due regard for any dangers
and with due reference to the manual.
Arrange for the immediate repair of any faults which may affect the
products safety.
4.2. Safety regulations

The operator of the system is responsible for complying with all the statu-
tory regulations and guidelines.
Product to be commissioned, operated and maintained in accordance
with the following instructions only:
- Manual
- Warning and information signs on the product
- All other operating and assembly instructions pertaining to the sys-
tem
- System-specific stipulations and requirements
- Relevant national and regional regulations, especially explosion
prevention, health & safety, and accident prevention
4.3. Qualification of personnel

Ensure that any work on the product is carried out exclusively by
trained professionals who are also conversant with this manual.
Personnel who are not yet in possession of the relevant qualifications
must be duly trained.
Ensure that the requisite procedures outlined in this manual have been
understood.
6 / 17
TE000_01
4.4. Heavy loads

The heavy weight of the product and its components can give rise to the
following dangers in transit and during assembly:
Danger of being crushed or trapped by moving or toppling

components
ATTENTION - Do not reach between the moving parts
Risk of injury from falling components

- Do not stop or work under suspended loads.
WARNING
4.5. Markings on the product

The following markings are affixed to the product:
LIFT HERE
HANDLE WITH CARE
STORE UNDER ROOF
THIS SIDE UP (for horizontal and vertikal storage)

GROUNDING (if applicable)
PLACE FORK FOR LIFTING HERE
LIFTING LUG FOR HANDLING LID ONLY
LIFTING LUG FOR TURNING CONTAINER AND
VERTICAL TRANSPORT ONLY
HOLE FOR OPTIONAL FIXATION ON FLOOR
READ MANUAL FIRST BEFORE HANDLING CONTAINER
DO NOT OPEN CONTAINER WHEN PRESSURIZED /
PURGE FIRST WITH BREATHABLE AIR BEFORE OPEN CON-
TAINER
FOR TRANSPORT: CLOSE VALVE, MOUNT PROTECTIVE CAP AND
FASTEN FIXATION OF LIQUID-GAS-BOTTLE
GAS-SUPPLY-VALVE, -14NPT
PURGE-CONNECTION FOR NITROGEN AND
DRAIN-VALVE FOR CONDENSED WATER, -14NPT
7 / 17
TE000_01
PURGE-CONNECTION FOR AIR, -14NPT

CONNECTION FOR ADDITITIONAL MONITORINGS, -14NPT
PRESSURE-RELIEF-VALVE
MAX. INFLATE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE 0.2 bar
PRESSURE GAGE

Each place of storage of the spare parts is marked with its BHS-
Getriebe article no and quantity.
5. TECHNICAL DATA
The spare parts storage system may be fitted with the following parts only.
Gas inflation medium............................................................... Nitrogen / air
Size of nitrogen cylinder i.a.w. EN 1442 ................................................. 20 l
Guaranteed service life..................................................................... 3 years
Storage volume (without mounted spare parts) ..................................2,7 m3
Internal operating pressure (overpressure).................................. 0.07 bar g
Relief valve internal pick-up pressure (overpressure)...................0.20 bar g
Total weight (fully fitted)............................................................... 3990 kg
Weight empty............................................................................... 1600 kg
Equipment
Description Quantity article no. Unit weight
[units] BHS-Getriebe [kg]
Gear wheel shaft 1 601677700 1738
Pinion shaft 1 601676900 491
Radial bearing 1 602189800 39
Radial bearing 1 602189801 39
Radial bearing 1 602190200 26,2
Radial bearing 1 602190201 26,2
Tilting-pad thrust bear- 1 004571308 16,1
ing
Seal ring 1 513937100 8,5
Seal ring 1 513936900 5,4
8 / 17
TE000_01
6. Description
Horizontal aspect:
9 1 4 9 11
16
15
8 8
3
2
11 13 14 10 7 5 10 14 12
Vertical aspect:
1. Nameplate
2. Gas-supply-valve
3. Pressure gage
4. Purge connection for air
5. Pressure-relief-valve
6. Purge connection for nitrogen and
drain valve for condensed water
7. Connection for additional monitorings
8. Lifting lugs for transportation in
horizontal position
9. Lifting lugs for handling top half of
storage system only
10. Fork Lift Pocket for forklift truck
transportation in horizontal position
11. Lifting lugs for transportation in
vertical position and for moving /
turning spare parts storage system
12. Possible mounting for nitrogen cylinder
13. Ground thread
14. Hole for optional floor mounting
of spare parts storage system
14 14
15. Joint with bolts and tapered pins
16. Top of storage system
9 / 17
TE000_01
7. PACKAGING AND TRANSPORT
7.1. Packaging
Unless the customer requests otherwise, the product is shipped with no
base and ready for use. Any openings on the product are covered and
padded. Components and accessories which are shipped separately are
packed in wooden crates.
Spare parts are generally preserved with wax-based products, e.g. Tectyl.
They are wrapped in aluminium foil or polythene sheeting and shipped in
wooden crates.
7.2. Symbols on the transport packaging

The following symbols are marked on the base or shipping crate:
Table 7-1: Symbols on the transport packaging
Symbol Meaning
Fragile
Keep dry
Top
Attach here
10 / 17
TE000_01
7.3. Transportation of the product

The spare parts storage system may be transported in horizontal posi-
tion using a suitable crane and attached at the suspension points (8 or
10), or using a forklift truck with the fork arms placed in the designated
recesses (11).
The spare parts storage system may be transported in vertical position
with a suitable crane only, attached at the suspension points (11).
Consult shipping documents for loading gauge and maximum permissi-
ble load on transport vehicle and adhere to the specified limits.
Risk of injury from falling components!

- Use tested and approved load handling equipment only.
- Attach product at designated suspension points only.
WARNING - Use appropriate load-securing devices.
- Do not stand under suspended loads.
Use appropriate load-securing devices, e.g. straps and tie-downs.

Ensure that the product is not exposed to strong fluctuations in tem-
perature.
Handle the product with care in order to protect it from impact damage.
Shock indicators
NOTE - Shock indicators are fitted inside the container. They verify
that the product has been handled correctly.
11 / 17
TE000_01
8. INSTALLATION AND STORAGE
8.1. Preparations
Unpack the spare parts storage system carefully and remove all the
packaging material.
Set the spare parts storage system down on a stable foundation (see
8.2. ff.).
Risk of damage to sensors and other components supplied

loose with the system!
ATTENTION
- Set up the spare parts storage system before mounting the
loose components supplied with the system
8.2. Storage system installation

The spare parts storage system must be installed on a foundation with suf-
ficient load-bearing capacity. The spare parts storage system can be set
up either horizontally or vertically.
The spare parts storage system may be secured to the floor, if preferred,
using the holes provided (14).
8.3. Moving / relocating the spare parts storage system

A suitable crane is required to move the spare parts storage system from
horizontal to vertical position or vice versa. To move the system proceed
as follows:
If a nitrogen cylinder is connected to the spare parts storage system, it
should be clamped firmly to the storage system (12), sealed, and the
cap screwed on. All connections (2, 4 and 6) should be sealed gas-
tight.
Risk of injury from falling components!
-Use tested and approved load handling equipment only.
- Attach product at designated suspension points only.
WARNING
- Do not stand under suspended loads.
Hook the spare parts storage system to two cranes at all four lifting lugs
on the base frame (11) of the storage system.
Hoist the spare parts storage system evenly until there is sufficient
ground clearance to pivot the spare parts storage system.
Pivot the spare parts storage system down on the relevant side until it
is located in the required horizontal or vertical position.
12 / 17
TE000_01
Lower the spare parts storage system down evenly and put it down
gently.
8.4. Preservation on delivery

If stored under cover the corrosion protection lasts approx. three years with
the openings on the storage system closed, with spare parts preserved
with Tectyl (as supplied) and without any additional steps being taken such
as filling with nitrogen.
The service life can be greatly extended by filling the spare parts storage
system with nitrogen. BHS-Getriebe cannot guarantee a longer service life,
however, as this is heavily dependent on the handling, nitrogen charge and
maintenance of the spare parts storage system.
8.5. Gas filling

Please note the following points when filling the system with nitrogen:
The storage system is designed for a differential pressure of

NOTE
0.35 bar
8.5.1. Flushing the storage system

First action is to adjust the needle of the pressure gauge to the 0 of the
clock-face (see operating instructions of the pressure gauge).
In order to ensure that the storage system contains only nitrogen (when
charging the spare parts storage system with nitrogen) or air (when open-
ing the spare parts storage system) it must be flushed with the appropriate
medium for approx. five minutes at approx. 0.1 bar g.
Risk of suffocation from leaking nitrogen
- This process may only be carried out in well-ventilated
rooms or outdoors as there is a risk of suffocation from an
WARNING
excessive concentration of nitrogen in the inhaled air!
Connect all the controls and measuring instruments and check for leaks
and correct operation.
Risk of injury from incorrect handling
- All the connections are clearly marked on the storage
ATTENTION system and may be used for the intended purpose only.
When flushing the spare parts storage system in closed rooms a suit-
able hose should be connected to the flushing point (6 or 4) in order to
route the purging gas outside.
13 / 17
TE000_01
Secure the nitrogen cylinder to the storage system (12), fit valves, con-
nect nitrogen cylinder to the gas supply valve (2) and check for leaks
Open the nitrogen cylinder and gas supply valve (2) carefully and set
output pressure to approx. 0.1 bar g.
- Open the purging gas connection for nitrogen / condensate drain
valve (6) as well when flushing with nitrogen.
- Open the purging gas connection for air (4) as well when flushing
with air.
After the flushing process close the nitrogen cylinder and gas supply
valve (2).
Act swiftly to remove any hoses which had to be attached and to seal
the flushing pipe connection gas-tight with the relevant plugs or shut-off
valve.
8.5.2. Filling the storage system with air / nitrogen

Secure the nitrogen cylinder to the storage system (12), fit valves, con-
nect nitrogen cylinder to the gas supply valve (2) and check for leaks
Open the nitrogen cylinder and gas supply valve (2) carefully and set
output pressure to approx. 0.07 bar g.
8.6. Opening and closing the spare parts storage system; fitting and remov-
ing spare parts
Danger of falling components

- Spare parts may only be removed and fitted with the system in
WARNING the horizontal position.
Risk of injury from projectile parts
- Do not open the storage system when pressurised.
ATTENTION - Ensure that the storage system is filled with air at ambient
pressure.
Remove all the tapered pins from the joint (15).
Undo all the bolts on the joint (15).
Attach the top of the storage system (16) to the crane at the designated
points (9).
Arise the top of the storage system (16) carefully and vertically.
Set down the top of the storage system (16) on a secure foundation.
14 / 17
TE000_01
Attach the spare part for removal to the crane at the designated points.
Open the relevant clamp of the spare part being removed and take the
spare part out with care.
Close the spare parts storage system in the reverse order to opening it.
Once the storage system has been sealed gas-tight it can be flushed
and refilled with nitrogen as outlined above.
Risk of injury from overturning of spare parts storage
system
- Changes to the contents of the spare parts storage system
ATTENTION also affect the position of its overall centre of gravity (stabil-
ity).
9. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

The spare parts storage system must be regularly serviced to keep it in
good working order and prolong its service life.
The following services and inspections should be carried out at appropriate
intervals:
Check spare parts storage system for damage.
Check internal pressure of storage container.
Check condition of nitrogen gas cylinder.
Check condition of spare parts held in spare parts storage container.
Check whether condensate has formed inside the storage container.
Should this be the case, drain it off via the condensate drain valve (6)
and dispose of it properly.
Gas will escape with the condensate. The gas must be refilled
NOTE
after the draining process (see 8.4.2.).
15 / 17
TE000_01
The gas outlet of the pressure-relief-valve (see Pt. 6 Pos. 5) is pro-

tected with a balloon against penetration of humidity and contaminants
(sand, dust) When the release pressure of the pressure-relief-valve is
exceeded, the blown-off gas out of the spare parts container will be col-
lected inside the balloon. This gas has to be discharged to avoid burst-
ing of the balloon time by time. Therefore the hose clamp, fixing the bal-
loon, has to be released and the gas has to be discharged carefully.
Thereafter the hose clamp has to be tightened again.
In case of a defect balloon, the balloon has to be replaced immediately
to ensure reliability of the pressure-relief-valve.
This process may only be conducted in well vented rooms or

ATTENTION
outdoors.
The inspection intervals depend on, e.g.:

the ambient conditions in the location in which the storage system is lo-
cated,
variations in temperature,
the target preservation time,
the type of pressurisation (permanent setting or periodic pressure ad-
justment),
whether the storage container is filled with nitrogen or ambient air,
the relative humidity of the ambient air in the latter case.
BHS-Getriebe is not fully au fait with the ambient and operating conditions
on site. It is therefore incumbent on the operator of the spare parts storage
system to specify the service intervals and monitoring procedures and to
draw up a maintenance schedule and oversee its implementation.
However, the first inspection of the above-mentioned points must be car-
ried out upon expiry of the three-year warranty period.
Malfunctions which arise as a result of insufficient and improper

NOTE
maintenance can lead to high repair costs and long downtimes.
It is advisable to fill the storage system with nitrogen continually and to
monitor the internal pressure permanently online, preferably electronically
as well. The storage system has an additional connection for this purpose
which can take such measuring instruments (7).
16 / 17
TE000_01
9.1. Faults
If faults occur during operation please contact the service department of
BHS Getriebe GmbH.
9.2. Disposal
Dispose of housing parts, gearwheels and shafts as steel scrap. This
includes grey cast iron parts unless there is a separate collection for
these.
Dispose of seal rings and slide bearings as nonferrous heavy metal.
Collect any condensate and dispose of it in line with the relevant legis-
lation.
Adhere to all the relevant national regulations and legal requirements
governing disposal.
17 / 17
Document No: HydroEq 01

Section 10 Hydraulic Assembly / Removal Revision: 0
Equipment Revision Date: 26 Apr 2002
10 Hydraulic Assembly / Removal Equipment
The hydraulic assembly / removal equipment manufacturers information is included next as

an insert to the manual.
K:\Module Update\S10 HydroEq 01-0.doc

Inner Core
Outer Cover Pressure Support Polyoxymethylene (POM)
Polyamide (PA) 4 layers of high-tensile steel wire
Working Temperature -22 F to 140 F [ -30C to +60C ] Color: grey, other colors upon request
Working Min. Burst Min. Bend

ID OD Weight
Pressure Pressure Radius
0.20 inch 0.44 inch 26100 psi 65250 psi 6 inch 0.175 lbs/ft
5.0 mm 11.2 mm 1800 bar 4500 bar 150 mm 0.260 Kg/m
H
L HP-Fitting Type M female swivel

8
5 58
F F
N N
U
U
BSP male fitting BSP female swivel

wrench flat
NPT male fitting
4
2
P wrench flat P
S S
NPT
B
B
thread size
1/4"x28UNF LH 3/8"x24UNF LH 9/16"x18UNF LH
HP-Fitting S* C/S* C/S
9/16"x18UNF
Type M female swivel C/S
G1/4"
BSP male fitting C
1/4" NPT
NPT male fitting C
G1/4"
BSP female swivel C/S
C= available in carbon steel S= available in stainless steel
* = Waterblast Nipple
The safety factor between burst pressure and working pressure is rated at 2.5 to 1. Depending on various operating conditions, this
factor can vary. Please contact your SPIR STAR representative.
We reserve the right to change wihtout notice.
Inner Core
Outer Cover Pressure Support Polyoxymethylene (POM)
Polyamide (PA) 4 layers of high-tensile steel wire
Working Temperature -22 F to 140 F [ -30C to +60C ] Color: grey, other colors upon request
Working Min. Burst Min. Bend

ID OD Weight
Pressure Pressure Radius
0.25 inch 0.50 inch 21750 psi 55100 psi 7 inch 0.198 lbs/ft
6.3 mm 12.6 mm 1500 bar 3800 bar 180 mm 0.295 Kg/m
L HP-Fitting Type M female swivel NPT male fitting

58 wrench flat
F
8
5 F
NPT
N
N U
U
thread size
3/8"x24UNF LH
HP-Fitting S*
9/16"x18UNF
Type M female swivel C/S
1/4" NPT
NPT male fitting C
C= available in carbon steel S= available in stainless steel
* = Waterblast Nipple
The safety factor between burst pressure and working pressure is rated at 2.5 to 1. Depending on various operating conditions, this
factor can vary. Please contact your SPIR STAR representative.
We reserve the right to change without notice.

Crude Pump Installation Manual SULZER PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Crude Pump Installation Manual SULZER PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Document No: 48330 Lead 01

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual

Site Aramco - Khurais

Crude Oil Shipping Pumps

Equipment Hazardous Area Classification

Sulzer Pumps (UK) Ltd.

Document No: 48330 Lead 01

1. Leading Particulars (48330 Lead 01-0)

2. Introduction and General Safety (IntroSafety 01-3)

Manual No. 104.471.646 Contents Page 1

Document No: 48330 Lead 01

4. Mechanical Seal and Associated Equipment (MecSeal 01-0)

5. Drive Coupling (DriveCplg 01-0)

Manual No. 104.471.646 Contents Page 2

Document No: 48330 Lead 01

6. Drive Motor (DriveMotor 01-0)

Manual No. 104.471.646 Contents Page 3

Document No: 48330 Lead 01

7. Instrumentation (Insts 01-0)

8. Lubricating Oil System

To Be Inserted When Available

BHS - High Speed Parallel Shaft Gear Unit Manual

10. Hydraulic Assembly / Removal Equipment

Tentec - Safety Data Sheet - Castrol Hyspin AWS 32

Manual No. 104.471.646 Contents Page 4

Document No: 48330 Lead 01

1.1 List of Equipment Supplied

Manual No. 104.471.646 Section 1 Page 1

Document No: 48330 Lead 01

1 x 0-40,000 lbf/in2 hydraulic hand pump with integral gauge calibrated in

Manual No. 104.471.646 Section 1 Page 2

Document No: 48330 Lead 01

1.2 Sulzer Drawings and Documents

Description Sulzer Document

General Arrangement 0-104.430.195

Equipment Arrangement 0-104.430.357

Longitudinal Section 1-104.421.869

Instrument Schedule (12 Sheets) 4-104.475.504

Cause and Effect Diagram (4 Sheets) 4-104.476.099

Control System Description (9 Sheets) 4-104.476.133

Name / Duty Plate Drawing 3-204.231.624

Operating Spare Parts List E13803

Manual No. 104.471.646 Section 1 Page 3

Contract on 13.11.2007 Contract on 13.11.2007

Contract on 01.10.2007 Contract on 01.10.2007

Contract on 01.10.2007 Contract on 01.10.2007

Drawing No. E1-104.430.193

MAIN DRIVE MOTOR (COUPLING GUARD) 1" 1"

CRUDE OIL SHIPPING PUMP

2. ALL TAG NUMBERS HAVE THE FIRST SUFFIX LETTER

TERMINATION POINT SCHEDULE

ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS SEP.PARTS LIST YES/NO DESIGN GROUP

SIMILAR DRG. . a REFER TO REVISION NOTES. Sheet 01

Drawing No. E1-104.430.193

RUNNING STOPPED AVAILABLE LAMP TEST HAND/OFF/AUTO START STOP

MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (MCC)

(SPARE) (SPARE) (SPARE)

B MOTOR WINDINGS TP1 B

MAIN DRIVE MOTOR (COUPLING GUARD)

PRIMARY LOCATED SHARED

TERMINATION POINT SCHEDULE

ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS SEP.PARTS LIST YES/NO DESIGN GROUP

SIMILAR DRG. . Sheet 02